Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Specs
UNISPEC II -STORE PLANNING LK-Architecture, Inc 345 Riverview, Suite 200 Wichita, KS 67203 UniSpec II -Store Planning112219 PROJECT MANUAL WAL-MART SUPERCENTER REMODEL Blair,NE Store Number:04568-221 Project Number:20320 05/19/2021 For WAL-MART STORES, INC. STORE PLANNING 2608 SE J Street Bentonville, Arkansas 72716-0310 LK-Architecture, Inc David L. Hoffman, FAIA 345 Riverview, Suite 200 Wichita, KS 67203 UniSpecDOCUMENT 00007 -SEALS PAGE ARCHITECT OF RECORD Architect of Record David L. Hoffman, FAIA 345 Riverview Street, Suite 200 Wichita, KS 67203 Architect of RecordDate 00007-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 SEALS PAGE (Continued) SITEWORK ENGINEERING CONSULTANT OF RECORD Refer to Sitework Consultant Sections (Printed on Yellow Paper) Table of Contents for seal and signature of Sitework Consultant Engineer of Record. Rick G. Rohlfing, P.E. 103 Elm Street Washington, MO 63090 00007-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 SEALS PAGE (Continued) STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD Structural Engineer of Record Carrie J. Johnson, P.E. 123 N. Martin Luther King Jr. Blvd. Tulsa, OK 74103 Structural Engineer of RecordDate 00007-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 SEALS PAGE (Continued) MECHANICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD Mechanical Engineer of Record Bryan R. Ward, P.E. 345 Riverview Street, Suite 200 Wichita, KS 67203 Mechanical Engineer of RecordDate 00007-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 SEALS PAGE (Continued) ELECTRICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD Electrical Engineer of Record Taylor Lewis, P.E. 345 Riverview Street, Suite 200 Wichita, KS 67203 Electrical Engineer of RecordDate 00007-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 SEALS PAGE (Continued) FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER OF RECORD Fire Protection Engineer of Record Ricky N. Terrell, P.E. nd 1805 N. 2Street, Suite 5543 Rogers, AR 72756 Fire Protection Engineer of RecordDate 00007-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 SEALS PAGE (Continued) REFRIGERATION ENGINEER OF RECORD Refrigeration Engineer of Record David P. Kimball, P.E. nd 1805 N. 2Street, Suite 5238 Rogers, AR 72756 Refrigeration Engineer of RecordDate END OF DOCUMENT 00007-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning032621 SECTION 00010 -TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00001Project Title Page 00007Seals Page 00010Table of Contents BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Bidding Requirements (including Invitation to Bids, Instructions to Bidders, and Bid Forms) may be obtained through the on-line Wal-Mart Bidding System and are not included in the Project Manual. CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Contracting Requirements (including Construction Contract Between Wal-Mart and Contractor, Bond, and Certificate Forms) are issued by the Owner (Wal-Mart) under separate cover and are not included in the Project Manual. DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100Summary 01131Alterations Project Procedures 01230Alternates 01255Request For Information 01310Construction Management and Coordination 01312Progress Meetings 01320Construction Progress Documentation 01330Submittal Procedures 01351Regulatory Compliance 01452Contractor’s Quality Control 01454Architect-Engineer Quality Assurance 01457Testing and Inspection by Owner 01500Temporary Facilities and Controls 01550Tension Pole Dust BarrierSystems 01600Product Requirements 01700Execution Requirements 01731Cutting and Patching 01740Cleaning 01770Contract Closeout DIVISION 2 -SITE CONSTRUCTION 02023Selective Site Demolition 02251Shoring 02320Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting 02765Pavement Markings 02787Seal Coat 02821Chain Link Fences and Gates (Building Related) 02845Cart Corrals DIVISION 2.1 -CIVIL SITE CONSTRUCTION (By Civil Engineer of Record) The Sections within this Division and other Divisions listed within the Sitework Specifications Table of Contents page are the responsibility of the Civil Engineer. The Engineering Consultant, the seal and license number of the 00010-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Professional Engineer registered in the State where the project is located, are also shown on the Sitework Specifications Table of Contents page. DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE 03310Structural Concreteand Exterior Concrete Slabs 03366PVC/VCT Removal and Polished Concrete Floor Finishes for Interior Slabs 03905Interior Concrete Slab Repairsand Joint Filler Replacement 03931Interior Concrete Slab Surface Enhancement DIVISION 4 -MASONRY 04200Unit Masonry Assemblies 04910Masonry Restoration and Repair DIVISION 5 -METALS 05090Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors 05400Cold Formed Metal Framing 05500Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 -WOOD AND PLASTICS 06065Plastic Materials 06100Rough Carpentry 06165Fiberboard Panels 06200Finish Carpentry 06400Architectural Woodwork 06424Protective Surfacing 06610Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic DIVISION 7 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210Building Insulation 07243Water-Drainage Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS) 07530Elastomeric Membrane Roofing 07620Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07721Manufactured Curbs 07840Firestopping 07900Joint Sealers DIVISION 8 -DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110Steel Doors and Frames 08411Aluminum Framed Storefronts 08462Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors 08710Door Hardware 08800Glazing DIVISION 9 -FINISHES 09250Gypsum Board 09511Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09655Resilient Base and Accessories 09656Recycled Rubber Commercial Flooring 09680Carpet 09900Paints and Coatings DIVISION 10 -SPECIALTIES 10146Exterior Signage 10260Wall and Corner Guards 00010-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12 -FURNISHINGS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13810Building AutomationSystem (BAS) DIVISION 13.1 -FIRE PROTECTION (ByFire Protection Engineer of Record) The Sections within this Division are the responsibility of the Fire Protection Engineer. The Engineering Consultant, the seal and license number of the Professional Engineer registered in the State where the project is located, are also shown on the Seals Page. 13900Fire Suppression DIVISION 14 -CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL (By M.E.P. Engineer of Record) The Sections within this Division are the responsibility of the Mechanical Engineer. The Engineering Consultant, the seal and license number of the Professional Engineer registered in the State where the project is located, are also shown on the Seals Page. 15050Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15100Building Services Pipingand Equipment 15410Plumbing Fixtures 15600Refrigeration Systems DIVISION 16 -ELECTRICAL (By M.E.P. Engineer of Record) The Sections within this Division are the responsibility of the Electrical Engineer. The Engineering Consultant, the seal and license number of the Professional Engineer registered in the State where the project is located, are also shown on the Seals Page. 16050Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16100Wiring Methods 16410Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16500Lighting 16700Communications OWNER FURNISHED REFERENCES Appendix AProducts and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor Appendix B Testing, Inspection, and Observation by Owner END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Planning113018 SECTION 01100 -SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Definitions. 2.Work covered by Contract Documents. 3.Work by Walmartor Separate Contractors. 4.Contractor use of site and premises. 5.Coordination with occupants. 6.Partial occupancy. 1.2REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A.Applicability: The publications listed in the REFERENCES paragraph of an individual sectionshall applyonly to the extent referencedwithin the text of that section. Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent re- quirements, applicable construction industry standards form a part of thesespecificationand have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents. Publications are referencedwithin the text by the basic designation only. B. Publication Dates: Standards and publications referenced in the Specifications shall mean the latest edition as of the date of commencement of the Work as stated in Paragraph 3.1.4 of the Construction Contract between Walmart and Contractor unless otherwise specifically dated. C.Copies of Standards: Owner or the Architect will not provide copies of references cited within the specifications. Copies may be obtained directly from publication source. 1.3DEFINITIONS A.Furnish: Purchase and deliver to project site, ready for installation. B.Install: Unpack, assemble, set in final position, fasten in place, make final connections, clean, adjust, and leave ready for use. C.Provide: Furnish and install. D.Receive: Accepting a delivery. (Entity responsible for accepting a delivery.) E.Final Connections: Complete plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections as required and recommended by manufacturer for optimum operation of equipment. 1.4WORK BY WALMARTOR SEPARATE CONTRACTORS A.Walmart has its own forces who will perform certain Work on the project, items noted 'NIC' (Not In Contract) which will commence as indicated on the Construction Schedule. B.Walmart may award separate contracts for work at the Site, which will be executed concurrent with work of this Contract. Consult and cooperate with Separate Contractors to the full extent provided for in the Construction Contract between Walmart and Contractor.Work by separate contractors is specified in Appendix A. C.During setup of equipment by the Owner or separate contractors, make crane service available to hoist equipment directly from trucks to final position. Coordinate schedule with the Walmart Construction Manager. 01100-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.5CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A.Limit use of site to allow for: 1.Walmart occupancy. 2.Work by separate contractors and by Walmart. 3.Use of site and premises by the public. B.Confine operations at site to areas permitted by Law, Ordinances, Permits and to Limits of Contract as shown on Contract Documents. Verify with Walmart Construction Manager acceptable locations where operations may occur so as not to disturb Owner operations or customer traffic. C.Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials or equipment. D.Do not load structure with weight that will endanger structure. DO NOT STORE ROOFING MATERIALS ON THE EXISTING ROOF. E.Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of all products stored on premises whether purchased by Contractor or Owner. Move stored products, which interfere with operations of Owner or customer traffic. F.Carefully coordinate sequence of construction activity and operations with Walmart Construction Manager. G.Maintain the following conditions at all times during the construction period until possession by Walmart. 1.Maintain building weathertight and secure. 2.Maintain building security and fire alarm systems in operation. (In the event both systems should fail, the Fire Alarm System shall have priority over the Security System.) a.Contract with local alarm company to maintain service, and repair existing systems as required due to work relating to this Contract. b.Alarm Company: 1)Visit site and be familiar with existing conditions. 2)Respond to service calls within 24 hours. c.Provide on-site guard services in the event the existing system is disabled for 8 hours or more. d.Coordinate security alarm with Section 01500 -Temporary Facilities and Controls. e.Contact WalmartAlarm Central Control at (479) 273-4600 for additional information and coordination relating to work associated with existing alarm systems. 3.Maintain access and egress from the building. 1.6COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A.Owner will occupy premises during entire period of construction for the conduct of Owner's normal, daily operations. Cooperate with Walmart Construction Manager in construction operations to minimize delays, inconvenience, or conflict to Owner's daily business operations and customer traffic. The Contractor shall obtain permission from the Owner for interruptions of utility services to the building. Accidental interruptions shall be restored immediately. 1.Any Contractor work operations that may disrupt or interfere with Wal-Mart or building operation or function shall be reviewed and approved by Walmart Construction Manager. 2.Submit written request for approval to Walmart Construction Manager 14 calendar days in advance of date Contractor work operations are required to begin. 1.7PARTIAL OCCUPANCY A.Walmartwill occupy any completed or partially completed portions of the Work. B.Cooperate with Walmart to minimize conflict, and schedule the Work to facilitate Walmartoperations. C.Prior to Walmartoccupancy in areas of new work, the following provisions shall be in place: 1.Illuminated exit signs are operational. 2.Exit doors, including required panic hardware, are operational. 01100-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.Lighted, enclosed walkways and other temporary safety measures are in place if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 4.Fire sprinkler system is operational. 5.Doors required for Walmartsecurity purposes are operational. D.After Walmartoccupancy: 1.Keep exit routes and exit doors free from obstructions. 2.Maintain exit signs and fire sprinkler system in operational condition. 3.Provide security for Walmartproducts, equipment, and operations. 4.Do not permit smoking in the building. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01100-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Planning062615 SECTION 01131 -ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1DESCRIPTION A.Summary: The procedures and administrative requirements of this Section apply to all of the following Sections of the Specification, which are involved in alterations to the existing building. 1.2RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01351-Regulatory Compliance. B.Section 01500 -Temporary Facilities and Controls C.Section 01731 -Cutting and Patching D.Section 02023 -Selective Site Demolition E.Section 02251 -Shoring 1.3SCHEDULING, ACCESS AND SECURITY A.Work Sequence: 1.The existing premises will be occupied during the construction process. Coordinate sequence of work with Wal-MartConstruction Manager and Store Manager on site in order that Wal-Mart's operations may continue. 2.The Wal-MartConstruction Manager will require a job start meeting prior to any Work activity. 3.The Construction Schedule is limited to a time frame established by Wal-Mart. Contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager immediately if, at any time, construction schedule is not being met or if delays are foreseen. 4.The Contractor shall develop a schedule of Work, which will be reviewed and approved by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, describing the starting and completion dates of the different phases of this Project. Wal-Martreserves the right to revise this schedule to best meetthe needs for the Store’s operations. Revisions to the Construction Schedule shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to Wal-Mart. As the construction progresses, the Contractor shall give an update of the construction schedule to the Store Manager and Wal-MartConstruction Manager on a weekly basis. B.Security is specified in Section 01500. C.Maintenance of Access and Operations: 1.During period of construction, Wal-Martwill continue to perform normal activities in existing building. Maintain proper and safe Customer and Associates access to operational areas at all times. 2.Schedule demolition and remodeling operations with Wal-MartConstruction Manager and/or Store Manager in such a manner as to allow Wal-Martoperations to continue with approved interruptions. 3.During period of construction, do not obstruct in any manner existing exitways unless additional exitways are provided. Prior to removal of existing exitways (stairs, corridors, doors) as part of new Work, provide and maintain new exitways so as to maintain same number of exitways. Maintain existing fire doors in a operable condition. Obtain approval from Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for all temporary modifications to the existing system. D.Maintenance of Existing Services 1.Maintain environmental control in existing building, especially temperature, humidity and dust control. 2.Provide temporary power, services and connections as required to maintain existingmechanical and electrical services in building. 01131-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.Notify Wal-MartStore Manager and Construction Manager a minimum of three (3) days prior to each required interruption of mechanical or electrical services in building. Such interruptions shall be only at such times and for lengths of time as approved by the Wal-MartConstruction Manager and/or Store Manager. In no event shall interruption occur without prior approval of the Wal-MartConstruction Manager and/or Store Manager. E.Building Access/Construction Personnel Control. 1.Access to construction areas within building shall be as directed by Wal-MartConstruction Manager. 2.Restrict construction traffic to areas specifically designated by Wal-MartConstruction Manager. 3.Refer to Section 01351 for Contractor BadgeSystem and access control requirements. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01131-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Planning062615 SECTION 01230 -ALTERNATES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Alternate submission requirements of work included in Alternates. B.Related Sections: 1.Construction Contract Between Wal-Mart and Contractor: Acceptance of Alternates in award of a Contract. 1.2DEFINITIONS A.Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated and defined on the Bid Form for certain work that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Wal-Mart decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amountof construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1.Alternates will be a part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2.The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.3PROCEDURES A.Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. B.Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. 1.4SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A.Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted alternates will be identified in the Construction Contract between Wal-Mart and Contractor. 1.5SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK INCLUDED IN ALTERNATES. A.Schedule of Alternates, when applicable, and descriptions thereof are shown on the Bid Form. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01230-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Planning113018 SECTION 01255-REQUEST FOR INFORMATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Requests for Information (RFI) procedures. 1.2DEFINITION A.Requests for Information: A formal online process used during the construction phase to facilitate communication between the Contractor, the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, and the Professional of Record with regard to requests for additional information and clarification of the intent of the Contract Documents (Drawings and Specifications). B.Professional of Record: The Architectof Record (AOR) or the Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC). C.Architect of Record (AOR): The prime consultant in charge of overall design and coordination of the project. The AOR will be the administrator for all construction RFIs classified as "BLDG". D.Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the civil design for the project. The CEC will be the administrator for sitework RFIs classified as "SITE". 1.3REQUEST FOR INFORMATION SUBMITTAL A.Submit requests for information for conditions requiring clarification of the Contract Documents on Wal-Mart Construction RFI website as designated by Wal-Mart. (www.bldgportal.com, enter username and password, select Construction RFI). Professional of Recordwill not respond to requests for informationunless this format is utilized and all appropriate information is provided. Faxed or e-mailed RFIs will not be reviewed. B.Do not useRequest for Information process during bidding phase. For questions during bidding phase, refer to Invitation to Bid issued by Wal-Mart Contract Administrator. C.Submit in accordance with procedure as follows: (See Process Flow Chart at the end of this Section) 1.Subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers shall submit request for additional information and clarification to Contractor. 2.Contractor shall contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager with requests for additional information or clarification. Wal-Mart Construction Manager will not accept requests for information or clarification submitted directly from subcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers. 3.Wal-Mart Construction Manager will provide response to Contractor or will direct Contractor to submit a formal Request for Information. a.Submit a formal RFI only if authorized by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Submittal to Construction RFI website signifies authorization has been given. b.Generate Requests for Information by one source per project. c.Submit one request for information per website entry. 4.Professional of Recordwill review formal requests from Contractor and provide response within 2working days. 5.Professional of Record's response shall not be considered as a Change Order or Change Directive, nor does itauthorize changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. D.Scheduling, Costing, and Owner Provided Equipment Coordination: Direct to the Owner's Construction Manager. 1.4PENALTY FOR FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURE 01255-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.A $250 administrative cost will be assessed to the Contractor for each Request for Information submitted which does not follow the procedure specified above. 1.5REIMBURSEMENT FOR ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING FEES A.The Contractor shall be chargedadministrative costs and professional fees incurred by Wal-Mart for additional Architectural and Engineering services associated with the correction of completed Work which is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. Refer to Paragraph 8.7of theConstructionContract between Wal-Mart and Contractorfor provisions relating to correction of Work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01255-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION PROCESS FLOW CHART WAL-MART STORES, SUPERCENTER, SAM’S CLUB, NEIGHBORHOOD MARKET Subcontractor, manufac- turer, supplier, or other party submits request for information to Contractor Contractor contactsWal-Mart Construction Wal-Mart Construction Wal-Mart Construction Manager authorizesCon- Manager provides response Manager(CM) with re-tractor to submit formal to Contractor quest for information. CM Request for Information to will provide response or Wal-Mart Construction authorize Formal RFI.RFI website Contractor submits Re- quest for Information to Professional of Recordon Wal-Mart Professional of Recordno- tifies appropriate consultant for response on Construc- tion RFI Website Consultantanswers RFI on Construction RFI Website Contractor issues response Professional of Recordis- to subcontractor, manufac-sues response to Contractor turer, supplier, or other on Construction RFI Web- party.site 01255-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 HVAC/REFRIGERATION/EMS REQUEST FOR INFORMATION PROCESS FLOW CHART WAL-MART STORES, SUPERCENTER, SAM’S CLUB, Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or other party sub- mits request for information to Contractor Contractor contactsWal-MartMechanical Ser- Wal-Mart Mechanical Ser- Wal-Mart Mechanical Ser-vicesConstruction Man- vices Construction Man- vices Construction Manager ager authorizesContractor ager provides response to (MSCM) with request for to submit formal Request Contractor information. MSCM will for Information to Wal- provide response or author-Mart Construction RFI ize Formal RFI.website Contractor submits Re- quest for Information to Professional of Recordon Wal-Mart Professional of Recordno- tifies appropriate consultant for response on Construc- tion RFI Website Consultantanswers RFI on Construction RFI Website Contractor issues response Professional of Recordis- to subcontractor, manufac-sues response to Contractor turer, supplier, or other on Construction RFI Web- party.site 01255-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning113018 SECTION 01310 -CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Project Management and Coordination: a.Definitions b.Construction Manager c.Project Coordination B.Related Requirements: 1.Construction Contract between Walmartand Contractor: Owner’s Construction Manager’s rights and scope of authority. 1.2DEFINITIONS A.Separate Contractor: A contractor (subcontractor, specialty contractor or vendor) hired separately by Walmartand outside of General Contractor’s Construction Contract. B.WalmartConstruction Manager: The Walmart(Owner’s) representative in all matters relating to the Work of the Project. The person responsible for all approvals with the General Contractor. This person also coordinates with the Separate Contractors and the WalmartStore Planning Field Project Manager. C.WalmartStore Planning Field Project Manager: Walmart-designated personnel who represents Walmartduring the Store Remodel. This person coordinates receipt of Walmart-furnished items, coordinates moves of set up team, and assists in prioritizing work of Walmartforces at the site. 1.3WALMARTCONSTRUCTION MANAGER A.Walmartwill assign this project to a WalmartConstruction Manager. B.Cooperate with the WalmartConstruction Manager in all matters relating to the Work on this project. C.During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the WalmartConstruction Manager. D.Comply with WalmartConstruction Manager's procedures for project communications, reports and records, and coordination with drawings, and comply with recommendations and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. E.Comply with instructions of the WalmartConstruction Manager for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. F.Coordinate use of site during Walmartfixture setup work under instructions of the WalmartConstruction Manager. 1.4RESPONSIBILITIES OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND SEPARATE CONTRACTORS A.The General Contractor shall provide necessary forces and subcontractors to complete the Work of the Project as described in the Contract Document (Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, and other modifications to the Contract). He is responsible for the supervision, quality control and costs for his employees and subcontractors. 01310-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.The General Contractor and Separate Contractors will provide a Construction Schedule to the WalmartConstruction Manager for review and approval. The Contractors shall immediately contact the WalmartConstruction Manager if the Work does not progress as scheduled.It is imperative that the Contractors keep close communication with the WalmartConstruction Manager regarding the progress of the Project. C.At the commencement of construction, the WalmartConstruction Manager, WalmartStore Manager, General Contractor, Separate Contractors and the Store Planning Field Project Manager will review the Construction Schedule. The Construction Schedule is set up on a weekly basis and must be followed unless deviations are authorized by the WalmartConstruction Manager. (Refer to Section 01500 for posting of schedule.) D.The General Contractor and Separate Contractors shall communicate at all times with the Store Manager, other Subcontractors and the Store Planning Field Project Manager to facilitate the construction and ensure it is completed within the approved time schedule. E.Upon completion of a portion of the Work (Item, Trade, etc.), that portion of the Work must be 100% complete prior to proceeding to the next phase or portion of Work. F.The General Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the Remodel work of all Separate Contractors with the WalmartConstruction Manager and the WalmartStore Manager. G.The Construction Manager will determine what work shall be done during normal operating hours (store hours) and during "closing" hours. H.The General Contractor will coordinate with the Store Planning Field Project Manager the delivery of Walmart- furnished items. I.The General Contractor shall also be responsible for coordinating the location of storage trailers/containers for Contractor-supplied materials and equipment. (Refer to Section 01500). The General Contractor shall be responsible for permits required for temporary storage facilities (trailers/containers). J.Walmartwill not be responsible for the loss of any tools or equipment. Walmartwill also not be responsible for the cost of any rental tools. This is each Contractor's responsibility and should be included in his price proposal. K.Contractors shall not open any type of charge account within the Store and store markdowns will not be allowed. All items purchased in the Store shall be paid for at the time of purchase. Contractors should not receive any discounts for any items purchased within the Store. The use of Walmart's name will not be allowed on any accounts. L.Contractors shall comply with Walmartpolicy regarding gratuities. No Contractor may receive any gratuities from any company providing services or materials for any WalmartProjects. Contractors are not entitled to receive any employee benefits from Walmart. M.The General Contractor shall be responsible for timely removal of the construction trailer as directed by the Walmart Construction Manager. N.Walmartmay provide Store Associates as required to assist the General Contractor and Separate Contractors in the remodeling. The WalmartStorePlanning Field Project Manager will determine the number of Store Associates that will be provided on a job basis. WalmartStore Associates shall not be allowed to operate power equipment, be used as carpenters, or perform work from scaffolds, ladders or hoists. O.The General Contractor and Separate Contractors are responsible for obtaining a final inspection from the appropriate Building Official or Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). If a Certificate of Occupancy is required, obtain it from the proper authorities. A copy of all final inspection documentation or Certificates of Occupancy shall be included in the final Closeout Documents (Maintenance Book/Closeout Book). 1.5RESPONSIBILITIES OF WALMART 01310-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.The WalmartStore Planning Field Project Manager shall be responsible for the following construction coordination items: 1.Supervision and coordination of Store Associates assisting with construction. 2.Unloading of fixture trucks and the organization of the off site warehouse. 3.Transportation of certain Walmart-provided materials required for construction from the warehouse to the Store. 4.Supervise the movement of Store merchandise and fixtures as required for the painting, flooring, ceiling, carpentry and WalmartSeparate Contractors. 1.6PROJECT COORDINATION A.Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various Sections of specifications to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed at a later date and under separate contracts. B.Obtain necessary drawings, manufacturer's product data, and other necessary data to provide a complete and proper installation. 1.Check field dimensions prior to installing equipment and furnishings. Verify necessary clearances and means of access from equipment storage to final position. 2.Make shop drawings and manufacturer's rough-in requirements available to trades involved. C.Verify that utility requirements of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various specification Sections for installation and final connection of equipment. 1.Verify that mechanical, plumbing, and electrical rough-ins have been properly located. D.Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical Work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as practicable. Make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E.In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F.Coordinate completion and clean up of work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owners partial occupancy after possession. G.After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01310-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning022417 SECTION 01312 -PROGRESS MEETINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A.A pre-construction meeting will be held at the project site prior to beginning work at a time designated by the Owner. B.The Wal-MartConstruction Manager, Contractor’s Project Manager, Contractor’s Superintendent, and major subcontractors shall be present. C.The following shall serve as a minimum agenda: 1.Construction schedule. 2.Critical work sequencing. 3.Designation of responsible personnel. 4.Processing of field decisions and changes to the Work. 5.Walk-through inspection and field determination of scope of work and verification of Construction Docu- ments. 1.2PROGRESS MEETINGS A.Scheduled progress meetings at the job site are required. B.The Wal-MartConstruction Manager, Contractor’s Superintendent and major subcontractors (as appropriate to the agenda) shall be present. C.The purpose of these progress meetings is to review the schedule of the Project for the next 2 weeks. The following shall serve as a minimum agenda: 1.Field observations, problems and conflicts. 2.Problems that may impede construction schedule. 3.Review of delivery schedules. 4.Coordination of schedules of different trades and delivery of Owner-furnished products and materials. Co- ordination with Wal-Martseparate contractors and their scope of work. 5.Walk-through inspection and determination of additional scope of work and repairs to the Project. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01312-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning022417 SECTION 01320 -CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Progress Schedules and Reports B.Related Requirements: 1.Construction Contract Between Walmart and Contractor. Requirements for construction schedules and re- ports. Ref Articles 1.1.15 and 3.8. 1.2CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A.Using the Milestone Completion Dates identified in Exhibit 1.1.16 of the Construction Contract; the Contractor shall develop the detailed CPM Construction Schedule with activity time duration in calendar daysfurther describing his method for performing the Work. The Contractor shall review the Contractor's schedule with the Owner’s Construc- tion Manager within 3 weeks from award of Contract, or at the Pre-Construction Meeting, whichever is first. Failure of the Contractor to have a construction schedule approved bythe Owner’s Construction Manager will be considered cause to withhold progress payments. 1.The Milestone Completion Dates identified in Exhibit 1.1.16 of the Construction Contract shall not be construed as an indication by the Owner as to means, methods, ortechniques of construction to be employed by the Contractor. 2.Critical path activities shall be indicated on the Contractor's detailed construction schedule. 1.3CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS CHART A.Progress of the Project will be monitored using chartsproduced from the CPM Schedule. Requirements herein provide for planning and execution of the Work and are to assist the Wal-Mart Construction Manager in evaluating progress of the Work economically and chronologically. B.The Contractor shall be familiar, in detail, with the Milestone Completion Dates identified in Exhibit 1.1.16 of the Construction Contract. By submitting his bid, the Contractor acknowledges that the Construction milestones are feasible, reasonable, and area workable schedule for the Work. C.Delivery conditions and leadtimes for Wal-Mart Furnished Items are specified in the Delivery Schedulesin Section 01600. Coordinate delivery of these items with progress of the Work. D.Prior to construction, the Contractor may request reasonable changes to the Construction Progress ScheduleChart, provided delivery dates specified in Section 01600and the contract completion date are not changed. The Wal-Mart Construction Manager will review requested changes. Upon approval by Wal-Mart, Progress ScheduleChart shall become the "Approved Construction Progress Chart" by which the Contractor shall plan, organize, direct, coordi- nate, and execute the Work, and the basis of evaluating progress of the Work. E.If, in the opinion of the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, any of the dates specified in Section 01600are not com- pleted by the Contractor on or before the stated time period and after 48 hours written notice to the Contractor, Wal- Mart may proceed to carry out the work in accordance with Article 2.4of the Construction Contract. F.The Contractor shall perform work directed by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager to meet the Wal-Mart contract completion dateand shall maintain the original management and supervision team to continue their office and job site duties on a full-time basis through final completion and/or any other time the Contractor has any work being performed on the project regardless of the date or condition of project completion. 1.4SCHEDULE UPDATES 01320-1 #04568-221Blair, NE05/19/21 A.The Contractor shall provide to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager regular updated reports on the Construction Schedule as determined by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. The Contractor shall maintain a current weekly updated detailed construction schedule in the site construction field office. 1.Construction Schedule Updating: Progress information to be included in schedule updates includes actual start and finish dates, percentage complete, remaining duration or projected finish dates for all activities in progress during reporting period. Schedule updates may also include approved addedactivity descriptions. 1.5RECOVERY PLAN A.Should the updated approved Construction Schedule show the Contractor to be behind schedule, the Contractor shall immediately devise a plan for recovery of lost time within one week and submit it to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager for approval. Once approved by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, the Contractor shall immediately put the recovery plan into action. B.During the period covered by the recovery plan, the Contractor's progress will continue to be monitored against the Approved Construction Progress Chart. If the Contractor does not recover from delay as detailed in the recovery plan, Wal-Mart may exercise the option to carry out the work as specified above. C.The Contractor shall bearall costs and expenses related to recovery from the Contractor's delays, including costs, expenses, and lost sales incurred by Wal-Mart. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01320-2 #04568-221Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning092818 SECTION 01330 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Submittal procedures prior to and during construction. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 01600 -Product Requirements: Requirements for product selection and product options. 2.Section 01770 -Contract Closeout: Closeout submittals. 1.2PROCESS AND RESPONSIBILITIES A.Contractor Responsibilities: 1.Submit required submittals to Architect unless otherwise specified. 2.Submit required submittals in hard copy orelectronically by email. Electronic documents shall be in PDF format. Hard copy documents submitted to the Contractor by suppliers and subcontractors shall be scanned by the Contractor to PDF prior to electronic submittal. 3.Comply with submittal requirements defined within individual Sections. Submittals procedures described herein shall apply unless otherwise stated in individual Sections. 4.Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. 5.Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor or supplier, pertinent Drawing sheet and detail numbers, and Specification Section number, as applicable. 6.Assemble, coordinate, and review submittals of subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. 7.Reviewsubmittal for verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction, and coordination of information. 8.Apply Contractor's Submittal Review stamp, signed or initialed and dated, certifying compliance with Contract Documents. 9.Identify email transmittal of submittals in the subject line as follows: a.WalmartStore #, City, State, Projecttype RM, OGP, etc.), submittal name (e.g. concrete mix design, sieve analysis, etc., including Section number). 10.Forward executed copy of Submittal Review Form to supplier within 5 days after receipt of submittal with copies to Architect and Wal-Mart's Construction Manager. 11.Schedule submittals to expedite the Work. Coordinate submission of related items into single submittal, unless otherwise specified. 12.Submit submittals items required within an individual Specification Section into a single submittal. 13.Identify variations from Contract Documents and limitations of product and system which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. 14.Provide space on submittal for Contractor, Architect, and Architect's Consultant review stamps. 15.Allow 10 working days for review. 16.Revise and resubmit submittals when required. Identify changes made since previous submittal. 17.Notify Vendor or Subcontractor of approval by Authority Having Jurisdiction of Deferred Submittal package. 18.Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties and to Record Documents file. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with provisions. B.Supplier Responsibilities -Wal-Mart (Owner) Furnished Products: 1.Subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers (including suppliers of Wal-Mart (Owner) furnished products) shall forward copies of submittals to the Contractor. 2.Prepare submittals in accordance with requirements in individual Specification Sections and Contractor responsibilities specified herein. C.Architect Responsibilities: Review submittals and take appropriate action as follows. 1.Shop Drawings and Product Data: Architect will mark submittals to indicate appropriate action. 01330-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.Return Architect reviewed Submittals to Contractor by email ormail carrier service providing delivery tracking. 3.Submittals for Information: Architect will not return submittals sent for information only. 4.Forward submittals to proper sub-consultant for review as necessary. D.Unrequested Submittals: Submittals transmitted to Architect or Architect's Consultantsthat are not indicated or requested will not be reviewed. Architect will dispose of unrequested submittal items. 1.3TRANSMITTAL A.Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Submit to Architect. 1.Transmit submittals to be reviewed by Architect to: Architect of Record David L. Hoffman, FAIA 345 Riverview, Suite 200 Wichita, KS 67203 2.Transmit submittals to be reviewed by Structural Engineer of Record to: Structural Consultant Wallace Engineering Structural Consultants, Inc. 123 Martin Luther King Jr. Blvd. Tulsa, OK 74103 3.Transmit 3 copies of fire protection submittals to the Wal-Mart Fire Protection Consultant listed below within 21 daysof prime contract award. Send one copy of the submittal transmittal to the Architect listed above. Fire Protection Engineer of Record Ricky N. Terrell, PE Suite 5543 nd Street 1805 N 2 Rogers, AR 72756 4.Transmit sitework submittals directly to Civil Engineer of Record. CivilEngineer of Record RickG. Rohlfing, PE 103 Elm Street, Washington,MO63090 B.In addition to recipients stated above, transmit submittals to those parties as may be required in the individual specification section. 1.4DEFERRED SUBMITTALS A.Definition: Deferred Submittal are submittals required by the AHJ for code compliance but which, rather than being submitted at the time of permit application, have been allowed by the AHJ to be deferred until after Contract award to enable the successful Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier to submit the applicable submittals. B.Submit the deferred submittals to the extent indicated on the Deferred Submittal Table located on the Drawing Cover Sheet. C.Process: 1.Immediately after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall contact the AHJ to coordinate and determine the AHJ requirements for deferred submittals. Information obtained shall include such requirements as number of copies; extent of detail of information to be submitted; review, if required, by Professional of Record (Architect or Engineer); and other necessary process and procedural requirements. 2.The Contractor, or otherentity, responsible for the submittal shall submit, track, and report submittal status to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager through final approval and issue of permit. 01330-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.Communicate with vendors, suppliers, and Subcontractors the AHJ requirements for deferred submittals. Receive, review, and stamp submittals in accordance with submittal requirements herein. 4.Transmit deferred submittals directly to AHJ unless otherwise requested by AHJ to obtain prior review and approval by Professional of Record. 5.Upon approval by AHJ, obtain permits and pay permit fees and other fees required by the AHJ. 6.Attach approved deferred submittals to the approved "Permit Set" documents at the project site. 7.Do not install deferred submittals until corresponding submittal documents have been approved by the AHJ. 1.5SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Shop Drawings 1.Submit Drawings with graphic information at accurate scale. Show dimensions and note which dimensions are based on field measurement. Identify materials and products in Work shown. Indicate compliance with specified standards and special coordination requirements. Do not use reproductions of Contract Drawings as Shop Drawings. 2.Include on each Shop Drawing the drawing title, number, original issue date, and revision numbers and dates, inaddition to other required identifying information. 3.Identify details by reference to sheet, detail, schedule, or room names shown on the Contract Drawings. 4.Identify numerical values in English units. 5.Size: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches nor more than30 by 42 inches. a.For Shop Drawings submitted on sheets larger than 8-1/2 x 11 inches, submit reproducible transparency and blueline or blackline reproduction. b.For Shop Drawings submitted on sheets 8-1/2 x 11 inches, conform to requirements for Product Data and submit as a bound volume for submittal required. 6.Number of Copies Required: Submit one reproducible transparency and one blueline or blackline reproduction. Submit additional copies to AHJ for approval if required. Comply with requirements of AHJ with regard to signing and sealing of submittals by Registered Professional licensed in the State in which project is located. a.One copy will be returned to the Contractor. B.Product Data 1.Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: a.Clearly mark to identify pertinent products. b.Show performance characteristics and capacities. c.Show dimensions and clearances required. d.Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. e.Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information not applicable to this work. f.Supplement standard drawings and diagrams to provide complete information applicable to this work. 2.Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement Product Data with material prepared for the Work to satisfy submittal requirements for which Product Data does not exist. Note that the material is developed specifically for this Contract. 3.Submit Product Data for each Section in one completesubmittal. Include table of contents listing page and catalog item numbers for Product Data. 4.Indicate, by prominent contrasting color notation on each product being submitted, the Specifications Section and paragraph numbers to which it pertains. 5.Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate information applicable to Work and clearly cross out other information not applicable to Work. Include the following information: a.Manufacturer's printed recommendations or instructions. b.Compliance with referenced standards. c.Application of testing agency labels and seals. d.Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. e.Notation of coordination requirements. 6.Product Data For Information: Written information not requiring action by Wal-Mart Construction Manager or Architect; for verification of compliance with requirement. Submittal not complying with requirements will be rejected. 7.Number of Copies Required: Four. 01330-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Engineering Calculations 1.Submit calculations signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State where project is located. Comply with requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction with regard to signing and sealing of submittals. D.Certifications 1.Certify manufacturer or installer's qualifications, compliance with tests or specified criteria, or other factors as required in individual Specification Sections. 2.Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as required. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01330-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec–Store Planning112219 SECTION 01351–REGULATORY COMPLIANCE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Contractor’s regulatory compliance requirements and responsibilities. 2.Owner’s compliance performancestandards and expectations. B.Related Requirementsand Sections: 1.Construction Contract Between Ownerand Contractor(Contract) -Exhibit 3.6. 2.Owner’s Compliance Performance Standards(CPS)for Majorprojectsas specified in the contract addendum. 3.Owner’s Environmental, Health and Safety Manual (EHS)for minorprojectsas specified in the contract addendum. 4.Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls. 5.Section 01550-Tension Pole Dust Barrier Systems. 6.Section 01740-Cleaning and Trash Disposal. 7.Section 02023-Selective Site Demolition. 8.Section 02370-Erosion and Sedimentation Control (Including SWPPP). 9.Section 13300-Vertical Barrier Net System. 1.2PROCESSES,PROCEDURESAND RESPONSIBILITIES A.Comply with all compliance obligations, federal, state,and local lawsdescribed in the Contract Documents including: Contract, Specifications, Drawings, applicable Owner’s Compliance Performance Standards (CPS) or Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) manuals. B.Do not use Owner’s CPS or EHS in place of or as a substitute for developing and implementing the Contractor’s own compliance programs. C.Create and maintain a hard-copy site-specific “Compliance Binder,” including all associated documents in accordance with the requirements in the Owner’s CPS manual. D.Do not create conditions that would cause harm to Owner’s associates or members or prevent Owner’s compliance with applicable laws. E.Follow and uphold the applicable Owner’s compliance standards includingresponsibilities, processes and procedures, compliance acknowledgements, training, documentation, forms, tracking and reporting. F.Comply with all requirementsset within the Contract Documents,includingbut not limited to: references and definitions, document management, safety requirements and safety plans, hazard safeguards, dust walls and barricades, hazardous materialsand safety data sheets, respirable crystalline silica, hot work, fire watch, electricalwork and supervision,lockout tagout, fuel storage, crane operations, confined spaces, edge protection netting, emergency exits, toxic and hazardous substances, asbestos, mold, site security and protection, labor work verificationprograms, badging and access control, waste management and disposal, hazardous waste management, waste container access restrictions, spills, construction stormwater permitting, sanitary waste water and sewage management. END OF SECTION 01351-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning022820 SECTION 01452 -CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor quality assurance and quality control. B.Related Requirements: 1.Construction Contract between Wal-Mart and Contractor: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public authorities. 2.Section 01770 -Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents. 3.Appendix B -Testing, Inspection, and Observation by Owner. a.Quality Requirements of Owner’s Construction Testing laboratory (CTL)and services. (Formerly included in Section 01458.) b.Architect-Engineer Site Observation: Site observation by Owner’s Architect and Engineer Consultants. c.Civil Engineering Consultant Site Observation: Site observation by Owner’s Civil Engineering Consultant. C.Contractor testing and inspectionare required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1.Contractor testing and inspection includes testing or inspection to be performed by and under the responsibility of the General Contractor as well as that required by the manufacturer, manufacturer’s representative, product supplier, or other party under the responsibility of theContractor. 2.Requirements in this section are independent of testing and inspection specified for the Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) specified in Appendix B. Testing and inspection by the CTL will be paid for by the Owner at no cost to the Contractor. 3.Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 4.Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, , Owner’s CTL, Wal-Mart Construction Manageror authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.2DEFINITIONS A.Testing: Evaluation of systems, primarily requiring physical manipulation and analysis of materials, in accordance with approved standards. B.Inspection: Evaluation of systems primarily requiring observation and engineering judgement. C.Quality Assurance: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will substantially comply with construction documents. D.Quality Control: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction substantially comply with construction documents. E.Quality assurance and quality control may be performed by either the Contractor or the Construction Testing Laboratory employed by the Owner. F.Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify or demonstrate 01452-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples.Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. G.Architect of Record (AOR): The prime consultant in charge of overall design and coordination of the building. H.Engineer of Record (EOR): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of engineering design for the project. I.Structural Engineer of Record (SER): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the structural design for the project. J.Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the civil design for the project. K.Architect -Engineer (A/E): A collective term to include the AOR, CEC,SER, and the Mechanical, Electrical, and Fire Protection EOR. L.Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL): The independent testing and inspection agency employed by the Owner. M.Test and Balance Agent (TBA): The HVAC testing and balancing agency employed by the Owner. N.Special Inspector (SI): The Special Inspector under the direct supervision of a registered civil/structural engineer (unless otherwise specified) regularly engaged in inspection, and experienced with the type of work requiring related testing and inspection. The categories of special inspector are specified in Appendix B: O.Building Official: The Officer or his duly authorized representative charged with the administration and enforcement of the local building code. P.Deviation: A deviation is any item or component of work that does not substantially conform to the requirements of the construction documents and which has not been corrected by the end of business on the day it is identified. 1.3CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A.General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect/Engineer for a decision before proceeding. B.Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. Refer uncertainties to Architect/Engineer for a decision before proceeding. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Submit Test and Inspection Reports within threeworking days of T&I occurrence. B.Submit required reports and other items to the following: 1.AOR: (Construction Administration Leader). a.One copy (Site work T&I). b.Three copies (Bldg T&I). AOR will transmit one copy of Bldg T&I to SER. c.Report of non-conforming work. 2.CEC: One copy. (Site work T&I only) 3.Contractor: Threecopies. 4.Building Official: Quantities as required. 1.5REPORTS 01452-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Submit reports as required herein and conduct and interpret tests and inspections. B.Testing and Inspection Report: Submit test and inspection reports including the following information: 1.Date issued. 2.Project title and number. 3.Store number. 4.Firm name and address. 5.Name and signature of tester or inspector. 6.Name and seal of registered engineer in responsible charge (as applicable). 7.Date and time of sampling. 8.Date of test or inspection. 9.Identification of product and specification section. 10.Location in project, including elevations, grid location and detail. 11.Type of test or inspections. 12.Results of tests or inspections and interpretation of same. 13.Observations regarding compliance with Contract Documents or deviations therefrom. C.Submit a separate final signed report stating whether the work requiring inspection is, to the best of the inspector's knowledge, in conformance with the approved plans, specifications, and the applicable workmanship provisions of the building code. D.Reports shall be made on 8-1/2 by 11 white paper, suitable for photocopying and binding in booklet form. Sheets shall have the CTL letterhead (including phone number and address). Larger sheets shall be folded and bound into the booklet. E.Tests and inspections reports indicating non-conformance (deviations) to the Contract Documents shall be brought to the attention of the A/E within 24 hours upon discovery. F.Contractor shall send an RFI to the A/E on the same day of non-conformance (deviation) notification. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1QUALITY CONTROL A.Quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B.The Owner will perform testing and inspection (T & I) but only as a means of verificationto the Owner of Contractor quality control performance. Owner T & I shall not be considered Quality Control or Quality Assurance as defined herein. Owner T & I and Contractor obligations with respect to Quality Control shall be pursuant to related provisions of Articles 2.3.3, 2.3.4, 2.4.1, 2.5.2, 2.6.2, and 3.2.2 of the Construction Contract between Walmart and Contractor. 1.Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2.Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor,and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. C.T & I by the Owner will be conducted by the Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Appendix B,except that costs for failing tests will be deducted fromthe sum due to the Contractor. D.Owner T & I results and reports will be available as information to Contractor. 01452-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 E.Owner’s T & I shall not be relied on by the Contractor as an indication of conformance or nonconformance of work nor shall the Contractor be dependent on the Owner’s CTL test results for verification of satisfactory work in place. F.Work found by the Owner’s CTL to be defective or in non-compliance with Contract Documents shall be corrected based on the CTL T&I results except when proven otherwise by subsequent CTL or Contractor conducted tests. G.In-place work will be subject to testing and inspection by the Owner’s CTL at any time during the progress of the work. H.Test reports conducted by and at the discretion of the Contractor shall be provided to the Owner upon request when reason exists to suspect non-compliance or when used for comparison to CTL conducted tests. I.Any testing agency, if employed by the Contractor for purposes of Contractor Quality Control, shall not be the same entity engaged by the Owner. J.Contractor shall pay for: 1.Tests and inspections at the source or prior to incorporation into the Work of materials, products, or equipment to certify compliance with Contract Documents. 2.Tests,samples, inspection, or engineering services the Contractor determines appropriate for performance of Work or for Contractor's convenience. 3.Testsand inspections when initial tests or inspections indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents. 4.Tests and inspections required or conducted by public authorities as part of permits or inspection fees. 5.Other tests and inspections indicated to be "by Contractor." K.Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, and to providestorage and curing of test samples. Provide lift equipment as required for inspection personnel of the Owner or the Owners’s representatives. L.Provide 14 days written notice to A/E prior to expected time for operations requiring observation, inspecting, and testing. If work to be observed is covered prior to notification, uncover work as required. M.Notify in writing the Wal-Mart Construction Manager three working days prior to expected time for operations requiring inspecting and testing services. N.Repair and protect the work regardless of assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services. 1.Protect work exposed by or for quality assurance and quality control service activities. 2.Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking, and similar services, restore constructed areas to conform to Contract Documents. O.Costs, including without limitation additional professional fees and expenses, of any required redesign or re- engineering required by non-conforming tests and inspections will bededucted from the sum due the Contractor. P.Provide a Letter of Conformance at the completion of the Project to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, with copy to the AOR, stipulating that the Project has been built per the Contract Documents. An example is attached at the end of this Section. Q.Maintain a copy of Contract Drawings and Specifications with all Addenda and Change Orders. Use the Contract Documents supplemented by the approved shop drawings and applicable material and workmanship provisions of the Code for testing and inspection of the work. R.Provide qualified personnel at site to comply with schedule and submit reports for each test and inspection as defined in Part 3 of this Section. S.Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. T.Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 01452-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 U.Perform testing and inspection in a timely manner to avoid delay of work. V.Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager and CEC or AOR, as applicable of observed non-conformance of Work or Products. If observed deviations from the Contract Drawings, Specifications, or building code will be probable cause of subsequent rejection of work or material, notify the Wal-Mart Construction Manager and,CEC or AOR sufficiently in advance for determination to continue operations or take corrective measures before continuing. W.Deviations from the Contract Documents will be entered into the on-line Wal-Mart Observation Log by other parties performing QualityControl construction observation. The Contractor shall track deviations, as defined above, and resolutions and remedial repairs to deviations and subsequent conformance to the Contract Documentson the Observation Log. (www.bldgportal.com, enter username and password, select Observation Log. Follow instructions on the Observation Log website.} X.The Wal-Mart Construction Manager in conjunction with the CTL and/or SI will determine when to involve the AOR or EOR for remedial action. Y.If additional A/E site or FPT visits are required beyond those described in Section 01454 as determined by Wal- Mart to determine correction to non-conforming work, the Contractor shall reimbursethe Owner the sum of $4000 for each additional visit to cover A/E expenses. Additional A/E site observations or FPTs will beperformed as required until all deviations have been corrected by the Contractor and closed by the A/E consultant. Z.Cooperate withCTL/SI personnel, and provide access to the Work and to Contractor’s facilities. AA.Submit test and inspection reports to the A/E consultant and other designated persons as specified in individual sections. Submit test and inspection reports to the Building Official as required. BB.Testing and inspection by the Building Official does not preclude the normal field involvement and site observations by the A/E consultant, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to complete the work in accordance with the approved drawings and specifications. CC.Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division1 Section "Submittal Procedures." 3.2PRODUCTION TESTING A.General Requirements: 1.Testing shall be conducted as specified in the individual specification sections. 2.If inspection of fabricators work is required, the Owner's representative may require testing and inspection of the work at the plant, before shipment. Owner, Architect, andStructural Engineer of Record(SER) reserve the right to reject material not complying with the Contract Documents. 3.Testing and inspection shall be performed in accordance with the industry standard used as the reference for the specific material or procedure unless other criteria are specified. In the absence of a referenced standard, tests shall be accomplished in accordance with generally accepted industry standards. 4.Work shall be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall in no way prevent later rejection if defective work or materials are discovered, nor shall it obligate Owner to accept such work. END OF SECTION 01452-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 \[Example Conformance Letter from Contractor. Text in parentheses are to be edited for each individual project\] \[Date\] \[Mr. Construction Manager\] Wal-Mart Construction 2608 SE J ST Bentonville, Arkansas 72716 \[Re: Supercenter (Store #xxx) –City, State\] \[Dear Construction Manager:\] The purpose of this letter is to state to Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. that, to the best of our knowledge, the construction on the above referenced project has been completed in substantial conformance with the approved Contract Documents. We performed construction testing, observation, and testing as required by the Contract Document. To our knowledge, no outstanding items exist except as may be otherwise entered and shown on the Wal-Mart Observation Log. Sincerely, \[GENERAL CONTRACTOR \] \[Include signature and date of signature\] cc: File \[ARCHITECT OF RECORD\] \[ENGINEER OF RECORD\] 01452-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning120420 SECTION 01454-ARCHITECT-ENGINEER QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Quality assurance site observation of construction by Architect and Engineers of Record. B.Related Requirements: 1.General Conditions: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public authorities. 2.Section 01452 –Contractor Quality Control: Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor quality assurance and quality control. 3.Appendix B –Testing, Inspection and Observation by Owner a.Site observation by Architect-Engineer. b.Civil Engineering Consultant Site Observation: Site observation by Owner’s Civil Engineering Consultant. c.Construction Laboratory Testing Services: Testing and Inspection by Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) and services. 1.2SELECTION AND PAYMENT A.Employment and payment for services of Architects and Engineers to perform specified site observation of construction will be by Owner. 1.3CONTRACTORRESPONSIBILITIES A.The Contractor shall: 1.Cooperate with A/E personnel and provide access to the Work and to Contractor’s facilities. 2.Provide A/E 14 day’s written notice prior to expected time for activities requiring observation and FPT services. 3.Provide A/E 14 day’s written notice prior to expected time for activities requiring observation services. 4.Maintain a copy of Contract Drawings and Specifications with all Addenda and Change Orders supplemented by the approved shop drawings and applicable material and workmanship provisions of the Code for use by the A/E. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1SITEOBSERVATION A.Site observation by Owner’s Architects and Engineers is specified in Appendix B. END OF SECTION 01454-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning113018 SECTION 01457-TESTING AND INSPECTION BY OWNER PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Administrative and procedural requirements for Owner provided testing and inspection services. B.Related Requirements: 1.Construction Contract Between Walmartand Contractor: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public authorities.Contractor obligations to perform work in accordance with Contract Documents. 2.Section 01452 –Contractor Quality Control: Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor quality assurance and quality control. 3.Section 01770 -Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents. 4.Appendix B -Testing, Inspection, and Observation by Owner: a.Architect-Engineer SiteObservation: Site observationby Owner’s Architect and Engineer Consultants. b.Civil Engineering Consultant Site Observation: Site observation by Owner’s Civil Engineering Consultant. c.Owner furnished Construction Laboratory (CTL) tests and inspections. 5.Section 13900 –Fire Suppression –Fire Sprinkler Site Observation and Acceptance Test (FPAT) C.General requirements for testing and inspectionto be performed by the Contractor is specified in Section 01452. 1.2OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES A.Employment and payment for services of an Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) and/or Special Inspector (SI) to perform specified testing and inspecting will be by the Owner under separate contract except for specified testing required to be selected and paid for by the Contractor as may be required by individual specification sections. 1.3CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A.Cooperate with CTL/SIpersonnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. B.Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, and to provide storage and curing of test samples.Provide lift equipment as required for inspection personnel of the Owner or the Owner’s representatives. C.Provide CTL24 hour notice prior to expected time for operations requiring inspecting and testing services. D.WalmartProvide the CTL/SI with access to the internet for the purpose of logging deviations onto the Walmart Observation Logon the WalmartBuilding Portal website. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01457-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning113018 SECTION 01500 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. 2.Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, signage protection of the Work, and water control. 3.Construction Facilities: All-weather access roads, parking, progress cleaning, temporarybuildings, and staging areas. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01351 –Regulatory Compliance: a.Non-hazardous waste storage fencing. b.Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 2.Section 01550 –Tension PoleDust Barrier Systems: Temporary retractable-pole and sheeting dust barrier systemsfor enclosing interior dust-emitting work. 1.2REFERENCES A.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 1.OSHA 1926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Provide protective fencing, and safety signage. B.Provide enclosures for dust emitting interior work as specified herein and in Section 01550. C.Protect properties and water resources from contaminant damage until construction activities are complete. D.Do not use methods that would cause flooding, ponding, or other damage to Owner’s property or property of others. 1.4STORMWATER RUNOFF CONTROL A.Control pollutants originating on site from demolition and construction activities. B.Ensure adequacy of Best Management Practice measures forcontrolling site pollutant discharge. C.Best Management Practices (BMPs): Refer to Appendix A at the end of the section for details of structural controls that may be used as BMP measures for controlling site pollutant discharge related to construction activities for this project. Site conditions or Contractor practices could make it necessary to install more structural controls than specified. Continually assess the need for additional controls and implement or adjust existing controls until the construction activities for this project are complete. 1.Review site conditions and identify discharge points and all potential areas of impact. 2.Designate area(s) for equipment cleaning, maintenance, and repair. Coordinate location with WalmartCon- struction Manager. The Contractor and subcontractors shall utilize such designated areas. Cleaning, mainte- nance, and repair areas shall be protected by temporary perimeter berms, shall not occur within 150 feet of any waterway, water body or wetland, and shall be located as far as practical from storm sewer inlets. 3.Chemicals, paints, solvents, fertilizers, and other toxic materials must be stored in waterproof containers. Except during application, the containers must be kept in trucks or within storage facilities as specified herein. Runoff containing such material must be collected, removed from the site, treated, and disposed of at an approved solid waste and chemical disposal facility. 4.Use of detergents for exterior washing is prohibited. 01500-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 5.Use products, site pollutant discharge control devices or materials for BMPs as specified and as applicable to related construction activities. D.All BMPs must be installed and functioning, and shall be free of accumulated sediment and debris before construc- tion begins. Maintain in place and functional throughout the duration of construction activities.No measure shall be implemented which causes flooding or ponding or in any other way causes damage to Owner’s property or prop- erty belonging to others. E.Review the site conditions as needed to identify potential areas of impact and discharge points. F.Place BMPs as may be dictated by site conditions in order to maintain the intent of the specifications and pertinent Federal, State and local regulations and permits. G.Water used for construction which discharges from the site must originate from a public water supply or private well approved by the State Health Department. Water used for construction that does not originate from an approved public supply must not discharge from the site without being treated in accordance with applicable local ground water dewatering permits/regulations. H.Control substances that have the potential for polluting surface and/or groundwater by whatever means necessary in order to ensure that they do not discharge from the site. 1.Do not allow the discharge of wash wastewater to flow from cleaning processes to a storm water drain or catch basin, street, roadway, sidewalk, gutter, landscape area or any type of storm water structure. 2.Do not dischargesolid materials, including building materials, from the site with storm water. a.Collect cementitious material and paint waste from equipment cleaning in aboveground portable washout containerssuch as Vinyl-Con by RTC Environmental Products, (530) 589-2007, or equal as approved by the WalmartConstruction Managerand Authorities Having Jurisdiction. b.Comply with the requirements of Section 01351 for collection and disposal of waste solids. 3.Recover and dispose of wash wastewater offsite at a licensed facility. 1.5TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A.Connect to existing power service. Owner will pay cost of electricity used. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. Exercise measures to conserve energy. B.Coordinate location and method of connection to existing electrical service with Walmart Construction Manager. Do not connect to electrical panels serving rack houses. C.Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single-phase branch circuits for power and lighting. Provide temporary feeders to limit voltage loss to 5% overall from local utility power lines to provide electric requirements for project during construction. 1.6TEMPORARY LIGHTING A.Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations. Provide minimum of 20 footcandles illumination for work areas. B.Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.7TEMPORARY HEAT A.Provide and pay for heat devices and heat as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B.Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. 01500-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.8TEMPORARY VENTILATION A.Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 1.9TELEPHONE SERVICE A.Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office. 1.10TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A.Connect to existing water source. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water. 1.11TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A.Provide and maintain required chemical toilet facilities. B.Locate as directed by WalmartConstruction Manager. Maintain facilities clean and serviced as necessary and in compliance with local health code requirements. C.Existing facilities shall not be usedby construction personnel. 1.12TEMPORARY STORAGECONTAINERS A.General Requirements: 1.If required by Authority Having Jurisdiction, obtain all permits necessary forusage and placement of tem- porary storage container. 2.Coordinate with Store Manager to locate temporary storage container as approved by Authority Having Ju- risdiction, when applicable. B.Flooring Materials: Provide two temporary storage containersfor use by WalmartPreferred Flooring Contractor specified in Section 09650/09680, one container for storage of flooring materials and accessories and one container for recycled tile. 1.Coordinaterequired size of containerswith the WalmartConstruction Manager.\] \] 1.13BARRIERSAND CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC SAFETY A.Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structuresfrom damage. B.Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. C.Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way, to allowfor Owner's use of site, and for public access to existing building. 1.Erect barricades using 1/2" plywood on 2x4 framing. Supports shall be as required to uphold barricade. Verify requirements with WalmartConstruction Manager. 2.Construct 8'-0" high unless otherwise directed by owner. 3.Shopping carts shall not be used as barricades. D.When operating any motorized construction equipment in areas where customers or WalmartAssociates are present, provide a spotter (or signal person) whose sole job responsibility shall be to ensure safe operation, including directing traffic and keeping area of traffic clear of people. 1.14TEMPORARY FENCING FOR CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE CONTAINERS 01500-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.General: 1.Provide commercial grade temporary chain link fencing around general non-hazardous waste storage and sorting areas as specified in Section 01351 Supplement Par. 3.6.2 -ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE. 2.Fencing shall be 8 feet high. 3.Provide 188linear feetof temporary fencing total, including fencing and gates. 4.Maintain access to fire hydrants and hose connections, emergency vehicles, and other site specific conditions as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. 5.Obtain permits required by AHJ for usage and placement of temporary chain link fencing. B.Materials: 1.Posts: Galvanized steel pipe. Posts shall be suitable for setting in concrete footings or driving into ground as required by local conditions. 2.Fabric: Commercial-grade 2”-mesh chain-link fencing with full fence screening. Screening must be woven plastic cloth or plastic screening slats. No substitutions are allowed for fencing or screening material.. 3.Gates: Provide personnel and vehicle gates of the quantity and size required for functional access to waste container storage area. a.Fabricategatesand screeningof same material as used for fencing. b.Equip with locks. C.Installation: Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations. 1.Post and Fabric: Set posts in concrete footings, drive posts in ground, or set in holes and backfill to accom- modate local conditions. Stretch fabric taut and attach to posts. 2.Gates: Install gates with required hardware. D.Removal: After use of fenced areas and waste/recycling containers by Walmartas specified in Section 01351, remove fencing and patch paving. Refer to Section 01731 for general patching requirements. 1.15WATER CONTROL A.Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B.Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. C.The Contractor shall at all times protect all activities of his construction, excavations, fill areas, embankments, trenches structures or building from damage from rainwater, spring water, ground water, backing up of drains, sew- ers and all other water encountered during his operations. He shall provide all pumps, equipment and enclosures necessary to provide adequate protection. D.Verify discharges from dewatering activities are allowed non-storm water discharges under applicable Federal, State and local regulations. Obtain a dewatering permit according to state and local regulations if discharges from de- watering activities are not allowed. Discharges from dewatering operations must be directed through an appropriate pollution prevention/treatment measure prior to being discharged from the site. Under no circumstances will dis- charges from dewatering operations be discharged directly into streams, rivers, lakes or other areas beyond the pro- ject limits. 1.16EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A.Provide temporary weather-tight closure of exterior openings to provide acceptable working conditions and protec- tion for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. B.Provide access doors with locks. 1.17INTERIOR ENCLOSURES 01500-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.As shown on Drawings, provide sealed temporary partitions as specified herein and in Section 01550 to separate construction work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occu- pied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B.Temporary Stud Framed Barrier /Dust Partitions: Installation and removal of temporary dust partitions shall be scheduled with a minimum of 3 days prior notification to WalmartConstruction Manager and/or Store Manager. Maintain temporary dust partitions to seal openings to Walmart-occupied areaswith closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces. These shall be scheduled, installed, and removed as required and directed by WalmartConstruction Manager and may not be indicated on the Drawings. Install partitions prior to demolition of existing walls and maintain in dust tight condition until the completion of the new construction. It is the Contractor's responsibility to prohibit dust and debris from entering the Sales area or any Walmart-occupied areas and to obtain approval from AHJ for materials/construction configuration and phasing of temporary enclosures. 1.DustWall Partitions: a.Framing: (same as Type A below). b.Covering: 6 mil. clear poly sheeting (if allowed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction); otherwise use Griffolyn type 55 ASFR, anti-static, fire retardant sheeting. Overlap sheeting at joints a minimum 2’- 0" and continuously tape joints. Attach sheeting from ceiling to finish floor for dustproof condition. If attachment to ceiling is impossible,light framing shall be installed with sheeting attached all around to prohibit dust penetration. c.Plywood (where required): Install 1/2" C-D plywood over 6 mil poly. Install 4’x8’ sheets horizontally from finish floor to bottom of roof deck. Insure that blocking is provided behind each joint. Provide sealant at bottom of plywood at finish floor and continuous sealant against plate on other side. 2.Type A Partition/ Dust Drape(no ceiling present): a.Framing: Light gauge metal framing (refer Section 05400)or framing material approved by Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Provide continuous 2x4 top and bottom plates and continuous bridging and bracing. Continue top plate to bottom side of roof deck. 1)Walls up to 14’-0” may use 3-5/8” -22 gauge metal studs at 24” o.c. or 2x4’s at 16” o.c. 2)Walls higher than 14’-0” may use 6” -20 gauge metal studs at 24” o.c. or 2x6’s at 16” o.c. b.Covering: Install continuous 6 mil clear poly sheets (if allowed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction); otherwise use Griffolyn type 55 ASFR, anti-static, fire retardant sheeting. Install from finish floor to roof deck. Tape all joints. Install 1/2" C-D plywood over 6 mil poly. Install 4’x8’ sheets horizontally from finish floor to bottom of roof deck. Insure that blocking is provided behind each joint. Provide sealant at bottom of plywood at finish floor and continuous sealant against plate on otherside. 3.Type B Partition/ Dust Drape(ceiling grid to remain in place): a.Framing: (same as Type A above). b.Covering: Install continuous 6 mil clear poly sheets (if allowed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction); otherwise use Griffolyn type 55 ASFR, anti-static, fire retardant sheeting. Install from finish floor to roof deck. Tape all joints. Install 1/2" C-D plywood over 6 mil poly. Install 4’x8’ sheets horizontally to bottom of finish ceiling. Extend 6 mil poly to bottom of roof deck. Insure that blocking is provided behind each joint. Provide sealant at bottom of plywood at finish floor and continuous sealant against plate on other side. 4.Type D Security Partitions(exterior): a.Framing: (same as Type A above). b.Covering: At interior face of partition,install continuous 6 mil clear poly sheets (if allowed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction); otherwise use Griffolyn type 55 ASFR, anti-static, fire retardant sheeting. Install from finish floor to roof deck. Tape all joints. Install 1/2" C-D plywood over 6 mil poly. Install 4’x8’ sheets horizontally to bottom of roof deck. Insure that blocking is provided behind each joint. At exterior face of partition, install 30 gauge, 24” wide corrugated metal panels as shown on the Drawings. Fill wall cavities with R-13 batt insulation. Provide sealant at bottom of plywood at finish floor and continuous sealant against plate on other side. 5.Doors: a.Single acting doors, opening out, with sturdy closer, closing against gasketed stops on frame to reduce passage ofdust. 6.Sealing: a.Seal perimeter of partitions and doors to prevent passage of dust. At Type A and B partitions, tape fastener depressions, joints between panels and joints between panels and floors, ceiling and columns with 2 in. wide pressure sensitive tape. 7.Mats: 01500-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 a.Provide mats at doors to reduce tracking of dust. Replace or clean daily. C.Contractor’s Option:Tension PoleDust Barrier System: Temporary retractable-poleand polyethylene sheeting dust barrier system as specified in Section 01550. 1.General use: Inlieu of Stud framed Dust Wall Partitionsthat are not adjacent to Food Areas, where a barrier to security or safety is not required. 2.Emergency use (48 hours or less):Continuously attended construction area, where approved by Walmart Construction Manager. 3.Access doors, walk-off mats, and system accessories as specified in Section 01550. 1.18FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A.Contractor's Office:(Not required for projects with a duration of less than 4 weeks, or as stated otherwise in Bid documents.) 1.Size as required for Contractor's use and to provide space for project meetings. 2.Adequate electrical power, lighting, heating, and cooling to maintain human comfort. 3.Office space with desk and chair, layout table, plan rack, and facilities for storage of Project Record Documents. 4.Furnishings in meeting area: a.Conference table and chairs for at least eight persons. b.Racks and files for Project Record Documents in, or adjacent to, the meeting area. c.Other furnishings: Contractor's option. 5.Contractor's office and sheds not to be used as living accommodations. B.Storage Sheds: Structurally sound, weathertight, on proper foundations, with floors raised above ground. C.Locate office and sheds minimum 30 feet from structures. 1.19CONSTRUCTION AIDS A.Provide construction aids required to facilitate execution of Work, including stairs, ladders, ramps, staging, plat- forms, railings, cranes, scaffolds, hoists, chutes, runways, and other required facilities and equipment. B.Such apparatus, equipment and construction shall meet requirements of applicable OSHA (Federal), State and Local Safety and Labor Laws. C.Store employees shall not be allowed access to scaffolds, ladders, and hoists. D.Coordinate crane service required for erection of structural steel, installation of HVAC Rooftop Units, and other crane services as required to accommodate Walmart's needs. 1.20PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORK A.The existing building shall be protected from moisture, dust and debris. Install dust partitions or drapes as shown or as required to keep dust and moisturefrom the building premises. B.Provide suitable temporary watertight coverings over openings as required to protect interior work from inclement weather and related/adjacent construction areas. C.Maintain benchmarks, monuments and other reference point. If disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed. D.Protect existing adjacent streets, sidewalks, curbs, buildings and property, including trees, lawns and plants. 1.21PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A.Protect installed Work; provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. 01500-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C.Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D.Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E.Minimize traffic and storage on roofed surfaces. If traffic or storage is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from roofing material manufacturer. F.Do not operate cranes or other heavy equipment on concrete floor slabs if damage could result from such operations. G.Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.22SECURITY A.Maintain the integrity of the existing building security and security systems at all times. Provide security and facil- ities to protect Work and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft. B.Obtain permission and coordinate with Owner's security program through WalmartConstruction Manager at least 12 hours prior to the modification of any existing security system. C.Provide continuous security at openings cut into existing exterior walls and roofs. 1.23ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING A.Construct and maintain temporary all weather roads accessing public thoroughfares to serve building pad and con- struction staging area. B.Extend and relocate as Work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. C.Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. D.Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. 1.24NOISE CONTROL A.Demolition and other Work that disturbs surrounding WalmartStore areas shall only be allowed in the following categories and time restrictions: 1.Low Level Noise: Assembling trades such as electricians, ceiling installers, painters, tapers, etc.. Excludes all hammering and impact drilling. Low-level noise operations are allowed during WalmartStore operational hours. 2.Moderate Level Noise: Trades include gypsum board installers, stud partition installers, duct installers, etc. Includes occasional and intermittent hammering, screw drilling, etc.. Excludes impact drilling and concrete sawing. Moderate level noise operations may be allowed during WalmartStoreoperational hours upon approval of WalmartConstruction Manager or Store Manager. 3.High Level Noise: Constant loud and high pitched noise produced by impact drilling, concrete saw cutting, hammering of ductwork, and all demolition work. High-level noise operations shall be restricted to Walmart Store non-operational hours. 1.25PROGRESS CLEANING A.Refer to requirements specified in Section 01740. 1.26SIGNAGE 01500-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Temporary Construction Signage: Provide temporary signage for identification as required due to obscurity caused by construction. Provide signage for traffic control and safety information. Provide temporary pavement striping for traffic control and pedestrian safety. Provide temporary handicap parking spaces if existing spaces are at a non- accessible location to the building entrance. 1.27INFORMATION/SAFETY BOARD A.Provide 4'x8'x3/4" C/D exterior glue plywood to be attached on the existing exterior wall at a location designated by the WalmartConstruction Manager. B.Information/Safety Board shall be used to communicate safety, state & federal, hiring, OSHA and EPA require- ments, bulletins and other information required for the construction of this Project. C.The board shall contain but not be limited to the following: 1.OSHA Safety Requirements 2.Federal and State Hiring Regulations 3.Pertinent State, Local, and Federal Employment Regulations 4.Building Permits 5.Emergency telephone numbers 6.Job Site Safety Meeting notifications 7.EPA Permits or Notification regarding Asbestos or other Toxic or Hazardous Materials 8.Other information required to comply with applicable OSHA, EPA and Federal safety laws D.Protect posted information with either plastic sleeves stapled to the board or 6 mil clear plastic sheathing over entire board providing access for posting of additional information. 1.28POSTED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A.Post construction schedule and Phasing Plans (Floor Tile, Paint) in back office area for clear viewing by all trades and workmen. Provide names/telephone numbers of WalmartConstruction Manager, General Contractor Project Manager, Superintendent and Phase I Supervisor. Maintain most recent and updated version of schedule. 1.29STORAGE OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALSAND EQUIPMENT A.Locate storage areas to minimize exposure to weather. The Contractor shall inspect areas used for storing materials for evidence of, or the potential for, pollutants entering the storm drainage system or discharging from the site. If necessary, the materials must be covered, or original covers must be repaired or supplemented. Construct protective berms, if needed, in order to contain runoff from material storage areas. Comply with all state and local regulations pertaining to material storage areas. B.The Work area may be used to store materials and equipment as approved by the WalmartConstruction Manager. Provide storage trailers as required for storage of other materials. The Contractor shall not use Walmarttrailers or storage warehouses for materials/equipment storage. 1.Storage of chemicals, paints, solvents, fertilizers, and other toxic materials within building is prohibited. Remove such materials daily from store. 2.Locate storage trailers containing chemicals, paints, solvents, fertilizers, and other toxic materials a minimum of 30 feet from existing structures and adjacent property lines. Coordinate with WalmartConstruction Man- ager if site constraints will not allow placing storage trailers at specified distance. 3.Construction equipment and vehicles shall be maintained to insure equipment and vehicles are without fluid leaks. Remove construction equipment and vehicles with fluid leaks from store site. 4.Temporary on-site fuel tanks for construction equipment shall meet all State and Federal regulations. Tanks shall have approved spill containment with the capacity required by NFPA 30 and all other applicable regu- lations. Generate a Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasure (SPCC) Plan if above groundoil storage capacity at the construction site exceeds 1,320 gallons or as specified by the State in accordance with Oil Pollution Prevention regulation 40 CFR 112. C.Hazardous Material Management and Spill Reporting Plan: 01500-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.Properly handle any hazardous or potentially hazardous material brought onto construction site to reduce potential for stormwater pollution. 2.Store and handle flammable and combustible liquids in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.152. Use only ap- proved containers and portable tanks for storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids. 3.Maintain on-site all Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any and all applicable materials. 4.Maintain a spill control and containment kit on-site. Contents may typically include: a.Absorbent material such askitty litter or sawdust. b.Acid neutralizing agent. c.Brooms, dust pans, mops, rags. d.Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): gloves, goggles, etc. e.Plastic and metal trash containers. 5.Immediately contain and remove any spilled materials in the manner specified by local, State and Federal regulations and by product manufacturer. 6.Notify WalmartConstruction Manager immediately in the event of a spill. 7.Report spills to appropriate agencies in accordance with local or State agency regulations as soon as possible. D.The Contractor may not store materials on site except for what is in use for the current work. E.Cover and protect material in transit. F.Stored materials shall be available for inspection by Owner at all times. G.Walmartis NOT responsible for the loss of any construction materials or the Contractors' loss of equipment or tools. 1.30TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A.Contractors and sub-contractors and their agents and employees shall comply with local fire protection codes and OSHA Regulations. 1.Provide a minimum of one U.L. listed 2A:20BC dry chemical fire extinguisher, or one standard U.L. listed 2-1/2 ga. Water (E-10) and one U.L. listed 10BC carbon dioxide fire extinguisher mounted together, in each of the following areas: a.Each 3000 sq. ft. of work area or fraction thereof with minimum of two extinguishers. 2.Contractor's superintendent, or other assistant superintendents, shall be appointed as project fire warden for entire construction period. 3.Train workmen in proper use of each type fire extinguisher. 4.Post telephone number of fire department, specific information on location of on-site fire fighting equipment and procedure to be followed in event of fire. 5.Maintain free access at all times to fire extinguisher equipment, street fire hydrants, and outside connections for standpipe hose systems. B.Maintain exit facilities and access thereto free of material and other obstructions. If any exits are rendered inopera- tive during remodeling, provide the same number of temporary exits and maintain a sufficient number of required exits and exit width as required by the adopted building code and AHJ. 1.31NON-SMOKING POLICY A.Smoking will not be allowed within the building or customer/associate traffic areas at any time. 1.32REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A.Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Final Walk-Thru inspec- tion. B.Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C.Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 01500-9 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.At completion of construction, remove fencing, guardrails, barricades, temporary signage and temporary coverings. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01500-10 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Appendix A –Site BMPs 01500-11 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 01500-12 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 01500-13 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II–Store Planning042718 SECTION 01550 (11 44 16)–TENSION POLEDUST BARRIER SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Temporary retractable-pole and sheeting dust barrier systems and related containment accessories for enclosing interior dust-emitting construction work.Barriers may be relocated and reused as permitted in this section. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01351 –Regulatory Compliance: a.Disposal and removal of construction and universal waste. b.Work practice control methods for airborne suppressing respirable dust. 2.Section 01500 –Temporary Facilities and Controls: Locations for use. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM D 7948 -Test Method for Measurement of Respirable Crystalline Silica in Workplace Air by Infrared Spectrometry. C.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1.OSHA 29 CFR Standard 1926.1153 -Respirable Crystalline Silica: Table 1 construction control methods for suppressing airborne respirable dustand permissible exposure limit (PEL). 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Use barrier system components and accessories recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the OSHA permissible level when tested in accordance with ASTM D 7948. 1.4ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Remove personal protective equipment, protective outerwear, shoe covers, and respiratory devices used inside dust containment areas before entering clean rooms. B.Wet clean barrier system components and accessories frequently during use and between jobs to avoid dust transmission. C.Dispose of plastic sheeting and other construction waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01351 Regulatory Compliance Supplement. 1.5DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store,and protect barrier systemassembly as specified in Section 01600. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1SUPPLIERS 01550-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Provide products by one of the followingor equivalent products subject to the requirements specified herein by another supplier: 1.Surface Shields, Orland Park, IL, (708) 226-9817. Contact Tom Fergus, tfergus@surfaceshields.com. 2.ZipWall, Arlington, MA, (800) 718-2255. 3.FastCap, Ferndale, WA, (888) 443-3748. 4.ToolLabl, Winchester, OH, (800) 424-8251, sales@toollab.com 5.Pro Tect Associates, Inc., Northbrook, IL, (877) 991-1352, contact@pro-tect.com. 2.2SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Adjustable HeightPoles:Heavy duty spring loaded, adjustable height locking metal poles withlocking header parts and non-slip rubber floor basefoot, length as required. 1.Dust Shield Pro Extendable Containment Polesby Surface Shields. 2.Spring-Loaded Polesby ZipWall. 3.3rd Hand Dust Barrier SystembyFastCap. 4.Speedy Wall Polesor Curtain-WallModular System by ToolLab. 5.EZ Prop Dust Polesby Pro Tect Associates. B.Polyethylene SheetScreening Material:Clear or white translucent polyethylene sheeting, tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA for flame retardancy, 6 milthickness. Provide sheet from suppliers specified herein or equivalent. 1.Contractor’s Option: In lieu of polyethylene sheeting, the following reusable fabric panels may be used as barrier screening material: a.Zip-Fast Reusable Barrier Panelsby ZipWall. C.SealingAccess Door:Provide one of the following continuous sealing access panel components: 1.Adhesive Zipper Door: Single-use zipper strip of heavy duty polyester or HDPE fabric with pressure- sensitive adhesivebacking for application to polyethylene sheet material, 7 ft long. Provide one of the following: by Surface Shields. a.Zip n Close Zippers b.ZipWall Self-Adhesive Zippersby ZipWall. c.Zip-Upor Curtain-Doorby ToolLab. d.Pro Tect Zip-Upby Pro Tect. 2.Self-Closing Magnetic Door: Reusable suspended header partition with vertical magnetic strips at access opening, 79 in long. Provide the following: a.3rd Hand Magnetic Dust Barrier Doorby FastCap. 2.3DUST CONTAINMENT ACCESSORIES A.Vent,Duct, and Surface ProtectionFilm: Self-adhering, clean removal polyethylene protective film.Provide the following or equivalent: 1.Duct Cover Shieldby Surface Shields. 2.Vent Maskby Surface Shields. 3.Multi Use Red Surface Protection Filmby Pro Tect. B.Clean Room Walk-Off Mat: Disposable tacky floor matsfor collecting foot traffic debris, roll or premeasuredsheets, with adhesive or non-skid backing. C.Adhesive Tape: Pressure-sensitive, medium tack, UV resistant, rated for clean release after 14 days. Minimum 5 mil thickness, 2 inch wide. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1PREPARATION A.Verify dimensions on site prior to installing barrier system. 01550-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Inspect supporting substrates prior to barrier system installation. Do not attach or abut dust barrier componentsto mobile or unsecured substrates. C.Coordinate barrier system installation to ensure that simultaneous work outside dust containment areas will not disturb or compromise enclosure. D.Cover and seal vents, ducts, and surfaces inside the containment area. 3.2INSTALLATION A.Install dust barrier systems prior demolition,disposal, cutting, patching, or cleaning work as described in Division 1 specifications. Install dust barrier systems prior to cutting, patching, sawing, drilling, and coring as described in Divisions 3, 4, and 5 specifications. B.Provide the number of components and accessories as required to create a continuous seal between the dust containment area and the clean room. C.Install dust barrier systemcomponents in accordance with manufacturer’s publishedinstructions. Attach extension poles from ceiling to finish floor. Where attachment to ceiling is impractical, install light framing with sheeting secured on top and all sides. Draw plastic sheeting taut without gaping, wrinkling, or puddling at floor. D.Do not allow joints in plastic sheeting between poles. E.Do not reuse plastic sheeting for subsequent work sites. F.Use adhesive tape at corners, sheeting joints, and as necessary to reinforce the seal in areas of the enclosure receiving heavy traffic or tension.Do not use tape as a substitute for extension poles or zipper access doorsto seal the barrier enclosure. G.Locate walk-off mats at foot traffic transitions between dust containment area and clean rooms. END OF SECTION 01550-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Planning102618 SECTION 01700 -EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.General Construction Requirements 2.Verification of Existing Conditions 3.Work Within and Adjacent to Existing Building Area. 1.2GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A.General Requirements 1.All Work shall be done in a safe and workmanlike manner and in strict accordance with the local and/or State (if applicable) Building Codes, National Electric Code, ADA-ADAAGS and other Adopted Accessibility Standards, OSHA, and all applicable codes, regulations, ordinances and Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 2.Provisions regarding the use of gas and diesel equipment within an enclosed building, formerly included in this paragraph, are now included in Section 01351 -Regulatory Compliance 3.Provisions regarding cords for electrical equipment and routing of equipment cords and hoses, formerly included in this paragraph, are now included in Section 01351 -Regulatory Compliance. 4.Each Subcontractor is responsible for having a thorough knowledge of all drawings and specifications in their related field. The failure to acquaint himself with this knowledge does not relieve him of any responsibility for performing his work properly. No additional compensation shall be allowed because of conditions that occur due to failure to familiarize workers with this knowledge. 5.The existing building shall be protected from moisture, dust and debris. Install dust partitions or drapes as required and/or as directed by Wal-MartConstruction Manager to keep dust and moisture from the operating areas of the store. 6.Any damage to Wal-Mart’s property, which occurs during the process of construction shall be repaired/replaced at no additional cost to Wal-Mart; this includes all merchandise. Contractor shall pay the cost for all damaged merchandise. 7.The Contractor shall maintain the integrity of the existing building security at all times. This includes keeping the building secure from persons, environmental elements or hazards. The Contractor shall be responsible to maintain the integrity of all existing security systems. 8.The Contractor shall keep the work area clean and free of debris and remove all trash and debris from the construction area daily. No flammable materials or liquids may be stored in the existing building. 9.Remove any existing equipment, fixtures, furnishings, accessories,services, finishes or surfaces as required, shown or not shown,for the installation of new construction. Provide furring for conduits and piping, shown or not, and finish out furring to match adjacent existing finishes. 10.Repair, re-route, and extend all services, piping, conduit of existing items and equipment as required during the construction process to maintain normal store operations and as required for the installation of new construction. This includes all items shown or not shown on the Drawings. Reset existing equipment, fixtures, furnishings, accessories,or related items as required for proper operation. 11.When equipment, fixtures, furnishings, accessories, services, finishes or surfaces are temporarily removed or relocated in order to perform work, the Contractor is repsonsible for returning them to their original position, reconnection of services and appropriate means of attachment unless specifically directed to do otherwise. 12.Where existing finishes are to remain, clean, repair, patch and repaint as necessary to blend in with adjacent work. Coordinate with Walmart construction manager. 13.The Contractor shall be responsible for the timely ordering of materials to prohibit delays of the construction schedule of this Project. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate delivery of materials in a timely manner. 14.The Contractor shall keep the building watertight at all times. 15.The General Contractor shall respond to all requirements of the Structural Engineer/Architect for verifications, responses, and submissions. 01700-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 16.If modification to sprinkler system is required the general contractor shall hire a licensed sprinkler contractor. Contractor to submit signed and sealed sprinkler drawings for approval prior to any alteration of the automatic sprinkler system. Work to be done under separate permit. 17.All adjacent buildings (if applicable) shall remain in service during demolition/construction. 18.Mud and debris tracked onto owner paving or city streets to be cleaned immediately. 19.Building components affected by the scope of work and allowed to remain shall be secured to prevent falling, loosening, or creating damage of any kind in the future. B.Site Verification Requirements 1.The Architect has made a scope visit with measurements and photographs of existing conditions and the Drawings indicate existing conditions verified in the field. It, however, remains the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all existing conditions prior to the submission of his bid and to the commencement of any Work. No additional compensation will be paid due to the Contractor’s failure to acquaint himself with existing site conditions which include, but are not limited to, grades, extent of paving, or utilities. 2.Any discrepancy with the existing site conditions and/or the Drawings shall be brought to the attention of the Architect forclarification and instruction. These Construction Documents have been designed and drawn assuming existing building conditions match the Original Drawings. The General Contractor, immediately upon arrival at the site, shall verify all prior to the fabrication of any structural items. If discrepancies are found between what is shown on the Drawings and existing field conditions, contact the Wal-Mart Construction Manager and the Architect immediately to determine what action should be taken to match existing conditions. 3.All utility locations shown are approximate. The Contractor shall field verify the exact location of all existing utilities (whether shown or not) prior to the submission of his bid or the commencement of construction. The Contractor shall notify the Wal-MartConstruction Manager of the discovery of existing utilities not shown or noted on Drawings. 4.The Contractor shall verify and maintain (repair if damaged) existing irrigation systems affected by the construction of this Project. 5.Not used 6.The Contractor shall verify exact locations and depths of underground utility services prior to any excavation. 7.The Contractor shall verify all grades and proposed final grades. If there is a conflict in field conditions, notify Wal-MartConstruction Manager and the Architect prior to the construction or ordering of materials. 8.Not Used 9.Not Used 10.Not Used 11.Report any discrepancies found in the field immediately to Wal-Martand the Architect prior to making any structural modifications or ordering of any materials. C.Demolition Requirements 1.All demolition shall be carried out in a safe manner and in strict accordance with OSHA regulations. 2.The Contractor shall field verify theextent of demolition. The Work includes, but is not limited to, the demolition and removal of walls, doors, fixtures, plumbing, paving, mechanical and electrical items including conduits and ductwork as shown on Drawing or as required for the installationof the new Work for a complete job. 3.When utilities are removed, cap and seal a minimum of 8" below finish floor or a minimum of 6" above finish ceiling. 4.When removing existing structural items, it is the Contractor's responsibility to provide adequate shoring, bracing and support systems to keep the existing structure intact and in a safe condition. Refer to Sections 02023 and 02251. 5.Notes indicating demolition work are not confined solely to the demolition plans. The general contractor shall review all construction documents, inclusive of schedules and specifications, to determine full extent of demolition work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used 01700-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 END OF SECTION 01700-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Planning 113018 SECTION 01731 -CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching Work. 2.Products for patching and extending Work. 3.Transitions and adjustments. 4.Repair of damaged surfaces, finishes and cleaning. B.Related Requirements: 1.Construction Contract Between Walmart and Contractor (Par 3.12): Additional requirements for cutting and patching. 2.Section 01351 –Regulatory Compliance: a.Disposal and removal of hazardous construction and universal waste. b.Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 3.Section 01500 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary barriers. 4.Section 02023 -Selective Site Demolition: Procedures for removing existing materials and equipment. 1.2REFERENCES A.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1.OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica 1.3ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Minimize dust emissions or provide equipment that suppresses dust. 1.4PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Cutting and patching shall be performed as required for cutting into existing construction to provide for installation or performance of other work and subsequent fitting and patching required for restoration ofsurfaces to their original condition. B.Cut into or partiallyremove portions of the existing building as required for new construction. Include such work as: 1.Cutting, moving or removal of items shown to be cut, moved or removed. 2.Cutting, moving or removal of items not shown to be cut, moved, or removed, but which must be cut, moved, or removed to allow for new construction. Work or items which are to remain in the finished work shall be patched or reinstalled after cutting, moving, or removal, and joints and finishes shall match adjacent or similar work. 3.Removal of existing surface finishes as needed to install new work and finishes. 4.Removal of abandoned items and removal of items rendered no longer required resulting from alterations such as abandoned piping and electrical conduits to nearest J-boxes. 5.Repair or removal of dangerous or unsanitary conditions resulting from alterations work. C.Structural Work: 1.Do not cut and patch structural work in manner resulting in reduction of load-carrying capacity or load and deflection ratio. D.Operational Limitations: 1.Do not cutand patch in manner resulting in decreased performance, shortened useful life, or increased maintenance. 01731-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 E.Quality Limitations: Do not cut and patch work exposed to view (exterior and interior) in manner resulting in noticeable reduction of aesthetic qualities and similar qualities, as determined by the WalmartConstruction Manager. F.Limitation on Acceptance: WalmartConstruction Manager's acceptance to proceed with cutting and patching shall not waive right to later require removal or replacement of work found to be cut and patched in unsatisfactory manner as determined by WalmartConstruction Manager. G.Obtain all required inspections and approvals from authorities having jurisdiction for Temporary Certificate of Occupancy for Offices and Stockroom at least seven calendar days prior to Walmartscheduled move into new Office and Stockroom areas. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MATERIALS A.Use materials for cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal or better performance characteristics. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which work is to be performed before cutting. Take corrective action before proceeding with work if unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. 3.2PREPARATION A.Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut to prevent failure. B.Protection: 1.Protect other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. 2.Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for that part of project that may be exposed during cutting and patching operations. 3.Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 4.Take precautions not to cut existing pipe, conduit, or duct serving building but scheduled to be relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3CUTTING AND PATCHING A.Remove, cut and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring products, materials, and finishes to match original condition. B.Cutting and removal work shall be performed so as not to cut or remove more than is necessary and that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining work. C.Conduct work in such a manner as to minimize noise and to minimize accumulation and spread of dirt and dust. D.Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding. Avoid hammering andchopping. E.Where cutting cured concrete or masonry is required, use saws equipped with integrated water delivery systems that continuously feed water to the blade, or a HEPA-rated filter dust collection vacuum system recommendedby the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. 01731-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 F.Where core drilling or grinding concrete is required, use power tools equipped with HEPA-rated filter dust collection vacuum system recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. G.To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut and drill from exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. H.Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent work. Use HEPA-rated filter vac- uums to clean holes and slots. I.Dispose of construction waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01351. J.Patch with seams that are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for work. K.If the surrounding surface cannot be matched, repaint or recoat the entire surface to nearest corner or transition point. 3.4TRANSITIONS A.Where new work abuts or alignswith existing work, provide a smooth and eventransition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. B.Where finished surfacesare cut in such a way that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate the existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division. C.Where two or more spaces are indicated to become one space, reconstruct ceilings to provide horizontal planes without breaks, steps or bulkheads. D.In cases of extreme change of ceiling or floor, obtain instructions from WalmartConstruction Manager as to method of making an acceptable transition. 3.5REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES A.Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, discolored, or showing imperfections. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. B.Restore existing work that is damaged during construction to a condition equal to its condition at the time of the start of the Work. C.At locations in existing areas where partitions are removed, patch the floors, walls and ceilings with finish materials to match new finishes. D.Where plumbing is removed and capped below finish floor, core drill concrete floor as required using proper dust control methods as specified herein. Cap a minimum of 8” below floor. Patch hole with new concrete to match existing floor. 3.6REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING WORK A.Remove existing items, services, finishes or surfaces as required for installation of new construction. B.Repair, re-route, and extend services, piping and conduit of existing items and equipment as required during con- struction operations for installation and operation of new items and equipment. When existing equipment to remain is removed or relocated, re-install as required for proper operation. END OF SECTION 01731-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning052920 SECTION 01740 –CLEANING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Cleaning of building and site premisesincluded in the scope of contractual construction work. 2.Professional commercial post-construction cleaning of selected areas not affected by construction work for the purpose of aesthetic improvement. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01351 –Regulatory Compliance: a.Construction demolition waste management and disposal. b.Disposal and removal of hazardous construction and demolition waste. c.Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 2.Section 15410 –Plumbing Fixtures: Porcelain finish repair for water closet fixtures. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1.OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Professional Commercial Cleaning Qualifications: Commercial cleaning for building improvement as specified in Part 3 herein shall be performed by a firm regularly engaged in commercial cleaning for a continuous period of not less than 2 years. Firm shall be experienced in work of the nature and scale similar to this project. 1.4ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Dispose of construction and universal waste in accordance with requirementsof Section 01351 and local, state, and Federal regulatory codes and regulations. 1.Store volatile waste in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. 2.Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the project site. 3.Adhere to volatile fluid waste disposal and wastewater regulations. B.Minimize dust emissions or provide equipment that suppresses dust. 1.5DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B.Do not storeflammable materials or liquids in any part of the existing or new building premises. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1CLEANING MATERIALS A.Verify that selected cleaning products aremanufacturedaccording to local, state, and Federal regulations and that manufacturers are regularly engaged in the production of such products. 01740-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Verify that materials areclearly labeled. C.Usesolutions and products specifically formulated and recommended for cleaning the surfaces without damage to either the primary or adjacent surfaces. 1.Use only cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned. 2.Use cleaning productsonly on surfaces recommended by cleaning product material manufacturer. D.Use products that are not toxic or caustic to metal or acoustic surfaces. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1GENERAL A.Coordination and Scheduling: 1.Perform cleaning during periods when store is closed or during low traffic periods, typically between 10:00 pmand 6:00 am. 2.Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly-painted surfaces. 3.Coordinate cleaning schedule with store manager.Coordinate with and submit to Store Manager cleaning schedule at least 7 days prior to commencement of cleaning operations. B.Periodically inspect equipment to ensure equipment is operating optimally and safely. 1.Verify equipment is adequately diapered, hoseconnections are tight, and fasteners are secure. Repair leaks and provide maintenance where required. C.Each day,clearwork and access areas.Maintain premises free from accumulations of waste, debris,and rubbish caused by construction operations. D.Segregateand sort waste materials by type and class as directed by local, state, and Federal regulations. E.Do not leavecleaning materials unattended while in use. F.Clean each project phase when completed. G.Interior –General: 1.Vacuum cleaninterior building areason an as-needed basisand prior to areas receiving finish painting. 2.Use vacuum with HEPA-rated filter to clean concrete, masonry, gypsum board, stone and tile surfaces. H.Exterior –General: 1.Clean exterior premises daily. Keep streets and access to site free of rubbish and debris. 2.Do not allow exterior debris toenter customer areas. 3.Sprinkle dusty debris with fine water mist to control accumulation of dust. Avoid puddling. 3.2FINAL CLEANINGOF CONSTRUCTION AREAS A.Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection in areas which are included in the scope of construction and disrupted in the course of completion of the work as follows. 1.Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. 2.On exterior hard surfaces, do not use products or methods which may disturb natural weathering. 3.Clear construction waste from grounds and landscaped areas. 4.Clean construction waste from paved areas. If waste is silt or sand,useequipment fitted with a HEPA-rated filter. 5.Remove tools, construction equipment, and machinery. 6.Remove construction wastefrom limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, and attics. 7.Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. 01740-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 8.Vacuum construction dust and debris with HEPA-rated filter equipment.Removedebris and excess napfrom carpets; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. 9.Thoroughly clean any new flooring. 10.Remove glazing compounds and other vision-obscuring materialsfrom mirrors and reflective surfaces. Re- place chipped or broken glass. 11.Remove labels that are not permanent. 12.Touch up exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored. 13.Remove excess lubrication, paint, and mortar droppings, and other foreign substancesfrom mechanical and electrical equipment. 14.Clean stains from plumbing fixtures if exposed to water during construction. 15.Repair orreplace damaged light fixture lenses and fluorescent lamps and ballasts. a.Replacement fluorescent lamps and ballasts shall be furnished by Owner. All other light fixture parts shall be contractor provided. B.Leave premisesready for occupancy. 3.3COMMERCIAL CLEANING FOR BUILDING IMPROVEMENT A.In addition to final cleaning of contractual construction areas, perform professional commercial post-construction cleaning. B.Use high-filtration vacuums and other methods to ensure capture of respirable dust and environmental contaminants. C.Public (Customer) Restrooms: Thoroughly clean restrooms, including walls, floors, ceilings, plumbing fixtures, toi- let partitions, and accessories. 1.Existing ceramic floor tile: a.Vacuum as specified herein to remove loose debris. b.Apply cleaning product to entire floor and allow to sit on slab 10 minutes to allow product to penetrate grout joints and tile surface soil film. Rewet as necessary during dwell time to keep floor wet with cleaner. c.Scrub with medium bristle brush on slow speed electric buffing machine, making (2) passes minimum in alternating directions to ensure thorough cleaning. Use edging tool or deck brush in corners and around floor-mounted fixtures. d.Capture and remove rinse solution or dispose to floor drain. 2.Wall surfaces: a.Steam clean tiled wall surfaces. Wet vacuum residual waterand wipe dry to prevent surface film or residue. b.Do not steam clean painted gypsum board surfaces. Clean painted surfaces using products and meth- ods as recommended by the paint manufacturer. 3.Clean and polish stainless steel accessories and toilet partitions to a spotless luster using soap, ammonia, or mild detergent and water as recommended by the accessory or partition manufacturer. Alternatively, use a commercial stainless steel cleanerand polish as directed. 4.Clean mirror surfaces using glass cleaner. 5.Do not perform commercial building improvement cleaning in Associate restrooms. D.Vestibule:main customer Sales Areas: Perform floor to ceiling cleaningin the main customer sales areas and food tenant areas including the following. 1.Dust and wipe shelves, ledges, sills, slopes, walls, base, mill work, signage, and fixtures. 2.Polish interior and exterior storefront glazing. 3.Clean door hardware and electricalor cover plates. 4.Thoroughly clean existing floor: a.Steam clean textured concrete or porcelain tileflooring. b.Vacuum and shampoo existing carpets to a stain-free condition. 5.Clean tile or slab joints and corners. 6.Notify Owner’s StoreManager of items requiring attention including paint touch-ups or permanent spill stains. Notify Owner’s Construction Manager or other authorized Owner’s representativeof items requiring 01740-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 replacement or repair includingbut not limited to floor mats, lighting fixtures, cover plates, and grout or joint filler. 3.4FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Prior to Owner possession, conduct an inspection of entirepremiseswith Construction Manager to verify conformance with the requirements herein. END OF SECTION 01740-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning073120 SECTION 01770 -CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes 1.Closeout Procedures 2.Final Closeout Submittals 3.Closeout Document Submission. 4.Record Letters of Conformance 5.Letters of Certification 6.Project Record Documents 7.Operations and Maintenance Data 8.Warranties and Bonds B.Related Sections: 1.Section 01740 –Cleaning. Requirements for final cleaning. 1.2CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A.Comply with closeout submittal requirements defined within individual Sections. Submittals procedures described herein shall apply unless otherwise described in individual Sections. B.When Contractor considers Work to be Substantially Complete, submit written certification to Wal-Mart's Construction Manager as follows. 1.Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2.Work has been inspected. 3.Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents. 4.Work is ready for inspection. 1.3FINAL CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Definition: Closeout submittals are submittals specified in the individual sections as “Closeout” and shall not be otherwise considered a closeout document regardless of the type of submittal. Submittals not classified as a closeout submittal shall be considered a regular submittal under the provisions of Section 01330. For example: Maintenance Data may, or may not, be classified as a closeoutunless specifically identified as a closeout in the individual section Part 1 SUBMITTAL paragraph. B.Unless otherwise specified in the individual sections, submit closeout submittals to the Owner within 90 days after Substantial Completion of the Work. C.All closeout documents specified in the individual sections shall be submitted. Specific documents listed below shall be included separately in an Electronic Closeout Document Submission as specified hereinafter. D.Final closeout submittals shall be receivedand approved by Owner before final application for payment will be approved. 1.4CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS FOR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT A.Closeout documents for Owner furnished equipment as required and specified in Appendix Ashall be obtained directly from the Owner’s vendor, supplier, or manufacturer. When, or if, documents are unavailable directly from the vendor, Contact Realty Procurement Services for assistance in obtaining the required documents. 1.5ELECTRONIC CLOSEOUT DOCUMENT SUBMISSION 01770-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Submit closeout documents electronically through Owner’s online system. Documents included in Electronic Closeout Document Submission shall consist only of the items in the following numbered list. Note that all closeout documents are not necessarily included in the ElectronicCloseout Document Submission. If any item is not applicable, include a “Not Applicable” sheet within the uploaded section of the Electronic Closeout Document Submission. The Electronic Contract Document Submission shall not be compiled based only on the brief description of each item in the following list. It is compulsory that the individual sections and references be examined to comprehend the full description of the specific item to be included. Include the following: 1.Contractor's Statement of Warranty. (Reference Article 3.4 of the Construction Contract)(Referenceform included at end of this section.) 2.Copy of Certificate of Occupancy:Submit as Electronic Closeout Document by uploading an electronic file of the C of O to the Walmart Quickbase Certificate of Occupancy Tracking Application. 3.Subcontractor Assignment:Submit a finallist of Subcontractors used (Reference Article 3.5 of the Construction Contract.). Include the following information for each Subcontractor: a.Daytime and after-hours telephone numbers. b.Address. c.Quarterly expenditure detail. 4.Signed and notarized lien waivers from Contractor and all Subcontractors on the Wal-Mart form (Reference Article 5.3 and associated Exhibits of the Construction Contractl).The waiversshall have no modifications or changes made thereon. 5.Copies of Performance and Payment Bond. (Reference Article 7.5 of the Construction Contract) 6.Consent of Surety to Final Payment: From Bonding Company. (ReferenceArticle 5.3 of the Construction Contract.) 7.Substantial Completion Punchlist: Building, Civil, and HVAC/refrigeration punch lists showing items completed and approved by Owner. (Reference Article 5.2 of the Construction Contract.) 8.Asset Tag Data Collection Application: HVAC/Refrigeration equipment tag QR codes and data input into application and confirmed by Walmart in accordance with Sections 15050, 15600 and 15700. 9.Verification of transmittal to Store Manager of all Project Record Documents specified hereinafter and Operations and Maintenance Manuals. This shall be in the form of a Letter of Transmittal with a statement signed by the Store Manager verifying that the O&M manuals have been placed in the Electrical Distribution Center (EDC) by the Contractor and the placement witnessed by the Store Manager. 10.Warranties. Include warranties for the following as applicable when the specified Section is included in the project. a.Membrane Roofing. Submit Roofing Warranty included at the end of Roofing Section (Section 07530. Manufacturer’s standard warranty will not be considered as a substitute for the warranty included herein. 11.Letters of Certification: Include separate letter for each certification required within the sections listed below. a.Color Densification (Existing Integrally Colored Concrete Slabs) (Section 03931) b.Interior Concrete Slab Surface Enhancement (Section 03931) 12.Record Letters of Conformance: Include separate letter for each item listed below. a.Contractor Quality Control (Section 01452) b.Construction Testing Laboratory (Appendix B) 13.Inspection Reports: Include separate report for each required item listed below. a.Building Automation Systems: (Section 13810) 1)Pre-Checkout Forms. 2)Checkout Forms. b.Building Services Piping: (Section 15100) 1)Video Inspection Report. 2)Dye Testing Report(If specified). c.Refrigeration Equipment (Section 15600). 1)Start-upReport. 2)Building Performance Report. 3)Refrigerant Data Collections Forms. 4)Documents will be distributed by Walmart Mechanical Services. 14.Copy of Notice of Termination of NPDES Construction General Permit with proof of submittal to appropriate agency. Thisis only applicable for those permits issued to the General Contractor. (See Section 02370, if specified). B.If Contractor fails to provide a fully completed Electronic Closeout Document Submission within 90 days after 01770-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Substantial Completion of the Work, then Contractor agrees to pay Owner the sum of $250.00 per day, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, until the fully completed Electronic Closeout Document Submission is received and approved by Owner Contract Administration. 1.6RECORD LETTERS OF CONFORMANCE A.Submit Record Letters of Conformance as a Closeout Submittal. By submitting Record Letter of Conformance, the Contractor declares that the product identified by manufacturer's name and model number is the product specified and is suitable for the intended use as defined within the Contract Documents and has been provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the Contract Documents. 1.Submit completed Record Letter of Conformance for each product selected as indicated within each Section. 2.Fill-in required information on form and sign in ink by person authorized to sign on behalf of the Contractor. 3.No modifications shall be made to the form. 4.Record Letters of Conformance, when required, are located at the end of the respective Section. 1.7LETTERS OF CERTIFICATIONS A.Certify manufacturer's or installer's qualifications, conformance with tests or specified criteria, or other factors as required in individual specification sections. B.Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as required. C.Number of Copies Required: Two. 1.8PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: A.Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents. Record actual revisions to the Work. 1.Contract Drawings. (Building and Civil) 2.Specifications. 3.Addenda. 4.Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5.Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B.Maintain Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C.As-built Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Record as-builts shall be maintained and submitted for the primary purpose of recording the locations for concealed interior and exterior underground utilities as specified in the individual specifications. Legibly record actual measured horizontal and vertical locations of interior and exterior underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. D.Record required as-built information concurrent with construction progress. Do not permanently conceal workuntil required information has been recorded. E.At Project completion, the Contractor shall place the Record Documents (including Building and Civil Record Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, and Change Orders) enclosed in a plastic pipe tube (fixed cap at one end and a threaded-cap on the other end) for storage in the Electrical Room unless otherwise specified to be located in another location in the individual Sections. Placement shall be in the presence of and witnessed by the Store Manager. 1.9OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE DATA A.Operation and Maintenance data shall include a suitably bound set of descriptive literature, maintenance and operation data, and parts lists for each item of equipment provided under this Contract that will require maintenance or special operation procedures, including drawings, instructions, or manuals supplied with equipment furnished by others and installed under this Contract. Submittal of O&M data shall be in the form of placement by the Contractor of the bound set of O&M data in theElectrical Distribution Center (EDC) within the building. Do not include O&M data in the Closeout Document Book or submit to Wal-Mart Contract Administration. Placement of documents shall be witnessed by the Store Manager and shall be at least 14 days prior to final inspection. 01770-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.10WARRANTIES AND BONDS A.Prior to Final Application for Payment, submit required warranties and bonds in Closeout Document Submission. 1.Assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. 2.For equipment put into use with Owner's acceptance during construction, submit within ten days after first operation, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 3.For items of Work delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. END OF SECTION 01770-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 AFFIDAVIT OF TOTAL RELEASE AND CERTIFICATION OF ALL BILLS PAID Replaced by Construction Contract Par 5.3.2 and Exhibits 01770-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 \[CONTRACTOR’S LETTERHEAD\] CONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT OF WARRANTY DATE: PROJECT: LOCATION: OWNER:Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. th 702 SW 8Street Bentonville, AR 72712 CONTRACT: Construction Agreement Between Walmartand Contractor, dated______________20____. General Contractor hereby: (1) warrants that the Work for Project complies with Article 3.4 of the Construction Contract; (2) acknowledges that its warranty obligations under such Article 3.4extends one year beyond the actual date of Substantial Completion of the Project; and (3) affirms, and acknowledges the enforceability of, all other warranties made by Contractor in the Contract. Terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to them in the above referenced Contract. The undersignedContractor hereby makes the certifications set forth herein to Walmartas of the _______day of _____________________, 20______. Witness: Contractor: _______________________ _______________________________________By: _____________________________ Print Name: _____________________________Name: __________________________ Title: ___________________________ STATE OF______________________________ COUNTY OF ___________________________ On this the ______________ day of _______________________________________, 20_______ before me, a Notary Public, within and for the State and County aforesaid, personally appeared, to me well know (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence), who stated upon oath that (s)he had executed the foregoing instrument for the consideration set forth therein. ____________________________________________ Notary Public My commission expires: ________________________ 01770-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning091017 SECTION 02023 -SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Procedures for demolition and removal of existing building elements. 2.Protection of existing construction. 3.Salvaged material and items. 4.Schedule of building demolition. 5.Disposal of demolished materials (non-hazardous and hazardous). B.Related Sections: 1.Section 01100 -Summary: Restrictions for Work within and adjacent to existing building areas. 2.Section 01351 -Compliance: a.Removal and disposal of relilient flooring and acoustical ceiling tile to be recycled. b.Removal and disposal of hazardous construction and demolition waste. c.Removal and disposal of non-hazardous demolition waste and debris and management of salvaged items. d.Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 3.Section 01500 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary protection and barriers. Removal and disposal of demolished materials. 4.Section 01700 -Execution Requirements. 5.Section 01731 -Cutting and Patching: Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching Work. 6.Section 02251 -Shoring: Requirements for shoring and bracing. 1.2REFERENCES A.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1.OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Selective Demolition Requirements: 1.Perform demolition in construction sequence phases as required by the scope of Work and as agreed upon with the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 2.Work necessary and required to facilitate the new construction indicated. 3.Demolish so that construction, new and existing, can be performed and completed in accordance with construction documents. 4.Visit the project site and become familiar with the existing conditions and project requirements. 5.Clarify the scope of the Work under this Section including salvage material. The Owner will be responsible for removing materials and equipment which the Owner wishes to salvage prior to the beginning of this Work. 6.Retain existing fire protection sprinkler system in place and active. 7.Contractor is responsible for damage to existing structure and replacement or repair of damage. 8.Repair, replace, or rebuild existing construction as required or as directed which has been removed, altered, or disrupted to allow for new construction. Correct existing construction to match adjacent construction, new or existing as specified in Section 01731. B.Regulatory Requirements: 1.Conform to applicable code for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures, runoff control, and disposal. 2.Comply with applicable local and state dust control regulations. 3.Obtain required permits from authorities having jurisdiction and submit to Wal-Mart. 02023-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 4.Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. Submit Certificates for severance of utility services and submit confirmation documentation of all utility company contacts to Wal-Mart. 5.Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or hydrants without permits from authorities having jurisdiction and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 6.Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous,contaminated, and universal wastematerials. 7.Test soils around buried tanks for contamination (where buried tanks occur). 1.4PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Owner will continuously occupy areas of building immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. Work within and adjacent to existing building areas will be restricted to areas and hours specified in Section 01700. B.Conditions of Structure: 1.Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. 2.Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practical. 3.Variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work. C.Traffic: Conduct selective demolitionand debris removal in manner to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Provide traffic controls as specified in Section 01500. 1.5QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Qualifications: Engage only personnel who can demonstrate not less that five (5) years successful experience in Work of similar character. B.Performance Criteria: 1.Requirements of Structural Work: Do not cut structural work in a manner resulting in a reduction of load- carrying capacity of load/deflection ratio. 2.Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut operational elements and safety-related components in a manner resulting in a reduction of capacities to perform in a manner intended or resulting in a decreased operational life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety. 3.Visual Requirements: Do not cut work which is exposed on the exterior or exposed in occupied spaces of the building in a manner resulting in a reduction of visual qualities or resulting in substantial evidence of the demolitionwork judged by the Architect to be cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 4.Loading: Do not superimpose loads at any point upon existing structure beyond design capacity including loads attributable to materials, construction equipment, demolition operations, and shoring and bracing. 5.Vibration: Do not use means, methods, techniques, or procedures which would induce vibration into any element of the structure. 6.Fire: Do not use means, methods, techniques, or procedures which would produce any fire hazard. 7.Water: Do not use means, methods, techniques, or procedures which would produce water run-off, and water pollution.Refer to Section 01500 for related requirements. 8.Air Pollution: Do not use means, methods, techniques or procedures which would produce uncontrolled dust, fumes, or other damaging air pollution. 1.6UTILITY SERVICES A.Maintain existing utilities. Keep in service and protect against damage during demolition operations. B.Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction and approval by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. C.Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities as acceptable to governing authorities. 02023-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services not to remain. E.Provide by-pass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. F.Provide advance notice to Wal-Mart if shut-down of service is necessary during change-over. 1.7PROJECT SITE A.Indicated "Existing Construction" was obtained from existing drawings. Verify existing conditions and notify the Wal-Mart Construction Manager of discrepancies before proceeding with the Work. B.Perform removal, cutting, drilling, etc., of existing work with extreme care, and use small tools in order not to jeopardize the structural integrity of the building. C.Occupancy: Contractor will have limited use of the facility during construction as specified in Section 01700. D.Condition of Structure: The Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of portions of the structure to be demolished. E.Protection: Ensure that the safe passage of persons around the area of demolition is provided. Conduct operations to prevent damage to adjacent buildings, structures, and other facilities, and injury to persons. 1.8SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.Comply with Wal-Mart approved schedule for sequence of operations for selective demolition work. B.Include coordination for shut-off, capping, and continuation of utilityservices as required, together with details for dust and noise control. C.Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations. D.Conduct selective demolition work in manner to minimize disruption of Owner's normal operations. E.Provide Wal-Mart advance notice of demolition activities impacting Wal-Mart's normal operations as specified in Section 01700. 1.9SHORING AND BRACING A.Provide temporary shoring, bracing and supports for building structure as required for support of structure during demolition of existing structural elements and to prevent movement, settlement of existing building and adjacent buildings and facilities to remain as specified in Section 02251. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1MATERIALS A.Designated materials and equipment for re-installation: Carefully remove, store, and protect. B.Wal-Mart Salvage: Clean, store, and transfer designated materials and equipment to Owner, and obtain receipt. Wal-Mart salvage items include but are not limited to: 1.Store fixtures. 2.Storage racks. 3.Store equipment. 4.Salvage items as indicated on Drawings. C.Contractor's Salvage: 02023-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.Contractor shall verify with and obtain approval from Wal-Mart Construction Manager for all Contractor salvage items prior to their removal from site. 2.Transport salvaged items from site as items are removed. 3.Storage or sale of removed items on site not permitted. D.Replace materials scheduled for reuse which are damaged to the extent that they cannot be reused. Replace with equal quality material at no additional cost to the Owner as specified in Section 01700. E.Coordinate with the Owner on disposition of salvage items not scheduled for reuse, demolished materials, and equipment. Deliver salvaged materials, not reused, as directed, by or to the Owner. F.Prior to performing any demolition, coordinate with EMS contractor for EMS controls/equipment required to be reused or salvaged. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine surfaces and adjacent areas of Work under this Section. Do not proceed withWork until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B.Starting Work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2PREPARATION A.Ensure safe passage of persons around area of demolition. B.Erect temporary covered passageways as specified in Section 01500. C.Protect existing finish work to remain in place. D.Protect floors with suitable coverage. E.Construct temporary insulated solid dustproof partitions where noise or extensive dirt or dust operations are performed. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks if required as specified in Section 01500. F.Provide temporary weather protection between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building as specified in Section 01500. G.Cease operations and notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. H.Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. I.Cover and protect furniture, equipment, and fixtures to remain from soiling or damage when demolition work is performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed. 3.3DEMOLITION A.Demolition work within existing building shall be scheduled with the Wal-Mart Construction Manager for approved times of day. 1.Submit written request for approval to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager 14 calendar days in advance of the date Contractor demolition work is required to begin in the existing building. B.The Owner will remove or, under separate contract, have materials and equipment which the Owner requires removed, prior to commencement of Work under this Section. Coordinate scheduling of removal of Owner 02023-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 materials and equipment with Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Store Manager. C.Demolition: 1.Perform demolition work in systematic manner. 2.Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. 3.Perform cutting or existing concrete and masonry construction with saws and core drills using proper dust control methods as specified herein. Do not use jack-hammers, except as specified herein. Do not use explosives. a.Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using masonry saws or hand tools, and make cuts straight and square with building. 4.Do not use powder-driven impact tools. 5.Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floor, or framing. 6.Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the work. 7.Where selective demolition terminates at a "surface" or construction "to remain," completely remove all traces of material selectively demolished, including mortar beds. Provide smooth,even substrate transition as specified in Section 01731. 8.Demolition shall be carried out in a safe manner and in strict accordance with OSHA regulations. 9.The Contractor shall field verify the extent of demolition. The Work includes, but is not limited to,the demolition and removal of walls, doors, fixtures, plumbing, mechanical and electrical items including conduits and ductwork as shown on Drawing or as required for the installation of the new Work for a complete job. 10.When utilities are removed, cap andseal a minimum of 8" below finish floor or a minimum of 6" above finish ceiling. 11.When removing existing structural items, provide adequate shoring, bracing and support systems to keep the existing structure intact and in a safe condition. Refer to Section02251. D.Demolition of Interior Slabs on Grade: 1.Use removal methods that will not crack, undermine or structurally disturb adjacent slabs or partitions. 2.At interior concrete slabs on grade to receive floor coverings as final finish, minimum width of trench shall be as required to allow for compacting machine to properly compact the base. Manual compaction methods are not acceptable. 3.At interior concrete slabs on grade to receive exposed concrete finish (sealed or unsealed), demolish existing interior slab on grade as shown on the Drawings. No trenching shall be allowed in areas to receive exposed concrete finish. 4.Prior to proposed cutting, install 36” wide rosin paper outside of area to be removed in order to reduce scarring of slab which is to remain. E.Environmental Controls: 1.Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other proper controlmethods to maintain airbornedust and dirt below permissible levels. 2.Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 3.Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, or pollution. 4.For work scheduled in this section including cutting and breaking of masonry, concrete slab below or on grade, walls, foundation work, or footings, use tools equipped with integrated water delivery systems that continuously feed water to the blade or a HEPA-rated filter dust collection vacuum system recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. F.Below Grade Demolition: 1.Demolish and remove below grade wood or metal construction. 2.Break up below grade concrete slabsusing proper dust control methods as specified herein. G.Filling Below-Grade Voids: 1.Fill below grade areas and voids resulting from demolition work. 2.Use fill consisting of earth, gravel, or sand, free of trash and debris, stones over 6 inches diameter, roots, or 02023-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 other organic matter. H.If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements conflicting with intended function or design are encountered, submit written report of nature and extent of conflict to Architect and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Rearrange demolition schedule to continue job progress without delay. 3.4DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A.Dispose of non-hazardousand universal wastedemolished materials as specified in Regulatory Compliance Section 01351. B.Deposit waste materials, rubbish, and debris in waste containers. C.Do not allow waste materials, rubbish, and debris to accumulate and become an unsightly or hazardous condition. D.If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager, in writing, of hazardousmaterials encountered. 3.5POLLUTION CONTROLS A.Use temporary enclosures and other proper controlmethods to maintain airbornedust and dirt below permissible levels. B.Comply with governing authorities pertaining to environmental protection. C.Clean adjacent portion of the structure and improvement of dust, dirt and debris caused by demolition operations, as directed by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager and governing authorities. Return adjacent areas to conditions existing prior to the start of the work. D.Burning of trash, debris, or removed materials not permitted on site. 3.6SCHEDULE OF SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A.Remove and dispose of existing building items and adjacent sitework items as required for Work and as indicated on Drawings. B.Sitework Adjacent to Building: 1.Fencing, gates and concrete post footings. 2.Asphalt concrete paving. 3.Metal handrails and railings. C.Interior or Exterior Slab on Grade: 1.Locate portion of existing concrete slab to be removed. Saw cut perimeter or existing slab minimum of 50- percent of slab thickness to provide a breaking point to remove existing concrete. 2.Wet saw concrete slabs along straight lines tominimumdepth of 2-incheswhere concrete is to be removed. The method of removal shall maintain the undamaged slab edge within the sawed line. Jack hammers may be used only “after hours” and with permission from the Owner’s Construction Manager.Jack hammers may not be usedat any timeto remove/cut concrete from the existing slab, but only to break up concrete which has already been saw cut from the concrete slab. a.Jack hammers shall be equipped with field assembled water delivery systems that supply a continuous stream or spray of water at the point of impact or HEPA-rated filter dust collection vacuum system recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. 3.Break concrete slab to be removed into portions easily removed, maximum 30-inchdimension at any side. 4.Remove concrete pieces within area of slab demolitiondown to the existing subgrade. 02023-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.Exterior Masonry: 1.Locate portion of existing masonry wall to be removed. Units which are removed: "tooth" from existing construction. 2.Verify that temporary supports, enclosures, and bracing are in place and adequate for intended purpose. 3.Remove only that portion of the exterior wall which is required for the indicated new construction. E.Below Grade Construction: 1.Remove below grade construction including foundation work, column footings, and abandon mechanical, plumbing, and electrical work as indicated. F.Interior Walls and Partitions: 1.Remove interior walls and partitions as indicated. 2.Remove all top and bottom framing tracks and overhead braces of partitions being removed. G.Doors and Frames: 1.Remove hollow metal doors and frames. 2.Remove aluminum storefront doors and frames. 3.Remove aluminum automatic doors and frames, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. H.Interior Finishes: 1.Removal and recycling or reclamation of vinyl composition tile flooring (VCT) acoustical ceiling tile (ACT) and Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) plank flooring is specified in the Attachments to Compliance Specification Section 01351. I.Mechanical System: 1.Remove mechanical equipment and related ductwork as indicated. 2.Provide temporary weathertight protection of openings in roof and exterior walls. 3.Remove accessories tothe mechanical system including, but not limited to, hanger straps. J.Plumbing: 1.Remove plumbing fixtures and accessories including exposed supply, waste, and vent piping as indicated. 2.Identify concealed piping within and below slab construction, and cap a minimum of 3 inches below finish floor unless otherwise noted. K.Electrical Service: 1.Remove abandoned electrical fixtures, conduit, boxes, and wiring as indicated. 2.Remove electrical circuits including conduitas indicated. L.Lighting: 1.Remove existing light fixtures as indicated or as required for new construction. END OF SECTION 02023-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning052507 SECTION 02251 -SHORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Shoring at excavations and building structural and non-structural elements required to provide temporary support during excavating, demolition, and construction operations. 2.Temporary protection including without limits forconstruction workers, materials, existing construction other adjacent properties, and public. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 01700 -Execution Requirements: Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching Work. 2.Section 01731 -Cutting and Patching. 3.Section 02023 -Selective Site Demolition: Procedures for demolition and removal of existing building ele- ments. 1.2DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A.Design and provide shoring to safely prevent collapse of materials and structures and to permit construction operations to proceed in conformance with construction sequence phases indicated on Drawings. 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Provide design of shoring by professional civil or structural engineer licensed in State in which project is located. Send design to Wal-Mart Construction Manager for documentation of this service. B.Coordinate shoring design and construction with: 1.Soil Investigation Report prepared for this project (if applicable). 2.Building structural system, including without limits to locations of footings, columns, pilasters, walls, and other related structural elements. C.Comply with pertinent requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). D.The Contractor shall be responsible for means and methods of shoring and temporary support and for the sequences and procedures to be used. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MATERIALS A.Provide materials as required for shoring system design. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where Work under this Section will be performed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B.Starting Work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. Be responsible for correcting unsatisfactory and defective Work encountered after starting Work. 3.2INSTALLATION 02251-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Install shoring system in accordance with shoring design drawings. B.Coordinate placement of shoring system elements with existing Work and approved demolition procedures as specified in Section 02023. C.Perform cutting and patching required by installation of shoring in accordance with approved Cutting and Patching Proceduresand Sequencing Plan as specified in Section 01731. 3.3FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Shoring Design Engineer: Inspect and approve shoring materials and installation prior to start of any demolition work. B.Submit inspection report to Wal-Mart Construction Manager. ENDOF SECTION 02251-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning092520 SECTION 02320 -EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Trenching and backfilling for utilities. B.Related Sections 1.Division 3 –Subbase requirements for granular subbase below building slabs. 2.Section 03531–Architectural Concrete Overlayment: Hydraulic cement overlay and polished concrete floor finish by Owner’s Preferred Flooring Contractoron trenched slab in customer view. 3.Section 03366 –PVC/VCT Removal and Polished Concrete Floor Finishes for Interior Slabs: Polished concrete floor finish for exposed slab whenresilient floor tile removal is primary scope for Owner’s Preferred Flooring Contractor. a.Quality Assurance, Preferred Flooring Contractors, equipment, preparation, and polish process for architectural concrete overlay. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. 1.3COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A.Trenching of Exposed Slab in Customer Areas: 1.Coordinate with Owner’s Preferred Flooring Contractor for customer area trench locations and PFC’s floor finish schedule. 2.Coordinate timely procurement of trench fill fast-setting concrete products described in Part 2 herein. 1.4QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Satisfactory Materials: ASTMD2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, SM, ML, CL, CH, MH, SC, GC, or a combination of these group symbols. 1.Fill material shall further conform to the plasticity index and liquid limits (PI and LL) specified in Paragraph FILLING hereinafter. 2.Satisfactory materials shall be free of rock or gravel larger than allowed for fill or backfill material as specified hereinafter or as shown on the drawings. 3.Satisfactory materials shall contain nodebris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. 4.Unless specifically stated otherwise in "Foundation Subsurface Preparation" on the Drawings, the following table stipulates maximum allowable values for plasticity index (PI) and liquid limit (LL) of satisfactory materials to be used as fill in specified areas: LocationPILL Building area (below upper four feet)2050 Building area (upper four feet)1240 (References to depth are to finished floor elevation) B.Unsatisfactory Materials: Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials are unsatisfactoy. 02320-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.Unsatisfactory materials also include man-made fills; trash; refuse; backfills from previous construction; and material classifiedas satisfactory materials which contains root and other organic matter or frozen material. The CTLshall be notified of any contaminated materials. 2.Unsatisfactory materials also include satisfactory materials not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. 1.5SUBMITTALS A.Trenching of Exposed Slab in Non-Customer Areas: 1.Submit 30-pound sample of each type of off-site fill material that is to be used at the site in airtight containers to the constructiontesting laboratory or submit gradation and certification of aggregate material that is to be used at the site to the constructiontesting laboratory for review. 2.Submit certification that all material obtained from off-site sources complies with specification requirements. 3.Submit name of each material supplier and specific type and source of each material. Change in source throughout project requires approval of Owner. 4.Submit Dewatering Plans upon request by Owner. B.Shop drawings or details pertaining to excavating and filling are not required unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or if contrary procedures to Construction Documents are proposed. C.Shop drawings or details pertaining to site utilities are not required unless required by regulatory authorities or unless uses of materials, methods, equipment, or procedures that are contrary to The Drawings or Specifications are proposed. Do not perform work until Owner has accepted required shop drawings. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1EXPOSED SLAB IN CUSTOMER AREAS: PRODUCTS A.Products for Exposed Slab Trenching in Customer View Areas:Provide the following fast-setting fill and epoxy primer materialsfor trenches on floors in customer access and customer visible areas: 1.Fast-Setting Fill Material: Non-metallic, high strength,cementitious structural repair material. Provide Rapid Set Concrete MixbyCTS Cement Manufacturing Corp., Garden Grove, CA, (800) 929-3030, info@ctscement.com. 2.Concrete Overlay Primer Material: Low odor, two-component, alkali resistant epoxy primer. pH resistant, 0 VOC. Provide Rapid Set TXP Fast Epoxy Primerby CTS. a.Primer Broadcast: Clean, #20 or #30 mesh silica sand. B.Concrete overlaymentproducts for the finished floor are specified in Section 03531 and are the responsibility of Owner’s Preferred Flooring Contractor. C.Provide fast-setting and primer products by the manufacturer listed herein. No substitutions allowed. 2.2EXPOSED SLAB IN NON-CUSTOMER AREAS: MATERIALS A.Soil and Rock Materials: 1.Fill and Backfill. Satisfactory materials excavated from the site. 2.Imported Fill Material: Satisfactory material provided from offsite borrow areas when sufficient satisfactory materials are not available from required excavations. 3.Trench Backfill: ASTM D 2321 unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings. 4.Building Subbase Material: Subbase for building and appurtenances slabs on ground is specified in Section 03314as applicable. 5.Bedding: Aggregate Type as indicated on the plans or naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTMD2940; except with 100 percent passing a1-inchsieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No.200sieve. 6.Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTMD448; coarse-aggregate grading Size57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inchsieve and 0 to5 percent passing a No.8sieve. 02320-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 7.Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTMD448; coarse-aggregate grading Size67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inchsieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No.4sieve. B.Equipment: 1.Transport off-site materials to project using well-maintained and operating vehicles. Once on site, transporting vehicles shall stay on designated haul roads and shall at no time endanger improvements by rutting, overloading, or pumping. C.Source Quality Control: 1.The Owner will perform testing of materials proposed for use in the project as specified in Appendix B (Section 02320). 2.The Contractor shall provide samples of material obtained off-site. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1GENERAL PREPARATION A.Identify required lines, levels, contours, datum, elevations, and grades necessary for construction as shown on the drawings. B.Locate and identify existing utilities that are to remain and protect from damage. C.Maintain in operating condition existing utilities,previously installed utilities, and drainage systems encountered in utility installation. Repair surface or subsurface improvements shown on The Drawings. D.Verify location, size, elevation, and other pertinent data required making connections to existing utilities and drainage systems as indicated on The Drawings. 3.2GENERAL EXCAVATION A.Classification of Excavation: Verify type, quantity, quality, and character of excavation work to be performed. Excavation shall be considered unclassified excavation, exceptas indicated in the Contract Documents. B.Shore, brace, and drain excavations as necessary to maintain excavation as safe, secure, and free of water at all times. C.Place satisfactory excavated material into project fill areas. D.Unsatisfactory excavated material shall be disposed of in manner and location that is acceptable to Owner and local governing agencies. E.Perform excavation using capable, well-maintained equipment and methods acceptable to Owner and local governing agencies. 3.3TRENCHING EXCAVATION FOR UTILITIES A.Sawcut existing concrete slab and hand dig trench at proper width and depth for laying pipe, conduit, or cable. Cut trench banks vertical, if possible, and remove stones from bottom of trench as necessary to avoid point-bearing. Over-excavate wet or unstable soil, if encountered, from trench bottom as necessary to provide suitable base for continuous and uniform bedding. Replace over-excavation with satisfactory material and dispose of unsatisfactory material. B.Trench excavation sidewalls shall be sloped, shored, sheeted, braced, or otherwise supported by means of sufficient strength to protect workmen in accordance with applicable rules and regulations established for construction by the Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), and by local ordinances. Lateral travel distance to exit ladder or steps shall not be greater than 25 feet in trenches 4 feet or deeper. 02320-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Perform trench excavation as indicated on the Drawings for specified depths. During excavation, stockpile materials suitable for backfilling in orderly manner far enough from bank of trench to avoid overloading, slides, or cave-ins. D.Remove excavated materials not required or not satisfactory as backfill or embankments and waste off-site or aton- site locations approved by the Owner and in accordance with governing regulations. E.Accurately grade trench bottom to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe on bedding material at every point along entire length except where necessary to excavate for bell holes, proper sealing of pipe joints, or other required connections. Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after trench bottom has been graded. Dig no deeper, longer, or wider than needed to make joint connection properly. F.Trench width below top of pipe shall not be less than 12 inches nor more than 18 inches wider than outside surface of pipe or conduit that is to be installed to designated elevations and grades. Other trench width for pipe, conduit, or cable shall be least practical width that will allow for proper compaction of trench backfill. G.Trench depth requirements measured from finished slab shall meet the following requirements or applicable codes and ordinances, whichever is more stringent: 1.Sanitary Sewer: Elevations and grades as indicated on the drawings and as specified in Section 02535. 3.4PIPE BEDDING A.Excavate trenches for pipe or conduit to 4 inches below bottom of pipe and to the width as specified herein. Place 4 inches of bedding material, compact in bottom of trench, and shape to conform to lower portion of pipe barrel. 3.5TRENCH BACKFILLING-GENERAL A.Materials used for trench backfill shall comply with requirements as specified herein. B.Backfill and compact in accordance with fill and compaction requirements inaccordance with ASTM D 2321 unless otherwise shown on the drawings. C.Do not backfill trenches until required tests are performed and utility systems comply with and are accepted by applicable governing authorities. D.Backfill trenches as shown on the Drawings. E.Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen, or spongy subgrade surfaces. 3.6COMPACTION A.Compact as follows: Percent of Maximum Laboratory Density LocationASTM D698ASTM D1557 Utility Trench Backfill9895 B.Maintain moisture content of not less than 1 percent below and not more than 3 percent above optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. C.Exercise proper caution when compacting immediately over top of pipes or conduits. Water jetting or flooding is not permittedas method of compaction. D.Corrective Measures for Non-Complying Compaction: Remove and recompact deficient areas until proper compaction is obtained. Areas continually failing shall be stabilized at no additional cost to Owner. Notify the Architect of Record and the Wal-Mart Construction Manager should soil stabilization be required. 3.7TRENCHING –EXPOSED SLAB IN CUSTOMER AREAS 02320-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Preparation: Saw-cut existing exposed slab as shown on Drawings. B.Trench to dimensions shown on Drawings and verify condition of subgrade as specified herein. C.Set #3 round dowel joint reinforcement bar and forms as shown on Drawings. 3.8TRENCH BACKFILLING –EXPOSED SLABIN CUSTOMER AREAS A.Mix fast-setting cement in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and place to ½ inch below finished floor.Hand trowel surface. B.Allowcement mixto self-cure.If necessary, use an evaporative slowing additive such as Set Control Set Retarding Admixture by CTS Rapid Set. 1.Begin preparations for applying epoxy primer after allowing cement mix to set for approximately 3 hours and mix has reached 3600 psi. C.Apply epoxy primeras specified in Section 03531. Do not allow primer to bleed or spread onto trench side walls, as staining will result in finished floor. D.Leave filled trench prepared and suitable for Owner’s Preferred Flooring Contractor to begin floor finish work. Provide protection over trench area as specified in Part 3 below. 3.9MAINTENANCE OF SUBGRADE A.Verify finished subgrades to ensure proper elevation and conditions for construction above subgrade. B.Remove areas of finished subgrade found to have insufficient compaction density to depth necessary and replace in manner that will comply with compaction requirements by use of material with CBR or LBR equal to or better than that specified on the drawings. Surface of subgrade after compaction shall be firm, uniform, smooth, stable, and true to grade and cross-section. 3.10BORROW AND SPOIL SITES A.Comply with NPDES and local erosion control permitting requirements for any and all on-site and off-site, disturbed spoil and borrow areas. Upon completion of spoil or borrow operations, clean up spoil or borrow areas in a neat and reasonable manner to the satisfaction of Owner or off-site property owner, if applicable. 3.11SLAB PROTECTION IN CUSTOMER AREAS A.Provide stable protection board overbackfilled trenches on slab in customer access and customer view areas. 1.If Owner’s Preferred Flooring Contractor is not scheduled to begin installation of concrete overlayment and floor finish immediately, continue maintainingprotection boarduntil PFC’s work begins. 3.12FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Except as specified as mandatory, field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. Owner T&I specified in Appendix B shall not preclude Contractor’s responsibility to perform similar routine, necessary, and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. 3.13OWNERTESTING AND INSPECTION (T&I) A.The Owner will perform testing and inspection as specified in Appendix B (02320). END OF SECTION 02320-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II –Store Planning032720 SECTION 02765-PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes 1.Re-painting of sidewalk striping as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Authority Having Jurisdic- tion (AHJ). a.If existing sidewalk striping at curb is for fire lane, re-paint associated fire lane striping in drive lane, if applicable. 2.Modifications to parking stall striping and emblems. a.For New OGP Activations:Do not use “Knockout Orange”. Match existing parking stall striping color. b.For Existing OGP Locations with Scheduled Work and for Remodel/Superbundle Projects: No em- blem. If existing, refresh and cover orange with a sealcoat . Match new and/or updated stalls to exist- ing parking stall striping color. c.For Maintenance: No orange parking stalls or emblem. If restriping the lot, match existing parking stall striping color. 3.Pavement Directional Markings: a.For New OGP Activations: Discontinue use of Pickup Pavement Signage throughout site and all di- rectional Pickup pavement signage with or without arrows. b.For Existing OGP Locations with Scheduled Work and for Remodel/Superbundles: Let Pavement directional markings fade and do not replace. c.For Maintenance: Let Pavement directional markings fade and do not replace. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01351 –Regulatory Compliance: a.Disposal and removal of hazardous construction and demolition waste. b.Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 2.Section 02787–Seal Coat: Work practice control methods for Polymer modified asphalt emulsion seal coat- site blended with fine aggregate. 1.2REFERENCE STANDARDS A.American Association of State Highway and Transportation (AASHTO) 1.AASHTO M247 -Glass Beads Used in Traffic Paints 2.AASHTOM248-Ready-Mixed White and Yellow Traffic Paints B.ASTM International(ASTM) 1.ASTM D4259 –Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete. 2.ASTM D4414-Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notched Gauges. C.Federal Specifications (FS) 1.FS A-A-2886-Paint, Traffic, Solvent Based 2.FS TT-B-1325-Beads (Glass Spheres) Retro-Reflective 3.FS TT-P-1952-Paint, Traffic And Airfield Marking, Waterborne D.Master Painter’s Institute (MPI): 1.MPI 32 –Traffic Marking Paint, Solvent Based. 2.MPI 97 –Traffic Marking Paint, Latex. E.The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1.SSPC-SP13 –Surface Preparation of Concrete. 02765-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.3ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Minimize dust emissions and provide equipment that suppresses dust. B.Dispose of construction waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01351 Regulatory Compliance Sup- plement. 1.4PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize Temporary Controls specified in Section 01500as required. 1.5QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Useexperiencedpersonneltrained in applying the products and operating the equipment required for properly per- formed work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MATERIALS A.Paint shall be waterborne or solvent borne.Pavement markings shall comply with all applicable local ordinances and state laws enacted to ensure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards. Paint materials shall conform to the restrictions of the local Air Pollution Control District, if applicable. B.Waterborne Paint: Paintsshall conform to FS TT-P-1952and have MPI 97 approval. C.Solvent Borne Paint: Paint shall conform to FS A-A-2886or AASHTO M248and have MPI 32 approval.Paint shall be non-bleeding, quick-drying, and alkyd petroleum-basedpaint suitable for traffic-bearing surface,and shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before applicationfor colors white, yellow, blue, and red. D.Glass Beads: AASHTOM247, Type1 or FSTT-B-1325, Type1, Gradation A. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be applied and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B.Beginning of application indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2PREPARATION A.Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. B.Prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with paint manufacturer's written instructions. C.Where existing pavement markings are indicated on Construction Drawings to be removed or would interfere with adhesion of new paint, sodium bicarbonate (soda) blasting shall be used to remove the markings. Equipment em- ployed shall not damage existing paving or create surfaces hazardous to vehicle or pedestrian traffic and shall be equipped with a manufacturer’s recommended mist system for dust suppression. Within public rights-of-way, ap- propriate governing authority shall approve method of marking removal. D.New pavement surfaces shall beallowed to cure for not lessthan 30 days before application of marking materials. 02765-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.3APPLICATION A.Where applicable, apply two coats of new or existingcolor of paint as specified below at manufacturer's recom- mended rate, without addition of thinner, with maximum of 100 square feet per gallon or as required to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils and dry film thickness of 7 ½ mils per coat. Paint shall be applied for a total dry film thickness of 15 mils. Apply with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Use straight- edge to ensure uniform, clean, and straight stripe. B.Install parking stall striping and emblemsaccording to manufacturer's recommended procedures for the specified material. C.The following items shall be painted with colors noted below: 1.Exterior Sidewalk Striping: Match existing. 2.Fire LaneStriping: Red or per local code. 3.Modifications to parking stall striping and emblems: a.For New OGP Activations: Do not use “Knockout Orange”. Match existing parking stall striping color. b.For Existing OGP Locations with Scheduled Work and for Remodel/Superbundle Projects: No em- blem. If existing, refresh and cover orange with a sealcoat in accordance with the requirements of Section 02787. Match new and/or updated stalls to existing parking stall striping color. c.For Maintenance: No orange parking stalls or emblem. If restriping the lot, match existing parking stall striping color. D.Install pavement directional markings according to manufacturer's recommended procedures for the specified ma- terial. 1.Pavement Directional Markings: a.For New OGP Activations: Discontinue use of Pickup Pavement Signage throughout site and all di- rectional Pickup pavement signage with or without arrows. b.For Existing OGP Locations with Scheduled Work and for Remodel/Superbundles: Let Pavement directional markings fade and do not replace. c.For Maintenance: Let Pavement directional markings fade and do not replace. E.Apply glass beads at pedestrian crosswalk striping and at lane striping and arrows at driveways connecting to public streets.Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. 3.4FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. 3.5MAINTENANCE OF WORK AREA A.As work proceeds, remove paint where spilled, splashed, or splattered. B.Keep premises free from unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C.Collect waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.6CLEANING A.Upon completion of the work,leave premises neat and clean. All containers and debris shall be removed from the site. B.Paint spots upon adjacent surfaces shall be carefully removed by approved procedures that will not damage the surfaces. 02765-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 END OF SECTION 02765-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II062918 SECTION 02787(32 1236)-SEAL COAT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Polymer modified asphalt emulsion seal coatsite blended with fine aggregate. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.ASTM International (ASTM) 1.ASTM C136–Method of Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate 2.ASTM D 8099 –Standard Specification for Asphalt Emulsion Pavement Sealer 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Contractor Qualifications: The seal coat applicatorshall have not less than 3 years documented experience in the application of emulsion seal coats. 1.4SITECONDITIONS A.Weather Limitations: Apply seal coat only under the following weather conditions: 1.The atmospheric temperature is between 50 and 90 F, has been above 32 F for 24 hours,and is expected to remain above 50 F for 24 hours. 2.Pavement temperature is above 55 F. 3.Surface is dry and no moisture is expected within 24 hours. 4.Weather and wind conditions are such that overspray is preventable and will allow proper curing and opening to traffic within a reasonable time. B.Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager.Utilize temporary striping, flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide seal coat products by one of the following: 1.GemSeal Pavement Products, Charlotte, NC (866) 264-8273. 2.SealMaster Pavement Products & Equipment, (800) 395-7325. 3.Star Specialty Technology and Research, Columbus, OH (800) 759-1912. 2.2PRODUCTS A.Water-based, polymer modified asphalt emulsion seal coatformulated for site-mixing with water and aggregateper ASTM 8099. Provide one of the following: 1.Black Diamond XL, by GemSeal. 2.Polymer Modified Masterseal (PMM), by SealMaster. 3.Micro-Pave Pro-Blend Professional Grade Asphalt Emulsion Pavement Sealer, by Star. B.Do not use products with pre-blended aggregate. 02787-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Coal Tar: Coal tar emulsion or coal tar/asphalt emulsion shall not be used as a substitute for asphalt emulsion. 2.3ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.Sand/Aggregate: Sand shall be clean, hard, and irregular silica sand,free of dust, trash, clay, organic materials or other contaminants.When tested in accordance with ASTM C 136, sand with AFS rating of 50 to 70, with less than 2% retained on 30 mesh, less than 10% retained on 140 mesh, and less than 0.3% retained on 200 mesh screen, is recommended. B.Water:Potable and free of harmful soluble salts or reactive chemicals and any other contaminantsand within a temperature range of 50-80 degreesF. 2.4PREPARATION A.Removal of striping, crack filling, and oil spot treatment are not required prior to application of seal coat. B.Immediately prior to applying seal coat,prepare and clean area to be seal coated in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C.Protect existing manholes, inlets, vaults, valve boxes, meter boxes, etc. as necessary to maintain free accessibility upon completion of seal coatapplication. Surfaces adjacent to seal coatapplicationareas such as sidewalks, curb and/or gutter, storefronts, etc. shall be protected by use of felt paper anchored with clean aggregate, or by shielding components with plywood during application. D.Coordinate limits of seal coatapplicationoperations with Owner’s Construction Manager and Store Manager to avoidinterruption tostore operations. Protect adjacent areas of the parking lot outside of current seal coatapplica- tionlimits to avoid trackingonto adjacent areas. Partition off limits of current seal coatoperations until surface is traffic ready. E.Coordinate with Store Manager to deactivate lawn sprinkler systemsleast 48hours prior to seal coatapplication and to remain off for at least 24 hours after seal coatapplication. 2.5APPLICATION A.Add water and sand at manufacturer’s recommended rates and mix emulsion in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B.Apply single coat of product in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C.Allow to dry and cure in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to allowing vehicular traffic. 1.Repair applications damaged by insufficient drying or curing time at Contractor’s expense. D.The finished surface shall present a uniform texture with no streaks. END OF SECTION 02787-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning122118 SECTION 02821 -CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES (BUILDING RELATED) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Building related chain link fence. 2.Plastic screening slats. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 03310 -Structural Concreteand Exterior Concrete Slabs: Concrete anchorage for posts. 2.Section 05090 -Post-installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Anchors for interior fence posts. 3.Section 08110 -Steel Doors and Frames. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM A 392 -Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric. C.Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI): Product Manual. 1.3SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Design Requirements: Fencing system and installation engineered to withstand mph windload assuming 50 percent coverage with hanging plastic banners and signage. 1.4QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Chain link fabric, posts, and components, and installation shall conform with the requirements of the B.CLFMI Product Manual unless otherwise shown or specified. C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MATERIALS A.Steel Posts:Type I or II or roll formed "C" Section steel conforming to CLFMI and as specified hereinafter. B.Fabric: No. 9 gage galvanized steel wire in 2 inch mesh; ASTM A 392, height as shown. 1.Fabric height less than 72 inches: Top and bottom selvages knuckled. 2.Fabric height 72 inches and greater: Top selvage twisted, bottom selvage knuckled. 2.2COMPONENTS A.End, Corner, and Pull Posts: Minimum sizes and weights as follows unless otherwise shown. 1.Up to 13 Foot Fabric Height: Type I or II in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual. 2.13 foot and over Fabric Height: a.Type I Posts: Round; 4.0 inch outside diameter pipe, 9.10 lbs/lin ft. 02821-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 b.Type II Posts: 4.0 inch outside diameter pipe, 6.56 lbs/lin ft. B.Line (Intermediate) Posts: Minimum sizes and weights as follows unless otherwise shown. 1.Up to 8 Foot Fabric Height: Type I, II, or "C" Section in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual. 2.Over 8Foot Fabric Height: a.Type I Posts: 1)Round: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe, 5.79 lbs/lin ft. 2)Square: 2.5" x 2.5" outside dimension, 5.10 lbs/lin ft. b.Type II Posts: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe, 4.64 lbs/lin ft. C.Gate Posts: Type I or II in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual unless otherwise shown. D.Top, Bottom, and Intermediate Rails: Manufacturer's longest lengths. 1.Type I or II in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual. 2.Couplings: Expansion type, approximately 6 inches long. 3.Attaching Devices: Means of attaching top rail securely to each gate, corner, pull, and end post. 4.Do not install bottom rail at truck well fencewhich shall receive tension wire instead. 2.3ACCESSORIES A.Sleeves: Galvanized steel pipe with inside diameter not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside diameter of fence posts. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeves of width and length not less than 1 inch greater than outside diameter of sleeve. 1.Up to 6 Foot Fabric Height: Provide sleeve not less than 12 inches long. 2.Over 6 Foot Fabric Height (Not for Partitions Tight to Roof Deck): Provide sleeve not less than 24 inches long. 3.Fabric Installed Tight to Roof Deck (Posts Braced to Roof Structure): Provide sleeve not less than 12 inches long. B.Tension Wire: 7 gage steel, metallic-coated coil spring wire, located at bottom of fence fabric. C.Wire Ties: 11 gage galvanized steel. D.Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts, with horizontal brace located at mid-height of fabric. Use same materials as top rail for brace, and truss to line posts with 0.375 inch diameter rod and adjustable tightener. E.Post Tops: Galvanized steel, weather tight closure cap for tubular posts, one cap for each post.Furnish cap with openings to permit passage of top rail as required. A.Stretcher Bars: Galvanized steel, one piece lengths equal to full height of fabric; with minimum cross section of 3/16 x 3/4 inch. Provide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post,and two for each corner and pull post. B.Stretcher Bar Bands: Manufacturer's standard. C.Gate Cross-Bracing: 3/8 inch diameter galvanized steel adjustable length truss rods. D.Gate Hardware: 1.Swinging Gate Hardware: a.Hinges: 1)Size and material to suit gate size; offset to permit 180 degree gate opening. Provide 1-1/2 pair of hinges for each leaf over 6'-0" nominal height. 2)TLE Service Area Gate: Hinges shall be Tru-close self closing round post gate hinges by D&D Technologies USA, Costa Mesa , CA (800) 716-0888. b.Latch: 1)Exterior: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from both sides of gate, with padlock eye. 02821-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2)Interior: Forked type to permit operation from both sides of gate.Omit any type of padlock deviceand substitute standard pin bracket for attachment of forked latch (gates are not to be padlocked). 3)TLE Service Area Gate: Butterfly gate latch No. 17307 by Master-Halco or No 5552 by Merchant Metals. 2.Double Gate Hardware: In addition to the above, provide gate stops for double gates, consisting of mushroom type flush plate with anchors set in concrete to engage center drop rod or plunger bar. Configure for use of one padlock to lock both gate leaveson exterior gates. E.Plastic Screening Slats (Exterior): Tubular plastic slats designed for use in 2 inch mesh fabric, for vertical installation. Feather Lock Slat by PrivacyLink,Smithfield, UT (800) 574-1076. 1.Color: Gray. 2.Length: As required to install to full height of fence fabric in one piece. 2.4SETTING MIXES A.Concrete: See Section 03310. B.Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive grout. See Section 03310. Provide type specially formulated for exterior application. 2.5GATE FABRICATION A.Fabricate gate frames of min. 1.90 inch outside diameter galvanized steel pipe. Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and for attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space frame members maximum 8'-0" apart. B.Assemble gate frames rigidly by welding or with special fittings and rivets. Use same fabric as specified for fence. Install fabric with stretcher bars at vertical edges. Bars may also be used at top and bottom edges. Attach stretchers to frame at not more than 15 inches on center. Install diagonal cross-bracing on gates as required to ensure frame rigidity without sag or twist. C.Attach fabric on sliding gates to maintain bottom clearance as specified below in Installation. D.Attach hardware to provide security against removal or breakage. 2.6FINISH A.Fabric and Framing: Zinc coated in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Install chain link fence in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual unless otherwise specified herein. B.Space line posts 10'-0" on center maximum, except as otherwise indicated. 1.Space line posts at 8'-0" on center maximum if plastic slats are indicated to be installed in fence fabric. 2.Space interior line posts 8'-0" on center maximum. C.Set posts as close to building walls as practical. Gaps greater than 1 inch between wall and posts shall be closed with a metal closure panel attached full height to post with Tek screws as shown. Hem edges and corners of sheet metal to eliminate sharp or rough edges. D.Methods for Setting Posts: 1.Grade-Set Posts: 02821-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 a.Drill or hand excavate to a depth approximately 3 inches lower than post bottom. Set post bottom at depth indicated on Drawings. b.Excavate each post hole to 12 inch diameter, or not less than four times diameter of post. c.Hold post in position while placing, consolidating, and finishing concrete. d.Post shall be set plumb within 1/4" in 10 feet. 2.Sleeve-Set Posts In Slabs: Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset into concrete to depth not less than 24 inches below finish slab, and anchored into concrete. Insert posts into sleeves and fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with grout. Mix and place grout in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. E.Intermediate Rails: Provide center and bottom railswhere indicated. Install in one piece between posts and flush with post on fabric side, using offset fittings where necessary. Place intermediate rails a maximum of 6 feet on center. F.Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb with rod in tension. G.Tension Wire: Install tension wires through post cap loops before stretching fabric and tie to each post cap with not less than 6 gage galvanized wire. Fasten fabric to tension wire using 11 gage galvanized steel hog rings spaced 24 inches on center. H.Fabric: Space between bottom of fabric and finish grade shall be not greater than 2 inches. Space between bottom of fabric and finish grade shall not be greater the 1/2-inch on sliding gates. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires.Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released. I.Stretcher Bars: To secure end, corner, pull, and gate posts, thread through or clamp to fabric 4 inches on center and secure to posts with metal bands spaced 15 inches on center. J.Tie Wires: 1.Use U-shaped wire conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted two full turns. Bend wire ends to minimize hazards to persons or clothing. 2.Tie fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced 12 inches on center. Tie fabric to rails and braces with wire ties spaced 24 inches on center. Manufacturer's standard procedure will be accepted if of equal strength and durability. K.Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. L.Gates: Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. M.Install plastic slats vertically to manufacturer's instructionswhere shown on Drawings. 3.2ERECTION TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch. B.Maximum Offset from True Position: 1 inch. END OF SECTION 02821-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning022417 SECTION 02845–CART CORRALS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: Wal-Mart furnished parking lot cart storage corrals for assembly and installation by Contractor. B.Related Requirements: 1.Appendix A -Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor. a.General procedures related to Owner furnished products. b.Manufacturers, suppliers, vendor contacts andproduct names and numbers related to Owner furnished products.) 1.2DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Receive Owner Furnished products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.Owner's Cart Corral Supplier will furnish cart corralsspecified in Appendix A (02845) for installation by Contractor. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Assemble and install corrals as indicated on Drawings and as shown in manufacturer’s assembly drawings. 3.2ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.After completing installation, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 02845-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning073120 SECTION 03310 –STRUCTURAL CONCRETEAND EXTERIOR CONCRETE SLABS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Cast-in-place structural concrete for concrete structures and exterior slabs on grade includingthe following: a.Interior curbs. 2.Aggregate base below slab. 3.Formwork, shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 4.Reinforcement and accessories. 5.Curing and finishing. 6.Grout, for setting and anchoring items in masonry and concrete. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01351 –Regulatory Compliance: a.Disposal and removal of hazardous construction and universal waste. b.Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 2.Section 05500 -Metal Fabrications: Other metal components cast into concrete. 3.Section 07900 -Joint Sealers: Expansion, Contraction, and Construction Joint Fillers and Sealants. 4.Appendix B –Testing, Inspection and Observation by Owner: Procedures for inspection, testing, and documentation by Owner furnished testing laboratory. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.Mandatory Provisions: In publications referred to herein, advisory provisions shall be considered to be mandatory. C.American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Standard Specification For Transportation Materials And Methods Of Sampling and Testing : 1.AASHTO T318 -Water Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete Using MicrowaveOven Drying (Formerly AASHTO TP 23) D.American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1.ACI 117 -Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2.ACI 301 -Structural Concrete. 3.ACI 304.2R -Placing Concrete By Pumping Methods 4.ACI 305.1 –Specifications for Hot Weather Concreting. 5.ACI 306.1 -Cold Weather Concreting 6.ACI 308.1 -Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. 7.ACI 308R -Guide To Curing Concrete 8.ACI 347 -Guide To Formwork For Concrete 9.ACI SP66 -ACI Detailing Manual E.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTMA36 –Carbon Structural Steel. 2.ASTM A82 -Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 3.ASTM A185 -Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Carbon Steel, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength Concrete Reinforcement. 4.ASTM A615 -Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 5.ASTM A706 -Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 6.ASTM C33 -Concrete Aggregates. 03310-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 7.ASTM C94 -Ready-Mixed Concrete. 8.ASTM C136 -Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates 9.ASTM C150 -Portland cement. 10.ASTM C171 -Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 11.ASTM C260 -Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 12.ASTM C309 -Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 13.ASTM C 403 -Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance 14.ASTMC494 -Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 15.ASTM C618 -Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 16.ASTM C989 -Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars 17.ASTM C881 -Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems For Concrete 18.ASTM C1107 -Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrink). 19.ASTM C 1218 -Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. 20.ASTM C1315 -Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete. 21.ASTM D 98 -Calcium Chloride. 22.ASTM D 698 -Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5 lb (2.49 Kg) Hammerand 12-in (305 mm) Drop. 23.ASTM D1241 -Materials for Soil-Aggregate Subbase, Base and Surface Courses 24.ASTM D1751 -Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 25.ASTM D1752: Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 26.ASTM D2628 -Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements. 27.ASTM D3575: Standard Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials Made From Olefin Polymers. 28.ASTM E96 -Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 29.ASTM E154 -Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth under Concrete Slabs, on Walls or as Ground Cove. F.American Welding Society (AWS): 1.AWS D1.4 -Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel. G.Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): 1.CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 2.CRSI Placing Reinforcing Bars. H.America Plywood Association (APA): 1.Grading Rules. I.Department of Commerce (National Institute of Standards and Technology) –Product Standard (DOC): 1.DOC PS 1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood. J.International CodeCouncil, Inc.: 1.International Building Code (IBC). K.National Concrete Ready-Mix Association: 1.NCRMA Inspection Standards L.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1.OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Minimize dust emissions or provide equipment that suppresses dust. 1.4SUBMITTALS 03310-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Submittal Procedures: Unless otherwise specified herein, submit in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01330. B.Submit all submittals electronically in PDF format via email, unless otherwise specified, to Architect of Record. C.Submit submittal items required within this section concurrently. Do not submit submittals of this section together with submittals in section 03314 or any other section. Identify submittals explicitly inaccordance with Procedures paragraphs in Section 01330. D.Sieve Analysis for Aggregate Base: Submit current sieve analysis report, sampled and tested within the last 60 days of submittal date, for aggregate base and choker material. E.Concrete Batch Plant Certifications: Submit name and address of the concrete supplier’s batch plant and plant certification(s) by National Ready-Mix Concrete Association and/or State Department of Transportation. F.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing for field use. Do not use reproductions of Contract Documents as shop drawings. Prepare shop drawings in accordance with Part B, Chapter 3, ACI 315. 1.Reinforcement: a.Include concrete notes on shop drawings that relate to proper placing of reinforcing. b.Show all reinforcing steel including dowels, embedded steel items, and anchor bolts . c.Include number, grade, size, length, mark, location, splice lengths, and bending diagrams for reinforcing steel and related products. 2.Placement Drawings: a.Submit reinforcement placement drawings with bar lists. Include walls, grade beams, and plans of footings and slabs. b.Show section cuts, details with piece marks, and control joint locations. Show reinforcing size, quantity, spacing, location, length, and required schedules. G.Samples: Materials as requested by the Engineer, including names, sources, and descriptions. H.Mix Design: Fill out and submit attached Concrete Mix Design Submittal Form. Submit each proposed mix design in accordance with ACI 301, Sections 3.9 "Proportioning on the basis of previous field experience or trial mixture", or 3.10 "Proportioning based on empirical data". Submit separate mix design for concrete to be placed by pumping in addition to the mix design for concrete to be placed directly from the truck chute. Submit mix design by e-mail to the Architectof Recordandthe Wal-MartConstruction Testing Laboratory. Include applicable information shown on the Mix Design Submittal Form and the following: 1.Proportions of cementitious materials, fine and coarse aggregate, and water. 2.Water-cementitious material ratio, 28-day compressive design strength, slump, and air content. 3.Type of cement, fly ash, slag, and aggregate.For troweled interior slabs, do not use fly ash, or other supplementary cementitious materials. 4.Aggregate gradation. 5.Type and dosage of admixtures. 6.Special requirements for pumping. 7.Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is valid. 8.Special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, placing, or finishing techniques to achieve finished product specified. 9.Materials and methods for curing concrete. I.Submit Shop Drawings, and Quality Control Submittals within 5 working days of Contract date. J.Attachments to Concrete Mix Design: Submit the following as attachments to be included with the Concrete Mix Design: 1.Cementitious materials mill test reports for the following: a.Portland cement b.Fly ashwhere required c.Slagwhere required 2.Designation, type, quality, and source (natural or manufactured) of coarse and fine aggregate materials. 03310-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.Sieve Analysis Reports: Provide separate sieve analysis of percentages passing for coarse and fine aggregate. Show values for each sieve size shown on the mix design form. Do not leave any line blank. Sieve analysis sampling and testing for each aggregate source shall be conducted within 60 days of concrete submittal date. 4.Aggregate Supplier Statement: a.Stating if aggregate is possibly alkali-reactive based on tests or past service. b.Stating if aggregate can possibly cause pop-outs, “D” cracking, or other disruptions due to moisture gain, freezing, or other mechanisms, based on tests or past service. 5.Product data for the following concrete materials admixtures: a.Water reducing b.Set retarding c.Set accelerating d.Data indicating chloride ion content information for each admixture 6.Concrete compressive strength data as required by ACI 301. 7.Past compression test reports on each mix as required by ACI 301. 8.Concrete Supplier Approval. 9.Chloride-Ion Content: Measured water-soluble chloride-ion content (percent by weight of cementitious materials) in accordance with ASTM C1218. 10.Time of Initial Setting: Initial setting time in accordance with ASTM C403. K.Product Data: Submit certified laboratory test data or manufacturer’s certificates and data for the items listed below certifying that materials are in conformance requirements specified herein. Submit to the Architectof Record and the Construction Testing Laboratory for review and approval and within 7 calendar days after receipt of Notice-to- Proceed. 1.Portland cement concrete mix design(s) 2.Type and source of Portland cement, fly ash, and slag 3.Aggregate gradations 4.Soft preformed joint filler 5.Pavement joint sealant 6.Dowel bars 7.Tie bars 8.Reinforcing steel bars 9.Welded wire fabric 10.Air entraining admixtures 11.Water-reducing, set-retarding, and set-accelerating admixtures (if used) L.Pavement Joint and Placement Plan: Provide a placement plan identifying the following: 1.Concrete truck access location. 2.Extent of placements including width, length, slab placement area and volume. 3.Locations of construction joints. 4.Location of sawn contraction joints if different from those shown on the civil drawings. M.Pre-Slab Installation Meeting: 1.Provide record of notification of pre-slab meeting including company name, persons contacted, and date and method of contact. 2.Provide meeting minutes to all participants and Wal-Mart Construction Manager including sign-in sheet. N.Delivery Tickets: 1.Copies of delivery tickets for each load of concrete delivered to site. 2.Indicate information required by ASTM C 94 on each ticket including additional information required for slabs. 3.Information on ticket shall include quantities of material batched including the amount of free water in the aggregate and the quantity of water that can be added at the site without exceeding the maximum water cementitious ratio of the approved mix design. Aggregate moisture corrections shall be based on ASTM definitions of aggregate moisture content and absorption. 4.Mix identification number on ticket shall match number on submitted and approved mix design. 5.Submit copies to Wal-Mart Testing Laboratory with each concrete delivery. 03310-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.5QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1.ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2.CRSI -Manual of Standard Practice. B.Pumped Concrete: 1.Perform mix design, proportioning, and placement in accordance with ACI 304.2R. 2.Submit documented evidence of experience in placing concrete by pumping on not less than three projects of similar size and complexity. List available pump size, standby pump size, piping, and other equipment. 3.Submit documented evidence of concrete supplier's ability to dedicate sufficient mixing and delivery equipment to supply the concrete continuously for the volumes to be placed by pumping. C.Chemical Admixtures: Set control admixtures may be used only when adverse weather conditions are anticipated. Use of admixtures is subject to Wal-Mart approval. 1.Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager at Pre-Bid Conference if admixtures will be used in concrete. 2.Provide Wal-Mart Construction Manager with proposed Construction Schedule identifying anticipated adverse weather conditions justifying use of admixtures. 3.Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager prior to installation for which admixtures will be used in concrete. 4.Mix design shall indicate ingredients including the admixtures to be used and the slump and air content range for the project. D.Concrete Truck Inspection: 1.Conform to ASTM C94, NRMCA, and Department of Transportation standards in state where project is located. 2.Perform inspections immediately before starting concreting operations. 3.Record acceptable truck numbers. 4.Record the identification numbers of those trucks found to be acceptable on the basis of inspections. 5.Do not bring on site for concreting operations, any truck whose identification numbers are not recorded as acceptable. Notify Wal-Mart Testing Lab if non-conforming trucks are used to deliver concrete for slabs and pavements. E.Tolerances: 1.Conform to most stringent requirements of ACI 117 and ACI 301 except as specified herein. 2.Conform to ACI 117 thickness tolerances for slabs-on-ground. 1.Finished Surface Flatness and Levelness (For placements larger than 10,000 square feet.): a.The minimum local area shall be bound on each side by column lines. b.Sales Floor Interior Floor Slabs: Specified Overall Value (SOV) FF 40 / FL 30 and Minimum Local Value (MLV) FF 28 / FL 20 tolerance for troweled floors in accordance with ACI 117. c.Non-Sales Floor Interior Floor Slabs: Specified Overall Value (SOV) FF 35 / FL 25 and Minimum Local Value (MLV) FF 24 / FL 17 tolerance for troweled floors in accordance with ACI 117. d.Remedies for Out-of -Tolerance Work: 1)Remove and replace slabs-on-grade measuring below either (or both) of specified minimum local F-numbers. 2)At option of Owner, Contractor may be allowed to submit alternatives for remediation. e.Costs for corrective work, remedies for out-of-tolerance work, and extra testing as required by defective work shall be borne by Contractor. f.Validate existing elevelations where new slab will abut existing. The Contractor must notify the EOR in writing within 48 hours of new concrete installations if the existing elevations will prevent achieving specified surface profile tolerances. 2.Slab on grade dowels: a.Install dowels within plus or minus (+/-) 1/8” in dowel alignment in vertical and horizontal planes. b.Install dowels horizontally on the bulkhead at the greater depth of either mid-slab or 2-1/4 inch from slab surface to center line of the plate. 03310-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 F.Concrete Supplier Approval: 1.The concrete supplier shall be fully approved and acceptable by the concrete subcontractor as the producer of concrete for which the subcontractor is to place and finish. Prepare Statement of Approval of Concrete Supplier stating project name, name of concrete supplier, along with the statement of approval and the signatures of the Contractor and concrete pavement subcontractor. Submit statement as specified in Submittals paragraph above. G.Workmanship: 1.When directed by the Owner, remove and replace or repair concrete and related Work which does not conform to specified requirements including strength, tolerances and finishes. 2.Bear cost of corrections or delays to other work affected by, or resulting from, corrections to concrete Work. 3.If results of compressive strength tests reveal deficiencies in concrete, meet requirements of ACI 301. 4.Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. 5.Check surface areas at intervals necessary to eliminate ponding areas. H.Pre-installation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation meeting atthe site at least two weeks prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section, including, but not limited to, the Owner's representative, CTL’s representative and inspector, Contractor, concrete sub-contractor and job foreman, concrete supplier, and base fine grading contractor. 1.Contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager Thirty days prior to pre-installation conference to confirm schedule. 2.Record discussions of meeting and decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to paving work, including the following: 3.CTL’s testing and inspection procedures. 4.Concrete finishes and finishing. 5.Cold-and hot-weather concreting procedures. 6.Curing procedures. 7.Concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. 8.Proposed sources of concrete materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture concrete. 9.Tour, inspect and discuss condition of subgrade, drainage structures, and other preparatory work. 10.Requirements for protecting concrete work, including restriction of traffic during installation period and for remainder of construction period. 11.Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 12.Concrete paving requirements (drawings, specifications and other contract documents). 13.Required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. 14.Weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. 15.Safety precautions relating to placement of concrete. 16.Changes to the contract documents from recommendations or discussions at the Pre-Construction meeting shall be approved in writing bythe Wal-Mart Construction Manager prior to implementation. 1.6PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Deliver materials in unopened containers with labels identifying contents. Keep containers closed and upright to prevent leakage. B.Mark reinforcing, accessories and embedded items for proper identification and placement location. C.Store materials, except aggregate, off ground in dry area and in manner to prevent damage. Protect liquid materials from freezing. D.Stockpile aggregate in manner to prevent contamination with other materials or with other sizes of aggregates. Conduct tests for determining conformance to requirements at point of batching. Do not use bottom 6” of aggregate piles in contact with ground. Allow sand to drain until it has reached a uniform moisture content before it is used. 03310-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 E.Store admixtures in manner to prevent contamination. Protect admixtures from extreme temperatures which would adversely affect their characteristics. 1.7PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Hot and cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 305.1 (hot weather) and 306.1 (cold weather). B.Concreting in Hot, Dry, or Windy Weather: 1.Employ precautions to avoid cracking when the concrete rate of evaporation exceeds 0.1 pounds per square foot per hour or when any combination of concrete materials and weather conditions are favorable for the formation of plastic shrinkage cracks. 2.Maintain an accurate reading thermometer at the job site to check temperature of concrete. 3.Reject concrete if more than one slump adjustment, as defined in ASTM C 94, is required. 4.Do not place concrete when forms, subgrade, aggregate base, or reinforcing bars are more than 120 F or the temperature differential between the forms, aggregate base, or reinforcing bars and concrete will create conditions favorable for settlement cracks or thermal cracking. C.Concreting in Cold Weather: 1.Mix and place concrete when the air temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat is a minimum of 35 degrees F and rising. 2.Conform to ACI 306.1 when temperature and other environmental conditions are as noted therein. 3.Subgrade shall be thawed to depth of 12 inches immediately before placing concrete. 4.Measure and record concrete temperature during protection period in each placement at regular time intervals, but not less than 3 times per 24 hour period. 5.Do not place slabs on subgrade or base that is more than 20F cooler than concrete. Warm subgrade or base to decrease temperature differential to 20 F or less PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide products as manufactured by the following to the extent as specified hereinafter for the specific product: 1.American Colloid Company, (800) 527-9948. 2.Ardex Engineered Cements, (412) 264-4240. 3.A.W. Cook Cement Products, (706) 654-3677. 4.BASF Admixtures Inc., Cleveland, OH (Formerly Master Builders) (800) 628-9990. 5.BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN (Formerly Degussa Building Products) (800) 433-9517. 6.Colloid Environmental Technologies Co. (CETCO), (800) 527-9948 7.Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing, (800) 348-7351. 8.CTS Cement Manufacturing Corp., (800) 929-3030. 9.Degussa Building Products: See BASF Building Systems. 10.DRC Inc., Carrollton, KY (502) 732-1001. 11.E-Poxy Engineered Materials, (800) 833-3400. 12.Euclid Chemical Co., (800) 321-7628. 13.Henry Company (Synko-Flex Products Division); (800) 231-4551. 14.Master Builders, Inc.: See BASF Admixtures. 15.Permagile Industries, Inc., (800) 645-7546. 16.Reef Industries, (800) 231-6074. 17.Sika Corp., (800) 933-7452. 18.Sonneborn Building Products: See BASF Building Products. 19.Thoro System Products: See BASF Building Products. 20.Unitex, (816) 231-7700 or (800) 821-5846. 21.W.R. Meadows, Inc., (800) 342-5976. 22.Vexcon Chemicals, Inc., (888) 839-2661. B.Substitutions: Not permitted unless otherwise specified. 03310-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.2EXTERIOR PAVEMENT AGGREGATE BASE MATERIALS A.Exterior pavement areas shall receive aggregate base materials as specified herein unless otherwise shown on the Foundation Subsurface Preparation. B.Aggregate Base: Use one of the following gradations: 1.Any local state DOT approved road base material with 100% passing No. 1½-inch sieve, 15% to 55% passing the No. 4 sieve and 5% to 12% passing the No. 200 sieve. 2.Material that satisfies the General and Gradation “A”, ”C”, or “D” requirements (with the modified allowance of 5% to 12% passing the No. 200 sieve) as defined by ASTM D 1241. 3.Material passing the No. 200 shall be clean granular fill with less than 3% clay and/or friable particles. C.Aggregate Choker Material: Clean granular fill with less than 3% clay and/or friable particles. Use one of the following gradations: 1.ASTM 448 No. 10 with 6% to 12% passing No. 200 sieve. 2.Material that meets the following gradation: Std. Sieve Size% Passing No. 485-100 No. 875-95 No. 1655-75 No. 5022-45 No. 10010-30 No. 2006-12 2.3INTERIOR SLAB AGGREGATE BASE MATERIALS A.Interior slabs on grade shall receive aggregate base materials as specified herein unless otherwise shown on the Foundation Subsurface Preparation. B.Aggregate BaseMaterial 1.Upon removal of the existing concrete slab, the existing base material shall be inspected. Only remove and replace existing material if it does not conform to the following requirements. 2.Gradations shall be one of the following. a.Any state DOT approved road base material meeting the following gradation: % Passing Std. Sieve Size 1 ½”100 No. 415-55 No. 2003-12 b.Material conforming to the General Requirements and of the Gradation “A”, ”C”, or “D” requirements (with the modified allowance of 5%to 12% passing the No. 200 sieve) as defined by ASTM D 1241. 3.Material passing the No. 200 sieve shall be clean granular fill with less than 3% clay and/or friable particles. C.Aggregate Choker Material: Clean granular fill with less than 3% clay and/or friable particles. Use one of the following gradations: 1.ASTM 448 No. 10 with 6% to 12% passing No. 200 sieve. 2.Material that meets the following gradation: Std. Sieve Size% Passing No. 485-100 No. 875-95 No. 1655-75 No. 5022-45 No. 10010-30 03310-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 No. 2006-12 2.4FORMWORK A.Forms: Design, engineer, and construct forms, shores, bracing, and other temporary supports to support loads imposed during construction in accordance with ACI 347. Design under the direct supervision of a licensed Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work. 1.Plywood:APA Plyform Class 1, complying with DOCPS1, exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, 5/8 inch minimum thickness unless otherwise shown or specified, and as follows. a.Plywood for concrete surfaces to be exposed after construction is complete: APA HDO plyform (High Density Overlay)with straight, sealed edges. b.Plywood for concrete surfaces not to be exposed after construction is complete: APA B-B Plyform . 2.Lumber: Dressed, tongue and grooved, freefrom loose knots. 3.Metal: Smooth, clean, corrosion-free, without dents or holes and with closely-matching edges. 4.Fiberglass: Smooth, clean, without dents or holes and with closely-matching edges. 5.Laminated Round Fiber Tubes: Spirally laminated paper fiber, wax impregnated on exterior surfaces and interior ply allowing uniform moisture penetration. B.Form Release Agents: 1.100% biodegradable, non-toxic, 100% natural organic chemical release agent that will not cause surface imperfections, and is non-staining and compatible with field applied paints, toppings, curing compounds and other coatings. 2.Use same brand form release agent for all forms. 3.Products: a.Form-EZE Natural by Euclid Chemical, (800) 321-7628. b.Enviroform by Conspec, (913) 287-1700. c.Certi-Vex V Form Release by Vexcon, (888) 839-2661. d.Farm Fresh by Unitex, (816) 231-7700. C.Ties and Accessories: 1.Provide form ties, anchors, and hangers of sufficient strength to resist displacement of forms due to construction loads and depositing of concrete. 2.Provide ties and spreader form ties designed so no metal will be within 1 inch of surface when forms are removed. 3.Where concrete surfaces are exposed to view, use form ties that will leave a depression not more than 1 inch in diameter when removed. D.Waterstops: Provide one of the following. 1.Waterstop RX-101 Bentonite Waterstop, by CETCO (Colloid Environmental Technologies Co.) 2.SF302-Synko-Flex Waterstop, by Henry Co. 2.5REINFORCEMENT A.Reinforcing Bars: 1.ASTM A615, deformed, Grade 60. 2.ASTM A 706, deformed, Grade 60. B.Joint Dowel Bars: ASTMA615, Grade40minimum,or ASTM A36, smooth round plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.Epoxy coat per State Highway Department Standard Specifications. C.Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A185. Furnish in flat sheets. 2.6REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type. B.Reinforcing Support Devices: 03310-9 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.Manufacturer support devices of metal (wire bar), concrete, or recycled plastic devices conformingto CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 2.Plastic accessories shall have a minimum of 50% recycled content. 3.Do not use wood, brick and other devices that can expand due to moisture gain. 4.Precast concrete chairs shall have minimum compressive strength of 3,500 psi. 5.For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class2 stainless-steel bar supports. 6.When precast concrete bar supports are used over aggregate base, or over waterproof membranes and vapor retarders, properly embed tie wires to prevent penetration of substrate. 7.Properly size foot of bar supports or similar devices to prevent settlement on base material or prevent puncture on vapor barrier. 8.When supporting multiple layers of reinforcement, provide the proper size and spacing of bar supports or similar devices to prevent deformation of plastic and to retain rebar within position tolerances. 2.7CONCRETE MATERIALS A.Cement: ASTM C 150 –If reactivce aggregates are present in the area, use low alkali cement containing less than 0.6 percent alkalis. Use only one brand throughout project. 1.Required Cement Type based on ACI Exposure Category and Class as noted on Drawings. a.Sulfate Exposure Class S0 –Type I, II, or III. A content less than 8%. b.Sulfate Exposure Class S1 –Type II or Type III with C 3 A content less than 5%. c.Sulfate Exposure Class S2 –Type V or Type III with C 3 d.Sulfate Exposure Class S3 –Type V plus pozzolan or slag cement. B.Concrete Aggregate: 1.Conform to ASTM C33. 2.Aggregate shall contain no coal or lignite in concrete that will not be covered by soil. 3.Fine Aggregate: a.Conform to fine aggregate grading requirements as defined in section 6.1 of ASTM C 33 unless approved by the StructuralEngineer. b.If manufactured sand is used, blend with minimum 25% natural sand unless otherwise approved by the Structural Engineer. 4.Coarse Aggregate: a)-1/2 inch thick. through which the major b)The nominal maximum size of an aggregate is the smallest sieve size portion of the aggregate must pass, with a minimal amount retained on the maximum sieve size. Maximum 4% shall be retained on the nominal maximum size sieve. 5.Adjust proportions of combined coarse, intermediate, and fine aggregates to provide the following particle size distribution characteristics, unless otherwise approved: a.Coarseness Factor of 60 to 75%. 1)The Coarseness Factor (CF) is the percent of combined aggregate retained on the #8 sieve that is also retained on the 3/8” sieve. 2)The Coarseness Factor is calculated as follows: CF = Aggregate retained on 3/8” sieve / Aggregate retained on #8 sieve. b.Adjusted Workability Factor 1)The Workability Factor (WF) is the percent of combined aggregate that passes the #8 sieve. 2)The Adjusted Workability Factor (Adj-WF) is calculated as follows: Adj-WF = WF+\[(Cementitous Material -564 lbs)/37.6\] 3)The range of accepted Adj-WF for a given CF is as follows: Adj-WF = \[(11.25 -.15 CF) + 36\] ± 2.5 4)Combined percent retained on any given sieve size shall not exceed 24%. 6.Gradation requirement of ASTM C33 may be waived in order to meet ranges specified. C.Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Type C or F. Use only one type and source throughout the project.For troweled interior slabs, do not use fly ash, slag, or other supplementary cementitious materials. 03310-10 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.Slag: ASTM C989, Grade 100 or 120. Use only one type and source throughout the project.For troweled interior slabs, do not use fly ash, slag, or other supplementary cementitious materials. E.Water: Clean potable water, not detrimental to concrete. 2.8CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A.Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. 1.Air-Mix or AEA-92, by Euclid. 2.MB-VR MB-AE 90, or Micro-Air, by Master Builders. 3.Daravair or Darex Series, by W.R. Grace. 4.Equivalent approved products. 5.Sika Air Series, by Sika. B.Evaporation Retardant: Water-based polymer, sprayable. 1.Euco-Bar, by Euclid 2.Confilm, by BASF Admixtures (Master Builders) 3.Aquafilm, by Dayton Superior. C.High-Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type F or G. 1.Type F: a.Eucon 37, by Euclid. b.Daracem 100, by W.R. Grace. c.Rheobuild 1000 or Glenium Series, by MBT d.ViscoCrete or Sikaplast by Sika 2.Type G: a.Eucon537, by Euclid. b.Daracem 100, by W.R. Grace. c.Rheobuild 716, by Master Builders. 3.Equivalent approved products. D.Other Admixtures: Additional admixtures including retarding, accelerating, and evaporation retardant, and integral color admixtures are specifiedin Section 03314. 2.9RELATED MATERIALS A.Non-shrink Grout: Pre-mixed non-shrinking, high strength grout, ASTM C1107, Type A, B, or C; compressive strength of 5000 psi in 28 days. 1.NS Grout, by Euclid. 2.Construction Grout, by Master Builders. 3.Sonogrout, by Sonneborn. 4.Certi-Vex Grout #1000, by Vexcon. 5.Enduro 50, by Conspec. B.Joint Materials: Specified in Section 07900. C.Foundation Perimeter Insulation: Specified in Section 07210. D.Epoxy Bonding Agent: ASTMC881 1.Euco #452 or Corr-Bond, by Euclid. 2.EVA-POX Epoxy Paste No. 22, by E-Poxy Industries. 3.Concresive Liquid (LPL), by Master Builders. 4.Uniweld, by Permagile Industries. 5.Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod LPL by Sika. E.Bond Breaker: ASTM D226, No. 15, unperforated asphalt saturated felt. 03310-11 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 F.Leveling Compound: 1.Ardex V-1200, by Ardex. Contact:Linda Zigman. 2.Flo-Top or Super Flo-Top, by Euclid. 3.SikaTop Overlay System, by Sika. 4.Thoro Underlayment Self-Leveling including Thoro Primer #800, by Thoro. 5.Certi-Vex SLU TC including EnvioBond A Primer, by Vexcon. 6.Conflow including Primeflow, by Conspec. 7.MASTERTOP 110 UNDERLAYMENT, by Master Builders. G.Concrete Sealer: Solvent based concrete sealer having a minimum 25% solids similar to High Solids Clear Seal manufactured by Increte Systems Inc. 2.10CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS A.Water: Clean, clear, and potable, not detrimental to concrete finish. B.Concrete Curing Cover: 1.AquaCure, by DRC. a.Exclusive Distributor: Greenstreak Group, Inc., St. Louis, MO (800) 325-9504. 2.Ultracure by McTech Group. C.Liquid Membrane Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type I, Class A or B, 25% minimum solids content, clear non-yellowing with no styrene-butadiene. 1.Water Based, VOC less than 350 g/l: a.Super Aqua Cure, by Euclid Chemical Corp. b.Kure 1315 by BASF Building Systems (Degussa). D.Dissipating Curing Compound: ASTM C 309 Type 1, Class A or B, solvent or water base, VOC less than 350 g/l. 1.Cetri Vex EnvioCure 100 by Vexcon. (Solvent base) 2.Day Chem REZ Cure (J-11-W) or Safe Cure & Seal (J19) by Dayton Superior. (Water Base) 3.Kurez DR VOX, by Euclid. (Water Base) 2.11COLOR TEXTURED (STAMPED) CONCRETE A.Color textured concrete is specified in Section 03361. 2.12CONCRETE MIX A.Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by the laboratory trial batch or the field experience method as specified in ACI 301. B.ACI Exposure Category and Class: ACI freeze/thaw and sulfate exposure category and class shall be as indicated on Drawings. Exposure class with highest compressive strength and lowest maximum water cementitious material ratio shall take precedence for each mix. C.Structural Concrete Footings: 1.Compressive Strength: Strength at 28 days shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: a.Exposure Class F0, F2, F3, or S0: 3,000 psi b.Exposure Class S1: 4,000 psi c.Exposure Class S2 or S3: 4,500 psi 2.Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio (Cement Quantity Includes Fly Ash or slag): a.Exposure Class F0, F2, F3, S0 or S1: 0.50 by wt. b.Exposure Class S2 or S3: 0.45 by wt. 3.Slump:Slump at the point of placement shall not exceed 5 inches and shall be of a consistency to be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without segregation, voids, or excessive bleeding. Maximum slump variance shall be 2 inches. 4.Air Content: Do not air-entrain unless required for concrete workability. Not to exceed 5.0 percent. 03310-12 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.Structural Concrete Formed Walls: 1.Compressive Strength: Strength at 28 days shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: a.Exposure Class F0 or S0: 3,500 psi b.Exposure Class S1: 4,000 psi c.Exposure Class F2, S2 or S3: 4,500 psi d.Exposure Class F3: 5,000 psi 2.Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio (Cement Quantity Includes Fly Ash or slag): a.Exposure Class F0, S0 or S1: 0.50 by wt. b.Exposure Class F2, S2 or S3: 0.45 by wt. c.Exposure Class F3: 0.40 by wt. 3.Slump: Slump at the point of placement shall not exceed 5 inches and shall be of a consistency to be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without segregation, voids, or excessive bleeding.Maximum slump variance shall be 2 inches. 4.Air Content: As specified in the Table below. E.Non-Structural Exterior Concrete Pavement and Slabs on Grade: 1.Compressive Strength: Strength at 28 days shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: a.Exposure Class F0 or S0: 3,500 psi b.Exposure Class S1: 4,000 psi c.Exposure Class F2, F3, S2 or S3: 4,500 psi d.Compactor pad (All exposures): 5,000 psi. 2.Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio (Cement Quantity Includes Fly Ash or slag): 0.45 by wt. a.Exposure Class F0, S0 or S1: 0.50 by wt. b.Exposure Class F2, F3, S2 or S3: 0.45 by wt. c.Compactor pad (All exposures): 0.40 by wt. 3.Slump Range: 2”-4” for hand placed concrete, 1-1/4” to 3” for machine placed (slipform) concrete. Maximum slump variance shall be 2 inches. 4.Air Content: As specified in the table below. F.Non-Structural Interior Concrete Curbs and Equipment Pads: 1.ACI Exposure Class: All Classes. 2.Compressive Strength: Strength at 28 days shall be 3500psi unless otherwise shown or specified. 3.Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio (Cement Quantity Includes Fly Ash or slag):0.55 by wt. 4.Slump:Slump at the point of placement shall not exceed 5 inches subject to the requirement that concrete shall be of a consistency to be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without segregation, voids, or excessive bleeding. Maximum slump variance shall be 2 inches. 5.Air Content: Do not air-entrain interior concrete. G.Interior Concrete Slabs on Grade: 1.ACI Exposure Class: All Classes. 2.Compressive Strength: Strength at 28 days shall be 4,000 psi unless otherwise shown or specified. 3.Maximum Water-Cement Material Ratio: 0.55 maximum by wt. 4.Slump: Slump at the point of placement shall not exceed 6 inches. Maximum slump variance shall be ±1 inch. 5.Air content: Do not air-entrain interior floor slabs. 6.Measure and mix ingredients in accordance with most stringent requirements of ASTM C94. 7.Ready Mix supplier may proportion materials by field experience or proportion concrete materials by laboratory trial batches per ACI 301 for strength compliance. 8.Submit copies of data and test results to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Structural Engineer for review to verify mix designs. Workability: Concrete shall be of a consistency to be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without segregation, voids, or excessive bleeding. 9.Minimum Cement Content: 560 lbs/cy 10.Admixtures: a.Water-reducing admixture may be added to improve workability for desired minimal water content. b.Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. 11.Do not use fly ash, slag, or other supplementary cementitious materials. 03310-13 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 H.Other Structural Concrete (Applies to concrete structures not listed in sections above): 1.Where concrete is not in contact with soil, backfill or base material, the sulfate exposure requirement can be disregarded. 2.Compressive Strength: Strength at 28 days shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: a.For Concrete Not Exposed to Weather: Min 3,500 psi 1)Exposure Class S0: 3,500 psi 2)Exposure Class S1: 4,000 psi 3)Exposure Class S2 or S3: 4,500 psi b.For Concrete Exposed to Weather: 1)Exposure Class F0 or S0: 3,500 psi 2)Exposure Class S1: 4,000 psi 3)Exposure Class F2, S2 or S3: 4,500 psi 3.Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio (Cement Quantity Includes Fly Ash or slag): a.For Concrete Not Exposed to Weather: Min 0.50 by wt. 1)Exposure Class S0 or S1: 0.50 by wt. 2)Exposure Class S2 or S3: 0.45 by wt. b.For Concrete Exposed to Weather: 1)Exposure Class F0, S0 or S1: 0.50 by wt. 2)Exposure Class F2, S2 or S3: 0.45 by wt. 3)Exposure Class F3: 0.40 by wt. 4.Slump: Slump at the point of placement shall not exceed 5 inches subject to the requirement that concrete shall be of a consistency to be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without segregation, voids, or excessive bleeding. Maximum slump variance shall be 2 inches. 5.Air Content: a.For Concrete Not Exposed to Weather: Not to exceed 5.0 percent. b.For Concrete Exposed to Weather: As specified in the Table below plus or minus 1.5 percent. I.Concrete Mix Air Entrainment: Where an exterior concrete mix is noted to be air entrained, the air entrainment shall be as follows: Average Air Content (%) +/-1.5% Nominal By Exposure Class Maximum Size Aggregate (Inch) ClassF0Class F2 & F3 3/84.57.5 1/24.07.0 3/43.56.0 13.06.0 1-1/22.55.5 J.Concrete to be Placed by Pumping Methods: a.The minimum quantity of constituent materials passing the No. 50 sieve (fine aggregate and cementitious materials) shall be 600 pounds per cubic yard. b.The particle size distribution of the combined fine and coarse aggregate shall be uniform from the largest to the smallest particles. K.Admixtures: 1.Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (Superplasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. Unless otherwise permitted herein, chemical admixtures shall be dispensed at the batch plant. Use high-range water-reducing admixture (HRWR) in pumped concrete. 2.Use air-entraining admixture in exterior concrete exposed to weather. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content specified above. 3.Use admixtures for water reduction and set control (accelerators and retarders) in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. 4.Verify with the admixture manufacturer the following: 03310-14 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 a.The compatibility of the individual admixtures when combined in the concrete mix. b.The compatibility of the individual admixtures with the concrete materials. L.Supplementary Cementitous Materials (SCM): 1.Concrete mix shall contain SCM at the amounts specified unless other amounts are approved by the Structural Engineering Consultant.Either fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag (GGBFS) may be used for the SCM but shall not be used together to form a ternary mix. Use of fly ash or GGBFS in the concrete mix is mandatory. 2.Fly Ash: Substitute fly ash for Portland cement at 20% of the total cementitious content. a.If used to mitigate potential aggregate reactivity, up to 25% fly ash substitution for Portland cement may be used. Only Type F fly ash may be used and shall have the following maximum properties: 1.5% available alkali and 8.0% CaO. When a maximum of 25% replacement is used, up to 10.0% CaO is permitted. 3.Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS): Substitute GGBFS for Portland cement at 25% of the total cementitious content. a.If required to mitigate potential sulfate exposure or aggregate reactivity, up to 50% GGBFS substitution for Portland cement may be used. 4.Maintain air-entrainment at specified levels. 5.In cold weather, provide adequate concrete strength gain so concrete will not be damagedfrom traffic and loads of use. 6.For troweled interior slabs, do not use fly ash, slag, or other supplementary cementitious materials. M.Calcium Chloride Admixture: 1.Calcium chloride (Type L) conforming to ASTM D98 may be used in solution form as part of the mixing water to accelerate concrete setting and early-strength development. 2.Amount of calcium chloride added shall not be more than necessary to produce the desired results and shall not exceed 2% by weight of cement. 3.The dosage range for the calcium chloride for the entire project shall not vary by more than 1%. Range is defined as the difference between the maximum and minimum dosages of calcium chloride for the entire project. 4.Calcium chloride shall not be used in the following applications unless approved by the Structural Engineer: a.Concrete containing embedded dissimilar metals or aluminum b.Slabs supported on permanent galvanized steel forms c.Concrete exposed to deicing chemicals d.Prestressed or post-tension concrete e.Concrete containing aggregates with potentially deleterious reactivity and concrete exposed to soil f.Concrete exposed to soil or water containing sulfates. 5.Use calcium chloride in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. 6.Chloride-ion Concentration: Maximum water-soluble chloride-ion concentrations in hardened concrete at ages from 28 to 42 days contributed from the ingredients including water, aggregates, cementitious material, and admixtures shall not exceed the following limits unless approved by the Structural Engineer: a.Type of MemberMaximum water-soluble chloride ion (Cl-) content in concrete (percent by weight of cement) 1)Prestressed concrete -0.06 2)Reinforced concrete exposed to chloride in service -0.15 3)Reinforced concrete that will be dryor protected from moisture in service-1.00 4)Other reinforced concrete construction -0.30 7.When using calcium chloride or other admixtures containing chlorides, measure water-soluble chloride-ion content (percent by weight of cementitious materials) per ASTM C 1218. Sample shall be from concrete representing the submitted mix design and maximum chloride dosage anticipated for the project. 2.13MIXING A.Ready-Mixed Concrete: 1.Mix and transport in accordance with ASTM C 94 and ACI 301 except as specified. 2.Reset drum revolution counter to zero on readymix concrete truck when water is added to drum. 03310-15 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Site-Mixed Concrete: 1.Conform to ACI 301. 2.Use central-mix type batch plant. C.Proportion concrete materials on basis of field experience or by laboratory trial batches. D.Ready-mix concrete supplier may proportion materials by field experience. E.Proportioning by Water-Cement ratio is not acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, held securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. 3.2PREPARATION A.Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Use proper dust control methods.Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Preplacement Inspection: All trades and participants involved shall verify that preparations are in conformance with Contract documents. Inspect reinforcement, inserts, and embedded parts before beginning concrete placement to ensure accurate size and location. Use approved sign-off forms. C.Notify Wal-Mart Testing Laboratory minimum 48 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations D.Cleaning Equipment: Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from mixing and conveying equipment. E.Ensure that all work is properly coordinated: 1.Structural Drawings and Specifications with those of other disciplines. 2.Use final corrected Shop Drawings, placing Drawings and material / equipment Drawings 3.3AGGREGATE BASE PLACEMENT A.Where exterior pavement areas are shown on the drawings referencing the “Foundation Subsurface Preparation” for base preparation, place aggregate base in accordance with requirements herein. B.Aggregate Base: 1.Install aggregate base where shown on Drawings. 2.Compact to final thickness shown in layers not exceeding 6 inches with minimum of 2 passes per layer with vibratory compactor. 3.Compact fill to 98% of aggregate’s Standard Proctor as determined by Method D of ASTM D698. 4.Leave pad up to 2 inches low until just prior to concrete placement. C.Aggregate Base Fine Grading: 1.Compact to final thickness noted with 2 passes minimum vibratory compactor to produce smooth, flat, dense surface. 2.Aggregate choaker coarse or top 2” DOT approved road base shall be place dry immediately before placing concrete. 3.Do not allow excess moisture or soft soil beneath vapor retarder at time of placing concrete. 4.Thickness shall not exceed 2 inches. 5.Level off aggregate base top surface with aggregate chocker coarse material as necessary as follows: a.to reduce surface friction and to meet specified fine grade tolerances specified below. Typically required up to 3/4" thick in areas exposed to rain, traffic, or excavation for pits and buried utilities. 03310-16 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 b.where aggregate base material does not have sufficient fine particles to produce a surface that is free of exposed aggregate or surface voids greater than 3/8” in size at time of slab installation. 6.Use laser guided equipment used to establish specified base elevation. 7.Provide dry, smooth, flat, dense surface 8.Proofroll 48 hrs maximum prior to concrete placement. Depression under a fully loaded ready mix truck shall not exceed 1/2 inch. D.Pavement Aggregate Base Fine Grade Tolerance: +0 inch, -3/4 inch with transition no greater than 3/4 inch vertically to 8 inches horizontally for level slab. E.Interior Slab on Ground Aggregate Base Fine Grade Tolerance: +0 inch, -3/4 inch with transition no greater than 3/4 inch vertically to 8 inches horizontally for level slab. 3.4FORMWORK A.Form vertical surfaces of concrete work. B.Design, construct, erect, support, and remove formwork and related items in accordance with most stringent requirements of ACI 117, 301, 304R, and 347R 1.Camber forms to allow for deflection due to weight of fresh concrete. C.Formwork for concrete surfaces to be painted or exposed to view after completion of project shall conform to the following: 1.Do not use forms with dents, holes or patches. 2.Individual formwork elements shall be as large as possible. 3.Position individual formwork elements in regular, uniform pattern with joints aligned. 4.Uniformly space and align form ties in horizontal and vertical rows. 5.Construct forms for removal without hammering or prying against concrete. 6.Temporary formwork openings (for cleaning, inspecting, etc) shall be placed on unexposed side or constructed so that concrete surface at opening will match adjacent concrete in appearance. D.Form Preparation 1.Clean formwork. 2.Remove rust from steel formwork. E.Erecting Forms: 1.Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints as required to prevent leakage of cement paste. 2.Do not tape formwork joints. 3.Just before placing concrete, clean forms and adjacent surfaces again as necessary. Remove wood, sawdust, chips dirt and other debris. 4.If necessary to grease tie threads, do not allow grease to contact remainder of tie when wall will be exposed to hydrostatic pressure. F.Form Release Agent 1.Before placing reinforcing steel, thoroughly coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved form release agent. 2.Apply form release agent evenly without excess drip. 3.Do not allow form release agent to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. 4.Moisten wood forms immediatelybefore placing concrete where form release agents are not used. G.Form Construction for Paving: 1.Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. 2.Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuance of work and so that forms remain inplace minimum of 24 hours after concrete placement. 3.Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: a.Top of forms not more than 1/8-inch in 10'-0". 03310-17 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 b.Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4-inch in 10'-0". 4.Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.5PLACING REINFORCEMENT A.Place reinforcing in accordance with most stringent requirements of ACI 117, 301 and 308 and CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and Placing Reinforcing Bars. B.Accurately place and secure reinforcement against displacement by firmly wiring at intersections and splices with not less than No. 18 U.S. Standard Gauge annealed wire. C.Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, Documents 63 and 65. Detailing practices and fabrication shall conform to ACI SP66. 1.Place and secure saddle ties at every other intersection with wire; hold in place with metal chairs or spacers during placing of concrete. 2.Hold bars in beams and slabs to exact location during concrete placement. Use spacers, chairs, or other necessary supports with the following tolerances: a.Bars in Slabs and Beams: 1)Members 8 Inches Deep or Less: ± 1/4 inch. 2)Members 8 Inches to 2 Feet Deep: ± 1/2 inch. 3)Members more than 2 Feet Deep: ± 1 inch. b.Lengthwise of Member: ± 2 inches. c.Concrete Cover to Formed Surfaces: ± 1/4 inch. d.Minimum Spacing Between Bars: ± 1/4 inch. D.Turn wire ends away from concrete exterior. E.Ensure reinforcing is clean, free from defects and kinks, loose mill or rust scale or coatings that will reduce bond. F.Protect exposed reinforcing bars, inserts and plates intended for bonding with future expansion from corrosion. G.When welding of reinforcement is specified, comply with AWS D1.4. Do not tack weld crossing bars for assembly of reinforcement, supports or embedded items. H.Slab on Grade and Pavement Dowels: 1.Secure dowels and their sleeves perpendicular to joint and parallel to finished concrete surface. 2.Useprefabricated dowel supports at ends of dowels to maintain alignment. 3.Dowel alignment shall be within specified tolerances. 4.Do not grease plate dowels 3.6EMBEDMENTS A.Install anchor bolts and embedded bearing devices provided by others. B.Provide other anchor bolts and bearing devices shown on Drawings or anchor bolt setting plans or required equipment installation. C.Use templates as required for spacing between anchor bolts and set elevations with surveying equipment. D.Position and anchor steel shapes, anchor bolts, casings, conduit sleeves, masonry anchorages and other materials embedded in concrete. E.Place and secure against displacement miscellaneous steel, pipe sleeves, inserts, anchors, stair abrasive nosings, preformed joint fillers, vapor retarders and miscellaneous embedded items. F.Secure embedments to formwork when possible. 03310-18 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 G.Install clean embedments. After concrete placement, clean embedment exposed surfaces of concrete splatter and other foreign substances. H.Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, ensure corner protection angles, bars and other similar embedded metal items are continuous between concrete joints. If shorter lengths are required for metal items, connect the ends by butt-welding entire joint and grinding smooth exposed surface. Ensure embedded metal items are discontinued at construction, contraction and isolation joints. I.Temporarily fill voids in sleeves and inserts with easily removable materials. J.Before placing concrete on grade, piping and other utilities under concrete shall be inspected, tested, and excavations backfilled and properly compacted to solid bearing. K.Allow sufficient time between erection of forms and placing concrete for other trades to install and test their work. 3.7JOINTS A.Joints 1.Provide construction, isolation and contraction joints as indicated on Drawings and as noted below. 2.Bulkheads for construction joints shall be 1-1/2 inch minimum lumber. Do not use permanent preformed metal bulkheads. 3.Provide bulkheads full depth of member. 4.Space joints to allow one continuous placement between bulkheads. 5.Ensure saws are equipped with HEPA-filtered dust collection vacuum systems as specified herein. B.Contraction Joints: 1.Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, do not extend reinforcement, corner protection angles, bars or other fixed metal items through construction joints or contraction joints in slabs on ground or pavements or through joints between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces. 2.Match joints in walls and curbs with joints in slabs on ground and pavements. 3.Extend joints across tops of walls and curbs unless noted otherwise on Drawings. C.Pavement Joint Construction: Construct weakened-plane control (contraction), and construction joints straight with face perpendicular to concrete surface. Construct transverse joints perpendicular to centerline, unless otherwise detailed. 1.Weakened-Plane Control or Contraction Joints: Provide joints at spacing of 12'-0" on centers, maximum each way. Construct control joints for depth equal to at least 1/4 of the concrete thickness, as follows: a.Form tooled joints in fresh concrete by grooving top with recommended tool and finishing edge with jointer. b.Sawed Contraction Joints: 1)Use saws, blades, skid plates, and accessories by Soff-Cut International, Inc., (800) 288-5040, or approved equal. 2)Provide at least two Soff-Cut saws with blades capable of achieving the required depth of saw cut. 3)Start cutting sawed joints as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent raveling or dislodging of aggregates. This will typically be from 1 hour in hot weather to 4 hours in cold weather after completing finishing of slab in that joint location. 4)Extend sawed joint to the slab boundaries and abutments, including columns, drains, and other penetrations in the path of a defined joint.Implement methods and timing of the saw cut beyond the limits of the Soff-Cut saw reach to provide a consistent depth of cut with minimal raveling of joint edges. c.Saw-Cut Control Joint Dust Collection: Connect one of the following dust collection systems directly to each Soff-Cut saw being used. Select collection system model recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions at the lowest permissible level for the size of the Soff-Cut blade. 1)Pulsevac Dust Collector by E. G. Enterprises , (614) 251-8111. 2)ProVac Dust Collection System by GladTech, Inc. 3)SoffVac by Soff-Cut International, Inc. 03310-19 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where placement operations are stopped for period of more than 1/2 hour. Construct joints in accordance with details shown. a.Soft Preformed Joint Fillers: Extend preformed joint fillers full-width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2-inch or more than 1-inch below finished surface. Furnish preformed joint fillers in 1-piece lengths for full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than 1 length is required, lace or clip preformed joint filler sections together in a single plane. b.Joint Sealants: Install joint sealants in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D.Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints as indicated. Make provision to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint by methods shown on the drawings. E.Joint filling and sealing is specified in Section 07900. 3.8CONVEYING A.Handle concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable and in manner which will assure obtaining specified quality of concrete. B.Retempering: Discard concrete which has already begun to set. Do not retemper with water. C.Equipment: Provide mixing and conveying equipment of proper size and design to ensure a continuous flow of concrete to delivery end. Do not use aluminum pipe or equipment in contact with concrete. 1.Mixers, agitators and non-agitatingunits: Conform to ASTM C 94 and current certification requirements of Department of Transportation in state where concrete plant is located. 2.Belt Conveyers: a.Use only types which will not cause segregation. b.Discharge runs over 30 feet into hopper. 3.Chutes: Metal or metal lined not to be installed at slopes greater than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. 4.Runways: a.Provide runways or other means above finished concrete level for wheeled conveying equipment. b.Do not support runways on reinforcing. c.Do not wheel equipment directly over reinforcing or metal deck. 5.Pumps: a.Submit to Testing Lab Agency for review, changes to concrete mix to necessitate pumping. b.Use pump hoses and other slickline components with 5 inch minimum inside diameter. c.For slickline reducers, reduction in diameter shall not exceed 1 inch over a 5 foot length. 3.9PLACING CONCRETE A.Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301; including hot and cold weather placement procedures. B.Inspect reinforcement, inserts, and embedded parts before beginning concreteplacement to verify accurate size and location. C.Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. D.Place concrete in uniform layers, horizontal, 12 to 18 inches thick, exercising care to avoid vertical joints or inclined planes. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints shown on structural drawings. Piling up of concrete in forms to cause separation or loss of ingredients is not permitted. E.Do not deposit concrete which has partially set or hardened. Do not deposit initial lubricating mortar when pumping concrete. Remove hardened or partially hardened concrete which has accumulated on forms or reinforcement. Do not place concrete on previously deposited concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within respective member or section except as specified. 03310-20 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 F.Deposit concrete as nearly in final position as practical to avoid rehandling. Exercise care to prevent splashing forms orreinforcing with concrete. Do not permit concrete to drop freely a distance greater than 3 feet. Where longer drops are necessary, use chute, tremie, or other conveyance to help avoid separation. G.Do not deposit concrete into excavation where water is standing. If place of deposit cannot be successfully pumped dry, place through tremie with outlet end near bottom of place of deposit. H.The following personnel shall be present during all slab placements: Contractor’s Superintendent, Concrete Subcontractor’s Finish Foreman, Concrete Supplier’s Quality Control Representative, and Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory. I.Deliver concrete from only one concrete batch for any given days placement. The same concrete plant shall be used for the entire interior slab placements unless approved in writing prior to change J.Do not place concrete over standing water, mud, frost, ice or snow. K.Do not use wet screeds. L.Consolidation: 1.Consolidate concrete complying with ACI 301 by vibrating, spading or rodding so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcing. 2.Do not insert vibrator into portions of concrete that have begun to set. 3.Keep spare vibrator on job site during concrete operations. 4.Consolidate and screed slabs to allow construction joint pattern as indicated on Structural Drawings and as specified. Consolidate concrete by vibrating laser screeds. Other vibratory screeding methods are acceptable only in areas where laser screed is not accessible. a.Check laser screed level head a minimum of 3 times during each pour. Use feeler gauge to measure deviations. If deviations are present, replace head with a new straight one. 5.Use internal vibration along construction joints at both formed and slab abutments. Vibrate under plate dowels. Mark forms before concreting to properly locate dowels after concreting. 6.Do not use grate tampers, jitterbugs, or mesh rollers. 3.10FLOOR SLAB FINISHING A.Equipment: 1.Provide a minimum of five, eight foot or larger, properly operating, ride-on finishing machines on site and available forslab placements. B.General: 1.Do not add water to any slab surface during finishing operations. 2.Do not add cement to any slab surface during finishing operations. 3.Perform no finishing operation while water is present on slab surface. C.Initial Leveling: 1.Complete bull floating, darbying and straight-edging before any bleed water is present on slab surface. 2.Use a 10 feet wide minimum channel float for initial and later leveling instead of bull float where overall FF 20 / 15. floor tolerances specified are greater than FL D.Hand and Power Floating: 1.Do not start floating until following conditions are met: a.Bleeding is complete and water is gone, including water sheen on slab surface. b.Mortar is not thrown by rotating blades of power float. 2.The finisher shall determine the proper time to start finishing procedures for interior slab placements on the basis the above conditions. It is noted for advisory purposes, however, that typical setting characteristics of concrete materials will allow for initial power floating to begin 3-1/2 hour’s ± 1 hour after initial strike-off (screeding), at which time the concrete should support a finisher on foot without more than approximately a 1/4 inch indentation in the slab surface. Variations in concrete materials, nature,and concrete temperature 03310-21 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 will cause setting behavior to vary. 3.Do not use following tools for floating: a.Power troweling machines with trowel blades. b.Fresno or other type of wide metal trowel. c.Power floating machine with water attachment for wetting concrete. 4.Float three times minimum with each floating at right angles to previous floating, and final pass at 45 degrees to previous pass. E.Troweling for Interior Slabs: 1.Hand or power float floor before starting troweling. 2.For first troweling, keep blade as flat as possible and use low speed, minimizing “washboard” or “chatter marks” and “pitting”. 3.Trowel two times minimum with first two trowelings at right angles. Some burn marks are acceptable as determined in review of the test slab. Cease troweling before trowel blades scratch surface. 4.Allow time between trowelings for concrete to stiffen and water sheen to disappear. 5.Do not add water to slab surface during troweling. 6.Do not ride trowels on existing hardened concrete slabs. Trowels shall be carried off of slab surfaces. When parking power trowels on fresh concrete, place on top of plywood or spray area with evaporation retarder before placing trowel on top of slab. 7.Ensure kneeboard impressions, trowel marks or chattered areas are not evident after floor is finished. 8.Provide dense, smooth trowel surface, uniform in texture. Random, mottled burn marks are desired and acceptable. Refer to approved permanent test panel. 9.Finish surface to produce maximum sheen free of scratches and trowel marks. F.Do not deposit concrete when plasticity, measured by slump test, is outside specified limits. The addition of water to increase slump will not be permitted. G.Vibration: As soon as concrete is deposited, thoroughly agitate with mechanical vibrators and suitable hand tools to work mixture into corners of forms and around reinforcing and embedded items. Use mechanical vibrators with minimum frequency of 9000 revolutions/minute. Do not over vibrate or use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators at approximately 18 inches apart. At each insertion, vibrate generally 5-15 seconds, sufficient to consolidate concrete but not long enough to cause segregation. Keep spare vibrator on job site during concrete placement operations. Do not insert vibrator into lower coarses that have begun to set. H.Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager upon discovery. I.Pumping: Maintain controls for proportioning, mixing, adjustment of mix, and placement in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 304.2R 3.11CURING A.General: 1.Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 308R and ACI 308.1, except as noted. 2.Start curing as soon as concrete surface will not be damaged by curing operations. 3.Continuously cure concrete for at least 7 consecutive days. 4.During curing period, do not allow any part of the concrete to become dry. 5.If using forms for curing, keep forms in contact with concrete wet during curing period unless type of form is impervious to water, such as metal or fiberglass. 6.If forms are removed before curing period is complete, continue curing immediately with other approved methods B.Methods of Curing: 1.Impervious Sheet Cure: Wet exposed surfaces of concrete after completing finishing and then apply prewetted sheet with edges lapped 6 inches minimum and sealed & secured in such manner as to prevent moisture from escaping from concrete from laps or edges. Remove sheets after a 7 day curing period. 03310-22 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.Curing Compound: a.Apply liquid curing compounds by spraying or rolling uniformly in a single coat on surfaces immediately following final finishing operation. b.Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. c.Do not use liquid curing compound on surface against which additional concrete, other finishing materials, or coatings are to be bonded if their bond will be affected by curing compound. d.Spraying shall be by power sprayer. e.Immediately recoat, at the rate specified above, surfaces subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after compound has been applied or surfaces damaged by subsequent construction operations within the curing period. 3.Curing Schedule: a.Unformed surfaces shall receive an impervious sheet cure or curing compound as appropriate except as follows: b.Use impervious sheet cure for exterior color textured finished surfaces. c.Protect and cure finished concrete paving using curing compound. 3.12CURING A.Curing Compound (Temporary Film Forming): 1.Apply curing compound prior to saw cutting joints and as soon as concrete surface will not be damaged by curing operations. 2.Clean slab surface and joints and remove loose or compacted saw debris prior to curing compound application. 3.Apply compound at a rate of 700 to 1200 square feet per gallon with high volume, low pressure, atomized sprayer in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Prevent over-application in excess of specified rate. 4.Spread compound evenly using mopping pads. Mopping pads shall be Rubbermaid24 inch Microfiber Wet Room Pad or equivalent. 5.If whitening from over application occurs, consult manufacturer for removal of product with hot water and aggressive scrubbing. 6.Do not allow compound to accumulate and puddle. 7.Do not use polyethylene sheets or other impervious covers on exposed interior floors. 3.13FORM REMOVAL A.Do not remove forms until concrete has hardened sufficiently to support its own weight and imposed construction loads. B.Remove forms in manner to avoid damage to concrete. C.Formwork for slabs and pavements, curbs and other parts not supporting vertical load of concrete may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations, but in no case sooner than 12 hours. D.Remove wood forms from under floors,ramps, steps, and similar places (through temporary openings if necessary) so no material will be left to rot or to be infested by termites. 3.14FINISHING PROCEDURE A.Formed Surfaces: 1.Rough-Form Finish: a.Patch tie holes and defects. Clip or rub off fins exceeding 1/2 inch in height. Leave surfaces with texture imparted by forms. b.Apply on concrete surfaces not exposed to public view and where noted on Drawings. 2.Smooth-Form Finish: a.Patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins exceeding 1/8 inch in height. b.Apply on concrete surfaces exposed to public view and where noted on Drawings. 03310-23 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Initial Finishing: 1.Re-straighten surface irregularities with a 10 ft highway screed in two directions as close to perpendicular as possible before water appears on concrete surface. 2.Do no further working of surface until time for floating; do not work surface while water is present. 3."Dry Sprinkle" method finishing is not acceptable and will be cause for rejection C.Floating: 1.Begin float operations when bleed water sheen has disappeared and concrete has stiffened sufficiently to allow walking on surface without leaving heel prints more than 1/4 inch deep. Check and level the surface lane to an initial tolerance not exceeding ¼ inch in ten feet when tested with a ten foot straight edge. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform smooth granular surface. Use magnesium or aluminum power float unless otherwise specified. 2.Avoid premature finishing that brings excessive fines to surface causing finished slab to have soft surface whichwill dust. D.Troweling: 1.Delay troweling as long as possible to prevent working excess fines and water to surface. Do not begin until surface moisture film and shine remaining after floating have disappeared. Trowel in alternate pass directions. 2.Power trowel using riding trowel where possible. Use hand trowel in inaccessible areas. 3.Do not over-trowel floors scheduled to receive curing/sealing compound unless specified otherwise. 4.Do not re-wet surface to trowel. 5.Final hand finish passes shall be done in the same direction. Finish all surfaces within a reasonable time period to provide uniformity of appearance. E.Broom Finish: 1.Provide a floated finish, then finish with broom. a.Heavy Boom Finish: Steel wire or stiff, coarse, fiber broom. b.Light Broom Finish: Soft-bristled fiber broom. 2.Allow surface to harden sufficiently to retain scoring or ridges. 3.Broom transverse to traffic or at right angles to slope of slab. F.Sealing: Apply concrete sealer to interior concrete curbs in cart storage area. G.Finish Schedule: 1.Unexposed Exterior Formed Surfaces: Rough form finish. 2.Exposed Exterior Formed Surfaces: Smooth form finish, stone rubbed. 3.Automotive Center Pit Floor and Slab above Pit: Troweled 4.Equipment Pads: Troweled 5.Dock : Light Broom. 6.Curbs: Troweled 7.Stair Treads: Heavy Broom. 8.Exposed exterior walking surfaces, truckwells, ramps, andoutside slabs, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: Broom Finish. 3.15JOINT FILLING AND SEALING A.Joint filling and sealing is specified in Section 07900. 3.16DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A.Concrete that does not satisfy the performance requirements of this specification, including but not limited to, tolerance, strength, durability and finish shall be removed and replaced at no extra cost to the Owner if repair cannot be accomplished to the satisfaction of Wal-Mart Construction Manager. B.Patching; 1.Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager immediately upon discovery and before patching any imperfect areas. 03310-24 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.Repair and patch imperfect areas, with cement mortar, immediately after discovery. Imperfect areas not acceptable to Wal-Mart Construction Management will be considered defective. 3.Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over ¼ inch in any dimension, surface imperfections and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete, but in no case, to a depth of less than one inch. Make edges of cut perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound has dried. 3.17FIELD QUALITYCONTROL A.Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Except as specified as mandatory, field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. Owner T&I specified in Appendix B shall not preclude Contractor’s responsibility to perform similar routine, necessary, and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. B.Contractor shall collect and certify each delivery ticket of concrete. Verify that tickets indicate type of concrete delivered, amount of water added and time at which cement and aggregate were loaded into truck, and time at which concrete wasdischarged from truck. C.Responsibilities and Duties of Contractor Relative to Owner T&I: 1.Notify CTL not less than 3 working days prior to placing concrete to allow time for site visit. 2.Assist CTL in securing field specimens. 3.Provide and maintain for sole use of CTL, facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test cylinders at project site as required by ASTM C 31 and acceptable to CTL. 3.18OWNERTESTING AND INSPECTION (T&I) A.The Owner will perform testing and inspection as specified in Appendix B (03310). 3.19PROTECTION A.Protect finished work. B.Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and damage. C.Patch or replace damaged portions of concrete. D.Protect wet cured or impervious sheet cured surfaces as follows: 1.Barricade concrete surfaces immediately after finishing 2.Do not allow light traffic, except for curing purposes, on concrete surfaces until concrete has attained1800 psi (approx 3 days). 3.Do not allow heavy traffic on concrete surface until concrete has attained, by test, its design strength as noted on drawings, but not sooner than 9 days after placement. 4.Permit concrete to dry minimum of 2 additional days after curing is completed before removing barricades. E.Protect surfaces cured with curing compound as follows: 1.Barricade Concrete surfaces immediately after application of curing compound. 2.Do not allow traffic on concrete surfaces sooner than 3 days after placement. 3.20CLEANING A.Remove forms, equipment, protective coverings, and rubbish resulting from concreting operations. Leave finished concrete surfaces in clean conditions. Use vacuum with HEPA-rated filter to remove loose dirt and mud. Do not dry sweep. Removemortarand concrete droppings. Wash concrete floors and platforms with soapy water and rinse with clean water. 03310-25 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Dispose of construction and universal waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01351. END OF SECTION 03310-26 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 WAL-MART STORES CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL FORM (Section 03310–Structural Concrete and Exterior Concrete Slabs)Date________________________ PROJECT TYPE: STORE INFORMATION STORE # ADDRESS CITY, STATE GENERAL CONTRACTOR COMPANY JOBSITE PHONE A. CONCRETE INFORMATION Supplier Mix Design # ’ Design Strength (fc) psi LEAVE Water / Cementitious Ratio Total Air Content % Total Est. Volume of Concrete CY BLANK FOR Concrete Uses/Locations ENGINEER’S Mix Developed From: Trial Mix Test Data (attach test data) Field Experience STAMP Density WetpcfDrypcf Slump WITHOUT “( ± 1” )WR Admixture WITH “( ± 1” )WR Admixture B.ADMIXTURE INFORMATION ASTM DesignationProductDosage (ounces) (Manufacturer/Brand)oz / cyoz / cwt Water Reducing Accelerating Retarding 03310-27 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 MIX DESIGN C . Mix Proportions (per cubic yard) Identification WeightDensityVolume% Aggregate Absorption (Type, size, source, etc.)(pounds)(SSD)(cubic feet) Cement Fly Ash Slag Coarse Aggregate #1 #2 #3 Fine Aggregate #1 #2 Water Air Content TOTALS Coarse & Fine Aggregate Gradation Information %Passing Each Sieve Combined % Retained (All Sieve Sizes must be entered) SieveCoarseCoarseCoarseFineFineCombined SizeAgg. # 1Agg. # 2Agg. # 3Agg. # 1Agg. # 2% PassingCumulativeIndividual 1-1/2" 1" 3/4" 1/2" 3/8" # 4 # 8 # 16 # 30 # 50 # 100 # 200 % of Vol Aggregate Ratios Combined % cumulative retained 3/8” sieve Coarseness Factor = = Combined % cumulative retained #8 sieve Workability Factor = Combined % passing #8 sieve= Adj-Workability Factor = WF + \[(Cementitious Material -564) ÷ 37.6\]= Allowable Adj-WF= Low High Adj-WF = \[(11.25 -.15 CF) + 35.5\] ± 2.5= 03310-28 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.ATTACHMENTS: Include the following with thisMix Design Report. Portland Cement mill test reports Fly ash mill test reportswhere required Slag mill test reports Designation, type, quality, and source (natural or manufactured) of coarse and fine aggregate materials Separate aggregate gradation reports including all required sieve sizes All gradation sieve report tests dated within 60 daysof this report Report for each coarse and fine aggregate material in mix Statement if possible reactivity of aggregate, based on tests or past service Statement if possible aggregate pop-outs or their disruptions, based on tests or past service Product datafor the following admixtures: Chloride ion data and related calculations Water reducing, set retarding, set accelerating, etc. Measured water-soluble chloride ion content in concrete (percent by weight of cement) Concrete compressive strength data used for standard deviation calculations E.CONCRETE SUPPLIER INFORMATION Company NameTel. # ( ) Address City, ST Zip Technical Contact Cell # ( ) e-mail Sales Contact Cell # ( ) PRIMARY PLANTSECONDARY PLANT Plant Location: Miles from Site: Travel Time to Site: NRMCA Certified:YES NOYES NO State DOT Certified:YES NOYES NO Batch Mixing Type:DRYCENTRAL MIXDRYCENTRAL MIX 03310-29 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec –Store Planning082820 SECTION 03366–PVCREMOVAL AND POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES FOR INTERIOR SLABS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Unless otherwise specified, provisions specified herein for products and execution furnished by Owner are require- ments for Owner’s Preferred Flooring Contractor and are included as information only to General Contractor. B.Section Includes: 1.For existing interior slabs: a.Removal of existing floor finishes (sealers, coatings, tile, etc.) and underlayments, as necessary. b.Interior concrete slab surface enhancement. 1)Progressive wet polishing of slab surface using propane powered planetary or multi-head ro- tary polishing equipment and approved diamond segments to achieve specified Finish Require- ments. 2)Application of reactive densifier,stain protectorand burnishing to specified Finish Require- ments. 2.For new interior slabs installed in accordance with the requirements of Section 03314. a.Progressive wet polishing and burnishing of slab surface, including application of concrete surface colorant system, to specified Finish Requirements. 3.Allocation of Preferred Flooring Contractor, General Contractor, and Store Planning responsibilities as de- scribed in Part 1 herein. C.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01330 -Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 2.Section 01351 -Regulatory Compliance: Waste management and disposal. 3.Section 01500 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Requirements for control of substances that have the potential for polluting surface and/or groundwater. Requirements for storage of materials and equipment at the project site. 4.Section 01700 -Execution Requirements: Requirements for use of electrical and propane powered equip- ment. 5.Section 01770 -Contract Closeout 6.Section 03905 -Interior Concrete Slab Repairs and Joint Filler Replacement. 7.Section 03931 –Interior Concrete Slab Surface Enhancement 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society for Testing and Materials: 1.ASTM D 1455 Standard Test Method for 60° Specular Gloss of Emulsion Floor Polish C.Concrete Polishing Council(CPC). D.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1.OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3OWNER’S PREFERRED FLOORING CONTRACTOR (PFC): A.The Owner’s Preferred Flooring Contractor is a firm hired by and contracted by the Owner for the purpose of exe- cuting work within the scope of this section. The PFC shall be one the following as determined by Owner: 1.Budget Maintenance, Pottstown, PA, (610) 323-7702. Contact: John Jones. 2.Refuse Materials, Inc., Ocilla, GA, (229) 468-9822. Contact: DA Pope. 03366-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.Jones Tile, Roach, MO, (573) 346-3862. Contact: Robert Jones. 4.A and I Floor Covering, Inc., Murray, UT, (801) 509-9587. Contact: Adam DiFabrizio. 1.4PREFERRED FLOORING CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A.Provide labor, material, equipment, and services necessary to perform the work in this section. B.Conduct work in manner as to minimize disruption of Owner's normal operations. C.Administrative and Scheduling Requirements: 1.Coordinate project phasing and relocation of racking, shelving, or merchandise to ensure minimum interfer- ence with other aspects of the Work. This may require multiple visits to job site on a given project. 2.Work shall begin no earlier than 15 minutes before approved start time and shall finish within one hour after approved completion time. Coordinate start time and completion time of daily work specified herein with Owner’s Construction Manager and Store Manager. 3.Attend morning communication meetings (lead installer). 4.Track material usage and ensure quantities on hand are sufficient for Work. 5.Submit Weekly Flooring Installation Report to Contractor and Walmart Construction Manager each Friday. 6.Submit any required Flooring Add-on Order forms. Expedited freight charges incurred by add-on orders will be charged to PFC. Contact Walmart Construction Manager for required forms. 7.When necessary or requested, advise Store Planning or General Contractor in phasing and scheduling. 8.Coordinate with Contractor for selecting the staging location for the materials included in the scope of the work. D.Existing Materials Management: 1.MovetheremovedPVC flooring materials from the sales floor to the agreed upon staging area. 2.Slurry Disposal: a.Coordinatescheduling, delivery, and pickup of slurry disposal with waste management and Contrac- tor. b.Pay for slurry disposal. E.Return to project site 7-14 days prior to Re-Grand Opening to complete required corrections related to work specified herein. 1.5GENERAL CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A.Provide temporary electrical service as specified in Section 01500 for PFC’s equipment. 1.Prior to submission of bid, determine Owner’s designated PFC for project. Coordinate with PFC to evaluate temporary electrical requirements. B.Coordinate disconnecting and reconnecting electrical power to existing equipment and fixtures, including registers, which are scheduled to be moved for installation of flooring. C.Attend Pre-Possession meeting to assist in determination of flooring installation and finishing schedule (Phasing Plan). D.Existing Materials Management: 1.Movethe removedPVC flooring materialsfrom staging area to the Contractorprovided Conexstorage box. 2.Ifthe removed PVC materials are scheduled to be stored in a Store Planning Fixture or Regional warehouse after leaving the staging area, see Store Planning Responsibilities herein. 3.Initiate contact with Owner’s PVC recycling firm to coordinate the recycling firm’s scope. Process and return the recycling firm’s required paperwork. Owner’s recycling firm will unload the PVC materials from the Conex box 7-10 business days from initial contact and transport the materials to its recycling facility. E.Slurry Storage Fencing and Monitoring: 1.Providefencing around slurry bins and any associated storm water BMPs. 2.Unlock slurry fence area during daytime hours for slurry disposal pickup as coordinated with the PFC. 03366-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.Monitor and reportincidentson any qualifying spills. F.Supervise flooring scope of work including but not limited to: 1.When necessary or requested, coordinate with and advise Store Planning, CM, or PFC in phasing and sched- uling. 2.Ensure Phasing Plan schedule is followed (Sequence of moves, daily flooring minimums, etc.). 3.Ensure conformance (quality expectations) with contract documents. G.Perform Final Cleaning and Protection as specified in Part 3 herein. 1.6STORE PLANNING RESPONSIBILITIES A.Floor Phasing Plan and Schedule: Develop, produce, and lead the Floor Phasing Plan and Schedule as described in Part 1 Quality Assurance herein. B.Storage of Removed PVC Materials: In some cases, the removed PVC materials are scheduled to be stored at a Store Planning Fixture or Regional warehouse prior to being transported to the recycling facility. 1.If the removed PVC is to be transported to a Store Planning Fixture or Regional warehouse, Store Planning will move the PVC materials from the staging area to the Fixture or Regional warehouse. 2.Store Planning will coordinate with Owner’s recycling firm and process the recycling firm’s required paper- work. 1.7SUBMITTALS A.Product Data Sheets: 1.High pH Cleaner: Brand name, chemical composition, dilution rate, installation directions and certificates of compliance with required standards, if applicable. 2.Reactive Surface Densifier, Stain Protectorand Colorant Densifier System: Brand name, chemical composi- tion, installation directions and certificates of compliance with required standards. B.Manufacturer and model numbers of all equipment to be used (as specified): 1.All polishing machines. 2.Manufacturer and model of diamond polishing segments. Product data and procedure of polishing must be submitted for verificationof compatibility, prior to beginning slab enhancement work. 3.High speed burnishing equipment, including burnishing pads. Product data for pads must be submitted for verification of pad texture prior to beginning burnishing work. 4.Scrubber machines. 5.Concrete slurry waste disposal. Refer to Section 01500. 1.8CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Comply with the requirements of Section 01770. B.Product and Equipment Data: Submit the following manufacturer’s data for products and equipment used in the specified enhancement process: 1.Manufacturer’s technical product data and literature. 2.Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3.Manufacturer’s safety data sheets and related safety requirements. 4.Product and equipment manufacturer’s recommendations for slab maintenance. C.FloorPhasingPlan and Schedule as specified in Part 1 hereafter. D.PFC’s maintenance recommendations including: 1.Maintenance schedule and frequency. 2.List of approved cleaning and stain removal products and procedures. 3.Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to burnished slab finish. 03366-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 E.PFC’s Completion Quality Control Test Results as specified in Part 3 herein. 1.9QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Floor Phasing Plan and Schedule: Prior to commencement of work, Store Planning will produe a Floor Phasing Plan and Scheduledeveloped using Owner’s most current Drawings (Sheet A1 “Slab Finish Plan”). B.Floor Polishing Plan shall be a detailed program describing PFC’s intent and agenda including: 1.Location of all cracks, spalls and other surface defects requiring repairs in accordance with Section 03905. Include quality color digital photographs of sufficient quantity as to illustrate necessary repairs. 2.Locations of weekly gloss measurements taken in prior scopes. 3.Concrete slurry waste disposal location. 4.Unique work requirement locations (i.e. joint repairs, floor patching, etc.). 5.Scheduling: Include in the Floor Polishing Plan a detailed written schedule for sequence of work which en- sures uninterrupted progress of Owner's concurrent operations. a.Include anticipated start and finish date of work. b.Show size, location and anticipated progression of individual nightly work areas, forecasted one week from current date of submission. 6.Digital Colored Photographs, in sufficient quantity to. Images shall be emailed to Owner’s Construction Manager and Architect of Record. 7.Coordinate approval of Floor Polishing Plan and Schedule Owner’s Construction Manager and Store Man- ager. C.Manufacturer’s Field Representatives: At the request of Owner’s Construction Manager or Owner’s Independent Concrete Consultant, manufacturers’ technical representatives shall be on site to oversee work specified herein to verify proper use of products and equipment. 1.10DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements in Division 1 and manufacturer's recommendations. B.Deliver materials to site in original, factory sealed, unopened, new containers (drums) bearing manufacturer’s name and label intact and legible, with the following information: 1.Name or title of material. 2.Manufacturer’s standard container (drum) numbers. 3.Application instructions. C.Storage: 1.Refer to Section 01500. 2.Store materials in protected and well-ventilated area at temperatures between 40 and 90 degrees F unless otherwise required by manufacturer.(Provided by General Contractor for use by the Preferred Flooring Ven- dor). 3.Keep containers sealed until ready for use. 4.Do not use materials beyond manufacturer’s shelf life limits. D.Handling: Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. 1.Dispense penetrating liquid densifier only from factory sealed and numbered containers (drums). 2.Maintain record of container (drum) numbers received and used during floor treatment. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide products and equipment by the following: 1.Ameripolish,(800) 592-9320,www.ameripolish.com. 2.Concrete Polishing Solutions (877) 472-8200 www.go2cps.com 03366-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.Husqvarna (800) 288-5040 www.husqvarna.com 4.Onyx Environmental Solutions (800) 858-3533 www.onyxsolutions.com 5.Pioneer Eclipse (800) 367-3550 www.pioneer-eclipse.com 6.SASE Company, Inc. (800) 522-2606 www.sasecompany.com 7.Substrate Technology, Inc. (815) 941-4800 www.substratetechnology.com 8.Superabrasive, Inc., (800) 987-8403, http://www.superabrasive.com/ 9.Superior Surface Solutions, (888) 471-5227 www.superiorsurfacesolutions.com\] B.Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 2.2EQUIPMENT A.Use of Owner’s equipment is not allowed. B.Auto Scrubber Machines: Equipment used for cleaning operations shall be Clark Encore Max38 or L38 with a head pressure of 150 lbs. or similar equipment as required to achieve the specified Finish Requirements. C.Propane Polishing Equipment: 1.Propane polishing machines shall be in full operating condition during the duration of the night’s work as required to achieve specified Finish Requirements. 2.Polishers shall have minimum 650pounds down force. D.Diamond Segments: 1.Diamond grinding heads shall be by one of the following manufacturers. Use heads from same manufacturer throughout entirety of project. a.HTC. b.John Don c.SASE, Inc. d.Substrate Technology, Inc. e.Superabrasive, Inc. f.Superior Surface Solutions. 2.Diamond Segment Grit Sizes (or Manufacturer’s Equivalent Designations): a.Metal bonded diamonds: 40, 60, 80, 150 b.Hybrid Style Diamonds: 80,100, 120and 200 c.Resin Bonded, Phenolic Diamonds: Progression of all polishing steps shall include sequential grit sizes that are not greater than twice the previous grit used. E.High speed propane burnisher: Equipment shall meet the specified minimum performance requirements. 1.Head Size: 21 or 27 inch. 2.Head Weight: 22 pound (40 pound maximum). 3.Engine Size: 585 cc, generating 1,500 RPM or higher (as verified with tachometer). 4.Dust skirt assembly. F.Burnishing Pads: 1.Diamond Impregnated Pads (DIP): 1500 and 3000 grit. 2.DiamashineDiamond Impregnated Pad by Superior Surface Solutions 3.CASH Diamond Impregnated Pad by Substrate Technology, Inc. 4.Twister Diamond Impregnated Pad G.Sprayer for Reactive Surface Color Densifier:Carbon dioxide sprayeras follows. a.Patriot SpraySafe System, by Patriot Sprayer Systems. Provide Red #6 spray tip -6.4 gallons per hour. 2.3PRODUCTS A.Joint Filler Products:Polyurea joint filler as specified in Section 03905. 03366-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.Color: Match polished slab surface. Sample installed in mock-up shall be approved by WalmartConstruction Manager. B.Slab Repair Products:Slab repair materials are specified in Section 03905. C.High pH Cleaner: 1.Ameripolish Rejuvenating Cleaner. D.Reactive Surface Densifier: Chemical densifier specifically for concrete surface treatment which reacts chemically to the concrete surface forming a clear, dense, durable, hard, abrasion-resistant surface. Product shall be a colorless, odorless, water-based solution that is less than 50 VOC. 1.3DHS by Ameripolish. E.Stain Protector: Penetrating concrete chemical stain protector specifically for concrete surface treatment which re- acts chemically to the concrete surface maintaining a clear, dense, durable, hard, abrasion-and chemical-resistant surface. Product shall be a solution that is less than 40 g/l VOC. 1.SR2 by Ameripolish. F.Color Solvent for Dyes:Solvent carrier designed for use with dye. 1.ColorSolve by Ameripolish. G.Dye:Colorant designed for diamond polished concrete. 1.Classic Midnight Black by Ameripolish. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine concrete slab with Owner’s Construction Manager. Verify that floor is in substantially the same condition as described in the Floor Polishing Plan. 1.Identify and mark additional repair locations not shown in Floor Polishing Plan. 3.2PREPARATION A.Close areas to traffic during and after floor finish application for time period recommended by product manufac- turer(s). B.Cover and protect merchandise and racking to prevent damage or contamination of stored products. Protect mer- chandise from concrete slurry or debris. C.Clean Substrate: Remove existing floor finishes to bare concrete slab. 1.Do not use hazardous materials or flammable, toxic, or solvent-based cleaning products. 2.Remove curing or sealing compounds, paint, and wax. 3.Remove surface contaminants such as oil, grease and general soiling with high pH cleaner/degreaser diluted as recommended by manufacturer using swing machine with red or black pads. Use appropriate pad to achieve desired results while not exposing coarse aggregate or excessive sand within paste layer. 4.Thoroughly rinse floor surface with clean water to remove soap residue and contaminants. Vacuum with auto scrubber. 5.Squeegee dry. D.Remove and replace existing deficient joint filler within the limits of required slab polishing and as shown on Draw- ings, in accordance with Section 03905. E.Repair slab defects within the limits of required slab polishing in accordance with Section 03905. Correct previous repairs not conforming to requirements of Section 03905, including any repairs not matching color of adjacent slab surface, in accordance with Section 03905. 1.Coordinate full scope of concrete slab repair work with Owner’s Construction Manager. 03366-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 F.Verify concrete floors are free of excessive moisture and dusting. G.Verify that surfaces conform to the manufacturers’ requirements for substrate conditions Do not proceed until un- satisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.3GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Completejoint replacement and slab repair work at least 12 hours prior to commencement of any wet polishing. B.Use sequential progression of diamond pads limited to no more than double the grit value of the previous diamonds used. C.Allow new concrete slab to achieveits 28 day design strength as documented by Owner’ CTL. Approved compres- sive strength test report from CTL must be received by Owner’s Construction Manager prior to allowing color densification. D.Progressively wet diamond polish edges along and around all abutments. Use same progression of polishing seg- ments throughout. E.Between and after final wet polishing passes, thoroughly scrub and rinse slab surface with clean water and vacuum with auto-scrubber. 3.4SURFACE POLISHING AND DENSIFICATION (EXISTING CONCRETE SLABS) A.Perform Work where shown on Drawings where existing slab is exposed to Customer view. B.Progressively wet polish slab surface utilizing approved diamond segments to achieve specified Finish Require- ments. 1.Perform initial polishing step. 2.Overlap adjacent passes by 50%. 3.Final polishing pass shall be with no less than 800-grit resin. C.Apply Reactive Surface Densifier to dry slab surface in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 1.Apply reactive surface densifier after the appropriate polishing pass (typically after 200-grit and before 800- grit). Allow to dry. 2.Vary dilution rates per manufacturer’s recommendations to eliminate hazing and whitening on slab surface. D.Burnish: 1.Burnish slab with 1500 and 3000-grit Diamond Impregnated Pad to polish slab surface in compliance with specified Finish Requirements. 2.Use microfiber pad after burnishing to remove any laitance and debris from slab surface. E.Apply Stain Protectant(SR2) 3.5APPAREL FLOOR COLOR STAIN BAND A.Areas to be treated: Provide stain band where shown on Drawings at areas of concrete slab exposed to Customers. B.Open slab surface by progressive wet polishing Steps. 1.Perform initial polishing step and all polishing steps utilizing 200 grit and below. 2.Install 3M Blue tape to outline 6” band. 3.Apply application of dye after 200 grit. 4.Apply dye and allow drying. 5.Use a damp microfiber pad to remove any residual dye. 6.Apply densifier after stain application. 7.Continue to perform ongoing progressive polishing steps to complete the Conversion. 8.Burnish with 1500 grit or higher burnishing pad. 03366-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 9.Apply SR2. 3.6COLOR DENSIFICATION (NEW CONCRETE SLABS) A.Areas to be treated: Provide Color Densification where shown on Drawings at all new areas of new concrete slab exposed to Customers. B.Open slab surface by wet polishing with resin-bonded or hybrid, phenolic diamond heads. 1.Perform initial polishing step and all polishing steps utilizing 200-grit and below. 2.After completion of the above polishing steps, progressively wet polish slab surface. 3.Overlap adjacent passes by 50%. 4.Final polishing pass shall be with no less than 800-grit resin. C.Apply surface colorant to dry slab surface after appropriate diamond polishing step, in accordance with manufac- turer’s instructions. 1.Failure to consult with surface colorant manufacturer for proper dilution rate required to match adjacent concrete slab panels may result in additional cost to Contractor without an increase in Contract time. 2.Polish slab surface in compliance with specified Finish Requirements. 3.Use microfiber pad after burnishing to remove any laitance and debris from slab surface. D.Apply Stain Protectant. 3.7FINISH REQUIREMENTS: A.Appearance: Enhanced interior slabs areas that receive the specified slab enhancement process must consist of the following: 1.Failure to comply with specifications to produce finish requirements may result in additional cost to Con- tractor without an increase in Contract time or additional disruption to Store operations. 2.Slab surface must exhibit a hard polished appearance with no evidence of scratching from grinding/polishing. a.New concrete placed under 03314 and color densified as specified herein and existing adjacent slab polished as specified herein shall have matching aesthetics. 3.Exposure of aggregatebeyond CPAA Class B -Fine Aggregate shall be considered non-conforming work. 4.White residue, “orange peel”, or hazy appearance in the finished surface will not be accepted. B.Gloss: Final surface gloss within Sales shall be between 30 and 55 as measured using a Horiba IG-320 Gloss Checker. C.Leave work complete and ready for final inspection by WalmartConstruction Manager. 3.8FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING A.Gloss Measurements: 1.Gloss shall be considered as a quantitative value that expresses the degree of reflection when light hits the concrete floor surface. 2.Take gloss measurements independent of ambient lighting and within a sealed measurement window located beneath the testing equipment. 3.Measure and report as follows: a.Measure gloss values at five evenly but randomly distributed locations within each aisle for each night’s work area. Record measurement locations on Floor Polishing Plan. b.If samples fail to meet the specified value, continue burnishing operations until the specified gloss requirements are achieved. c.Collect and certify final gloss measurements to Owner’s Construction Manager and the Owner’s In- dependent Concrete Consultant. 3.9CLEANING A.Remove spilled, splashed, or splattered finish material from surfaces. 03366-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.10FINAL CLEANING AND PROTECTION BY CONTRACTOR A.Protect areas to receive polished concrete finish at all times during construction to prevent oils, dirt, metal, excessive water, paint, and other potentially damaging materials from contacting the finished concrete surface. Initiate the following protective measures immediately after completion of the PFC’s work as specified herein. 1.Communicate to Store Manager and all subcontractors, vendors, and trades the importance of maintaining slab protection. 2.Protect slab surface from moisture for 24 hours. 3.Each day, inspect equipment used over completed slab surface. Verify the following: a.Equipment is without leaking hydraulic lines and is diapered to avoid staining. Remove all equipment with hydraulic fluid leaks from store site. b.Equipment is without tire embedments (rocks, nails, screws, etc.) that will scratch or pit slab surface. c.Equipment is clean and free of dust prior to start of work requiring equipment. 4.Do not allow pipe cutting on the finished slab. 5.Do not place steel on the finished slab to avoid rust staining. 6.Prevent contact with acids and acidic detergents. 7.Use breathable drop cloths during all painting. Immediately wipe clean spilled paint. B.Damage to finished slab resulting from lack of protection shall be repaired at no additional cost to Owner or Owner’s PFC. END OF SECTION 03366-9 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning012519 SECTION 03905 –INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB REPAIRS AND JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Joint filler removal and replacement. 2.Joint edge spall repair. 3.Crack repair. 4.Surface defect repair, including pop-outs, chips, spalls, and pitting. 5.Removal and replacement of previously completed repairs not in compliance with this section. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01330 –Submittal Procedures. Procedures for submittals. 2.Section 01351 -Regulatory Compliance: Waste management and disposal. 1)Disposal and removal of construction and universal waste. b.Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 3.Section 01500 –Temporary Facilities and Controls. Requirements for control of substances that have the potential for polluting surface and/or groundwater. 4.Section 01700 –Execution Requirements. Requirements for use of fuel powered equipment within the en- closed building. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1.OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Minimize dust emissions and provide equipment that suppresses dust. B.Dispose of construction waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01351 Regulatory Compli- ance Supplement. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Within 21 days after award of prime contract, submit in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01330. Unless otherwise specified herein, send submittals to Architect of Record as specified in Section 01330. 1.Submit all submittal items required within this section in a single submittal via e-mail (maximum document size 10Mb). a.Do not submit submittals of this section together with submittals in any other section. 2.If Contractor fails to submit a complete Concrete Slab Enhancement Submittal Package within 21 days after award of prime contract, the Contractor shall pay the Owner $250.00 per day as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, until the fully completed Concrete Slab Enhancement submittal package is received by the Architect of Record. 3.Submittals shall be complete, accurate, and in full compliance with contract requirements for proper and timely approval. 4.Maintain one copy of approved documents on site. 5.Identify submittals explicitly in accordance with Section 01330. 6.Fill out and submit attached Concrete Slab Repair and Joint Filler Replacement Submittal Form attached at the end of this Section. 03905-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Submittal Rejections: 1.Submittalswhich do not comply with Contract Documents will be rejected. If submittal is rejected for any reason, Wal-Mart Stores, Inc., will back-charge the Contractor $200.00 via Change Order, to cover the pro- cessing costs of each subsequent review until submittal is approved. Reasons for submittal rejections include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Incomplete Concrete Slab Enhancement Submittal Package. b.Lack of required certifications. c.Unspecified equipment. d.Unspecified products. 2.Rejected submittals shallbe revised and resubmitted until approved. Extension of Contract time will not be allowed for rejected submittals. a.The Contractor shall revise and resubmit rejected submittals within 7 days of receipt of rejected sub- mittals. b.The Contractor shall verify that the Slab Enhancement subcontractor has addressed all required revi- sions in the re-submittal. C.Product data and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): 1.All products and primary equipment used for repair of existing concrete slab defects. D.Joint Filler and Slab Repair Subcontractor Requirements: 1.Joint Filler and Slab Repair Subcontractor Qualifications: Provide to General Contractor for submittal a list of minimum of 5 projects performed within the last 2 years of similar type, size and complexity as this contract. Provide project names, addresses, contact names, phone numbers, and scope of work for each project at time of Bid and within Slab Enhancement Submittal Package. 2.Joint Filler and Slab Repair Subcontractor shall be a contractor possessing current certifications at time of Bid. a.Joint filler installation and slab repair shall be performed by same subcontractor. b.Joint filler and slab repair subcontractor personnel shall remain the same throughout the completion of specified work unless approved in writing by Wal-Mart. c.Joint Filler and Slab Repair Subcontractor shall not sub-subcontract any work in this Section. 3.Joint Filler and Slab Repair Subcontractor Certifications: Provide to General Contractor for submittal a letter of certification, identifying individuals that are currently certified installers of the following specified mate- rials and are familiar with proper procedures and installation methods as required by the specified product manufacturers. a.Polyurea Joint Filler. b.Low Viscosity Rigid Urethane. 1.5QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Environmental Requirements: 1.Comply with the requirements of Section 01351for construction and demolition waste management and disposal. 2.Comply with current Federal, state and local air quality regulations and with Federal requirements on con- crete silica dust emissions. Do not dry grind or polish slab surface. 3.Limit and control all noise and damage from excessive dust caused by demolition, preparation, and installa- tion of specified work. 4.Limit and control damage from moisture. 5.Referto Section 01500 for control of substances that have the potential for polluting surface and/or ground- water. 6.All replaced concrete shall be cured a minimum of 28 days prior to joint filler installation. 7.Close finished slab area to traffic during application and after application for a time as recommended by manufacturer. 8.Upon completion of densifier application, dispose of excess materials. Refer to Section 01351. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MATERIALS 03905-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide products as manufactured by the following to the extent as specified hereinafter: 1.Advanced Blending (817) 477-8022 www.advancedblending.com 2.Brulin & Company (800) 776-7941www.brulin.com 3.Hi-Tech Structural Epoxy Systems(800) 454-5530www.hitechpolyurea.com 4.Metzger/McGuire (800) 223-6680www.metzgermcguire.com 5.Prime Resins, (800) 321-7212www.primeresins.com 6.Prosoco (866) 363-4567 www.prosoco.com 7.Roadware, Inc. (800) 522-7623www.concretemender.com 8.SpecChem (866) 791-8700www.specchemllc.com 9.Superior Surface Solutions (888) 471-5227 www.superiorsurfacesolutions.com 10.VersaFlex, Inc. (913) 321-1416www.versaflex.com B.Polyurea Joint Filler: Rapid setting, two-component polyurea polymer liquid of 100% solids content, Shore hardness 85-90, compatible with construction materials in contact. 1.HT-PE85,High-Tech 2.EP 80, by Metzger/McGuire. 3.VersaFlex SL/85, by VersaFlex. 4.Match color of adjacent exposed concrete slab surface. C.StructuralUrethane(low viscosity): 1.10 Minute Concrete Mender, by Roadware 2.Spall TX, by High Tech 3.Rapid ReFloor, by Metzger/McGuire. 4.Quick Mender, by VersaFlex. 5.Match color of adjacent exposed concrete slab surface. D.Silica Sand 1.Dry 00 Sandblasting sand. E.Structural Mortar 1.Armor-Hard Extreme, by Metzger/McGuire. 2.Dimakrete Polish Mortar, by Superior Surface Solutions. 3.RepCon 928, by SpecChem. F.Surface PittingGrout 1.Dimakrete Polish Grout, by Superior Surface Solutions. 2.Quick MenderX.O., by VersaFlex. 3.Rapid ReFloor Pit Grout, by Metzger/McGuire. 4.Approved equal G.High pH Cleaner: 1.AmodetDegreaser/Cleaner by Advanced Blending. 2.Brulin Deep Scrub Cleaner by Brulin & Co. 3.Cleaner/Degreaser by Prosoco. 4.Equivalent approved products. 2.2EQUIPMENT A.Refer to Section 01700 for requirements related to acceptable power sources specified herein. B.Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide equipment manufactured by the following: 1.Gator Finishing Products (800) 2554748,www.gatorfinishing.com 2.HTC (877) 482-8700, www.htc-america.com 3.Joe Due Blades and Equipment, Mauston, WI, (877) 563-3833. 4.Norton Abrasives (800) 331-3604,www.nortonabrasives.com 5.Pulman-Ermator (800) 232-2635, www.pullman-ermator.com 03905-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 6.SASE Company, Inc., Kent, WA (800) 522-2606 7.U.S. Saws, Santa Ana, CA (866) 987-7297. 8.OBHC, Inc. dba Gorilla Concrete Tools, Columbia Station, OH, (440) 236-5112. C.Dust Collection Vacuum System: Connect one of the following dust collection systems directly to each tool. Verify that collection system provided is equipped with HEPA-rated filter and is recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. Verify air flow speed is acceptable for the size of the blade. 1.26D, by HTC. 2.S2400, by Pullman-Ermator. 3.Bull 50, by SASE Company, Inc. 4.Similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. D.Joint Filler Removal and Preparation 1.Humpback Cutter Complete, by Joe Due. 2.Dust Buggy, by U.S. Saws. 3.Gorilla Concrete ToolsGCT-10 or GCT-9 Silverback by OBHC, Inc. 4.Similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. E.Crack Repair: 1.5” Dust Mizer 005, by Joe Due. 2.7” Dust Mizer 007, by Joe Due. 3.Crack Attacker, by Joe Due. 4.7” Handheld Crack Chaser, by Joe Due. 5.SawTec 5” Tile Vac, by U.S. Saws. 6.SawTec 7” Crac-Vac, by U.S.Saws. 7.Similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. F.Surface Grinder: Handheld 5”-7” electric surface grinder with dustless shroud/housing. 1.Dust Avenger 5, by Joe Due. 2.Dust Avenger 7, by Joe Due. 3.SawTec 5” Grinder Vac, by U.S. Saws. 4.SawTec 7” Grinder Vac, by U.S. Saws. 5.Similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. G.Fiber Stripping Pads 1.Rapid Strip Disc, by Norton 2.Gator Fiber Disc, by Gator Finishing Products 3.Similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1GENERAL A.Concrete rehabilitation work specified shall be performed within the limits of the area of the sales floor shown on Drawings. B.Installation of specified products shall be in accordance with product manufacturer’s written instructions. C.Verify that sawing and grinding tools are equipped with a dust collection system as specified herein. D.For repairs of this Section requiring clean joints of loose concrete, joint filler, laitance, dust, and debris, use a HEPA- rated filter vacuum. 3.2EXAMINATION 03905-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.An evaluation of the existing floor slab shall be conducted, identifying all defects. Scope of repairs shall be con- firmed by the Walmart Concrete Consultant prior to commencement of work. Identify scope of work on Floor Polishing Plan specified in other section(s) of Division 3 –Concrete. B.Repairs are not acceptable unless specifically approved on a case-by-case basis by the Wal-Mart Construction Test- ing Laboratory. 3.3PREPARATION A.Close areas to traffic during and after floor finish application for time period recommended by product manufac- turer(s). B.Cover and protect merchandise and racking to prevent damage or contamination of stored products. Provide dust drapes as required to protect merchandise from dust or debris. C.Protect surface of slab immediately adjacent to defect under repair. D.Do notproceed until Wal-Mart Construction Manager has approved repair material color match. 3.4JOINT MILLING AND CAP FILLER REPLACEMENT 1/2" min. new filler A.If existing joint filler is sound and BeforeAfter resting on top Orginal material of saw bearing on cut saw cut shelf shelf, mill top 1/2" of material and refill with specified polyurea joint filler: B.Re-saw the joint to a minimum depth of 1/2” with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw using a slightly oversized blade. The blade width should be sufficient to encapsulate the widest spall along a given contraction joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through the joint. C.Refill with polyurea joint filler materialfrom the bottom up, taking care not to entrap large air bubbles per manu- facturer’s recommendation. Slightly overfill and shave flush to the surface, prior to grinding process. D.Ensure that after grinding, the joint is cut smooth and flush with the finish floor surface, without concave or inter- mittent, darkened profile. 03905-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.5FULL DEPTH JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT Fill to Bottom of Original Saw Cut BeforeAfter Saw cut shelf Note: if shelf width at base of saw cut is less than 1/4" on either side of joint, minimum required filler depth is 2" placed over compressibel backer rod or bagged silica sand. A.If existing joint filler is loose, easily removed, or able to be forced downward with a hand tool, remove all filler material from joint and refill. B.Re-saw joint full depth with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw using a slightly oversized blade. The blade width should be sufficient to encapsulate the widest spall along a given contraction joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through the joint. Remove all filler material, debris, and laitance. C.If shelf width at base of saw cut is less than 1/4 inch on either side of joint, fill joint with compressible backer rod to not more than 2 inches below slab surface. D.Refill with polyurea joint filler material from the bottom up, taking care not to entrap large air bubbles per manu- facturer’s recommendation. Slightly overfill and shave flush to the surface prior to grinding process. E.Ensure that after grinding, the joint is cut smooth and flush with the finish floor surface, without concave or inter- mittent, darkened profile. 3.6CONTROLJOINT REPAIR (LESS THAN 1”) Spalled Original or tooled Joint radiud edge 3/4" min. depth Sawcut and Remove Concrete As required 1" maximum A.For joints that are spalled or have radius tooled edges not exceeding 1” in width at slab surface. B.Re-saw the joint edge to a minimum depth of 3/4” with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw allowing removal of the widest spall (or top of radius) along a given joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through joint. 03905-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Clean joint of loose concrete, joint filler, laitance, dirt, debris, backer rod, etc. D.Joints must befree of all visible moisture. E.Ensure filler penetrates the irregular aggregate interlock portion of the sawn contraction joint as shown below, re- establishing the aggregate interlock that may have been lost due to shrinkage, curling, and lack of reinforcement. Repair Cavity < 1" Overfill and Shave Flush Re-establish Aggregate Interlock with Polyurea F.Gravity feed a trace amount (1/8”) of silica sand into jointto prevent 3-sided bonding of joint filler.Use proper dust control methods in handling silica sand. G.Fill joint cavity per manufacturer’s instructions, taking care not to entrap large air bubbles. Overfill joint slightly and shave flush to slab surface prior to grinding process. 3.7CONTROLJOINT REPAIR (GREATER THAN 1”) Saw cut patch material and refill to match Rebuild joint edge with original joint cementitious patch material 3/4" min. Polyurea Material Repair Cavity > 1" A.For control joints that exceed1in width at slab surfaceor where the slab displaysheight differential greater than at either side of joint. 03905-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Re-saw the control joint edge to a minimum depth of 3/4with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw allowing removal of the widest spall along a given joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through joint. Maintain consistent width of repair to within 1/2inch in 10 feet. 1.For construction joints experiencing or greater height differential at abutting joint edges, repair material should slope at 1/4per foot at floor surface. C.Acceptable Patch Materials 1.Structural Mortar installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2.Sand Modified Structural Urethane: a.Place 1/2" layers of dry Silica Sand in bottom of spalled cavity. b.Pour structural urethane material over sand until sand is slightly covered. c.Repeat 1/2"blended layers of sand and structural urethane material until slightly overfilled above finished concrete surface. D.Allow patch material to dry (drying time will vary based on temperature). E.Overfill repair cavity with patch material per manufacturer’s instructions and grind flush to slab surface. F.Use hand grinder with Fiber Stripping Pad to hone over -fill level to adjacent slab surface. G.After patch materialhas cured, and prior to any traffic on patched surface, re-saw original slab joint(s)and fill with polyurea joint filler per manufacturer’s instructions. H.Polish or burnish repair material to match adjacent slab surface after material has properly cured. 3.8CRACK REPAIR A.Crack width less than 1/32without surface spalling. 1.Do not repair. B.Cracks from 1/32to in width. 1.Clean crack cavity. a.Remove loose concrete, dirt and debris from crack with a wire brush or hand grinder with twisted wire wheel attachment, 1/2minimum depth, insuring crack sidewall is clean. b.Remove any loose segments, including islands formed by crack, with sharp tool. c.Use methods that will not widen existing crack. d.Vacuum crack to remove all dirt, debris and other laitance. 2.Mask slab surface along crack as necessary to minimize overfill. 3.Choose material color that closely matches the adjacent floor. 4.Install low viscosity rigid urethane repair materialin accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 5.Repeat until all voids are filledand material crowns slab surface. a.Do not flood area around crack. b.Watch for bubble formation and out gassing. c.Do not allow material to gel before adding additional material. 6.Shave or grind material flush to surface as stipulated by manufacturer. 03905-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Cracks from 3/8" to 1in width 1.Saw top or edge of crack to provide square edge, minimum in depth. a.Use small hand grinder with maximum 5diameter blade, minimizing eventual crack width while maintaining uniformity of shape. 2.Clean crack cavity. a.Vacuum crack to remove all dirt, debris and other laitance. b.Remove all visible moisture. 3.Mask slab surface along crack as necessary to minimize overfill. 4.Install polyurea joint filler. a.Dispense sample into small bucket to test blending of material. b.Prime crack with repair material. c.Dispense material, dragging dispenser tip along crack, until it flows over the slab. 5.Wait approximately 10 minutes, periodically checking for material cure. a.Check condition of material by shaving with razor scraper. b.Material will shave smooth when cured. c.Proper timing is crucial. 1)Too long and material will be difficult to shave 2)Too soon and material will ravel. 6.Shave material flush to slab surface per manufacturer’s instructions. 3.9SURFACE SPALLINGREPAIR SLAB SURFACE SPALL A.Route edge of spall to provide 1/2deep square edge. 1.Use small hand grinder with maximum 5diameter dry diamond blade and vacuum system attachment. 2.Do not overcut slots into existing slab surface. B.Clean and prep spalled cavity. 1.Wire brush spalled surface to remove all dirt and laitance. 2.Mask slab at perimeter of spall with tape. C.Install low viscosity rigid urethane repair material using tube cartridge without flow restrictor. D.Polish over repair area with diamond disks to blend surface. 1.Feather filler material into the adjacent concrete floor surface. 2.With 2000 grit disk and firm pressure, add a few burn marks to mottle surface to blend with adjacent floor surface. E.NOTE: For spalled joints, a form material may be needed to temporarily support vertical face of spalled joint edge. Ensure that the repair material will not adhere to the form. 3.10BOLT HOLE/SPALL REPAIR 03905-9 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Recess steel bolt a minimum of 1/2below finish floor by either punching or cutting. B.For spall fracture edge less than 30 degrees, square edge to a minimum 3/8depth with either a drill bit or chisel. C.For surface spalls resulting from removal of transition strips, use hollow core drill bit to remove surrounding concrete spall to nominal depth of Adjacent repairs shall be of a consistent diameter (max repair size 1nominal). D.Clean cavity of all debris and laitance with drill activated, brass wire wheel. Vacuum hole to remove all dirt, debris and other laitance. E.Dispense low viscosity rigid urethane at moderate pace using steady pressure. Dispense material into void, refilling as necessary to produce slight crown. F.Grind material flush to slab surface per manufacturer’s instructions. 3.11LARGE SURFACE REPAIR A.Edge perimeter with diamond masonry wheel to produce sharp edge, at least 3/8deep. B.Roughen base surface and vacuum clean. Wire brush to remove any small loose material and vacuum again. C.Protect adjacent slab surface with tape at perimeter of repair area, width as required to prevent scratching during troweling operations. D.Mist floor surface until damp but without standing water. E.Prepare slurry prime coat of polymerized Portland cement compound and scrub into repair surface with stiff bristle brush. Do not allow to dry before placing pigmented repair material. Use of concrete bonding agent optional. F.Mix repair material in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. G.Place repair materialin floor surface defect and float level. Use float on edge as using flat will cause material to stick and pull. H.Lightly mist floated repair material with the finishing aid once and perform first troweling pass to smooth surface without over-working; do not reapply finishing aid during any other troweling operations. I.Wait until material begins to set and can be indented with finger about 1/8and perform second troweling pass, approximately two hours after initial placement. J.Using a fine sharp edged cutting tool, cut along edge of repair material and adjacent slab to prevent raveling of edge during tape removal, or remove tape earlier before material has set up all the way to prevent raveling or spalling. K.When material has become stiff and can be slightly indented with hard finger pressure, final trowel using firm pres- sure until mottling and a shine has become apparent. Surface should be tight, level and smooth without surface defects. Do not allow trowels to be positioned on surface flat, as surface will tear. Use circular sweeping motions. Final set should be around 4-5 hrs from time of placement. L.Keep surface clean during troweling operations to prevent any laitance from coming in contact with the repair ma- terialand marring surface. M.Check material set after 30 minutes to 1 hour. Surface should not dent with fingernail under hard hand pressure. N.Dye and polish or burnish repair material to match adjacent slab surface color after material has properly cured. O.Removetape and clean area of all particles on repair surface and adjacent floor surface. 03905-10 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 P.Re-establish original concrete slab joints by sawing completely through patch and re-filling with polyurea joint filler prior to exposure to traffic. 3.12SURFACE PITTINGREPAIR SLAB SURFACE PITTING A.This repair is to be used in areas where the number of minimum 1/4" size diameter slab pits exceeds eight per square foot. B.Using high pH cleaner, scrub slab surface using swing machine with stiff brush, to loosen ground in soils in all pits. C.Rinse slabsurface with clean water and vacuum up with auto scrubber. D.Use specified “Surface PittingGrout” material after first grind. E.Follow manufacturer’s instructions regarding procedures. F.Repeat repairs in areas as required if repair material pulls out of defects. Allowing a longer curing time typically minimizes material pull out. 3.13PROTECTION A.Protect surfaces of finished floor. B.Prohibit traffic until floor repairs have received final approval by Owner. 3.14FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Except as specified as mandatory, field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. END OF SECTION 03905-11 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 WAL-MART STORES INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB REPAIR AND JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT SUBMITTAL FORM Section 03905–INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB REPAIRS AND JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENTDate ________ WAL-MART: SAM’S CLUBDISCOUNT STORESUPERCENTERNEIGHBORHOOD MARKET STORE INFORMATION STORE # ADDRESS CITY, ST GENERAL CONTRACTOR JOINT FILLER AND SLAB REPAIR SUB-CONTRACTOR JOBSITE PHONE ATTACHMENTS: A.Include the following with this Submittal Package. Completed Interior Concrete Slab Repairand Joint Filler Replacement Qualification Statement of Conformance. Letter of Certification for Joint and Slab Repair Material and Installation. Product data. Manufacturer and model of all equipment used relating to scope of work. Anticipated Slab Enhancement Floor Polish Plan (Developed from Sheet A1.1) for the following: Anticipated start and finish date of work. Size, locationand anticipated progression of individual nightly work areas, forecasted two weeks out from the cur- rent date of submittal. Location of all joint filler replacement, cracks, spallsand other surface defects requiring repairs specified herein. Electrical supply locations. 03905-12 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB REPAIRAND JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT QUALIFICATION STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE SECTION 03905 Project Location: _______________________________________________Date: Project Number: ____________________________Store Number: By signing below as approved, the Contractor hereby confirms that the qualifications of the joint filler and slab repair subcontractor conforms to the qualifications as follows: The joint filler and slab repairsubcontractor has experience in finishing interior floors of similar size and scope in at least 5 previous projects. Projects name and location are identified as follows 1. ___________________________________________________________________ 2. ___________________________________________________________________ 3. ___________________________________________________________________ 4. ___________________________________________________________________ 5. ___________________________________________________________________ Concrete Joint Filler and Slab RepairSubcontractor Company Name and Address: __________________________________________ __________________________________________ __________________________________________ Signature of Responsible Officer: _________________________ Typed Name and Title of Officer: _________________________ Telephone Number: ( ______ ) ___________________________ General Contractor Company Name and Address: _______________________________________ _______________________________________ Signed by: ______________________________________ Date:_________________ Submit one copy of this Statement to the Architectof Record. 03905-13 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning022417 SECTION 03931 -INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB SURFACE ENHANCEMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Existing interior slab surfaces exposed by removal of PVC flooring. a.Removal of existing sealers, coatings, adhesives, etc. and underlayments, as necessary. Refer to Sec- tion 02023 for removal of existing flooring. b.Progressive wet polishing and burnishing of slab surfaces, including application of concrete surface colorant system, to specified Finish Requirements. B.Furnish all labor, material, equipment, and services necessary to perform the work in this section. 1.Use of Wal-Mart owned equipment is not allowed. C.Related Sections: 1.Section 01330 -Submittal Procedures: Procedures for Submittals. 2.Section 01351 -Regulatory Compliance: Waste management and disposal. 3.Section 01500 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Requirements for control of substances that have the potential for polluting surface and/orgroundwater. Requirements for storage of materials and equipment at the project sit 4.Section 01770 -Contract Closeout 5.Section 03314-Cast-in-Place Concrete Slabs (Interior) 6.Section 03905 -Interior Concrete Slab Repairs and Joint Filler Replacement. 7.Appendix B –Testing, Inspection and Observationby Owner: Procedures for inspection, testing, and documentation by Owner furnished testing laboratory. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society for Testing and Materials: 1.ASTM D 1455 Standard Test Method for 60° Specular Gloss of Emulsion Floor Polish C.Concrete Polishing Association of America (CPAA). 1.3SUBMITTALS A.Within 21days after award of prime contract, submit in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01330. Unless otherwise specified herein, send submittals to Architect of Record as specified in Section 01330. 1.Submit all submittal items required within this section in a single submittal via e-mail (maximum document size 10Mb). a.Do not submit submittals of this section together with submittals in any other section. 2.Submittals shall be complete, accurate, and in full compliance with contract requirements for proper and timely approval. 3.Maintain one copy of approved documents on site. 4.Identify submittals explicitly inaccordance with Section 01330. 5.Fill out and submit attached Concrete Slab Enhancement Submittal Formattached at the end of this Section. B.Product data: 1.Manufacturer and model of all equipment to be used (as specified): a.All propane polishing machines. 03931-1 #04568-221Blair, NE05/19/21 b.Manufacturer and model of diamond polishing system. Product data and procedure of polishing must be submitted for verification of compatibility, prior to beginning slab enhancement work. c.High speed burnishing equipment, including burnishing pads. Product data for pads must be sub- mitted for verification of pad texture prior to beginning burnishing work. d.Scrubber machines. e.Densifier applicators/sprayers. f.Concrete slurry waste disposal. Refer to Section 01500. 2.High pH Cleaner: Brand name, chemical composition, dilution rate, installation directions and certificates of compliance with required standards, if applicable. 3.Reactive Surface Densifier and Colorant Densifier System: Brand name, chemical composition, installation directions and certificates of compliance with required standards. C.Slab Enhancement SubcontractorRequirements: 1.Slab Enhancement SubcontractorQualifications: Provide to General Contractor for submittal a list of a minimum of 5projects performed within the last two years of similar type, size, and complexity.Submit project names, addresses, contacts, phone numbers, and scope of workfor each project at time of Bid and within Slab Enhancement Submittal Package. a.Slab Enhancement Subcontractor shall be a contractor possessing current certifications at time of Bid. 2.Slab Enhancement Subcontractor Certifications:Provide to General Contractor for submittal a letter of certification from manufacturers of all products and equipment specified herein. Letter shall state that the applicator is a certified applicator of the system and is familiar with proper procedures and installation methods as required by the manufacturer for: a.Propane polishingequipment. b.Reactive surface densifierand reactive surface colorant densifier. 3.A minimum of one installer for work requiring manufacturer’s certification, possessing manufacturer’s documents that state this individual has been specifically trained, must be present during all installations of such work. Each certified individual shall retain identification noting these credential at all times for site verification. 4.Slab Enhancement Contractor personnelshall remain the same throughout the completion of specified work, unless approved in writing by Wal-Mart. 5.Slab Enhancement Subcontractorshall not sub-subcontractany work in this Section. D.Anticipated Slab Enhancement Floor Finish Plan: 1.Prior to commencement ofwork, submit a Floor Finish Plan (developed from Sheet A-1.1“Floor Finish Plan”) including: a.Size, location and anticipated progressionof individual nightly work areas, forecasted two weeks out from current date of submission. b.Concrete slurry waste disposal location. c.Unique work requirement locations (i.e. joint repairs, floor patching, etc.) d.Anticipated start and finish date of work 2.Use plan to document gloss value measurements, as reported weekly from CTL. 3.Plan shall be reviewed and accepted by Wal-MartConstruction Managerand Wal-Mart StoreManager prior to start of work. E.Test Results: 1.Submit final floor gloss test reportsproduced by the CTL to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Wal- Mart’s Concrete Consultantvia emailas specified. F.CloseoutDocuments:Submit in accordance with Section 01770. 1.General Contractor shall submit Final Floor Finish Plan,including the following: a.Final CTL Gloss Measurements: b.Digital ColorPhotographs,in sufficient quantity to provide general indication of quality of work performed. Images shall be emailed to Wal-Mart Construction Manager andWal-MartConcrete Consultant. 2.Verification of gallons used of densifier for application. 3.Waste Management tickets/receipts/documentation from third party for disposal of concrete slurry and 03931-2 #04568-221Blair, NE05/19/21 waste. 1.4QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Accessibility Requirements 1.Comply with applicable requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAGs) for Buildings and Facilities; Final Guidelines, revisions, and updates for static coefficient of friction for walkway surfaces. B.Concrete Polishing Association of America (CPAA) guideline on levels of aggregate exposure. C.Environmental Requirements: 1.Comply with the requirements of Section 01351for construction and demolition waste management and disposal. 2.Comply with current Federal, state and local air quality regulations and with Federal requirements on concrete silica dust emissions. Do not dry grind or dry polish slab surface. 3.Comply with current Federal and local toxicity and air quality regulations and with Federal requirements on content of lead, mercury, and other heavy metals. Do not use solvents in floor polish products that contribute to air pollution. a.All propane powered equipment must have catalytic converters on mufflers and certification of emission testing conducted within 6 months of operation that confirms compliance with all air quali- ty regulation. 4.Limit and control all noise, dust and moisture created by concrete surface enhancement work to meet all local, state, and Federal ordinances, codes and laws. a.Limit and control damage from dust or slurry caused by surface preparation andwetpolishing. 5.Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation and other conditions affecting chemical performance. 6.Close finished slab area to traffic during application and after application for a time as recommended by manufacturer. 7.Define affected areawith orange plastic construction fencing. 8.Upon completion of densifierapplication, dispose of excess materials as required by local agency having jurisdiction. a.Certified applicator shall remove densifier product containers from job site immediately upon com- pletion of treatment. D.Walmart Concrete Consultant: 1.Structural Services, Inc. (SSI):wmr@ssiteam.com. E.Manufacturer’s Field Representative: At the request of the Wal-Mart Construction Manager or Concrete Consult- ant, a manufacturer’s technical qualified field representative shall be on site at to overseework specified herein, including but not limited to the wet polishing processand installation of the surface densifier system to verify proper installation of product. F.Mandatory Pre-Installation Meeting: 1.Plan, host, and attend a pre-installation meeting to be conducted at site by Wal-Mart Consultant via teleconferencea minimum of 7 days prior to first night of slab enhancement. a.Schedule pre-installation meeting with Walmart Concrete Consultant after all submittals required herein have been submitted via email and approved by Walmart Concrete Consultant. 2.Obtain pre-installation meeting agenda from Walmart Concrete Consultant. 3.Require responsible representatives of each party involved with the surface enhancement workto attend the pre-installation meeting. Representatives to be present shall include personnel who are directly involved in overseeing the work and who have authority to control the Work. 4.Notify all required attendees in writing of scheduled time and placea minimum of 7days in advance of pre-installation meeting. Include copy of agenda with invitation. 5.General Contractor shallsupply conference call information 24 hours prior to meeting. 6.The pre-installation meeting shall convene only when all parties are present. 7.Attendees shall include, but not be limited to the following: 03931-3 #04568-221Blair, NE05/19/21 a.Wal-Mart Construction Manager b.Wal-Mart Store PlanningField Project Manager c.Walmart Store/Club Manager d.Wal-Mart Concrete Consultant e.Wal-Mart Construction Testing Laboratory. f.GeneralContractor g.Project manager h.Superintendents i.Diamond tooling manufacturer’s representative. j.Densifier manufacturer’s representative k.SlabEnhancement Subcontractor jobsite representative that will be overseeing all work. l.Joint Filler Applicator. m.Joint FillerManufacturer 8.Review the following: a.Expectations of finished work specified. b.Scheduling and phasing of work. c.Environmental requirements (store working conditions). d.Joint filler installation. e.Cleaning andwetpolishing procedures, including application of liquid densifier system. f.Field quality control requirements. g.Slab protection after completion of work. 9.Minutes of the pre-installation meeting shall be recorded, typed, printed, and distributed to all parties concerned by the General Contractor within 5 days of the meeting. One copy of the minutes shall also be transmitted to the Owner's representative for information purposes. 10.Changes to the contract documents from recommendations or discussions at the Pre-Installation meeting shall be approved in writing by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager prior to implementation.The Wal- Mart Construction Manager may require submittal of a Request for Information(refer to Section 01255). Walmart Concrete Consultant is NOT authorized to change any specified requirementor to approve execution of any portion of the work. 1.5DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements in Division 1 and manufactur- er's recommendations. B.Deliver materials to site in original, factory sealed, unopened, new containers (drums) bearing manufacturer’s name and label intact and legible, with the following information: 1.Name or title of material. 2.Manufacturer’s standard container (drum) numbers. 3.Application instructions. C.Storage: 1.Referto Section 01500. 2.Store materials in protected and well-ventilated area at temperatures between 40 and 90 degrees F unless otherwise required by manufacturer. 3.Keep containers sealed until ready for use. 4.Do not use materials beyond manufacturer’s shelf life limits. D.Handling: Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. 1.Dispense reactive surface densifier materials only from factory sealed and numbered containers (drums). 2.Maintain record of container (drum) numbers received and used during floor treatment. 1.6SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.Floor FinishPlan Schedule: Provide detailed written schedule for sequence of work to ensure uninterrupted pro- gress of Owner's on-site operations.Coordinate final approved schedule with Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Store Manager. 03931-4 #04568-221Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Coordinate project phasing and relocation of racking, shelving, or merchandise to ensure minimum interference with other aspects of the Work. This may require multiple visits to job site on a given project. C.Scheduling of slab enhancement shall be coordinated with Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Wal-Mart Store Planning after racking has been setin final location. D.Conduct work in manner to minimize disruption of Owner's normal operations. E.Work shall begin noearlier than 15 minutes before approved start time and shall finish within one hour after ap- proved completion time. Coordinate start timeand completion timeof daily work specified herein with the Wal- Mart Construction Manager, Wal-MartStore PlanningField Project Manager, and Wal-Mart Store Manager. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide equipment and products as manufactured by the follow- ing to the extent as specified hereinafter: 1.Advanced Blending (817) 477-8022 www.advancedblending.com 2.American Decorative Concrete (800) 592-9320 www.adcsc.com 3.Brulin & Company (800) 776-7941www.brulin.com 4.Concrete Polishing Solutions (877) 472-8200 www.go2cps.com 5.Diamond Tool Supply, Inc (734) 243-9900www.diamondtoolsupply.com 6.HTC (877) 482-8700 www.htc-america.com 7.Onyx Environmental Solutions (800) 858-3533 www.onyxsolutions.com 8.Pioneer Eclipse (800) 367-3550www.pioneer-eclipse.com Error! Hyperlink reference not valid. 9.Prosoco (866) 363-4567 Error! Hyperlink reference not valid. 10.SASE Company, Inc. (800) 522-2606 11.Substrate Technology, Inc. (815) 941-4800 www.surfaceprepsuperstore.com 12.Superabrasive, Inc., (800) 987-8403, http://www.superabrasive.com/ 13.Superior Surface Solutions, (888) 471-5227 www.superiorsurfacesolutions.com B.Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 2.2EQUIPMENT A.Auto Scrubber Machines: Equipment used for cleaning operations shall be Clark Encore Max38 or L38 with a head pressure of 150 lbs. or similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. B.Hand grinder or stand-up edger for edge grinding/polishing C.Rubber Base Diamond Polishing System: 1.21-Inch propane polishing equipment as manufactured by Onyx Environmental Solutions. 2.System shall be by one of the following: a.Vortex System by Superior Surface Solutions, contact: Webster Ryan (816) 616-5227; e-mail: web- ster@ssscoinc.com. b.CASH System by Substrate Technology, Inc., contact: Kristen Fox (815) 210-1027; e-mail: kris- ten@substratetechnology.com 3.System Diamonds: a.Hybrid Rubber Diamond Dot (XDOT), grit sizes: X-Series. b.Resin Rubber Diamond Dot (DOT), grit sizes: 50, 100, 200, 400, and 800. c.Diamond Impregnated Pad (DIP), grit sizes: 400, 800, 1500, and 3000. d.Progression of all polishing steps shall include sequential grit sizes that are not greater than twice the previous grit used. D.Planetary Propane Polishing Equipment: 1.Propane polishing machines shall be in full operating condition during the duration of the night’s work as 03931-5 #04568-221Blair, NE05/19/21 required to achieve specified Finish Requirements. a.Refer to Section 01700 for requirements related to acceptable power sources specified hereinafter. b.Polishers shall have minimum 450 pounds down force. 2.Planetary counter-rotating variable speed machine. 3.Diamonds Segments: a.Diamond grinding heads shall be by one of the following manufacturers. Use heads from same manufacturer throughout entirety of project. 1)HTC. 2)SASE, Inc. 3)Substrate Technology, Inc. 4)Superabrasive, Inc. 5)Superior Surface Solutions. b.Diamond Segment Grit Sizes (or Manufacturer’s Equivalent Designations): 1)Hybrid Style Diamonds: 50 or 100. 2)Resin Bonded, Phenolic Diamonds: 100 and 200. E.High speed propane burnisher: Equipment shall meet the specified minimum performance requirements. 1.Head Size: 21 or 27 inch. 2.Head Weight: 22 pound (40 pound maximum). 3.Engine Size: 585 cc, generating 1,500 RPM or higher (as verified withtachometer). 4.Dust skirt assembly. F.Burnishing Pads: 1.Diamond Impregnated Pads (1500 and 3000 grit) a.Vortex Diamond Impregnated Pad by Superior Surface Solutions b.CASH Diamond Impregnated Pad by Substrate Technology, Inc. G.Sprayerfor Colorant Densifier: 1.Carbondioxide sprayer. a.Patriot SpraySafe System, by Patriot Sprayer Systems. Provide sprayer tips as follows: 1)Red #6 spray tip -6.4 gallons per hour. 2.3PRODUCTS A.Joint Filler Products: 1.Polyurea joint filler as specified in Section 03905. 2.Color: Match polished slab surface. Sample installed mustbe approved by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. B.High pH Cleaner: 1.Amodet Degreaser/Cleaner by Advanced Blending. 2.Brulin Deep Scrub Cleaner by Brulin & Co. 3.Cleaner/Degreaser by Prosoco. C.Reactive Surface Densifier: Chemical densifier specifically for concrete surface treatment which reacts chemically to the concrete surface forming a clear, dense, durable, hard, abrasion-resistant surface. Product shall be a color- less, odorless, water-based solution that is less than 50 VOC. 1.Provide one of the following: a.SureLock Densfier, by American Decorative Concrete. D.Concrete Surface Colorant System: 1.Reactive Surface Colorant Densifier: Concentrated, pre-tinted, lithium-based chemical concrete densifier specifically for concrete surface treatment which reacts chemically to the concrete surface forming a clear, dense, durable, hard, abrasion-resistant surface. Product shall be an odorless, water-based solution that is 0 VOC. a.SureLock Densifier-and Densi-Color by American Decorative Concrete. 1)Color: As determined by Slab Enhancement Contractor. 03931-6 #04568-221Blair, NE05/19/21 2)Alternate color as recommended by colorant manufacturer’s technical representative. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine concrete slab in the presence of the certified applicator and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 3.2PREPARATION A.Close areas to traffic during and after floor finishing for time period recommended by product manufacturer(s). Display “Caution Wet Floor” signs as required. B.Cover and protect merchandise and racking to prevent damage or contamination of stored products. Provide dust drapes as required to protect merchandise from dust or debris. C.Prior to slab enhancement, remove kick plates from merchandise fixtures (if applicable) where fixtures shall re- main in-place. Provide safe storage and re-installation of kick plates at completion of work specified herein. Co- ordinate with Wal-Mart Store Planning Field Project Manager. D.Clean Substrate: Remove surface contaminants to ensure penetration of reactive surface densifier. No hazardous, flammable, toxic or solvent based cleaning materials are permitted. 1.Remove curing or sealing compounds, paint, and wax. 2.Remove oil, grease and general soiling with highpH cleaner/degreaser diluted as recommended by manufacturer using swing machine with black or red pads. Useappropriatepad to achieve desired results while not exposing coarse aggregate or excessive sand within paste layer. 3.Thoroughly rinse floor surface with clean water to remove soap residue and contaminants. Vacuum with auto scrubber. 4.Squeegee dry. E.Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to the man- ufacturers’requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been cor- rected. 1.Verify concrete floors are free of excessive moistureand dusting. 2.Clean Substrate: Remove existing surface topical treatment to ensure penetration of reactive surface densifier.No hazardous, flammable, toxic or solvent based cleaning materials are permitted. a.Submit means of removaland all product data to Wal-Mart Concrete Consultant,Architect of Rec- ord, and Wal-Mart Construction Managerfor approval, prior to start of work. A.Remove and replace existing joint filler within the limits of required slab polishing and as shown on Drawings, in accordance with Section 03905. B.Prior to beginning slab enhancement work specified herein, repair all slab defects within the limits of required slab polishing. Correct previous repairs not conforming to requirements of Section 03905, including any repairs not matching color of adjacent slab surface. Perform repairsin accordance with Section 03905. 1.Coordinate full scope of concrete slab repair work with Wal-Mart Construction Manager. C.Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.3GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Ensure surfaces are clean (free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, contaminants, etc.) and dry. B.Allow new concrete slab to achieve its 28 day strength (7 full days minimum) as documented by CTL. Approved compressive strength test report from Construction Testing Laboratory must be received by Wal-Mart Construc- tion Manager prior to allowing polishing or color densification. 03931-7 #04568-221Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Between and after final wet polishing passes, thoroughly scrub and rinse slab surface with clean water and vacuum with auto-scrubber. D.Sequential progression of diamond pads shall be required and limited to no more than double the grit value of the previous diamonds used. E.Overlap adjacent polishing passes by 25%. F.When using DOTs 200-grit and lower, repeatedly swing machine side-to-side 60-degrees off centerline making a minimum of two passes. Overlap second pass, and subsequent passes (ifrequired), at slow walking pace 90- degrees to previous pass. G.Include all work necessary to achieve specified Finish Requirements. 3.4COLOR DENSIFICATION A.Areas to be treated: 1.Provide Color Densification where shown on Drawings at all areas of existing slab exposed by removal of PVC flooring. B.Progressively wet polish slab surface utilizing approved diamond segments as necessary to produce finishing re- quirements. 1.Open slab surface by wet grinding and polishing slab surface with 150-grit metal-bonded diamond grinding head or 100-grit resin-bonded or hybrid, phenolic diamond heads. 2.Two passes are required for the initial polishing step and all polishing steps utilizing 200-grit and below DOTs to achieve specified Finish Requirements. 3.After completion of the above polishing steps, progressively wet polish slab surface with Rubber Base Diamond Polishing System. 4.Use of planetary propane polishing equipment, utilizing approved resin bonded diamonds, is an acceptable alternative for only the 200-grit and lower DOTs. 5.Final polishing pass shall be with no less than 800-grit resin. C.Apply reactive surface colorant densifier to dry slab surface after appropriate diamond polishing step, in accord- ance with manufacturer’s instructions. 1.Failure to consult with reactive surface colorant densifier manufacturer for proper dilution rate required to match adjacent concrete slab panels may result in additional cost to Contractor without an increase in Contract time. D.High speed burnish: 1.Burnish slab with 1500-or 3000-grit Diamond Impregnated Pad to polish slab surface in compliance with specified Finish Requirements. 2.Use microfiber pad after burnishing to remove any laitance and debris from slab surface. 3.5FINISH REQUIREMENTS A.Appearance:Enhanced interior slabs areas that receive the specified slab enhancement process must consist of the following: 1.Failure to comply with specifications to produce finish requirements may result in additional cost to Contractor without an increase in Contract time or additional disruption to Store operations. 2.Slab surface must have a consistent look and exhibit a hard polish that is “mirror-like” in appearance with no evidence of scratching from grinding/polishing. 3.Exposure of aggregate beyond CPAA Class B -Fine Aggregateshall be considered non-conforming work. 4.White residue, “orange peel”, or hazy appearance in the finished surface will not be accepted. B.Gloss: Final surface glossvalueswithin Sales shall be between 30 and 45 as measured using a Horiba IG-320 Gloss Checker. 03931-8 #04568-221Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Leave work complete and ready for final inspection by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 3.6PROTECTION A.General Contractor shall protect areas to receive polished concrete finish at all times during construction to pre- vent oils, dirt, metal, excessive water, paint and other potentially damaging materials from affecting the finished concrete surface. Protective measures listed below shall begin immediately after completion of work herein. 1.Communicate to Store Manager and all subcontractors, vendors, and trades importance of maintaining slab protection at all times. Damage to finished slab resulting from lack of protection shall be repaired at no additional cost to Walmart. 2.Protect slab surface from moisture for 24 hours. 3.Each day, inspectall equipment used over completed slab surface, to insure: a.Equipment is without leaking hydraulic lines and is diapered to avoid staining. Remove all equip- ment with hydraulic fluid leaks from store site. b.Equipment is without tire embedments (rocks, nails, screws, etc.) that will scratch or pit slab sur- face. c.Equipment is clean and free of dust prior to start of work 4.Do not allow pipe cutting on the finished slab. 5.Do not place steel on the finished slab to avoid rust staining. 6.Prevent contact with acids and acidic detergents. 7.Use breathable drop cloths during all painting. Immediately wipe clean spilled paint. 3.7FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Except as specified as mandatory, field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. Owner T&I specified in Appendix B shall not pre- clude Contractor’s responsibility to perform similar routine, necessary, and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. 3.8OWNERTESTINGAND INSPECTION (T&I) A.The Owner will perform testing and inspection as specified in Appendix B (Section 03931). END OF SECTION 03931-9 #04568-221Blair, NE05/19/21 WAL-MART STORES CONCRETE SLAB ENHANCEMENTSUBMITTAL FORM Section 03931-Existing Interior Concrete Slab EnhancementDate________ WAL-MART:STORE SUPERCENTER NEIGHBORHOOD MARKET STORE INFORMATION STORE # ADDRESS CITY, ST GENERAL CONTRACTOR SLAB ENHANCEMENT SUB-CONTRACTOR JOBSITE PHONE ATTACHMENTS: A.Include the following with this Submittal Package. Completed Concrete Slab Enhancement Qualification Statement of Conformance. Letter of Certification for the following: Penetrating Lithium Silicate Densifier. Colored Concrete Densifier. Polishing Equipment. Product data for the following: High pH Cleaner. Colored Concrete Densifier. Reactive Surface Densifier. Waste Management Plan. Manufacturer and model of all equipment used relating to scope of work per 03931, including the following: All propane grinding machines, including grinding heads, required to complete work specified herein. Auto Scrubber. High speed burnishing equipment, including burnishing pads.Product data for pads must be submitted for verifica- tion of pad texture prior to beginning burnishing work. Densifier applicators/sprayers. Anticipated Slab Enhancement Floor Polish Plan (Developed from A1.1 -Floor Finish Plan) for the following: Anticipated start and finish date of work. Size, location and anticipated progression of individual nightly work areas, forecasted two weeks out from the cur- rent date of submittal. 03931-10 #04568-221Blair, NE05/19/21 CONCRETE SLAB ENHANCEMENTQUALIFICATION STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE SECTION 03931 Project Location:_______________________________________________Date: Project Number:____________________________Store Number: By signing below as approved, the Contractor hereby confirms that the qualifications of the Slab Enhancement Subcontractor conforms to the qualifications as follows: The Concrete Slab EnhancementSubcontractor has experience in finishing interior floors of similar size and scope in at least 5previous projects.Projects name and location are identified as follows 1.___________________________________________________________________ 2.___________________________________________________________________ 3.___________________________________________________________________ 4. ___________________________________________________________________ 5. ___________________________________________________________________ Concrete Slab Enhancement Subcontractor Company Name and Address: __________________________________________ __________________________________________ __________________________________________ Signature of Responsible Officer: _________________________ Typed Name and Title of Officer: _________________________ Telephone Number: (______) ___________________________ General Contractor Company Name and Address: _______________________________________ _______________________________________ Signed by: ______________________________________ Date:_________________ Submit one copyof this Statementto the Architectof Record. 03931-11 #04568-221Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpecII-Store Planning022318 SECTION 04200 -UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Concrete masonry units. 2.Mortar and grout. 3.Reinforcement, anchorages, and accessories. 4.Masonry fill insulation. B.Work Installed But not Furnished under this Section: Support plates and angles with anchor studs, sleeve anchors, expansion bolts, adhesive anchors, and anchor bolts which are embedded in masonry for supporting structural members. C.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01351 –Regulatory Compliance: a.Disposal and removal of construction and universal waste. b.Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 2.Section 05090 –Concrete and Masonry Post Installed Anchors. Mechanical and adhesive type anchor studs, expansion bolts, sleeve anchors, adhesive anchors, and anchor bolts embedded in masonry for supporting structural members. 3.Section 05500 -Metal Fabrications: Loosesteel lintels and other metal components embedded in masonry. 4.Section 07900 -Joint Sealers: Filler, backer rod and sealant at controland expansionjoints. 5.Appendix B –Testing, Inspection and Observationby Owner: Procedures for inspection, testing, and documentation by Owner furnished testing laboratory. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1.ACI 315 -ACI Detailing Manual. C.Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC): 1.TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE5 and TMS 602/ACI 530/ASCE 6-Building Code Requirements and Specifications for Masonry Structures. D.American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT) 1.Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A -Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing. E.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM A 36 –Carbon Structural Steel 2.ASTM A 153 -Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3.ASTM A 615 -Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 4.ASTM C 34 -Structural Clay Load-Bearing Wall Tile. 5.ASTMC 39 -Compressive Strength Of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens 6.ASTM C 56 -Structural Clay Nonloadbearing Tile. 7.ASTM C 62 -Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). 8.ASTM C 67 -Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. 9.ASTM C 90 -Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 10.ASTM C 94 -Ready-Mixed Concrete. 11.ASTM C 129 -Non-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 12.ASTM C 140 -Methods For Sampling And Testing Concrete Masonry Units And Related Units. 04200-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 13.ASTM C 143 -Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 14.ASTM C 144 -Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 15.ASTM C 150 -Portland Cement. 16.ASTM C 207 -Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 17.ASTM C 216 -Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale. 18.ASTM C 270 -Mortar for Unit Masonry. 19.ASTM C 331 -Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units. 20.ASTM C 404 -Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 21.ASTM C 476 -Grout for Masonry. 22.ASTM C 516 -Vermiculite Loose Fill Thermal Insulation. 23.ASTM C 549 -Perlite Loose Fill Insulation. 24.ASTM C 618 -Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. 25.ASTM C 652 -Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale) 26.ASTM C 780 -Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. 27.ASTMC979-Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. 28.ASTM C 1019 -Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. 29.ASTM C 1142 -Extended Life Mortar for Unit Masonry. 30.ASTM C 1329 -Mortar Cement. 31.ASTM C 1384 -Admixtures for Masonry Mortars. 32.ASTM C 1714 -Preblended Dry Mortar Mix for Unit Masonry. 33.ASTM E 119 -Fire Tests for Building Construction and Materials. 34.ASTM F 1554 -Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength F.Mason Contractors Association of America (MCAA): 1.Standard Practice for Bracing Masonry Walls Under Construction G.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1.OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Minimize dust emissions and provide equipment that suppresses dust. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Section 01330 -Submittal Requirements: Procedures for Submittals. Submit required submittals prior to pre- installation meeting. B.Shop Drawings: Do not use reproductions of Contract Documents as shop drawings. Prepare shop drawings in accordance with ACI 315.Submit Shop Drawings within 5 working days of Contract date. 1.Reinforcement: a.Include masonry notes on shop drawings that relate to proper placing of reinforcing and submit shop drawings for use in the field. b.Reinforcing shown shall include but not limited to vertical and horizontal wall reinforcement, dowels, bond beam reinforcement, embedded steel items and anchor bolts. 2.Placement Drawings: a.Shop drawings shall include sides, front and rear elevations of building showing masonry walls full height and length; reinforcing size, quantity, spacing, location, length, and grade of steel; and control joint locations. C.Masonry Grout Mix Design: Complete and submit Masonry Grout Mix Design Form found at the end of this Section for each type of grout. Submit by email to Structural Engineer of Record and Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) as specified in Section 01330 within 5 working days of Contract Date. D.Masonry Mortar: Submit dry pre-blended masonry mortar manufacturer’s certification letterand lab test reports verifying conformance to ASTM C270 and ASTM C1714. Include description of mortar type. Submit by email to Structural Engineer of Record and Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory as specified in Section 01330 within 5 working days of Contract Date. 04200-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 E.Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net area compressive strengthof masonry. 1.5QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Construct masonry in accordance withTMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE5 and TMS 602/ACI 530/ASCE 6. B.Pre-construction Testing: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform testing indicated below at Contractor’s expense priorto beginning construction of masonry walls. 1.Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTMC1019. C.Installer Qualifications: Installer of foamed-in-place insulation shall be certified or approved by manufacturer of insulation. D.Source Limitations: 1.Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer foreach product required. 2.Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. E.Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTME119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. B.Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. C.Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. D.Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. E.Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. F.Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.7ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Follow cold and hot weather procedures of MSJC. B.Masonry Protection:Cover top of unfinished masonry work to protect it from the weather. C.Cold Weather Construction: When ambient air temperature is below 40F, implement cold weather procedures and comply with the following: 1.Preparation: Comply with the following requirements prior to conducting masonry work: a.Do not lay masonry units having either a temperature below 20F or containing frozen moisture, visible ice, or snow on their surface. 04200-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 b.Remove visible ice and snow from the top surface of existing foundations and masonry to receive new construction. Heat these surfaces above freezing using methods that do not result in damage. 2.Construction: These requirements apply to work in progress and are based on ambient air temperature. Do not heat water or aggregates used in mortar or grout above 140 F. Comply with the following requirements during construction during the following ambient air conditions: a.40F to 32F: Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40F and 120Fat the time of mixing. Grout does not require heated materials, unless the temperature of the materials is below 32F. b.32F to 25F: Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40F and 120Fat the time of mixing. Maintain mortar temperature above freezing until used in masonry. Heat grout aggregates and mixing water to produce grout temperature between 70Fand 120F at the time of mixing. Maintain grout temperature above 70Fat the time of grout placement. c.25F to 20F: Comply with requirements for 32 F to 25 F above and the following: Heat masonry surfaces under construction to 40Fand use wind breaks or enclosures when the wind velocity exceeds 15 mph. Heat masonry to a minimum of 40F prior to grouting. d.20Fand below: Comply with requirementfor 35 F to 20 F above and the following: Provide an enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32Fwithin the enclosure. 3.Protection: These requirements apply after masonry is placed and are based on anticipated minimum daily temperature for grouted masonry and anticipated mean daily temperature for ungrouted masonry. Protect completed masonry in the following manner: a.40F to 25F: Protect newly constructed masonry by covering with a weather-resistive membrane for 24 hr after being completed. b.25F to 20F: Cover newly constructed masonry completely with weather-resistive insulating blankets, or equal protection, for 24 hr after completion of work. Extend time period to 48 hr for grouted masonry unless the only cement in the grout is Type III portland cement. c.20F and below: Maintain newly constructed masonry temperature above 32Ffor at least 24 hr after being completed by using heated enclosures, electric heating blankets, infraredlamps, or other acceptable methods. Extend time period to 48 hr for grouted masonry unless the only cement in the grout is Type III portland cement. D.Hot Weather Construction:Comply with the following provisions: 1.Preparation:Prior to conducting masonry work: a.When the ambient air temperature exceeds 100F or exceeds 90F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph: 1)Maintain sand piles in a damp, loose condition. 2)Provide necessary conditions and equipment to produce mortar having a temperature below 120F. b.When the ambient temperature exceeds 115F or exceeds 105F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, implement the requirements above for ambient air temperature exceeding 100 F and shade materials and mixing equipment from direct sunlight. 2.Construction:While masonry work is in progress: a.When the ambient air temperature exceeds 100F, or exceeds 90F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph: 1)Maintain temperature of mortar and grout below 120F. 2)Flush mixer, mortar transport container, and mortar boards with cool water before they come into contact with mortar ingredients or mortar. 3)Maintain mortar consistency by retempering with cool water. 4)Use mortar within 2 hr of initial mixing. b.When the ambient temperature exceeds 115F or exceeds 105F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, implement the construction requirements above for ambient air temperature exceeding 100 F and use cool mixing water for mortar and grout. Ice is permitted in the mixing water prior to use. Do not permit ice in the mixing water when added to the other mortar or grout materials. 3. Protection: When the mean daily temperature exceeds 100F or exceeds 90F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, fog spray newly constructed masonry until damp at least three times a day until the masonry is three days old. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 04200-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Provide unit masonry, mortar, and grout that develops compressive strength (f’m) at 28 days as indicated on Drawings. 2.2CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A.Unit Design: Modular two core units sized as indicated or scheduled. Provide special shapes necessary for bond beams, control and expansion joints, lintels, and special conditions. 1.Provide units as required for indicated construction including sill units and solid cap units. 2.Provide units with exposed faces which are uniform in appearance. 3.Units to receive paint or coatings shall contain a minimum of 12% fly ash or Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS) as a replacement of the total cementitious content. Use of fly ash or GGBFS in painted or coated units is mandatory. B.Hollow Load Bearing Units: ASTM C 90. 1.Smooth CMU: Light weight or normal weight above finished floor; normal weight only below finished floor. 2.Split Face CMU: Light weight or normal weight above finished floor; normal weight only below finished floor. C.Solid Load-bearing Units: ASTM C 90. 1.Smooth CMU: Light weight or normal weight above finished floor; normal weight only below finished floor. 2.Split Face CMU: Light weight or normal weight above finished floor; normal weight only below finished floor. D.Non-load Bearing Units: ASTM C 129. E.Light Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 331, free of materials that will cause rusting, staining, or popouts. F.Fire Resistance Classification: In accordance with UL, FM, WH, or SWRI listing and fire resistance rating required for CMU wall and partition assemblies and components. Provide units of minimum equivalent thickness specified for the fire rating and forcorresponding aggregate type. 2.3MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A.Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, normal-Type I or Type II; gray color. Fly ash, slag, and pozzolans not permitted as substitutes for Portland cement except as otherwise specifically allowed. B.Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329, Type S C.Fly Ashfor Grout: ASTM C 618, Type C or F maximum 4 percent loss in ignition.Substituteflyash for Portland cement ata minimum of 25 percent and a maximum of 30 percent of the total cementitious content. Use only one source and type throughout project. D.Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS) for Grout: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. Substitute GGBFS for Portland cement at 25 percent of the total cementitious content. Use only one source and type throughout project. E.Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. F.Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144, standard masonry type; clean, dry, protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. G.Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. H.Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404; use of blast furnace slag is not permitted. Maximum coarse aggregate size, 3/8 inch. I.Calcium chloride: Not permitted in mortar or grout. Chemicals containing Thyocyanates, Calcium Chloride or more than 0.1 percent chloride ions shall not be used. 04200-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 J.Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. K.Water: Potable. L.Admixtures: Not permitted in mortar or grout except as otherwise specifically allowed or required herein. 2.4MIXES -MORTAR A.Mortar: Type S, in accordance with the Property Specification of ASTM C 270 for drypre-blended mortar. 1.Site batching of components is prohibited. 2.Mixing on-sitewater and packaged dry blended mixis acceptable. 3.Provide pre-blended mortar produced, packaged and delivered per ASTM C 1714 from one of the following manufacturers: a.Quikrete, Inc.,Atlanta, GA (800) 282-5828. b.Amerimix,Charlotte, NC, 888-313-0755. c.Pro-MixMasonry Mortar Type S by Ash Grove Packaging Group, Little Rock, AR (888) 289-1117. 4.Use of ready mix mortar (ASTM C 1142) is prohibited. 5.Do not add admixtures of any kind to mortar mix except as otherwise specifically required herein. B.PointingMortar: Duplicate original mortar proportions. Add aluminum tristearate, calcium stearate, or ammonium stearate equal to 2% of Portland cement weight. 2.5MIXING –MORTAR A.Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C 270, in quantities needed for immediate use. 1.Do not use anti-freeze compounds. 2.If water is lost by evaporation, retemper only within 2 hours of mixing. Do not retemper mortar more than 2 hours after mixing. 2.6MIXES -GROUT FILL A.Grout fill for concrete masonry unit bond beams, lintels, and reinforced cells with reinforcing bars and embedded plates: Conform to ASTM C 476. 1.Compressive Strength: 2000 psi minimum at 28 days, as determined in accordance with the provisions of ASTM C 1019. 2.Slump: 10inches minimum; 11 inches maximum, taken in accordance with ASTM C 143. 3.Grout mix shall contain supplementary cementitious materials (SCM). Either fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag (GGBFS) may be used for the SCM but shall not be used together to form a ternary mix. Use of fly ash or GGBFS in the concrete mix is mandatory. 4.Use coarse grout when grout space is equal to or greater than 4 inches in both directions. 5.Use fine grout when grout space is smaller than 4 inches in either direction. 6.Air entrainment shall not be used. 7.Do not add admixtures to grout. 2.7MIXING –GROUT A.Batch and mix grout in accordance with ASTM C 94 or ASTM C 476 for site batched and mixed grout. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. 2.8REINFORCEMENT A.Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: Ladder design, minimum 9 gage welded steel wire, hot dipped galvanized to 1.5 oz, ASTM A 153, Class B2. Width 1-1/2 to 2 inches less than wall thickness. B.Deformed Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Shop fabricate reinforcement which is shown bent or hooked. Field bending not allowed. C.Anchor bolts and threaded rods as shown embedded in masonry on structural drawings: ASTM F 1554 for anchor 04200-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 bolts and ASTM A 36 for threaded rods. D.Bar Positioners for Vertical Wall Bars: Minimum 9 gagewire,hot-dip galvanizedafter fabrication and designed for number of bars indicated. Provide products by the following or equivalent by other manufacturers. , Hauppauge, NY (800) 645-0616. 1.Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2.Wire-Bond; Charlotte, NC; (800)849-6722. Telescoping Rebar Positioner, (716) 683-7526. 3.Steel-Wich 2.9ACCESSORIES A.Prefabricated Masonry Reglet: SpringlokFlashing System as manufactured by Fry Reglet Corporation. 1.Type MA-4, 24 ga. galvanized steel reglet. 2. B.Grout Barrier: Provide one of the following: 1.MGS Grout Screen, by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2.10MASONRY FILL INSULATION A.Granular Insulation: ASTM C 516 vermiculite or ASTM C 549 perlite. B.Foamed In Place Insulation: Subject to compliance with project requirements and local jurisdictional restrictions, manufacturers offering Foam In-Place Insulation tested and found compatible and non-detrimental within the indicated Underwriters Laboratory fire resistance assemblies which may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1.Core-Fill 500; by Tailored Chemical Products, Inc.; Hickory, NC; (800) 627-1687. 2.CoreFoam Insulation, by CoreFoam, Inc., Knoxville, TN; (800) 656-3626 3.R-501 Polymaster Plastic Foam Insulation; by PolyMaster, Inc.; Knoxville, TN; (800) 580-3626. 4.Thermco Foam; by Thermal Corp. of America; Mt. Pleasant, IA; (319) 385-1535. 5.Tripolymer Foam Insulation; by C.P. Chemical Co., Inc.; White Plains, NY; (914) 428-2517. C.Expanded polystyrene bead type loose or blown fill insulation shall not be used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1PREPARATION A.Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. B.Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance. Use non-corrosive materials in contact with masonry work. C.Provide temporary bracing for walls, lintels, and other masonry work during erection. Maintain in place until roof and other structural elements are complete and provide permanent bracing. D.Provide temporary bracing for walls, lintels, and other masonry work during erection. 1.Design bracing in accordance with MCAA Standard Practice for Bracing Masonry Walls Under Construction. 2.Design bracing under supervision of an independent Professional Engineer hired by the contractor and licensed in the state in which the project is located. 3.Maintain in place until roof and other structural elements are complete and provide permanent bracing. E.Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested in accordance with ASTMC67. Allow units to absorb water until damp but not wet at time of laying. 3.2INSTALLATION -GENERAL A.Construct masonry in accordance with MSJC. 04200-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single- wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. C.Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. D.Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. E.Use full-size units without cutting if possible. F.If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven sawsequipped with proper dust control systems as specified herein. 1.Provideclean, sharp, unchipped edges. 2.Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Installcut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. G.Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. 3.3COURSING A.Place masonry to lines and levels indicated. B.Maintain masonry courses to uniform width. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness matching coursing of existing building. C.Lay concrete masonry units in running bond unless otherwise noted. Course one block unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches (4 inches for half high units). D.Tool head and bed joints concave when mortar is thumbprint hard regardless if below grade or above ceiling height. Use tool with large enough radius that joint is not raked free of mortar. 3.4PLACING AND BONDING A.Lay solid concrete masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. Remove excess mortar. B.For hollow concrete masonry units, fill head and bed joints solidly with mortar for a distance in from the face of the unit not less than the thickness of the shell. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and foundation walls and in courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. For starting courses on footings, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. C.Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 12’-8”or the distance between bond beams, whichever is less. D.Provide cleanouts at the bottom course of grout lifts for pours over 5’-0” in height. Provide cleanouts at the bottom course of each vertical bar location in partially grouted masonry. Provide cleanouts at 32 inches on center along the bottom course of the grout lifts in fully grouted masonry. Use cleanouts to remove all mortar droppings and debris and ensure proper placement of reinforcement. E.Do not place grout until height of masonry to be groutedhas attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. Allow masonry to cure a minimum of 4 hours prior to placing grout for pours between 5’-0”and 12’-8”. Increase curing time to a minimum of 8 hours in cold or dry weather conditions. F.Solid grout hollowmasonry cells as noted on Structural Drawings. Use grout method of construction conforming to requirements of current MSJC. Grout space dimensions and maximum pour heights shall comply with MSJC. Grout lift pour heights shall not exceed 12’-8”. G.Grouting shall be a continuous procedure for each lift. Do not allow horizontal construction joint to form by 04200-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 discontinuing grouting H.Grout masonry cells to comply with MSJCfor Seismic Design Category (SDC) indicated on structural drawings. I.Fully bond intersections, and external and internal corners. J.Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. K.Perform jobsite cutting with proper tools to provide straight unchipped edgesand equipped with proper dust control systems as specified herein. Take care to prevent breaking masonry unit corners or edges. 1.Where required, match finish masonry work to adjacent surfaces. 2.For fire-rated walls, construct walls to finish against bottom of roof or floor deck and fill voids with firestopping. 3.For other than fire-rated walls, cut units to match the slope of the roof deck and finish construction to within 2 inches of and parallel to roof deck. L.Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint. M.Fire Rated Construction: Install masonry to comply with designated UL assembly without diminishing structural requirements. 3.5TOLERANCES A.Construct masonry within the following tolerances: 1.Alignment of Pilasters: Maximum 1/4 inch from true line. 2.Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 3/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/2 inch maximum. 3.Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inchper story non-cumulative. 4.Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet; 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch maximum. 5.Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet. 6.Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch maximum. B.Tolerances for the placement of reinforcing steel in walls and flexural elements: 1.± 1/2 inch when the distance from the centerline of the steel to the opposite face of the masonry, "d", is equal to 8 inches or less. 2.± 1 inch for "d" equal to 24 inches or less but larger than 8 inches. 3.± 1-1/4 inch for "d" greater than 24 inches. 3.6REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES A.Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center, except space at 8 inches in parapet walls and below finished floor, or where otherwise indicated on Drawings. Place jointreinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Do not extend joint reinforcement through control joints. B.Set vertical reinforcing bars supported and secured against displacement by means of bar positioners prior to placing grout,located near the ends of each bar and at intermediate intervals of not more than 192 diameters of the reinforcement. Minimum clearance between parallel bars shall be one diameter of the reinforcement. A minimum clearance of 1/2 inch shall be maintained between the bars and masonry units.Set and support other bars, anchor bolts, and embedded items and tie to prevent displacement prior to placing grout. C.Grout cells full that contain vertical reinforcing. Use grout method of construction conforming to requirements of MSJC. D.Place grout barrier below reinforced bond beams as required to prevent grout from falling through cells while maintaining positive bond in mortar joint. E.Anchorage of Masonry Walls: Comply with applicable requirements of MSJCfor Seismic Design Category (SDC) 04200-9 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 indicated on structural drawings. F.Verify that anchorages embedded in masonry are properly placed. 1.Proper placement of embed anchorsshall be full depth penetration of scheduled anchorage without contact of embed stud with interior surface of exterior shell face. G.After reinforcing of masonry is securely tied in place, plug cleanout holes with masonry units. Brace against wet grout pressure. 3.7MASONRY FILL INSULATION A.Confirm that selected foam insulation material is compatible and non-detrimental to referenced fire resistance assemblies before use. B.Install insulation in masonry unit cores of exterior walls. C.Granular Insulation: 1.Place masonry fill insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Verify that holes and openings have been sealed to prevent escape of insulation. 2.Place as masonry is erected. Ensure spaces are free of mortar to allow free flow of insulation. 3.Completely fill spaces. Place in lifts and rod to eliminate air pockets. Place prior to covering cores with bond beams or lintels. 4.Place temporary signs on face of insulated walls warning workers to use caution to prevent loss of insulation if cutting into walls. D.Foamed-In-Place Insulation: 1.Installer shall be certifiedand/or approved by manufacturer of insulation. Install foam insulation in strict accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 2.Pump foam insulation bored into mortar joints around entire wall area 3 feet from floor level. Repeat at height no greater than ten feet until completion of wall area. 3.Plug holes with mortar after completion. 3.8LINTELS A.Install loose steel lintels as scheduled. B.Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel lintels are not scheduled. Construct lintels using grout fill and reinforcing. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. C.Use reinforcing bars of one piece lengths only. D.Place and consolidate grout fill without disturbing reinforcing. Allow lintels to reach strength before removing temporary supports. E.For soap units covering steel lintels, provide 9 gage Z-ties at each vertical joint. Weld Z-ties to web of steel lintel. 3.9CONTROL JOINTS A.Do not continue bond beam reinforcing (except at floor and roof levels and top of walls) or joint reinforcing across control joints unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. B.Install preformed control joint filler at locations indicated on Drawings. Use proper size material to create sealant joint space. C.Install backer rods and sealant at control joints as shown on Drawings and as specified in Section 07900. 3.10EXPANSION JOINTS 04200-10 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Installexpansion joint filler (compression seal), backer rods, and sealant at expansion joints as shown on Drawings and as specified inSection 07900. 3.11BUILT-IN WORK A.As work progresses, build in metal door frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames, anchor bolts, diaphragm anchors, embedded plates, and other items included in the work supplied by other Sections. B.Install items plumb and level. C.Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout or mortar. Fill masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D.Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration. 3.12CUTTING AND FITTING A.Perform jobsite cutting with tools equipped with an integrated water delivery system that continuously feeds water to the blade or a HEPA-rated filter dust collection vacuum system recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. B.Cut and fit for bearing plates, chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Coordinate with other Sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. C.Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.13CLEANING A.In-Progress Cleaning: Aswork progresses, clean unit masonryby dry brushing.Before tooling joints,remove mortar fins and smears.Use proper dust control methods for dry cleaning and mortar removal. B.Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1.Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2.Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.Protect non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4.Clean soiled surfaces with a non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. 5.Clean CMU masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6.Cleaned surfaces shall appear as represented by mockup wall panel. C.Remove excess mortar and smears. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D.Dispose of construction waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01351. 3.14PROTECTION A.Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. B.Provide protection without damaging completed work. C.Protect the base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar droppings. D.At day's end, cover unfinished walls to prevent moisture infiltration. Weight cover down to prevent blow-off and maintain protection for fresh masonry work. Extend cover from top of wall a minimum of 2 feet down the wall on each side. 04200-11 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.15FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Except as specified as mandatory, field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. Owner T&I specified in Appendix B shall not preclude Contractor’s responsibility to perform similar routine, necessary, and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. 3.16OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION (T&) A.The Owner will perform testing and inspection as specified in Appendix B (Section 04200). END OF SECTION 04200-12 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 WAL-MART STORES MASONRY GROUT MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL FORM (Section 04200 –Unit Masonry Assemblies)Date________________________ SUPERCENTER NEIGHBORHOOD MARKET SAM’S CLUB STORE INFORMATION STORE # ADDRESS CITY, ST GENERAL CONTRACTOR COMPANY JOBSITE PHONE A. GROUT INFORMATION Supplier Mix Design # LEAVE ’ Design Strength (fc) psi Water / Cementitious Ratio BLANK FOR Mix Developed From: Density ENGINEER’S WetpcfDrypcf Slump STAMP “( ± 1” ) BMIX DESIGN . Mix Proportions (per cubic yard) Identification Weight DensityVolume (Type, size, source, etc.)(pounds)(SSD)(cubic feet) Cement Fly Ash/GGBFS Aggregate #1 #2 Water TOTALS 04200-13 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 C.MASONRY SUBCONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company NameTel. # ( ) Address City, ST Zip Technical Contact Cell # ( ) e-mail Sales Contact Cell # ( ) 04200-14 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpecII-Store Planning103020 SECTION 04910-MASONRY RESTORATIONAND REPAIR PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Repair, patching, and replacement of damaged or defective concrete masonry units, brick, architectural masonry, and precast sills and caps. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01351 –Regulatory Compliance: a.Disposal and removal of hazardous construction and universal waste. b.Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 2.Section 04200-Unit Masonry. Masonry materials and installation. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1.OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Minimize dust emissions and provide equipment that suppresses dust. 1.4PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Follow cold and hot weather procedures of MSJC. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Provide unit masonry, mortar, and grout conforming to requirements of Section 04200. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION -GENERAL A.Comply with installation requirements of Section 04200 unless otherwise specified herein. 3.2MASONRY REPAIR A.Perform repairs in locations and to the extent as shown on the drawing. B.Perform jobsite sawing, grinding, and drilling with tools equipped with an integrated water delivery system that continuously feeds water to the blade or a HEPA-rated filter dust collection vacuum system recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. C.When removing dust, dirt, and loose or damaged masonry and mortar from cracks or joints before replacing with new material, use a HEPA-rated filter vacuum. 04910-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.Conduct building repairs prior to cleaning and painting as applicable. E.Patching -Masonry: 1.Remove existing coatings. Apply patching material to bare, sound masonry that does not have scaling or spalled layers. 2.In the case of iron inclusions, drill the corroded area on the face of the masonryto a maximum depth of 3/4” to remove the underlying iron inclusion. Use proper dust control methods as specified herein. 3.Apply admixture, primer, and patching products as follows: a.Where application of patching material must beathickness of between 1/8” and1-1/2”: 1)Admixture: SikaLatex Rby Sika Corporation. 2)Primer: Scrub coat of SikaRepair 223or Sika Armatec 110 EpoCemby Sika. 3)Patching material: SikaRepair 223. b.Where application of patching material must beathickness of 1/4”: 1)Primer: Duralprep ACby Euclid Chemical. 2)Patching material: Verticoat Supremeby Euclid Chemical. 3)Cure: High solids, water-based compound. byTnemecafter the repair material 4.For integrally colored masonry, apply Series 617 Conformal Stain WB has cured. 3.3CLEANING A.In-Progress Cleaning: Aswork progresses, cleanunit masonryby dry brushing.Before tooling joints,remove mortar fins and smears.Use proper dust control methods for dry cleaning and mortar removal. B.Remove excess mortar and smears. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C.Clean soiled surfaces with a non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials. Consult masonry unit manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. D.Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. E.Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1.Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2.Protect non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 3.Clean non-colored CMU masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. F.Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. G.Dispose of construction waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01351 Regulatory Compliance Supplement. 3.4PROTECTION A.Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. B.Provide protection without damaging completed work. 3.5FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor asnecessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. END OF SECTION 04910-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II092917 SECTION 05090–POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Post-installed mechanical and adhesive type anchors for detailed structural connections and exterior signage. 2.Post-installed mechanical type anchors for sales floor merchandise shelving fixtures and storage racks. 3.Post-installed mechanical type anchors for garden center modular rack/fence system. 4.Post-installed general use anchors not included in the above. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01351 –Regulatory Compliance: a.Disposal and removal of construction and universal waste. b.Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 2.Appendix B –Testing, Inspection and Observationby Owner: Procedures for inspection, testing, and documentation by Owner furnished testing laboratory. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1.OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Minimize dust emissions and provide equipment that suppresses dust. B.Dispose of construction waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01351 Regulatory Compliance Supplement. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Code approval reports showing evidence of published performance data for each structural anchor used shall be available for review by the Structural Engineer of Record (SER) or Architect of Record (AOR) upon request. Evidence may be in the form of current ICC-ESR report of UES-ER report, as noted below, or a report by an independent testing laboratory. B.Reports are not necessary for general use anchors, unless required by AHJ. 1.5REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM C 881-Epoxy-Resin-Based Bonding Systems for Concrete 1.6QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Reports showing evidence of published performance data for each anchor used shall be available for review by the Structural Engineer of Record upon request. Evidence may be in the form of current ICC-ER report or a report by 05090-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 an independent testing laboratory. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1.Hilti, Inc. (800)879-8000 2.ITW Red Head(800) 899-7890 3.Simpson Strong Tie Co. Inc. (800) 999-5099 4.DeWalt/Powers Fasteners, Inc (800) 524-3244 2.2MATERIALS A.Substitutions: Substitutions of products from manufacturers not listed are not permitted. B.Alternate Products: Alternate products from the manufacturers listed may be used upon approval based upon suitability for the installation involved as determined by the Structural Engineer of Record. C.Provide proprietary anchor products as specified below unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified in other sections. Anchors may be any one of the products listed for the type specified unless otherwise shown or specified. D.Manufacturer’s Instructions: Provide complete installation instructions with items furnished to the field. 2.3STRUCTURAL MECHANICAL ANCHORS A.Interior Use Anchors: Zinc plated carbon steel anchors. B.Exterior UseAnchors:Stainless steel with stainless steel nuts and washers of matching alloy group and minimum proof stress equal to orgreater than the specified minimum full-size tensile strength of theexternally threaded fastener. C.Wedge Expansion Anchors: Torque-controlled, with impact section to prevent thread damage complete with required nuts and washers. Type and size as indicatedon Drawings. Provide one of the following: 1.Hilti: a.Kwik Bolt 3. 1)Grout Filled CMU (ESR 1385) b.Kwik Bolt TZ. 1)Concrete (ESR 1917) 2)Grout Filled CMU (ESR3785) 2.ITW Red Head: a.Trubolt+. 1)Concrete (ESR 2427) 3.DeWalt/Powers: a.Power-Stud.+ SD1 1)Concrete (ESR 2818) 2)Grout Filled CMU (ESR 2966) 4.Simpson: a.Wedge All. 1)Grout Filled CMU (ESR 1396) b.Strong-Bolt 2 1)Concrete (ESR 3037) 2)Grout Filled CMU (ER 240) D.Sleeve Anchors: Torque controlled, exhibiting follow-up expansion under load, with provision for rotation prevention during installation. Provide one of the following: 1.Hilti:HLC Sleeve Anchor. 05090-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 a.Exterior signage connections only. E.Screw Anchors: Single piece anchor installed in a pre-drilled hole using a bit matching manufacuturer tolerances. Anchors shall have 360-degree contact with the base material and shall not require oversized or undersized holes for installation. Provide one of the following: 1.Hilti: a.KH-EZ 1)Concrete (ESR 3027) 2)Grout Filled CMU (ESR 3056) 2.ITW: a.Tapcon+ 1)Concrete (ESR 3699) b.Large Diameter Tapcon (LDT). 1)Shelving fixture upright connection only. 3.DeWalt/Powers a.Screw-Bolt+ 1)Concrete (ESR 3889) b.Tapper+ 1)Grout Filled CMU (ESR 3196) 4.Simpson a.Titen HD 1)Concrete (ESR 2713) 2)Grout Filled CMU (ESR 1056) 2.4STRUCTURAL ADHESIVE ANCHORS A.AdhesiveAnchor Bolts: Stud-typeanchors consisting of threaded steel rod, nut, and washer or deformed reinforcing bar, and anchor adhesive. Use type and size as indicated on Drawings. Use stainless steel or zinc coated carbon steel for exterior exposure. B.Adhesive: Adhesive shall be a cartridge type, two-component, epoxy, acrylic, or hybrid based system dispensed and mixed through a static mixing nozzle supplied by the manufacturer. Acceptable installation and performance temperature ranges shall be verified with manufacturer’s literature prior to installation. Provide one of the following: 1.Hilti: a.HIT-HY200(A/R) 1)Concrete (ESR 3187) 2)Grout Filled CMU (ESR 3963) b.HIT-HY 70 1)Hollow and Grout Filled CMU (ESR 2682) c.HIT-RE 500V3 1)Concrete (ESR 3814) 2.Simpson: a.SET-XP 1)Concrete (ESR 2508) 2)Grout Filled CMU (ER 265) b.AT-XP 1)Concrete (ER263) 2)Grout Filled CMU (ER 281) 3.ITW Red Head: a.Epcon C6+ 1)Concrete (ESR 3577) b.Epcon A7+ 1)Concrete (ESR 3908) 2)Grout Filled CMU (ESR 3200) 4.DeWalt/Powers: a.AC100+ Gold 1)Concrete (ESR 2582) 05090-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2)Grout Filled CMU (ESR 3200) b.AC200+ 1)Concrete (ESR 4027) 2.5GENERAL USE ANCHORS A.General use anchors shall be adequate for the loads they support. B.Testing and inspection are not required for general use anchors. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine conditions and adjacent areas where products and materials will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements.Verify that structuralcomponents are ready to receive Work.Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B.Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2INSTALLATION A.Post-installed anchors installed for missing or misplaced cast-in-place anchors shall be approved by the Structural Engineer of Record. B.Where manufacturer recommends use of special tools for installation of anchors, such tools shall be used, unless otherwise permitted specifically by the Structural Engineer of Record. C.Where holes are drilled in concrete or masonry, provide drills equipped with a HEPA-rated filter vacuum dust collection system recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. D.Drill holes accurately and squarely and. Cleanholes in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendationsusing HEPA-rated filter vacuum. E.Post-installed Anchor Installation (General): 1.Install post-installed anchors where shown on the drawings. 2.Perform anchor installation in accordance with manufacturer instructions.Install anchors at not less than the minimum embedment, edge distance, and spacing recommended by the manufacturer. 3.Drill holes with rotary impact hammer drills using carbide-tipped bits. Drill bits shall be of diameters as specified by the anchor manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, all holes shall be drilled perpendicular to the base materialsurface. a.Cored Holes: Where anchors are to be installed in cored holes, use core bits with matched tolerances as specified by the manufacturer. b.Embedded Items: Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Avoid damage to existing reinforcing or embedded itemsduring coring or drilling. Avoid damagingelectrical and telecommunications conduit and gas lines.Notify the Engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. c.Base Material Strength: Unless otherwise specified, do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. d.Hollow Substrates: Where anchors are noted to be installed in hollow substrates, holes shall be drilled using rotation mode only. 4.Use anchors of the same anchor manufacturer for anchors of the same type. F.Mechanical Anchor Installation: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in part to be fastened. Set anchors to manufacturer’s recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 05090-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 G.Adhesive Anchor Installation: 1.When the base material temperature drops below 40-degrees F, use only acrylic adhesive. See manufacturer’s instructions for additional minimum temperature requirements. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits. 2.Hollow Substrates: Anchorage into hollow substrates is not allowed unless specifically indicated on the contract documents. Where applicable, the adhesive manufacturer’s screen tubes shall be used for adhesive installation into hollow substrate applications. 3.Oversized Holes: Refer to manufacturer’s information if drilled hole size is larger than what is recommended. 4.CoreDrilled Holes: Refer to manufacturer’s information if holes are drilled with a core-drill bit. 5.Clean holes per manufacturer instructions to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive.Inject adhesive into holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. Follow manufacturer recommendations to ensure proper mixing of adhesive components. Sufficient adhesive shall be injected in the hole to ensure that the annular gap is filled to the surface. Remove excess adhesive from the surface. Shim anchors with suitable device to center the anchor in the hole. Do not disturb or load anchors before manufacturer specified cure time has elapsed. 3.3REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE WORK A.Remove and replace misplaced, defective, or malfunctioning anchors. Anchors that fail a sheer or pullout test, if directedor installation torque requirements shall be regarded as malfunctioning. Fill empty anchor holes and patch failed anchor locations with high-strength non-shrink, nonmetallic grout. 3.4FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Field quality control shall be the responsibilityof the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Except as specified as mandatory, field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. Owner T&I specified in Appendix B shall not preclude Contractor’s responsibility to perform similar routine, necessary, and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. 3.5OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION (T&I) A.The Owner will perform testing and inspectionas specified in Appendix B (Section 05090). END OF SECTION 05090-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning032919 SECTION 05400 -COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Load bearing formed steel stud exterior and interior framing 20 gage and heavier. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 05090 -Post-installed Concreteand Masonry Anchors: Mechanical and adhesive anchors drilled into concrete or masonry. 2.Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood furring strips, plywood, and blocking. 3.Section 07210 -Building Insulation: Thermal insulation installed in exterior framing. 4.Section 09250 -Gypsum Board: Non-load bearing steel stud partition framing lighter than 20 gage. 5.Appendix B –Testing, Inspection and Observationby Owner: Procedures for inspection, testing, and documentation by Owner furnished testing laboratory. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1.North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 2.Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing C.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM A 36 -Carbon Structural Steel. 2.ASTM A 123 -Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 3.ASTM A 1003 -Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic-and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members 4.ASTM C 955 –Standard Specification for Cold Formed Steel Structural Framing Members. 5.ASTM C1007-Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories. 6.ASTM C 1513 -Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel Framing Connections. D.American Welding Society (AWS): 1.AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code -Steel. 2.AWSD1.3 -Structural Welding Code -Steel Sheet. E.Gypsum Association (GA): 1.GA-216-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. F.Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 1.SSPC-Paint 20 Type I -Zinc Rich Primers -Inorganic. G.Steel Framing Industry Association (SFIA): 1.Member listing. H.Steel Stud Manufactures Association (SSMA): 1.SSMA Product Technical Information. 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of cold formed metal framing components with minimum five years documented experience. 05400-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding operators in accordance with Standard Qualification Procedures as required by AWS D1.1. 1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store, and protect productsin compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B.Protect metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. C.Store and protect metal framing products with waterproof covering; ventilate to avoid condensation. D.Where framing is stored outdoors, stack materials off ground, supported on level platform, fully protected from weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1MATERIALS A.Comply with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members and AISI Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing. B.Steel Sheet: ASTMA1003, Structural Grade, TypeH, metallic coated, Grade: ST33H(33 ksi) unless otherwise indicated, Coating CP60: G60 (Z180), A60 (ZF180), AZ50 (AZM150), or GF30 (ZGF90). C.Material Thickness: Gage shown on the drawings shall have the following minimum base metal thickness. 1.20 gage: 33 mils 2.18 gage: 43 mils 3.16 gage: 54mils 2.2FRAMING AND ACCESSORIES A.Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1.ClarkDietrich, West Chester, OH (513) 870-1100. 2.The Steel Network,Durham, NC (888) 474-4876. 3.Cemco Steel, Ft. Worth, TX (817) 568-1525. 4.Telling Industries, LLCWilloughby, OH (866) 372-6384. 5.Marino/WARE, South Plainfield, NJ (800) 627-4661. 6.Other manufacturers listed as members of SSMA, or SFIA. B.Interior and Exterior Load-Bearing Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, depth, flange width, and gage as indicated on Drawings. C.Interior and Exterior Load-Bearing Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated,with stiffened flanges. D.Partition Floor Tracks and Runners: Galvanized sheet steel, C-shaped; same depth and gage as studs; tight fit; solid web. E.Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs. F.Deflection (Capture) Track: Deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth as shown to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges or legs as shown designed to support horizontal and lateral loads. Provide fasteners as indicated on Drawings. 1.Contractor's Option: Manufacturer’s standard double or single deflection track as follows: a.VertiClip or VertiTrack by The Steel Network, Raleigh, NC (888) 474-4876. If this option is used, track may be 20 gage for all stud sizes. 05400-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 b.FastTop Clip by ClarkDietrich, West Chester, OH (513) 870-1100. c.Comparable deflection tracks by other manufacturers listed as members of SSMA, or SFIA. G.Slotted Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; punched with vertical slots in both legs. Studs should be positively attached to deep-leg track using vertical slots while allowing free vertical movement. Legs designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, as follows: 1.Contractor's Option: Manufacturer’s standard double or single deflection track as follows: a.MaxTrak or BlazeFrame by ClarkDietrich. b.SLP-TRK by Brady Innovations as distributed by Cemco. c.Comparable deflection tracks by other manufacturers listed as members of SSMA, or SFIA. H.Load-Bearing Wall Furring and Partition Bracing: Galvanized sheet steel. 1.Cold-Formed Channels: 3/4 inch x 1/2 inch and 1-1/2 inch x 17/32 inch or as shown on the drawings. 2.Clip Angles: 2 inches x 2 inches x 16 gage x 1/4 inch less than stud width or a.Bridge Clip by The Steel Network. b.EasyClipU-Series Clip Angles 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x 16 gage x 1/4 inch less than stud width by ClarkDietrich. c.FastBridge Clip (FB) by ClarkDietrich. 3.Contractor’s Option: In leiu of cold-formedchannels and clip angles for horizontal bridging, provide one of the following: a.Bridge Bar by the Steel Network. b.TradeReady Spazzer 5400 spacing bar by ClarkDietrich. I.Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTMA36, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTMA123. J.Framing Attachment Angles: Galvanized sheet steel, size, shape and configuration as indicated on Drawings, 14 gage, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 1.Contractor’s Option: Contact ClarkDietrich Clip Express (866) 638-1908for alternative selections. K.Ceiling Joists and Runners: Galvanized sheet steel, C-shaped. L.Flat Metal Straps and Backing Plates: Galvanized sheet steel, gage, shape, and configuration as indicated on Drawings. 1.Contractor's Option: In leiu of 2-inch continuous metal strap at capture tracks, Contractor may provide one of the following: a.Bridge Bar by The Steel Network. b.TradeReady Spazzer 5400 bridging and spacing bar by ClarkDietrich. 2.3FASTENERS A.Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load. B.Mechanical Fasteners: ASTMC1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws. C.Framing to Framing: ASTM C 1513; 5/8 inch Type S-12 low-profile head corrosion-resistant self-drilling self- tapping steel screws. D.Framing to Attachment Angle Fasteners: #12 diameter pan head corrosion-resistant self-drilling self-tapping steel screws. E.Wall Floor Track Anchorage Device: Carbon steel wedge type expansion anchor; minimum 3/8 inch diameter x minimum 1-1/2 inch embedmentunless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Refer to Section 05090 for approved anchors. F.Wall Furring to Concrete or Masonry Wall Fasteners: Hex head screw anchors; minimum 1/4 inch diameter x minimum 1-1/8 inch embedmentunless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Refer to Section 05090 for approved 05400-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 anchors. G.Furring Channel to Masonry or Concrete Surface Fasteners: Low velocity powder-actuated drive pins of size to suit application. H.Welding Materials: AWS D1.3. I.Wood Furring, Blocking, and Plywood, Attached to Framing Fasteners: Specified in Section 06100. 2.4FINISHES A.Protective Coating: CP60: G60 (Z180), A60 (ZF180), AZ50 (AZM150), or GF30 (ZGF90). B.Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint20, Type II -organic. 2.5SUBSTITUTIONS A.Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine existing conditions and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that building framing components are ready to receive work. Verify that rough-in utilities are in-place and located where required. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B.Beginning of erection indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2INSTALLATION -GENERAL A.Install cold-formed metal framing in accordance with ASTM C1007, AISI S200 North America Standard for Cold- Formed Steel Framing and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are shown or specified. B.Install system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. C.Install system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. D.Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. E.Install framing members in one-piece lengths. F.Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.3. 3.3INSTALLATION -STUD FRAMING A.Install studs and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and, where gypsum board is attached to studs, install studs in accordance with GA-216and ASTM C 1007. B.Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center, maximum, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. C.Align stud web openings horizontally. 05400-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.Construct corners using minimum three studs. E.Place studs as indicated on Drawings, minimum 2 inches from abutting walls. F.Erect studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs not permitted. G.Erect studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength to meet design requirements. H.Install headers at partition openings using load-bearing C-shaped joists. I.Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items. J.Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. K.Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. L.Fasten studs adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections, and corners to top and bottom runner flanges in double-stud fashion with metal lock fastener tools. 1.Securely fasten studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door and borrowed-light frames. 2.Place horizontally a cut-to-length section of runner with web-flange bent at each end, fasten with minimum one screw per flange. 3.Position a cut-to-length stud (extending to top runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header. M.Install bridging for stud partitions over 8 feet high at mid-height with 1-1/2 inch rolled channels through studs and screw attach in place using clip angles. Lap channels by nesting one inside the other to a length of at least 8 inches and wire tie together. N.Blocking: Screw attach wood blocking between studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware. O.Where optional framing products by the named manufacturersare specified in Part 2 above in lieu of conventional components specified, install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. P.Touch up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint. Q.Fastening: Fasten framing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and schedule below unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. FASTENERSMINIMUM CONNECTION Floor Track to Concrete1 Anchor at 36 inches on center. Partition Stud to Floor Track1 Screw each side at flange. Stud Web to Stud Web2Screws. Plates and Straps to Studs2 Screws. Lateral Bracing to Partition Stud Using clip Angles2 Screws to stud and 2 Screws to cold rolled channel. Runner to Header1 Screw at 16 inches on center, maximum 6 inches from each end. Welded ConnectionsIndicated on Drawings. 3.4INSTALLATION -JOIST FRAMING A.Install joists and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B.Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing. C.Place joists at locations and spacing as indicated on Drawings. 05400-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint. E.Fastening: Indicated on Drawings. 3.5INSTALLATION -CEILING JOISTS A.Install joists and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and, where gypsum board is attached to joists, install joists in accordance with ASTM C1007 and GA-216. B.Ceiling Joist Spacing: 16 inches on center beginning from center of room unless otherwise shown on the drawings. C.Install joists in direction of shortest span, parallel and level, with lateral bracing and bridging. D.Install joists in one piece full length. Splicing of joists not permitted. E.Install perimeter joist runner track sized to match joists. Attach joist runner track to wall framingwith minimum 2 screws per stud and at corners and ends. F.Attach joist ends to joist runner tracks with minimum 1 screw each side at each flange. G.Install bridging at 48 inches on center beginning from center of room with 1-1/2 inch rolled channels screw attached to joists. 1.Stagger bridging at light fixturelocationsas required. 3.6INSTALLATION -FURRING A.Furring Channels: Attach vertically spaced at maximum 16 inches on center, unless otherwise shown on the drawings, to masonry and concrete surfaces with specified powder driven fasteners staggered 24 inches on center on opposite flanges. B.Wall Furring: 1.Secure top and bottom runners to structure. 2.Space metal furring at maximum 16 inches on center unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 3.7INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK A.Coordinate erection of studs with hollow metal door frames and overhead coiling door frames. B.Coordinate installation of anchors, supports, and blocking for mechanical, electrical, and building accessory items installed within framing. 3.8FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Except as specified as mandatory, field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. Owner T&I specified in Appendix B shall not preclude Contractor’s responsibility to perform similar routine, necessary, and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. 3.9OWNERTESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I) A.The Owner will perform testing and inspection as specified in Appendix B (Section 05400). END OF SECTION 05400-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Unispec II -Store Planning103020 SECTION 05500 -METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section includes: 1.Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, galvanized and prime painted. 2.Wal-Mart furnished fabricated metal items. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 03310 -Structural Concrete and Exterior Concrete Slabs: Grout for setting metal fabrications. 2.Section 05090 -Post-installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Mechanical and adhesive anchors drilled into concrete or masonry. 3.Section 06065 -Plastic Materials: Plastic sleeves for steel pipe bollards. 4.Section 09900 -Paints and Coatings: Field painted finishes. 5.Appendix A –Products and Work By Owner or Separate Contractor a.General procedures related to Owner furnished products. b.Manufacturers, suppliers, vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1.ANSI A 14.3 -Ladders, Fixed, Safety Requirements. C.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM A 36 -Carbon Structural Steel. 2.ASTM A 53 -Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. 3.ASTM A 123 -Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4.ASTM A 153 -Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 5.ASTM A 240 -Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications 6.ASTM A 307 -Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 7.ASTM A 325 -Structural Bolts, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 8.ASTM A 500 -Cold-formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 9.ASTM A 591 -Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light Coating Mass Applications. 10.ASTM A 653 -Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot- Dip Process. 11.ASTM A 666 -Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 12.ASTM A 1008 -Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, Baked Hardenable. 13.ASTM A 1011 -Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High- Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. D.American Welding Society (AWS): 1.AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. 2.AWS D1.3 -Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel. E.National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 1.Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products. 05500-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 F.Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 1.SSPC-Paint 20 -Zinc-Rich Coating Type I -Inorganic and Type II -Organic. 2.SSPC-Paint 25 -Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand cleaned Steel Type I and Type II. 3.SSPC-SP3 -Power Tool Cleaning 4.SSPC-PA1 -Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel. 1.3SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings: Submit directly to Architect for Contractor furnished items only. 1.Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and ac- cessories. 2.Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 3.Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 4.Prepare shop drawings under the supervision of a licensed structural Professional Engineer. B.Submit Shop Drawings within 10 working days of Contract date. C.Section 01330 -Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 1.4QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding operators in accordance with Standard Qualification Procedures as required by AWS D1.1. 1.5DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufac- turer’s recommendations. B.Delivery and Handling of Wal-Mart Furnished, Contractor Installed Items: 1.Product Delivery: Wal-Mart Supplier will deliver products to jobsite. Contact Wal-Mart Supplier to establish product delivery date. 2.Product Packaging: Products will be packaged in manufacturer's standard packaging on shipping pallets. Installation Drawings will be included with products. 3.Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01600. a.Verify quantity of products furnished with Bill of Material provided with Wal-Mart furnished prod- ucts. b.Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered, or damage to products delivered to the Wal-Mart construc- Construction Manager, Wal-Mart Indirect Sourcing at (479) 204-0684 (select option 1) or tion.buyouts@wal-mart.comand Wal-Mart Supplier. c.Note product quantity discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Materials. d.Upon notification by Contractor, Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of replacement products. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.Wal-Mart's Suppliers will furnish the following fabricated metal items as specified in Appendix A for installation by Contractor. 2.2MATERIALS A.Steel Plates and Shapes: ASTM A 36. B.Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 and ASTM A 307. 05500-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Cold Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008. D.Hot Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011. E.Galvanized Steel Sheets: 1.Structural: ASTM A 653 Structural Quality, G90. 2.Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 591, Class C. F.Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTMA240 or ASTMA666, Type304 or 430 as shown or specified. G.Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. H.Steel Piping: ASTM A 53. I.Welding Materials: AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3 type required for materials being welded. J.Primers: 1.Shop application and field touch-up: SSPC 25. 2.Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC 20. 3.Color: To match primer used on steel roof deck and joists. K.Concrete Inserts: Cast steel or malleable bolts, washers, and shims; galvanized. 2.3FABRICATION A.Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. B.Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C.Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. D.Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E.Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. F.Supply components required for anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.4FINISHES A.Finish metal fabrications after assembly. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Shop prime ferrous-metal items not indicated to be galvanized. B.Prime Painting: 1.Prime paint in shop as scheduled. 2.Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3.Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA1, "Paint Application Specification No.1," for shop painting. 4.Do notprime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete or where field welding is required. 5.Prime paint items scheduled with one coat. Touch up with same primer. C.Galvanizing: Hot-dipgalvanize items indicated to be galvanized to comply with ASTMA123 or ASTMA153 as applicable. Galvanize to minimum 2.0 oz/sq ft zinc coating, exterior items, and those items indicated on Drawings and specified herein, to be galvanized. 05500-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.Finish Painting: Finish paint after installation as shown on the drawings or specified herein in accordance with Section 09900. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1PREPARATION A.Obtain Wal-Mart Construction Manager approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. B.Clean and strip site primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is scheduled. C.Make provision for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment. D.Use grout specified in Section 03310 for setting metal fabrications. 3.2INSTALLATION A.Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B.Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 or D1.3, as applicable. After installation, grind sight-exposed field welds smooth, touch-up welds, scratched, or damaged surfaces with primer. 3.3SCHEDULE A.Provide items as scheduled herein and as indicated on Drawings. B.Include related items and systems necessary to complete the Work including anchorages and attachments necessary for installation C.Loose Bearing Plates and Lintels: Fabricate to sizes and configuration indicated on Drawings; prime paint finish except for items requiring field welding. D.Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Furnish steel framing and supports not specified under Section 05120. Fab- ricate welded construction in as large units as possible. Drill and tap for hardware and other items. Include anchors required for building into work of other Sections. 1.Interior: Prime paint finish, gray. 2.Exterior: Galvanized. E.Rough Hardware: Custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hanger, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes required for framing, supporting, and anchoring other construction. Galvanized unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. F.Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Profiles and sizes as indicated on Drawings; continuous welded joints and smooth ex- posed edges. Use concealed field splices where possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages; coordinate assembly and installation into work of other Sections. 1.Interior: Prime paint finish. 2.Exterior: Galvanized. G.Exterior Steel Pipe Bollards (Footing Mounted): ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded) or Type S (seam- less), Grade B, Schedule 40, height. 1.Size: Height and diameter as shown on the drawings. 2.Fill bollard with concrete or provide cap / plug at unfilled bollards as indicated on Drawings. 3.Finish: a.Painted Bollards: Field prime and finish coated in accordance with Section 09900. b.Plastic Sleeve Covered Bollards: Galvanized. 4.Plastic Sleeves: Install polyethylene thermoplastic pipe sleeves on bollards as specified in Section 06065 and at locations shown on the drawings. 05500-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 5.Installation: Install in concrete footing as shown on the drawings. 6.At Existing Vent Hood to Remain; 20 Gauge, Grade 430 Stainless Steel sheet with No. 3 finish. 7.At Deli/Bakery on Wall Behind Slicers: 18 Gauge, Grade 304 Stainless Steel sheet with No. 3 finish, size as shown on Drawings. a.Install with construction adhesive as shown and at locations shown on Drawings. b.Install moldings of longest practical length to provide finished appearance. 1)Install J-channel molding at exposed sheet edge. 2)Provide silicone sealant as specified in Section 07900 at junction of J-molding and wall. H.Closure Panel at Refrigerated Cases: Fabricate and install closure panels as shown on Drawings. Fabricate from stainless steel or galvanized steel sheet as shown. END OF SECTION 05500-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning113018 SECTION 06065 -PLASTIC MATERIALS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Plastic Sleeve: Thermoplastic polyethylene pipe sleeves for steel pipe bollards B.Related Sections: 1.Section 01600 -Product Requirements: Contractor’s Product Selection Checklist. 2.Section 05500 -Metal Fabrications: Steel pipe bollards to receive plastic sleeves. 1.2DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Section 01600 -Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide plastic bollard sleevesby one of the following manufac- turers. 1.Ideal Shield, Detroit, MI, Chris Parentior Ashley Kozlowski,(866) 825-8659 or(313) 842-7290: email: cparenti@idealshield.comor info@idealshield.com. 2.Post Guard, Farmington Hills, MI, Betty Steinke, (866) 737-8900; email: betty@postguard.com. 3.Ultratech International, Inc., Jacksonville, FL, (800) 764-9563. 2.2SUPPLIERS A.Specified products may be procured from the following suppliers. 1.Bollard Sleeves: a.Grainger Industrial Supply, Lake Forest, IL; Customer Service (800) 472-4643. b.Uline, Pleasant Prairie, WI; Customer Service (800) 295-5510. c.Fastenal, Winona, MN; Customer Service (877) 507-7555. d.The Crowd Control Store,Fort Lauderdale, FL ((866) 304-2916. 2.3PRODUCTS A.Polyethylene thermoplastic (LDPE or HDPE) molded plasticbollard sleeve. 1.Size: 1/8-inch thickness, 52” high (field verify height) to fit 4-inch or 6-inch diameter pipe bollards as shown. 2.Color: Provide color shown on Drawings. a.Where gray color is indicated, provide Canadian Gray by Encore, PMS color 402, or equalby other specified manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Plastic Sleeves: 1.Install (2) beads of clear 100% silicone sealant by starting beads at opposite sides of top of bollard and spi- raling downward, making one complete revolution of bollard with each bead. 2.Slide sleeve over bollard seatingsleeve in sealant. 3.Allow sealant to cure and verify sleeve holds fast to bollard. 06065-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 4.Repeat installation if sleeve can be removed easily from bollard. 5.Do not install sleeves with manufacturer’s double sided foam tape. END OF SECTION 06065-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Planning103015 SECTION 06100 -ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Blocking and nailers for roofing system and related metal flashings. 2.Preservative and fire resistive treatment. 3.Concealed blocking behind wall mounted items. 4.Structural panel products. 5.Non-structural panel products including the following: a.Backing for electrical and telephone equipment. b.Panels concealed within gypsum board and metal stud partitions. c.Panels used as finish material; walls, ceilings, wainscots, and bases. 6.Panel product and framing for wood and wire mesh doors. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 07243/-Exterior Insulation and Finish System: Finish over plywood sheathing atexterior signage. 2.Section 07620 -Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC): 1.Softwood Lumber Standards. C.American Plywood Association (APA): 1.Grades and Standards. D.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM A 123/A -Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2.ASTM A 153 -Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3.ASTM A 307 -Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 4.ASTM A 653 -Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 5.ASTM E 84 -Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 6.ASTM B 117 -Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 7.ASTM E 1333 -Test Method for Determining Formaldehyde Concentrations in Air and Emission Rates from Wood Products Using a Large Chamber. E.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1.ASME B18.6.1 -Wood Screws (Inch Series) F.American Wood Protection Association (AWPA): 1.AWPA M4 -Care of Preservative Treated Wood Products. 2.AWPA U1 –User Specification for Treated Wood. G.Department of Commerce (National Institute of Standards and Technology) -Product Standard (DOC): 1.DOC PS 1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood. 2.DOC PS 2 -Performance Standard for Wood Based Structural Use Panels. 3.DOC PS 20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard. 06100-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 H.Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB): 1.Grading Rules. I.Western Wood Products Association (WWPA): 1.Western Lumber Grading Rules. J.Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): 1.UL FR-S Classification -Fire Retardant Treated Wood with Flame Spread Ratings of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.UL 723 -Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Lumber Grading Agency: Lumber to be grade stamped by an agency certified by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC). B.Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. C.Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable codes for fire retardant treatment of wood surfaces for flame/smoke ratings. D.Composite Wood Products: Hardwood plywood, particleboard, and medium density fiberboard composite wood products specified herein for exterior or interior applications shall meet the requirements for formaldehyde as specified by the California Air Resources Board, Air Toxics Control Measure for CompositeWood as tested in accordance with ASTM E 1333, and Chap 5 of the CALGreen requirements. 1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B.Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. C.Keep materials dry. Stack materials off ground a minimum of 12 inches or if on concrete slab-on-grade a minimum of 1-1/2 inches, fully protected from weather.Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MATERIALSAND PRODUCTS A.Lumber: DOC PS 20; S4S. Maximum of 19 percent moisture content, surfaced dry, No. 2 any species graded under WWPA grading rules or No. 3 Grade Southern Pine graded under SPIB grading rules. , B.Plywood Backing Panels: DOCPS1, Exposure1, Grade C Plugged veneer, fire retardant treatedthickness indicated but not less than 1/2 inch nominal thickness. C.Nonstructural Panel: DOC PS 1 or PS 2, fire retardant treated plywood. 1.Type 1 (Interior): Grade C-D Plugged veneer, Exposure I, locations and thickness indicated on the Drawings. 2.Type 2 (Exterior): Grade B-B veneer, Exterior, locations and thickness as indicated on the Drawings. D.Structural Panels: DOC PS 1 or PS 2. 1.Plywood Wall Sheathing: Grade B-B veneer, Exterior for exterior, Exposure 1 for interior, span rating required to support spacing indicated on Drawings. Thickness: Indicated on Drawings. 2.Plywood Roof Sheathing: Grade B-B veneer, Exposure 1, Structural I, span rating as required to suit support spacing indicated on Drawings. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 06100-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 E.High Density Wood FiberPanel Products:Provide one of the following panels with span rating as required to suit support spacing indicated on drawings. Thickness as indicated on drawings. 1.EnergyGuard High Fiberboard, by GAF, (800) 766-3411. 2.Huebert Fiberboard Roof Insulation, by Huebert Brothers Products, LLC; Booneville, MO,(816) 882-2704. 2.2FASTENERS A.Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity: Comply with the treated lumber manufacturer’s recommendations for fasteners and metal components in contact with treated lumber. 1.Fasteners: ASTM A 153, class D for hot dip galvanized fasteners or type 304 or type 316 stainless steel. 2.Other components: ASTM A 653, G-185, with minimum of 1.85 ounces of zinc coating per square foot coverage or type 304 or type 316 stainless steel. B.At no time shall any galvanized metal, stainless steel, or other dissimilar metals be in contact with one another. C.Nails, Brads and Staples: 1.ASTM F 1667Galvanized for exterior locationsandhigh humidity areas, and for treated wood 2.ASTM A123 plain finish for other interior locations. 3.Size and type to suit application, unless otherwise noted. D.Bolts, Nuts, Washers, and Lag Screws: ASTM A307, Medium carbon steel; size and type to suit application; galvanized for exterior locations, highhumidity areas, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations, of size and type to suit application, unless otherwise noted. E.Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1 F.Toggle Bolt Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to hollow masonry. G.Expansion Shield Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to solid masonry and concrete. H.Powder or Pneumatically Actuated Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to steel. I.Fasteners for Wood and Plywood to Light Gage Metal Framing and Metal Deck (up to 10 gage, 0.1345 inch): Self- drilling flat head wood-to-metal screws. 1.Manufacturers: a.Hilti, Tulsa, OK (800) 879-6000. b.ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL (800) 323-0720. 2.Wood and Plywood Up to 3/4 Inch Thick: a.Hilti: S-WD 8-18 x 1-15/16 PFH #3 BlackPhosphated. b.ITW: Traxx 10-16 #3 point. c.Pre-drill wood if wood thickness is greater than 1/2 inch or use heavier fastener specified below. 3.Wood less than or equal to 1-1/8 inch thickness to 18 Gage (0.0478 inch) and 20 Gage (0.0359 inch) Metal: a.Hilti: S-WD 10-24 x 1-1/2 PWH #3 wafer head screw. b.ITW: Traxx 10-16 #3 point. c.Pre-drill wood if wood thickness is greater than 1/2 inch. 4.Wood less than or equal to 1-3/4 inch thickness to 16 Gage (0.598 inch) and Heavier Metal (less than or equal to 0.232 inches): a.Hilti: S-WW 12-24x2-1/2 PFH #4 Wings. b.ITW: Traxx 12-24 #4 Point with Wings. 5.Wood less than or equal to 2-inch thickness to 16 Gage (0.598 inch) and heavier metal (less than or equal to 1/4 inch): a.Hilti: S-WW 1/4-20 x 2-3/4 PFH #4 Wings. 06100-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 J.Forwall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTMB117with wafer heads or reamer wings as specified above, length as shown oras recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. K.Fasteners for Structural Wood Members to Solid Grouted Masonry: Adhesive anchors, size and length as indicated on Drawings. 1.Anchor adhesive: Cartridge type two-component adhesive for embedding anchors. a.HIT HY-150 by Hilti Corp. b.Epcon System, Ceramic 6 by ITW Ramset/Red Head c.Epoxy-Tie SET by Simson Strong Tie Co. Inc., Pleasanton, CA (800) 925-5099. d.Substitutions: Not permitted. L.Fasteners for Non-Structural Wood Members to Masonry: Masonry screw anchor with Phillips or Torx flat head, size and length as shown on the drawings. 1.Hilti: Kwik-Con II fastener. 2.ITW: Tapcon masonry anchor. M.Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements, fasteners by alternate manufacturers of equal types to those specified may be provided, except where substitutions are specifically prohibited. 2.3WOOD TREATMENT A.Preservative Pressure Treated LumberTreatment: 1.Products and Manufacturers: Provide any of the following: a.Wolman CCA, by Arch Wood Protection, Smyrna, GA, (770) 801-6600. b.CCA Pressure Treatment by Hoover Treated Wood Products Inc., Thomson, GA,(800) .832-9663. c.SupaTimber, by Viance, Charlotte, NC, (800) 421-8661. 2.Treat lumber in accordance with AWPA U1;Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground;Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground; and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 3.Preservative Chemicals shall be acceptable toAuthorities Having Jurisdictionand contain no arsenic or chromiumwhere prohibited. 4.Kiln dry lumber after treatment to 15-19 percent moisture content. Do not use warped material or materials that do not comply with requirements for untreated material. Material to be painted or stained shall haveknots and pitch streaks sealed as with untreated wood. 5.Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Reviewand acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. B.Field-Applied Lumber Preservative: 1.Provide the following: a.Inorganic boron. b.Copper napthenate. C.Fire Retardant Treatment: 1.Products and Manufacturers: Provide any of the following: a.Dricon FRT (exterior and interior), by Arch Wood Protection, Smyrna, GA, (770)801-6600. b.Exterior X (exterior) and Pyro-Guard (interior) by Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.; Thomson, GA; (800)-832-9663. c.D-Blaze (interior) by Viance, Charlotte, NC; (800)421-8661. 2.Identify fire retardant treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 3.For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affectfinishes. 4.Kiln dry lumber after treatment, to an average moisture content of 19 percent or less. 5.Kiln dry plywood after treatment, to an average moisture content of 15 percent or less. 6.Chemicals used to treat material shall be free of halogens, sulfates, ammonium phosphate and formaldehyde. 06100-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 7.Treatment material shall provide protection against termites and fungal decay and shall be registered for use as a wood preservative by the U. S. Environmental Protection Agency. D.Wood Requiring Treatment: 1.Lumber, Preservative Treated: a.Nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar items in conjunction with roofing, flashing, and other construction. b.Sills, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar items in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.Lumber, Fire Retardant Treated: a.Wood in concealed spaces. b.Wood exposed within the roof/ceiling assembly. 3.Interior Plywood, Fire Retardant Treated: a.Plywood used as finish material, walls, wainscots, and bases in fire-rated corridors. b.Plywood backing for electrical and telephone equipment. 4.Plywood Not to be Fire Retardant Treated: Structural plywood performing a structural function, such as a component of roof, floors or shear walls. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine areas to receive rough carpentry work and verify following: 1.That installation of building components to receive roughcarpentry work is complete. 2.That surfaces are satisfactory to receive work. 3.That spacing,direction and details of supports are correct to accommodate installation of blocking, backing, stripping, furring and nailing strips. 3.2SITE TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A.Wood Treatment at Site: Comply with AWPAM4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative treated lumber. 1.Use inorganic boron for items continuously protected from liquid water. 2.Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. 3.3INSTALLATION A.Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring,nailers, blocking, grounds,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. 1.Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths. 2.Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. B.Provide blocking and framing indicated and necessary to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1.Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. C.Secure members in place with specified fastener. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. D.Wood Ground, Sleeper, Blocking, and Nailer: Install where indicated and where required forscreeding orattaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. 1.Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2.Recess heads of fasteners below surface of wood members. 06100-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 E.Wood Furring: Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. F.Install firestopping complying with Section 07840 in concealed spaces with wood blocking, horizontally and vertically in accordance with drawings, minimum 2 inches thick where space is not blocked by framing members. G.Tapered Wood Shim (edge strip) at Parapet Cap: 1.Provide shaped high density wood fiberor wood material as indicated at the optional Parapet Detail. 2.Shape wood material for continuous support of metal coping. H.Fasteners: Install fasteners with manufacturer’s recommended power tool for each type of fastener. 3.4PROTECTION A.Protect rough carpentry from weather throughout construction period. END OF SECTION 06100-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec113018 SECTION 06165 -FIBERBOARD PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Tack bulletin boards. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.ASTM International(ASTM): 1.ASTM C209-Test Methods for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. 2.ASTM C954-Steel Drill Screws for the Application ofGypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 inches to 0.112 inches in Thickness. 3.ASTM C 1002 -Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for The Application Of Gypsum Panel Products Or Metal Plaster Bases To Wood Studs Or Steel Studs. 4.ASTM D1037-Test Methods of Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base Fiber and Particle Panel Materials. 5.ASTM E84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1.OSHA 01926.1153 RespirableCrystalline Silica. 1.3ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Minimize dust emissions and provide equipment that suppresses dust. 1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufac- turer's recommendations. 1.5PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Acclimatize panels to existing moisture conditions and for not less than 24 hours before installation. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MATERIALS A.Fiberboard: Molded, recycled post-consumerpaper, cellulose fiber structural panelmanufactured and constructed as acoustic board insulation. 1.Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2.Density: Minimum 15 pcf when tested in accordance with ASTM C209. 3.Tensile Strength: Minimum 150 psi parallel and 600 psi perpendicular when tested in accordance with ASTM C209. 4.Water Absorption by Volume: Not to exceed the maximum percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1037. 5.Expansion: 50 to 90 percent relative humidity in accordance with ASTM C209. 6.Thermal Resistance: When tested in accordance with ASTM C209 per ASTM C518: a.R-value: 1.2 06165-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 7.Flame Spread: 76 to 200 tested in accordance with ASTM E84, Class III or C. 8.Subject to compliance with requirements specified herein, provide fiberboard manufactured byone of the following: by Homasote Company, West Trenton, NJ (800) 257-9491. a.440 Sound Barrier b.Soundstopby Blue Ridge Fiberboard, (800)535-4088or (800)233-8721. c.Equivalent product by other manufacturers. B.Trim: Casing as shown on Drawings. 2.2ACCESSORIES A.Panel Fasteners: 1.Fastening to sheathing: ASTM C 954 and C 1002, Type S-12 bugle head, corrosion-resistant self-drilling self-tapping steel screws; length as required to penetrate framing members 3/4" minimum. 2.Fastening to concrete masonry unit (CMU): Masonry screw anchor with Phillips or Torx flat head, 3/16 inch in diameter x 1-3/4 inch.Provide one of the following: a.Kwik-Con II fastener by Hilti, Tulsa, OK (800) 879-6000. b.Tapcon masonry anchor by ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL (800) 323-0720. B.Trim Fasteners: As shown on Drawings. C.Field Applied Paint Finishfor Panel and Trim: Water-based acrylic enamel, semi-gloss, as specified in Section 09900 for wood substrates. 1.Color: Match color of adjacent wall as shown on Drawings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1PREPARATION A.Prepare substrate in accordance with fiberboard panel manufacturer's recommendations. B.Beginning of installation is acceptance of substrate. 3.2INSTALLATION A.Install panel where noted on the Drawings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install only clean, dry, undamaged panels. C.When fastening panel to CMU, provide drillsequipped with a HEPA-rated filter vacuum dust collection system recommended by the manufacturer to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. 1.Drill pilot holes accurately and squarely. Clean holes in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations using a HEPA-rated filter vacuum. D.Install panel trim pieces concurrently with installation of panels. Miter cut panel trim at corners to provide smooth transition. Ensure moldings are straight and correctly aligned. E.Prepare and paint installed trim as specified in Section 09900 for wood substrates. F.Apply continuous bead ofsealantin corner seams. G.Sealant shall not be visible in completed system. END OF SECTION 06165-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning072712 SECTION 06200 -FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Interior standing and running trim. 2.Shelving. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Panel product used as finish material on walls, ceilings, wainscots, and bases. Lumber and panel products used for wood and wire mesh doors. 2.Section 06400 -Architectural Woodwork: Plastic laminate casework and wainscoting. 3.Section 09900 -Paints and Coatings: Opaque and transparent finishes. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.American Woodworking Institute (AWI): 1.AWI -Quality Standards. C.American Plywood Association (APA): 1.APA -Grades & Specifications. 1.3DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Section 01600 -Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1WOOD MATERIALS A.Interior Standing and Running Trim: AWI Custom Grade; plain sawn, Grade II lumber. 1.Painted Finish: Closed-grain hardwood, any species 2.Clear Sealed Hardwood: One of the following hardwood species. Use one species throughout a.Ash. b.Birch. c.Oak. B.Shelving -Clear Sealer Finish: Fir or birch plywood with veneer core and sanded edges. 1.APA 5-ply A/C, 3/4 inch thickness at Stockroom shelving. 2.APA 5-ply A/B at other locations. C.Panel Product for Finish Material on Walls, Ceilings, Wainscots, and Bases: See Section 06100. 2.2HARDWARE A.Fasteners: Size and type to suit application; galvanized for exterior and high humidity locations; plain finish at other locations. 2.3FABRICATION 06200-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Fabricate to AWI Standards. 1.Standing and Running Trim: Custom Grade. 2.Wood Shelving with Clear Sealer: Economy Grade. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Install woodwork plumb, level, and straight without distortion; use concealed shims. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work. Anchor woodwork items to nailers or blocking or directly to substrate usingconcealed fasteners. B.Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum joints, using maximum lumber lengths possible. Cope at returns; miter at corner. C.Wood Shelving: Assemble units and install as indicated on Drawings. D.Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09900. END OF SECTION 06200-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning043021 SECTION 06400 -ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Owner furnished Plastic Laminate Casework, countertop,and accessories for installation by Contractor. 2.Architectural slat wall panel and architectural ledge system. 3.Wall CapforOwner furnished Non-Modular Pharmacy Privacy Wall, for installation by Contractor. Related Requirements:The following list of items is intended to aid in locating work related to or dependent on the scope of Work in this Section. The list is included forinformation only and is not intended to be inclusive of all project requirements. 1.Section 01600 -Product Requirements: Contractor’s Product Lead Time Schedule. 2.Section 06065 –Plastic Materials: Wall or millwork counter mounted plastic protective shield at Pharmacy windows. 3.Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Lumber and panel products used for wood and wire mesh doors. 4.Section 06424 –Protective Surfacing: High impact, rigid sheet wall covering. 5.Section 07240/07243 -Exterior Insulation andFinish System: EIFS Cornice Trim 1.2REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. American National Standards (ANSI): 1.ANSI A208.1 -Particleboard 2.ANSI A208.2 -Medium Density Fiberboard For Interior Use Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC) / Woodwork Institute (WI) -Joint Publication: 1.AWI/AWMAC/WI -Architectural Woodwork Standards. Engineered Wood Association (APA): APA -Grades & Specifications. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 1.NEMA LD3 -High-Pressure Decorative Laminates 1.3DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. Inspect materials delivered and reject those not qualifying with requirements, those damaged in transit, or those that appear otherwise unsatisfactory. Schedule delivery of items to installation areas that are in proper condition to receive them. Place items neatly and systematically to avoid damage, store in clean, dry, enclosed, and secure storage area. Receive Owner Furnished products(if applicable)in accordance with the requirements of Section 01600. 1.Product Delivery: Owner’s Supplier will deliver Owner furnished products to site to be received by Con- tractor. Contact Owner’s Supplier to coordinate product delivery and installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 06400-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.1OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS Owner’s Supplier will furnish replacement wall cap innon-modular Pharmacy Paint-Fix-Clean projects privacy \] walls ifshown on Drawings and as specified in Appendix A (Section 06400) for installation by Contractor. Supercenter Vision Center Millwork and Equipment: Owner’s Supplier will furnish Vision Center millwork/case- work, equipment, and associated components as specified in Appendix A (Section 06400)and Owner Furnished Equipment Schedule for installation by Contractor). Breakroom Millwork and Miscellaneous Scheduled Millwork: Owner’s Supplier will furnish millwork as shown on drawings or specified in Appendix A (Section 06400 or Owner Furnished Equipment Schedule)for installation by Contractor. 2.2MANUFACTURERS–LAMINATES AND ACCESSORIES High Pressure Laminate (HPL): Byone of the following as specified in the Color/Pattern Schedule below: 1.Formica Corporation; Indianapolis, IN; Contact: Megan Shaughnessy; (513) 786-3039. 2.Nevamar Decorative Surfaces(a subsidiary of Panolam Surface Systems) Shelton, CT. Contact: Tricia Rongitsch, (612) 618-4754, www.panolam.com/distributors 3.Panolam Surface Systems, Shelton, CT. Contact: Tricia Rongitsch, (612) 618-4754, or (877) 726-6526, www.panolam.com/distributors 4.Pionite Decorative Surfaces(a subsidiary of Panolam Surface Systems) Shelton, CT. Contact: Tricia Rongitsch, (612) 618-4754. 5.Wilsonart; Temple, TX; Contact:Marty Click (214) 502-4084. Accessories: 1.Adhesives: a.Wilsonart;Temple, TX; Contact:Marty Click (214) 502-4084. b.ITW Polymers Sealants North America, Irving, TX, (800) 878-7876. c.Franklin International, Columbus, OH, (800) 877-4583. 2.3PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS –LAMINATES AND ACCESSORIES High Pressure Laminate (HPL):NEMA LD3; color, pattern, and finish as indicated in theLaminate Color/Pattern Schedule herein. 1.Exposed Horizontal Surfaces: GP-50. 2.Exposed Vertical Surfaces: GP-50. 3.Postformed Surfaces: PF-42. 4.Thickness: Nominal 0.050 inch thick. Thermofused Melamine Panel (TFM): Particleboard or medium density fiberboard (MDF) finished with thermally fused, melamine impregnated decorative paper. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF):ANSIA208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde resin. Particleboard:Density 45 lb., ANSIA208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde resin. Adhesives: Low VOC adhesive, as recommended by laminate manufacturer and suitable for shop or field applica- tion. 1.Toxicity / IEQ: a.Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials. b.Comply with Green Seal Standard GS-36 for commercial aerosol adhesives. 06400-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 c.Comply with California’s South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule No. 1168 in areas where exposure to freeze/thaw conditions and direct exposure to moisture will not occur. In areas where freeze/thaw conditions exist or direct exposure to moisture can occur, then comply with California’s Bay Area AQMD Regulation 8, Rule 51 for containers larger than 16 oz. andwith Cali- fornia Air Resource Board (CARB) for containers 16 oz or less. 2.Acceptable Products: Provide the following or equivalent as recommended by laminate manufacturer. a.3000 Adhesive Seriesby Wilsonart. b.Sta’-Put SP80 Contact Adhesive by ITW. c.TitebondAdvanced Polymer Construction Adhesive by Franklin International. Fasteners: Unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer, use size and type to suit application; galvanized or stainless for exterior and high humidity locations; plain finish at other locations. Edge Banding: Edge banding shall be 3 mm thick x 1-5/8 inch strip banding of ABS/PVC composition by Wilsonart, or equivalent. 1.Color: PL-7 as described below. 2.Color: PL-4 as described below. 3.Color: PL-31 as described below. 2.4LAMINATE COLOR/PATTERN SCHEDULE Provide one color where two or more are specified. Provide laminate specified below as applicable and as shown/scheduled on the Drawings. All PL designations are for HPL unless otherwise indicated. Colors shown in parentheses are generic color names. 1.PL-1 (Light Gray): a.No. 692 Folkstone Celesta, by Formica. b.No. 4142-60 Grey Glace, by Wilsonart. 2.PL-2 (White): No. D354-60 Designer White, matte finish, by Wilsonart. 3.PL-3: (White): No. 4945-38 Organic Cotton, by Wilsonart. 4.PL-4(Maple): a.No. WM791 Hardrock Maple, by Pionite. b.No. 10776HW-60 Kensington Maple, by Wilsonart c.No. W290 Hardrock Maple, by Panolam. (TFM) 5.PL-5 (Gray): a.No. D92-60 Dove Grey, by Wilsonart. 6.PL-6 (Light Tan): No. 4143-60 Neutral Glace, by Wilsonart. 7.PL-7 (Medium Brown): No. 96-60 Shadow, by Wilsonart. 8.PL-8 (Sand): a.No. AG381 Mineral Talc, by Pionite. b.No. 1763-60 Brune Slate, by Wilsonart. 9.PL-9 (Dark Gray): a.No. SG228 Slate, by Pionite. b.No. D91-60 Slate Grey, by Wilsonart. 10.PL-10: No. D436-60 Fleece, by Wilsonart. 11.PL-11 (MediumGray): a.No. 928-58 Mouse (matte finish), by Formica. b.No. D90-60 North Sea, by Wilsonart. 12.PL-12 (Gray): No. 4843-60 Mysted Zephyrby Wilsonart. 13.PL-13: No. ST622-S Caramel, by Pionite. 14.PL-14: No. 4680 Lodestone, by Wilsonart. 15.PL-15: (Brown):No. MKT-001T Golden Iron Moonrock, by Nevamar. 16.PL-16: No. 4745HW-60 Maroochy Brush, by Wilsonart 17.PL-18: (Medium Tan):No. PON-003T Painted Desert, by Nevamar. 18.PL-19: Champagne. a.No. ARP S-2-003T Champaign, by Nevamar. b.No. D456-60 Café Crème, by Wilsonart. c.No. S463 Antique White, by Panolam. (TFM) 06400-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 19.PL-20 (Tan): No. 4762HW-60 Mystique Dawn, by Wilsonart. 20.PL-21 (Fonthill Pear): No. 10745-60 Fonthill Pear, by Wilsonart. 21.PL-22: No. 1815-35 Deepstar Agate, by Wilsonart. 22.PL-23: No 4830K-18 Satin Stainless by Wilsonart. 23.PL-24 (Blue):No. D321-60 Brittany Blue, by Wilsonart. 24.PL-25 (Blue): No. D26-60 “Persian Blue”, matte finish, by Wilsonart 25.PL-26 (Sol): No 3209-58 “Sol”, by Formica. 26.PL-27: No. D498K-18 Island, linearity finish/AEON, by Wilsonart. 27.PL-28 (Aloe): No. 7962K-18 Aloe, by Wilsonart. 28.PL-29: No. 1573 Frosty White, by Wilsonart. 29.PL-30: No. 4879 Steel Mesh, by Wilsonart. 30.PL-31: No. 1500-60 Grey, by Wilsonart. 31.PL-32: VA2002 Vision Vava, by Nevamar. 32.PL-33 (Black): No.1595-60 Black, by Wilsonart. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.5ARCHITECTURAL SLAT WALL PANEL Description: As assembled by Owner’s selected supplier. EPVC substrates clad with machine-pressed vinyl to form rigid, preformed panel with linear wood-slat appearance. Dimensions as determined by supplier. Supplier: Architectural Slat Wall Panel: Procure slat wall from HJC as Owner’s pre-selected supplier. Contact Haines, Jones & Cadbury, (800) 459-7099, WMT@hjcinc.com. 1.Slat wall is a custom architectural panel, fully assembled off site and shipped as a panel unit by Owner’s supplier. 2.6ARCHITECTURAL LEDGE SYSTEM Description: Components as prefabricatedby Owner’s selected supplier. Left, right, and overhead middle pieces clad with protective surfacing and infilled with foam form inserts, for installation at interior entryways where shown on Drawings.Protective surfacing manufacturer part numbers are provided herein for supplytracking only. 1.Finish: a.Ledge System at Auto Center: Black: Matte Luxe Noir (Black) by Omnova, Part No. 542113. b.Ledge System at Locations Other than Auto Center: Natural Woodgrain:Rift Oak Natural by Om- nova, Part No. 542285. Supplier: Architectural Ledge System: Procure ledge systemfrom HJC as Owner’s pre-selected supplier. Contact Haines, Jones & Cadbury, (800) 459-7099, WMT@hjcinc.com. 2.7EIFS EXTERIOR CORNICE TRIM Expanded polystyrene (EPS) foam molding for exterior cornice is included as a part of the Exterior Insulation and Finish System and is specified in Section 07240/07243. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1GENERAL Install items specified herein where and as shown on the Drawings. 3.2PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK Where new plastic laminate is indicated for existing casework, remove existing laminate and/or finishes to base substrate prior to installation of new. Installation of new laminate over existing is not acceptable, no exceptions. Install woodwork plumb, level, and straight without distortion; use concealed shims. Scribe and cut woodwork to 06400-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 fit adjoining work. Anchor woodwork items to nailers or blocking or directly to substrate using concealed fasteners. Casework: Provide well fittingand smooth operating doors and drawers. Install laminateon vertical surfaceswith directional pattern or grain oriented vertically.Install laminate on horizontal surfaces with directional pattern or grain oriented parallel to length of countertop. 3.3ARCHITECTURAL SLAT WALL PANELAND LEDGE SYSTEM Download and use the Slat Wall Panel Installation Guideand Ledge System Installation Guide. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where assemblieswill be installed.Verify substrates are flat, clean, dry, solid, and free from coatings and defects detrimental to installation. Slat Wall Panel: 1.Removeexisting rigid sheet wall coverings to base substrate prior to installation of slat wall panel. 2.Begin withthe starter edgeand assemble overlapping panels as shown in the Slat Wall Installation Guide. Cut the final assembly to fit openings and wallrequirements. 3.Gypsum Board Substrate: Attach directlyto gypsum wall using the Franklin construction adhesive specified herein. Use drywall screws to fasten in recesses of slats at panel joints and in pre-drilled holes in edge panels. 4.Split Face CMU Substrate or Irregular Wall Surface: Vertical plane may vary. If necessary to achieve flat attachment surface, use 7/8-in. hat furring channel on building wall surface. Ledge System: 1.Cut plywood support cleat, midsections, and transition pieces asrequired to fit entryway. 2.Begin wall attachment with left vertical side piece and continue with overhead midsections and right vertical side piece as described in the Installation Guide; install gussets where required. 3.Reference Ledge System Installation Guide for fasteners attaching horizontal ledge pieces to support cleat. Provide fasteners as shown on Drawings for installing ledge pieces and cleat to metal studor CMU wall substrate. 3.4COUNTERTOPS Countertops: Anchor countertops securely to base units. END OF SECTION 06400-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec –Store Planning032621 SECTION 06424-PROTECTIVE SURFACING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Interior rigid sheet protective wall covering. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01600 -Product Requirements: Contractor’s Product Lead Time Schedule. 2.Section 06400 -Architectural Woodwork: Substrates for and assemblies usingprotective surfacing. 3.Section 09250 -Gypsum Board: Substrate for protective surfacing. 4.Section 10260 –Wall and Corner Guards: Aluminum outside corner guards. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM E 84 -Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2.ASTM D1308 -Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. 3.ASTM F476 -Standard Test Methods for Security of Swinging Door Assemblies. 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer qualifications: Not less than 3years experience in installation of materials produced by the manufacturers specified herein on projects similar to the scope of this work. B.Fire Performance Requirements: 1.Surface Burning Characteristics: Conform to the following in accordance with ASTM E 84. a.Flame Spread: 25 or less. b.Smoke Density: 450 or less. C.Impact Strength Requirements: 1.Tested in accordance with and meets or exceeds the applicable provisions of ASTM F476. D.Chemical and Stain Resistance Requirements: 1.Tested in accordance with and meets or exceeds ASTM D1308. 1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B.Store in clean, dry, enclosed, and secure storage area.Storeflatand in accordance with manufacturer’s published requirements. C.Protect protective surfacing productsand accessories, especially adhesive, from freezing temperatures, excessive heat, temperature fluctuations, humidity and moisture penetration. 1.5PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Store material in an environment of 65-75ºF for at least 24 hours prior to beginning the installation. 06424-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Installation areas shallbe enclosed and weatherproofed before installation commences. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Provide products from the followingmanufacturers. 1.Rigid Sheet Wall Covering: a.Construction Specialties National Accounts, Kennesaw, GA. Contact: (888) 424-6287. b.Omnova Solutions, Beachwood, OH. (216) 682-7000. 2.Adhesive: a.Franklin International, Columbus, OH, (800) 877-8543. b.InPro Corporation, Muskego, WI (800) 222-5556. c.Spray-Lock Premium Eco Adhesives, Chattanooga, TN, (423) 305-6151. 2.2PRODUCT PROCUREMENT A.Purchase all products specified herein from Haines, Jones & Cadbury as Owner’s pre-selected supplier. Contact Haines, Jones & Cadbury, (800) 459-7099, WMT@hjcinc.com. 2.3RIGID SHEET PROTECTIVE WALL COVERING A.Description: 1.Composition: a.ConstructionSpecialties: Engineered PETG: Polyethylene terephthalate glycol (PETG) PVC-free polyester blend compound, high impact,rigid sheet. b.Omnova: Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sheet. 2.Thickness: As supplied by manufacturer according to colordesignation below. 3.Sheet Size: 4 feet by 8 feet or 4 feet by 10 feetas supplied by manufacturer. Verify manufacturer’s part designation herein matches intendedsheet size. 4.Texture: Suede. 5.Color:Colorsand part numbers for some suppliers are custom: a.PS-1: Walmart Blue. 1)ConstructionSpecialtiesPart No.WMWC40ES410S601. 2)FS Blue by Omnova, Part No. 539263. b.PS-3: Brushed Silver. ConstructionSpecialtiesPart No. CSCW40410378N. c.PS-4: Glowing Ember.ConstructionSpecialties Part No.CSWC40481234N. d.PS-5: Fresh Linen.ConstructionSpecialties Part No. CSWC40481233N. e.PS-6: Butterfield. ConstructionSpecialties Part No. CSWC404101331N. f.PS-7: Gray Pattern. Provide one of the following. 1)Walmart White Sugar. ConstructionSpecialties Part No.CSWC40481430N. 2)Linen W by Omnova. g.PS-11: Charcoal by Omnova, Part No. 542240 (8)/542239 (10). 2.4ACCESSORIES A.Adhesive:Provide one of the followingas recommended by wall covering manufacturer. 1.Spray-Lock FRP Adhesive, by Spray-Lock Premium Eco Adhesives. 2.Titebond Greenchoice Advanced Polymer Panel Adhesive, by Franklin International. 3.Bond Adhesive,by InPro Corp. B.Wall Covering Manufacturer’sTrim: Color by manufacturer of wall covering to match wall coveringpanel if not specified herein and unless noted otherwiseon the Drawings. 1.High Impact Outside Corner: Extruded SSM-20 Suede Texture,4 feet 1 inch long with caps (including retainer and fasteners)as supplied by wall covering manufacturer. a.PS-1 (Walmart Blue). b.PS-3 (Brushed Silver): Construction SpecialtiesPart No. CSSSM204F374N. 06424-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 c.PS-4 (Glowing Ember): Construction SpecialtiesPart No. CSSSM20411234N. d.PS-5 (Fresh Linen): Construction SpecialtiesPart No. CSSSM20411233N. e.PS-6 (Black) ConstructionSpecialties Part No. CSVA20041108N. f.PS-7: Aluminum outside corner guard as specified for PS-7 in Section 10260. g.PS-11: Aluminum outside corner guard as specified for PS-11 in Section 10260. 2.Low Impact Outside Corner: VA-200, 4 feet 1 inch long. a.PS-1: ConstructionSpecialties Part No. CSVA2004FNT601N. C.Wall Covering Manufacturer’s Caulk: For inside cornersand seams.Color by manufacturer of wall covering to match wall covering panel if not specified herein. EXECUTION PART 3 - 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where protective wall covering will be installed and verify that substrates are flat, clean, dry, solid, and free from coatings and defects detrimental to installation. Verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. 3.2PREPARATION A.Where new protective surfacing is to be installed, remove existing surfacing and/or finishes to base substrate prior to installation of new. Installation of new protective surfacing over existing is not acceptable, no exceptions. B.Prepare substrate for protective wall covering installation in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations. C.View manufacturer’s installation video prior to start of installation. 3.3INSTALLATION –GENERAL A.Relative humidity shall not exceed 80%at time of installation. B.Apply caulk at butt joints as required to fill gaps. C.Maintain temperature between 65-75ºF for at least 48 hours after the installation. 3.4INSTALLATION–PROTECTIVE SURFACING AS WAINSCOT A.Install protective wall coveringand accessories in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 1.Install wall covering using adhesiveas provided by wall covering supplier. 2.Install inside corner trim using included adhesive tape. 3.Install manufacturer’s outside corner trim using adhesive tape or contact adhesiveas provided by wall cov- ering supplier. 4.Install aluminum outside corner trim as specified in Section 10260. 3.5CLEANING A.Immediately upon completion of installation, clean protective surfacingand accessories in accordance with manu- facturer's recommended cleaning method. B.Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation as work progresses and upon completion of work. 3.6PROTECTION 06424-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Protect installed protective surfacingfrom subsequent construction activities. Use materials that may be easily re- moved without leaving residue or permanent stains. END OF SECTION 06424-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning120420 SECTION 06610 -GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes:FRP plastic coated panelsand accessories. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01600 -Product Requirements: Contractor’s Product Lead Time Schedule. 2.Section 09720–Composite Decorative Faux Tile Wall Panels: All specificationsforinterior faux subway tile panel(FT-1) if FRP-fabricatedproduct (Marlite) is selectedby supplier. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM E 84 -Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2.ASTM D 256 -Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics. 3.ASTM D 638 -Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 4.ASTM D 790 -Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plasticsand Electrical Insulating Materials. 1.3DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B.Store in clean, dry, enclosed, and secure storage area. Store flat on supplier’s original shipping palettes and in ac- cordance with manufacturer’s published requirements. C.Protect adhesive from freezing temperatures, excessive heat, temperature fluctuations, humidity and moisture pen- etration. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.FRP products and accessories by one of the following as provided by supplier for project: 1.Crane Composites, Inc, Channahon, IL, (800) 435-0080. 2.Glasteel, Moscow, TN, (800) 238-5546. 3.Franklin International, Columbus, OH, (800) 877-4583(adhesive and sealants only). 4.Marlite, Dover, OH, (800) 377-1221. 5.Parkland Plastics, Inc., Middlebury, IN ((800) 835-4110 (adhesive only). 6.Spray-Lock Premium Eco Adhesives, Chattanooga, TN ((423) 305-6151 (adhesive only). 2.2SUPPLIER A.Procure products in the scope of this Sectionfrom Haines, Jones& Cadbury as Owner’s pre-selected supplier. Con- tact Haines, Jones & Cadbury, (800) 459-7099, WMT@hjcinc.com. 2.3FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS (FRP) A.Description: Fiber reinforced plastic coated panels, 0.09 inch thick. 06610-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Physical Characteristics: Meet the following minimum characteristics: 1.Flexural Strength: 8,500 psi per ASTM D 790. 2.Tensile Strength: 5,000 psi per ASTM D 638. 3.Izod Impact Resistance: 4 ft-lb/sq inch per ASTM D 256. 4.Surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E 84 for Class C finish: 5.Flame Spread: Less than 200. 6.Smoke Density: Less than 450. C.United States Department of Agriculture (USDA): Approved for incidental food contact. D.Finish: Embossed. E.Color:Provide color specified below as shown on Drawings or equal by other manufacturer specified herein. DesignationCrane CompositesGlasteelMarlite FRP 1#85 WhiteWL WhiteP100 White FRP 2#70 BeigeBeigeP106 Beige FRP 5#83 Colonial WhiteAlmondP118 Almond 2.4ACCESSORIES A.Adhesive: Pressure sensitive, low VOC adhesive. 1.Titebond Greenchoice Advanced Polymer Panel Adhesive, by Franklin International. 2.C-551 FRP Adhesive by Marlite. 3.Parkland Panel Adhesive by Parkland. 4.FRP Spray Adhesive, by Spray-Lock Premium Eco Adhesives. B.Wall Trim: Manufacturer’s standard matching wall trim including caps, division bars, inside and outside corners, edge, and other trim as required for a complete and finished installation. C.Edge Trim at Ceramic Tile: Provide F570 bright anodized aluminum edge trim manufactured by Marlite or equiv- alent. D.Sealant: Manufacturer's Silicone Construction Sealant. 1.Product: MS 250 or MS 251 Silicone Sealant by Marlite or equivalent by any listed manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B.Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2PREPARATION A.Where new FRP wall panels are to be installed, remove existing wall panels and/or finishes to base substrate prior to installation of new. Installation of new wall panels over existing is not acceptable, no exceptions. B.Prepare substrate for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3.3INSTALLATION 06610-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.FRP Panels: 1.Install FRP wall panels in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 2.Prefit each wall panel before securing in place. Cut panels with carbide-tipped power saw or swivel-head shear. 3.Provide manufacturer's recommended spacing between abutting panel ends, edges and trim. Provide mini- mum 1/8 inch space around pipes, electrical fittings, obstructions and other items penetrating panels. Fill joints with sealant. 4.Install panels with edges vertical and plumb. Use maximum length pieces to provide minimum number of end joints. a.Align panelto panel vertical joints at inside and outside corner conditions. 5.Substrate: Apply adhesive to substrate and to panel backs as recommended by manufacturer with V-notch spreader. Provide 100 percent coverage of adhesive. 6.Install accessory panel trim pieces concurrently with installation of panels. Mitercut accessory panel trim at corners to provide smooth transition. Set trim attached to adjacent panel ends and edges and seal with sealant. a.Installaluminum edge trim where panels abut ceramic wall tile in toilet airport entrances as shown on Drawings. 7.Seal corner seams, base and ceiling junctures, and junctures between panels and wall with sealant. Remove excess sealant during installation. 8.Provide sealant around all openings, corners, and joints. 3.4FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Inspect installation, accessories, and fastening to substrate. END OF SECTION 06610-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Planning022213 SECTION 07210 -BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Batt Insulation. 2.Sound Attenuation Insulation (Sound Batts). B.Related Sections: 1.Section 04200 -Unit Masonry Assemblies: Masonry fill insulation. 2.Section 07840 -Firestopping: Safing insulation used in conjunction with fire stop material. 3.Section 09250 -Gypsum Board: Metal furring. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM E 84 -Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2.ASTM C 665 -Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 3.ASTM E 136 -Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750º C. 1.3DEFINITIONS A.Concealed Insulation: Insulation concealed within framing system, both faces protected by finish material. B.Exposed Insulation: Insulation exposed within framing system, one or both faces unprotected. 1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufac- turer's recommendations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Provide products from one of the following manufacturers as specified in the Materials paragraph below: 1.Atlas Energy Products, Atlanta, GA (800) 933-1476. 2.Celotex Corporation, Tampa, FL (813) 873-1700. 3.CertainTeed Corporation, Valley Forge, PA,(800) 523-7844. 4.Dow Chemical Company, Midland, MI,(800) 232-2436. 5.Firestone Building Products Company, Carmel, IN,(800) 428-4442. 6.Guardian Fiberglass Incorporated,Albion, MI,(800) 748-0035. 7.Johns Manville Insulations, Denver, CO,(800) 654-3103. 8.NRG Division/Johns Manville, Portland, ME,(800) 343-1285. 9.Owens-Corning, Toledo, OH,(800) 438-7465. 10.Pactiv Building Products, Atlanta, GA(800) 241-4402. 2.2REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 07210-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteris- tics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-burning characteristics and other methods specified. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2.3MATERIALS A.Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665 mineral fiber blanket insulation. 1.Unfaced Glass Fiber: Type I (blankets without membrane facing); with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectivelypassing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2.Faced, Glass-Fiber: TypeIII (blankets with reflective membrane facing), ClassA (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spreadindex of 25 or less); Category1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face. 3.Sound Attenuation Insulation (Sound Batts): Unfaced glass fiber insulation as specified above. 4.Provide batt insulation by one of the following manufacturers: a.CertainTeed Corporation. b.Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. c.Johns Manville. d.Owens Corning. B.Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 2.4ACCESSORIES A.Tape: Polyethylene or polyester self-adhering type; two inches wide. B.Adhesive: Waterproof type, acceptable to manufacturer of insulation board. Adhesive VOC shall be within the limits of not greater than 70 g/L in accordance with the California’s South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule No. 1168. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1PREPARATION A.Batt Insulation: 1.Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation. 2.Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested. 3.2INSTALLATION -BATT INSULATION A.Install batt insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, without gaps or voids. B.Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. C.Install insulation with factory applied membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane. Attach insulation in place to framing; tape seal butt ends and lapped side flanges. Tape seal tears or cuts in membrane. 3.3INSTALLATION -INSULATION AT EXTERIORMASONRY WALLS A.Install insulation as shownon the Drawings. 3.4SCHEDULES A.Provide insulation types as scheduled below and as indicated on Drawings. CONDITIONTYPE OF INSULATIONTHICKNESS 07210-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Exterior Wall, Soffits, & Ceil-Faced Batt Insulation 3-1/2 inches (R=11) or 6 inches (R=19) ingas shown; or as required to fill cavity. Interior Partitions Unfaced Batt Insulation3-1/2 inches or 6 inches as Shown. Sound AttenuationUnfaced Batt Insulation3-1/2 inches or 6 inches as Shown. Batt Insulation at Roof DeckUnfaced Glass Fiber Batt6.0 inches (R=19) (above ceilings) Foil Faced Glass Fiber Batt (where exposed to view) END OF SECTION 07210-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning022417 SECTION 07243-WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Field applied water-drainage exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over sheathing or masonry units. 2.Resurfacing of existing exterior insulation and finish systems. a.Cleaning of existing system. b.Repair of existing system surface defects. c.Application of new finish coating. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 05400 -Cold Formed Metal Framing: Framing for gypsum sheathing substrate. 2.Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Non-structural plywood panels used for sheathing. 3.Section 07900 -Joint Sealers: Joint sealants used in conjunction with exterior insulation and finish system. 4.Section 09250 -Gypsum Board: Gypsum sheathing. 5.Section 09900 -Paint and Coatings: Field applied paint finish. 6.Section 10200 –Vents and Louvers: Soffit vents. 7.Appendix B –Testing, Inspection and ObservationbyOwner: Procedures for inspection, testing, and documentation by Owner furnished testing laboratory. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1.ANSI 99-A-Exterior Insulation And Finish Systems (EIFS) C.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTMC578-Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation 2.ASTMC1063-Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster 3.ASTM E 84 -Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4.ASTMD1784-Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds 5.ASTM E 2430 -Expanded Polystyrene ("EPS") Thermal Insulation Boards For Use In Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems ("EIFS"). 6.ASTM E 2568 -PB Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems. D.ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) 1.ICC-ES AC212 -Acceptance Criteria For Water-Resistive Coatings Used As Water-Resistive Barriers Over Exterior Sheathing 2.ICC-ES AC235 -Acceptance Criteria For EIFS Clad Drainage Wall Assemblies E.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1.NFPA268-Standard Test Method For Determining Ignitibility Of Exterior Wall Assemblies Using A Radiant Heat Energy Source 2.NFPA259-Standard Test Method For Potential Heat Of Building Materials 1.3SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 07243-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Section includes water-drainage exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over sheathing or masonry substrate. 1.4PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Bond Integrity: System shall be free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions. B.Weathertightness: System shall be resistant to water penetration from exterior into water-drainage EIFS and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and assemblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish, and including a means that allows water entering into an EIFS assembly to drain to the exterior. C.Physical Properties, Structural Performance, and Drainage Provisions: Comply with ICC-ESAC235 or ANSI99-A. 1.5SUBMITTALS A.Comply with the requirements of Section 01330. B.Evaluation Reports: Submit ICC-ES report for drainable EIFS system (including insulation), from applicable model code organization. 1.6CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Comply with the requirements of Section 01770. B.Contractor Installation Declaration Forms: Include completed Exhibit A and Exhibit B forms (included at the end of this section) signed by EIFS Contractor and Sealant Installer. 1.7QUALITY ASSURANCE A.ApplicatorQualifications: Single firm, approved in writing by system manufacturer, employing trained workers familiar with current installation methods and materials. Applicator shall have not less than 2 years documented experience in the installation of the specific drainable system to be installed. B.Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components. C.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.Full-Scale Diversified Fire Test: Per ASTME108 modified for testing vertical walls. 2.Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS per NFPA268. 3.Potential Heat: Acceptable level per NFPA259. 4.Surface-Burning Characteristics: Insulation board, adhesives, base coats, and finish coats with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or less, per ASTME84. 1.8PRODUCT DELIVERY A.Deliver materials to site in original unopened packages, clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand name, and description of contents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS 07243-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide EIFS by one of the following: 1.BASF Wall Systems, Inc, , Jacksonville, FL, (Formerly Senergy, Inc & Degussa Wall Systems)(800) 221- 9255. Contact: Steve DonFrancesco (770) 335-5260. 2.Dryvit Systems, Inc., Warwick, RI, (800) 556-7752 3.Omega Products Intl. Inc., (800) 600-6634, Los Angeles, CA 4.Parex, Inc., Redan, GA, (800) 537-2739. 5.Sto Industries, Atlanta, GA, (800) 221-2397, Abe Koury. 2.2PRODUCTS A.Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of 01600. 2.3MATERIALS A.Applicability: Provide materials and EIFS components standard with the manufacturer for the product systems listed and selected for the project. Products listed below shall apply to the extent applicable to the system to be installed. B.Compatibility: Provide water-resistive coating, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base-and finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and with substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project. C.Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use as water/weather- resistive barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and performance criteria of ICC- ESAC212. D.Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, fully self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt and polyethylene- film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writingby EIFS manufacturer. E.Drainage Mat: Three-dimensional, nonwoven, entangled filament, nylon or plastic; or woven or fused, self-furring, PVC mesh lath mat designed to drain incidental moisture by gravity; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturerwith manufacturer's standard application method suitable for intended substrate. F.Spacers: Closed-cell polyethylene or woven or fused, self-furring, PVC mesh lath furring strips; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturerwith manufacturer's standard application method suitable for intended substrate. G.Insulation Adhesive: Standard formulation for EIFS system used. H.Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTMC578, TypeI; EIFS manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board." 1.Channeled Board Insulation: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-fabricated profile with linear, vertical drainage channels, slots, or waves on the back side of board. I.Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh; complying with ASTMD578 and the following: 1.Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 2.Heavy-Duty Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 20 oz./sq. yd.. 3.Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd. 4.Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 5.Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd. J.Base-Coat Materials: Standard formulation. K.Primer: Factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer.Primer for use when resurfacing EIFS previously coated with 07243-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 gloss urethane coating shall be as specifically recommended by the EIFS manufacturer. L.Skim Coat (For resurfacing of existing EIFS where shown on Drawings): 1.Skim Coat, by BASF Wall Systems, Inc. (Senergy). 2.Freestyle or NCB, by Dryvit Systems, Inc. 3.302 ABC-N1 Base Coat & Adhesive, by ParexLahabra, Inc. 4.RFP, by Sto Industries. M.Finish-Coat Materials: Factory-mixed, standard acrylic-based coating. 1.Integral Color: Dryvit standard #310 "China White." 2.Paint Finish: Field applied paint finish as specified in Section 09900. Color as shown on the drawings and as defined within Section 09900. a.Texture: Dryvit standard "Sandblast". If new Exterior Insulation and Finish System is installed adjacent to existing Exterior Insulation and Finish System with finish coat texture other than that specified, consult with the Wal-Mart Construction Manager for finish coat to be installed at new adjacent Exterior Insulation and Finish System. N.Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener suitable for substrate. O.Trim Accessories: Mmanufactured from UV-stabilized PVC and complying with ASTMD1784 and ASTMC1063. P.Joint Sealant: Joint sealant shall be as specified in Section 07900 unless otherwise required by the EIFS manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C.Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry. 3.2PREPARATION A.Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coats on other work. B.Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and deterioration of substrates. C.Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation. 3.3INSTALLATION A.Comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to type of substrate indicated. B.Water-Resistive Coatings: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and to provide water- /weather-resistive barrier. C.Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to shed water; seal at 07243-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 openings, penetrations, terminations, and where indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to protect wall assembly from degradation. Prime substrates, if required, and install flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions and details. D.Trim: Apply trim accessories at locations indicated on Drawings. E.Drainage Mat: Apply wrinkle free, continuously, with edges over water-/weather-resistive barrier according to manufacturer's written instructions. F.Board Insulation: Attach to substrate. G.Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, where expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind EIFS; where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction; and where wall height changes 1.Do not exceed manufacturer's maximum recommended area. 2.Coordinate placement of additional joints with Wal-Mart Construction Manager. H.Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation and foam shapesin minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inchdry-coat thickness. I.Reinforcing Mesh: 1.Place reinforcing mesh over insulation andsecure in place with base coating. 2.Completely embed mesh in wet base coat, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing- mesh color and pattern are not visible. 3.Apply heavy weight mesh in conjunction with standard weight mesh in areas below 8 feet above ground level. J.Skim Coat (Resurfacing): 1.Clean existing system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2.Inspect surface of existing system in presence of manufacturer’s technical representative and make any required repairs in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions. 3.Prime existing EIFS surfaces previously coated with gloss urethane coating as recommended by EIFS manufacturer prior to application of skim coat. 4.Prior to application of skim coat over existing EIFS with urethane coating, perform bond test to substrate as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. 5.Apply skim coating material as recommended by manufacturer at the minimum thickness required to fill in the existing surface texture and provide a flat, smooth surface ready to accept final textured finish. a.If existing, maintain rustication joints clear of skim coat. 6.Allow to dry as recommended by manufacturer. 7.Correct any imperfections that may telegraph through the finish coat. K.Finish Coat: Apply over dry base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations. L.Form 3/4 inch drip rustication joints straight and true to line, as indicated on Drawings. 3.4JOINTS A.Install sealant at joints within system and where system abuts dissimilar materials. Apply joint sealant using sealant type, application method, and installation procedures in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation and Section 07900 and the EIFS manufacturers evaluation report. Do not seal drainage weep holes or outlets. 3.5REPAIR OF DAMAGED OR NON-CONFORMING WORK A.Repair or correct installed work which is damaged during construction or is otherwise incomplete or not conforming to specification reqirements. Repair and correction shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s written and published 07243-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 instructions and shall be at no additional cost. 3.6FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Except as specified as mandatory, field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. Owner T&I specified in Appendix B shall not preclude Contractor’s responsibility to perform similar routine, necessary, and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. B.Manufacturer’s On-Site Representative: A representative of the manufacturer shall visit the site prior to and during the installation of the EIFS system. Site visit shall include inspection of substrate, installation, and verification of procedure as necessary to attain assurance for the certification statement included in Exhibit A at the end of this Section. 3.7OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION (T&I) A.The Owner will perform testing and inspection as specified in Appendix B (Section 07243). END OF SECTION 07243-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 EXHIBIT A EIFS Contractor Installation Declaration Form EIFS Contractor Name: Completion Date: THE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) INSTALLED ON THE STRUCTURE LOCATED AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED BELOW CONFORMS: TO RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION PRACTICES AND (Insert EIFS Manufacturer Name Here) FOR________________________________________ AND SECTION(S) OF ICC (Insert EIFS System name here) (Insert Appropriate Section Numbers Here) EVALUATION REPORT NO. _____________________________ (Insert Applicable Report Number Here) Address of Structure:Product Component Names: Adhesive(s): Fasteners (Mech.): Base Coat: Reinforcing Fabric: Finish Coat (s): INSTALLATIONCONFORMS A.Substrate Type and Tolerance B.EIFS 1.Adhesive and/or Fasteners 2.Insulation 3.Reinforcing Fabric 4.Base Coat 5.Finish C.The information entered above is offered in testimony that the EIFS installation conforms with the EIFS manufacturer's installation methods and procedures, and the EIFS manufacturers ES report. D.An installation card shall be received from the Sealant Installer indicating that the sealant installation conforms with the EIFS evaluation report and sealant manufacturer's installation methods and procedures must accompany this declaration. EIFS Contractor Company Name and Address: Signature of Responsible Officer: Typed Name and Title of Officer: Telephone Number: cc:Original:Building Department(Must be submitted with sealant installer declaration.) Copies:EIFS Manufacturer Wal-Mart (include in Final Closeout Submittals) END OF FORM 07243-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 EXHIBIT B EIFS Sealant Contractor Installation Declaration Form Sealant Installer Name: Completion Date: THE SEALANT INSTALLED IN CONJUNCTION WITH AN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) INSTALLED ON THE STRUCTURE LOCATED AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED BELOW CONFORMS: TO and RECOMMENDED (Insert EIFS Manufacturer Name Here)(Insert Sealant Manufacturer Name Here) INSTALLATION PRACTICES AND SECTION(S) OF ICC (Insert Appropriate Section Numbers Here) EVALUATION REPORT NO. . (Insert Applicable Report Number Here) Address of Structure:Product Component Names: Primer(s): Sealers: Bond Breakers: Sealant Materials: INSTALLATIONCONFORMS A.Designer's requirements, detailsand instructions B.Sealant Manufacturer's detailsand Requirements C.Exterior Insulation Manufacturer'sRequirements D.The information entered above is offered in testimony that the Sealant installation conforms with the Sealant manufacturer's installation methods and procedures, and the EIFS manufacturers evaluation report. Sealant Installer Company Name and Address: Signature of Responsible Officer: Typed Name and Title of Officer: Telephone Number: () cc:Original:Building Department(Must be submitted with EIFS contractor declaration.) Copies:EIFS Manufacturer EIFS Contractor Sealant Manufacturer Wal-Mart (include in Final Closeout Submittals) END OF FORM 07243-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Planning052920 SECTION 07530 -ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Modifications to existing roofing and flashing system for installation of signs, conduit, equipment, and piping. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers. 2.Section 07620 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sheet metal fascia and edgetrim, counter flashings, and other sheet metal. 3.Section 07721 -Manufactured Curbs: Curbs for roof penetrations. 4.Section 07900 -Joint Sealers. 5.Appendix B -Inspection, Testing, and Observation by Owner. Procedures for inspection, testing, and documentation by Owner furnished testing laboratory. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.ASTM International: 1.ASTM C 1289 -Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. 2.ASTM D 4637 -EPDM Sheet Used In Single-Ply Roof Membrane. 3.ASTM D 4434 -Polyvinyl Chloride Sheet Roofing. 4.ASTM D 6878 -Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing. C.Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM): 1.FM Approvals Building Materials Approval Guide, Chapter 3 -Approved Combinations and Assemblies 2.FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28-Design Wind Loads. 3.FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29-Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Components. 4.FM Approval Standard 4450 -Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Roofs. 5.FM Approval Standard 4470 -Class 1 Roof Covers. D.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1.UL -Roofing Materials and Systems Directory. 2.UL 790 -Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials. 3.UL 1256 -Fire Test of Roof Deck Construction. 1.3SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Single Ply Membrane Roofing System: Single ply membrane roofing system consisting of insulation on metal deck with 60 mil reinforced membrane mechanically fastened. B.Flashingand Waterproofing Membranes: 60 mil reinforced membrane, fully adhered, as defined herein and indicated on the drawings. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Comply with the requirements of Section 01330. Submit required submittals within 30 days after contract award. Submittals shall be available at all times to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. B.Product Data: Submit Product Data and MSDS sheets for accepted system showing compliance with the specified 07530-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 physical properties. C.Shop Drawing: Submit Shop Drawings showing: 1.Fastener patterns to meet uplift requirements. 2.Layouts for Crickets and saddles. 3.Walk pad layouts. 4.Details required for completion but not shown and drawings. 5.Techniques for nighttime or weather tie offs. D.Closeout Submittals: Comply with the requirements of Section 01770. 1.Letter from manufacturer stating that existing warranty has not been voided by alterations performed under this contract. 2.Roofing Contractor’s warranty for work on existing roofing performed under this contract. 1.5REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.Roof Assembly: Comply with FM Approvals Building Materials Approval Guide or Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Roofing Materials and Systems Directory as specified: 1.Factory MutualProvide roofing assembly meeting Class 1A -90requirements for fire resistance and wind uplift in accordance with FM Approvals Standard 4470 and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 and FM Global Loss PreventionData Sheet 1-29 2.Provide roof assembly meeting requirements of UL 1256 for Flame Spread developed from underside of deck and roof assembly meeting requirements of FM Approvals Standard 4450 for Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Roofs (construction materials calorimeter). B.Approved Roofing Subcontractors: Employ one of the following subcontractors to perform work of this Section. No substitutions allowed. rhuntley@bakerroofing.com; cmessina@bakerroofing.com; jaelyn.smith@bakerroofing.com; Baker Roofing CompanyRaleighNCJaelyn Smith919-576-4590hjones@bakerroofing.com cinc0053@tampabay.rr.com; Cedar Cove IncCrystal RiverFLBobby Casey352-564-8319cedarcove@yahoo.com higdillinger@cirsco.com; scottdillinger@cirsco.com; Cirsco Commercial Hig Rodriguez jpugh@cirsco.com; IndustrialTampaFLDillinger813-655-8080nbartley@cirsco.com Clifford-Lee & AssociatesBentonvilleARJimmy Phillips479-464-9255mail@clifford-lee.com CP Rankin Inc. Roof craig@cprankin.com; Management & service@cprankin.com; ContractingChalfontPACraig Rankin866-766-3322swilson@cprankin.com Frost Roofing, Inc.WapakonetaOHChad Dunlap419-739-2701info@frost-roofing.com randy@hollisroofing.com; Hollis Roofing IncColumbusMSRandy West479-464-9255hriservice@hollisroofing.com J3 Construction IncChicagoILJessica Reynolds773-930-4038walmart@oharasson.com Jolly Roofing Tabi Jolly- & Contracting Co IncColliervilleTNAgaoglu615-927-4112dispatch@jollyroofing.com Low Slope SolutionsSt PetersburgFLDonna Holup727-744-3739workorders@lowslopesolutions.com Mid-South Roof Systems service@msrs.com; IncAtlantaGAGeoff Mitchell404-361-5154dawnb@msrs.com;bradb@msrs.com Mint Roofing IncLong LakeMNGavin Tugana952-473-8080maintenance@mintroofing.com National Roofing PartnersCoppellTXKim Baxter866-537-6034service@nationalroofingpartners.com 07530-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 servicecenter@nationsroof.com; Nations Roof LLCMobileALNate Lee800-444-7663nlee@nationsroof.com 828-687-7767 North American RoofingTampaFLCurt Thomas828-551-3920service@naroofing.com Nu-Tec Roofing Contractors, LLCIndianapolisINJeff Bolander317-726-5191walmartleaks@nutecroofing.com Partner's Commercial Roofing, LLCHoustonTXColton Dutton713-802-1111leaks@partnersroofing.com Pinkston-Tadd, Inc.DekalbILBill Ringmeier815-739-0070billr@pinkstontadd.com jr@rbroof.com; vanessa@rbroof.com; teresa@rbroof.com; tom@rbroof.com; R&B Roofing LLCGarlandTXJonathan Reader214-221-5000erika@rbroof.com RCI Services, LLC (Roofing)ManchesterGABeth Kimbel479-295-7718rciservices@rciservices-nc.com reyessingleply@live.com; jerardo@reyessingleply.com; Reyes Single Ply nreyessingleply@outlook.com Roofing Masters CorpRialtoCARaul Reyes909-258-2857francisco@reyessingleply.com 573-624-5065rickshipman@rickshipman.com; Rick Shipman 573-820-5758, dinagrubbs@rickshipman.com; ConstructionDexterMOBud ShipmanX121budshipman@rickshipman.com info@rivertown.pro; River Town Painting CoGrandvilleMIMatt Grandy616-530-7461rivertown98@aol.com RL Bishop & Assoc. Inc.ShilohGATyler Bishop706-846-3121service@rlbishop.net RoofconnectSheridanARKimberly Speer870-942-5613walmart@roofconnect.com jeanetter@singleplysystems.com; jamesr@singleplysystems.com; natec@singleplysystems.com; Single-Ply Systems, Inc.BloomingtonMNJames Russell608-633-3626sps.service.request@gmail.com 1.6DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Contractor shall make arrangements for delivery of materials in manufacturer's original unopened containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact. B.Contractor shall store materials in weather-protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. Storage requirements for insulation are as follows: 1.Cut or remove plastic shipping wrap from insulation. 2.Cover with tarpaulin, shield from moistures and ultraviolet rays. 3.Elevate minimum of 4 inches above substrate. 4.Secure to resist high winds. 5.Distribute insulation stored on roof deck to prevent concentrated loads. 6.Do not install wet insulation. Insulation shall be thoroughly dry prior to installation. C.Store cements, primers, and caulks in heated area above 40 degrees F during cold weather and in area below 80 degrees F in warm weather. D.Protect adjacent materials and surfaces against damage from roofing work. Do not store materials on completed roofing. 07530-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.7ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Follow industry standards for environment requirements including, but not limited to, the following: 1.Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather. When air temperature is expected to fall below 40 degrees F, follow specified Cold Weather Application Procedures as specified herein. 2.Do not apply finished roofing system to wet, damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is occurring. 3.Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same day. 1.8SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.Contractor shall coordinate the Work with installation of associated metal counter flashings specified under other sections as the Work of this Section proceeds. B.Contractor shallcomplete installation of base flashing at roof curbs prior to setting roof top equipment. 1.9WARRANTY A.Verify with Owner if a warranty is in effect for the existing roofing system. Do not void warranty for existing roof by performance of work under this contract. 1.Notify roofing system manufacturer of required alterations to existing warranted roof system, in form required by manufacturer. 2.Prior to starting alterations, photograph the existing conditions, in compliance with roofing manufacturer’s requirements. Upon completion of alterations, photograph altered roof conditions in accordance with roofing manufacturer’s requirements. 3.Submit to roofing system manufacturer all information required to maintain warranty, including description of work, drawings, photographs, specifications, etc. 4.Obtain inspection services of existing roofing system manufacturer’s representative as necessary to ensure that warranty remains in effect after completion of work under this contract. 5.Obtain statement from roofing system manufacturer that original warranty remains in effect after completion of modifications. B.Provide a warranty issued by Roofing Contractor against loss of weathertightness for work on existing roofing performed under this contract,commencing at date of Substantial Completion, for a period of not less than 2 years. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURER A.Acceptable manufacturers: Verify existing roofing system manufacturer with Owner . Provide materials acceptable to existing roofing system manufacturer and as required to maintain existing roofing system warranty. B.Manufacturer Contact Information: 1.Carlisle SynTec Systems, Steve Benjamin, National Accounts Technical Manager,(413)262-8928, steven.benjamin@syntec.carlise.com. 2.Firestone Building Products Company, Indianapolis, IN, Chris Mincey, National Accounts Representative, (800) 428-4442 x53236. 3.Johns Manville Roofing Systems,A.J. Maijala, Manager, Preferred Accounts,(303)978-2176 or (303) 898- . 0027, aj.maijala@jm.com 4.GAF, Rich Justinn, Strategic Accounts Manager, (678) 920-9237, richard.justinn@gaf.com. 2.2SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Roofing System: Verify existing roofing system type with Owner. Provide roofing system materials of type and manufacturer to match existing system, conforming to the requirements specified herein. 2.3MEMBRANE PHYSICAL PROPERTIES 07530-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.TPO: Thermoplastic single ply membrane composed of thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) sheet as specified for the specific product hereinbefore and reinforced with polyester scrim conforming to ASTM D 6878. 1.Membrane Type: Reinforced, 60 mil thickness, white (match existing membrane color), 8 ft. maximum sheet width. 2.4FLASHING MEMBRANE A.Flashing Membrane:Reinforced and non-reinforced membrane and pressure-sensitive flashing by Roofing System manufacturer, minimum 60 mils, specifically designed for use in flashing at perimeters and wall, and around projections through roofing system. 2.5WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE A.Waterproofing Membrane: Membrane waterproofing formed into uniform, flexible sheets by Roofing System manufacturer. Reinforced, 60 mils nominal thickness. B.Waterproofing Flashing: Reinforced and non-reinforced membrane and pressure-sensitive flashing by Roofing System manufacturer, minimum 60 mils, specifically designed for use in flashing at perimeters and wall, and around projections through roofing system. 2.6ROOF INSULATION A.Isocyanurate Foam Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board insulation, ASTMC1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces, with an LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance) value of 17.4 for 3.0” thicknessbased on ASTM C1303 and CAN/ULC S770. 1.Manufacturers: a.HPH, by Carlisle. b.ISO 95+ GL, by Firestone. c.ENRGY3 or ISO3 by Johns Manville. d.Products meeting the specified requirements by other manufacturers as recommended by the roofing membrane manufacturer. B.Insulation Assembly: 1.Insulation: IsocyanurateFoam, match existing insulation thickness if attaching to existing roof area, or 3.0 inches thick if new roof is isolated from existing roof. C.Roof Curb Insulation: Polyisocyanurate Foam; both faces covered with glass fiber felt; thickness to match wood nailer. D.Tapered Insulation: Provide crickets, saddles, and tapered insulation of same material as roof insulation; taper to the following slopes: 1.Crickets and Saddles: 1/2 inch per foot (1/4 inch per foot positive slope). 2.Insulation Installed to Counter slope the Roof Structure: 1/2 inch per foot. 3.Edge Taper Insulation: Adjacent to gutter assembly, slope at minimum rate of 1/2 inch per foot. Provide insulation having a starting thickness of 1 inch, tapering insulation up to match nominal roof insulation thickness. 2.7ROOF PENETRATION FLASHING AND SEALS A.Molded Pipe Flashing: Pre-molded flexible pipe flashing as recommended and supplied by the roofing manufacturer. 2.8ACCESSORIES A.Provide accessories as shown on the drawings and manufacturer’s system accessories for a complete and warranted Roofing System, including, but not limited to, the following: 1.Weathered Membrane Cleaner. 2.Lap Sealant. 07530-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.Bonding Adhesive. 4.Membrane Fasteners. 5.Termination Bar. 6.Insulation Fasteners. 7.Walkway / Isolation Pads. 8.Preformed Accessories including Pipe Flashings. 9.Preformed Corner Patching. 10.Draw Bands. 11.Foam Filler Insulation: Polyurethane Expanding Foam as defined within Section 07900. 12.3-inch & 6-inch in-seam tape. 13.Pressure-sensitive flashing. 14.Primer. 15.In-seam plates. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips, nailing strips, and reglets are in place. Verify deck is supported and tightly secured. B.Verify surfaces are dry and free of water, snow, and ice. \]Beginning installation means acceptance of substrate 3.2PREPARATION A.Provide covers and other means of protection as necessary to protect building surfaces against damage during roofing work. B.Where Work will continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces from damage. 3.3ROOF INSULATION INSTALLATION A.Place long edge of boards parallel to deck flutes, forming joint over solid bearing. Lay insulation units with long edge joints continuous and end joints staggered. Mechanically fasten insulation, through fire resistive layer if specified, to deck with FM approved fasteners and plates in accordance with requirements of FM. 1.Install fasteners using drill with torque clutch; other types of drills will not be permitted. 2.In no case shall the number of fasteners be less than indicated in approved submittals. B.Lay insulation boards to moderate contact without forcing joints. Cut insulation to fit neatly around protrusions through roof. At parapet walls, cope insulation around protrusions and embed plates; butt tight to wall, sealing conditioned building. 1.Fill gaps over 1/4 inch wide with Foam Filler Insulation. After foam sets and before installation of membrane, trim foam flush with insulation surface. C.Place roof crickets and tapered insulation to required slope pattern in accordance with Contract Documents and manufacturer's instructions. D.Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in same day. E.Adhere a single layer of insulation to manufactured metal curbs with bonding cement. 3.4ROOFING MEMBRANE APPLICATION A.Mechanically Fastened Membrane: 1.Starting at low point of roof surface, run membrane perpendicular to roof slope. Unroll membrane over prepared substrate, lapping adjoining sheets as recommended by manufacturer. 07530-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.Mechanically fasten membrane using manufacturer's fastening system. Install fasteners in accordance with submitted engineered layout pattern to resist specified wind uplift. 3.Install fasteners using drill depth sensing or torque limiting screw guns to limit under / over drive of fasteners. a.Drill motors and other non-limiting drivers shall not be used. 4.Seam Sealing a.TPO Heat-weld seams according to the system manufacturer’s recommendations, and with a minimum weld width of 1-1/2 inches. B.Cold Weather Application Procedures: When air temperatureis expected to fall below 40 degrees F, follow Cold Weather Application Procedures as follows: 1.Store materials in heated storage units prior to installation. Rotate adhesive, cement, and sealant containers to maintain their temperature above 40 degrees F. 2.Allow membrane to relax until no wrinkles are visible. 3.Allow adequate time for solvents in cements to flash off. Check dryness of applied cements before sealing joints. 4.Verify that frost, dew, and other forms of moisture have evaporated prior to covering insulation with membrane to prevent entrapment of moisture within finished roof system. 3.5WATER CUTOFFS AND WEATHER PROTECTION A.Install water cut-offs at endof day's operation to seal insulation and edge of roof membrane from moisture entry. If inclementweather appears imminent during roofing application, cease operations and protect deck, insulation, flashings, penetrations and membrane from moisture infiltration with water cutoffs. Insulation and roofing materials not so protected prior to inclement weather will be considered damaged and will be cause for rejection. B.Remove water cut-offs and other temporary weather protections prior to continuing roofing work. Remove materials that have been subject to moisture damage and return deck to a clean, dry condition before proceeding with roofing operations. Remove damaged materials from job site. C.The water cut-offs and weather protection shall not be considered a part of the final roof system specified. 3.6MEMBRANE FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES A.Apply flexible flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements using manufacturer's standard peel and stick flashing. 1.Reinforced Flashing Membrane: Where conditions permit, flash penetrations and walls with reinforced flashing membrane. 2.Uncured Flashing: Limit use of uncured flashing to overlay vertical seams as required at angle changes, to flash inside and outside corners, scuppers, and other penetrations or unusually shaped wallsas approved by the manufacturer. B.Roof Penetrations: 1.Molded Pipe Flashing: Install where configuration of penetration will permit. C.Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating membrane. D.Fasten termination bars at 12 inches on center or less to maintain constant compression. E.Isolation Pads: Install isolation pads at pipe supports. F.Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads as shown on the drawings.Maximum pad section length shall be 10 ft. with three inch spacing between pad sections, unless otherwiseindicated on Drawings.Adhere pads to roofing system to prevent displacement in maximum anticipated design wind velocity and to allow drainage of moisture from beneath pads.Install pads to allow roof surface drainage without pondingwater.Install pads after adjacent equipment installation. 3.7WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE A.Waterproofing Membrane: Install waterproofing membrane to be fully adhered to parapet using bonding adhesive as recommended by membrane manufacturer. Run membrane waterproofing over top of parapet and turn down 07530-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 front side of parapet 3inches. 1.Provide continuous weather tight seal from 3" below parapet cap, over parapet, down interior face, and onto roof surface. 2.Conceal adhesive on exterior face of parapet with waterproofing. B.Waterproofing Flashing: Apply waterproofing membrane flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements using manufacturer's peel and stick flashing. 1.Reinforced Waterproofing Flashing: Where conditions permit, flash walls with reinforced waterproofing flashing or as required by the manufacturer. 2.Uncured Flashing: Limit use of uncured flashing to overlay vertical seams as required at angle changes, to flash inside and outside corners, scuppers, and other penetrations or unusually shaped walls where use of . reinforced waterproofing flashing is not practical or as required by the manufacturer 3.8FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Except as specified as mandatory, field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. Owner T&I specified in Appendix B shall not preclude Contractor’s responsibility to perform similar routine, necessary, and customarytesting and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. B.Manufacturer’s Site Inspections: 1.Provide site inspection and reports by the manufacturer's representative as required by the manufacturer to maintain the existing warranty. C.Correct identified defects or irregularities. 3.9OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION (T&I) A.The Owner will perform testing and inspection as specified in Appendix B (Section 07530). 3.10CLEANING A.Replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by Work of this Section. 3.11PROTECTION A.Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof installation, protect roof surfaces as recommended by roofing system manufacturer to protect manufacturer's warranty. END OF SECTION ROOF INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS TOOLS AND SUPPLIES:Provide the following during inspections: Copy of roof plan and copy and specifications. Tape measure, metal thickness gauge, paint for marking defects on roof, roof coring tools and repair materials, and seam probe (to be supplied by Roofing Contractor). INSPECTION PROCEDURE All undersigned parties shall accompany inspection. Inspect underside of decking from inside of building for proper insulation fastener spacing and sheet fastener spacing. Roof Inspection shall start at the parapet wall on the GM side of the building, at the back corner. Proceed around perimeter, (including TLE, Garden Center, etc). Continue across front wall and down sidewall at GR. 07530-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Inspect all metal flashings, base and wall flashings, perimeter attachments, perimeter membrane sheet layout, parapet waterproofing membrane, and all accessories. Inspect condition of paint on exterior walls. Inspect CMU for proper paint coverage. Inspect all painted metals for proper coverage. Inspect back wall gutter or internal drainage system. Inspect field of roof system, beginning approx. 10' from back wall, walking side to side of building. Inspect roof area no more than 10 feet on each side of walking paths, from back, to front of building. Inspect all checklist items at field seams, flashings, RTUs, mechanical equipment, skylights, refrigeration units, gas lines, expansion joints, crickets, walkpads, and other roof accessories. Mark defects on roof by paint markings and identify each defect using corresponding defect number. After roof inspection is complete FAX signed inspection form to Wal-Mart Construction Manager within 24 hours. COMPLETION OF CHECKLIST Answer each checklist item Yes or No. Mark “N/A” on checklist items which do not apply. Identify defects on the Wal-Mart Deviation Log. (www.bldgportal.com, enter username and password, select Deviation Log) Number each defect as follows: Identification Symbol-Checklist Item No.-Defect No. (E.g. MF-1-3) o Identification symbol and checklist item number shall correspond to the Roof Inspection Checklist. The o defect number shall be numbered in sequence for each checklist item. Complete all applicable information in the Deviation Log including the resolution of each item. 07530-9 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 ROOF INSPECTION CHECKLIST (GI) GENERAL : 1.Has the specified roof system been installed? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Has all construction materials, trash, and other debris been removed from the roof? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Have all punch list items been addressed and signed off? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Is there any visible physical damage to roof? YES___NO___N/A___ 5.Are the RTU's numbered so they can be seen from the roof hatch? YES___NO___N/A___ 6.Is the roof hatch painted? YES___NO___N/A___ 7.Is the any roofing mastic or other foreign substance on roof membrane? YES___NO___N/A___ (MF) MECHANICAL FASTENERS: (Check from inside building) 1.Is the insulation attachment pattern installed per manufacturers required spacing and pattern? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Is the membrane sheet attachment in the seams at minimum 12” inches o.c. orper manufacturers required spacing? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Are all seams mechanically attached? YES___NO___N/A___ (PF) PERIMETER WALL FLASHING Metal Flashing Types(Check all that apply) \[ \]Embedded edge metal \[ \]Metal cap flashing \[ \]Wall/Parapet \[ \]Coping \[ \]Other \[ \]Pre-finished metal \[ \]Painted metal. Paint condition: 1.Has the edge metal fascia been attached with fastener spacing in 3” o.c. staggered? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Is the edge metal fascia continuously attached to the cleat? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Is the edge metal lapped a minimum of 4”? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Have the laps been sealed? YES___NO___N/A___ 5.Is edge metal properly stripped into roof system? YES___NO___N/A___ 6.Has the metal been sealed at the flashing? YES___NO___N/A___ 7.Has the metal coping been fastened with neoprene gasket fasteners at 12” o.c.? YES___NO___N/A___ (PW) PARAPET WALL MEMBRANE 1.Is the membrane fully adhered in all areas to the parapet walls? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Are there any voids, wrinkles, or disbonded areas? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Has the termination bar been installed at the base flashing? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Is the base flashing run onto the roof membrane and seam sealant used? YES___NO___N/A___ 5.Are corner flashings installed? YES___NO___N/A___ 6.Are there any open seams? YES___NO___N/A___ 7.Is the membrane terminated and sealed at parapet end wall conditions? YES___NO___N/A___ 8.Are all parapet end walls fully painted or flashed? YES___NO___N/A___ (PA) PERIMETER MEMBRANE SHEETS ATTACHMENT 1.Have the required number perimeter sheets per system specification been installed? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Are the fasteners spaced per the manufacturers requirements? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Have T-Lap patches been installed at all T-joints? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Have seams been properly sealed? YES___NO___N/A___ (EW) EXTERIOR WALL PAINT (Inspect every 25’ minimum.) 1.Is wall painted/sealed? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Are there visible voids in the paint? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Cracks in blocks or open mortar joints? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Are walls painted behind downspouts? YES___NO___N/A___ 07530-10 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 DRAINAGE SYSTEM (Check all that apply) \[ \]Gutters and downspouts \[ \]Interior drains \[ \] Overflow drains \[ \] Overflow scuppers \[ \]Scuppers with leaders & downspouts \[ \] Overflow scuppers Specified gauge (Check all areas with gauge) Main roof area gauge TLE gauge Garden Center gauge Receiving gauge Other gauge (GD) GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 1.Is the specified type of metal installed? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Is the gutter sized as indicated on the drawings? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Is gutter holding water? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Is the gutter painted inside? YES___NO___N/A___ 5.Are gutter straps installed every 36” o.c.? YES___NO___N/A___ 6.Gutter expansion joints installed every 40’ maximum? YES___NO___N/A___ 7.Are the gutter outlets soldiered to the gutter? YES___NO___N/A___ 9.Are gutter brackets installed every 36” o.c.?(Inspect from the ground level) YES___NO___N/A___ 10.Are the downspouts the specified size and configuration? YES___NO___N/A___ 11.Are the downspout straps installed at top, center, and bottom? YES___NO___N/A___ 12.Are the downspouts spaced as called out in the documents? YES___NO___N/A___ 13.Havesplash blocks been installed? YES___NO___N/A___ 14.Have the downspouts been properly tied to the storm sewer? YES___NO___N/A___ 15.Are joints in gutter leaking? YES___NO___N/A___ 16.Are outlets in gutter leaking? YES___NO___N/A___ (RE) ROOF EDGE 1.Is gravel guard properly installed? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Is gravel guard properly stripped into roof system? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Is gravel guard prefinished or painted? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Is the gravel guard nailed at 3”o.c. staggered? YES___NO___N/A___ 6.Is roof edge ponding water? YES___NO___N/A___ (DR) INTERIOR DRAINS 1.Are the roof drains the specified diameter? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Are the overflow drains the specified diameter? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Does the roof drain outlet diameter match the diameter of the leader pipe? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Has the roof membrane been properly trimmed inside the roof drain? YES___NO___N/A___ 5.Is the roof drain free of debris and draining properly? YES___NO___N/A___ 6.Has the insulation been tapered around the roof drains? YES___NO___N/A___ 7.Have the roof drains been checked for leaks inside the store? YES___NO___N/A___ 8.Has the wire mesh and draw band been installed over the over flow drain outlet? YES___NO___N/A___ 9.Are the roof drain strainers in place? YES___NO___N/A___ 10.Does ponding exist? YES___NO___N/A___ (SC) SCUPPERS 1.Are scuppers the specified height and width? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Are the scuppers located directly in line with the primary and over flow drains? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Are they flush with the roof? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Does ponding exist? YES___NO___N/A___ 5.Has the scupper box been installed and sealed to the wall? YES___NO___N/A___ 6.Are scuppers properly flashed to roof system? YES___NO___N/A___ 07530-11 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 (JC) JIB CRANE 1.Is the jib crane located with unobstructed clear space below? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Does the jib crane appear to be usable in a safe manner? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Is safety chain installed? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Is the ladder safety chain installed? YES___NO___N/A___ 5.Is GFI outlet installed within 6’ reach of the jib hoist arm? YES___NO___N/A___ 6.Are walkway protection pads installed? YES___NO___N/A___ 7.Is parapet door in place (on raised parapet projects)? YES___NO___N/A___ (CM) CAMERA MOUNTS 1.Are mounts attached and sealed to parapet wall? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Are penetrations installed for each mount? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Are specified flashings and conduit used and installed at wire penetrations? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Is wiring for camera held off of the roof? YES___NO___N/A___ (RM) ROOF FIELD MEMBRANE: (Seams should be checked in random areas for proper seals and voids. No wrinkles in seams will be acceptable.) 1.Has maximum width field sheet been used? (7’ EPDM / 8’ TPO) YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Are all seams properly lapped and sealed? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Are T-lap patches in place at all T-Laps? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Are all edges of cut sheet sealed? YES___NO___N/A___ 5.Do wrinkles exist in any laps? YES___NO___N/A___ 6.Does any ponding exist in roof area? YES___NO___N/A___ 7.Is membrane shingled properly with the slope ofthe roof? YES___NO___N/A___ (RI) ROOF INSULATION 1. Is insulation the specified thickness? (To be checked when making roof cores.) YES___NO___N/A___ 2. Are there visible gaps in the insulation boards? YES___NO___N/A___ 3. Is there any ponding along horizontal insulation joints? YES___NO___N/A___ 4. Are there any voids or missing insulation? YES___NO___N/A___ (RTU) ROOF TOP UNITS & REFRIGERATION UNITS FLASHINGS: 1.Are base flashings fully adhered to curb? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Are corner flashings on curbs installed? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Are seams to roof membrane sealed with no voids or wrinkles? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Are crickets installed to divert water around unit? YES___NO___N/A___ 5.Are counterflashings installed and properly attached? YES___NO___N/A___ 6.Are walkpads installed as per the documents? YES___NO___N/A___ 7.Are condensation P-traps installed on all units? YES___NO___N/A___ (SK) SKYLIGHTS: 1.Are base flashings fully adhered to curb? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Are corner flashings on curbs installed? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Are seams to roof membrane sealed with no voids or wrinkles? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Are crickets installed to divert water around unit? YES___NO___N/A___ 5.Are counterflashings installed and properly attached? YES___NO___N/A___ 6.Are skylights attached to curbs at 12”o.c.? YES___NO___N/A___ 7.Do screws have neoprene washers? YES___NO___N/A___ 8.Are any cracks visible in domes? YES___NO___N/A___ 9.Is there moisture between domes? YES___NO___N/A___ 10.Are any of the units damaged? YES___NO___N/A___ 11.Are any of the corners open? YES___NO___N/A___ 07530-12 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 (GL) GAS LINES: 1.Are gas lines painted? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Is blocking spaced under line at 8’ o.c max.? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Is blocking located within 2’ of RTU? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Is blocking located within 1’-6” of each corner? YES___NO___N/A___ 5.Are protection pads under each block? YES___NO___N/A___ 6.Are protection pads the correct size and fully adhered? YES___NO___N/A___ 7.Are pipe clamps correct sizes and installed per the documents? YES___NO___N/A___ 8.Are gas pipe dirt legs touching roof? YES___NO___N/A___ (EJ) ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS 1.Is the expansion joint installed? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Is the joint properly terminated at the parapet at the front? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Is the joint properly terminated at the rear? YES___NO___N/A___ 4.Is the joint properly flashed to roof system? YES___NO___N/A___ 5.Are there any open seams? YES___NO___N/A___ (MI) MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 1.Are soil stacks properly flashed and clamps installed? YES___NO___N/A___ 2.Are roof jacks properly flashedand collars sealed? YES___NO___N/A___ 3.Are protection pads under support? YES___NO___N/A___ ATTENDED BY: GENERAL CONTRACTOR__________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ (Printed name and title) ROOFING CONTRACTOR__________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ (Printed name and title) MANUFACTURERS REP.__________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ (Printed name and title) OWNER’SCONST MGR._________________________________________________ _________________________________________________ (Printed name and title) STORE MANAGER_________________________________________________ _________________________________________________ (Printed name and title) 07530-13 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Planning092818 SECTION 07620 -SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Fascia and roof edge trim. 2.Counterflashing over base flashing. 3.Metal parapet cap. 4.Door hoods. 5.Refrigeration line hood. 6.Curb covers. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 04200 –Unit Masonry Assemblies: Metal reglets for masonry. 2.Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers. 3.Section 07530 -Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Roof penetration flashing and seals. 4.Section 07900 -Joint Sealers. 5.Section 09900 -Paints and Coatings. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1.AAMA 621 -Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. C.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM A 653 -Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvan- nealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2.ASTM A 755/A -Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 3.ASTM A 792/A -Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process 4.ASTM B 749 –Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products 5.ASTM D 226 -Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 6.ASTM D 523-Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss 7.ASTM D 4586 -Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free. D.National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): 1.NRCA -Low Slope Roofing Manual. E.Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 1.SMACNA -Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Fifth Edition, 1993. F.Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 1.SSPC-Paint 12 -Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film). 2.SSPC-Paint 20 Type II -Zinc Rich Primers -Organic. 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform work in accordance with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and NRCA "Low Slope Roofing Manual" standard details and requirements. 07620-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Supplier Certification: Provide certification from galvanized sheet steel supplier stating that materials conform to ATSM A 653, G90 hot-dipped galvanized steel. 1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Stack preformed material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. B.Prevent contact with materials during storage that may cause discoloration, staining, or damage. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1SHEET MATERIALS A.Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653 Commercial Quality and Lock-Forming Quality, G90 coating designation hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized for painting where exposed to view from ground level. Sheet metal gages shall be as shown or as follows where not shown: 1.Flashing and Counter Flashing: 24 gage. 2.Fascia and Edge Trim: 24 gage. 3.Door Hood: 18 gage. 4.Curb-Mounted Refrigeration Line Hood: 22 gage. 5.Curb Cover: 20 gage. 2.2ACCESSORIES A.Fasteners: Galvanized steel finish exposed fasteners to match flashing metal. Furnish exposed fasteners with soft EPDM washers as manufactured by the following: 1.Kwik-ProScrews, by Hilti. 2.Trugrip GT, by ITW Buildex. B.Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. C.Sealing Mastic: Single component gun grade butyl or polyurethane sealant as recommended by roofing manufac- turer. D.Bituminous Coating: SSPC -Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat. E.Draw Band: Stainless steel. F.Underlayment: 1.Asphalt Saturated Felt: ASTM D 266; No. 30 pound asphalt saturated organic roofing felt, nonperforated. G.Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-Paint 20 Type II. 2.3FABRICATION A.Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B.Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, interlockable with sheet. C.Form pieces in longest possible lengths. D.Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. E.Fabricate corners to form one piece with minimum 18 inches long legs; rivet for rigidity. F.Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. 07620-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 G.Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 4 inches over roofing. Return and brake edges. H.Fabricate exposed sheet metal components with provisions for thermal expansion. I.Continuously weld or solder all joints in curb covers. Touch up damaged galvanizing with zinc rich primer. 2.4FINISH A.Paint metal surfaces exposed to view from ground level in accordance with Section 09900, and as indicated on Drawings, unless otherwise shown to be prefinished. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1INSPECTION A.Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set. B.Verify roofing membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. C.Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2PREPARATION A.Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. B.Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. 3.3INSTALLATION A.Install sheet metal flashing and trim in accordance with applicable details of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and NRCA "Low Slope Roofing Manual." Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B.Bed flanges of metal flashings in plastic cement or sealing mastic where required for waterproof performance. C.Apply bituminous coating on surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials including the following: 1.Dissimilar metals as defined in SMACNA Appendix A-3. 2.Preservative treated wood. D.Roof Edge Trim: 1.Install sheet metal edge trim in accordance with SMACNA Figure 2-1, profile as indicated on Drawings. Nail edge trim flange at 3 inches on center, in staggered pattern. 2.Thermal Expansion Joints: Install roof edge trim in 10 foot lengths with a 1/4 inch gap joint with a 6 inch cover plate in accordance with SMACNA Figure 2-5A. Set the cover plate in sealant, nail through opening in edge trim, and loose lock to the drip edge. 3.Corner Joints: Notch and lap. Set laps in sealant and rivet for rigidity. Space rivets at 1 inch on center. E.Parapet Cap Flashing –Option A: 1.Install sheet metal fascia with cleat in accordance with SMACNA Figure 2-6, profiles and as indicated on Drawings. a.Set cleat in full bed of sealant, overlaying and concealing continuous parapet waterproofing mem- brane. b.Secure cleat to nailer at 6 inches on center. c.Secure fascia to wood nailer with fasteners at 3” o.c. staggered per basic flange nailing pattern. 2.Thermal Expansion Joints: Install parapet fascia in min 10 foot lengths with 4 inch lap joint in accordance with SMACNA Figure 2-5B. Set lap in sealant. 07620-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 F.Parapet Cap Flashing –Option B: 1.Install sheet metal coping with continuous cleat in accordance with SMACNA requirements, profiles as in- dicated. a.Set cleat in full bed of sealant, overlaying and concealing continuous parapet waterproofing mem- brane. b.Secure cleat at 6 inches on center to nailer. 2.Install coping in accordance with SMACNA Figure 3-1 over shapedfiber board; secure roof side edge using washered screws in staggered pattern through slotted or oversized holes located at maximum 12" on-center. 3.Provide coping in minimum 10 to maximum 25 foot lengths. 4.Provide thermal expansion joints using joints in accordance with SMACNA Figure 3-3, Covered Plate Seam. Set lap in beds of sealant. G.Curb-Mounted Refrigeration Line Hood: Install galvanized sheet metal hood with gasketed fasteners at 8 inches on center and as indicated on Drawings. Seal all joints in hood and pipe penetrations to provide weatherproof enclosure. H.Reglet and Counterflashing System: 1.Surfaced Mounted Reglet: a.Set reglet parallel to roof line in full bed of sealant. Provide minimum 2 inch end lap at continuous elevations. b.Secure to wall with neoprene/stainless steel washers and drive pins at maximum 16 inches on center. c.Provide a continuous, full bead of sealant at top edge of reglet between flashingand wall. Sealant bead shall be of sufficient width to provide a 45 degree angle with vertical surface. 2.Masonry Joint Reglet: Specified in Section 04200. 3.Counterflashing: Provide counterflashing of the type indicated or required to match reglet system. Insert counterflashings into reglets to form tight fit. Counterflashing shall be installed in such a manner as to provide for continuous contact at base flashing with sufficient pressure at point of contact to prevent dislocation. Lap inside corners. Notch and hook-seam outside corners. Set laps and seams in sealant. a.Provide minimum 2inch end lap at continuous elevations. b.Change in elevation of 4inches, provide 8inch end lap. c.Change in elevation of 8inches, provide 12inch end lap. I.Curb Covers: 1.Install felt underalyment over plywood, and secure in place with galvanized roofing nails. 2.Install metal cover over felt underlayment, and anchor to wood nailer on curb through vertical flange of cover using gasketed fasteners spaced 12” o.c. maximum. END OF SECTION 07620-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Planning022417a SECTION 07721 -MANUFACTURED CURBS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Manufacturedstructural metal roof curbsfurnished by Owner for installation by Contractor. 2.Manufactured non-structural metal roof curbs furnished and installed by Contractor. 3.Coordination with manufacturers and suppliers of roof mounted items and equipment. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 07530 -Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Board insulation for roof curbs. 2.Section 07620 -Sheet Metal Flashing Trim: Sheet metal flashing installed in conjunction with roof penetration curbs. 3.Section 15600 –Refrigeration Systems. 4.Appendix A –Products and Work By Owner or Separate Contractor. a.General procedures related to Owner furnished products. b.Manufacturers, suppliers, vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.American Welding Society (AWS): AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. C.Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 1.SSPC-Paint 20 Zinc Rich Coating Type I -Inorganic and Organic. 1.3DEFINITIONS A.Structural Roof Curb: Manufactured square or rectangularroof curb, bearing on structural steel joists or headers, designed to support equipment dead load and roof dead and live loads. B.Non-Structural Roof Curb: 1.Deck Penetrations -10 Inches by 10 Inches or Less: Manufactured square or rectangular roof curb, bearing on top of metal roof deck, designed to receive sheet metal flashing skirt, not used for support of equipment. 2.Deck Penetrations -Greater Than 10 Inches by 10 Inches: Manufactured square or rectanular roof curb bearing on structural steel angle frame, designed to support equipment dead load. Roof dead and live load supported by structural angle frame. 1.4QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify field welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. Provide certification that field welders have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. 1.If recertification of welders is required, provide without additional cost to Wal-Mart. B.Structural Curbs: Provide manufactured metal roof curbs designed by a licensed engineer. Meet or exceed Live Loads and Dead Loads as specified in this Section and as indicated on Drawings. Coordinate curb dimensions with shop drawings of equipment to be supported. 1.5DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 07721-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. Receive Owner Furnished products in accordance with the requirements of Section 01600. B.Ship curbs to site palletized and banded. C.Curb manufacturer shall furnish Curb Schedule to Contractor identifying curb "Type" and roof penetration for which curb is to be used. Curb Schedule shall identify identical curbs as single "Type" (i.e. Type A -10 ton RTU's, Type B-5 ton RTU's, etc.). Identify each curb with "Type" designation painted in 1 inch high letters on outside face of curb. D.Stack curbs at site to prevent twisting, bending or permanent deformation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.Owner's supplier will furnish the following productsas specified in Appendix A (Section 07721)for installation by the Contractor. 1.Structural roof curbs (including adaptor curbs if shown) and associated wind/seismic restraint brackets (when required) 2.2MANUFACTURER A.Non-Structural Roof Curbs: Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide prefabricated metal roof curbs manufactured by one of the following: 1.AES Industries, Tallassee, AL, Contact: Chad Burt (800) 786-0402. 2.3MATERIALS A.Sheet Steel: One of the following at Contractor's option: 1.Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, SS (Structural Steel) Classification, Grade 33, G60 hot-dip zinc coating. 2.Aluminum-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 463, SS (Structural Steel) Classification, Grade 33, Type 2, T2 100 aluminum coating. 3.Aluminum Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet (GAVALUME): ASTM A 792, AZ55 aluminum zinc alloy coating. B.Board Insulation: Specified in Section 07511, 07530, or 07550 as applicable. C.Wood Nailers: CCA Pressure Treated Lumber Type C, "Standard" grade lumber of any species. D.Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-Paint 20 Type II. E.Deck Support Clip: Galvanized steel sheet, gauge as shown. 2.4NON-STRUCTURAL ROOF CURBS(CONTRACTOR FURNISHED AND INSTALLED) A.Coated 18 gauge steel sheet curb sections, corners fully mitered and welded; 2 inch by 4 inch (nominal dimension) pressure treated continuous wood nailers mechanically fastened at 12 inches on center to exterior face of curb. Shop prime welded connections with zinc-rich paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20. Profile and dimensions shall be as shown. 1.Web Height: Comply with local code requirements for minimum curb height, but in no case shall curb height be less than 18 inches for deck penetrations greater than 10 inches by 10 inches and not less than 14 inches for deck penetrations 10 inches by 10 inches or less as measured from top of steel roof deck to top of curb, nor shall curb height be less than 8 inches as measured from top of roof membrane to top of curb. 07721-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.5SUBSTITUTIONS A.Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Install curbs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on Drawings. Coordinate installation with roof membrane installation requirements specified under other Sections. B.Roof Curbs Bearing on Steel Angles, Joists, and Headers: 1.Set units in place and secure base to roof structure by welding to top chord of structural memberor as otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2.Secure metal deck to perimeter of curb as indicated on Drawings. C.Roof Curbs Bearing on Roof Deck: 1.Set units in place and secure base to steel roof deck by self-tapping screw fasteners spaced at a maximum of 12 inches on center, staggered. D.Install wind/seismic restraint brackets prior to installation of rooftop equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.2COORDINATION A.Coordinate project requirements for custom adapting and connecting to roof curbs with manufacturers and suppliers of curb mounted items and equipment. 3.3NON-STRUCTURAL ROOF CURB SCHEDULE A.Provide non-structural roof curbs for the following items: 1.Exhaust fans, unless otherwise shown to be provided by others. 2.Multiple vent pipe penetrations. END OF SECTION 07721-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Plan072613 SECTION 07840 -FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Firestopping in rated assemblies. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 07815 -Mineral Fiber Fireproofing: Fireproofing for grease ducts. 2.Section 09250 -Gypsum Board. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM E814 -Test Methods for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops. C.FM Global (FM): 1.FM 4991 –Standard for theApproval of Firestop Contractors D.Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1.UL 1479 -Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 2.UL 2079 –Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 3.UL Fire Resistance Directory: 1.3SUBMITTALS A.Submittals: Comply withthe requirements of Section 01330. B.Certifications: 1.Installer Qualifications.Submit documentation of Designated Responsible Individual (DRI) or letter from firestop manufacturer naming approved installer to Architect prior to commencement of firestop work. 2.Manufacturer’s Inspection.Submit written certification from firestop manufacturer that Manufacturer’s Representative has visited Site as specified in Part 3 and Work is in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements and published instructions. 1.4QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Installation of firestopping shall be by a Designated Responsible Individual (DRI) in accordance with FM 4991 or shall be an approved installer by the Firestop Manufacturer. 1.5DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide firestopping products as manufactured by one of the following: 07840-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.Nelson Firestop Products, (800) 331-7325. 2.Hilti, Inc, (800) 879-8000. 3.RectorSeal Corporation, (800) 231-3345. 4.Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI), (800) 992-1180. 5.3M Fire Protection Products, (800) 376-0964. 6.Tremco Firestop System, (800) 852-8173. 2.2REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.Firestop materials shall have been tested with and shall be in compliance with the minimum requirements of ASTM E814, UL 1479, and UL 2079 as applicable. Products used shall be as listed below as suitable for the intended application and as required to produce the fire rating as shown on the drawings and to conform to the Firestopping Schedule of UL assemblies included at the end of this Section. 2.3MATERIALS A.Intumescent Latex or Acrylic Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex or acrylic formulation. 1.LBS, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2.FS ONE or CP 606, by Hilti. 3.Metacaulk 950 or 1000, by RectorSeal. 4.SpecSeal SSS100, by STI. 5.CP 25WB+,IC 15WB, or 3000WTby 3M. 6.TREMstop Intumescent Acrylic (IA) or Acrylic (A), by Tremco. B.Intumescent Wrap/Strip: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one face. 1.WRS, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2.CP 648Wrap Strip, by Hilti. 3.Metacaulk Wrap Strip, by RectorSeal. 4.SpecSeal SSWRED Wrapstrip, by STI. 5.FS-195+ Wrap/Stripor Ultra GS, by 3M. 6.TREMstop WS, by Tremco. C.Intumescent Putty: Single-component, non-hardening,dielectric, intumescent putty. 1.FSP, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2.CP 618 Putty Stick or CP 617/617L Putty Pad, by Hilti. 3.CP 648Wrap Strip, by Hilti. 4.CFS-PLFirestop Plug, by Hilti. 5.Metacaulk Fire Rated Putty, by RectorSeal. 6.SpecSeal Putty, by STI. 7.Moldable Putty+, by 3M. 8.TREMstop MP (Moldable Putty) or Putty Stick by Tremco. D.Silicone Sealant: Single-component, moisture-curing, silicone-based elastomeric, non-sag grade. 1.CLK N/S, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2.CP 601S, by Hilti. 3.Metacaulk 835, by RectorSeal. 4.SpecSeal PEN 300, by STI. 5.2000+ Silicone, by 3M. 6.FYRE SIL, by Tremco. E.Silicone or Polyurethane Foam: Two-Component, liquid elastomer that, when mixed, expands and cures in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. 1.SpecSeal PEN 200, by STI. 2.CP 620 Fire Foam, by Hilti. F.Intumescent Collar: Factory-fabricated, intumescent collar. 1.PCS, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2.CP 643or CP 644, by Hilti. 3.Metacaulk Pipe Collar, by RectorSeal. 07840-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 4.SpecSeal SSC Collars, by STI. 5.Plastic Pipe Device,Ultra Plastic Pipe Device, Tuck In Wrap Strips, or RC-1Collarby 3M. 6.TREMstop D, by Tremco. G.Intumescent Composite Sheet, Pillows and Mortar, or Blocks: Products used to firestop large openings. 1.CPS, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2.CFS-BLFireblocks, by Hilti. 3.CP 637 Firestop Mortar, by Hilti. 4.CP 675T Firestop Board, by Hilti. 5.SpecSeal SSB Pillows and SpecSeal SSM Firestop Compound, by STI. 6.CS-195+ Composite Sheet, by 3M. 7.TREMstop PS, by Tremco. H.Sprayable Fire-Rated Mastic: Products used to firestop construction joints. 1.CP672 Speed Spray, by Hilti. 2.Specseal Elastomeric Spray, by STI. 3.Firedam Spray200, by 3M 4.TREMstop Acrylic Spray (A-SP) by Tremco. I.Packing Material: Manufacturer's standard mastic, putty, ceramic fiber blanket, or mineral wool to be used as fill or backing material for firestopping. 1.Mineral Wool, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2.Mineral Wool, by Hilti. 3.Fire Safing or Backer Rod, by RectorSeal. 4.Mineral Wool, by STI. 5.Fire Barrier 5A, 615+ Duct Wrap,or PM4 Packing Materialby 3M. 6.TREMstop FS Blanket, by Tremco. 7.CP 767 Speed Strips and CP 777 Speed Plugs, by Hilti. (preformed mineral wool designed for top of wall fluted metal deck packing material) J.Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1PREPARATION A.Remove loose dirt and oil from penetration surfaces. B.Place hangers or damming materials in penetration to hold firestopping materials, if necessary. 3.2INSTALLATION A.Keep caulk and putty away from heat, open flame, sparks, or other sources of ignition during application and until product cures. Use only with adequate ventilation. B.Follow manufacturer charts for appropriate material to achieve required fire rating in various locations. C.Install firestopping at penetrations of fire rated wall materials in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. D.Install firestopping at penetrations and construction joints of fire rated walls and floors in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions and in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory. 3.3FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Site Inspection: Upon completion of installation, , Manufacturer’s Representative shall inspect installed firestopping to verify work complies with the manufacturer’s requirements. 07840-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.4FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE A.Provide firestopping complying with UL assembliesspecified below. NelsonHiltiRectorSealSTI3MTremco PenetrationAssembly Metal Pipe CMU Wall 8" CAJ1203CAJ 1149 orCAJ1114 orCAJ1079 orCAJ1001 or CAJ1064 or Thick or LessCAJ1155 orCAJ1115CAJ1217CAJ1009CAJ1302 CAJ1226 Gypsum Board WL1083 orWL1054 orWL1026 orWL1049 orWL1003 or WL1278 or PartitionWL1030WL1058or WL1034WL1079WL1009WL1158 WL1297 Non-Metallic CMU Wall 8" CAJ2110 orWJ2025CAJ2064 orCAJ2223 or Pipe Thick or LessCAJ2086CAJ2109or CAJ2045CAJ2005CAJ2184 CAJ2567 Gypsum Board WL2098 orWL2104WL2093,WL2002 or WL2083 or PartitionWL2071WL2078or WL2029orWL2005WL2129 WL2341WL2288 Cable Tray CMU Wall 8" CAJ8049 or CAJ4035 orCAJ4020 orCAJ4003CAJ4075 Thick or LessCAJ4033CAJ4017CAJ8043CAJ4029 Gypsum Board WL4011 orWL4005 orWL3043 or PartitionWL4003WL4019----WL4008WL4004WL3131 Insulated CMU Wall 8" CAJ5008 or CAJ5090 orWJ5016 orCAJ5021 orCAJ5001 or CAJ5121 or Metal Pipe thick or LessCAJ5059CAJ5091or CAJ5070CAJ5029CAJ5002CAJ5111 CAJ5048 Gypsum Board WL5028 orWL5014 orWL-5115 PartitionWL5036WL5029or WL5057WL5051WL5001WL-5081 WL5257 Construction CMU Wall to HWD0098 or HWD0235HWD0092 Gaps -Head Metal Deck----HWD0181 ----HWD0013 or HWD1037 of Wall to Gyp Bd Parti'n HWD0042 or Roof Deck to Metal Deck----HWD0049HWD0014----HWS0003HWD0091 Construction CMU Wall to WWD1011 WWS1001WWD1050, Gaps -Wall CMU Wall----or--------WWD0043, to Wall WWD1012 TL/PV60-01 oror WWD1017WWD-1052 Gyp Bd Parti'n to Gyp Bd ----WWD0067--------WWS0004---- Parti'n END OF SECTION 07840-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Planning032720 SECTION 07900 -JOINT SEALERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Owner furnished joint sealants for exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces, except as otherwise specified. 2.Joint sealants for interior vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces, except as otherwise specified. 3.Joint sealants and fillers in interior concrete floor slab-on-grade joints. 4.Owner furnished joint sealant and fillers in exterior concrete sidewalks and pavement adjacent to building. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01351 –Regulatory Compliance. a.Disposal and removal of construction and universal waste. b.Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 2.Division 2: Joint fillers and sealants for joints in sidewalk and pavement not adjacent to building. 3.Section 04200-Unit Masonry Assemblies: Installation of expansion joint filler(compression seal) and control joint sealerin masonry walls. 4.Section 07530 -Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Sealants associated with roofing. 5.Section 07840 -Firestopping: Joint seals around penetrations of fire-rated assemblies. 6.Section 09900 -Paints and Coatings: Protection of wall joints from painting prior to sealing. 7.Appendix A –Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor. a.Procedures related to Owner furnished sealants. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a partof this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM C920 -Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 2.ASTM C1330 -Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants. 3.ASTM D 1056 -Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 4.ASTM E84 -Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials C.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1.OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. 1.3ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Minimize dust emissions and provide equipment that suppresses dust. 1.4QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Interior sealants in food preparation areas shall meet the compositional requirements for use in USDA regulated facilities, as required by FDA according to 21CFR177.2600, and local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5SCHEDULING A.Complete the exterior wall sealant manufacturer’s Walmart Exterior Wall Sealant Order Form included at the end of this Section. Submit Order Form to Walmart a minimum of 3 weeks prior to beginning exterior wall sealant work. 1.6DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. 07900-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Supplier will deliver exterior wall joint sealants to site to be received by Contractor. Coordinate product delivery and installation in compliance with the delivery requirements of Section 01600. 1.7PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. B.Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by sealant manufacturer during and after installation. C.Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1.When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted byjoint-sealant manufacturer. 2.When joint substrates are wet. 3.Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4.Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.Products Furnished and Installed by Owner: Sealant specified in this Section for caulking around columns at resilient flooring will be furnished and installed by the Owner’s Preferred Flooring Contractor as specified in Appendix A (Section 07900). B.Products Furnished by Owner: Elastomeric exterior sealants listed in this paragraphwill be furnished by the Owner through Owner’s Facilities Maintenance program.The exterior elastomeric sealant materials in this list shall be the . Contact: Zach Duggan, (612) 590-3719, products of Master Builders Solutions by BASF Construction Chemicals zachary.duggan@mbcc-group.comorzachary.duggan@basf.com. 1.Elastomeric sealants for exterior wall. 2.Elastomeric sealants for concrete sidewalk or paving joint at building where joint filled with PMEJ. C.Sealants specified in this Section other than those included above for exterior wall and paving joint shall be provided by the Contractor. 2.2PRODUCTS 2.3ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS-GENERAL A.Comply with ASTMC920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant spec- ified, including those referencing ASTMC920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 2.4ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS (EXTERIOR WALL) A.ProvideSealant for Exterior Wall Control and Expansion Joint as follows: 1.L1: Single Component Sealant (for joint width not exceeding 1-1/2 inch and joint depth not exceeding ½ inch): Non-sag, Class 50. Provide the following: a.MasterSeal NP 100by BASF Master Builders Solutions. b.Container Sizeand Color: 1)Custom Color Sealants: 1.5 Gal Pail. 2)Limestone (Stock Color Gray): 1.5 Gal Pail or 20 oz sausage (not typical for vertical wall). 3)Match adjacent finish color if exterior color scheme is non-prototypical. 2.5ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS (APPLICATIONSOTHER THAN EXTERIOR WALL) A.Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21CFR177.2600. Sealants identified as (Non-USDA) shall not be used in food preparation areas. B.Polyurethane Sealants (USDA Certified, unless otherwise noted): 07900-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.Polyurethane Hybrid Sealant #1 (P1) and #3 (P3): ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, single component. a.MasterSeal NP 100, by BASF Master Builders Solutions. 1)Color, General: In interior and exterior exposed areas, verify sealant is a match to the color of the adjacent paint color. 2)In joints where plumbing fixtures meet adjacent floor and wall finishes, match color of plumb- ing fixture. 3)Use clear, colorless sealant where applied to stainless steel surfaces. C.Elastomeric Sealant for Concrete Sidewalk or Paving Joint at Building (Existing joints only): 1.L2: Multi-Component Sealant (for joint width not exceeding 3 inches and joint depth not exceeding ½ inch): Non-sag or self-leveling, Class 25: Provide the following: a.MasterSeal NP 100, by BASF Master Builders Solutions. b.Color: 1)Limestone (Stock Color Gray): 1.5 Gal Pail or 20 oz sausage. 2)Match adjacent finish color if exterior color scheme is non-prototypical. 2.6POLYURETHANE EXPANDING FOAM SEALANTS A.Polyurethane Expanding Foam Sealant #1 (EF1): Closed-cell foam and non-flammable propellant; urea formalde- hyde-free, CFC-free; UL Class 1 Foam with flamespread of 20 and smoke developed of 25 as tested in accordance with ASTM E84. a.Touch'n Seal Quick Cure, by Dap Products. b.Space Invader by GE Sealants & Adhesives, (877) 943-7325. 2.7JOINT-SEALANT BACKING (INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR CMU WALL) A.Sealant Backing(Backer Rod): Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 1.Cylindrical Sealant Backings: Closed or bi-cellular backer rod conforming to ASTMC1330, Type B or Type C, as approved by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. The use of ASTM C Type O open cell backer rod is prohibited. a.Backer Rod for Exterior Masonry: Closed cell foam, oversized 50 percent; self-expanding. 2.Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTMD1056, B.Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.8INTERIOR SLAB ON GRADE JOINT SEALANT MATERIALS A.PreformedExpansion (Isolation) Joint FillerStrips (PMEJ): Flexible closed-cell synthetic foam expansion joint strips, non-extruding, for full depth of concrete. 1.Ceramar Flexibe Foam Expansion Joint, by W.R. Meadows. 2.Deck-O-Foam Expansion Joint Filler, by W.R. Meadows B.Elastomeric Joint Materials: 1.Sealant: a.Polyurethane Sealant: No. 2 (P2) as specified above. b.Color: Match color of adjacent exposed surface of concrete slab. c.Sealant shall be compatible with construction material placed against it. 2.Joint Back-Up Material: a.Polyethylene Foam, 100% closed cell. b.Material shall be compatible with construction material to be placed against it such as tile adhesive. C.Polyurea Joint Filler(PY1): Rapid setting, two-component polyurea polymer liquid of 100% solids content, Shore 07900-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 AHardness 85 to 92, compatible with construction material placed against it. (USDA compliant, unless otherwise noted.) , by BASF Master Builders Solutions. 1.MasterSeal CR 100 2.9EXTERIOR PAVEMENT JOINT MATERIALS A.Joint Back-up Material: Polyethylene foam, 100% closed cell B.Sealant: 1.Dow 888, by Dow Corning. 2.301 NS by Pecora. 3.Spectrum 800 or 900 by Tremco. C.Preformed Expansion (Isolation) Joint FillerStrips (PMEJ): Flexible closed-cell non-extruding synthetic foam ex- pansion joint strips. Expansion Joint, by W.R. Meadows. 1.Ceramar Flexibe Foam 2.Deck-O-FoamExpansion Joint Filler, by W.R. Meadows 2.10ACCESSORIES A.Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B.Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 2.11SUBSTITUTIONS A.Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as indicated on Draw- ings. B.Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrates. 3.2EXTERIOR WALL PREPARATION A.Prepare exterior existing joints and install sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s recommendations: EnglishSpanish B.Do not begin joint sealant work until wall painting work is complete. Sealed joints shall not be overcoated with paint. C.Fully remove existing joint sealant and backing material on exterior vertical CMU building walls prior to repainting. D.Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E.Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. F.Verify that new joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 07900-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 G.Protect elements surrounding work of this Section from damage or disfiguration H.Moving forward all joint sealant is to be installed after the painting is complete. 3.3EXTERIOR WALL INSTALLATION A.Install new sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C.Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1.Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2.Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3.Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D.Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E.Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges. F.Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G.Tool joints concave. 3.4INTERIOR SLAB ON GRADE JOINT SEALING AND FILLING A.General: 1.Seal/fill contraction, isolation and construction joints in floor slabs and pavements, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified herein. 2.Unless noted otherwise, use polyurea joint filler in floor slab contraction and construction joints. 3.Use elastomeric joint sealant in isolation jointsand textured concrete joints. 4.Use pavement sealant in pavement’s contraction, construction, and isolation joints. 5.Do not seal joints with materials specified herein when below relatively impervious floor finish material, such as PVC flooring, sheet rubber, wood, epoxy topping; refer to floor finish specification for joint sealing requirements. 6.Do not place polyurea joint filler under resilient flooringor carpet.Reference Section 09650 or 09680 for joint subfloor filler materials and placement under floor covering. B.Cleaning: 1.Immediately prior to sealing/filling, clean joints to full depth of sealant/filler in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. 2.Use vacuum with HEPA-rated filter to remove loosedirt, debris, saw laitance, and other foreign material from joint. 3.Clean inner joint walls mechanically using one of the following HEPA-rated filter tools as recommended by the manufacturer for maintaining dust emissions below the permissible level . a.Humpback Dustless Joint Saw by Joe Due Blades & Equipment, www.joedue.com b.Dust Buggyby U.S. Saws, Santa Ana, CA (866) 987-7297. c.Gorilla Concrete ToolsGCT-10 or GCT-9 Silverback by OBHC, Inc.,Columbia Station, OH, (440) 236-5112. 4.Clean joint walls to the full depth of saw cuts and 2 inch minimum depth in construction jointsthat may not have been saw cut to create a support shelf. 5.Remove form release agent, curing compound, or other components. C.General Installation: 1.Commence placing floor joint sealant / filler no sooner than 30 days after first placement of concrete. 2.If joint is wet or damp, allow joint to dry for 72 hours prior to filling. 3.Delay floor joint sealing / filling operations until facility’s environmental systems have been placed in operation for 14 days. 07900-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 4.Mix and install sealant and filler in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Use primer if recommended for specific application. 5.Choke off shrinkage crack if necessary at bottom of contraction joint or void below construction joints by the following methods. a.Saw Cut Contraction Joints: 1)Place 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch (maximum) layer of dry-bagged silica sandin joint to be epoxy filled. Do not use compressible backer rod.Use methods in handling sand to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. b.Construction Joints Through Slab: Fill by insertingcompressible backer rod to a minimum depth of 2 inches below slab surface. 6.Do not allow sealant / filler to extend over joint edges in finished condition. D.Elastomeric Joint Sealant Installation: 1.Use joint back-up material. 2.Tool surface to provide smooth, attractive appearance and geometry recommended by sealant manufacturer. E.Joint Filler Installation 1.Cleaning: Immediately prior to filling, clean and prepare joint bottom and sidewalls as specified herein for general cleaning. 2.Do not use joint back-up material (i.e. backer rod, sand, etc.) except below bottom of saw cut in construction joints. Provide a minimum joint filler depth of 2 inches. 3.Install test sample of the polyurea joint filler to determine if filler will leave a stain, shadow, or film on slab surface. 4.If test sample reveals stain, shadow, or film, use joint filler stain preventing film at joints to receive polyurea joint filler. 5.Fill joint using single pass method. Fill joint full depth from bottom to top, leave slight crown at slab surface. 6.Add extra filler prior to filler set if needed to prevent depressed areas. If concave filler is already set, abrade with wire wheel or similar tool to minimum depth of 1/4” below surface prior to refilling. 7.Razor off crowned filler flush with floor surface after filler has sufficiently set. 8.Remove stain preventing film (if used). Film shall be removed by joint filler installer immediately after shaving joint filler. 9.One week prior to Grand Opening, refill joints if: a.Joint filler sidewall separation or splitting exceeds 1/32 in. b.Joint filler surface profile is concave, crowned, or chattered or if voids occur. 10.Follow manufacturer’s requirements for joint preparation for proper adhesion. F.Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips (PMEJ) where indicated. 1.Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 2.Terminate joint filler or otherwise provide joint sealant cavity of not less than 1/2 inchor more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 3.Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 4.Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. 5.Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Removeprotective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. 3.5EXTERIOR SIDEWALK AND PAVEMENT JOINT SEALING AND FILLING A.Fill and seal sidewalk and pavement joints in areas of pavement adjacent to the building. Joint filling and sealing of sidewalks and pavement not adjacent to building is specified in Division 2. B.Joint Fillers: Extend joint fillers full-width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2-inch or more than 1-inch below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. Furnish joint fillers in 1-piece lengths for full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than 1 length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. C.Joint Sealants: Joints shall be sealed as shown and scheduled and shall be installed in accordance with manufactur- er's recommendations. 07900-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.6CLEANING A.Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.7SEALANT LOCATION SCHEDULE A.Provide sealants in accordance with the following schedule. Joint sealing required by the drawings or required for a complete and proper installation but not listed in the following schedule shall be sealed as necessaryregardless of whether shown or scheduled. Such joints not shown or scheduled shall be sealed with sealants consistent with specified materials or as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific application. 07900-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 EXTERIOR JOINTS MATERIAL TOMATERIALJOINT SEALANT TYPE WIDTH SITEConcrete Sidewalk Control JointConcrete Sidewalk1/4"Sidewalks adjacent to building: See Ma- terials Par. Other- wise: See Division 2. Concrete Sidewalk Expansion Joint at Concrete or CMU1/2"L2 Building –PMEJ Joints Only Concrete Paving Control JointConcrete Paving1/4"Pavement adjacent to building: See Materi- als Par. Otherwise: See Division 2. Concrete Paving Expansion JointConcrete1/2"See above Concrete Stair Expansion JointConcrete or CMU1/2"P1 or P3 Concrete Curb Expansion JointConcrete or CMU1/2"See Division 2 CMU Wall Control Joint, 3/8" or 1”CMU Wall3/8"L1 1" EIFS WallCMU or Cast Concrete 1/2"P1 or P3 shapes EIFS Cornice/TrimCMU or EIFS1/2"P1 WALL Metal FlashingMetal FlashingS1 FLASHING Metal FlashingCMU, EIFS, Alumi-1/4"P1 or P3 num Storefront Frame SOFFITSGypsum Soffit Control JointGypsum Soffit3/8"P1 or P3 Gypsum Soffit Perimeter Expansion EIFS or CMU3/8"P1 or P3 Joint Metal Soffit Panel TrimEIFS or CMUP1 or P3 WALL PENE-Aluminum Storefront FrameCMU, EIFS, Alumi-1/4"P1 or P3 TRATIONSnum Storefront Frame Aluminum Storefont SillCast Concrete Shapes 1/4"P1 or P3 or Concrete Slab Aluminum Storefront Door ThresholdConcrete SlabP1 or P3 Translucent Insulated PanelsTranslucent Insulated 1/4"S1 Panels, EIFS, Metal Flashing Hollow Metal Door FrameCMU Wall, Tube Steel 1/4"P1 or P3 Frame Hollow Metal Door ThresholdConcrete SlabP1 or P3 Steel Corner Angle FrameCMU Wall1/4"P1 or P3 Steel Pipe and/or Conduit ThroughCMU, EIFS, Concrete1/2"P1 or P3 Ganged Steel Conduit ThroughCMU, EIFS, Concrete1/2"P1 PVC and/or Copper Pipe ThroughCMU, EIFS, Concrete1/2"P1 ROOF Roofing MembraneRoofing MembraneSee Roofing Section MEMBRANE Roofing MembraneWaterproof Wall See Roofing Section AREA Membrane 07900-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 EXTERIOR JOINTS MATERIAL TOMATERIALJOINT SEALANT TYPE WIDTH Roofing MembraneMetal FaciaSee Roofing Section Roofing MembraneMolded Pipe FlashingSee Roofing Section Waterproof MembraneMetal Facia, Plates, P1 or P3 Bolts Waterproof MembraneSteel Conduit1/2"P1 or P3 Metal Cap Flashing JointMetal Cap Flashing1/8"S1 Metal Cap Flashing Expansion JointMetal Cap Flashing1"S1 Metal Cap FlashingGasketed FastenersS1 Skylight Flashing JointsSkylight FlashingS1 Vent Flashing JointsVent FlashingS1 Smoke Vent Flashing JointsSmoke Vent FlashingS1 RTU Flashing JointsRTU FlashingS1 Waterproof Membrane Termination BarCMU Wall1/4"P1 Steel GutterSteel Gutter or Down-S1 spout Steel DownspoutSteel DownspoutS1 Urethane Rubber Seal SystemSteel Pipe/ FlueVariesSee Section 07530 PVC SleeveSheet Metal Hood/Clo-S1 sure Plate ConduitSheet Metal Hood/Clo-S1 sure Plate ROOFRoof PanelFlue Penetration Flash-P1 or P3 METAL/ing FIBERGLASS Roof PanelGutterP1 or P3 PANELS Roof PanelEnd ClosureP1 or P3 INTERIOR JOINTS MATERIAL TOMATERIALJOINT SEALANT TYPE WIDTH FLOORConcrete FloorConcrete Floor Contraction and Construction Joint1/4"See Materials Par. Expansion Joint3/4"Same Isolation JointSee Same Dwgs Concrete Curb In GroceryConcrete FloorSame Ceramic Tile Expansion JointsCeramic TileRef Mfr.P1 or P3 Quarry Tile Expansion JointsQuarry TileRef Mfr.P1 or P3 Floor Joints Beneath Floor Finish See Section 09650 Materials (VCT or PVC Flooring) Transition Strip (Korlyte)Concrete SlabPY1 Mop Sink FloorP1 or P3 Sanitary Cove Base (SCB)FloorSee Section 09655 Wood BaseConcrete FloorP1 or P3 Structural Steel ColumnVCT/PVCP1 07900-9 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 INTERIOR JOINTS MATERIAL TOMATERIALJOINT SEALANT TYPE WIDTH WALLSCMU Wall Control Joint, 3/8"CMU Wall3/8"P1 CMU Wall Expansion Joint, 1"CMU Wall1"P1 Rated Gypsum Board Wall Control Rated Gypsum Board Wall Joint Rated Gypsum Board WallMetal Roof Deck or Rated See Section 07840 - CMU WallFirestopping Gypsum BoardCMU Walls3/8"P1 (Use edge trim, ref. Section 09250) Ceramic TileWood or Galvanized Steel P1 or P3 Base Trim Ceramic TileStainless SteelS1 or S2 Ceramic TileCeramic TileP1 or P3 Fiber Reinforced Wall Panel (FRP)Galvanized Steel Base See Section 06610 Trim Fiber Reinforced Wall Panel (FRP)Ceramic TileSee Section 06610 Stainless Steel Corner GuardsCeramic TileS1 or S2 Stainless Steel Corner GuardsWallS1 or S2 Plastic BaseGrocery Equipment WallP1 or P3 Plastic BaseCeramic Tile or Gypsum P1 or P3 Board Wall Plastic BaseConcrete or Quarry Tile P1 or P3 Floor Sanitary Cove Base (SCB)WallSee Section 09655 Wood BasePlywood WainscotP1 Joints shown on the drawings to be EF1 sealed with Expanding Foam Seal- ant WALL Aluminum Storefront FrameAlum Storefront Frame, 1/4"P1 PENETRA-CMU, or Gypsum Board TIONS Aluminum Storefront SillGypsum Board Wall or 1/4"P1 Cast Concrete Shapes Hollow Metal Door FrameCMU or Gypsum Board1/4"P1 Steel Corner Angle FrameCMU Wall1/4"P1 Steel Pipe or Conduit ThroughCMU Wall1/2"P1 Steel Pipe or Conduit ThroughGypsum Board1/4"P1 PVC or Copper Pipe ThroughCMU or Gypsum Board1/2"P1 Steel, PVC, or Copper Pipe ThroughRated CMU or Gypsum See Section 07840 Board Wall Steel Conduit ThroughRated CMU or Gypsum See Section 07840 Board Wall TOILETSinkCeramic Tile WallS2 FIXTURESFloor Mount ToiletCeramic Tile FloorS2 Wall Mount Toilet or UrinalCeramic Tile WallS2 07900-10 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 INTERIOR JOINTS MATERIAL TOMATERIALJOINT SEALANT TYPE WIDTH GROCERYPre-manufactured FreezerConcrete CurbP1 or P3 EQUIP Pre-manufactured FreezerPlastic Transition StripP1 or P3 Pre-manufactured FreezerConcrete FloorP1 or P3 Refrigerated Case TrimRefrigerated CaseS1 or S2 Refrigerated Case TrimConcrete FloorS1 or S2 Stainless Steel EquipmentFiberglass Reinforced Plas-S1 or S2 tic (FRP) Wall Panels Stainless Steel Equipment Ceramic TileS1 or S2 EWCElectric Water CoolersCeramic TileP1 or P3 COUNTER Plastic Laminate Counter TopsGypsum Board or Plastic S2 Laminate Walls 07900-11 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 EXTERIOR WALL SEALANT ORDER FORM ® MasterSeal NP 100 marti.johnson@walmart.com Complete this form and submit to Marti Johnson, Facilities Maintenance Program Manager, WALMART STOREINFORMATION AddressCityStateZipCode_______________ WalmartContactName__________________ ContactTelephone ___________________________________ ContactEmail________ContactFax_______________________ CONTRACTORINFORMATION AddressCityStateZipCode_______________ ContactName______________________ ContactTelephone ___________________________________ ContactEmail________ContactFax_______________________ ORDER FORM SW7019 Gauntlet Gray BP4349SW7004 Snowbound BP4603 Custom LinearFtJointWidthLinearFtJointWidth LinearFtJointWidth SW076 Walmart Blue BP6020SW7694 Dromedary Camel BP5069 Custom LinearFtJointWidthLinearFtJointWidth LinearFtJointWidth SW6885 Knockout Orange BP4094SW7522 Meadowlark BP5811 Custom LinearFtJointWidthLinearFtJointWidth LinearFtJointWidth SW7015 Repose Gray BP4448SW6082 Cobble Brown BP4613 Custom LinearFtJointWidthLinearFtJointWidth LinearFtJointWidth SW7017 Dorian Gray BP5627Redwood Tan #128 57627100 LinearFtJointWidthLinearFtJointWidth 07900-12 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Entire BuildingPerimeterWidthFootage ____________________________ Instructions to Contractor: The measurements providedby this form will be used to calculate quantity of each exterior sealant color. Complete this form and submit through Service Channel to Walmart Facilities Maintenance Program Manager three weeks prior to scheduled start of exterior sealant installa- tion. Walmart Facilities Maintenance will place a materials order and purchase sealants through BASFMasterBuildersSolutions.Contact WM Facilities Maintenance Program Manager if there are materials deemed necessary in addition to those quantities supplied by the measurements provided herein. By the signature below, Contractor acknowledges the understanding that all exterior MasterSeal NP 100 sealants are to be installed after completion of the exterior wall paint workand leftexposed with no overcoated paint.Contractoralso acknowledgesthe receipt of all manufacturer’s publishedtechnical and installation instructions. Name(Printed)SignatureDate Name(Printed)SignatureDate BASF Corporation Construction Systems 889 Valley Park Drive Shakopee, MN 55379 USA - Customer Service 1(800)4339517 - TechnicalService1(800)2436739 master-builders-solutions.basf.us ®= RegisteredtrademarkoftheBASF-Groupinmanycountries. © 2020 BASF Corporation 01/20 END OF FORM END OF SECTION 07900-13 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Planning042619 SECTION 08110 -STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Steel doors, panels, and frames. 2.Glazed light frames. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 01600 –Product Requirements: Contractor’s Products Selection checklist. 2.Section 04200 –Unit Masonry Assemblies: Masonry mortar fill of metal frames. Placement of anchors into wall construction. 3.Section 08710 -Door Hardware: Door hardware coordination. 4.Section 08800 -Glazing: Glass in steel doors and frames. 5.Section 09900 -Paints and Coatings: Field painting of doors and frames. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1.ANSI A117.1 -Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2.ANSI A250.8 (Formerly SDI-100) -Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 3.ANSI A250.11 (Formerly SDI-105) -Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. C.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM C578 -Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular PolystyreneThermal Insulation 2.ASTM A653 -Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvan- nealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. D.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1.NFPA 80 -Fire Doors and Windows. 2.NFPA 252 -Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. E.Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1.UL 10B -Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B.Receive and accept products and report suspected defects and shipping discrepancies in compliance with the re- quirements of Section 01600. C.Product Packaging: Doors will be shipped in manufacturer's standard packaging with identification markings on each component or package. D.Product Compliance Inspection: Inspect delivered products for compliance with product descriptions in Part 2 herein. Report discrepancies to the Architect. 08110-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 E.Protect doors and frames with resilient packaging. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation. 1.5PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B.Coordination: Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS 2.2MANUFACTURERS A.Doors and Frames: Subject to compliance with requirements specified herein, provide flush doors and framesby one of the following: 1.Amweld Building Products Division. 2.Ceco Door (an Assa Abloy Company). 3.Curries (an Assa Abloy Company). 4.Deansteel. 5.Door Components Inc (DCI). 6.Hollow Metal Express (HMX). 7.Mesker. 8.Metal Products Inc (MPI). 9.Pioneer Industries (an Assa Abloy Company). 10.Premier. 11.Republic. 12.Security Metal Products (SMP) (an Assa Abloy Company). 13.Steelcraft (an Allegion Company). B.Provide products by the manufacturers listed herein. No substitutions allowed. 2.3SUPPLIERS A.Provide door hardware from one of the national or local suppliers. 1.DH Pace, Inc., Springfield, MO, Mark Lyons, (417) 831-5585, walmartdoors@dhpace.com. 2.Trudoor, (844) 878-3667. 3.AB Supply (Architectural Building), (844) 809-3667. 4.Felix Thompson Company(AR, OK), (479) 646-7321. 5.CDF Distributors, (855) 769-9895. 6.Doormart USA, (877) 561-3667. 7.DKS Doors, (817)275-3070. 8.The Hallgren Company. (806) 798-3999. 9.This list of suppliers is not exhaustive. Contact manufacturers for additional authorized local or national suppliers not listed. 2.4DOORS A.Interior Doors: ANSI 250.8, Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard-Duty), 1-3/4 inches thick, Model 1 (Full Flush) 0.032 min. thickness (20 gage), cold-rolled steel, optional core construction as specified below. B.Exterior Doors: ANSI 250.11, Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), 1-3/4 inches thick, Model 1 (Full Flush) 0.042 inch min. thickness (18 gage), ASTMA653, Commercial Steel (CS), TypeB, with an A60 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating cold-rolled steel, polyurethane or polystyrene foam insulated core construc- tion 1.Fabricate head flush with top edge to exclude water. 08110-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Core Construction: 1.Polyurethane core foamed in place or laminated, R=10; 1/2 inch maximum voids in any direction. Strength of bond between core and steel face sheet shall exceed strength of core so delamination will not occur during operating conditions. 2.Rigid core of polystyrene foam board, R=7. Strength of bond between core and steel face sheet shall exceed strength of core so that delamination will not occur under operating conditions. 3.Honeycomb Core: Kraft fiber honeycomb with nominal 1 inch cell size and crush strength of 45 psi. 4.If laminated insulation is used, apply adhesive full coverage to door face. 2.5FRAMES A.Interior Drywall Frames: 0.053 min. thickness (16 gage), cold-rolled steel, mitered welded units. 1.Jamb depth: Sized to fit wall thickness. B.Interior Drywall Frames (Retrofit Openings ONLY): 16 gage, cold-rolled steel, mitered knock down. 1.Jamb depth: Sized to fit wall thickness. C.Interior Masonry Frames: (16 gage), cold-rolled steel,mitered and welded units. 1.Jamb depth: 5-3/4", unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. D.Exterior Frames: (16 gage steel), A60 galvannealed coating (ASTM A 653), mitered and welded units. 1.Jamb depth: 5-3/4", unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2.6ACCESSORIES A.Rubber Silencers: Resilient rubber. Specified in Section 08710. B.Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, butted corners. Prepare for countersink style screws, located no more than2 inches from each end, and spaced no more than 12 inches on center. C.Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of hardware cutouts in masonry openings. D.Mullions For Double Doors: Removable type, specified in Section 08710. E.Astragals for Double Doors: Steel, specifically for double doors. For rated pairs of doors, provide astragal to meet UL rating requirement. If doors are provided that maintain rating without an astragal, submit door manufacturer’s literature indicating UL rating. If U-shaped astragal is used that does not require a coordinator, omit double door coordinator from applicable hardware set in Section 08710. F.Board Insulation Blocking: ASTM C578, Type IV (density 1.6 pcf minimum), 1 inch thick. Provide one of the following: 1.Greenguard CM by Pactiv Building Products, Smyrna, GA (800) 241-4402. 2.Styrofoam Square, by Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI (800) 232-2436. 3.Foamular 250, by Owens Corning, Toledo, OH (800) 438-7465. 2.7PROTECTIVE COATINGS A.Bituminous Coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion, field applied. B.Primer: Exposed surfaces shall be cleaned, treated with Bonderite chemical and given one baked-on shop coat of gray synthetic primer. 2.8FABRICATION A.Fabricate doors and frames in accordance with ANSI A250.8. 08110-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Transom Bars: Fixed type, of same profiles as jamb and head. C.Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place. D.Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. E.Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes. F.For welded frames,weld face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. G.Provide countersunk, flat-or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. H.Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with 4 inch head member. I.Silencers: Prepare frames for silencers. 1.Single Doors: Provide 3 single rubber silencers on strike side. 2.Double Doors with Mullions: Provide 3 single rubber silencers on each door, on strike side. 3.Double Doors Without Mullions: Provide 2 single silencers on frame head. 4.Do not install silencers until frames have received their final finish coat. J.Fire Rated Doors: 1.Attach fire rated label to each door and each frame unit. Do not paint over labels. 2.Cut-outs may be made to existing rated doors for the installation of rated glazing, provided work is done in an approved shop. Site modifications of rated doors will not be allowed. K.Where multipleopenings are indicated, fabricate double wide frames of material gauge as scheduled. Joint frames at swing jamb using minimum 16 gauge insert spline connection full length. After assembly, fill joint with epoxy filler, allow to harden, and finish smoothand flush. 1.Fabricate impost base anchor, providing for minimum of two (2) anchors per impost. Base shall fit impost inside profile with "force fit." PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Verify substrate conditions, opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable for properinstallation. 3.2INSTALLATION A.Install frames in accordance with ANSI A250.11. B.Install doors in accordance with ANSI A250.8. C.Coordinate with adjacent wall construction for anchor placement. D.Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. E.Coordinate installationof doors with installation of hardware specified in Section 08710. F.Provide board insulation blocking at exterior hollow metal frames. Glue blocking in frame jambs (strike side and hinge side) at height indicated on Drawings. 3.3INSTALLATION BY OWNER’S SUPPLIER 3.4ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 08110-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Test for smooth operation through full range of swing; make necessary adjustments. B.Coordinate adjustment of doors withinstallation of hardware. Adjust doors and hardware for smooth and balanced door movement.Comply with ANSI A117.1. END OF SECTION 08110-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning032621 SECTION 08411 -ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Aluminum glazed framing systems. 2.Aluminum storefront doors, frames, and glazed lights. 3.Door hardware. Related Sections: 1.Section 08462 -Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors: Coordination between components. 2.Section 08710 -Finish Hardware: Coordinate cylinders, thresholds and otherhardware. 3.Section 08800 -Glazing: Glass products. 4.Section 09900 -Paints and Coatings: Painting infill panels. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1.AAMA 611 –Voluntary Specifications for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. C.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM A 123 -Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings On Iron And Steel Products 2.ASTM E 283 -Standard Test Method For Determining Rate Of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, And Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across The Specimen 3.ASTM E331 -Water Penetration Of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, And Curtain Walls By Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 4.ASTM E 1886 -Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials. 5.ASTM E 1996 -Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes. D.Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), ADA-ADAAGS-2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design. E.American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1.ANSI A117.1 -Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 1.3SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION A.Storefront System Performance Requirements: 1.Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ftat a static air pressure 2 differential of 6.24 psf. 2.Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Systems do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTME331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbs/sq. ft. 3.Structural Performance: Maximumdeflection of L/175 of span under a windload pressure calculation by the manufacturer based on the design wind loads shown on the Structural Drawings but not less than 20 psf. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 08411-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Manufacturer: Kawneer Company, Inc.,National Accounts Contacts as follows: a.Central Area: Greenwood, IN, (877) 505-3757. b.EasternArea: Bloomsburg, PA, (877) 505-3756. c.Southern Area: Springdale AR, (877) 505-3783. d.Western Area: Visalia, CA, (877) 505-3785. B.Kawneer product designations are used within this Section to identify aluminum framed storefront types and associated products unless noted otherwise. C.Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements, equivalent storefront and accessories by the following manufacturersmay be provided: 1.EFCO Corporation; Monett, MO; (800) 221-4169. 2.Tubelite, Inc.; Reed City, MI; (800) 866-2227. 3.Oldcastle Building Envelope,(Vistawall), Santa Monica, CA, (866)653-2278. D.Provide products by the manufacturers listed herein. No substitutions allowed. 2.2SUPPLIERS A.Storefront suppliers maybe identified by selecting the following links to view distribution maps or by contacting the manufacturers directly: 1.Kawneer: Distributed from multiple proprietary service centers. 2.EFCO: Distributed from multiple independentdistribution centers. 3.Tubelite: Distributed from multiple nationwide independent distributors. 4.Oldcastle:Distributed from one of 78 proprietary distribution centersamong 23 states. 2.3FRAMING A.Interior Framing System: TRIFAB VG 450, by Kawneer. 1-3/4 x 4-1/2 inch nominal dimension, extruded aluminum flush glazed framing systemfor un-insulated glazing systems. B.Thermal Interior Framing System: Verify system required to fit wall opening. 1.TRIFAB VG 451T, by Kawneer. 2 x 4-1/2 inch nominal dimension, thermally broken extruded aluminum flush glazed framing systemfor insulated glazing systems. a.Thermal Barrier: Thermal break with a 1/4" separation consisting of a two-part chemically curing, high density polyurethane which is mechanically and adhesively joined to aluminum storefront sections. 2.Encore by Kawneer. 1-3/4 x 3-9/16 inch nominal dimension, thermally broken, extruded aluminum flush glazed framing system for insulated glazing. a.Thermal Barrier: Thermal break consisting of thermoplastic clips joining the aluminum storefront sections together. C.Exterior Framing System: TRIFAB VG 450, by Kawneer. 1-3/4 x 4-1/2 inch nominal dimension, extruded aluminum flush glazed framing systemfor un-insulated glazing systems. D.Exterior Framing System: IR 500 Aluminum Glazed Window Wall System by Kawneer Company, Inc.for un- insulated glazing systems. E.Exterior Framing System: TRIFAB VG 451, by Kawneer. 2 x 4-1/2 inchnominal dimension, extruded aluminum flush glazed framing systemfor insulated glazing systems. F.Exterior Framing System: IR 501 Flush Aluminum Storefront System, by Kawneer Company, Inc., for insulated glazing systems. G.Receptor Channel: Model No. 451VG570 and 451VG572, by Kawneeror equivalent for system specified. 08411-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.Finish:Match storefront system. H.Member Wall Thickness: Each framing member shall provide structural strengthto meet specified performance requirements. 2.4DOORS 2.5COMPOSITE INFILL PANELS A.Composite Panels: 5/16" or 1/2", smooth primed aluminum finish each face. (Masonite panels are not acceptable). B.Acceptable Manufacturer’s: 1.Mapes Industries, Inc., (800) 228-2391. C.Paint infill panels to match storefront system bronze or black finish. 1.1st Coat: Alkali-resistant primer (factory applied). 2.2nd Coat: Acrylic Latex (match existing adjacent finish). 2.6HARDWARE A.Provide hardware specified below and as scheduled in Section 08710. B.Closers: 1.Single Acting Doors: Heavy duty, parallel arm only, surface closer meeting ADA-90 requirements, independently hung, with adjustable back check and 100 degree hold-open; slim line half covers, spray painted aluminum to match aluminum storefront system. Attachment: Thru-bolted in door. No drop-plates allowed. a.Dorma 7601PA Series. b.LCN P1461. c.Norton 8301BF. d.Russwin 2820DA. e.Yale 3301BF. 2.Double Acting Doors (Replacement of existing only): Heavy duty, double acting overhead concealed closer with cover plate. a.Kawneer Huskie. b.Jackson 20-330. c.Rixson 800 Series. C.Hinges: Continuous aluminum geared hinge, concealed leaf, heavy duty, finish to match door finish. Roton Model 780-112HD as manufactured by Hager or equivalent. D.PushBar: Type CP-2 push by Kawneer Company, Inc. Finish: #14 Clear Anodized. Mount push bar at 42 inches above finish floor. E.Pull: Type CO-9 pull by Kawneer Company, Inc. Finish: #14 Clear Anodized. F.Door Holder: 1221-4 cast iron, finish to match door color, by Trimco -Triangle Brass Mfg. Co. G.Weatherstripping: 1.Head and Jamb: Replaceable wool, polypropylene, or nylon wool pile with aluminum strip backing, recessed in frame. 2.Sill: Semi-rigid polymeric material on aluminum anodized to match door; EPDM sweep strip; 38-560 by Kawneer or similar by other named manufacturers. H.Threshold: See Section 08710. 08411-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 I.Glass Guards: Nominal 1/2 inch by 2 inch aluminum bars, mounted at heights shown, flush mounted stile-to-stile. Coordinate with Section 08462. 1.Install glass guards both faces of doors. J.Flush Bolt/Interlocking Device: 1.Exterior Doors: 3 point lock. Provide the following a.Controller Locking System, by Kawneer. 2.Interior Doors: 2 point lock (jamb and header bolts only). Provide one of the following: a.Controller Locking System, by Kawneer. b.Model No.6003-1063, 2 point lock, by Truth Hardware.For distributor, call (800) 866-7884. 3.Substitutions: None accepted. K.Deadbolt Locks: Mortise type, Adams Rite MS-1850A with 4089 exit indicator, less cylinder. See Section 08710 for cylinders and thumbturns. L.Flush Bolts: Kawneer top and bottom flush bolts. M.Lever Lockset: Adams Rite 4530x 4560, less cylinder. Finish: 628. See Section 08710 for cylinder. N.Exit Device: Von Duprin 33A-NL-OP, less cylinder. Finish 626. See Section 08710 for cylinder. O.Hardware: Coordinate with hardware supplier and prepare door for field installation as required for hardware specified and scheduled in Section 08710. 2.7FABRICATION A.Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B.Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints and connections flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C.Develop drainage holes with moisture pattern to exterior. D.Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchorage items. Arrange fasteners, attachments, and jointing to ensure concealment from view. E.Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. F.Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. G.Accessories: 1.Break Metal Closures: Minimum 0.040 inch thick aluminum x length required. Finish shall match adjacent related work. 2.Provide clean sharp edges, uniform in appearance and consistent in shape. Secure in place with concealed fasteners where possible. Exposed fasteners shall match enclosure fabrication. 3.Sill Flashing: Fabricate to configuration indicated and required of minimum 0.040 inch aluminum having exposed edges hemmed. Finish to match adjacent related work. H.Hardware: Coordinate with hardware supplier and prepare door as required for additional field installed hardware as specified in Section 08710. 2.8FINISHES A.Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Architectural Class II anodic coating AA-M12 C22 A31,conforming to AAMA 611, 0.010 mm minimum thickness,#17 Clear, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 08411-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Provide clear finish for all new storefront systems unless partial replacement or repair; then, verify and match existing storefront system color. Maintain same color range. Do not mix light and dark shades. C.Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123 to 2.0 oz/sq ft. D.Apply two coats of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1PREPARATION A.General Contractor shall provide rough openings including rough masonry openings and modifications to existing aluminum storefront components and glazing as shown on the drawings or as required for complete installation of work specified herein. 3.2EXAMINATION A.Verify wall openings are ready to receive work of this Section. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B.Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.3INSTALLATION BY OWNER A.Storefront doors and frames not specifiedin this Section to be furnished and installed by Contractorwill be installed by Owner’s automatic entrance door supplier as specified in Appendix A (Section 08411). 3.4INSTALLATIONBY CONTRACTOR A.Install storefront system components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame assembly to structure. C.Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. D.Break Metals: 1.Set sill flashing in full bed of sealant. Provide riveted end laps of not less than 3 inches. E.Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. F.Install perimeter sealant and backing materials in accordance with Section 07900. G.Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. H.Install hardware using templates provided and in accordance with disabled access regulatory requirements for hardware. Refer to Section 08710 for cylinders and installation requirements. 1.Cylinder and Thumb Turn: 48 inches above finished floor. I.Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. J.Adjust operating hardware and crash bars for smooth operation. 3.5TOLERANCES A.Variation from Plane: 0.03 inches per foot maximum or 0.25 inchesper 30 feet, whichever is less. 08411-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 0.015 inches. 3.6FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Inspect storefront system installation and attachment to building structure. 3.7CLEANING A.Wash down exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. B.Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineralspirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08411-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Planning022417 SECTION 08462 -AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Owner furnished and installed electric operated automatic sliding entrance doorsand control systems,with transom assemblies, including frames, glazing, and hardware. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 07900 -Joint Sealers. 2.Section 08411 -Aluminum Framed Storefronts: Aluminum framed storefront system for installation of Automatic entrance doors. 3.Section 08800 -Glazing: Storefront system glass. 4.Section 16100 -Wiring Methods: Power to automatic doors. 5.Appendix A -Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor. a.General procedures related to Owner furnished products. b.Manufacturers, suppliers, vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products. 1.2ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Pre-Installation Conference: 1.Convene Pre-installation Conference at Site one week prior to commencing Work of this Section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting Work of this Section, including, but not limited to, Wal-Mart Construction Manager, Contractor Project FieldSuperintendent, Aluminum Storefront job foreman, Automatic Entrance Door Manufacturer's Technical Representative, electrical subcontractor field supervisory personnel, and any subcontractor, supplier, or installer directly affecting, or affected by Work of this Section. 2.Contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager two weeks prior to Pre-installation Conference to confirm schedule. 3.Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to automatic entrance door Work, including the following: a.Tour, inspect, and discusscondition of door assembly openings, connections to building structure, electrical requirements, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. b.Review automatic entrance door system requirements including drawings, specifications and other contractdocuments. c.Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. d.Review and finalize construction schedule related to automatic entrance door Work and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. e.Review required inspections, operational testing, and certifying procedures. f.Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. g.Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 4.Record discussions of conference and decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. 1.3DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Product Delivery: Automatic Entrance Door Supplier will deliver products to Site and install products. Automatic Entrance Door Supplier will contact Contractor after Award of Contract to establish a product delivery and installation date and establish acoordination procedure. B.Product Packaging: Automatic Entrance Doors will be delivered in manufacturer's standard packaging with identification markings on each component or package. 08462-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Acceptance at Site: Inspect products with Automatic Entrance Door Supplier upon delivery of products to Site. 1.Verify quantity of products furnished. 2.Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered, or damage to products delivered to Automatic Entrance Door Supplier and Wal-Mart immediately. Upon notification, Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of replacement products. D.Manufacturing Defects: Report suspected manufacturing defects to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Automatic Entrance Door Supplier. Upon notification, Wal-Mart will arrange for repair of manufacturing defects. E.Handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer’s recommendations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.Owner's automatic entrance door Supplier will furnish automatic entrance doorsand operating systemswith all components including glass, hardware and accessories as specified in Appendix A (Section 08462). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine existing conditions with Automatic Entrance Door Supplier prior to start of door installation. 3.2PREPARATION BY CONTRACTOR A.Provide door openings to size indicated on Drawings. B.Provide door head level and parallel with floor at door opening. Size and configuration shall be as indicated on the Drawings. C.Provide door jambs parallel and plumb. D.Provide power to location at door required by door manufacturer ready for power connection. 3.3INSTALLATION BY OWNER A.Owner's automatic entrance door Supplier will install automatic entrance doors and operating systemswith all components including glass, hardware, and accessoriesas specified in Appendix A (Section 08462). 3.4INSTALLATION BY CONTRACTOR A.Make final power connections to automatic entrance doors as specified in Section 16100. B.Furnish and install keyed cylinder and thumbturn if and where specified in Section 08710. C.Interface with Other Work: 1.Coordinate locations of power connections and requirements. 2.Coordinate locations of building management alarm connections and requirements. 3.Coordinate requirements for dooropenings required for automatic entrance door installation. END OF SECTION 08462-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning052920 SECTION 08710 -DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Hardware for doors. 2.Thresholds. 3.Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01600 –Product Requirements: Contractor’s Products Selection checklist. 2.Section 03310 -Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete: Non-shrink grout for thresholds. 3.Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Blocking for miscellaneous hardware mounting. 4.Section 06400 -Architectural Woodwork: Hardware for cabinetry and other finish carpentry. 5.Section 08110 -Steel Doors and Frames: Hardware coordination. 6.Section 08411 -Aluminum Framed Storefronts: Hardware coordination. 7.Section 08462 -Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors: Hardware coordination. 8.Section 16100 -Wiring Methods: Electrified hardware coordination. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): 1.28 CFR Part 36 –ADA Standards for Accessible Design. C.American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1.ANSI A117.1 -Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2.ANSI A 156.2 -Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. 3.ANSI A 156.6 -Architectural Door Trim. 4.ANSI A 156.13 -Mortise Locks and Latches. 5.ANSI A 156.15 -Release Devices –Closer Holder, Electromagnetic and Electromechanical. D.National Fire Protection Institute (NFiPA): 1.NFPA 80 -Fire Doors and Windows. 2.NFPA 101 -Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 3.NFPA 252 -Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. E.Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1.UL 10B -Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2.UL 305 -Panic Hardware. 1.3DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B.Product Packaging: Hardware will be shipped in manufacturer's standard packaging with identification markings on each component or package. C.Receive and accept products and report suspected defects and shipping discrepancies in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. 08710-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.Product Compliance Inspection: Inspect delivered products for compliance with product descriptions in Part 2 herein. Report discrepancies to the Architect. E.Store products in unopened packages in protected dry area to prevent damage from environmental and construction operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS 2.2MANUFACTURERS A.Provide hardware as manufactured by those listed in the Hardware Manufacturer Designation schedule in this Part 2. Provide hardware components as Scheduled in the Hardware Schedule in Part 3 of this Section. B.Provide products by the manufacturers listed herein. No substitutions allowed. C.Product Designations: Hardware may be any of the products listed within the tables below for each specific type. Substitutions will not be permitted. D.Hardware Manufacturer Designations: IDManufacturerTelephoneIDManufacturerTelephone ArArrow USA Lock and Door (800) 839-3157PoPositive Lock(800) 342-7670 Hardware (Assa Abloy) ReReese Enterprises, Inc.(800) 328-0953 DeDetexCorporation(800) 629-2900 RiRixson (Assa Abloy)(800) 457-5670 GJGlynn-Johnson(Allegion)(877)671-7011 RoRockwood(Assa Abloy)(814) 926-2026 HHager Companies(800) 325-9995 ScSchlage (Allegion)(888) 805-9837 IH. B. Ives (Allegion)(877) 671-7011 SecAssa Abloy Electronic (800) 626-7590 LCNLCN Closers (Allegion)(877) 671-7011Security Hardware (formerly Securitron) McMcKinney (Assa Abloy)(800) 346-7707 SelSelect Hinges(800) 585-1019 NaNational Guard Products, (800) 647-7874 Inc.SStanleyHardware(855)365-2407 PPemko Mfg. Co.(Assa West Coast (800) TTrimco (Triangle Brass Mfg.)(323) 262-4191 Abloy)283-9988 VDVon Duprin (Allegion)(877) 671-7011 East Coast (800) 824-3018 2.3SUPPLIERS A.Provide door hardware from one of the following national or local suppliers. 1.DH Pace, Inc., Springfield, MO, Mark Lyons, (417) 831-5585. 2.Positive Lock(Alarm ExitDevice)-Contact: Kimbra White, (800) 342-7670. 2.4REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.Perform work in accordance with the following standards: 1.ANSI A117.1 2.NFPA 101. 3.NFPA 80. 4.NFPA 252. 5.UL 10B. 6.UL 305. B.Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. 08710-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwirters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and acceptable to Authority Having Jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. D.Conform to applicable local, State or Federal disabled access requirements for the installation and operation of door hardware. 2.5FINISHES A.Provide finishes as specified in Part 2 of this Section unless otherwise indicated in the Hardware Schedule for the specific hardware item. 2.6HINGES A.Material: 1.Mortise Butts: Provide full mortise-type hinges with stainless steel pins, except steel pins with steel hinges; non-removable pin (NRP) for exterior and public interior exposure, non-rising pin, flat button with matching plugs, 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches unless otherwise shown. 2.Ball-bearing TypeHinges: Swaged, inner leaf beveled, square corners. 3.Full-surface Reinforcing Pivot: a.For 4-1/2inch butts with standard 1/4-inch backset. b.Install per manufacturer's written instructionsusingattachments furnished with pivot. 4.Continuous Geared Hinge: Full surface type hinge of 6063 T6 Aluminum with thermoplastic polyester bearings, 90 min. fire rated, clear finish. Provide self drilling threaded fasteners for frame and thru bolts for door. B.Hinges by types: TypeDescriptionFinishMANUFACTURER/MODEL StanleyHagerMcKinney H-2Butts: Medium weight door, low frequency, steel652F1791279T2714 H-4Butts: Medium weight door, average frequency, steel652FBB179BB1279TB2714 Select HingeHager H-7Hinge: Continuous geared hingeCLSL21 SD x Roton 780-210 SDTF x FDH StanleyHagerMcKinney H-8Hinge: Surface mounted 3 x 3US2H808BP1808705 H-9Butts: Heavy weight, stainless steel630FBB199BB1199T4B3386 H-11Butts: Medium weight, stainless steel630FBB191BB1191TB3386 H-15Pivot: Full-Surface Reinforcing (Helper Hinge)253 (right or left handed as applicable) 2.7LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS A.Materials: 1.Cylindrical Locks: ANSI A156.2, Series 4000 Grade 1, equipped with 6-pin tumbler; "keyed alike" to match keying system of existing locks to remainif compatible. Provide 2-3/4 inch backset. Provide two keys for each lock. 2.Mortise Locks: ANSI A156.13, Grade 1, equipped with 6-pin tumbler; "keyed alike" to match keying system of existing locks to remain. Provide 2-3/4 inch backset. Provide two keys for each lock. 3.Provide Schlage standard C123 keyway (except at Pharmacy). 4.Provide Schlage Primus XP cylinders for Pharmacy 300 series locks. 5.Master key, key alike or different as directed. 6.Quantity: In addition to two keys for each lock, provide the following: a.Cylinder Change Keys: 6 change keys per change b.Master Keys: 10. 08710-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 7.Latch Sets: Provide push-button releases by turning lever, closing door, or turning emergency release key through hole in outside lever. 8.Strikes: ANSI Strikes, 1-1/4 inches x 4-7/8 inches, with curved lip. Wrought box strikes, with extended lip for latchbolts, except open strike plates may be used in wood frames. Provide dustproof strikes for foot bolts. 9.Tactile Warning: Provide locks with tactile warning for handicapped codes when required by local jurisdiction having authority. B.Locks by types: TypDescriptionFinisMANUFACTURER/MODEL eh Schlage L-1Mortise Cylinder62620-001 L-2Mortise Cylinder62620-001-1-1/4inches L-3Rim Cylinder62620-022 L-4Classroom Lock626ND70PD Rhodes L-5Storeroom Lock (F86) 626ND80PD-Rhodes-25 L-6Office Lock (F82)626ND50PD-Rhodes-10-025 L-7Passage Latch (F75)626ND10S -Rhodes-10-025 L-8Privacy Lock (F76)626ND40S -Rhodes-10-025 L-9Dead Bolt Lock626B661P L-10Access Control Lock626CO-100-CY-70-KP-RHO-626PD L-11Entrance Lock (F81/82)626ND53PD–Rhodes 10–25 L-12Storeroom Lock with 626L9480-06L deadbolt L-13Institutional Lock (F87)626ND82PD-Rhodes 10-025 L-15Entrance Lock with deadbolt626L9453-06L L-16Dead Bolt Lock with 626B663P Thumbturn (Classroom Function) L-17Storeroom Lock (Grade 2)626AL80PD-Saturn L-18Privacy Lock (Grade 2)626AL40S-Saturn L-20Office Lock626AL50PD-Saturn (Grade 2) L-21Passage Lock (Grade 2)626AL10S-Saturn L-22Thumbturn Cylinder62609-905NHxB502-292 L-23Dead Bolt Lock626B660P L-24Entrance/Office Lock (F82)626ND91PD-Rhodes 10-025 L-25Mortise Privacy Lock with 626L9496P 06L Indicator 2.8EXIT DEVICES A.Materials: 1.Provide exposed metal to match hardware. 2.Size and mount units indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with manufacturer's recommendations for exposure condition. Reinforce substrate as recommended. B.Exit Devices by types: TypeDescriptionFinishMANUFACTURER/MODEL Von Duprin, unless otherwise noted. E-1Exit Device: Rim, exit only, UL listed.62699EO-F 08710-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 E-2Exit Device: Rim, exit only, with alarm. Provide exterior 600Positive Lock: access model or time delay, or weatherproofwhen THPASeries (Size as required for door scheduled. scheduled) O/A –Outside Access TDL –Time Delay WE -Weatherproof E-3Exit Device: Surface vertical rod (top rod only), lever trim, 6269927L-F-BE-LBR blank escutcheon, UL listed. E-4Exit Device: Concealed vertical rod, lever trim, blank 6269948L-F-BE escutcheon, UL listed E-5Exit Device: Rim, lever trim, blank escutcheon, UL listed.62699L-F-BE E-7Exit Device: Rim, pull trim.62699NL x 697NL E-8Exit Device: Mortisedelay exit device, pull trim, with alarm. 626CX9975L x Power Transfer #EPT-10SP28992L Power Supply #PS 914(06 Lever) E-10Exit Device: Rim, exit only62699EO E-11Exit Device: Rim, weatherproof, exit only, with alarm.626Detex: V40 EB W AL RWE E-14Exit Device: Vertical Rod, exit only, with alarm.Provide 600Positive Lock: exterior access model or time delay when scheduled.THPASeries O/A –Outside Access TDL –Time Delay E-16Exit Device: Rim, lever trim,62699L-992L-NL E-18Exit Device: Rim, lever trim, UL Listed62699L-F-992L-NL E-19Exit Device: Surface vertical rod, no outside trim, exit only, 6269927EO-F UL listed. E-20Exit Device: Rim, lever trim, blank escutcheon62699L-BE E-21Exit Device62699EO E-23Exit Device: Rim, lever trim, with alarm 626CX99NL-F x 696-NL Power Transfer #EPT-10SP28 Power Supply #PS-914 E-24Exit Device: Rim, lever trim, with alarm626CX99EO-F Power Transfer #EPT-10SP28 Power Supply #PS-914 E-25Exit Device Paddle600Positive Lock 24” Exit Device Paddle 2.9PULLS AND PUSHES A.Materials: ANSI A156.6 for 0.050 inch thickness. B.Push and Pulls by types: TypeDescriptionFinishMANUFACTURER/MODEL IvesTrimcoRockwood P-1Push3-1/2 inches x 15 inches63082001001-270B P-2Pull3-1/2 inches x 15 inches6308311-51012-2137x70B P-3Pull 8inches CTC x 3/4inch dia6268103-81194-2107 P-4Pull 5-1/4 cc6308111-51102T132 P-5Pocket Door Pull Latchingblack1069L 2.10CLOSERS A.Materials & Features: 1.ANSI A156.4, grade 1. 2.ADA/ANSI A117.1 3.UL listed. 4.Non-handed, non-sized; adjustable 1-6. 08710-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 5.180 degree door opening. 6.Standard cover. 7.Multiple backcheck location valve. 8.Extreme temperature fluid. 9.Sex nuts and bolts (SNBs). 10.Provide exposed metal to match hardware. 11.Size and mount units indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with manufacturer's recommendations for exposure condition. Reinforce substrate as recommended. B.Closers by types: TypeDescriptionFinishMANUFACTURER/MODEL LCN C-4Closer: Regular Arm6894011-REG C-5Closer: Parallel Arm6894111-EDA C-6Closer: Regular Arm6894031-REG C-7Closer: Parallel Arm6894031-EDA C-8Closer: Parallel Arm, HO6894111-HEDA C-9Closer: Parallel Arm, HO, positive 6894111-H-CUSH stop C-10Closer: Regular Arm, HO6894031-H C-11Closer: Parallel Arm, positive stop6894031-CUSH C-12Closer: Parallel Arm, Positive Stop 6894111-CUSH 2.11DOOR PROTECTION PLATES A.Materials: J100 Protection Plates conforming to ANSI 156.6, stainless steel, 0.050inch (1.2 mm) minimum thickness. Mount centered, flush with bottom of door. Screws: Phillips head sheet metal screws plated to match plate. B.Protection Plates by types: TypeDescriptionSizeFinishMANUFACTURER/MODEL IvesTrimcoRockwood K-2Kick Plate10inch x (DW-2inch)6308400K1050J102 K-3Armor Plate34inch x (DW-2inch)6308400K1050J101 K-4Armor Plate41inch x (DW-2inch) 6308400K1050J101 Notch for lockset K-5Kick Plate18inch x (DW-2inch)6308400K1050J102 K-6Armor Plate (UL Rated)34inchx (DW-2inch)6308402ULKA050-2 Fire RatedK1050F K-7Armor Plate (UL Rated)36inchx (DW-2inch)6308402ULKA050-2Fire RatedK1050F 2.12STOPS, HOLDERS AND BUMPERS A.Materials: 1.Door stop mounting: Methods to suit substrates encountered (plastic anchor, drywall anchor, expansion shield). 2.Provide gray rubber exposed resilient parts. 3.Do not furnish aluminum floor stops. 4.For most doors, the preferred door stop is Wall Stop type S-1 and is specified as such in the hardware schedule. However, if circumstances prevent a wall stop installation (door too far from perpendicular wall, door swing into adjacent glass, etc.) then substitute a type S-3 or S-4 floor stop as indicated for use intended. 5.Adjust height of floor stops to suit undercut of adjacent door. B.Stops, Holders and Bumpers by types: TypeDescriptionFinishMANUFACTURER/MODEL IvesTrimcoRockwood S-1Wall Stop630WS407CVXW1276CS409 08710-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 TypeDescriptionFinishMANUFACTURER/MODEL IvesTrimcoRockwood S-2Stop & Holder626WS4451207477 S-4Floor Stop626FS43812123/4ES442 RixsonGlynn-Johnson S-5Overhead Stop -3-0 doors6269-336904S S-6Overhead Stop -2-6 doors6269-236902S IvesTrimcoRockwood S-7Stop & Holder. Kickdown type. Alum or FS452-41221-4FF458 satin chrome RixsonGlynn-Johnson S-8Overhead Stop. Medium duty63010-336454S 2.13ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A.Materials & Features: 1.ANSI A156.15, Grade 1. 2.UL listed. 3.Magnet protected against transients and surges up to 600 volts. 4.24V DC 5.Holding force 35 lbs., nominal. 6.Low residual magnetism for easy release of door. 7.Electrical values +10% -15%. 8.Provide exposed metal to match hardware. B.Electromagnetic Door Holders by types: TypeDescriptionFinishMANUFACTURER/MODEL LCNRixon DH-1Door HolderAs ScheduledSEM 7850 689FM-998 SA 2.14THRESHOLDS A.Thresholds by types: TypeDescriptionMANUFACTURER/MODEL National PemkoReese Guard T-1Threshold: 5inches x 1/2inch, abrasive.425HD-SIA 1715AK 5”5” T-4Threshold: 2inchesx 1/8inch, stainless steel plate, smooth surface, BAR6SS-2- beveled 1 side only. Transition threshold between concrete slab and 10 bevel vinyl tile. Set threshold in full bed of silicone sealant, butted to adjacent vinyl tile. Anchor into concrete slab with Hilti Kwik-Con II, #14-134TFH fasteners spaced at 6-inch centers using Matched Tolerance drill bit for dense concrete. T-9Threshold: 5inches,aluminum, stop seal896S2005ATS483AS T-10Threshold: 5 inches, aluminum, stop seal898V2006AT T-11Threshold: 12 inches x ¼” tall with ½” offset. Interlocking Ramp RO50 Threshold. 2.15WEATHERSTRIPPING A.Weatherstripping by types: 08710-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 TypeDescriptionMANUFACTURER/MODEL National PemkoReese Guard W-1Jamb & Head Weatherstripping, aluminum, vinyl insert, screw-on type155V303AV807A W-3Door Bottom Sweep, surface mounted sweep, anodized aluminum, 201NA315CN323A neoprene seal. W-4Meeting Stile Gaskets, aluminum, silicone insert seal.160S303AS807A W-5Jamb Door Gaskets, adhesive application, silicone seal.5050BS88D797B W-6Door Shoe Weatherstripping, for hollow metal doors with inverted 35EN222PK596AF bottom channel, recessed thermo-plastic insert, slotted/adjustable. 2.16MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE A.Silencers: Provide in metal door frames, unless not permitted for fire rating, or unless bumper-type weatherstripping is provided; three for each single door frame, two for double-door frame. B.Miscellaneous Hardware by types: TypeDescriptionSizeFinisMANUFACTURER/MODEL h StanleyIvesRockwood M-1Hasp & Staple3-1/2inches602SP915WS1920 M-3Surface Bolt4inches62640630 M-4Viewer626700620 IvesTrimcoRockwood M-5Extension Flush Bolts(UL)12 inches6264583917555 M-6Automatic Flush Bolt626FB421948 IvesTrimcoRockwood M-8SilencersSR641229-A608 National GuardPemkoReese M-9Drip Cap16AD346CxFWR201A IvesTrimco M-10Door CoordinatorCORxMBxFL3092xMBxW ArrowDetex M-11Door Alarm with mortise 626130 Series ALEAX-500 cylinder M-12Door Alarm with rim cylinderGrayAlarm: EAX-2500F Transformer: PP5152-3 Rockwood M-15Latch Protector630321 Von DuprinSchlageSecuritron M-16Electric Strike, grade 1, FSE (fail secure), 24 6306211 VDC unless noted otherwise in schedule M-17Power SupplyPS902 M-18Push Button660PB M-19Electric Strike626UNL-24 M-20Power SupplyBPS-24-1 M-21Keypad& ControllerDK-26SS M-21aKeypadDK-26PSS Von Duprin M-24Mullion6269954 M-25Strike626499F HES Innovations M-26Electric Strike, grade 1, FSE (fail secure), 24 6309600 C VDC unless noted otherwise in schedule 2.17FABRICATION 08710-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Finish and Base Material Designations: Number indicates Builders Hardware Manufacturer’s Association (BHMA) Code or nearest traditional U.S. commercial finish. B.Where base material and quality of finish are not otherwise indicated, provide at least commercially recognized quality. C.Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1.Fire-Rated Applications: a.Wood or Machine Screws: For the following: 1)Hinges mortised todoors or frames. 2)Strike plates to frames. 3)Closers to doors and frames. b.Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: 1)Surface hinges to doors. 2)Closers to doors and frames. 3)Surface-mounted exit devices. 2.Spacers or Sex Bolts: Forthrough bolting of hollow-metal doors. 3.Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive Work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B.Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. 3.2INSTALLATION A.Hardware Mounting Heights: Door and Hardware Institute Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames, except as otherwise indicated. 1.Conform to requirements of applicable local, State or Federal disabled access requirements for the installation and operation of door hardware. 2.Install electromagnetic door holder at 24 inches above finish floor elevation at manufacturer’s recommended distance from the door’s leading edge. B.Install each hardware item to comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise specified. C.Thru-bolt closers on doors. D.Vestibule Thresholds: Install as shown on Drawings. 3.3ADJUSTING A.Hardware Adjustment: Adjust hardware for proper operation and functionat construction completion. Instruct Wal- Mart personnel in proper maintenance and adjustment. 3.4HARDWARE SCHEDULE A.Hardware Set numbers below correspond to the Door Schedule as shown on the drawings. B.The Hardware Schedule below represents the full set of hardware for each door listed. Refer to the Door Schedule and Schedule Notes for actual hardware components required for each door in this project. 08710-9 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Any hardware item specified in the Tables in Part 2 above which corresponds to the mark associated with the item ( E.g. “H-1, E-2, etc) as shown in the Hardware Schedule below may be provided. D.For interiorhollow metal doorsand exterior building hollow metal doorswhich have a tactile exit sign installed on the door, install a door closer (C-5) if a closer does not exist on the door. Door 101A –Vestibule: (Aluminum/Glass, Bi-Parting Automatic w/ Breakaway) 1 ea.(L-1)Keyed Cylinder 1 ea.Locking DeviceSee Section 08462. 1 ea.ThresholdSee Section 08462. All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Section 08462. Door 101B –Vestibule: (Aluminum/Glass, Bi-Parting Automatic w/ Breakaway) 1 ea.(L-1)Keyed Cylinder 1 ea.Locking DeviceSee Section 08462. 1 ea.ThresholdSee Section 08462. All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Section 08462. Door 101C –Vestibule: (Aluminum/Glass, Bi-Parting Automatic w/ Breakaway) 1 ea.(L-1)Keyed Cylinder 1 ea.Locking DeviceSee Section 08462. 1 ea.ThresholdSee Section 08462. All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Section 08462. Door 101D –Vestibule: (Aluminum/Glass, Bi-Parting Automatic w/ Breakaway) 1 ea.(L-1)Keyed Cylinder 1 ea.Locking DeviceSee Section 08462. 1 ea.ThresholdSee Section 08462. All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Section 08462. Door 946C –Pickup Storage: (HM, Single) 1 ea.(H-7)Continuous Hinge 1 ea.(L-5)Storeroom Lock 1 ea,(C-9)Closer 1 ea.(T-4)Threshold 1 ea.(K-3)Armor Plate 3 ea.(M-8)Silencers Doors 946B–Pickup Storage: (Aluminum/Glass, Automatic w/Breakaway) 1 ea.(L-1)Keyed Cylinder 1 ea.Locking DeviceSee Appendix A (Section 08462). All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified inAppendix A (Section 08462). END OF SCHEDULE END OF SECTION 08710-10 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning043021 SECTION 08800 -GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Glass and glazing for interior and exterior metal frames and doors. 2.Glass and glazing for standard storefront and manual swing entrance doors. 3.Owner furnished and installed Glazing for Pickup Exterior Surface Mounted Automatic Slidingdoor. 4.Owner furnished and installed glazing for Pickup Exterior Jamb Mounted Automatic slidingdoor. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 08110 -Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and fixed window frames. 2.Section 08411 -Aluminum Framed Storefronts: Aluminum storefront framing system. 3.Section 08462 -Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors: Glazed doors. 4.Section 08710 -Door Hardware: Hardware coordination. 5.Appendix A –Products and Work By Owner or Separate Contractor: Manufacturers, suppliers, performance, and general procedures related to Owner furnished products. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the test by these basic designations only. B.American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1.ANSI Z97.1 -Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. C.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM C920 -Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 2.ASTM C1036 -Flat Glass. 3.ASTM C1048 -Heat-Treated Flat Glass -Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 4.ASTM D2000 -Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 5.ASTM E 1886 -Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials. 6.ASTM E 1996 -Performance of Exterior Windows,Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes. 7.ASTM E2074 -Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies. D.Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA): 1.FGMA -Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual. E.National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA): 1.NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2.NFPA 257: Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies. F.Consumer Product Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing. 1.CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1201. G.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1.UL 10B -Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE 08800-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Conform to FGMA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods. B.Provide permanent labeling for safety glass indicating conformance with specified standards. C.Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with a UL label of certification or label of certification of a testing agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 degrees and the fire- resistance rating in minutes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.Owner’s Supplier will furnishand install glazing for PickupAutomaticsliding exterior doorsas part of the Owner furnished sliding door package specified inAppendix A (Section 08462). 2.2GLASS MATERIALS A.Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (Fully Tempered), Condition A (Uncoated), Type I (Transparent Glass, Flat), Quality q3 (Glazing Select). 1.Conform to ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR Part 1201. 2.Tempered glazing panels as specified in the Glass Schedule below (including doors, sidelights, storefronts, and transoms) shall comply with the CPSC 16CFR Part 1201 criteria for Category I or II as follows: a.Glazing Panels 9 sq. ft. or less:. Category I. b.Glazing Panels morethan 9 sq. ft.: Category II. c.Thickness: 1)Doors and Window Frames: 1/4 inch unless otherwise shown or specified. 2)Pharmacy Privacy Walls: 1/2 inch. 3)3/8 inch at butt glazing where shown on Drawings. 3.Clear: Class 1 (Clear). 4.Tinted: Class 2 (Tinted Heat Absorbing and Light Reducing). a.Color: Gray tint or bronze tint (match existing). B.Acid-etched Glass: Tempered, acid-etched, ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (Fully Tempered), Condition A (Uncoated), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select). Provideglass with Opaque finish acid- etched one side by Walker Glass Co. Ltd. (888) 320-3030. C.Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA252 for door assemblies and NFPA257 for window assemblies. 1.Vision Light Metal Frame: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Factory prime for field painting. Size as indicated on Drawings. 2.Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from two plies of clear, ceramic flat glass; 5/16-inch total nominal thickness; for fire doors and frame assemblies rated up to 1-1/2 hours, tested and certified to meet requirements of standard UL 10B and CPSC 16CFR Part 1201 criteria for Category I and Category II applications. Provide the following product: , a.FireLite Plus by Nippon Electric Glass Company, Ltd., and distributed by Technical Glass Products Snoqualmie, WA, (800) 426-0279. 3.Glazing Tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride (PVC) foam, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two sides, maximum water absorption by volume of 2 percent. Glass panels that exceed 1,393 sq. inches for 90- minute ratings shall be glazed with fire-rated glazing tape supplied by manufacturer. D.Spandrel Glass: Tempered, ceramic-coated heat treated, (ASTM C 1048) Condition B (spandrel glass, inner surface ceramic coated), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), and complying with the following requirements: 08800-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.Glass Thickness: 1/4 inch, unless indicatedor specifiedotherwise. a.Unit Thickness: 1 inch thick units; 1/4 inch thicktemperedinner and outer panes, with 1/2 inch air space. 2.Color: Black. 3.Location: Provide at exterior glazing locations where indicated. E.Identification: 1.Each unit of tempered glass shall be permanently identified by the manufacturer. The identification shall be etched or ceramic fired on the glass and be visible when the unit is glazed. 2.Tempered spandrel glass is exempted from permanent labeling but shall be identified by the manufacturer with a removable paper label. 2.3GLAZING COMPOUNDS A.PolysulphideSealant: Two component, chemical curing, non-sagging type; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25. B.Silicone Sealant: Single component, chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non- bleeding, non-staining; cured Shore A hardness of15-25. 1.Color: Clear. C.Acrylic terpolymer compounded especially for glazing; non-hardening, non-staining, and non-bleeding. 2.4GLAZING ACCESSORIES A.Setting Blocks: Resilient blocks of 70 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; compatible with glazing sealant. B.Spacers: Resilient blocks of 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness; self adhesive on one side; compatible with glazing sealant. C.Filler Rods: Closed cell or jacketed foam rods of polyethylene, butyl, neoprene, polyurethane, or vinyl; compatible with glazing sealant. D.Joint Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: As recommended by glazing sealant manufacturer. E.Gaskets: ASTM D2000, SBC 415 to 3BC 620; extruded or molded neoprene or EPDM, black. F.Butt Joint “H” Trim: CRL Satin Anodized 1/4" "H" Channel by C.R. Laurence Company Inc., Los Angeles, CA (800) 421-6144. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for work of this Section. B.Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.2PREPARATION A.Cleancontact surfaces; prime or seal where recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended application. B.Inspect glass edges immediately prior to setting; discard those with edge damage that will contribute to glazing failure. 3.3GLAZING A.Locate setting blocks at quarter points of sill; set in sealant if heel or toe bead is required. 08800-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Install spacers inside and out except where preshimmed tape or glazing gaskets are to be used. C.Set each piece in a series to other pieces in pattern draw, bow, or other visually perceptible characteristics. D.Provide glazing sealants and gaskets as required for particular glazing application. Coordinate with other Sections for material compatibility. E.Gaskets: 1.Provide adequate anchorage, particularly for driven-in wedge gaskets. 2.Miter andweld ends of channel gaskets at corners to provide continuous gaskets. 3.Seal face gaskets at corners with sealant to close opening and prevent withdrawal of gaskets from corners. F.Do not leave voids in glazing channels except as specifically indicated or recommended by glass manufacturer. Force sealant into channel to eliminate voids. Tool exposed surfaces to slight wash away from joint. Trim and clean promptly. G.Do not allow sealant to close weeps of aluminum framing. H.Provide filler rod where sealants are used in the following locations: 1.Head and jamb channels. 2.Colored glass over 75 united inches in size. 3.Clear glass over 125 united inches in size. 3.4INSTALLATION -BUTT GLAZED METHOD A.Apply “H” Trim at butt joints at locations shown on the drawings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.5SLIDING WINDOW TRACK INSTALLATION A.Attach sliding window track assembly to hollow metal frame with double faced tape or adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.6ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Immediately priorto Wal-Mart acceptance of Project, replace broken or otherwise damaged glass. Wash and polish glass inside and out. 3.7GLASS SCHEDULE A.Provide type of glass specified for the applications scheduled as follows: APPLICATION/LOCATIONTYPE OF GLASS Interior WindowsClear tempered glass unless otherwise shown or specified Interior Hollow Metal DoorsClear tempered or fire-protection-rated glass as scheduled on the drawings. Interior storefront including storefront doorsClear tempered glass. Locations shown.Spandrel Glass END OF SECTION 08800-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II -Store Planning072619 SECTION 09250 -GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Interior nonload-bearing steel stud partition framing 20 (30 mil) gage and lighter (designed for 5 pounds per square foot uniform load perpendicular to partition). 2.Suspension system for interior gypsum ceilings 3.Gypsum board. 4.Gypsum sheathing. 5.Backer materials: Backer panels for wall tile and plastic wall panels. 6.Textured wallboard coating. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 01351 –Regulatory a.Disposal and removal of construction and universal waste. b.Work practice control methods for airborne respirable dust. 2.Section 05400 -Cold Formed Metal Framing: Load-bearing steel stud exterior and interior wall framing 20 gage and heavier and ceiling joists. Cold formed deep leg track for interior nonload-bearing steel stud partitions. Metal stud header wall framing and bracing supported from roof structure. 3.Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood furring strips, plywood, blocking, and fasteners attached to partition framing. 4.Section 07210 -Building Insulation: Thermal and acoustical insulation. 5.Section 07840 -Firestopping: Installation of firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated partitions. 6.Section 09900 -Paints and Coatings: Paint finish applied to gypsum board. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the test by these basic designations only. B.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM A 653 -Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot- Dip Process 2.ASTM C 475 -Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. 3.ASTM C 557 -Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. 4.ASTM C 645 -Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. 5.ASTM C 754 -Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 6.ASTM C 840 -Application And Finishing Of Gypsum Board. 7.ASTM C954-Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 inches to 0.112 inches in Thickness. 8.ASTM C 1002 -Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws For The Application Of Gypsum Panel Products Or Metal Plaster Bases To Wood Studs Or Steel Studs. 9.ASTM C 1177 -Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. 10.ASTM C 1178 -Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel. 11.ASTM C 1396 -Gypsum Board 12.ASTM C 1629 -Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels. 13.ASTM C 1658 -Glass Mat Gypsum Panels. 14.ASTM D 3273 -Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surfaces of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 15.ASTM D 3274 -Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint Films by Microbial (Fungal or Algal) Growth or Soil and Dirt Accumulation. 09250-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Gypsum Association (GA): 1.GA-214-Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. 2.GA-216-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 3.GA-234-Control Joints For Fire-Resistance Rated Systems. 4.GA-600-Fire Resistance and Sound Control Design Manual. D.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1.OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. E.Steel Stud Manufacturer's Association(SSMA) 1.Member listing F.Steel Framing Industry Association (SFIA) 1.Member listing 1.3ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Minimize dust emissions and provide equipment that suppresses dust. B.Dispose of construction waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01351 Regulatory Compliance Supplement. 1.4QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of light gage metal framing components and gypsum wallboard with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.5DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Section 01600 -Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B.Protect metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. C.Store and protect metal framing with weatherproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. D.Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. E.Stack gypsum board flat to prevent sagging. 1.6PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS A.Environmental Requirements: 1.Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board in conformance with GA-216. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1GENERAL A.Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTME119 by an independent testing agency. Products used in the assembly shall carry a classification label from a testing laboratory acceptable to Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2.2FRAMING MATERIALS 09250-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1.ClarkDietrich, West Chester, OH (513) 870-1100. 2.The Steel Network, Raleigh, NC (888) 474-4876. 3.Cemco Steel, Ft. Worth, TX (817) 568-1525. 4.Telling Industries, LLCWilloughby, OH (866) 372-6384. 5.Marino/WARE, South Plainfield, NJ (800) 627-4661. 6.Other manufacturers listed as a member ofSSMAor SFIA. B.Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide steel framing products with an average recycled content of steel products such that thepostconsumer recycled content plus 1/2 of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. C.Interior Nonload-Bearing Partition Framing: ASTM C 645and C 754; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped, 1 ¼- inch flange width, punched for utility access, depth and gages as indicated below unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Partition Height/Unsupported Max Stud Spacing Stud DepthLength*Minimum Gage (mil)(Center-to-Center) 3-5/8 inchesUp to 8’-0”25 gage (18 mil)24-inches 3-5/8 inchesUp to 13’-4”20 gage (30 mil)24-inches 3-5/8 inches13’-4” to 16’-3”20 gage (30 mil)16-inches 6-inchesUp to 18’-9”20 gage (30 mil)24-inches 6-inches18’-9” to 22’-11”20 gage (30 mil)16-inches *Heights/Lengths outside these limits will require additional bracing. Reference Drawings for details. D.Contractor’s Option: In lieu of traditional framing members, Contractor may use modified framing members of equivalent thickness for 20 and 25 gage metal such as ProSTUD Drywall Framing System byClarkDietrichor comparable framing members by other manufacturers listed as members of SSMA, or SFIA. E.Partition Floor Tracks and Runners: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped, same depth and gage as studs, tight fit; solid web. F.Deflection (Capture)Track: Deep leg track at roof deck or structure to provide vertical travel as indicated. 1.Contractor's Option: Manufacturer’s standard double or single deflection track as follows: a.VertiClip or VertiTrack by The Steel Network. If this option is used, track maybe 20 gage (30 mil) for all stud sizes. b.FastTop Clip by ClarkDietrich. c.MaxTrak or BlazeFrame by ClarkDietrich d.SLP-TRK by Brady Innovations as distributed by CEMCO. e.Comparable modified deflection tracks by other manufacturers listed as members of SSMA, orSFIA. G.Furring and Bracing: AISI S220; galvanized sheet steel. 1.Studs: ST25 -2-1/2 inch deep, 25 gage (18 mil). 2.Studs: ST25 -3-5/8 inch deep, 25 gage (18 mil). 3.Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch deep x 2-1/2 inch wide, 25 gage (18 mil) 4.Hat-Shaped Channels: 7/8 inch deep x 1-1/2 inch wide, 25 gage (18 mil). 5.Cold-Formed Channels: 3/4 x 1/2 inch and 1-1/2 x 17/32 inch, 16 gage (54 mil). 6.Z Furring Channel: 1-1/2 inch deep, 25 gage (18 mil). 7.Clip Angles: 2 inches x 2 inches x 16 gage (54 mil) x 1/4 inch less than stud width. 8.Contractor’s Option: In lieuof cold-formedchannels and clip angles for horizontal wall bridging, Contractor may provide one of the following: a.Bridge Bar by the Steel Network. b.TradeReady Spazzer9200 Bridging and Bracing Bar by ClarkDietrich. c.Comparable products by other manufacturers listed as members of SSMA, or SFIA. H.Ceiling Joists, Tracks, Headers at Partition Openings, Framing Attachment Angles, and Fasteners: Specified in Section 05400. 09250-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 I.Partition Framing Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant self-drilling self-tapping steel screws. 1.22 (27 mil) Gage Framing: ASTM C 1002; 3/8 inch Type S pan head. 2.20 (30 mil) Gage and Heavier Framing: ASTM C 954; 5/8 inch Type S-12 low-profile head. J.Bracing toFraming Attachment Angle Fasteners: #12 diameter pan head corrosion-resistant self-drilling screws. K.Partition Floor Track Anchorage Device: Low velocity powder-actuated drive pins; minimum 0.138 inch shank diameter x 1-1/2 inch shank length with 7/8 inch diameter washer. 1.Hilti PAT System using X-C37P8S36 Pins, by Hilti, Tulsa, OK,(800) 879-8000. 2.Ramset/Red Head System using 1500SD Pins, by ITW Ramset/Redhead, Wood Dale, IL,(630) 350-0370. L.Wall Furring to Concrete or Masonry Wall Fasteners: Hex head sleeve anchors; minimum 1/4 inch diameter x minimum 1-1/8 inch embedment. 1.Slv Anch HLC-HX 5/16 x 2-5/8, by Hilti, Tulsa, OK,(800) 879-8000. 2.Dynabolt HN-1413, by ITW Ramset/Redhead, Wood Dale, IL,(708) 350-1558. M.Furring Channel to Masonry or Concrete Surface Fasteners: Low velocity powder-actuated drive pins of size to suit application. N.Flat Straps and Backing Plates: ASTM A 653; galvanized sheet steel, gage, shape, and configuration as indicated on Drawings. 1.Contractor's Option: In lieuof 2-inch continuous metal strap, Contractor may provide one of the following: a.Bridge Bar by The Steel Network. b.TradeReady Spazzer 9200 Bridging and Bracing Bar by ClarkDietrich. c.Comparable products by other manufacturers listed as members of SSMA, or SFIA. O.Suspension System: 1.Tie Wire: ASTMA641/A641M, Class1 zinc coating, soft temper, double strand of 16 ga wire. 2.Wire Hangers: ASTMA641/A, Class1 zinc coating, soft temper, 8 ga. 3.Carrying Channels: AISI S220; galvanized sheet steel, 1-1/2 x 17/32 inch, 16 gage (54 mil). 4.Furring Channels: AISI S220; galvanized, hat-shaped, rigid furring channels,7/8 inchdeep. 5.Furring Channel Clips: AISI S220; galvanized sheet steel, 1-1/2 inch. 2.3GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A.Manufacturer: United States Gypsum Company, Chicago, IL. (800) 874-4968. 1.American Gypsum Company, Dallas, TX (800) 545-6302. , Tampa, FL. (800) 233-8990. 2.CertainTeed Corp 3.Georgia-Pacific, Atlanta, GA. (800) 284-5347. 4.National Gypsum Company, Gold Bond Building Products, Charlotte, NC. (800) 628-4662. 5.USG Corporation, Chicago, IL. (800) 850-3839. 6.The Steel Network, Raleigh, NC (888) 474-4876. (Accessories only) 7.ClarkDietrich, West Chester, OH (513) 870-1100.(Accessories only). 8.Fry Reglet, (800) 237-9773. (Accessories only) 9.Other manufacturers listed as members of SSMA, or SFIA. B.Standard Gypsum Board: Sheetrock, ASTM C 1396 1.Thickness: 1/2 inch and 5/8 inch thick 2.Length, Long Edges, Cut:Maximum permissible length, edges tapered, ends square cutsquare. 3.Provide one of the following: a.Gypsum Wallboard by American Gypsum. b.CertainTeed Regular Gypsum Boardby Certainteed. c.ToughRockGypsum Boardby Georia-Pacific. d.Gold Bond Gypsum Board by National Gypsum. e.Sheetrock Gypsum Panel by United States Gypsum. C.Water Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396. 09250-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.Thickness:1/2 inch thick 2.Length, Long Edges, Cut: Maximum permissible lengths,edges tapered,ends square cutsquare. 3.Core:Moisture or mold resistant core. 4.Mold Resistance: Score of 10 when tested in accordancewith ASTM D 3273/3274. 5.Provide one of the following: a.M-Bloc Mold and Moisture Resistant by American Gypsum. b.M2Tech Gypsum Board by Certainteed. c.DensArmor Plus by Georgia-Pacific. d.Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board by National Gypsum. e.Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panel by United States Gypsum. D.Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, Type X 1.Thickness: 5/8 inch 2.Length, Long Edges, Cut:Maximum permissible lengths, edges tapered,ends square cut. 3.Provide one of the following products: a.FireBlocType X by American Gypsum. b.CertainTeedType X Gypsum Board by Certainteed. c.ToughRock Fireguard Xby Georgia-Pacific. d.Gold Bond Fire Shield by National Gypsum. e.Sheetrock Firecode X Gypsum Panel by United States Gypsum. E.Water and Fire Resistant Gypsum Board:ASTM C 1396, Type X 1.Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2.Length, Long Edges, Cut:Maximum permissible lengths, edges tapered,ends square cut. 3.Core:Non-combustible fire-resistant and mold resistant core. 4.Mold Resistance: Score of 10 in accordance with ASTM D3273/3274. 5.Provide one of the following: a.M-Bloc Mold Resistant Type C by American Gypsum. b.Gold Bond Brand XP Fire-Shield C Gypsum Board, by National Gypsum. c.Sheetrock Mold Tough Firecode Type X Gypsum Panel, by United States Gypsum. d.ToughRockFireguard X Mold-Guard Gypsum Board by Georgia Pacific. e.M2Tech Type X Gypsum Board or Diamondback Glasroc Tile Backer Type X by CertainTeed. F.Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTMC1396,Type X. 1.Thickness: As shown on drawings. 2.Length, Long Edges, Cut: Maximum permissible length, edges tapered, ends cut square. 3.Core: Enhanced and mold resistant gypsum core. 4.Mold Resistance: Score of 10 in accordance with ASTM 3273/3274. 5.Surface Abrasion: Meets or exceeds ASTM C 1629, Classification Level 1. 6.Surface Indentation: Meets or exceeds ASTM C 1629, Classification Level 1. 7.Soft-Body Impact: Meets or exceeds ASTM C 1629, Classification Level 1. 8.Provide one of the following products: a.M-Bloc AR Type X by American Gypsum. b.SHEETROCK Brand Abuse Resistant Firecode X Gypsum Panel by USG. c.Gold Bond Brand Hi-Abuse XP Fire-Shield by National Gypsum. d.AirRenew Extreme Abuse Type X Gypsum Board by CertainTeed. e.ToughRock Fireguard X Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board by Georgia-Pacific. G.Abuse and Water Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTMC1396,Type X. 1.Thickness: As shown on drawings. 2.Length, Long Edges, Cut: Maximum permissible length, edges tapered, ends cut square. 3.Core: Enhanced and mold resistant gypsum core. 4.Mold Resistance: Score of 10 in accordance with ASTM 3273/3274. 5.Surface Abrasion: Meets or exceeds ASTM C 1629, Classification Level 1. 6.Surfact Indentation: Meets or exceeds ASTM C 1629, Classification Level 1. 7.Soft-Body Impact: Meets or exceeds ASTM C 1629, Classification Level 1. 8.Provide one of the following products: 09250-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 a.M-BlocAR Type X by American Gypsum. b.ToughRock Fireguard X Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board by Georgia-Pacific. c.Gold Bond Brand Hi-Abuse XP Fire-Shield by National Gypsum. d.AirRenew Extreme Abuse Type X Gypsum Board by CertainTeed. e.SHEETROCK Brand Mold Tough® AR Firecode® X Panels by USG. H.Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396, Type X, 5/8” thick, gypsum wallboard manufactured to produce extra resistance to moisture and sagging. 1.ProRoc Brand Exterior Soffit Board by CertainTeed. 2.DensArmorPlus by Georgia-Pacific. 3.Gold Bond Brand Exterior Soffit Board by National Gypsum. 4.Type X Soffit Board by Temple Inland. 5.Sheetrock Brand Exterior Gypsum Ceiling Board by United States Gypsum . I.Gypsum Board Fasteners: 1.Metal Framing: ASTM C 954 and C 1002,Type S-12 bugle head, corrosion-resistant self-drilling self- tapping steel screws. a.One Layer 1/2 Inch: 1 inch. b.One Layer 5/8 Inch: 1-1/8 inch. c.Two Layers: 5/8 Inch: 1-7/8 inch. 2.Wood Furring: ASTM C 1002, 1-1/4 inch, Type W bugle head, corrosion-resistant self-drilling steel screws. J.Shaftwall Liner: ASTM C 1396, Type X; 1 inch thick, fire resistant gypsum core shaftwall liner panel with water- repellent paper facings. 1.Shaft Liner Gypsum Wallboard by American Gypsum. 2.Gold BondFire-Shield Shaftliner by National Gypsum. 3.Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Liner Panels by United States Gypsum K.Gypsum Board Accessories: 1.Corner Beads: Sheetrock Brand No. 104 Dur-A-Bead galvanized steel cornerbeadby United States Gypsum. 2.Edge Trim: Galvanized steel casing. a.No. 200-B, L shapeby United States Gypsumfor tight abutment at edges. b.No. 200-A, J shape by United States Gypsum at other locations. 3.Control Joint Accessory Piece: a.No. 093 roll-formed zincby ClarkDietrich. 4.Vertical Movement Joint Trim: a.No DRMZ-625-200 aluminum Z shape trim by Fry Reglet. 5.Adhesive: a.Commercial Adhesive complying with ASTM C 557. 6.Acoustical Insulation: a.Unfaced fiberglass batts specifiedin Section 07210. 7.Firestopping: a.Specified in Section 07840 for penetrations of fire-resistive rated gypsum board. 2.4JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A.General: Comply with ASTMC475. B.Joint Tape: 1.Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper tape. 2.Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper tape. 3.Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10/10 grid glass mesh tape. 4.Backer Panels: a.Glass-Mat Backer Material: 10/10 grid glass mesh tape. C.Joint Compound 1.Interior Gypsum Wallboard: 09250-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 a.Sheetrock Brand Ready-Mixed Lightweight All-Purpose Joint Compound with Dust Control, by United States Gypsum. b.ProForm Lite Ready Mix Joint Compound with Dust-Tech by National Gypsum. 2.Exterior Applications: a.Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound. b.Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer. 3.Backer Panels: a.Glass-Mat Backer Materials: Use setting-type taping compound as recommended by backer panel manufacturer and that is rated 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273 and evaluated in accordance with ASTM D 3274. 2.5GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD A.ASTM C 1396 and ASTM C 1177; water resistant gypsum core surfaced on face andback with inorganic glass fiber mats; thickness shown on the Drawings, maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut.Provide one of the following products: 1.GlasRoc Brand Sheathing as manufactured by CertainTeed. 2.Dens-Glass Gold gypsum sheathing as manufactured by Georgia-Pacific. 3.eXP Sheathing by National Gypsum. 4.GreenGlass sheathing by Temple-Inland. 5.SecureRock by United States Gypsum. B.Sheathing Board Fasteners: ASTM C 954 and ASTM C 1002, 1 inch length for 1/2 inch sheathing board and 1-1/4 inch lengthfor 5/8inch thick sheathing board, Type S-12 bugle head, corrosion-resistant self-drilling steel screws. 2.6BACKER MATERIALS A.Provide cementitious backing materials as follows where indicated to receive cement board, cement backer board, or cementitious backer board. 1.Fiber Cement Backing Board: Hardibacker by James Hardie Building Products, Mission Viejo, CA (888) 542-7343. 2.Thickness as indicated. a.Hardibacker 250, 1/4". b.Hardibacker 500, 1/2". c.Other as noted on Drawings. B.Glass-Mat Backer Materials: Provide glass-mat moisture resistant gypsum core backer materials complying with ASTMC1178. Glass-Mat Backer Material shall score a rating of 10 when tested according to ASTM D 3273. Thickness as shown on the Drawings.Provide Type X where required as shown on Drawings. Provide one of the following products: 1.GlasRoc Tilebacker by Certainteed. 2.DensShield Tile Backerby Georgia Pacific. 3.GreenGlass Tile Backer by Temple-Inland. 2 XP Tile Backer by National Gypsum. 4.Gold Bond e C.Provide fiberglass matt faced high density polyiso board as follows as option to where indicated to receive glass- mat backer material behind tile. 1.Waterproof Tile Backer Board: GoBoard by Johns Manville, Denver, CO (303) 978-2000. 2.Thickness as indicated on drawings. 2.7TEXTURE FINISHES A.Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. B.Provide textured finish as specified in Publication SA 933 of the United States Gypsum Co. (USG), or equivalent by other wallboard manufacturers. 09250-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 a.Vision Center: Medium knock-down pattern PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine existing conditions and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that building framing components are ready to receive Work. Verify that rough-in utilities are in-place and located where required. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B.Examine panels to assure they are dry and free of moisture and mold damage as evidenced by discoloration, sagging, irregular shape, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination, and discoloration. C.Beginning of erection and installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK A.Coordinate erection of studs with hollow metal door and window frames, sliding window, and overhead coiling door frames. B.Coordinate installation of anchors, supports, and blocking for mechanical, electrical, and building accessory items installed within framing. 3.3INSTALLATION -STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A.Installation Standards: Comply with ASTMC754, and ASTMC840 requirements that apply to framing installation and with further details and instruction by gypsum board manufacturer's written construction guidelines. B.Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." 3.4INSTALLATION -PARTITION FRAMING A.Install studs and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, ASTM C 754, GA-216, and GA-600. B.Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. C.Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. D.Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. E.Metal Stud Spacing: Unless otherwise notedon Drawings, provide interior framing at maximum spacing specified herein at 2.2C.Provide spacing of 16 inches on center maximum for walls to receive ceramic tile. F.Align stud web openings horizontally. G.Splice studs with minimum 8 inch nested lap, fasten each stud flange with minimum two screws. H.Construct corners using minimum three studs. I.Place studs as indicated on Drawings, minimum 2 inches from abutting walls. J.Install headers and jambs at partition openings using load-bearing C-shaped studs as noted on Drawings and as 09250-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 specified in Section 05400. K.Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items. L.Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. M.Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to finished ceiling only and for partitions extending through ceiling to building structure above. N.Maintain clearance under structural members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. 1.Where indicated, construct partition to accommodate vertical deflection. 2.Install optional products specified in Part 2 above in accordance with manufacturer's printed instruction. a.Install clip with step bushing in center of slotted hole. b.Use a minimum of two fasteners per clip leg to connect clip to structure and partition framing. c.Attach clip to each stud by screwing through the center of each step bushing. O.Fasten studs adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections, and corners to top and bottom runner flanges in double-stud fashion with metal lock fastener tools. 1.Securely fasten studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door and borrowed-light frames. 2.Place horizontally a cut-to-length section of runner with web-flange bend at each end, fasten with minimum one screw per flange. 3.Position a cut-to-length stud (extending to top runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header. P.Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to undersideof solid structure. Q.Lateral Bracing for Metal Studs: 1.In metal stud partitions and bulkheads where length of metal studs is over 8 feet, install lateral bracing using one of the following methods: a.Install 1-1/2 inch cold-formed channel through stud web holes and screw attach in place with clip angles. Lap channels by nesting one inside the other to a depth of at least 8 inches and wire tie together. b.Install optional products specified in Part 2 above in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. c.Install field-cut runner for solid bridging at each end of wall, adjacent to wall openings, and 10 feet on center maximum. Install 1-1/2 inch wide, 20(30 mil)gage strap bracing on both sides of stud. Fasten strap bracing to each solid bridging runner section with four screws. 2.Gypsum Board Partitions: Space lateral bracing at the following intervals: a.Partitions sheathed with gypsum board full height, each side: Provide bracing at mid-height. b.Partitions sheathed with gypsum board partial height (one or both sides): Provide bracing at 48-inches on center for unsheathed height of partition. 3.Wire Mesh Partitions: Space lateral bracing at the following intervals: a.Stud Length Greater Than 8 Feet: Provide bracing at 60-inches on center. R.Install braced framing of steel stud framing as indicated on Drawings. Use only screw attachments. S.Blocking: Screw attach wood blocking between studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories and hardware. T.Framing Fastening: Fasten framing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and schedule below, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. ConnectionFastener Floor Track to Concrete1-Pin at 32 inches on center Partition Stud to Floor Track1-Screw each side at each flange Stud Brace Web to Stud Web2-Screws Plates and Straps to Studs2-Screws Stud Web to Stud Web2-Screws 09250-9 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 StudBrace Web to Attachment Angle2-Screws Lateral Bracing to Partition Stud Using Clip 2-Screws to stud and 2 -Screws to cold Anglesrolled channel Runner to Header1-Screw at 16 inches on center, maximum 6 inches from each end 3.5INSTALLATION -SUSPENDED CEILING A.Unless otherwise shown, install suspended ceilings in accordance with the following requirements. B.Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1.Install carryingchannels 4 feet on centerwith hanger wire spaced a max of 4 feet on centeralong carrying channels. Attach furring channels spaced 16 inches on centerperpendicular to carryingchannelswith double strand of saddle tied tie wire or furring channel clips. Apply 1/2inch gypsum board with its long dimension at right angles to the furring channels. Attach gypsum board with 1inch self drilling drywall screws 12 inches on centerin the field of the board 8 or 12 inches on centerat butt joints, located not more than 1/2 inches from edges. 2.Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, orother equally effective means. 3.Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that interferes with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 4.Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5.Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6.Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7.Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. C.Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. D.Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 3.6INSTALLATION -FURRING A.Furring Channels: 1.Attach vertically spaced at maximum 16 inches on center, to masonry and concrete surfaces with hammer set or powder driven fasteners staggered 24 inches on center on opposite flanges. 2.Nest channels 8 inches at splices and anchor with 2 fasteners in each wing. B.Wall Furring: 1.Secure top and bottom runners to structure. 2.Space metal studs at maximum 16 inches on center. 3.Furring for Fire Rating: Install metal furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated on Drawings, and to GA-600 requirements. 3.7INSTALLATION -ACOUSTICAL INSULATION A.Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions as specified in Section 07210 where shown on Drawings. 09250-10 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.8INSTALLATION -GYPSUM BOARD A.Install gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, ASTM C 840, GA-216, and GA- 600. 1.Use water resistant gypsum board at wet areas including walls and ceiling in toilet rooms, janitor closets, and food prep areas as applicable and where shown. 2.Use fire resistant gypsum board at locations of fire-resistive rated assemblies indicated on Drawings. 3.Use water and fire resistant gypsum board at locations of fire-resistive rated assemblies where water resistant gypsum board is specified. 4.Use standard gypsum board at locations not indicated to be fire resistant or water resistant type. B.Use proper dust control tools and methods when scoring, breaking, and otherwise handling gypsum board. C.Where applicable, install ceiling panels before the installation of wall panels. D.Erect single layer gypsum board in most economical directionin accordance with ASTM C 840, with attachment to firm bearing surfaces over framing members. Do not align panel joints with edges of openings. E.Double Layer Applications: Secure second layer to first with screws; apply second layer with screws, staggering joints with those of first layer. Use adhesive only to hold second layer until screwed in place. Use fire rated gypsum backing board for fire rated partitions. F.Treat cut edges, holes, fastener heads, and joints, including those at angle intersections, in water resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board with specified joint compound. Treat prior to installation. G.Place gypsum panels over supporting framing members with panel ends aligning and parallel with framing members.Leave bottom edge spacing above floor in accordance with GA-216. H.Install fasteners spaced and located in accordance with GA-216 or ASTM C840. 3.9INSTALLATION -GYPSUM SHEATHING A.Install gypsum board sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, GA-216 and GA-600. B.Erect single layer gypsum board horizontally with attachment to firm bearing. C.Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. Use longest practical length. D.Using screws, attach panels in place at maximum 12 inches on center, perimeter and field, to supporting framing. E.Protect exposed gypsum core at perimeter edges and penetrations by covering core with metal trim. 3.10INSTALLATION -BACKERMATERIALS A.Install glass-mat backermaterialswhere indicated to receive glass-mat backer material. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.11INSTALLATION -JOINT TREATMENT A.Install joint treatment in accordance with GA-216. B.Install corner bead, trim, and casing in accordance with GA-216. C.Install control joints full height of partition with 1/2 inch gap between board edges and between studs. Control joints shall be installed in accordance with the gypsum manufacturer’s recommended guidelines for control joints or the Gypsum Association GA-234 for control joint in fire rated systems. Apply sealant at base of joint and control joint accessory piece at face. Install control joints at the following locations: 09250-11 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.Where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 30 linear feet. 2.At pairs of doors, install vertical control joint at each jamb. At single doors, install control joint at latch side of jamb. 3.12FINISH A.Apply gypsum board finish in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and GA-214 Finish Levels. B.Provide gypsum board finish levels at locations as follows: 1.Level 0(GA-214): No taping, finishing, or accessories necessary. a.Exposed surfaces above 12 ft high in Cart Storage Area. 2.Level 1 (GA-214): Joints and interior angles have tape embedment set in joint compound. Surface free of excess joint compound. Tool Marks and ridges are acceptable. a.Areas above ceilings where required by drawings. b.Concealed areas. c.Interior exposed gypsum surfaces not indicated to be painted. 3.Level 3 (GA-214): Joints and interior angles have tape embedded in joint compound and one additional coat of joint compound applied over all joints and interior angles and two separate coats of joint compound are applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Surface smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. a.Interior gypsum surfaces indicated to be painted. b.Exterior exposed gypsum surfaces. C.Textured Coating. 1.Apply textured coating to gypsum board surfaces as scheduled on the drawings. a.Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. b.Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. c.Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.13FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Inspect metal framing erection, placement, spacing, fasteners, and connections to building. B.Inspect gypsum board installation, fastener type,spacing, and finish level. C.Inspect installation of firestopping penetrations of fire-restive rated partitions and at voids between top of partition and building structure. D.Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. 3.14PROTECTION A.Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. B.Protect installed interior non load-bearing steel stud partition framing, gypsum board, backer materials, and gypsum sheathing from damage until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09250-12 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning043021 SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Suspended metal grid ceiling system. 2.Acoustical panels. 3.Perimeter trim. 4.Column trim. 5.Fire rated assembly. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01351 -Regulatory Compliance: Removal and recycling of acoustical ceiling tile. 2.Section 13900 -Fire Suppression: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. 3.Section 16500 -Lighting: Light fixtures attached to ceiling system. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are reference within the text by these basic designations only. B.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM C 635 -Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. 2.ASTM C 636 -Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. 3.ASTM E 84 -Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4.ASTME1264-Acoustical Ceiling Products. 5.ASTM C 1858 –Direct Hung Suspended T-bar Type Ceiling Systems Intended to Receive Gypsum Panel Products in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions. 1.3SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Design Requirements: 1.Rigidly secure acoustical ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. 2.Conform to Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Fire Resistance Rating design Number for roof/ceiling assembly indicated on Drawings. 1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Section 01600 -Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B.Deliver acoustical units in manufacturer's original unopened containers with brand name and type clearly marked. C.Store under cover in dry, watertight conditions. D.Prior to installation, store acoustical units for 24 hours minimum at same temperature and relative humidity as space where Work will be installed. 1.5PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Requirements: Maintain uniform temperature range of 60-85 degrees F, and humidity of no more than 70 percent relative humidity prior to, during, and after installation. 09511-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Provide products by the following manufacturers as specified: 1.Armstrong World Industries Incorporated, Lancaster, PA (800) 448-1405. 2.CertainTeed Ceilings, Valley Forge, PA (800) 233-8990. 3.Chicago Metallic Corporation, Chicago, IL (800) 323-7164. 4.Gold Bond Building Products, National Gypsum Company, Charlotte, NC (704) 365-7300. 5.USG Interiors, Chicago, IL (800) 950-3839. 2.2REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.Surface Burning Characteristics in Accordance with ASTM E 84 for Class A finish: 1.Flame Spread: Less than 25. 2.Smoke Density: Less than 50. B.Food Serving and Preparation Areas where Scheduled: 1.United States Department of Agriculture (USDA): Approved for incidental food contact. C.Conform to Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Fire Resistance Design Number for roof/ceiling assembly indicated on Drawings. 2.3SUSPENSION SYSTEM A.Provide suspension system specified herein for the corresponding ACT system as applicable as shown on the drawings. Provide suspension system compatible with acoustical panels selected. B.Grid: ASTM C635, intermediateduty, steel exposed T; nominal 1 inch width; stab-in connections. C.Accessories: Stabilizer bars(Cat D, E, and F only), clips, and splices. D.Grid Finish: 1.White, unless noted otherwise. E.Support System: Hot or cold rolled steel channels; galvanized hanger wire, minimum 12 gage. F.Hold-Down Clips: G.ACT-1; Non Fire-Rated Suspension System: Provide one of the following: 1.Prelude 15/16 inch, XL #7300 Exposed Tee System, by Armstrong. 2.Classic Stab System, 15/16 inch, #C12-12-15, by CertainTeed. 3.1200 System, by Chicago Metallic. 4.Donn DX System, by USG. H.ACT-1; Fire Rated Suspension System: Provide one of the following: 1.Prelude Fire Guard 15/16 inch, XL 8300 Exposed Tee System, by Armstrong. 2.Protectone Aluminum Fire-Rated Capped Stab System 15/16 inch, #PACS12-12-15, by CertainTeed. 3.Fire Front 1250 System, by Chicago Metallic. 4.Donn DXL System, by USG. I.ACT-2; Fire Rated -USDA Approved Suspension System: Provide one of the following: 1.Prelude Plus Fire Guard, XL, HDA8200, by Armstrong. 2.Environmental HDG Steel System, 1830 Fire Front, by Chicago Metallic. 3.Environmental System ZXLA, by USG. 2.4ACOUSTICAL LAY-IN PANELS: 09511-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Provide acoustical panels specified herein for the corresponding ACT system as applicable as shown on the drawings. B.ACT-1: Non Fire-Rated Panels, square edge, nonperforated, abuse-resistant vinyl film facing, size as shown. Provide one of the following: 1.Vinyl Faced Fiberglass Ceiling Panels, Random Fissured; Item #2911by Armstrong. 2.Premier Hi-Lite ClimaPlus Kapok Panels, unperforated, Item #7057G, by USG. 3.Versatone UnperforatedVintage Item #1530-VIN-1, by CertainTeed. 4.Coral Soft Touch Series,Item #7010-01F, by Chicago Metallic. C.ACT-1: Fire Rated panels. Min. 1.0 lb/sq ft. (Density: 19.2 lb/cu.ft.), square edge, white, size as shown. Provide one of the following: 1.Cortega Fire Guard #823, by Armstrong. 2.Baroque Protectone, #PBT-197, by CertainTeed. 3.Radar Auratone Firecode, #2315, by USG. D.ACT-2: Square edge, non-perforated vinyl-faced gypsum panels,which satisfy USDAFSIS guidelines for sanitary applications. Size as shown. Provide one of thefollowing: 1.VinylRock, by CertainTeed. 2.Sheetrock Lay-in Ceiling Panel ClimaPlus, by USG. 3.Gridstone Brand Gypsum Ceiling Panels, by National Gypsum. E.Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 2.5ACCESSORIES A.Flexible curved angle trim for Sales Area Columns. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1PREPARATION/DEMOLITION A.Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B.Coordinate extension of existing grid ceiling system if existing system is to remain. C.Clean or paint existing grid as shown on Drawings prior to removal of “old” panels. Refer to Section 09900. D.Remove existingceiling panels as shown on Drawings.Store removed panels for recycling as specified in Section 01351. 1.If ceiling batt insulation is present, remove, retain and re-install batts above newceiling panels. E.In new ceiling grid installation, verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other Work. F.Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2INSTALLATION –GENERAL A.Interface with Other Work: 1.Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, heating is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. 2.Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is completed. 3.Install after major above ceiling work is complete. 4.Coordinate location of hangers with other Work. 09511-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Site Tolerances: 1.Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 12 feet. 3.3INSTALLATION -SUSPENSION SYSTEM A.Install systemin accordance with ASTM C636 and manufacturer's published instructions. B.Install system in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Rating Design Number for roof/ceiling assembly indicated on Drawings. C.Rigidly secure acoustical ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. D.If metal deck is not supplied with hanger tabs, coordinate installation of hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. E.Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span extra distance. F.Locate system on room axis to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical panel size where Reflected Ceiling Plan not shown on Drawings. Match direction of existing ceiling grid unless directed otherwise by the Drawings. G.Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Do not eccentrically load system,or produce rotation of runners. H.Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Secure at 16 inches on center. I.Rivet cross tee's at 4 feet on center to edge mold. J.Install additional 12 ga. tie wire from grid to structure to support Bakery/Deli Menu Board System (MBS).Additional wire to be installed at 4’-0” o.c. at or within 2’-0” of center line of MBS.Each MBS section (4’-6” or 8’-0” in length) to receive no less than three (3) additional 12 ga. tie wires.Install additional 12 ga. tie wire to mechanical registers or 2x4 light fixtures located within 12” of centerline of Bakery/Deli Menu Board System.\] 3.4INSTALLATION -ACOUSTICAL PANELS A.Fit acoustic units in place free from damaged edges or other defects. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. B.Construct light fixture boxes of gypsum board above light fixtures in accordance with UL fire Resistance Rating Design Assembly requirements. 3.5FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Inspect acoustical panel placement, ceiling grid suspension system installation and connection to structure. B.Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with contract requirements. 3.6CLEANING A.Clean exposed surfaces of acousticalceilings including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members END OF SECTION 09511-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning120420 SECTION 09655 -RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Rubber or Vinyl Resilient Base (RB). 2.¼ in. Plastic Base (B). 3.3/8 in. or 5/8 in. Plastic Base (DB). 4.Sanitary Cove Base (SCB). B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01600 -Product Requirements: Contractor’s Product Lead Time Schedule. 2.Section 07900 –Joint Sealers: Sealant between bases and floor or wall surfaces. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to theextent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM E 84 -Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2.ASTMF710–Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. 3.ASTM F1861–Resilient Wall Base. 1.3DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.ResilientBase: 1.Armstrong Flooring, Lancaster, PA, (888) 276-7876. 2.Flexco, Corp., Tuscumbia, AL, (800) 633-3151, 3.Johnsonite, Solon, OH, (800) 899-8916. 4.Roppe Rubber, Fostoria, OH (800) 537-9527. 5.VPI Corp., Sheboygan, WI, (800) 874-4240 B.Plastic Base: 1.Parkland Plastics, Inc., Middlebury, IN, (800) 835-4110. C.Sanitary Cove Baseand Accessories: 1.Murphy Construction Company, Denver, CO, (303) 289-5686. 2.Proteco Wrap Co., Denver, CO,(800) 759-9727. D.Transition Strips: 1.National Guard Products, Memphis, TN, (800) 647-7874. 2.Ceramic Tool Company, Pewaukee, WI, (800) 236-5230. 3.(Fasteners only) Hilti, (800) 879-8000. E.Adhesives: 1.Seal Bond, Spring Lake, MI, (800) 252-4144. 09655-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.Franklin International, Columbus, OH, (800) 877-4583. 2.2SUPPLIER A.Procure products in the scope of this Section from Haines, Jones & Cadbury as Owner’s pre-selected supplier. Con- tact Haines, Jones & Cadbury, (800) 459-7099, WMT@hjcinc.com. 2.3RESILIENT BASE A.Resilient Base: In accordance with ASTM F1861, color integrated Type TV (vinyl), TS (rubber, vulcanized ther- moset), or TP (rubber, thermoplastic); 1/8 inch thicknessunless noted otherwise, approximately 4 inches high.Pro- vidematching end stops and preformed corner unitswhere required,unless noted otherwise.Verify colorprior to ordering. 1.RB1–Black: RB2 –Black: a.ArmstrongVinyl or Rubber: No. 60 Jet Black. b.FlexcoRubber: No. WF-01 Black Dahlia. c.Johnsonite (Tarkett)Vinylor Rubber: No. 40 Black. d.RoppeVinyl or Rubber: No. 100Black. e.VPIVinyl or Rubber: Jet. 2.RB3-Blue/Grey: a.Roppe Vinyl: No. 877 Steel Blue. b.Roppe Rubber: No. 75 Slate. c.Johnsonite Vinyl: No. CB-48 Grey. d.Johnsonite Rubber: No. DC-28 Grey. e.Flexco Rubber: No. 14 Medium Grey. f.VPI Vinyl: No. 336 Silver Sable. g.VPI Rubber: No. 736 Silver Sable. B.Resilient Base Accessories: 1.Adhesive: Water resistant type, VOC less than 50 g/l. Provide GREENchoice Professional Cove Base Adhe- sive, by Franklin International or equivalent product by another manufacturer. 2.4PLASTIC BASE A.DuroBase byParkland Plastics, Inc. 1.Model: Provide models specified below corresponding to mark number of base as shown on Drawings: a.B6: ¼ in. x 6 in. x 96 in., Model No. PTX2131P. b.B9: ¼ in. x 4 in. x 96 in., Model No. PTX2137P. c.DB5: 3/8in.x 5in.x144in.,Model No. PTX3135. d.DB6: 5/8 in. x 6 in. x 96 in., Model No. PTX6138P. e.DB10: 3/8in.x 10in.x 144in.,Model No. PTX 3133. 2.Color: Black. 3.Fasteners: Black flathead countersunk screws, length sufficient to penetrate substrate and metal stud wall framing. 2.5SANITARY COVE BASE A.Antimicrobial plastic, open core construction, standard grade as manufactured by Murphy Construction Co. 1.Size: As shown. 2.Edge: As shown. 3.Finish: Smooth. 4.Color: As shown on Drawings. a.SCB1 -Red. SCB1 sanitary cove base for quarry tile. b.SCB2 -Grey. SCB2 sanitary cove base for quarry tile. c.SCB4 -Red. SCB4 sanitary cove base for vct/epoxy/concrete. d.SCB5 -Grey. SCB5 sanitary cove base for vct/epoxy/concrete. e.SCB6 -Tan (Mushroom). SCB6 sanitary cove base for quarry tile. 09655-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 f.SCB7 -Tan (Mushroom). SCB7 sanitary cove base for vct/epoxy/concrete. 5.Accessories: a.Special Shapes: Inside and outside corners, splicers, and end caps. 1)90 degree Corners: Shop prefabricated heat welded corners. 2)45degree Corners: Shop prefabricated heat welded corners. 3)Other than 90 and 45 degreeCorners: Field fabricated as shown on the drawings. b.Button Caps. c.Splicers. d.Fasteners: As indicated by the manufacturer’s written instructions and as shown on Drawings. 6.Building Tape:25 mil polyethylene backed rubberized adhesive membrane tape. a.BT-25XL Building Tape by Proteco Wrap Co. 7.Installation Accessories: a.Forstner Bit: 1/2-inch diameter. 8.Adhesive/Sealant: Water resistant type, VOC less than 50 g/L. Provide one of the following: a.SB 96, by Seal Bond. 1)Color: Gray, red, or tan to match base color. b.Greenchoice Titebond Weathermaster by Franklin International. Color to match base as follows: 1)Gray: Color No. 44741. 2)Red: Color No. 44231. 3)Tan:Color No. 46381. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Resilient Base: 1.Install base in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements using manufacturer’s approved adhesive. 2.Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints. Use premolded corner units. 3.Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall surfaces. 4.Scribe to fit door frames and other interruptions. 5.Remove excess adhesive from floor, wall surfaces and base. B.Plastic Base: 1.Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints 2.Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces. 3.Scribe to fit door frames and other interruptions. 4.Miter and adhesively bond plastic base joints together. 5.Pre-drill plastic base and trim for attachment screws. Unless otherwise shown, attach plastic base at 24 inches on center into metal stud wall framing. C.Sanitary Cove Base: 1.Install base in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructionsand as shown on the Drawings. D.Building Tape: Install at base of wall or at joints as shown on the drawings. Install in accordance with manufac- turer’s instructions. 3.2CLEANING A.Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. END OF SECTION 09655-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec –Store Planning022621 SECTION 09656(09 6516)–RECYCLED RUBBERCOMMERCIAL SHEET FLOORING(GRAY) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes:Recycled rubber sheet flooring, adhesive, and accessoriesfurnished and installed by Owner’s Preferred Flooring Contractor(PFC). B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01351 –Regulatory Compliance. 2.Section 01600 -Product Requirements: Contractor’s Product Selection Checklist. 3.Appendix A -Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor. General procedures,manufacturers, suppliers, vendor contacts, and product names and numbers for Owner furnished products or services. 1.2QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Owner’s Preferred Flooring Contractor: The Owner’s Preferred Flooring Contractor (PFC) is a firm hired by and contracted by the Owner for the purpose of executinginstallation work within the scope of this section. The PFC shall be one the following as determined by Owner: 1.A&I Floor Covering: Contact Adam Difabrizio (801) 509-9587or Israel Kingston (801) 509-9588. 2.Jones Tile: Contact Donna Ray (573) 692-4033 or Clemet Jones (573) 836-0881. 3.RMI: Contact D A Pope (229) 424-8411, Guntra Harper (229) 468-9822, or Keisha Davis (229)425-8842. 4.Robinett: Contact Gayla Robinett,(918) 253-1425. 1.3DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Product Packaging: Rubber flooring and accessories will be packaged in manufacturer's standard cartons. B.Owner Furnished Product Delivery: Owner will deliver products for receipt by Contractor on delivery date established by Contractor. C.Acceptance at Site: Receive Preferred Flooring Contractor furnished flooring and accessoriesin accordance with the requirements of Section 01600. D.Storage: 1.Provide one container for storage of flooring materialsand equipmentfor use by the PFCin accordance with requirements specified in Section 01500. 2.Store materials in a secure indoor area to prevent loss due to theft or damage. Protect from excessive cold, heat, temperature fluctuations, humidity, and moisture penetration. Do not allow adhesive to freeze. 3.Store flooring on original pallets. Do not stack multiple pallets. E.StorageConditions: 1.Store flooring and adhesive in a controlled climate condition for 48 hours before installation, with temperature and humidity within range of not less than 60 degrees F or more than 75 degrees F. 2.Do not allow adhesive to freeze. 1.4REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTORS A.Preferred Flooring Contractor (PFC) shallbe responsible forthe following: 1.Furnish installation materialsand equipment. 2.Compliancewith safety and badging requirements of Contractor. 3.Lead installer’s attendance atmorning communication meetings. 4.Trackingof material usage and ensuringquantities on hand are sufficient for Work. 09656-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 5.Submission ofWeekly Flooring Installation Report to Contractor and Owner’sConstruction Manager each Friday(as applicable for duration of work). 6.Submission of any required Flooring Add-on Order forms. Contact Owner’sConstruction Manager for required forms. a.Expeditedfreight charges incurred by add-on orders are the responsibility of the Preferred Flooring Contractor. 7.Return to project Site 7-14 days prior to Grand Re-Opening for required corrections related to work specified herein. B.General Contractor shallbe responsible for the following: 1.Temporary electrical service for Preferred Flooring Contractor’s equipment as described in Section 01500. a.Contact the PFCfor temporary electrical requirements of equipment prior to submission of Bid. 2.Disposal of waste generated by flooring activities including, but not limited to, opened adhesive containers. 3.Disconnectionand reconnectionelectrical power to existing to remain equipment and fixtures, including registers, required to be moved for installation of flooring. 4.Attendance atPre-Possession meeting at site and time determined by Owner’s Construction Manager to assist in determination of flooring installation and finishing schedule (Phasing Plan). 5.Providing one container for storage of flooring and equipmentfor PFC’suse. Storage container requirements are specified in Section 01500. Coordinate container provided for the work herein with containers to be provided for installation of resilient flooring materials specified in the scope of other Specifications Sections, if required. 6.Supervision offlooring scope of work, which includes, but is not limited to: a.Flooring schedule Phasing Plan: Take lead role in developing the Phasing Plan with team (Owner’s Construction Manager, Store Planning, and Preferred Flooring Contractor). b.EnsuringPhasing Plan schedule is executed: Sequence of moves, daily flooring minimums, etc. c.Ensuringconformance with the plans and specs. 7.Identification ofcompromises in Owner’s PFC’s performance, if any, and communicating concerns to Owner’s Construction Manager. 8.Coordinationof product delivery schedule with Owner’s PFC. 9.Submission ofFlooring Return Request form to Supplier and ensuringreceipt of required Return Authorization Documents. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1PREFERRED FLOORING CONTRACTOR FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.Owner’s PFCwill furnish and install the following as specified in Appendix A (Section 09656): 1.Recycled Rubber Resilient Flooring. 2.Adhesive. 3.Transition Strip. 4.Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds. 2.2PROTECTIONBY CONTRACTOR A.Maintain room temperature as near as possible to 65 degrees F for 12 hours after installation. B.Protect installation from foot traffic, shopping carts, and motorized mobility scootersfor a period of 3hours. C.Protect installation from loaded rolling pallettraffic for a period of 24hours. D.Cover storefront and automatic sliding glass doors where direct sunlight accelerates room temperature above 80 degrees F for 72 hours after installation E.Protect flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.Use protection methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. 09656-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 END OF SECTION 09656-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning043021 SECTION 09680 -CARPET PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Carpet tiles for the following areas: a.Non-modular Pharmacy:Contractor providedcarpet tile for installation by Owner’s Preferred Floor- ing Contractor. B.Related Requirements:The following list of items is intended to aid in locating work related to or dependent on the scope of Work in this Section. The list is included for information only and is not intended to be inclusive of all project requirements. 1.Section 01600 -Product Requirements: Contractor’s Product Lead Time Schedule. 1.Appendix A –Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor: General procedures related to Owner furnished products, manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor information related to Owner furnished products and work. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) 1.CRI 104 -Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet. 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. 1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Comply with CRI104, Section5, "Storage and Handling." B.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufac- turer’s recommendations. C.Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures. Keep adhesives away from any ignition source. 1.5SITE CONDITIONS A.Maintain areas to receive carpet at constant minimum temperature of 45 to 50 degrees F for minimum three days prior to and during installation. 1.Comply with carpet manufacturer's surface moisture requirements. 2.Provide negative alkalinity at substrate. B.Provide continuous ventilation during and after installation. C.Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 09680-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.Provide lighting levels of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. E.General: Comply with CRI104, Section6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." F.Do not install adhesive applied carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by manufacturer. 1.6SCHEDULING A.Schedule installation to prevent damage to carpet by subsequent construction activities. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.Owner will furnish carpet products and accessories for Modular Pharmacies as specified in Appendix A (Section 09680)for installation by Contractor.Owner may also furnish installation ofContractor provided Non-Modular Pharmacy carpet tiles. 2.2MANUFACTURERS A.Provide productsfrom the following as provided by supplier for projects: 1.InterfaceFLOR, Contact: Jim Sedlacek, (918) 625-4379, jim.sedlacek@interface.com. 2.The Matworks Company, LLC, Contact: Derrick Pursoo, (301) 837-1202, dpursoo@thematworks.com. 3.Mannington Commercial, Calhoun, GA (800) 241-2262 4.(Transition strips only) National Guard Products, Memphis, TN, (800) 647-7874. 5.(Transition strips only)Ceramic Tool Company, Pewaukee, WI, (800) 236-5230. 2.3SUPPLIERS A.Procure all carpet, adhesive, and transitionswithin the scope of this Section from Haines, Jones & Cadbury (HJC) as Owner’s pre-selected supplier. Contact Haines, Jones & Cadbury, (800)459-7099, WMT@hjcinc.com. 2.4PRODUCTS A.C-1: Cushion Back Carpet Tile: 1.CushionBac Plus Tile Plus by InterfaceFLOR, tufted tip sheared pattern loop, 100% Solutia yarn. a.Tile Size: 50 cm x 50 cm. (19.69 in. square). b.Pattern: Geometry II. c.Color: Optical. d.Adhesive: XL Brands Pressure Sensitive Adhesive 2300. 2.Preference Eze by The Matworks. a.Tile Size: 18” x 18”. b.Color: Charcoal. c.Adhesive: MW-E 700 Pressure Sensitive Releasing by The Matworks. B.C-3: Carpet Tile: Ambassador Monster by The Matworks Company, LLC. Polypropylene pile with bitumen backing. 1.Tile Size: 19.5 in. x 19.5 in. 2.Color: Charcoal. 3.Adhesive:Water resistant type, VOC less than 50 g/l.\] C.Transition Strip: As provided with carpet tile by carpet tile supplier. 1.Pharmacy: Rubber transition strip. D.Subfloor Filler (Cementitious Based Underlayment): Provide Schonox SL, by HPS North America, Inc. (256) 246- 0345. 09680-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 E.Contraction/Construction Joint Filler: Provide Epolith P or G, two-part, 100% solids, flexible epoxy joint filler, by BASF Building Systems, (800) 433-9517. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.Substrate Surface: Clean, true, and free of irregularities. B.Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2PREPARATION A.Prepare substrate for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B.Properly prepare and fill contraction and construction joints under carpeting with cementitious based underlayment subfloor filler or epoxy subfloor filler as specified in Part 2 above. C.Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. 3.3INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B.Comply with CRI 104, Sectionas applicable for the application method used. C.Install transition strips at perimeter or at locations shown on Drawings. 3.4FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Inspect installation, pattern matching, and attachment to substrate. B.Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. 3.5CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1.Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2.Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3.Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B.Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI104, Section15 "Protection of Indoor Installations." C.Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufac- turer. END OF SECTION 09680-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Thanks workin on itUniSpec-Store Planning032621 SECTION 09900-PAINTS AND COATINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Field applied paints and finishes for interior and exterior surfaces. 2.Repair and surface preparation of existing surfaces. 3.Application of new coatings. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01351 –Regulatory Compliance. 2.Section 04200 –Unit Masonry Assemblies: Water repellent admixtures for integrally colored CMU or archi- tectural masonry CMU. 3.Section 04910 –Masonry Restoration and Repair: Repair of existing, damaged, or defective CMU, brick, or precast sills and caps. 4.Section 07900 -Joint Sealers: Filler and sealant for crack repair. 5.Responsibility Matrix –Contractor responsibility as shown on the Drawings for contacting Owner’s Independ- ent Exterior Coatings Inspector. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM C 90-Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. 2.ASTM C 1324–Standard Test Method for Examination and Analysis of Hardened Masonry Mortar. 3.ASTM D 1653 –Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic Coating Films (Wet Cup Method). 4.ASTM D 2244 –Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. 5.ASTM D 2370 –Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings. 6.ASTM D 3273 –StandardTest Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings. 7.ASTM D3359–Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. 8.ASTM D 4214 –Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films per Method A Cloth Tape Method 9.ASTM D 4262 –Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces. 10.ASTM D 4263 -Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. 11.ASTM D 6677 –Test Method for Evaluating Adhesion by Knife. 12.ASTM D 6904 –Resistance to Wind-Driven Rain. 13.ASTM E 514 –Water Leakage of Masonry. C.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1.OSHA 01926.1153 Respirable Crystalline Silica. D.The Society for Protective Coatings(SSPC): 1.SSPC-SP1 –Solvent Cleaning. 2.SSPC-SP3 –Power Tool Cleaning. 3.SSPC-SP15 -Commercial Grade Power Tool Cleaning. 1.3ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Minimize dust emissions and provide equipment that suppresses dust. 09900-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Apply paint to masonry surfaces only when moisture content is within manufacturer's acceptable range as described in Part 3 herein for type of specified coating. C.Maintain minimum surface temperatures or ambient air temperature as follows for the specified coatings unless other- wise recommended by the manufacturer or specified in the Paint Schedule herein: 1.Alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, and interior and exterior acrylic and latex finishes: 50 degrees F. 2.Varnish and transparent finishes: 65 degrees F. 3.All coatings: Surface temperature at least 5 degrees F above the dew point. D.Maintain maximum surface temperatures or ambient air temperatures and relative humidity asrecommended by the manufacturer. E.If ambient temperatures are unacceptable, provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain tempera- tures above the minimum surface and air temperature specified above for 24 hours prior to, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes. F.If work area is enclosed, use fire retardant enclosure materials and indirect-fired heating equipment ventilated outside of the enclosure. G.Do not apply paint in areas where dust is being generated. Do not apply coatingsin conditions that could result in overspray on vehicles or other property. H.Perform painting under lighting conditions of not less than 80 foot candles measured mid-height of the painter at substrate surface.Where artificial lighting is required, provide explosion-proof artificial lighting. I.Waste Management: 1.Store, transport, and dispose of waste in accordance with local, state and federal regulations and the require- ments of Section 01351 Supplement. 2.Do not dispose of paint, containment materials, or project waste in Owner’s dumpsters. 3.Do not allow dry materials to enter storm drain inlets. 4.Clear debris and waste from the site daily. 5.Use HEPA-rated filter vacuum to clean surfaces of dirt, dust and debris. 6.Obtain paint in containers of thelargest size practical for each color, sheen, and type. 7.Furnish disposal containers. 8.Return reusable containers and totes to manufacturer. 9.Clean and recycle containers that cannot be returned to manufacturer. J.Wastewater Management: 1.Collect wash wastewater and store, transport, manifest and dispose of according to local, state and federal regulations. Consult local wastewater treatment operator for direction. 2.Do not allow wash wastewater to flow from the surface cleaning processes toa storm water drain or catch basin, street, roadway, sidewalk, gutter, landscape area, or any type of storm water structure. 1.4ADMINISTRATIVEREQUIREMENTS A.Scheduling and Coordination: 1.Schedule a conference call with the Store Managera minimum of two weeks in advance of commencement of work. Communicate daily the sequence of work with Store Management. 2.Scheduling requirements for Owner’s independent and Manufacturer’s Representative inspections is specified in Part 3 herein. B.Schedule operationsto avoidinterferencewith store operationsand during times agreeable to store management. 1.5SUBMITTALS A.Closeout Documents: 1.Submit closeout documents in accordance with Section 01770. 09900-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.Submit Manufacturer Inspection Report of post-installation site visit specified hereinafter. 3.Photographic documentation: Upon Completion, submit a completion report including at least 10 wide-angle photos taken at work stages including but not limited to the following: a.Before start of project. b.During removal and replacement of sealants as specified in Part 3 herein. c.Masonry repairs such as random cracks, mortar joints, holes, and divots. d.During surface preparation of concrete and metal as specified in Part 3 herein. e.During application of each coat, including spray and back roll application,as specified in Part 3 herein. f.After completion of project. g.Provide photos taken of each elevation from the same location in each work stage. 4.Submit Manufacturer’s ExtendedMaterial Performance Warrantyand Contractor’s Labor and Workmanship Warranty. 1.6QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Regulatory Requirements: 1.VOC Content: Provide paint and coating materials that conform to Federal, State, and Local restrictions for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) content. 2.Toxicity/EQ: Comply with federal, state, and local toxicity and environmental quality regulations and with federal requirements on content of lead, mercury, and other heavy metals. Do not use solvents in paint products that contribute to air pollution. B.Exterior Wall Coating Pre-Installation Conference: 1.Pre-Installation Conference: a.Plan and Convene a pre-installation conference to take place at the site one week prior to commencing Work of this Section. Confirm scheduling of conference with Owner’s Construction Managerand Owner’s Project Manager. b.At least two weeks in advance of the meeting, confirm scheduled time and place with all attendees. Make available the meeting agenda at the time of confirmation. c.Meeting Minutes: 1)Record minutes of meeting including discussions, decisions and agreements reached, and attend- ance roster. 2)Obtain signatures of all attendees. 3)Furnish a copy to each party attending and to Owner’s representatives. d.Attendance: 1)Owner’s Construction Manager. 2)Owner’s Project Manageror other Owner’s authorized representative. 3)Contractor. 4)Coating subcontractor. 5)Coating manufacturer's technical representative. e.Agenda: 1)Substrate conditions, pre-installation testing results(including tests to determine existing coat- ings type),andspecified preparation requirements. 2)Substrate preparation and repair details shown on drawings. 3)Sequence and method of application of coating systems. 4)Review of Coatings SystemsSchedule, including Contractor’s choice of exterior coatings sys- tems where multiple manufacturers are listed as comparable. 5)Review of Contractor’s required photo documentation as specified herein. 6)Scope of manufacturer’s observations and reports. 7)Manufacturer’s performance warranty provisions. 8)Workmanship warranty conditions. C.Exterior Wall Coating Field Sample: 1.Preparesample panelsby applying exterior wall coating system5 ft, 4 inches wide on full height of the wallat locationson the building where shown on the drawings or established in the coating pre-installation meeting. Apply coating after the specified preparation and cleaningare completed. 09900-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.Where more than one substrate preparation is recommended in apre-installation assessmentor shown on draw- ings, prepare sample panels using the coatings systems specified for each substrate condition. 3.If more than one texture masonry unit is used, center sample panel on control joint where transition occurs between dissimilar units. 4.Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and specified colors, texture, workman- ship, and application requirements. 5.Obtain approval of sample panelfrom theOwner’s PMor other authorized inspection representative. 6.Maintain approved sample panel during construction as a standard for judging completed Work. Do not alter, move, or destroy panel until Work is completed. 7.Apply the scheduled final coat to the sample panel simultaneously with the application of the final coat to adjacent wall surfaces, resulting in the sample panel receiving one additional final coat. D.Exterior Wall Coating Applicator Qualifications: 1.Contractor shall have a minimum of five years proven satisfactory experience and shall show proof before commencement of work that he will maintain a qualified crew of painters throughout the duration of the work. When requested, Contractor shall provide a list of the last three comparable jobsincluding name and location, specifying authority / project manager, start / completion dates,and value of the painting work. 2.Contractor shall be solely responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and proce- dures for completing the Work, shall be experienced in the preparation of surfaces and application of protective coatings to interior and exterior surfaces of CMU, EIFS, steel, and galvanizing in applications similar to this project. 3.Approved Exterior Coatings Contractors for Major Projects: The following list comprises the coatings contrac- tors selected and approved by the Owner for Major Project repainting work. Select one of the following exterior coatings contractors authorized for work in the state of project location: CompanyPoint of ContactContact ACS Construction, Inc. Winter Park, FLFino DellacavaGino@acsconstructioninc.com407-628-5552 Alatse Construction San Antonio, TXJorge Estalaalatsedrywall@yahoo.com Apex Commercial Hollywood, CAJohn Kowalskijohn@apexcommercialpainting.com800-480-2062 Painting, Inc. Ascher Brothers Chicago, ILRick Regalrickyregal@ascherbrothers.com773-588-0001 Austin Jones Corp. Irvine, CAAmanda Francoamanda@austinjonescorp.com714-236-1735 Barak Construction Seaside, CALadia Barakladia@barakconstruction.com831-917-8016 C & J Painting TBD Capital Custom Car- Wendell, NCKelly De La Cruzkelldela2@gmail.com 919-710-9284 pentry CertaPro Painters Audubon, PABart Smithbartsmith@certapro.com800-462-3782 Classic Painting TBD Commercial Water- Wagoner, OKJim Martin Srjmartinsr@commercial-waterproof-918-251-0084 proofing ing.com Construction Services, Prattville, ALJames Cherryjames@cspave.com334-365-9885 LLC Crown Painting Inc Modesto, CAJoe PetersonEstimating@crownpaintinginc.com209-322-3275 Devco Painting Henderson, NVJassen Jacobsdevcojassen@gmail.com702-834-0043 Diversified Painting Ernesto RamirezErnestoramirez71@yahoo.com Final Coat Painting Eagan, MNRobert Loukusarloukusa@fcpservices.com651-789-0790 dba FCP Services Five Star Decorating Inc Itasca, ILAnthony Neumanan@fivestardecorating.com630-458-4477 FMGI Inc Addison, TXLuke HardmanLuke.Hardman@fmgi-inc.com469-638-9517 Forjak Industrial Columbus, OHKatie Hedgeskhedges@forjakindustrial.com614-316-8539 Fresh Blast Inc St Paul, MNRyan Gallaganrgallagan@freshblast.com 09900-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Gold Coast Contractors Turlock, CATyler HawkinsTyler@goldcoastcon.net209-613-1225 Grabow Painting Ser-Chisago City, MNJeremy Grabowjeremyg@grabowpaintings-651-341-0570 vices ervices.com Harrison Contracting Villa Rica, GARachel Wallsrwalls@harrisoncontracting.com770-949-5776 Co Hayward Carpentry Marysville, WARobin Haywardrobin@haywardcarpentry.com830-456-4746 Herbster Hellweg Paint- St Charles, MOJoe Herbsterjoe@herbsterhellweg.com636-720-1700 ing Co Imagine Yours, Inc New Lenox, ILChris Dokianosimagineyoursinc@gmail.com815-592-4182 Inex ConstructionSer- Utica, MIAnton Sinishtajantons@inex-cs.com586-823-0678 vices, LLC Jake's Painting Clermont, FLRon Milejczakronm@kalosflorida.com352-243-7099 JI Coatings Yuma, AZJoseph Isabellajicoatings@gmail.com619-805-6080 K.A. Sodders Painting Moon Township, PABrandon McDan-brandon@kaspaint.com412-282-8882 LLC iels, Scott McMillan Langley Painting Norco, CAMike Langleymike@langleypaintinginc.com LJS, LLCRancho Cucamonga, Layne Suttonlayne@ljsllc.com CA Majestic Construction FloridaEdisson Zapataedisson_zapata@yahoo.com321-263-5866 & Assoc Mark Young Construc- Frederick, COSteve Derkssderks@markyoungconstruction.com303-776-1449 tion, LLC MC Painting Oceanside, CADan CorneliusDan@mc-painting.com760-525-1786 Mo Decorating Racine, WIMike Ottelienmike@modecorating.com262-488-4563 Morrissey Contracting Godfrey, ILBarbara Morrisseybarbara@morrisseycontracting.com618-466-9006 National Coatings Raleigh, NCStephenHundleys.hundley@nationalcoatingsinc.com984-365-2508 Nikolas Painting Nick Karanavosnikolasptg@hotmail.com P&M Painting Crystal Lake, ILTom Henshawtom@pandm-painting.com815-529-7251 PaintersUSA Glendale Heights, ILMike Ausloosmausloos@paintersusainc.com Paint Folks Hackensack, NJBrian Fosterbfoster@paintfolks.com201-968-5407 Place Services Inc. Canton, GAAndy Grooveragroover@placeservicesinc.com678-880-4777 PowerHouse Retail Ser- Crowley, TXLindsey Kithaslindsey.kithas@powerhouse.com vices Progressive Painting Paul Johnsonpaul@ppcs-inc.com ProGroupContracting New Bedford, MATaryn LaFrancetaryn@progroupcontracting.com PS2Inc. Gardena, CAJohn Schmitjohn.schmit@ps2-inc.com R & C Painting LLC Clinton, MOShauna Sternershauna@randcpainting.com660-890-0774 Ramones Construction Nampa, IDHector Pintopintospainting@yahoo.com Reis Enterprises LLC Newark, DESoner Kecesoner@paintbyreis.com302-740-8382 d/b/a Reis Painting Renovia Paul Strackpstrack@renoviaservices.com Rick Shipman Con- Dexter, MOCody Shipman; codyshipman@rickshipman.com573-624-5065 struction Rick Shipman rickshipman@rickshipman.com RJB Contracting Spring City, PAKurt Fletcherkfletcher@rjbcontracting.com800-591-6090 Rutledge Remodel Mineola, TXStephen Rutledgestephen@rutledgerconstruction.com903-780-5783 Sandia Decorating Chris Steudlechris@sandiadecorating.com 09900-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Singleton Remodel Greensboro, NCAndy Stalterastalter@singletonremodel.com412-965-7538 Stratum PaintingPittsburgh, PAJames Maszlejmaszle@gmail.com Superior Painting Mineola, TXAl Johnsonajohnson@superior-paintingtx.com903-521-5516 Todd's Painting Todd Purdytpurdy001@new.rr.com Turner Painting Ryan Turnerrturner.tpc@gmail.com Walters Painting Dan Walterswalters_dan@ymail.com Whizco Construction Valliant, OKCharlie Christophercharlie@lcllegacy.com580-933-4259 E.Owner’s Independent Inspections: An inspection firm will be contracted and paid for by the Owner and included in the project for exterior coatings assessments and testing.The inspection representative’scontact is included in the Drawings. 1.Any scope performed by the Owner’s independent inspectorsis separate from and does not relieve Contractor’s responsibility for conformance with the Contract Documents. F.Coating Manufacturer's Technical Representative: Maintain communications with a Manufacturer’s Representative who is qualified to provide site observations and recommendations. Upon completion of the painting, ensure that the Manufacturer’s Technical Representative provides recommendations for correction of any noted deficiency. 1.Contractor’s requirements for coordinatingManufacturer’s Representative visits are specifiedin Part 3 herein. 1.7DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B.Verify manufacturers’ national accounts purchase order procedure in order to ensure timeliness of delivery and accu- racy of products. C.Paint orders shall identify the store number, location, batch number and address of project. D.Delivery of paint materials shall be in sealed original labeled containers, bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designa- tion, and instructions for mixing and/or reducing. Notify Supplier when delivered products are nonconforming. E.Store coating materials in a location conforming to the manufacturers specified ambient conditions for storageand awayfrom direct sunlight. Unless otherwise required by the manufacturer, maintain storage at temperature between 45 and 95 F. 1.8EXTERIOR COATINGS WARRANTY A.Manufacturer’sExtended Material Performance Warranty: The products and systems specified in the Coatings Sys- temsSchedule in Part 3 herein have been selected by Owner as having met or exceeded Owner’s ExtendedMaterial Performance Warranty criteria. B.Performance requirements for the Manufacturers’ selected coatings are as follows: STANDARD CONDITIONS The standard system is used for maintenance overcoating (over acrylic or un- known coatings on CMU) and new construction in normal climates and when substrate is not identified as having special conditions. 8-Year Minimum Coatings Performance for All Exterior Metal Ferrous, Non-Ferrous, SSMR Panels Remains free from of peeling, blistering, flaking, cracking, rusting, or rust bleed-through. Mold and mildew resistant in accordance with the criteria of ASTM D3273. Maintains adhesion to the underlying substrate or existing coatingwith a minimum adhesion rating of 8 in accordance with ASTM D 6677. Demonstrates fading not beyond a 5delta E value for neutral and Brandcolor from the color at the time of 09900-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 initial installation as determined by ASTM D 2244 criteria. Demonstrates chalking not less than a 9 from the time of initial installation as determined by ASTM D 4214 criteria. Meets US VOC regulations 8-Year Minimum Coatings Performance for Masonry, Concrete and EIFS Substrates Coating remains free from of peeling, blistering, flaking, and cracking. Mold and Mildew resistant in accordance with the criteria ofASTM D 3273. Maintains adhesion to the underlying substrate or existing coating with a minimum adhesion rating of 6 in accordance with ASTM D 6677. Demonstrates fading not beyond a 7delta E value for neutral colors and not beyond a 7delta E value for the Brandcolor from the color at the time of initial installation as determined by ASTM D 2244 criteria. Demonstrates chalking not less than a 7 from the time of initial installation as determined by ASTM D 4214 criteria. Passes the Wind-Driven Rain test for exterior coatings in accordance with ASTM D 6904. (Not required for EIFS unless barrier type EIFS system is installed). Demonstrates a flat or low-sheen finish (Flat sheen for EIFS). 8-Year Minimum Coatings Performance for Water Repellents Blended water repellent (Silane/Siloxane) for porous material. Appearance of substrate remains unchanged after application. Demonstrates resistant to yellowing and efflorescence. Demonstrates suitability to be re-coated with conventional paints. Maintains at least 99% improvement in water repellency in accordance with ASTM E 514. Maintains water vapor permeance of a minimum 40 perms as determined according to test method B (wet cup) of ASTM D 1653. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In addition to the minimum criteria, coatings shall perform to the following when in- stalled on stores identified as demonstrating special conditions. Elongation For Building conditions with excessive cracking where crack bridging is necessary. Material shall be capable of 300% elongation for crack bridging in accordance with ASTM D 2370. Water Vapor Permeance For Buildings subjected to extreme moisture vapor transmission where a high per- meance coating is required to reduce trapped moisture in the wall assembly. Coatings shall demonstrate water vapor permeance of a minimum40 perms as determined according to test method B (wet cup) of ASTM D 1653. REGIONAL CONDITIONS In addition to the minimum criteria, coatings shall perform to the following when installed on stores subject to one of the following climate conditions. High Ultraviolet Region For Buildings in the harsh environments of climate zones 1 and 2 with higher risk of UV degradation. Coatings shall demonstrate the delta E requirements described herein for the 8 years of the Minimum Performance Warranty. Cold Temperature Installation In situations when the Building coatings must be installed during cold weather. Coatings shall be suitable for application down to 40 degrees F. C.Obtain a Statement of Intent to Warrant from the manufacturer foreach exterior coating system used in the project. Submit the Intentsto Warrant as closeout documentsas specified in Part 1 herein. 1.9EXTERIOR WORKMANSHIP WARRANTY 09900-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Labor and Workmanship Warranty: Contractor shall provide an additional two years Labor and Workmanship War- ranty beyond the Contractor’s one-year warranty period required in the Owner’s General Conditions. Contractor’s Labor and Workmanship Warranty shall warrant against loss of adhesion, cracking, peeling, blistering, shadow- through, splotch or non-continuous appearance, color fade, application of incorrect color, and any other surface prep- aration or application deficiency described herein or identified by either the coatings manufactureror the Owner’s authorized inspection representative during its site observations. B.Uncorrected deficiencies identified by Owner’s Representativeduring the work or withintwo years after completion of the work may require complete recoating at Contractor’s expense withno cost to the Owner. C.Submit the two-year Exterior Labor and Workmanship Warranty as a closeout document as specified in in Part 1 above. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Coatings for the project shall be the products of one or more ofthe following manufacturersas scheduled in Part 3: 1.Interior Coatings: . a.Sherwin Williams Company. Contact: Kevin Behm, (216) 566-1558, kevin.c.behm@sherwin.com b.Benjamin Moore,Contact: Andrew Theokas, (201) 747-1586, andrew.theokas@benjaminmoore.com. c.PPG Paints, Contact: Rick Garlin, (317) 318-5800, garlin@ppg.com. 2.Exterior Coatings: . a.Benjamin Moore, Contact: Andrew Theokas, (201) 747-1586, andrew.theokas@benjaminmoore.com b.PPG Paints, Contact: Rick Garlin, (317) 318-5800, garlin@ppg.com. c.Sto Corp., Contact: Chuck Duffin, (888) 786-3437, cduffin@stocorp.com. B.Method of CoatingsPurchase: Manufacturers may require products to be purchased and distributed from national distribution centers as a warranty condition. Verify conditions of purchase with the manufacturer selected for project. Comply with manufacturer’s national accounts purchase order procedure in order to ensure integrity of product and observance of warranty. C.Manufacturer’s Approved Color Formulations: Provide only those coatings produced in accordance with the manu- facturer’s approved color formulations, including the following: 1.Exterior BrandColor: BrandWalmart blue with a urethane-like appearance shall be mixed and tinted only in the manufacturer’s authorized factory facility. Do not order or permit Brandcolor to be mixed and tinted either in the field or at a retail store. 2.Exterior Neutral Colors: Some manufacturers permit neutral gray or tan color scheme coatings to be mixed and tinted in the retail store. Verify with manufacturer’s authorized representativethat neutral scheme coatings mixed and tinted in the retail store will receive the Manufacturer’s Material Performance Warranty as described in Part 1 herein. D.Products Schedule: Owner’s preselected coating productsare listed in the ProductSchedulesin Part 3 herein. 2.2ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.Accessory materials not specified herein but recommended by the manufacturer or required to meet the requirements herein. 1.Paint Thinners: Type recommended by paint or coating manufacturer for paint or coating system, VOC com- pliant, first line commercial quality. 2.Patching Materials: As specified under Part 3 -Execution. 3.Masking. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION 09900-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be applied and verify that surfaces conform to product man- ufacturer’s requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B.Beginning of application indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2GENERAL PREPARATION A.Coordinate with the Manufacturer’s Representative to performa test of the existing exterior wall coatings type prior to the Pre-Installation Conference. 1.Verify during the Pre-Installation Conference that Manufacturer’s Representative concurs with the proposed overcoating systemsafter coating type test is reviewed. B.Contain fugitive dust and debris from contaminating surrounding property. Protect customers and associates from airborne dust and abrasive media.Establish dust containment and safety zones with caution tape or barricades prior to beginning to isolate work in areas of store operations. C.Do not schedule surface preparation and other dust generating work near areas which have wet, newly coated surfaces. D.Verify that all coats in the proposed system are produced by the same manufacturer. E.Coordinate moving of merchandise and fixtures with Store Manager prior to painting in Sales areas. F.Protect other surfaces from paint and damagewith protective coverings, shields, masking, etc.Maintain protective coverings throughout cleaning and painting operations. 1.Adjacent work to be protected includes but is not limited to merchandise displays, merchandise inventory, shopping carts, customer vehicles, and vegetation. 2.Remove or mask hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be painted. Reinstall removed items after completion of paint work. G.Protect the following items from water damage during pressure washing and overspray during application: 1.Automatic door sensors. 2.Exterior light sensors. 3.Store mounted electronic devises, switches, receptacles and security components. 4.Fire Protection sprinklers. H.For any work specified herein requiring chemical strippers, use plastic, tape, or other means to protect areas that are not to be stripped. This includes prefinished metal such as gutters and downspouts, aluminum trim and storefront and glass. I.Sign Removal: 1.Removeadhesive-backedinterior and exterior signage attached to doors and wallsto be painted. 2.Dispose of removed signs. 3.Do not remove large exterior mechanically attached signage. 4.If location of existing sign is not shown to be covered by a new sign, repair holes and fill with sealant in accordance to the requirements of Section 07900. J.Signage Replacement: 1.Inform Walmart Exterior Sign Team when exterior painting is complete and ready for new sign installation and replacement of removed signs. Contact exterior12@wal-mart.com,James Iglehart (479) 204-1618. 2.If project includes new exterior brand signs to be installed without a full repaint, prepare and touch up areas left exposed around new brand signs as described in Part 3 herein. K.Sealants: 1.CMU: Fully remove exterior CMU wall sealants and backing materials from vertical control, construction, and expansion joints as well as sidewalk or paving joints at the CMU wall as specified in Section 07900.Replace removed wall sealants and backing materials with new materials as specified in Section 07900. 09900-9 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.Exterior Fiber Cement Panels: Remove failing or moving sealants and any loose materials from joints. Replace removed sealants with new materials as specified in Section 07900. L.Do not schedule paint work when rain, snow, fog, or mist are present or forecasted to be present during the drying time of the coatings. M.If plants, moss, mildew, or other biological growth is present, thoroughly saturate the area with a mixture consisting of 1 quart bleach/3 quarts water, and 1 cup powdered detergent. Allow the mixture to remain on the surface until the biological growth is removed. Scrub the surface and repeat as necessary to assure complete removal. Thoroughly rinse with fresh water. N.If the manufacturer’s written recommendations conflict with or do not address the unique project conditions, comply with the requirements of this specification unless otherwise directed. O.Verify product are within shelf life. Schedule application of multi-component materials prior to expiration of the pot life. P.Perform preparation and cleaning procedures as specified in this section and in accordance with paint manufacturer's and Owner’s authorized representative’s directionas necessary for unique project conditions.Work directed and per- formed in addition to that specified herein but deemed necessary by the Manufacturer’s or Owner’s Representatives to achieve a satisfactory substrate shall be by change order to the Contract. 3.3SURFACE PREPARATION-GENERAL A.Do not begin surface preparation of exterior CMU walls until the sample wall panel specified in Part 1 has been completed and approved. B.Moisture damage identified in Drawings manifests as runoff stains, rust, or etching of surface materials along vertical walls or under drain fixtures. C.Loose paint identified in Drawings manifests as chipping, blistering, peeling, or flaking. D.Where scraping, chiseling, sanding, or grinding of concrete or masonry surfaces is required, use proper dust control tools and methods to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. E.Where masonry restoration and repair is shown on drawings,perform repairs as specified in Section 04910. F.Protect joints to be sealed by inserting caulking backer rods at face of wall. G.Standard Surface Preparation –Water Pressure Washingfor All Surfacesto be Repainted: 1.Remove loose paint, chalk, efflorescence, oil, grease,and surface contamination by one or two passes of pres- sure washingwith water. 2.Masonry and CMU Substrate: Use equipment with at a minimum 5,000 psi and a spinner tip. 3.EIFS Substrate: Use equipment at600 psi anda fan tip. 4.Allow the surface to dry before applying new coatings. Prior to painting, verify dryness by testing in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the meter and plastic sheet methods as specified in Part 3 herein. H.Enhanced Surface Preparation –Additional Pressure Washingfor Surfaces to be Repainted: If surface is not suitable for proper adhesion after Standard Surface Preparation, provideoneor more of the following pressure washingvaria- tions: 1.Repeat passes of water pressure washing in addition tothose required for Standard Surface Preparation. 2.Direct tip of pressure equipment from multiple angles onto the problem area. 3.Prior to repeating pressure washing passes, treatvisible grease and oil with solvents in accordance with SSPC- SP1. 4.Use heated pressure washing equipment (200F or higher) or contractor-selected equipment to achieve the spec- ified degree of cleaning. 09900-10 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 5.Toremoveheavy chalk, use a chemical additive. Provide a water solution with.5 lbs. of TSP per 1 gallon of water.Apply to the wall surface using a low pressure sprayer. a.Allow 20-30 minutes before rinsing. Thoroughly rinse the surface to ensure no residue of TSP solution remains. To rinse, power wash the surface using pressure washing at the psi specified as Standard Sur- face Preparation herein. b.Scrub the surface with a soft bristled brush to remove any remaining chalk residue if necessary. c.Wipe a white cloth across the surface to ensure that no residue is visible on the cloth. d.As an alternative to TSP, a chalk removal additive recommended by the coating manufacturer can be used. 6.Allow the surface to dry before applying new coatings. Prior to painting, verify dryness by testing in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the meter and plastic sheet methods as specified in Part 3 herein. 7.Dispose of the wastewateras specified in the Environmental Requirements of Part 1 and in accordance with 01351. I.Continue methods of surface preparation as required in the following paragraphs and shown on the Drawings until surfaces are suitable to receive overcoats. 3.4SURFACE PREPARATION–BY SUBSTRATE A.Interior-Metal: 1.Interior Steel: a.Remove dirt, dust, grease, oil, and other surface interference material by washing and scrubbing. b.Remove rust and loose paint with power tools in accordance with SSPC-SP3. c.Degloss surface with a scouring pad such as Heavy Duty Scour Pad,Non-Scratch Scour Pad, or equiv- alent by Scotch-Brite. d.Feather the existing coating at transitions between the existing coating and the bare steel. 2.Interior Galvanized Steel: a.Remove dirt, dust, grease, oil, and other surface interference material by washing and scrubbing. b.Remove deteriorated galvanized steel, rust, and loose paint with power tools in accordance with SSPC- SP3. , or equiv- c.Degloss surface with a scouring pad such as Heavy Duty Scour Pad,Non-Scratch Scour Pad alent by Scotch-Brite. d.On bare galvanizing, apply a solution of phosphoric acid and detergents designed to remove grease and oil residue to provide a clean, lightly etched surface suitable for adhesion of subsequently applied coats in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. e.Feather the existing coating at transitions between the existing coating and the bare galvanizing. 3.Interior Painted Masonry (to Receive Overcoat): a.Remove dirt, dust, grease, oil, and other surface interference material by washing and scrubbing. b.Sand high-gloss surfaces. c.Feather the existing coating at transitions between the existing coating and the bare steel. d.Spot apply primer to areas prepared to bare substrate. 4.Interior Surfaces of Precast Concrete Panels: a.Remove bond breakers. b.Remove curing compound, if it is not compatible with coating system. c.Remove fins and projections. d.Patch cracks, pockets, holes, breakouts, surface irregularities, and damaged surfaces. 1)Fine cracks up to 1/32”: Brush or knife Flex PatchbyTex-CoteButtery or Knife into cracks and bring to smooth and flush with concrete surface. 2)Cracks 1/32” to 1/8”: Fill uniform with surrounding surfaces with Tex Cote Flex PatchSmooth byTex-Cote. 3)Cracks 1/8 inch to 3/8 inch: Fill with Skim CotebyTex-Cote. 4)Cracks 3/8” or wider: Fill with cementitiouspatching compound; #2 Portland cement; 60-80 acrylic bonding agent and water. mesh sand, Tex BondbyTex-Cote B.Interior –Other Substrate: 1.Interior Gypsum Board: a.New Gypsum Board:Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. 09900-11 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 b.Previously Painted Gypsum Board:Remove surface dust,debris, and loose paint.Feather the edges of removal areas to create a smooth transition. 2.Interior Concrete Floors (to Receive Striping and Markings): a.Mask floor surfaces that will not receive coating. b.Remove visible grease and oil deposits by detergent or solvent cleaning. c.Remove curing compound and sealers with solvents, commercial paint strippers, power tool cleaning, or abrasive blast cleaning using dust control methods specified herein for Full Coating Removal. d.Chemically or mechanically abrade surface to a texture of 50-70 grit sandpaper. e.If applying acid etching compound, thoroughly flush surface with clean water. Verify removal of acid with pH paper and allow the floor to thoroughly dry prior to painting. f.Protect painted floor surface from traffic for 12 hours after painting. C.Exterior -Building Wall Substrates. 1.Exterior Painted Masonry (Cleaning and Removal of Loose Coating Prior to Overcoating): a.PerformStandard Surface Preparation toremove loose paint, chalk, efflorescence, oil, grease,and sur- face contaminationbypressure washing as specified in Part 3 above. b.For areas shown on the Drawings to receive Enhanced Surface Preparation, pressure wash with added variations as specified in Part 3 above or perform one or more of the following Enhanced Surface Prep- arationmethods as required to provide suitable surface: 1)Remove loose paint edges or “flags” by scrapingedges to a point of tight adherence,a minimum of 12inches or beginning of nearest block course beyond the area of poor adhesion. 2)Sand or apply a deglossing agent to high-gloss surfaces. 3)On scored block, grind sags, drips and bridges of existing coating covering the face of the scores. c.If the degree of cleaning or surface texture differs from the approved test sample for Removal ofLoose Coating in Part 1 herein, obtain Owner’s Construction Manager’s acceptance of the cleaned surface before proceeding. 2.Exterior Painted Masonry (Full Coating Removal): a.On masonry shown on the Drawings or directed by Owner’s authorized representative to receive Full Coating Removal, remove 90 –95% of the coating per block or per each 128 square inch area of masonry wall to be repainted. b.Use one or both of the followingmethods according to equipment and project manufacturer’s instruc- tions: 1)Chemical stripping: Use Smart Strip PROby Dumond Chemicals or Back to Nature Ultra-Strip by Sunnyside Corporation. Minimize the introduction of additional water into the masonry by working from top of wall to bottom. Repeat applications if necessary to reach complete removal. 2)Media blasting: Use the least invasive abrasive medium and provide protections as follows: a)Dry abrasive blast cleaning: Provide exhaust ventilated enclosures and HEPA-rated filter vacuum dust collection systems as recommended by the manufacturer for maintaining dust emissions below the permissible level. b)Wet abrasive blast cleaning: Use proper dust control methods to maintain dust emissions below the permissible level. c.Dispose of media blast waste in accordance with requirements of Section 01351 and verify that removal method is accepted by authorities having jurisdiction. d.Verify that removal method is suited for climate and weather conditions in project location. e.Use a removal method that is best suited to retain the texture and roughness of the surface before clean- ing. f.Do notuse removal methods that result in a surface that is substantially different or rougher than the appearance of the approved test sample in Part 1 herein. g.Allow the surface to dry before applying new coatings. Prior to painting, verify dryness by testing in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the meter and plastic sheet methods as specified in Part 3 herein. 3.Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS): a.Perform Standard Surface Preparation toremove loose paint, chalk, efflorescence, oil, grease,and sur- face contaminationbypressure washing as specified in Part 3. b.For Enhanced Surface Preparation, supplement pressure washing with light hand scrubbing and deter- gent cleaning as necessary to remove chalk, surface interference material, andloose coating.Use caution to ensure EIFS finish is left intact after Enhanced Preparation. c.Allow the surface to dry before applying new coatings. Prior to painting, verify dryness by testing in 09900-12 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the meter and plastic sheet methods as specified in Part 3 herein. 4.Exterior Fiber Reinforced Cement Panels (FRCP): a.Pressure wash surfaces of panels to remove grease and oil residue, efflorescence, and other contaminants to provide a clean, lightly etched surface suitable for adhesion of subsequently applied coats. b.Where pressure washing is not feasible, clean surfaces by methods including compressed air, hand wash- ing with biodegradable detergent and sponge or rags, broom cleaning, or solvent based cleaners. c.If mildew is present, use mildew removal method as recommended by the FRCP manufacturer. d.Rinse any remaining chemical films left by solvent cleaners. 5.Exterior Gypsum Board: a.New Gypsum Board:Exterior gypsum board sheathing to receive a paint finish shall be prepared for painting with joint treatment and skim coating as specified in Section 09250. b.Previously Painted Gypsum Board:Remove surface dust, debris, and loose paint.Feather the edges of removal area to create a smooth transition. D.Exterior –Metal. 1.Exterior Steel(Substrate is Fair to Good Condition): a.Remove dust, dirt buildup, grease, oil, mold, mildew, chalk, dirt, and surface debris.Pressure wash as specified in Part 3 herein to clean the surface. b.Remove minor rust, loose paint, and surface contamination with power tools in accordance with SSPC- SP3. c.Sand glossy surfaces with 220 grit sandpaper. d.Feather the existing coating at transitions between the existing coating and the bare steel. 2.Exterior Steel (Steel Substrate or Steel-to-Ground Interface is Heavily Corroded): a.Remove dust, dirt buildup, grease, oil, mold, mildew, chalk, dirt, and surface debris. Pressure wash as specified in Part 3 herein to clean the surface. b.Spot-remove extensive rustand rust scale to bright metal by power tool in accordance withSSPC-SP15. c.Repair holes as indicated on Drawings by welding and grinding. d.Cleanheavily corrodedsteelat the ground interface (steelthat is in contact with an at-grade surfacesuch as concrete or asphalt to 12 inches above grade, or to the top of corroded area, whichever is greater. Within this area, remove corrosion, mill scale, and coatings by power tool cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP15. e.Feather the existing coating at transitions between the existing coating and the bare steel. 3.Exterior Galvanized Steel: a.Remove dust, dirt buildup, grease, oil, mold, mildew, chalk, dirt, and surface debris. Pressure wash as specified in Part 3 herein to clean the surface. b.Remove loose coating, corrosion,deteriorated steel,and zinc salts by power tool in accordance with SSPC-SP3.Feather the edges of the existing coating around each cleaned spot. c.Sand glossy surfaces with 220 grit sandpaper. d.On bare galvanizing, apply a solution of phosphoric acid and detergents designed to remove grease and oil residue to provide a clean, lightly etched surface suitable for adhesion of subsequently applied coats in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. e.Feather the existing coating at transitions between the existing coating and the bare galvanizing. 4.Exterior Galvanized Steel (Galvanized Substrate or Galvanized-to-Ground Interface is Heavily Corroded): a.Remove dust, dirt buildup, grease, oil, mold, mildew, chalk, dirt, and surface debrisfrom areas shown on the Drawings to beHeavy Corrosion.Pressure wash as specified in Part 3 herein to clean the surface. b.Spot-remove deteriorated steel, rust and rust scale to bright metal by power tool in accordance with SSPC-SP15. c.Repair holes with new metal. d.Clean heavily corroded galvanized steel fromthe ground interface (in contact with an at-grade surface such as concrete or asphalt)to 6 inches above grade, or to the top of corroded area, whichever is greater. Clean to bright metal by power tool in accordance with SSPC-SP15,allowing intact galvanizing to remain. e.After power tool cleaning, treat bare galvanizing with a solution of phosphoric acid and detergents de- signed to remove grease and oil residue to provide a clean, lightly etched surface suitable for adhesion of subsequently applied coats in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. f.Feather the existing coating at all transitions between the existing coating and the bare galvanizing. 5.Prefinished Standing Seam Metal –Existing to be Painted: 09900-13 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 a.Pressure wash as specified in Part 3 herein to remove dust, dirt buildup, grease, oil, mold, mildew, and chalk. b.If necessary, remove loose coating with power tools to bare metal. c.Remove surface-mounted snow guards, if present, and re-install upon completion of work. d.Sand the exiting coating and substrate with 120-220 grit sandpaper to a minimum surface profile (rough- ness) of 1.0 mil for adhesion of the primer. e.Solvent wipe the substrate to remove remaining dust and residue. 6.Fabric Pickup Canopy Prefinished Metal Components, Prefinished Metal Roof Edge Fascia(including Pickup Canopy Fascia), Prefinished Canopy Deck Panels, andPrefinished Canopy Gutters–Existing Factory Fluoro- polymer Coated to be Field Painted: a.Fabric canopy: Remove fabric from steel structure prior to beginning preparation and paint work. b.Pressure wash substrate receiving paint as specified in Part 3 herein to remove loose coating, dust, dirt buildup, grease, oil, mold, mildew, and chalk. c.If necessary, remove loose coating with power tools to bare metal. d.Sand the exiting coating and substrate with 120-220 grit sandpaper to a minimum surface profile (rough- ness) of 1.0 mil for adhesion of the primer. e.Solvent wipe the substrate to remove remaining dust and residue f.Fabric canopy: Reinstall fabric on steel structure when painted substrates have fully dried. 7.Metal Canopy Columns and Miscellaneous Supporting Steel Structures –Existing Field Painted,to be Over- coated: a.Pressure wash with a minimum 2,400 PSI detergent mixture to remove loose coating, dust, dirt buildup, grease, oil, mold, mildew, and chalk. b.If necessary, remove loose coating with power tools to bare metal. c.Sand the exiting coating and substrate with120-220 grit sandpaper or abrasive medium of choice to a minimum surface profile (roughness) of 1.0 mil for adhesion of the primer. Feather any edges of re- maining existing coating. d.Solvent wipe the substrate to remove remaining dust and residue with acetone or like non-oil forming solvent. E.Wood: 1.Remove surface contamination by washing with a cleaning solution, scraping, sanding, and scrubbing to re- move dirt, pollutants, mildew, deteriorated wood,and surface interference material. 2.Allow to dry and apply patching materialrecommended by the coating manufacturerto fill cracks, nail holes, and other imperfections. Sand the patched areas smooth after drying. 3.Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat ofknot sealerrecommended by the coating manufacturer before applyingprimecoat. 4.After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dry. 5.Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be field painted immediately upon delivery to site. Prime edges, ends faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets and counters. 6.Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs with a heavy coat of sealer recommended by the coating manufacturer imme- diately upon delivery to the site. 7.Allow the surface to dry before applying new coatings. Prior to painting, verify dryness by testing in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the meter and plastic sheet methods as specified in Part 3 herein. 3.5APPLICATION-GENERAL A.After cleaning and prior to painting, determine surface and subsurface moisture of non-metal substrates in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the following methods: 1.Radio frequency and conductivity moisture meter testing with results in the green range for conductivity and the yellow range or below for radio frequency. 2.Plastic sheet testing in accordance with ASTM D 4263 to determine the presence of capillary moisture. Levels are acceptable when dry on the plastic and the block. B.Mixing and Thinning: 1.Mix coatings in clean containers in accordance with the manufacturer’s published instructions. 09900-14 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.Remove skins on acrylic coatings prior to mixing. If mixed into the coating, remove skin residue by straining prior to use. 3.Stir paint materials as necessary during use to maintain the consistency. C.Do not substitute or interchange products or coatings systems presented at the Pre-Installation Conference unless oth- erwise authorized by Owner’s authorized representative. D.Apply paint to surfaces free of dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, and conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. E.Do not paint silicone sealants designated by an S1 or S2 assignment as described in Section 07900. F.Touchup shop-applied prime coats where damaged or bare. Use the same primer applied in the shop. G.If application procedures are not specified herein, use application procedures designated by the manufacturer's pub- lished instructions for the particular application and substrate. H.Dry Film Thickness (DFT) shown in the Product Schedules in Part 3 hereinrepresent the minimum Dry Film Thickness in mils per coat. Apply each coat to uniform coverage.Avoid excessive thickness that results in runs, sags, and solvent voids in the film. I.Measure or allow to be measured the Wet Film Thickness (WFT) of exterior coatings on CMU if manufacturer’s representative or Owner’s authorized representative requires. J.Allow drying time between coats as recommended by the manufacturer. K.When coating irregular surfacesincludingedges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners,apply aminimum dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. L.Prime Coats, General: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as scheduled. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 1.Additional prime coat requirements for Exterior CMU and masonry are provided in the articles following herein. M.Exterior Brand Sign Replacement: If exterior elevation bearing brand signage is not shown to be entirely repainted afterbrand sign replacement, prepare areas left exposed after new signage is installed as required herein in Substrate Preparation. Touch up exposed areas as follows: 1.Blend new coats to create a color and sheen undiscernible from the existing adjacent coats. Feather new coats toward edges of exposed areas to produce a thickness equal to existing adjacent coats. N.Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, ap- pearance and coverage. Apply additional coatsif shadow through of underlying coats or substrate is visible. Cloudi- ness, spotting, laps, brush marks, runs, sags or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. O.PigmentedWaterproofingCoatingsforMasonryWallCaps: 1.Apply a specialized coating system as specified in the Drawings and Paint Schedule.Match the existing color of the cap. a.Epoxy/Urethane –Prime with one coat of specified primerper manufacturer’s instructions. When primer iscured, apply two coats of finish coat specifiedper manufacturer’s instructions. b.Cement-based –Brush onto the bare surfaceto achieve the manufacturer’s DFT (dry film thickness) recommendations. Stripe-coat corners and edges. 2.Apply waterproofing coating to the top and vertical sides of painted wall caps. Maintain a continuous seal between the waterproofing coating and the finish coating on the vertical sidesto1” below the cap. When waterproof coating has cured, apply the finish coating over thewaterproof coating up to the bottom of the cap. 3.6APPLICATION OF COATINGS TO CMU 09900-15 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.General: 1.Concrete masonry unit walls shall have been installed at least 21 days prior to coating application. 2.Begin system application at top of wall and work down. Begin application of system in the presence of Manu- facturer's Technical Representative. 3.Apply cold weather coatings at surface and ambient temperatures at or above manufacturer’s recommended application temperatures and rising. 4.Do not use a sprayer extension for coatings application on split face concrete masonry unit walls. B.Exterior Wall Concrete Masonry Unit Coatings: 1.General: a.Where existingcoatings to be overcoated vary in color or condition, verify that substrate preparation and scheduled coatings systems are sufficient for yieldinga uniform finish color and sheen. b.Apply by spray and roller application, usingairless equipment for spray applicationand backrolling with roller. c.Apply at rate adequate to provide complete coverage and to the minimum dry film thickness (DFT) shown in the Product Schedule as recommended by the coating manufacturer for each coat in the system. d.Allow measurement of the manufacturer’s recommended wet film thickness (WFT) for finish coatings on Exterior CMU. e.Ifmanufacturer’s recommendedDFT is not achieved upon executing any procedure specified herein, adjust applicationfor profile, texture, and porosity of substrate until recommended DFT is achievedand pores of substrate are sufficiently filled. 2.CMU Primers: Apply primer coatsas follows: a.Spray first coat of surfacer material vertically with nozzle tip at a 45 degree angle from surface. Point nozzle tip down when moving upward, and up when moving downward. Back roll with saturated 1 inch minimum nap roller to completely fill voids insubstrate. b.Wheretwo coats of primerare specified(not typical), allow a minimum of one hour before applying second coat of materialor longer if more than 1 hour is recommended by the manufacturer. 1)Spray the second coat of primer material horizontally with nozzle tip at a 45 degree angle from surface. Point nozzle tip left when moving right, and right when moving left.Follow with back rolling. c.Repeat the application sequence described in the preceding paragraphs until all specified coats are ap- plied. d.For each coat, back brush the top edges of block and the scores of scored block to assurecomplete coverage. e.Allow block prime coatings to dry 48 hours before proceeding with finish coating 3.CMU Finish Coats: Apply finish material as follows: a.Spray first coat vertically with nozzle tip at 45 degree angle from surface. Point nozzle tip left when moving right, and right when moving left. Back roll vertical pass with saturated 1 inch minimum nap roller before proceeding with second coat. b.For coatings systems specified to receive two coats of finish material, spray second coat horizontally with nozzle tip at 45 degree angle from surface. Point nozzle tip down when moving upward, and up when moving downward. c.Back brush the top edges of block and the scores of scored block to assure complete coverage. Cross roll roller-applied material. Finish material with brush and roller strokes in one direction. 4.Verify that all phases of the finish coating application yield a uniform color and sheen that match the color and sheen of the approved coating field samples.Recoating any phase or location on the exterior CMU walls to correct color inconsistencies will be at the expense of the Contractor with no cost to the Owner. 5.Verify thatfinish coats are without cloudiness, spotting, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, or shadow through. 6.Pinhole Allowances: Where an elastomeric finish coat is specified in the SystemScheduleherein, provide a completed coatings application with no more than 10 pinholes per square foot. For all other coatingsystemsin the SystemSchedule herein, provide a completed coatings application with no more than 20 pinholes per square foot. C.Water Repellents for Integrally Colored Masonry and Unpainted Concrete Caps and Sills: Water repellents are speci- fied in Section 07190.Water repellent for galvanized wall caps is specified in the System Schedulesherein. 3.7MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 09900-16 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted over or spattered. B.Where exposed piping, conduit, and electrical equipment are to be painted, paint color and texture shall match adjacent surfaces. C.Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment prior to installation. D.Pre-paint gas piping prior to installation. Touch up paint after installation to repair damage. Colors shall be as follows: 1.Exterior Piping on Roof (Yellow): P5, OSHA Standard "Safety Yellow." 2.Interior Piping in Receiving and Stockroom Areas (Yellow): P5, OSHA Standard "Safety Yellow." 3.Piping in all Other Areas: Color to match adjacent surfaces. 3.8INTERIOR FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Interior Coatings and Exterior Coatings on Surfaces Other than Exterior Wall: Inspect painting and coating application for scheduled material, color, sheen, specified thickness (WFT where indicated and DFT), and coverage. 3.9EXTERIOR FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Exterior Wall Pre-Installation Testing: 1.Prior to the Pre-Installation Conference specified in Part 1, conduct knife or tape adhesion tests of the existing exterior wall coatingsin accordance with ASTM D6677. 2.Test multiple locations on all elevations of the building. If more than one texture masonry is used, conduct at least one test per elevation of each type or texture of masonry. 3.Provide the results to the manufacturer of the new coating to confirm that the adhesion is adequate for over- coating. If the manufacturer indicates that the adhesion is inadequate, advise the Owner’s authorized repre- sentative. 4.Discuss inadequate adhesion results at the Pre-Installation Conference.Do not proceed with painting work until a decision is made regarding over-coating. B.Exterior Wall Work inProgress Inspections: 1.Contractor’s Installation Inspections: a.Maintain schedule of application of exterior wall systemsin field office for Owner's review. b.Enter any painting defects defined as deviations, as well as recommended repairs by Owner’s Construc- tion Manager or Manufacturer’s Technical Representative during progress inspections into the online Owner’s Observation Log. c.Maintain photographic documentation of application for Contractor’s Completion Report as specified in Part 1 herein as a closeout document. d.Conduct the following inspections and tests each day, as applicable. Document and make available to the Owner’s Construction Manager. 1)Ambient conditions during the work, including air temp, surface temp, relative humidity, dew point. 2)Quality of surface preparation on each item prepared, including cleanliness and roughness, re- moval of chalk and loose paint, removal of biological growth, de-glossing, pressure washing, power tool cleaning, etc. 3)Moisture content of cementitious surfaces prior to painting. 4)Application, including product names, quantities, and locations of coatings applied. 5)Methods of application, including whether spray, brush, roll, back-rolling, etc. 6)Wet film thickness of coatings applied as measured at a minimum of 5 spots per 100 square feet or fraction thereof. Dry film thickness of coatings applied to metal as measured at a minimum of 5 spots per 100 square feet or fraction thereof. 7)Quality of application, including aesthetics, coverage, presence of pinholes and shadow-through. C.Exterior Wall Post-Installation Inspections:Upon completion of the coating system installation, make contact with and schedule site visits with the Manufacturer’s Technical Representativeand Owner’s Independent Inspection Repre- sentative. 1.Scheduling and Attendance: 09900-17 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 a.Provide a minimum one week notification for the scheduling of Manufacturer’s final inspection.Man- ufacturer’s Representative shall be the same individual present at pre-construction conference. b.Notify Owner’sinspection representativeof the projected date of exterior paint final completion. The inspection representative’s point of contact is included in the Drawings. 2.Agenda: a.Verify Representatives’observations include inspection of all specification requirements and compari- son with the sample panel specified herein. b.Record noted deficiencies and recommendations observed by the Representatives. D.Remediation of Deficiencies: If the Owner’s Independent or Manufacturer’s post-installation inspections note defi- ciencies, provide remediation as recommended by the inspection reportsto achieve compliance with the specified requirements. 1.Record products, methods of application, location, and quantities of coatings for remediation work. E.Fine for Failure to Remediate: If the Manufacturer’s Representative or Owner’s authorized representative determine that remediation work is not complete in accordance with the recommendations of the post-installation report and in conformance with the requirements herein, Ownermay assess a fee of $3,000.00 at Contractor’s expense with no cost to the Owner. 3.10MAINTENANCE OF WORK AREA A.As work proceeds and upon completion, remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B.During progress of work keep premises free from unnecessary accumulation oftools, equipment, surplus materials and debris. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint material from the site. C.Collect waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. D.Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean. Remove protective coverings and paint from doorknobs, floors, counter tops and other areas not requiring paint. 3.11PROTECTION A.Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protectionduring preparation or installation. B.Do not leave plastic or other landscape protection covers in place so long that damage to plants results. 3.12PAINT COLOR SCHEDULES A.Exterior Colors: The following are Owner’s preselected paint colors currently used in the exterior building scheme. Provide colors as shown or scheduled on the drawings or to match existing scheme. Do not substitute the following exterior colors. MarkColorPPGBenjamin-MooreSto Description P5(E) Safety Yellow90-330 Safety YellowSafety Yellow # 10--- P15(E)-- Gray#1010-5 Downpour#AC-27 Galveston Gray P21(E) Safety Red90-306 Safety RedSafety Red # 20 --- P33(E) Cream#1023-1 Oatmeal#2149-70 White Chocolate#16032 P36(E) Black#1001-7 Black Magic#2118-20 Toucan Black#37100 P49(E) Dark Gray#1007-6 Cool Charcoal#HC-167 Amhearst GrayNA19-0019 P76(U) Walmart BlueCustom Factory MatchWalmart BlueNA19-0014 P81(E) Black#1003-7 Blackhearth#2132-20 Ebony King#37100 P83(E) Dark Brown#1077-6 Salted Pretzel#1022 Maple Shadows#32131 09900-18 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 P94(E) Tan#1087-5 Cracker Bliz#AC8 Butte Rock#16042 P124(E) Light Brown#1085-5 Sauteed Mushroom#1034 Clay#16061 P134(E) Light Gray#1006-3 Early Evening#1465 NimbusNA19-0020 P135(E) Medium Gray#1007-4 Hot Stone#1474 Cape May CobblestoneNA19-0018 P140(E) White#1007-1 Willow Springs#2141-70 Vanilla MilkshakeNA19-0017 P162(E) Black Gray#0997 Summer ShadowWalmart CharcoalNA20-0026 P205(U) Dark Blue95-3300 Durethane MasticWalmart Dark Blue 632-4X NA20-0016 and N403-4X B.InteriorBuilding Colors: The following are interior colors shown ondrawings. Provide matchesby any approved manufacturer. 09900-19 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Color Number/Name bySherwin Color Number/Name bySherwin MarkMark Williams unless otherwise shown.Williams unless otherwise shown. P2 SW# 7664 Steely GrayP54SW# 6432 Garden Spot P3 SW# 6510 Loyal BlueP55 SW# 6285 Grape Harvest P5 OSHA Standard Safety P56SW# 6500 Open Seas Yellow P57SW# 2848 Roycroft Pewter P6 SW# 6811 Honorable Blue P58SW# 6006 Black Bean P7 Pittsburgh Paints #2537 Blossom P59SW# 0077 Classic French Gray White P60 SW# 6053 Reddened Earth P8 SW# 7005 Pure White(Walmart) P61SW# 6079 Diverse Beige P9 SW# 7042 Shoji White. Apply over P62SW# 6172 Hardware. textured coating specified in Section P63SW# 2340 Buff 09250 P64 SW# 6332 Coral Island P10 SW# 6061 Tan Bark P65SW# 6378 Crisp Linen P11 SW# 6115 Totally Tan P66SW# 6085 Simplify Beige P12 SW# 6112 Biscuit P67SW# 6114 Bagel P13 SW# 6454 Shamrock P68SW# 6113 Interactive Cream P14SW# 6677 Goldenrod P69SW# 6340 Baked Clay. P15SW# 7669 Summit Gray P70 SW# 2838 Polished Mahogany P16SW# 7074 Software P71 SW# 7051 Analytical Gray. P18SW# 7507 Stone Lion P72 SW# 6658 Welcome White. P19 SW# 6094 Sensational Sand P73 SW# 6214 Underseas P20 SW# 7036 Accessible Beige P74 SW# 6659 Captivating Cream P21 SW# 4081 Safety Red P75 SW# 2804 Renwick Rose Beige P22 Pantone Color System 286 C. P76 Custom Match # 076 Walmart Medium P23 SW# 7005 Pure White(Sam’s Club) Blue P24 SW# 2819 Downing Slate P76APantone Color System 285C P25 SW# 0045 Antiquarian Brown P77 SW# 6087 Trusty Tan P26 SW# 6080 Utterly Beige P78 SW# 2445 Creamy White P27 SW# 6103 Tea Chest P79 SW# 6359 Sociable P28 SW# 6124 Cardboard P80 SW# 6060 Moroccan Brown P29 SW# 6420 Queen Anne’s Lace P81SW# 6258 Tricorn Black P30 SW# 2018 Pink Beige P82SW# 7679 Golden Gate P31 SW# 2016 Canberra P83SW# 6082 Cobble Brown P32 SW# 6387 Compatible Cream P84SW# 7641 Collonade Gray P33 SW# 6385 Dover White P85SW# 2823 Rookwood Clay P34SW# 6519 Hinting Blue P86SW# 6356 Copper Mountain P35SW# 7071 Gray Screen P87SW# 2807 Rookwood Medium Brown P36SW# 6989 Domino P88SW# 7517 China Doll P37SW# 0046 White Hyacinth P89SW# 6062 Rugged Brown P38SW# 6102 Portabello P90SW# 7502 Dry Dock P39SW# 6122 Camelback P91SW# 7513 Sanderling P40SW# 6665 Gardenia P92SW# 7536 Bittersweet Stem P41SW# 6100 Practical Beige P93SW# 7538 Tamarind P42SW# 6372 Inviting Ivory P94SW# 7694 Dromedary Camel P43SW# 6667 Afterglow P95SW# 7702 Spiced Cider P44SW# 6666 Enjoyable Yellow P96SW# 7705 Wheat Penny P45SW# 0044 Hubbard Squash P97SW# 7710 Brandy Wine P46SW# 7006 Extra White P98SW# 7718 Oak Creek P47SW# 0051 Classic Ivory P100SW# 6521 Notable Hue P48SW#7722 Travertine P101SW# 6904Gusto Gold P49SW# 7019 Gauntlet Grey P102SW# 7518 Beach House P50 SW# 6382 Ceremonial Gold P103SW# 6095 Toasty P51 SW# 6662 Summer Day P104SW# 6867 Fireworks P52 SW# 6334 Flower Pot P105SW# 6526 Icelandic P53SW# 6810 Lupine 09900-20 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Color Number/Name bySherwin Color Number/Name bySherwin MarkMark Williams unless otherwise shown.Williams unless otherwise shown. P106SW# 6675 AfternoonP139SW #6710 Melange Green P107SW# 7698 Straw HarvestP140SW#7004Snowbound P108 SW# 6991 Black MagicP150SW #7072 Online P109SW# 7506 LoggiaP159SW# 7571 Casa Blanca P110SW# 7043 Worldly GrayP161SW #7609 “Georgian Revival Blue” P111SW# 7531 Canvas TanP162SW# 7674 Peppercorn P112SW# 6676 ButterfieldP163SW# 6939 Turquish P113SW# 6674 JonquilP164SW# 6002 Essential Gray P114SW# 7720 Deer ValleyP165SW# 6105 Divine White P115SW# 6076 Turkish CoffeeP166SW# 6766 “Mariner” P116Custom Match #116 Walmart Neigh-P167SW #6868 Real Red borhood Market Green SW Custom Walmart Color “Dura- P116APantone Color System 368 CP200nodic Bronze” Order #7248-0044642 P117SW# 6429 Baize GreenP201SW #7668 March Wind P118SW# 6720 ParadiseP202SW #7670 Gray Shingle P119SW# 6895 Laughing OrangeP203SW #7048 Urbane Bronze P120SW# 6887 NavelP204SW #0019 Festoon Aqua P121SW# 6905 GoldfinchP205Pantone Color System 282 P122SW# 6413 Restoration IvoryP206SW #7000 Ibis White P123SW# 6380 Humble GoldHGSW #1465 Contemporary Grey (Custom) One-Gallon Formula: P124SW# 7522 Meadowlark Extra White Base P125SW# 6923 Festival Green CCE*Colorant 02 32 64 128 P126SW# 6885 Knockout Orange B1-Black 2 2 1 1 P127SW# 7719 Fresco Cream P207Y3-Deep Gold -5- - P128SW# 7510 Chateau Brown P208SW #6953 Candid Blue P129SW# 6683 Bee P209SW #7064 Passive P130SW# 6922 Outrageous Green P210SW#6959 Blue Chip P131SW# 7102 White Flour P211SW#6249 Storm Cloud P133Pantone Color System 287 C P212Sam’s Club Teal (custom color) P134SW #7015 Repose Gray P135SW #7017 Dorian Gray 3.13PAINT SHEEN SCHEDULE A.Gloss: 1.Exterior metal surfaces, includingprefinished metal where shown to be painted. a.Prefinished roof edgefascia. b.Fabric canopy supporting steel structure and components. 2.Exterior hollow metal doors and frames (inside and outside surfaces). 3.Exterior Insulation and Finish System to receive urethane like paint. 4.Exterior CMU walls to receive urethane like paint. 5.Roof hatch (inside andoutside surfaces). 6.Interior & exterior pipe bollards shown to be painted. 7.Interior & exterior metal railings. 8.Metal stair stringers and handrails. 9.Metal fixed ladders and cages. 10.Exterior composite overhead sectional door surface if shown to be painted. B.Semi-gloss: 1.Interior hollow metal doors and frames. 2.Interior hollow metal window frames. 3.Wood trim or simulated wood trim scheduled to be painted. 4.Coiling metal counter doors, except aluminum coiling counter shutters at Pharmacy. 5.Toilet gypsum board ceilings. 6.All walls within Pharmacy and exterior face of Pharmacy front wall (sales floor side). 09900-21 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 7.Interior columns surfaces to receive epoxy finish. 8.Exterior fiber reinforced cement panels if shown to be painted. C.Eggshell: 1.All surfaces to be painted where sheen is not otherwise specified. D.Flat: 1.Exterior Insulation and Finish System unless noted otherwise. 2.Exterior gypsum board ceilings. 3.Exterior concrete. 4.Exterior CMU walls unless noted otherwise. 3.14ITEMS TO BE PAINTED SCHEDULE A.Paint surfaces as shown or scheduled on the drawings including, but not limited to, the following items. 1.Exterior: Paint existing exterior surfaces and new exterior surfaces as shown and noted on the Drawings, includ- ing, but not limited to: a.Hollow metal doors and frames. b.Metal opening frames and trim. c.Metal or fabric canopy columns and supporting steel structure components where shown on Drawings. d.Exterior Insulation and Finish System. e.Metal flashing and downspout (surfaces exposed from ground level). f.Metal gutters (surfaces exposed to view from ground level). g.All surfaces of metal parapet cap. h.Parapet walls, roof side (where roofing does not occur). i.Pipe bollards where shown to be painted. j.Metal railings. k.Roof hatch. l.Satellite dish support (from bottom of deck to top of support). m.Exposed rooftop refrigeration and HVAC support framing. n.Overhead doors if shown. o.Exposed precast concrete wall panels at locations shown to be painted. p.Concrete masonry. q.Paving graphics and markings. r.Exposed piping and conduit, hangers and supports. s.Exterior fiber reinforced cement panels if shown to be painted. 2.Interior: Paint existing and new interior surfaces as indicated on the Drawings including, but not limited to: a.Hollow metal doors and frames. b.Hollow metal window frames. c.Overhead coiling doors. d.Metal opening frames and trim. e.Gypsum wallboard. f.Exposed concrete unit masonry. g.Exposed precast concrete wall panels at locations shown to be painted. h.Pipe Bollards shown to be painted. i.Metal railings. j.Exposed plywood. k.Plywood wainscot, if shown to be painted. l.Exposed mechanical ductwork, hangers and supports (if scheduled to be painted). m.Exposed piping and conduit, hangers and supports (where exposed to Customer view if exposed structure is painted). n.Exposed fire protection piping, hangers and supports (where exposed to Customer view if exposed struc- ture is painted). o.Exposed overhead structure including joists, girders, bridging, miscellaneous metal fabrications and deck (if scheduled to be painted). p.Exposed structure columns. q.Floor striping, graphics, and markings as shown or noted. r.Metal stair stringers and handrails. 09900-22 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 s.Exposed wood trim. B.Do not paint the following Items: 1.Aluminum, brass, bronze, stainless steel, and chrome plated steel. 2.Pre-finished items, such as toilet compartments, acoustical ceiling materials, mechanical, and electrical equip- ment or factory finished metal panels and trim, unless otherwise shown or specified. 3.UL, FM, and other code-required labels. 4.Equipment identification, performance rating, and name plates. 5.Finish hardware. 6.Fire Suppression sprinklers. 7.Low voltage cabling (i.e. fire alarm, voice, data, EMS, audio, security) not in conduit. 3.15PRODUCTSCHEDULES-EXTERIOR A.Refer to the following schedules to verify exterior coating characteristics, manufacturer’s recommended DFT, and installation temperature for the coatings in the selected system. B.Exterior Product Selection: 1.Building Wall Coatings: Owner has preselected one manufacturer of exterior wall coatingsfor the project. 2.Metal Coatings: Contractor shall selectone manufactureramong those scheduled below offering coatings on exterior metalsubstrate. EXTERIOR METAL PRODUCTS –PPG Metals PPG Amercoat One4.0-6.0309--50-- PPG Amerlock 24.0-8.0180--32-- PPG BRP Urethane 15011.5-2.0130--60-- PPG Durethane-DTM-95-3300(Mastic)3.0-5.0241--40-- PPG Pitt-Guard Rapid Coat DTR Primer4.0-7.026332 PPG Pitt-Tech 4020PF2.2-3.591--50-- PPG PSX One3.0210--40-- PPG Timeless 73-4102.2-2.6<5028.3135-- EXTERIOR METAL PRODUCTS –BENJAMIN MOORE Metals Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane –Gloss (V500)2.3-3.3228--50-- Aura Exterior Semi-Gloss 6321.4-1.749--40-- Epoxy Mastic Coating Semi-Gloss (V160)4.6-7.2184--45-- Insl-X Stix Waterborne Bonding Primer(SXA-110)1.6-2.287.6--35-- Regal® Select Exterior Paint High Build Low Lustre N4012.34038.3640-- Regal® Select Exterior Paint High Build Soft Gloss N4032.043--40-- Ultra Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer HP041.7-2.34050 Ultra Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss HP28/Semi-Gloss HP292.3142--50-- EXTERIOR PRODUCTS -STO STO Products Product Name DFT (mils)VOC (g/l)PermMin Temp°FElongation StoPrime® Block Surfacer HP7.3-8.3<1002840-- Sto Primer Smooth2.7<1004040-- StoColor® Lotusan®2.6-3.6<504040-- StoColor® Lastic2.7<50--40450 StoColor® Acryl Plus4.2-5.3<502540306 Sto Clear Coat Sealer1<100--50*-- Sto Prime Conditioner1.0<100>4040-- 3.16COATINGS SYSTEM SCHEDULES-EXTERIOR A.Additional Considerations for Exterior/Masonry Prime Coats:Prime coat type or thickness may depend on the condition 09900-23 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 of the substrate after field preparation does not yield typical results. Where additional determination regarding prime coat is based on atypical substrate conditions, an asterisk and footnote mark the field of the selected system in the System Schedule. 1.If the project includes spot-preparation resulting in coarsely textured bare substrate, provide the surfacer prime coat in the system to match thickness of surrounding coats. After priming the full removal spot with high build surfacer to match existing coatings, continue applying the finish coats as specified. 2.If prepared substrate demonstrates chalking, provide the conditioner prime coat in the system. B.Coating System for CMU/Brick Masonry: 1.System for New or Areas of Full Coating Removal to Bare Substrate: a.Neutral Colors: STO CMU - NEW CONSTRUCTION OR FULL COATINGS REMOVAL Application SheenSTO Prime Coat * Finish Coat(s) 1 Finish Coat(s) 2 CMU –Full Removal Flat StoColor Lotusan StoColor Lotusan StoPrime Block Surfacer Non-Coastal Regions – HP Neutral Color/Acrylic Color Coat- or ings (including Cold Temp instal- Sto Primer Smooth lations) b.BrandColor: STO CMU - NEW CONSTRUCTION OR FULL COATINGS REMOVAL Application SheenSTO Prime Coat * Finish Coat(s) 1 Finish Coat(s) 2 CMU –Full Removal Gloss StoPrimeBlock Surfacer StoColor Acryl Sto Clear Coat Brand Color Coatings In Any Re-and HP Plus Sealer gion (Including Cold Temp instal-Semi-or lations) Gloss Sto Primer Smooth 2 coats 2 coats 2.Overcoat System: a.Neutral Colors: STO CMU - OVERCOATING EXISTING COATINGS ApplicationSheen STO Prime Coat Finish Coat(s) 1 Finish Coat(s) 2 CMU - OvercoatFlat Sto Prime Condi-StoColor Lotusan StoColor Lotusan Non-Coastal Regions – Neutral tioner*** Color/Acrylic color Coatings ** This prime coat is necessary only to cover bare spots on substrate to match surrounding thickness and texture. See Prime Coats for Exterior CMU, Concrete, EIFS, and Brick in Part 3 above this schedule for spot priming requirements. *** This prime coat is necessary only if surface is chalked after washing. C.Coating System for EIFS: 1.System for New EIFS or Areas of Full Coating Removal: a.BrandColor: STO EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS (EIFS) Application SheeSTO n Prime Finish Coat(s) 1 Finish Coat 2 09900-24 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Brand Color Coatings in Any Region Gloss-- StoColor Acryl Plus Sto Clear Coat 2 coats Sealer 2.Overcoat System: a.BrandColor: STO EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS (EIFS) Application SheeSTO n Prime Finish Coat(s) 1 Finish Coat 2 Brand Color Coatings in Any Region Gloss-- StoColor Acryl Plus Sto Clear Coat 2 coats Sealer END OF COATING SYSTEMS SCHEDULES -EXTERIOR 09900-25 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.17PRODUCT AND SYSTEM SCHEDULES -INTERIOR A.Select products and systems by one of the following manufacturersamong those scheduled below.Refer to the follow- ing Product Schedules to verify manufacturer’s recommended DFT. B.System Schedules for each manufacturer follow the Product Schedule. Interior Products by Sherwin Williams ProductNameDFT (mils)VOC (g/l) Interior Metal ProCrylUniversalPrimerB66-3102.0100 ProMar200Interior LatexGlossEnamel,B21W2001.5143 ProMar200ZeroVOCInterior LatexSemi-GlossEnamel,B31-2600Series1.60 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel, B20-2600 Series1.70 Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall,B42Series2.039 EpolonIIRust Inhibitive EpoxyPrimerB67W400,B67A400,B67A4004.0300 Macropoxy646-100,B58W620,B58V6205.0-10.0100 WBAcrolon100WaterBasedUrethaneB65-720,B65V7202.0-4.0<100 DTM Acrylic Coating B66-100 Series2.5-4.0<250 Interior CMU Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel, B21W2001.5143 ProMar200ZeroVOCInteriorLatexEggshell,B202-2600Series1.70 LoxonConcreteandMasonryPrimer,A24W083003.045 ProMar200Zero VOC LatexPrimer,B28W026001.50 Interior Gypsum Board ProMar200Zero VOC LatexPrimer,B28W026001.50 Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel, B21W2001.5143 ProMar200ZeroVOCInterior LatexSemi-GlossEnamel,B31-2600 Series1.60 ProMar200ZeroVOCInteriorLatexEggshell,B202-2600Series1.70 Interior Wood ProMar200Zero VOC LatexPrimer,B28W026001.50 PrepRiteProBlockInterior/ExteriorLatex PrimerSealerB51Series1.497 ProMar200ZeroVOCInterior LatexSemi-GlossEnamel,B31-2600 Series1.60 WoodClassicsVarnishSandingSealer,B26V431.2522 Interior Concrete Floors Macropoxy646-100,B58W620,B58V6205.0-10.0<100 Armorseal Tread-Plex, B90 Series1.5-2.0<100 Interior Systemsby Sherwin Williams Prime CoatFinish Coat(s) Interior Ferrous Metal INT General Use –GlossProCrylUniversalPrimerB66-2 coats: 1310ProMar200Interior Latex (unless specified otherwise)GlossEnamel,B21W200* INT General Use –Semi-GlossProCrylUniversalPrimerB66-2 coats: 2(unless specified otherwise) 310ProMar200ZeroVOCInterior LatexSemi-GlossEnamel,B31- 2600Series INT General Use –EggshellProCrylUniversalPrimerB66-2 coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC 3(unless specified otherwise) 310Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel, B20-2600 Series 09900-26 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Exception: Interior columns shall receive only one finish coat. INT DryfallsystemovershopTo touch up prime welds, bare 1 coat: 4primedsteel–overhead structure spots, blemishes, and scratches: SW-eWaterborne Acrylic Dry- -FlatProCrylUniversalPrimerB66-fall,B42Series 310 INT DryfallsystemoverunprimedProCrylUniversalPrimerB66-1 coat: 5steel-overheadstructure –310Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall,B42 FlatSeries INT ColumnsandHollowMetalEpolonIIRust Inhibitive Epoxy1 coat: 6DoorFramesasshownonPrimerB67W400,B67A400,WBAcrolon100WaterBased Drawingstoreceiveepoxy –B67A400UrethaneB65-720,B65V720 Semi-Gloss INT ColumnsandHollowMetalMacropoxy646-100,1 coat: 6DoorFramesasshownonB58W620,B58V620WBAcrolon100WaterBased (CA)Drawingstoreceiveepoxy -UrethaneB65-720,B65V720 Semi-Gloss Interior Galvanized Metal INT Latex for exposedductwork, ProCrylUniversalPrimerB66-2 coats: 7hangers, and supports –310**ProMar200ZeroVOCInterior Semi-GlossLatexSemi-GlossEnamel,B31- 2600Series INT Dryfall System for exposed ProCrylUniversalPrimerB66-1 coat: 8ductwork, hangers and supports 310**Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall,B42 -FlatSeries INT Cooler/Freezer Panels (Existing) DTM Acrylic Coating B66-100 1 coat: 9-shownto be re-painted -GlossSeriesDTM Acrylic Coating B66-100 Series Interior CMU –New Construction INT Latex System -GlossLoxonConcreteandMasonry2 coats: 10Primer,A24W08300ProMar200Interior Latex GlossEnamel,B21W200* INT Latex System -EggshellLoxonConcreteandMasonry2 coats: 11Primer,A24W08300ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel, B20- 2600 Series Interior CMU –Previously Painted INT Latex System -GlossProMar200Zero VOC Latex2 coats: 12Primer,B28W02600ProMar200Interior Latex GlossEnamel,B21W200* INT Latex System -EggshellProMar200Zero VOC Latex2 coats: 13Primer,B28W02600ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel, B20- 2600 Series Interior Gypsum Board INT Latex System -GlossProMar200Zero VOC Latex2 coats: 14Primer,B28W02600ProMar200Interior Latex GlossEnamel,B21W200* INT Latex System –Semi-GlossProMar200Zero VOC Latex2 coats: 15Primer,B28W02600ProMar200ZeroVOCInterior LatexSemi-GlossEnamel,B31- 2600Series INT Latex System -EggshellProMar200Zero VOC Latex2 coats: 16Primer,B28W02600 09900-27 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel, B20- 2600 Series Interior Wood INT General Use –Latex –ProMar200Zero VOC Latex2 coats: 17Semi-GlossPrimer,B28W02600ProMar200ZeroVOCInterior LatexSemi-GlossEnamel,B31- 2600Series INT ExposedlaminatedwoodroofPrepRiteProBlockInterior/Ex-2 coats: 18structure –Latex –teriorLatex PrimerSealerB51ProMar200ZeroVOCInterior Semi-GlossSeriesLatexSemi-GlossEnamel,B31- 2600Series INT TransparentsealerWoodClassicsVarnishSanding--- 19Sealer,B26V43 Interior Concrete Floors INT Floor, and floor striping, Macropoxy646-100,2 coats: 20graphics and markings-B58W620,B58V620Macropoxy646-100, Semi-GlossB58W620,B58V620 INT Existing Painted Floor Slabs –Armorseal Tread-Plex, B90 Se-2 coats: 21Semi-GlossriesArmorseal Tread-Plex, B90 Se- ries * Use for all states except CA. For CA projects, consult Manufacturer’s Representative for compliant coating. ** Apply primer after light etching is accomplished in accordance with Galvanized Steel –Interior Surface Prep requirements in Part 3 above. Interior Products by PPG Paints Product NameDFT (mils)VOC (g/l) Interior Metal PPG Pitt-Tech Plus 4020 PF Acrylic DTM Primer2.291 PPG Advantage 919-10 Gloss Acrylic Enamel1.550 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel 6-4510XI Series1.30 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Eggshell Acrylic Enamel 6-4310XI Series1.50 PPG Super Tech Acrylic Flat Dryfall 6-725XI Series2.230 PPG Rapid Coat DTR Epoxy Mastic 95-245 Series4.0 -7.0263 PPG Amerlock 400 VOC Semi-Gloss Epoxy4.8-8.099 PPG Aquapon WB-E Ultra Low VOC Epoxy 98-E1 Series2.0-3.026 PPG Pitt-Tech Gloss DTM Acrylic Enamel 90-0374 Series2.0 –3.0192 Interior CMU PPG Pitt-Tech Plus 4020 PF Acrylic DTM Primer1.50 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Eggshell Acrylic Enamel 6-4310XI Series1.70 PPG Speed Hide Block Filler 6-15XI Series8.050 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Primer 6-4900XL1.40 PPG Seal Grip Acrylic Primer 17-921XI Series1.650 Interior Gypsum Board PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Primer 6-4900XL1.40 PPG Advantage 919-10 Gloss Acrylic Enamel1.550 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel 6-4510XI Series1.30 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Eggshell Acrylic Enamel 6-4310XI Series1.50 Interior Wood PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Primer 6-4900XL1.40 PPG Seal Grip Acrylic Primer 17-921XI Series1.650 PPG Speed Hide 0 VOC Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel 6-4510XI Series1.60 PPG Deft Sanding Sealer DFT015 Clear1.0590 Interior Concrete Floors PPG Amerlock 400 VOC Semi-Gloss Epoxy4.8-8.099 PPG Breakthrough V70 Series Gloss Acrylic 1.5-2.0211 09900-28 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Interior Systems by PPG Paints Prime CoatFinish Coat(s) Interior Ferrous Metal INT General Use –GlossPitt-Tech Plus 4020PF Acrylic 2 coats: 1(unless specified otherwise) DTM Primer Advantage 919-10 Series Gloss Acrylic Enamel INT General Use –Semi-GlossPitt-Tech Plus 4020PF Acrylic 2 coats: 2(unless specified otherwise) DTM PrimerSpeed Hide 0 VOC Semi-Gloss Enamel 6-4510XI Series INT General Use –EggshellPitt-Tech Plus 4020PF Acrylic 2 coats: 3(unless specified otherwise) -DTM PrimerSpeed Hide 0 VOC Eggshell Enamel 6-4310XI Series Exception: Interior columns shall receive only one finish coat. INT DryfallsystemovershopTo touch up prime welds, bare 1 coat: 4primedsteel–overhead structure spots, blemishes, and scratches: Speed Hide Super Tech Flat -FlatAcrylic Dry fall 6-725XI INT DryfallsystemoverunprimedPitt-Tech Plus 4020PF Acrylic 1 coat: 5steel-overheadstructure –DTM PrimerSpeed Hide Super Tech Flat FlatAcrylic Dry fall 6-725XI INT ColumnsandHollowMetalPPG Amerlock 400 1 coat: 6DoorFramesasshownonVOC Semi-Gloss EpoxyPPG Aquapon WB-E Ultra Low Drawingstoreceiveepoxy –VOC Epoxy 98-E1 Series Semi-Gloss INT ColumnsandHollowMetalPPG Amerlock 400 1 coat: 6DoorFramesasshownonVOC Semi-Gloss EpoxyPPG Aquapon WB-E Ultra Low (CA)Drawingstoreceiveepoxy -VOC Epoxy 98-E1 Series Semi-Gloss Interior Galvanized Metal INT Latex for exposedductwork, Pitt-Tech Plus 4020PF Acrylic 2 coats: 7hangers, and supports –DTM PrimerSpeed Hide 0 VOC Semi-Gloss Semi-GlossEnamel 6-4510XI Series INT Dryfall System for exposed Pitt-Tech Plus 4020PF Acrylic 1 coat: 8ductwork, hangers and supports DTM PrimerSpeed Hide Super Tech Flat -FlatAcrylic Dryfall 6-725XI INT Cooler/Freezer Panels (Existing) Pitt-Tech DTM Gloss Acrylic 1 coat: 9-shown to be re-painted -Gloss90-374 SeriesPitt-Tech DTM Gloss Acrylic 90-374 Series Interior CMU –New Construction INT Latex System -GlossSpeed Hide Acrylic Block Filler 2 coats: 106-15XIAdvantage 919-10 Series Gloss Acrylic Enamel INT Latex System -EggshellSpeed Hide Acrylic Block Filler 2 coats: 116-15XISpeed Hide 0 VOC Eggshell Enamel 6-4310XI Series Interior CMU –Previously Painted INT Latex System -GlossSeal Grip Acrylic Primer 17-2 coats: 12921XI Series (spot prime)Advantage 919-10 Series Gloss Acrylic Enamel 09900-29 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 INT Latex System -EggshellSeal Grip Acrylic Primer 17-2 coats: 13921XI Series (Spot Prime)Speed Hide 0 VOC Eggshell Enamel 6-4310XI Series Interior Gypsum Board INT Latex System -GlossSpeed Hide 0 VOC Primer 2 coats: 14SealerAdvantage 919-10 Series Gloss 6-4900XIAcrylic Enamel INT Latex System –Semi-GlossSpeed Hide 0 VOC Primer 2 coats: 15SealerSpeed Hide 0 VOC Semi-Gloss 6-4900XIEnamel 6-4510XI Series INT Latex System -EggshellSpeed Hide 0 VOC Primer 2 coats: 16SealerSpeed Hide 0 VOC Eggshell 6-4900XIEnamel 6-4310XI Series Interior Wood INT General Use –Latex –Speed Hide 0 VOC Primer 2 coats: 17Semi-GlossSealerSpeed Hide 0 VOC Semi-Gloss 6-4900XIEnamel 6-4510XI Series INT ExposedlaminatedwoodroofSeal Grip Acrylic Primer 17-2 coats: 18structure –Latex –921XI SeriesSpeed Hide 0 VOC Semi-Gloss Semi-GlossEnamel 6-4510XI Series INT TransparentsealerPPG –Deft Sanding Sealer --- 19DFT015 Interior Concrete Floors INT Floor, and floor striping, PPG Amerlock 400 2 coats: 20graphics and markings-VOC Semi-Gloss EpoxyPPG Amerlock 400 Semi-GlossVOC Semi-Gloss Epoxy INT Existing Painted Floor Slabs –PPG Breakthrough V70 Series2 coats: 21Semi-GlossPPG Breakthrough V70 Series Interior Products by Benjamin Moore ProductDFT (mils)VOC (g/l) Interior Metal Ultra Spec®HP Acrylic Metal Primer HP042.048 Ultra Spec®HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel HP282.3142 Super Hide®Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 3581.20 Super Hide®Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell 3571.30 Latex Dry Fall Flat 3951.946 CorotechPolyamide Epoxy Primer V1504.0332 Corotech Epoxy Mastic Coating V1604.6-7.2184 Corotech Waterborne Amine Epoxy V4401.5-1.9206 Corotech Acrylic Epoxy V450 Semi-gloss1.0-1.3190 Ultra Spec®HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel HP282.3142 Interior CMU Ultra Spec®HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel HP282.3142 Super Hide®Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell 3571.30 Coronado Super Kote 5000® Latex Block Filler 9587.9-10.537 Super Hide®Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer 3541.40 Interior Gypsum Board Super Hide®Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer 3541.30 Ultra Spec®HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel HP282.3142 Super Hide®Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 3581.20 Super Hide®Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell 3571.30 Interior Wood 09900-30 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Ultra Spec®500 Interior Latex Primer N5341.40 Insl-x®Prime All™ Multi-Surface Latex Primer Sealer AP-10001.329 Super Hide®Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 3581.20 Lenmar®Rapid Seal Dual Purpose Sealer 1Y.5191.1548 Interior Concrete Floors Corotech Epoxy Mastic Coating V1604.6-7.2184 ® Tough ShieldAcrylic Floor and Patio Coating Satin Finish TS-3xxx1.3-1.7169 Interior Systems by Benjamin Moore Prime CoatFinish Coat(s) Interior Ferrous Metal INT General Use –GlossUltra Spec®HP Acrylic Metal 2 coats: ® 1(unless specified otherwise)Primer HP04Ultra SpecHP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel HP28 ® INT General Use –Semi-GlossUltra SpecHP Acrylic Metal 2 coats: ® 2(unless specified otherwise)Primer HP04Super HideZero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 358 ® INT General Use –EggshellUltra SpecHP Acrylic Metal 2 coats: 3(unless specified otherwise)Primer HP04Super Hide®Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell 357 INT Dryfallsystemovershop1 coat: 4primedsteel–overhead structure Latex Dry Fall Flat 395 – Flat INT DryfallsystemoverunprimedUltra Spec®HP Acrylic Metal 1 coat: 5steel-overheadstructure –Primer HP04Latex Dry Fall Flat 395 Flat INT ColumnsandHollowMetalCorotechPolyamide Epoxy Pri-1 coat: 6DoorFramesasshownonmer V150Corotech Waterborne Amine Drawingstoreceiveepoxy –Epoxy V440 Semi-Gloss INT ColumnsandHollowMetalCorotechPolyamide Epoxy Pri-1 coat: 6DoorFramesasshownonmer V150Corotech Acrylic Epoxy V450 (CA)Drawingstoreceiveepoxy -Semi-gloss Semi-Gloss Interior Galvanized Metal INT Latex for exposedductwork, Ultra Spec®HP Acrylic Metal 2 coats: 7hangers, and supports –Primer HP04Super Hide®Zero VOC Interior Semi-GlossLatex Semi-Gloss 358 INT Dryfall System for exposed Ultra Spec®HP Acrylic Metal 1 coat: 8ductwork, hangers and supports Primer HP04Latex Dry Fall Flat 395 -Flat INT Cooler/Freezer Panels (Exist-1 coat: ® 9ing) -shown to be re-painted -Ultra SpecHP D.T.M. Acrylic GlossGloss Enamel HP28 Interior CMU –New Construction ® INT Latex System -GlossCoronado Super Kote 50002 coats: ® 10Latex Block Filler 958Ultra SpecHP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel HP28 INT Latex System -EggshellCoronado Super Kote 5000® 2 coats: 11Latex Block Filler 958Super Hide®Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell 357 Interior CMU –Previously Painted INT Latex System -GlossInsl-x®Prime All™ Multi-Sur-2 coats: 12face Latex Primer Sealer AP-Ultra Spec®HP D.T.M. Acrylic 1000Gloss Enamel HP28 09900-31 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 INT Latex System -Eggshell2 coats: 13Super Hide®Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell 357 Interior Gypsum Board ® INT Latex System -GlossSuper HideZero VOC Interior 2 coats: ® 14Latex Primer 354Ultra SpecHP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel HP28 ® INT Latex System –Semi-GlossSuper HideZero VOC Interior 2 coats: 15Latex Primer 354Super Hide®Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 358 ® INT Latex System -EggshellSuper HideZero VOC Interior 2 coats: 16Latex Primer 354Super Hide®Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell 357 Interior Wood INT General Use –Latex –Ultra Spec®500 Interior Latex 2 coats: 17Semi-GlossPrimer N534Super Hide®Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 358 INT ExposedlaminatedwoodroofInsl-x®Prime All™ Multi-Sur-2 coats: ® 18structure –Latex –face Latex Primer Sealer AP-Super HideZero VOC Interior Semi-Gloss1000Latex Semi-Gloss 358 ® INT TransparentsealerLenmarRapid Seal Dual Pur---- 19pose Sealer 1Y.519 Interior Concrete Floors INT Floor, and floor striping, 2 coats: 10graphics and markings-Corotech Epoxy Mastic Coating Semi-GlossV160 INT Existing Painted Floor Slabs –2 coats: 21Semi-GlossTough Shield®Acrylic Floor and Patio Coating Satin Finish TS-3xxx END OF COATING SYSTEMS SCHEDULES -INTERIOR END OF SECTION 09900-32 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec 022621 SECTION 10146–EXTERIORSIGNAGE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Owner furnished exterior building wall mounted signage for installation by Contractor, including: a.Illuminatedor non-illuminated channel dimensional letter signs. b.Illuminated or non-illuminated panel signs. 2.Owner furnished exterior site signage for installation by Contractor, including: a.Illuminated or non-illuminated free-standing monument, pylon, or post and panel signs. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 09900 –Paints and Coatings: Field painting of canopycolumns,components, and other miscellane- ous supporting steel sign structuresas shown on Drawingswhen color rebranding is included in project. 1.2DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Product Delivery: Deliver signsto site on or near the day scheduled for sign installation. B.If required to receive or store signs and equipmentprior to scheduled installation,complywith the requirements of Section 01600 and sign manufacturer’srecommendations. 1.3SEQUENCING, SCHEDULING, AND COORDINATION A.Immediately after Award of Contract,Contact the preselected Sign Contractor for project to coordinate permitting and installationschedules. B.AssignedSign Contractor is as follows: AGI 1.Company Name: Mark Consigny 2.Point of Contact Name: 2655 International Parkway, Virginia Beach, VA 23452 3.Street, State and Zip Code Address: 727-290-2570 4.Telephone(s): mconsigny@agisign.com or dlargent@agi.net 5.Contact email address(es): PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.Owner furnished signs signs and appurtenant installation equipment and materialsare supplied by the preselectedSign Contractor. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine existing conditions to verify completion of prerequisite work, including vinyl graphic film wrap and paint work on canopies and other substrate, prior to start of signinstallation. 3.2INSTALLATION B.Install signs at locations shown on Drawings in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. END OF SECTION 10146-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning043021 SECTION 10260 -WALL AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Surface applied corner guards. 2.Wall guards. B.Related Requirements:The following list of items is intended to aid in locating work related to ordependent on the scope of Work in this Section. The list is included for information only and is not intended to be inclusive of all project requirements. 1.Section 09310 –Ceramic Tile: Stainless steel corner trim installed with ceramicwall tile. 1.2DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Section 01600 -Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Unless specified otherwise, provide guards by one of the following manufacturers as specified: 1.American Floor Products Co., Inc., (800) 342-0424. 2.InPro Corporation, Muskego, WI (262) 679-9010. 3.IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, (800) 222-5556. 4.McCue Corporation, Salem, MA, Attn: Rich Whelan, (800) 800-8503 or (978) 741-8500 x268. 5.Parkland Plastics Incorporated, Middlebury, IN (574) 825-4336. 6.Pawling Corporation (800) 431-3456, Contact: Jennifer Killmer. 7.Schluter Systems, Plattsburgh, NY (800) 472-4588. 2.2CORNER GUARDS A.Provide the following corner guard types if shown on Drawings. B.Plastic: 1.Clear Plastic: a.Space (CG-2145) Invisible Corner Guard, clear, 1/8-inch thick, 2-1/2 inch wing, 48 inches high, by American Floor. b.Clear Polycarbonate Surface Mounted 90 Degree Corner Guards, 1/8-inch thick, (CG-18) 2-1/2 inch wing, 48 inches high, by Pawling. c.Fasteners: Flathead countersunk screws, length sufficient to penetrate substrate. C.Vinyl: 1.Electra (CG-2144) Corner Guard, 3/4 x 3/4 inches x 48 inches, by American Floor. 2.Surface Mounted Corner Guard (CG-34), 3/4 x 3/4 inches x 48 inches,by Pawling. 3.Color: Black 4.Contact Adhesive: One of the following: a.Starstuk HM by North Star Chemicals, Cartersville, GA. (770) 386-6961. b.3M Fastbond Adhesive, by 3M, St. Paul, MN (800) 362-3550. c.Othersimilar contact adhesive that is suitable for use with high pressure laminates. D.Aluminum: 10260-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.Polaris (CG-2139) 90° Corner Guard, 16 gage, 2 x 2 inches x 48 inches, unless otherwise shown, by American Floor. 2.Aluminum Corner Guard, 0.08 inch thick, 2 x 2 inches x 48 inches, unless otherwise shown, by Pawling. a.CG-401, for 90° corners. b.CG-404, for 135° corners. 3.Aluminum Outside Corner Guard: 1 x 1 inches x 48 inches, satin finish aluminum corner guard as recom- mended by manufacturers of PS-7and PS-11protective surfacing in Section 06424, by American Floor or Pawling. 4.Factory pre-drilled for installation with countersunk screws. E.Stainless Steel:16 gage, 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inches, unless otherwise shown. 1.ECK-K, by Schluter. 2.Lunar CG-2143, Style L-1, by American Floor. 3.CG-51, by Pawling. 4.S181124C-304, by InPro. 5.Adhesive (unless otherwise shown to install with stainless steel screws): a.KURDI-fix, by Schluter. b.ADH-50 Adhesive, by Pawling. c.Equivalent by other manufacturer or as recommended by corner guard manufacturer. 2.3WALL GUARDS A.Plastic Wall Guards(Supercenter)-also noted on drawings as 'WG'or 'bumper rail'-(Except Pharmacy): PVC bumper on PVC mounting base, 2" high x 12 ft long x 1-3/4" projection, color black. Provide the following: 1.CartGuard E (CGT-175) bumper with base (CGB-175), including corners and end caps as required, by McCue Corporation. B.Accessories: End caps, outside corners, brackets, and fasteners, as recommended by wall guard manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates and wall areas, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation toler- ances and other conditions affecting performance of Work. 1.Examine walls to which wall guards will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. 2.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2PREPARATION A.Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, square and plumb, secured rigidly in position. B.Position corner guard spaced above finished floor to allow for installation of wall base type specified or shown on Drawings. Coordinate installation of wall finishes with corner guard installation. C.Attach aluminum corner guards using stainless steel screws. D.Stainless Steel Guards: 1.For top of base installation, attach stainless steel corner guards starting at top of base, unless otherwise shown, and set tight to wall with mastic adhesive. 2.For installation at other locations, attach stainless steel corner guards as shown on drawings. 10260-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.4SCHEDULE A.Corner Guards: 1.Locate aluminum corner guardsat outside corners of protective surfacingwainscot and plastic laminate case- work, andin sales areas accessible by public at other locations shown on the drawings, unless otherwise indicated or specified to receive other type of corner guards. 2.Locate stainless steel or other corner guardtypeas shown on drawings. B.Wall Guards: Locate wall guards where shown on the drawings. END OF SECTION 10260-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning052920 SECTION 13810 -BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Owner furnished Equipment for Installation by Contractor: Owner’s BASequipment supplier will furnish BASequipment as indicated on Drawings and defined in Appendix A –Products and Work by Owner or separate Contractor. The BASInstaller shall be the General Contractor’s installation subcontractor and shall receive and install Building AutomationSystem equipment scheduled or shown on the Drawings and described in this Section. 2.Contractor furnished and installed conduit and related fittings, bushings, wire ties,fasteners, bolts, panduit labels, hangers and wire connectors. 3.Making of BASterminations and installation of cablesand conduit as applicable. 4.Proper identification of systemsto include labeling Ownerfurnished BASequipment. 5.Coordination with Structured Cablingfor installation of Ethernet cable. 6.Coordination of Communication with WalmartSupport Services for final download of system parameters. 7.Performance of on-site BAStest. 8.Coordination with BASSupplier for final checkout of Building AutomationSystem. 9.Coordination with WalmartMechanical Services Department Construction Manager for Start-Up Week 10.Warranty of Building AutomationSystem and Components. B.Related Requirements: 1.Appendix A –Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor. a.General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect prod- ucts. b.Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner fur- nished products. 2.Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Installation of 3/4-inch plywood backboard as shown on drawings. 3.Section 07840 –Firestopping. 4.Section 15600 –Installation of Refrigerated Equipment. 5.Section 15614 –Refrigerated Merchandise Fixtures Specifications. 6.Section 15700 –Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Equipment. 7.Division 16: 120 VAC control wiring. 8.Division 16: Transformers, interface panels, phase loss sensor, and terminate all 120 VAC control wiring for Building Automation. 9.Division 16: 120 VAC Dedicated circuit for power to system and a 480 VAC 3 phase dedicated circuit for phase monitor voltage sensing. C.Contractor Responsibilities: 1.Provide (furnish and install) conduit and related fittings, bushings, wire ties, fasteners, bolts, panduit labels, hangersand wire connectors. 2.Install Building Automationequipment scheduled or shown on drawings and described in this Section. 3.Coordinate release of Owner furnished equipment with WalmartMechanical Services Department. 4.Make allterminations to Owner furnished equipment. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.American National Standards Industry (ANSI)/Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): 1.TIA 568-C and-D, 569, 606, and TSB-140 Standards for various cabling and components for Commercial Building/Customer Premises. 13810-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.ANSI 607 –Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. 1.3CLOSEOUT SUBMITTAL A.Building AutomationPunch List: Submit completed punch list to Walmart Stores Inc. for verification of comple- tionand copy General Contractor. B.BASStart-Up Report: Submit completed report WalmartStores, Inc. Mechanical Services Department, for verifi- cation of completion. C.As-Built Drawings: 1.Permanently attachin the main EDC framed or laminatedas-built drawings for Building Automation System communication loop. 2.Permanently attachnear the refrigerated case input controller backboard, framed or laminated as-built drawings of the layout of refrigerated case module communication loop and sensors connected to refrigerated case controllers. D.Complete Building AutomationPunch List: Sendcompleted punch list to WalmartStores Inc., 2001 SE 10th Street, Bentonville, AR 72712-0550, Attention: Mechanical Services Department Construction Manager, for verification of completion and copy General Contractor. E.NOVAR BASRefrigeration Salvage Form:Submit completed form and equipment to Mechanical Construction Field Manager. F.NOVAR BASHVAC Salvage Form: Submit completed form and equipment to Mechanical Construction Field Manager. 1.4QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Provide one qualified technician available to handle emergencies connected with Building Automationwork from the time job begins until the end of the 90 day warranty. B.Contractor Qualifications: Use BASVendorapproved installers. 1.5DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Section 01600 –Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B.Handle, deliver, and store in manufacturer's original packaging, following manufacturer's recommendations. C.Store in a dry area and in a manner to prevent damage. D.Equipment shall remain boxed until ready for installation. E.Notify Owner of equipment received from carrier in damaged conditions and shortages. Obtain verification of damage from carrier’s truck driver. F.Contractor will be held responsible for back charges from trucking company due to contractor failure to meet the owner’s equipment delivery schedule. 1.6DEFINITION OF TERMS A.Work: Complete Installation of equipment and devices in accordance with applicable specifications and as de- scribed in the Drawings, Application Sheets, Manufacturer’s legend sheets and instructions, Request for Bids, and Purchase Orders. B.The Owner's authorized representative is defined as the WalmartMechanical Services Department Construction 13810-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Manager. C.Building Automationcontractor shall mean the Walmartapproved, Subcontractor that is responsible for performing the Building Automationwork as specified on the construction documents. Building AutomationContractor shall be responsible for compliance with applicable codes, ordinances, and work permits. 1.7DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A.The Drawings and Specifications are complimentary.What is required by one shall be as binding as if required by both.Should the Drawings and Specifications be contradictory or should there be any apparent errors, discrepan- cies, or omissions, or should there be any doubt as to the meaning of either, the Contractor shall refer to theRFI Process. B.Neither the Contractor nor the Owner shall be responsible for oral instructions. C.Addenda, corrections, or letters issued during time of bidding shall take precedence over drawings and specifica- tions. 1.8EXAMINATION OF THE PREMISES A.The Contractor’s bid shall take into consideration all conditions which may affect the work under this contract. B.Take field measurements and verify field conditions; compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Drawings and Specifications before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported through the RFI Process. 1.9SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A.Contractor shall agree to undertake all Work contained within the Contract and complete the Work according to the approved construction schedule. B.The Owner's schedule is critical. The Contractor shall be responsible formeeting the schedule. Complete the fol- lowing items prior to schedule Substantial Completion Date. 1.BASEquipment installed and working. 2.Communication between all devices and controllers. 3.Sensors tested (Test refrigeration sensors in accordance with procedure in Section 15.600). 4.Confirm Ethernet communicating. 5.Ensure the system is free of alarms or the alarms can be justified and documented. C.Furnish necessary supervision to coordinate activities of all trades to insure complete installation. Report problems or anticipated problems which may impede progress of the project to the Mechanical Services Construction man- ager. D.Check new equipment against WalmartSpecifications and report discrepancies to WalmartMechanical Services Department Construction Manager. 1.10WARRANTY A.Provide warranty and service on equipment and materials installed. Warranty shall include failures during installa- tion and for 90 days beyond store Grand Opening date. Warranty shall include labor and parts for equipment cov- ered under the specifications.Owner will require BASSupplier to furnish replacement parts for failures of OEM Parts during installation period and for one year beyond store Grand Opening date.Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining replacement parts from BASSupplier.Owner will not pay additional cost associated with repair or replacement of materials and parts during the warranty period.Additional cost attributed to equipment failures shall be handled directly with the BASSupplier. 1.In the event the Contractor fails to respond to emergency calls or fails to perform required maintenance or repairs during a warranty period, the Owner will have the right to have the repair or maintenance performed 13810-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 by another contractor.In this case, the Contractor agrees to pay Owner theinvolved amount of the services performed plus 15 percent. Maximum response time to emergency calls as follows: a.Building Automation System -8hours b.Refrigeration Control System -2hours 2.If the Contractor subcontracts the warranty work, the 90-day warranty responsibility remains with the primary Contractor.The Contractor shall resolve all payments between the two parties. The Owner will not be involved in resolving payment issues. If the Building AutomationContractor fails to respond to warranty calls, Walmartwill remove that contractor from the New Store Bid List until such a time when all disputes or claims are settled. 1.11MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTIES AND INSTRUCTIONS A.Nothing shall be done by the Contractor which will void any manufacturer’s warranty. 1.12LAWS AND ORDINANCES A.Comply with laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations bearing on the Work.If the Contractor observes that Drawings or Specifications, or both are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner in writing.If the Contractor, without written notice to the Owner, performs work, which is not in conformance with such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, Contractor shall bear all cost arising from correction thereof. B.Compliance with laws, rules, and regulations shall not be used as means of justifying installations or applications of parts assemblies, or methods inferior to those specified. C.Comply with OSHA regulations.A copy of all appropriate M.S.D.S. sheets shall be on the job at all times. 1.13INSPECTION OF WORK A.The Owner shall have access to the Work at all times for purpose of inspection. B.If specifications, Instructions, Inspection Coordinators, or laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or any public author- ity require a portion of the work to be tested, approved or inspected, Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness for inspection. 1.14CHANGES IN THE WORK A.Do not make changes, perform additional work, or pay for additional work unless authorized in writing by the Owner. 1.15DEDUCTIONS FOR WORK NOT CORRECTED A.If the Owner deems it expedient to correct work not conforming to the Contract or defective work, an equitable deduction from the contract price will be made. 1.16CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT A.If the Owner rejects a portion of the work due to failure to conform to the Contract, the Owner will promptly notify the Contractor of such failure. B.Upon receipt of such notice, replace or remedy (whichever the Owner requires) the rejected work to conform to the Contract. C.Contractor shall bear all expenses incident to correction of non-conforming work including cost of transportation, removal of non-conforming work, correction of the work, and repairs to work of other contractors necessitated by remedial work. 1.17PROTECTION 13810-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Protect all Work from damage until final acceptance by the Owner.Damaged or defective work shall be replaced at Contractor’s expense. B.Contractor shall be responsible for damage caused by Contractor’s own forces or by Contractor’s subcontractor’s forces. C.Replace damaged work at no expense to the Owner. 1.18USE OF PREMISES A.Confine apparatus, storing of materials and operations of workers to limits indicated by the Owner.Do not unrea- sonably encumber premises with materials. B.Promptly remove material interfering with work of other contractors, if directed by the Owner. C.Enforce the Owner's policies regarding signs, advertisements, and smoking. 1.19TAXES A.Contractor shall include in his bid,costs of state or local sales or use taxes and federal taxes, charges,or duties of any nature applicable to the work incorporated under this Contract. 1.20SPECIAL DAYS A.Keep one qualified technician available to handle emergencies connected with Building Automationwork from the time job begins until the end of the 90 day warranty.The Owner reserves the right to have the Contractor replace the technician if the Owner feels the present technician is failing to respond or is unqualified. 1.21REQUEST FOR INFORMATION SUBMITTAL A.All Request for Information (RFIs) regarding BASshall follow the attached copy of the Request for Information Process Flow Chart. B.Refer to Specification Section 01255 for RFI Information Submittal Process. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1BUILDING AUTOMATIONSYSTEMS A.Unless otherwise specified to be furnished by Contractor,Owner’s BASsupplier will furnish energy monitoring and control system components indicated on Drawingsand as specified in Appendix A Section 13810. 2.2MATERIALS(CONTRACTOR FURNISHED AND INSTALLED) A.Conduit and Accessories: Conduit, and associated fittings and boxes shall conform to requirements of Section 16100. Provide type and size as appropriate for conditions and locations as shown on the drawingsand for the following conditions: 1.Required by local electrical codes. 2.Cables are installed in a plenum space used for return air. 3.Cables are installed outside building. 4.Cables are installed less than 15 feet AFF in sales area and stockrooms. 5.Cables are subject to physical damage. 6.Cables pass through any firewall. 7.Cables are installed underground. 8.Cables are installed in concealed area. 9.Cables are installed in finished areaexcept HVAC cable in Sales Area. 10.Cables are installed in finished wall. 13810-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 11.Cables are installed under refrigerated cases. B.Current Transducers for retrofits and new construction: Only revenue-grade current transducers will be accepted. For pricing and ordering information contact BASSupplier C.For replacement of damaged parts, only controls manufactured by the BASSupplier will be accepted. For pricing and ordering information, contact BASSupplier 2.3FABRICATIONS(BY CONTRACTOR) A.The following describes items and/or functions necessary for field installation: 1.Wire stripping and heat shrink and routing wires 2.Junction boxes to mount wall temp sensors 3.Override panel 4.Installation of conduit 5.CO2 sensors 6.Light dimming 7.Communication cable between controllers 8.Mounting of BASparts 9.Dual-temperature switches PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1RESPONSIBILITY A.All Part 3 Execution requirements specified below shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.2INSTALLATION A.Install BAScomponents provided in this section in accordance with BASVendor Specificinstallation instructions and make all 24 VAC control terminations required. B.BAS Installer shall be aCertified Data Technician. C.Address BASequipment and controllers and mark on equipment label. D.In portions of installation where conduit is not necessary, tie wrap cables every 36 inches or a minimum distance of the bar joist spacing.Cables shall be supported by the building structure. E.Provide wire ties for BAScable. Colors shall beblack UV resistant for RTU and sensor mast assembly, white for inside store in open ceilings, and any color in EDC houses and in BASequipment. F.Install Building AutomationSensors where shown on drawing or to Owner's specifications to BASSupplier instal- lation and hardware mounting procedures. G.Verify proper Application Specific Controllers are installed in equipment in accordance with BASSupplier instal- lation and hardware mounting procedures. H.Generic Input/Output Controller(IOC): 1.Ground IOC with #12 green AWGwire. 2.IOC legend shall be typed 3.IOC lock down screws shall be tightened I.Global Network Controller (GNC): 1.Provide a solidly grounded green insulated conductor, minimum size of #12 AWG, from GNC to system ground buss at main distribution board. 2.Mount GNC display 60 to 72 inches from finished floor, at eye level for the average height person. 13810-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.Provide required clearances for GNC Ethernet connection. 4.GNC lock down screw shall be tightened. J.Cable: 1.Provide installation ofcommunication cable between all network devices.Communication cable must be wired in a “true” daisy chain. Follow Vendor specific construction document details. One in and One out per controller comm terminal port. “Star” configurations are not permitted. 2.Cable installations shall comply with ANSI/TIA standards. 3.All communication cable must be the size and type as indicated on construction documents. 4.Before making final terminations, remove and cut wire to length with approximately 12” excess on each end or (per manufacturer’s instructions). 5.Do not over strip connections. Strip only sufficient amount to fit under terminal. Twist stranded wires before making connections. Be certain to not create loose conductors that may accidentally ground or short other adjacent conductors. 6.Do not splice BAScables for BAScomponents unless absolutely necessary. 7.Splicesshall be soldered, heat shrinked,or sealed solder butt splice type connection(Elektralink sealed Solder Butt Splice or equivalent)and concealed in a junction box.Crimp only connectorsor wire nutsare not allowed. 8.Refrigerated case connections may use gel cap type connectors(3m –314 Gel Cap Connector). 9.Cables from rack house to condensers shall be in conduit or flexible metallic liquid tight conduit. 10.Cables shall be sealed in roof top unit. (Duct seal, caulk, or other type of sealant.) 11.Cable shall have heat shrink at terminating ends. (Notape allowed.) 12.No drooping or excessive sagging cables. 13.Do not install CAT-5 cable runs longer than 295feet. 14.Install cabling systems away from electromagnetic interference sources. Installations must be a minimum distance from interference sources as follows: a.12inchesfrom power lines/electric motors. b.47inchesfrom transformers. c.6inchesfrom lights. 15.Support horizontal cable every 4feetand 5feet,alternating. 16.No cable shall run though a raw metal edge hole.Use bushings and chase nipples as needed. 17.Fire rated and sheetrock walls that have BAScables passing through them shall have an EMT pipe sleeve with bushings on the ends. Fire caulk will be provided by others. K.Outdoor Assembly:If Required 1.Mount outdoor assembly to 1-1/4 inch rigid conduit through roof (provided by others). 2.Install sensor assembly 5 feet above roof and a minimum of ten feet from edge of roof or from HVAC equipment. L.Conduit: 1.Installation, EMT: a.The number of conductors permitted in single tubing shall not exceed the percentage fill listed in NEC b.There shall be nomore than the equivalent of four-quarter bends (360 degrees total) between pull points. c.Bends in the tubing shall be made so that the tubing will not be damaged,and the internal diameter of the tubing will not be effectively reduced. d.All cut ends of tubing shall be reamed to remove rough edges. e.Boxes and fittings shall comply with NEC. f.Tubing shall be supported at least every 10 feet and within 3 feet of junction boxes or devices 2.Installation, Armored Cable: a.Type AC/MCcable shall be secured by approved staples, hangers, and straps, as not to damage the cable, at intervals not more than 4 1/2 feet and within 12 inches of junction box or another device b.Fittings shall be used at all ends of armored cables and meet NEC specifications. c.Bends shall be made so as not to damage cable. 3.Run conduit from zone sensor to junction boxatroofstructure. Provide3/4”conduit from roof top unitlow voltage wiring compartment, down through roof curb . 4.Run conduit along bar joist for communication loop and clamp securely. 13810-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 5.Provide Panduit plastic wire raceway or equivalentin electrical rooms and refrigerated case input/output controller mounting area where necessary M.Bushings: 1.Provide properly bushed opening for raceways ending as open conduit. 2.Cables shall pass through a bushing into the roof top unit. N.Nipples: BASInstaller will provide properly sized conduit nipples for building automationsystem cable sets as indicated on Drawings and for the following conditions: 1.Required by local codes. 2.Cables pass through wall. 3.Cables pass through floor. O.Boxes: BASInstaller will provide properly sized boxes for open conduit systems. P.Light Dimming: 1.All light dimming fixtures are to be tied together by conduit, flex, or box 14 gauge wire or larger. 2.Home run to dimming control shall be 14 gauge or larger in conduit or flex. 3.MC cable is permitted for connecting light fixtures together for low voltage control purposes. 4.Separation between lighting power supply wiring and lighting control wiring shall comply with NEC. 3.3IDENTIFICATION A.Provide electronic, permanent labels for location of each refrigeration sensor identifying circuit.No hand written, or pre-printedlabels are allowed. B.Label refrigerationsensors at location in cases with electronic, permanent labels. C.Provide electronic, permanent labels with 3/4-inchnominal sizenumbers corresponding to associated rooftop unit for zone temperature sensors. D.Label each wire a minimum of one inch from end, identifying cable.Label to be affixed to incoming and outgoing comm cables stating where cable is terminated on the other end. E.Label breakers for Building AutomationSystem with orange stickers: “DO NOT TURN OFF!” F.As-Built Drawings: 1.Permanently attach in the mainEDC framed or laminatedas-built drawings for Building Automation System communication loop. G.Permanently attachnear the refrigerated case input controller backboard, framed or laminated as-built drawings of the layout of refrigerated case module communication loop and sensors connected to refrigerated case input con- trollers. 3.4CLEAN UP A.Promptly remove all rubbish or debris resulting from the Work. B.During the course of the Work, the area in which theContractor is working shall be kept in an orderly, reasonably clean condition.Keep gang boxes, spools of wire, and boxes off of sales floor.Tools, supplies, etc. shall remain only as long as they are in use.Abide by site cleanliness policies of GeneralContractor for general construction. C.Thoroughly clean Work furnished and installed under this Contract, ready for Owner's use. 3.5START-UP A.Building Automationequipment start-up and documentation of operation shall be in accordance with Walmart 13810-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Specifications.Final payment will not be made until start-up reports are received and checkout paperwork is turned over to WalmartBuilding Automation. B.Provide adequate number of qualified personnel for start-up period. If the WalmartMechanical Services Depart- ment Construction Manager determines that the schedule cannot be met, provide additional startup personnel for completion in that time frame. C.Fill out the attached checkout paperwork and send to WalmartBuilding AutomationDepartment. 1.Pre-checkout forms: WalmartSupport Installation Form, HVAC Information, Cutler Hammer Module Configurations and Pre-Checkout Verification Form. 2.Checkout forms: Refrigerated Case Sensor Input Verification, Pulse Meter Letter, Phase Loss Information, Operating Information andManager’s Orientation. D.Start-up shall include but not limited to the following: 1.Verify all modules are communicating. 2.Test and guarantee CAT5E cable installation to level standards (350mhz) in accordance with ANSI/TIA standardsfor commercial building telecommunications cabling. a.Test shall include Connectivity Report, Wire Map, Near/Far end cross talk, and line lengths. . b.Provide acopy of test report to Steve.Bennett@walmart.com 3.Verify all terminations are correct. 4.Verify all sensor locations. 5.Verify, icebath, and calibrate to +/-one-degreeFahrenheit if needed on all refrigeration sensors. 6.Replace any modules or sensors that are defective. 3.6CHECKOUT A.Coordinate with WalmartSupport for final checkout.The Building AutomationContractor shall not receive final approval until final checkout is complete and deficiencies have been corrected.System documentation will not be complete until Building AutomationContractor has been received final checkout verification number from Walmart Support. B.Checkout shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1.Complete Pre-checkout. 2.Complete on-line checkout. 3.Complete testing of CAT5E cable in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/TIA standards. 4.Network status. 5.Phase loss monitors. 6.Override verification. 7.Sensor verification. 8.Address verification. 9.Alarm log verification. 10.Transducer verification 11.AHU sensor verification. 12.Light dimming: Dim lights from 100% down to minimum and back up to 100% to demonstrate proper operation. 13.ALS & hi/lo output verification. 14.RTU sensor verification. 15.CO2 sensor verification. 16.RTU damper/actuator verification. 13810-9 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 13810-10 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 WALMARTSUPPORT INSTALLATION FORM Store #Date : Address: City :State :Zip : BASphone #Store phone # Poss date :G.O. Date : GNC Serial # Ethernet adapter serial # MAC address :Switch:Port # New :Remodel :Expansion :Changeout : BASContractor : Contractor 24 hr #Installer : Time zone :Daylight savings time : Lighting control by:Cutler HammerS.O.B.Contactors: Square-DPowerlink:Cutler Hammer: Number Of Phase Loss Monitors: If store has light dimming ballast, is the negative (gray) control wire from dimming ballast grounded? List any programming changes below 13810-11 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 WALMARTSUPPORT INSTALLATION FORM (continued) BASPhone #Main Store # Type Of Lighting Fluorescent:Halide: Light Dimming Fluorescent:YesNoHigh / Low:YesNo What Panel And Circuit Breaker Feeds 120vac To GNC Transformer? Panel:Circuit Breaker: What Panel And Circuit Breaker Feeds 120vac To IOCTransformer? IOCDesignation:Panel:Circuit Breaker: What Panel And Circuit Breaker Feeds 120vac To IOC Transformer? IOC Designation:Panel:Circuit Breaker: What Panel And Circuit Breaker Feeds 120vac To IOC Transformer? IOC Designation:Panel:Circuit Breaker: What Panel And Circuit Breaker Feeds 120vac To IOC Transformer? IOC Designation:Panel:Circuit Breaker: What Panel And Circuit Breaker Feeds 120vac To IOC Transformer? IOC Designation:Panel:Circuit Breaker: If Store Has Contactors, What Panel And Circuit Feeds 120vac To Contactor? Panel:Circuit Breaker: If Store Has Cutler Hammer S.O.B.S, What Panels & Circuit Breakers Feed 120vac To S.O.B.S? Panel:Circuit Breaker: Panel:Circuit Breaker: Panel:Circuit Breaker: Panel:Circuit Breaker: Are All BASCircuit Breakers Marked With Orange BASStickers? YesIf No Explain: 13810-12 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 WALMARTSUPPORT INSTALLATION FORM (continued) SUBMIT THIS PAGE FOR FINAL DRAFT Checkout Number:Date: BASContractor: Contractor 24 hr #Installer : Refrigeration start-up:Signature of WalmartMechanical Services Department Construction Manager: Date: Attach completed punch list Make 4 sets of all information and distribute to the following : 1.General Contractor after final checkout (developer projects only) 2.BASsupplier after all signatures are obtained 3.WalmartHVACtechnician (leave in package near GNC) 4.Installer’s work file Comments: Explanations: 13810-13 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 PRE-CHECKOUT VERIFICATION FORM HOA switches in AUTO position for IOCs Phase Loss Monitors wired and working properly Sensors reading properly No Communications Losses or Alarms exist No Meter failed alarms Overrides wired and working properly Exterior lights override in off position Verify exterior lights are working properly Verify inside ALS is working properly by covering it and reading GNC display Verify each CO2 sensor has its own power supply and is working properly Verify CO2 dampers are working properly Verify light dimming is working properly Verify IOC outputs are working properly Verify phone line is in, number is correct, and functioning Each of the above lines shallbe checked off with the technician’s initials. Without this Verification Form, on-line checkout will not begin. Signed: BASCompany: Store #: Location: 13810-14 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 HVAC INFORMATION RtuCoolHeat Gas/DmprNosLoadMfgModel# #StageStageElecM/EcY/NTitle 13810-15 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 HVAC INFORMATION RtuCoolHeat Gas/DmprNosLoadMfgModel# #StageStageElecM/EcY/NTitle 13810-16 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 CUTLER HAMMER MODULE CONFIGURATIONS Panel:Module Address: Panel Location:Number Of Circuits: 2PCRKLOADSOBCRKLOADSOB2P 12 34 56 78 910 1112 1314 1516 1718 1920 2122 2324 2526 2728 2930 3132 3334 3536 3738 3940 4142 Indicate 2 pole breakers by checking “2p” box. 13810-17 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 CUTLER HAMMER MODULE CONFIGURATIONS Panel:Module Address: Panel Location:Number Of Circuits: 2PCRKLOADSOBCRKLOADSOB2P 4344 4546 4748 4950 5152 5354 5556 5758 5960 6162 6364 6566 6768 6970 7172 7374 7576 7778 7980 8182 8384 Indicate 2 pole breakers by checking “2p” box. 13810-18 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 REFRIGERATED CASE SENSOR INPUT VERIFICATION Store #Location:WalmartAcceptance: Date:Tested By:Company: Module ID:Module ID:Module ID: S/N:S/N:S/N: Location:Location:Location: Input #Input #Input # Sensor Input ReadingsSensor Input ReadingsSensor Input Readings Sensor Sensor Sensor Pre-CalPost-CalStartupPre-CalPost-CalStartupPre-CalPost-CalStartup IDIDID 1)1)1) 2)2)2) 3)3)3) 4)4)4) 5)5)5) 6)6)6) 7)7)7) 8)8)8) 9) Cir #DT Switch Y / N9) Cir #DT Switch Y / N9) Cir #DT Switch Y / N Notes:Notes:Notes: Module ID:Module ID:Module ID: S/N:S/N:S/N: Location:Location:Location: Input #Input #Input # Sensor Input ReadingsSensor Input ReadingsSensor Input Readings Sensor Sensor Sensor Pre-CalPost-CalStartupPre-CalPost-CalStartupPre-CalPost-CalStartup IDIDID 1)1)1) 2)2)2) 3)3)3) 4)4)4) 5)5)5) 6)6)6) 7)7)7) 8)8)8) 9) Cir #DT Switch Y / N9) Cir #DT Switch Y / N9) Cir #DT Switch Y / N Notes:Notes:Notes: Immerse sensor in ice bath. Allow ample time for reading to stabilize.Record reading in Pre-Cal column. If sensor requires adjustment, follow calibration procedures. Record adjusted ready in Post-Cal column. Startup column is for BASSupplier factory representative spot-check at refrigeration equipment startup. 13810-19 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 PULSE METER LETTER Cutler-Hammer IQ 200 Electrical Distribution System Meter System Frequency Wiring Configuration Current Transformer Ratio Potential Transformer Ratio Demand Window KYZ Output Setting Energy per Pulse Rate Example: System Frequency60 Hz Wiring Configuration4 wire Current Transformer Ratio1200/5 Potential Transformer RatioN/A Demand Window5 min KYZ Output SettingKWh Energy per Pulse Rate1 13810-20 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 PHASE LOSS INFORMATION How many phase loss monitors exist in store? _____________ Phase loss sensor cable wired between the common and the normally closed contacts? Yes________ if no, explain____________________________________________________ Input to global network controller (GNC)is connected to phase loss input terminals? Yes________ if no, explain____________________________________________________ 480 volts to phase loss monitor(s)? Yes ________ What panel and circuit feed 480vac to phase loss monitor(s)? Panel: ____________________________ Circuit Breaker: _________________________ Panel: ____________________________ Circuit Breaker: _________________________ Panel: ____________________________ Circuit Breaker: _________________________ Panel: ____________________________ Circuit Breaker: ________________________ Panel: ____________________________ Circuit Breaker: _________________________ VOLTAGESPLS #1PLS #2PLS #3PLS #4PLS #5 A To C B To C A To B A To Ground B To Ground C To Ground Phase Loss Sensor Under-Voltage: _________________________ Vac Over-Voltage: _________________________ Vac Delay: _________________________ Seconds Lighting information: Include copy of appropriate electrical drawing(s) indicating type of lighting control used, loads and their power circuits.(Use the one line drawing for the contactors, IFP(s), LCU(s) or Cutler Hammer-1000(s) from electrical drawings in plans.) 13810-21 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 OPERATING INFORMATION Communications established with Walmartsupport: How many phase loss. Yes________ if no, explain____________________________________________________ Each BAScable is labeled and run without splice. (Include rooftop map from BAS1drawings show- ing any changes –use red ink on original.) Yes________ if no, explain____________________________________________________ System cables meet material specifications. Yes________ if no, explain____________________________________________________ Outdoor sensor assembly mounted per plans and facing north. Yes________if no, explain____________________________________________________ All system wiring is neatly tie-wrapped and not exposed to the elements. Yes________ if no, explain____________________________________________________ Global network controller (GNC) batter jumper installed in proper position. Yes________ if no, explain____________________________________________________ Ethernet communication has been establishedand tested in accordance with ANSI/TIA Standards. Yes________ if no, explain____________________________________________________ Activationof HOA switch to each position (off, on, auto) cause all loads to turn off or on according to the white label attached to the transition board of the input/output controller (IOC). Yes________ if no, explain____________________________________________________ Demonstrate battery backup works by lifting global network controller (GNC) from its power supply then replacing it. Yes________ if no, explain____________________________________________________ Demand pulse generator (DPG –demand meter) is functioning and global network controller (GNC) reads correct kw usage as calculated using formula on the pulse meter. Yes________ if no, explain____________________________________________________ 13810-22 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 NOVAR BASREFRIGERATION SALVAGE FORM Novar Equipment and Counts -Refrigeration Once verified send copy to bethany.castor@Walmart.com Novar PartsQuantity Any Noticeable Defects RC RC2xe AOM COM RIM CCM ROM CIM CIM2 8IM CMS Case Controller's Case Controller Power module Tranformers Sensors Store NumberBASContractor Date 13810-23 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 NOVAR BASHVAC SALVAGE FORM Novar Equipment and Counts -HVAC Once verified send copy to bethany.castor@Walmart.com Novar PartsQuantity Any Noticeable Defects EP2 LingoXE ETM LSE IOM/2 IOM1010 MINio LSE NCH-1000 NSD/M1 UCM Hawki VAV-4040 Eclipse Store NumberBASContractor Date END OF SECTION 13810-24 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec IIStore Planning013120 SECTION 13900 -FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Automatic sprinkler systems. 2.Sprinkler heads furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor. 3.Fire protection sprinkler piping work with feed and cross main piping, branch line piping, test valves, test connections, and sprinklers. 4.Sprinkler heads furnished and installed by Contractor. 5.Flow indicators, valves, gauges, alarms, drain piping, and supervisory switches. 6.System design, installation and certification. B.Related Sections: 1.Appendix A –Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor. a.General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect products. b.Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products. 2.Appendix B –Testing, Inspection, and Observation by Owner: Procedures for Observation by Owner’s Fire Protection Engineer. 1.2REFERENCES A.ASTM International(ASTM): 1.ASTM A 47 -Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings 2.ASTM A 53 -Pipe, Steel, Black And Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded And Seamless 3.ASTM A 135 -Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe 4.ASTM A 234 -Piping Fittings Of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel For Moderate And High Temperature Service 5.ASTM A 536 -Ductile Iron Castings 6.ASTM A 795 -Black And Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded And Seamless Steel Pipe For Fire Protection Use 7.ASTM A 865 -Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black Or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded Or Seamless, For Use In Steel Pipe joints B.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1.ASME B 16.1 -Cast Iron Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings 2.ASME B 16.3 -Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings 3.ASME B 16.4 -Gray Iron Threaded Fittings 4.ASME B 16.5 -Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings NPS1/2 Through NPS24 Metric/Inch Standard 5.ASME B 16.9 -Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings 6.ASME B 16.11 -Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding And Threaded C.Factory Mutual System (FM): 1.Approval Guide, Latest edition. D.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1.NFPA 13,2002Edition -Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2.NFPA 24, 2007Edition -Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their Appurtenances. 3.NFPA 70,2008Edition -National Electrical Code. 4.NFPA 25, 2008Edition –Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection. 13900-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 E.Underwriters Laboratory (UL): 1.UL Fire Protection Directory –Latest Edition. 1.3SUBMITTALS A.Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) 1.ProvideDeferred Submittals to AHJ per requirements of 01330. Drawings and calculations have not been submitted to the AHJ for code compliance by Owner'sFire Protection Consultant. a.Submit the following: 1)Product data. 2)Shop drawings. 3)Additional data as may be required by NFPA 13 and Owner’sFire Protection Consultant. B.Submittal Procedure: 1.Reference Section 01330 for general submittal procedures.Conform to provisions of Section 01330 unless otherwise specified herein. 2.Within 21days after award of prime contract, send submittals to Owner’sFire Protection Consultant as specified Section 01330.Allow 15day turn-around on submittals sent to Owner’sFire Protection Consultant. a.Fire Protection Consultant’s electronic drawing files (i.e., DWG, DWF, PDF, etc.)will not be provided to the Contractor for the purpose of submittals nor will the Fire Protection Consultant assist with production of submittal information including shop drawings and material data. b.If the Contractor fails to submit a complete Fire Suppression submittal package within 21days after award of contract, the Contractor shall pay the Owner $250.00 per day as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, until the fully completed Fire Suppression submittal package is received by Owner’sFire Protection Consultant. c.Send a copy of the Letter of Transmittal sent with the submittals to the Architect indicating date of and content of transmittal. 3.Fire Protection Consultant will review electronic file submittal as an alternate to requirements of Section 01330.Obtain the electronic submittal procedure from Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant during the Pre- Construction Conference Call. 4.Within 21 daysafter Award of Contract by Ownerto Contractor, submit two copies of complete submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction if required by Owner’sFire Protection Consultant.Coordinate submittal with Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant.Submit additional copies if required 5.Submittals shall be complete, accurate, and in full compliance with contract requirements for proper and timely approval. 6.Contractor shall respond to shop drawing review comments within 7days of receipt. 7.Maintain two copies of approved documents on site. C.Submittal Rejection: 1.Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant will reject submittals which do not comply with Contract Documents.If submittal is rejected by Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant for any reason, Ownerwill back-charge the Contractor $200.00 via Change Order, to cover the processing costs of each subsequent review until submittal is approved.Submittal rejections include, but are not limited to, the following reasons: a.Design Issues:Incorrect densities, design areas, equipment sprinkler spacing, hose station missing, incomplete system design, etc.No changes in design area, number of sprinklers operating, pipe sizes, number of branch lines, number of mains or deviation of water supply from that shown on the Contract Documents shall be approved by Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant.This is not intended to limit the Contractor from making minor modifications to system design for coordination purposes. b.Incorrect Water Test:Failure to use Owner’swater test found on project fire protection Construction Documents.No other water test data is permitted for system design submittals to Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant. c.Incorrect Material:Do not propose pipe, sprinklers or backflow preventers not indicated in Contract Documents.Products not specified in contract documents are cause for rejection. d.Incorrect Valves:Do not propose OS&Y valves when wall PIV's are indicated in the Contract Documents. 13900-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.Rejected submittals shall be revised and resubmitted until approved.Extension of time will not be allowed for rejected submittals. a.The Fire Suppression subcontractor shall revise and resubmit rejected submittals within 7days of receipt of rejected submittals. b.The Contractor shall verify that the Fire Suppression subcontractor has addressed all required revisions in the resubmittal. 1.4Contract Closeout Submittals: A.Submit the following under provisions of Section 01770. 1.Maintenance Data:Include components of system, servicing requirements, inspection data, and operation manuals. 2.Training Requirements:Provide operational training to Owner.Include system control operation, Fire Pump (if provided) manual and abort functions, trouble procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency procedures. 3.Contractors Material Test Certificates:Provide Copies of completed Underground,Overhead, and Fire Pump (if applicable) Contractor’s Material Test Certificates. 4.As-Built shop drawings indicating installed location of components, including all piping, sprinklers, hangers, valving, inspector's test stations, auxiliary drains, and hose stations (if required). B.At Project completion, present to the Store Manager the As built Drawings enclosed in a plastic pipe tube (fixed cap at one end and a threaded-cap on the other end) for storage in the Riser Room. C.In addition to the copies of Documents delivered to the Store Manager, distribute additional copies of documents as indicated below: a.Contractor shall deliver copies of the As-Built shop drawings for Fire Suppression and Contractor’s Material Test Certificates (Underground, Overhead, and FirePump) in PDF format to Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant. 1.5SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.System shall provide coverage for all existing and new building and expansion areas including, but not limited to, areas scheduled in this Section.Contract Documents have beenprepared in accordance with NFPA 13 (working plans) except for fabrication information.The Contract Documents are prepared to a level consistent with that level required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction to gain plan check approval.No changes in design area, number of sprinklers operating, pipe sizes, number of branch lines, number of mains or deviation of water supply from that shown on the contract documents shall be approved by Fire Protection Consultant.This is not intended to limit the Contractor from making minor modifications to system design for coordination purposes.The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents for completeness and to ensure that the Construction Documents meet all Authorities Having Jurisdiction requirements.Discrepancies with NFPA or Authorities Having Jurisdiction requirements shall be brought to the attention of the Fire Protection Consultant prior to bid.The Contractor shall complete the fire protection Contract Documents to provide all final required detail such as fabrication details, final pipe cuts, hanger cuts, and other miscellaneous details not required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction for approval.Contractor is responsible to coordinate design with all trades and disciplines. 1.Fire Protection Consultant has submitted Contract Documents to Authorities Having Jurisdiction for review and approval.Contractor shall provide all other documents, qualifications, submittals and coordination necessary to obtain approval by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.All changes made to the Contract Documents by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Fire Protection Consultant for approval prior to fabrication or installation.Refer to Section 01330 for submittal requirements. B.Provide system complying with NFPA 13, Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and Contract Documents.Densities and areas of application shown or specified have been developed based on NFPA requirements, engineering judgment and insurance carrier requirements. C.Base system design on water flow test data shown on the contract documents. 13900-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.Authorities Having Jurisdiction may require hydraulically calculated densities, areas of application, and hose allowance differing from those shown or specified.Verify and provide hydraulic calculations per Authorities Having Jurisdiction and these Contract Documents. E.Verify actual backflow preventer to ensure correct friction loss is calculated. F.Provide fire department connections where requiredby Authorities Having Jurisdiction. G.Sprinklers in light hazard areas shall be quick response type. H.Limit each system to 52,000 square feet. I.Provide5 %safety factor between supply curve and demand point, including hose stream allowance. J.Provide hangers, supports and earthquake bracing per Contract Documents, NFPA 13, and AuthoritiesHaving Jurisdiction. K.Interface sprinkler system with fire protection supervisory system. L.If required by Authority Having Jurisdiction, provide Fire Department lock-box; quantity, size, type and location as directed 1.6QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Guarantee system fora period of one year after completion of work and acceptance by Owner. B.Qualifications (Installer): Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum three years experience and a minimum of a NICET Certified Engineering Technician (Level III)Water-Based Systems Layout Designer on staff responsible for project. 1.Provide technician name, NICET ID Number, state of employment, and certification level on submittal plans. C.Company shall have a sprinkler contractor license issued by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. D.Regulatory Requirements: Provide certificate of compliance from Authorities Having Jurisdiction indicating approval of field acceptance tests. E.Pre Construction Conference Call: Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant as specified in Section 01330 will conduct a Pre Construction Conference Call. The purpose of the Pre Construction Conference call is to review status of project, notify contractor of status of approvals, and review project expectations. The Contractor shall contact Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant within 2 weeks after Prime Contract award to schedule the Pre Construction Conference Call with the Contractor, Fire Sprinkler Contractor, and Fire Pump Vendor (if applicable). The conference call will be held not more than 30 daysafter Prime Contract award. 1.7EXTRA MATERIALS A.Provide extra sprinklers under the provisions of NFPA 13. Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. Provide sprinklers as needed to meet the requirements listed below.Provide a minimum of 2 spare sprinklers for new sprinklers being added that do not match existing. 1.12 Sales Floor Type 2.4 Dry Pendent 3.2 each of other type present for a total of 24. B.If needed, provide sprinkler and sprinkler wrench cabinet per NFPA 13, adjacent to sprinkler risers. C.Provide hydraulic calculation placard attached to each riseron systems that are modified or added. 13900-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.8DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B.Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps.Maintain caps in place until installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.Owner's Supplier will furnish sprinkler heads where noted on contract documentsas specified in Appendix A (Section 13900)for installation by Contractor.Descriptions and specifications of Owner furnished products are included as information to Contractor only and are not to be considered as Contractor requirements unless otherwise stated. 2.2MATERIALS A.Provide UL Listed (for Fire Protection) or FM Approved (for Fire Protection) materials complying with NFPA 13, unless noted otherwise in Contract Documents. 2.3FIRE PROTECTION PIPING -ABOVE GROUND A.Pipe:Steel pipe, conforming to the applicable requirements of NFPA 13, and ASTM A 53, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795, as applicable. 1.Wet Pipe Systems, Utilizing Threaded Pipe: a.Schedule 40 black steel pipe. b.Threadable lightwall sprinkler pipewith corrosion resistance ratio of 1.0 or greater after threading. c.Use galvanized pipe, zinc coated internally and externally, outdoors, inside coolers and freezers, or in non-conditioned spaces. 2.Wet Pipe Systems, Utilizing Roll Grooved Pipe. a.Schedule 10 black steel pipe. b.Lightwall sprinkler pipewith corrosion resistance ratio of 1.0 or greater. c.Use galvanized pipe, zinc coated internally and externally, outdoors, inside coolers and freezers, or in non-conditioned spaces. 3.Dry Pipe Systems: Same as wet pipe systems except pipe shall be galvanized, zinc coated internally and externally. B.Fittings:Provide one of the following: 1.Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges:ASMEB16.1. 2.Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings:ASMEB16.4. 3.Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings:ASMEB16.3. 4.Steel, Threaded Couplings:ASTMA865. 5.Steel Welding Fittings:ASTMA234, ASMEB16.9, or ASMEB16.11. 6.Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings:ASMEB16.5. 7.Steel, Grooved-End Fittings:UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTMA47, malleable iron or ASTMA536, ductile iron; with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved according to AWWAC606.Roll groove only, cut groove unacceptable. 8.Steel Fittings and Cast Iron fittings shall not be used for dry pipe systems. 9.Fitting type shall match pipe. Galvanized fittings shall be used for dry pipe systemsand wet pipe systems located outdoors, inside coolers & freezers, or in non-conditioned spaces. 10.Crimp-type couplings shall not be used. 11.Plain end fittings (socket, FIT, roustabouts, etc) shall not be used. 13900-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Flexible Piping Systems: At Contractor’s option, UL Listed orFM Approved flexible piping connections to sprinklers may be used for both acoustical paneland gypsum boardceilings when suitable for their intended use. 1.Description: Connections shall include a fully welded (non-mechanical fittings), leak-tested sprinkler drop with a minimum internal corrugated hose diameter of 1 inch. 2.Flexible piping lengths shall not exceed 6 feet. 3.Installation shall not exceed the minimum bend radius and maximum allowable bends as specified by the manufacturer. 4.Change in direction shall be gradual enough to allow flexible piping to bend without crimping, distorting or reducing internal diameter. 2.4BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLIES(IF NEEDED) A.Existing to remain. 2.5SPRINKLERS A.Replace any existing sprinkler that has signs of leakage, paint applied (other than by the sprinkler manufacturer), corrosion, damage, or loading; or is installed in the improper orientation. Provide new sprinkler with identical K- Factor, temperature rating, and response type as the existing. B.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide UL Listed or FM Approved automatic sprinklers. Provide sprinklers with nominal K-factoras indicated on Contract Documents. Sidewall sprinklers are not acceptable, unless noted otherwise.Provide the following sprinkler types: 1.Areas With Exposed Structure Above: Upright or pendent sprinkler, bronze. 2.Areas With Gypsum Board Ceilings: Pendent sprinkler, white, with two-piece white escutcheon plate. 3.Areas With Lay-in Ceilings: Pendent sprinkler, white, with two-piece semi-recessed white escutcheon plate. C.Standard Sprinklers:Tyco Fire Products sprinklers and sprinkler accessories must be provided unless noted otherwise in the contract documents. 1.Glass bulb sprinklers are acceptable. 2.Sprinklers with O-rings not permitted. 3.Substitutions: Not Permitted. 2.6ACCESSORIES A.Control Valve Supervisory Switches: 1.Provide new post indicator valves with tamper switches, Model No. PCVS-2, as manufactured by Potter Electric Signal of St. Louis, Missouri.Owner will connect to alarm system. 2.Provide new outside screw and yoke valves with tamper switches, Model No. OSYSU-2 as manufactured by Potter Electric Signal of St. Louis, Missouri.Owner will connect to alarm system. 3.Provide new ball type control valves leading to alarm initiating devices, Model No. RBVS, as manufactured by Potter Electric Signal of St. Louis, Missouri.Owner will connect to alarm system. 4.All other new valves capable of controlling water to the Fire Protection Sprinkler systems shall have appropriate tamper switches.Owner will connect to alarm system. B.Wire Cage Sprinkler Guards: 1.Provide guards on pendent sprinklers located within 7'-6" of finished floor, except for recessed and concealed sprinklers. 2.Provide guards on sprinklers located beneath overhead doors. C.Replace all pressure gauges over 5 years of age, or gauges without an installation date, with new gauges. Permanently mark the installation date on the gauge. D.Automatic Air Vent: Provide one automatic venting air vent on each wet pipe sprinkler system, as manufactured by Engineered Corrosion Solutions Model Ejector Automatic Air Vent or SouthTek Model Dual Vent ORelease 2 System. 13900-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 E.Substitutions:Not permitted. 2.7FIRE PUMP A.Fire Pump not permitted. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.Install system and equipment in accordance with NFPA 13 and manufacturer's instructions. B.Replace with an identical K-Factor, temperature rating, and response-type any sprinkler that has signs of leakage, paint applied other than bythe sprinkler manufacturer, corrosion, damage, or loading; or is installed in the improper orientation. 3.2INSTALLATION -ABOVE GROUND PIPING A.Provide piping in accordance with NFPA 13. B.Locate top beam clamp or thru bolt connection near joist panel points per pipe support detail. C.Provide piping to conserve building space. Do not interfere with use of building space and other work. D.Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E.Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting.Wherepipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.Protect sprinkler to ensure sprinklers do not receive field paint.Remove protective covering after painting.Replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish with new sprinklers.Cleaning and reuse of painted sprinklers is prohibited. F.Examine other work indicated on the Drawings and conditions at job site.Coordinate routing of work with other construction tradesto avoid interference with other installations.Do not cut building structural members, beams, joists, etc. for routing of sprinkler piping. G.Seal pipe penetrations through fire rated walls or floors to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. H.Provide wall plates at all pipe penetrations.Provide zinc coated (galvanized) wall plates at exterior penetrations. I.Provide zinc coated (galvanized) all-thread rod for hanging dry system piping. J.Provide valves with stems upright or horizontal. K.Route piping and locate sprinklers as required to avoid building structure, equipment, plumbing piping, heating and air conditioning piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures, electrical conduits and bus ducts, and similar work.Locate center of sprinkler a minimum of 6 inches off ceiling grid. 1.Final location of lighting and exposed ductwork shall have priority over pipe routing and final sprinkler locations. 2.Sprinkler piping in sales area without a ceiling and stockroom shall be located above bottom of joists. Minimum height of sprinkler piping in areas with ceilings shall be 1’-0” above ceiling. L.Provide pressure relief valves on gridded wet pipe systems. M.Provide protection from freezing for sprinkler piping exposed to freezing conditions per Contract Documents and NFPA 13. 13900-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 N.Provide valves, backflow prevention devices, check valves, automatic air vents, and drains per Contract Documents and Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 1.Install automatic air vents at accessible locations shown on Contract Documents. Install vent at the highest point possible on each system. Accessible locations are above areas without ceilings and areas with access panels. Areas above lay-in ceilings are not considered accessible. O.Use full lengths of pipe except where needed to accommodate changes in direction or for space limitations. 3.3IDENTIFICATION A.Apply signs to control, drain, test and alarm valves to identify their functions.Provide lettering sizes and styles per Authorities Having Jurisdiction.Provide hydraulic placard for each sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA 13. Stencil riser/zone numbers on risers. B.Provide a sprinkler zone map that clearly identify the location of all: areas protected, control valves, dry pipe valve, inspector’s test valves, auxiliary drains, pumps, and tanks.Sprinkler Zone Map shall be laminated in plastic. Permanently attach to wall in fire sprinkler riser room. 3.4FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.General:Contractor shall schedule, coordinate and conduct all tests required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction and Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant.Contractor shall modify, replace or retest as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction and / or Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant. B.Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler system according to NFPA 13 "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.Test the systems, including the underground water mains, and the aboveground piping and components to assure that equipment and components function as intended.Pressure test the systems in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24.The Contractor shall have available copies of as-built drawings. 1.Above Ground Fire Protection Piping: a.Test per NFPA 13. b.Inspect welds and verify welder's qualifications per Authorities Having Jurisdiction. c.Perform Hydrostatic tests per NFPA 13. 2.Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test. 3.Operation of control valves and flowing of inspector's test connections to verify operation of alarm devices including alarm switches.After operation of control valves has been completed, assure that control valves are in the openposition. 4.Main Drain flow test. C.Inspect sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 25 “Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems” Chapter 14. 1.Fire sprinkler systems:Open a flushing connection at the end of one main and remove the end fitting,piece of branchline or a sprinkler for the purpose of inspecting for the presence of foreign organic and inorganic material.Every system shall be inspected as described in accordance with NFPA 25.Where foreign organic and/or inorganicmaterial is found, all systems shall be inspected.Provide required documentation to identify those systems inspected for future inspectionsincluding photographs of all inspected pipe internals. a.Dry pipe systems:the branchline inspected should be the most remote line from the source of water that is not equipped with the inspector’s test valve. b.Replace sprinklers removed for the purpose of completing the required inspections. 2.Hose systems:Open a flushing connection or fitting at the end of one main, removing a remote hose connection fitting, and removing the end fitting of horizontal branch line (if present) for the purpose of inspecting for the presence of foreign organic or inorganic material.Every other system shall be inspected as described in accordance with NFPA 25.Where foreign organic and/or inorganic material is found, all systems shall be inspected.Provide required documentation to identify those systems inspected for future inspections. 13900-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.Inspect internally all valve assemblies and associated strainers, filters and restrictive orifices to verify that all components operate correctly, move freely and are in good condition. E.Hydrostatically test the fire department connection(s) piping from the fire department connection to the fire department check valve at 150 psi for 2 hours. F.Provide acopyof inspection reports and repair reportsin theowner’sFire Safety Binder. Inspection and repair reports must be clean, neat and legible, and presented in a professional format acceptable to the AHJ.Use of owner’s printers/copiers is not permitted. G.Upload an electronic copy of the inspection and repair reports within 7 days of the inspection to the owner’s designated asset/work order system(s). The ownerreserves right to modify required details within system at any time.Send allfinalreports to Daniel.Cartwright@walmart.com. rd H.Where required by the local AHJ, Upload an electroniccopy of the inspection and repair reports to 3Party AHJ Compliance systems (Brycer, IROL, Tegris, Mobile Eyes, BROL and similar systems) or direct to AHJ. 1.Pay anyfees on behalf of the client and then include the fees as a pass through on the invoice for the services. 2.Contractor is responsible for any fines levied for failure to upload reports as required by AHJ. I.Provide inspection tag (i.e., weekly, monthly, quarterly, annual, 3-year, 5 year, etc.) on the respective component (e.g., wetsystem riser, drysystem riser, pre-actionvalve, anti-freeze system risers, fire pump,etc.)in accordance with the jurisdiction requirements. In the event the jurisdiction does not have specific requirements, the tag will contain the following minimum information: 1.Identification of the system that the information on the tag represents 2.Employer of the technician who performed inspections, test, and any license or certification information required by the AHJ. 3.Date inspection/test were performed 4.Type and frequency of inspections/tests J.Secure tags with zip tie, wire tie,or other permanent means to the main riser or main control valvein such a manner as to be plainly visible and not more than 60 inches above finished floor. K.Current tags to be placed with, and in front of, any existing tags. L.Tags to remain attached for a minimum of five years. M.Provide pictures of all tags to Daniel.Cartwright@walmart.com. If system is impaired, picture must include front and back of tag. N.Provide atamper proof sticker indicating date of 5 year internal inspection on each riser no greater than 60 inches above finished floor. O.Provide atamper proof sticker indicating date of 10 year sample UL testing for cooler/freezer dry pendant on spare sprinklercabinet. P.Fire Sprinkler System Construction Follow Up:Owner’sFire Protection Consultant (as specified in Section 01330) will conduct a Pre Construction Conference Calland Fire Sprinkler Site Observation and Acceptance Test (FPAT). The purpose of the Pre Construction Conference call is to review status of project, notify contractor of status of approvals, and review project expectations.The purpose of the Fire Sprinkler System Site Observation is to determine if the new or remodeled fire sprinkler systems are in general conformance with Contract Documents and shop drawings.The Contractor shall coordinate with Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant for the time and date of the test.Scheduling for the FPAT shall begin 21 days prior to Construction End Date with FPAT being conducted one to two weeksprior to Construction End Date.The FPAT shall occur prior to Construction End Date. A representative sample checklistis available upon request. 13900-9 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.Pre Construction Conference Call:The Contractor shall contact Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant within 2 daysafter Contract Award to schedule the Pre Construction Conference Call with the Contractor, Fire Sprinkler Contractor, and Fire Pump Vendor (if applicable).The conference call will be held within 7days after Award.FPAT will be preliminarily scheduled attime of Pre Construction conference call. 2.FPAT:Owner’sFire Protection Consultant will meet the Contractor, and Sprinkler Contractor.Contractor shall inviteAlarm Central representatives to the test, but their presenceis not required.At scheduled time, Contractor/Sprinkler Contractor shall be ready to initiate Acceptance tests as outlined herein.Prior to initiating tests, the following information shall be reviewed and copies provided to Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant:\] a.Contractors Materials and Test Certificate for Above Ground Piping (By System).As a minimum, the form shall contain information indicated in sample form shown in NFPA 13 (i.e. Figure 16.1 of 2002 edition).Complete all certificatesand verify all information except dry pipe test section and hydrostatic test section.Dry pipe section may be completed during Acceptance Test.Hydrostatic test may be completed in the future and a copy forwarded to Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant at a later date. b.Sprinkler Zone Map. c.Approved Shop Drawings. d.Fire Pump Factory Test Curve (if applicable). 3.After these documents have been reviewed, Acceptance Test shall be initiated by Contractor/Sprinkler Contractor in the order determined by Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant.Each of these tests shallbe interfaced with the fire alarm system.Contractor shall arrange for system to be put in test and arrange to be able to silence local alarms during Acceptance Test.Contractor shall coordinate with Alarm Central.The Contractor shall provide all personnel, material, equipment, lifts, air and water pumps, hand tools, and apparatus necessary to complete the above required testing.The Contractor shall notify the store management that the above tests are scheduled. 4.The following tests shall be conducted by the Contractor / Sprinkler Contractor and witnessed by Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant.Generally this is the order the tests shall be conducted, but the Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant may require tests be conducted in any order deemed appropriate.Determination of order will be made while on site. a.Fire Pump Systems (if applicable):Sprinkler Contractor shall conduct a full NFPA 20 acceptance test, including (but not limited to) flow (churn, 100%, and 150%), manual and automatic starts, etc. Sprinkler Contractor shall provide all equipment and personnel necessary to conduct test.Verify flushing and pre-start preparation prior to test.Typically, this is the first test in the Acceptance Test. b.Water Storage Tank (if applicable):Sprinkler Contractor shall drop water level, overflow tank, and operate tank heaters.Typically, this is the second test in the Acceptance Test. c.Dry pipe Systems:Sprinkler Contractor shall operate dry system to verify High, and Low air pressure settings as well as water delivery time.This test typically follows the Fire Pump/Tank test depending on site conditions. d.Inspector’s Test:Sprinkler Contractor shall operate each Inspector’s Test to verify flow switch operates within 90 seconds (preferred time is 45 seconds, minimum time is 30 seconds).This test typically follows the Dry pipe system Acceptance Test. e.System Control Valves:Sprinkler Contractor shall operate each system control valve to verify functionality.This test typically follows the Inspector’s Test Acceptance Test. f.Antifreeze Systems (if applicable):Sprinkler Contractor shall test antifreeze mixture to verify proper solution ratio.This test typically follows the System Control Valve Acceptance Test. g.Hydrostatic Test:Sprinkler Contractor shall hydrostatically test all systems simultaneously.Typically this will be the lasttest initiated, and depending on schedule may not be fully witnessed by Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant.Contractor/Sprinkler Contractor shall certify and provide signed off copies of test certificates proving successful completion of Hydrostatic tests prior to full acceptance. 5.In addition to conducting the Fire Protections Systems Acceptance Test, a Fire Sprinkler System Site Observation of the installed systems will also be conducted.Owner’s Fire Protection Consultant will conduct and document a site observation of the fire sprinkler systems (and fire pump / tank as applicable).At the conclusion of this Observation, an exit interview will be conducted with the Contractor to review and identify issues that need correction prior to acceptance of the system. 13900-10 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Q.Replace sprinkler system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to demonstrate compliance.Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained. The installation shall not be considered accepted until identified discrepancies have been corrected and test documentation is properly completed and received.If FPAT is required to be repeated or rescheduled due to unsatisfactory results rescheduling could take up to four weeks, and may result in Contractor being back charged for Owner’s Fire Protection Consultantadditional time and expenses. R.Prior to interior store finishing, test existing and new above ground pressure piping for leakage in presence of Authority Having Jurisdiction and Owner's representative.Maintain test pressure at the high end for two hours.Test pressure: 200 psi or 50 psi over normal operating pressure, whichever is greater.Conduct test in accordance with NFPA 13, Hydrostatic Tests.Submit documentation per Contract Closeout Submittals of this section and 01770. S.Provide a copy of the fire sprinkler permit indicating completion of the scope of work shown on contract documents and acceptance by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 13900-11 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 \[BLANK PAGE\] 13900-12 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning082820 SECTION 15050 -BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Hangers and Supports: Pipe supports. 2.Mechanical equipment labels B.Related Section: 1.Section 13900 -Fire Suppression: Fire Protection Sprinkler system piping. 2.Section15100 -Building ServicesPiping: Domestic water, reverse osmosis, sanitary drain and vent, inte- rior storm water, and condensate piping. Piping Insulation. Pipe freeze protection. 3.Section 15600 –Refrigeration Systems. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below forma part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1.ASME B31.9 –Building Services Piping. C.Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI): 1.Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook. D.Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Value and Fittings Industry Inc. (MSS): 1.MSS SP –69–Pipe Hangers and Supports –Selection and Application. 2.MSS SP –89–Pipe Hangers and Supports –Fabrication andInstallation Practices. 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with rules and regulations of public utilities and municipal departmentaffected by connection of services. B.Laws, codes,and ordinances shall take precedence except where work called for by Drawings and Specifications exceeds code requirements in quality or quantity. C.Comply with guidelines set forth in the CISPI Cast Iron SoilPipe and Fittings Handbook, Chapter IV, for installa- tion of hub and spigot cast iron soil pipe. 1.4CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and Specifications show pipe and duct sizes, general routing and location, and describe various systems. These documents describe equipment,including size, general location, usage, support, and auxiliary requirements. Contract Documents do not, however, detail certain job requirements. Drawings are intended to cover layout and design of the Work and are not to be scaled for exact measurements. Where specific detail and dimension for me- chanical Work are not shown on Drawings, take measurements and make layouts as required for proper installation of mechanical Work in coordination with other Work on project. 1.5DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Follow manufacturer's published directions in the delivery, storage, protection, installation, piping, and wiring, and start-up of equipment and materials. 15050-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Pipe Hanger Schedule: Pipe hangers, except for fire suppression piping, shall be as specified in Schedule I at the end of this Section. Trapeze hangers for multiple parallel pipes shall be installed as shown on the drawings. B.Hangers and supports for fire suppression piping shall be as shown on the drawings. C.WallSupport for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Steel riser clamp. D.Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over:Weldedsteel bracket and wrought steel clamp, adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over. E.Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. F.Provide copper plated hangers and supports for uninsulated copper piping. Provide plastic inserts for uninsulated copper piping penetrating metals studs. 2.2EQUIPMENT LABELS A.Provide label for each type of mechanical equipmentinstalled on the project. B.Provide equipment labels as specified below unless otherwise required in the individual sections for the specific piece of equipment specified. C.Labels: 1.Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving 1/16 thick,and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2.Letter Color: White. 3.Background Color: Black. 4.Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 5.Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inchfor name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,1/2 inchfor viewing distances up to 72 inches,and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. In- clude secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 6.Attachment: Eitherof the following a.Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. b.Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. D.Asset Tags: 1.Scan the QR code below to locateand order self-adhesive Walmartasset tagsfrom the vendor Camcode. 2.Install Walmart asset tags on equipment. 3.Data Collection Application:Scan the QR code below to locate and download theAsset Data Collection Application. 15050-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 4.Asset Information: Using the Asset Data Collection App, scan the asset tag of new equipment. Input the store number and data as prompted in the Asset Data Collection App. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Support pipes throughout building, both horizontally and vertically in accordance with requirementsherein and as shown on the drawings.Attach to buildingstructure overhead as shown on drawings. Do not attach to ceilings, equipment, ductwork, conduit, floor, roof decking,or any other non-structural elements.Do notuse fasteners which penetrate the roof deck. 1.Providesway bracingif requiredto comply with code seismic requirements. B.In areas without ceilings, secure insulation shields to insulation with pressure sensitive tape ateach end of shield. C.Hangers for PEX or polypropylene (PP) pipe shall be suitable for thetype of pipeused and designed to prevent gouging of the pipe. Verify with manufacturer of the hangers and/or clamps that hanger or clamp products are compatible with PEX or PP piping. Fasteners shall be approved by the pipe manufacturer. D.Hanger and clamps sizing: 1.Cold Piping:Providepipe hangers sized for the pipe outside diameter plus insulation thickness. 2.Hot Piping: Provide pipe hangers sized for the pipe outside diameter. 3.Vertical Piping: Provide clamps sized for the pipe outsidediameter and extend clamp through insulation. 4.Refer to Section 15100 for definition of hot and cold piping and required insulation thickness. E.Piping Support Spacing: Support horizontal piping above slab, except fire suppression piping, as shown in Sched- ules I-III at the end of this Section. 1.Support firesuppression piping at spacing as shown on the Fire Protection (FP) drawings. F.Underslab Piping Support Spacing: Supporthorizontal piping underslab as shown in Schedules I and II at the end of this Section. G.Install hangersto provide minimum 1/2 inch clear space between finishedcovering and adjacent work. H.Support piping within 12 inches of each elbow or tee. I.Support vertical pipe runsat roof, at floor, and at maximum 10-foot intervals. J.Space supports not more than five feet apart at valves, strainers or piping accessories larger than 2 inches. K.Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit free- dom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate actionof expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.Provide expansion devices as required for the specific piping material used. L.Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.Pro- vide two nuts on threaded supports to securely fasten the support. 15050-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 M.Comply with the requirements of Section 09900 for field painting and touch-up. N.Cast Iron Pipingbelow slab: 1.Install piping in accordance with the Above Ground Installation Procedures outlined in Chapter IV of the CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook with the exception of hanger spacing. 2.Support cast iron soil pipe below slab on a maximum of 3 foot centers and within 18 inches of each hub. 3.Support piping and fittings to maintain alignment and prevent sagging, grade reversal, or joint separation. 4.Support terminal ends of horizontal runs or branches and at each change of direction. 5.Secure closet bends, traps, trap-arms, and similar branches againstmovement in any direction. 6.Install hanger rods as indicated on the drawings and in a straight and vertical line, and tightly adjusted to prevent pipe settlement and to carry the full weight of thepipe after soil subsidence occurs. 7.Secure piping and hangers to prevent misalignment when the slab is placed. 3.2ADJUSTING A.Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B.Load Distribution: Adjust hangers and supports so that pipinglive and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connectedequipment. C.Pipe Slopes: Adjust hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes andto not exceed maximum pipe deflec- tions allowed by ASMEB31.9 for building servicespiping. D.Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inch. 3.3OPERATION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE A.Contractor may operate any equipment provided that theoperation is supervised and the Contractorretains full re- sponsibilityfor properly maintaining equipment and the full manufacturers warranty remains unaffected fromthe time of Owner’spossession. 3.4EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A.Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B.Locate equipment labels whereaccessible and visible. C.Where equipment, such as VAV boxes, is concealed by accessible drop or lay-in ceilings or other accessible barrier, attach label to ceiling grid or a visible location to identify location of hidden equipment. 3.5SCHEDULES:Schedules below apply to all piping, except fire suppression piping, hung inside the building. 15050-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 SCHEDULE I -PIPE HANGER SCHEDULE ServicePipe SizeHangerB-Line Gulf State Globe Grinnell PHDEmpire TypeHangers(Anvil) 2" & Split RingB-3173721108 with 500 with 41BT- smallerwith B-114114H Uninsulated 3224 Steel or PVC or CPVC 2-1/2" & ClevisB-3100404/40726045011 larger 2"&RingB-3170-301CT 99152310CT smallerCT Uninsulated Copper 2-1/2" & ClevisB-3104-407CT 65442110CT largerCT Suspension B386 FIG. 124 Rod Pipe (Stainless (Stainless ClampSteel)Steel) Cast Iron TrapezeB2000 G7000Anvil AS 20008200 Soil PipeAll (unistrut with (Stainless (Stainless 1100 SS series Series (below slab) pipe clamp)Steel)Steel)Seriesclamp with 1000 series strut 2" & ClevisB-3100404 with 260 with 450 with 11 with Insulated smaller, withshieldshieldshieldshield Steel,PVC, 2-1/2” & shield PEX, or PP larger Insulated2" & ClevisB-3100404 with 260 with 450 with 11 with ABS (Glycol smaller, with shieldshieldshieldshield Refrigeration 2-1/2” & shield Piping Only)larger 2" & ClevisB-3104411 with CT 65 442 with 110 smallerwith shieldshieldwith shieldwith shieldshield Insulated Copper 2-1/2" & ClevisB-3100408 with 260 with 442 with 11 with largerwith shieldshieldshieldshieldshield 15050-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 SCHEDULE II -PIPING SUPPORT SCHEDULE Maximum Spacing In Feet CopperSteelCast IronPVCPEXPolypropylene CPVC (PP) UNDER-SLAB: 3’ max 32” max32” max32” max up to 1” and within 18”ofeach joint.3’ max up 6’ max up to 4’ max all otherto 1” I.D. 1-1/4” I.D. 12' maxABOVE-SLAB: 5’ max, except may be 10’ max4’ max all 10’ max all other where 10’ lengths are other installed. Min one hanger at each joint. SCHEDULE III -PIPING SUPPORT SCHEDULE (GAS PIPE) Maximum Spacing In Feet Pipe I.D.Steel 1/2"6' 3/4" or larger8' END OF SECTION 15050-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning032720 SECTION 15100 -BUILDING SERVICES PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building. 2.Sanitary waste and vent piping. 3.Water piping and drain piping specialties. 4.Pipe freeze protection. 5.Connection of miscellaneous equipment furnished under other Sections. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 02320–Excavating, Backfilling, and Compacting. 2.Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Preservative pressure treatment for wood blocking pipe supports. 3.Section 07530–Elastomeric Membrane Roofing. 4.Section 07620 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashing of roof penetration. 5.Section 15050 -Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: Piping hangers and supports. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1.ASME A13.1 -Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. C.American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI B16.18 -Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 1. 2.ANSI B16.22 -Wrought Copper & Copper AlloySolder-Joint Pressure. D.American Society of Heating, Refrigeratingand Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 1.ASHRAE 90.1 -Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except New Low-Rise Residential Buildings. E.ASTM International(ASTM): 1.ASTM A53 -Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2.ASTM A74 -Hub and Spigot Cast IronSoil Pipe and Fittings. 3.ASTM A536 -Ductile Iron Castings. 4.ASTM A861 -High-Silicon Iron Pipe and Fittings. 5.ASTM A888 -HublessCast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 6.ASTM B75 -Seamless Copper Tube. 7.ASTM B88 -Seamless Copper Water Tube. 8.ASTM B135 -Seamless Brass Tube. 9.ASTM B306 -Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). 10.ASTM B584 -Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 11.ASTM C564 -Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 12.ASTM C921 -Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 13.ASTM C1277 -Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Castiron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 14.ASTM C1540 -Heavy Duty Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 15.ASTM D1785 -Poly vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 16.ASTM D2000 -Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 17.ASTM D2467-Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 18.ASTM D2564 -Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 15100-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 19.ASTM D2609 -Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe. 20.ASTM D2665 -Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings 21.ASTM D2855 -Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 22.ASTM D3311 -Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV)Plastic Fittings Patterns 23.ASTM E84 -Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 24.ASTM E96 -Water Vapor Transmission Materials. 25.ASTM F439 -Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 26.ASTM F441 -Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 And 80. 27.ASTM F493 -Solvent Cements for CPVC Pipe andFittings. 28.ASTM F656 -Primers For Use in Solvents Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 29.ASTM F876 -Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing. 30.ASTM F877 -Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems. 31.ASTM F1807 -Metal Insert Fittings Utilizing a Copper Crimp Ring for SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) tubing. 32.ASTM F1960 -Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing Rings for Use with Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing. 33.ASTM F2014 -Non-Reinforced Extruded Tee Connections for Piping Applications. 34.ASTM F2023 –Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Oxidative Resistance of Plastic Piping to Hot Chlorinated Water. 35.ASTM F2098 -Stainless Steel Clamps for Securing SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing to Metal Insert Fittings. 36.ASTM-F2389 –Pressure-rated Polypropylene (PP) Piping Systems. F.American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1.AWWA C104 -Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2.AWWA C115 -Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges. 3.AWWA C151 -Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. 4.AWWA C651 -Disinfecting Water Mains. G.CSA Group (Canadian Standards Association) 1.CSA B137.11 -Polypropylene (PP-R) Pipe and Fittings for Pressure Applications. H.Hydraulic Institute (HI): 1.HI M103 (ANSI/HI 1.4) -Centrifugal Operations. I.International Association of Plumbing andMechanical Officials (IAPMO) 1.IAPMO/ANSI Z1001-Prefabricated Gravity Grease Interceptors. J.NSF International(NSF): 1.NSF 14-Plastic Piping System Components and Related Materials. 2.NSF 51 –Food Equipment Materials 3.NSF 61 –Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects. 4.NSF 61 Annex G -Weighted Average Lead Content Evaluation Procedure to a 0.24 Percent Lead Requirement. K.Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI): 1.PDI WH 201-Water Hammer Arrestors. L.Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1.UL 778 –Motor-Operated Water Pumps. 1.3SUBMITTALS A.Comply with the requirements of Section 01330. 15100-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Product Data: Submit product data and installation details for grease interceptor to Authority Having Jurisdiction for approval. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories. C.Water Samples: Submit to Authorities Having Jurisdiction in accordance with the requirements of Cleaning and Disinfection paragraph in Part 3. 1.4CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Submit the following as described in the testing and inspection requirementsin Part 3 below as a part of closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01770. 1.Video Inspection Report: Furnish one copy of Video Inspection Report to Owner’sConstruction Manager within one week after completion of inspection. 2.Certification: Provide statement of certification of the following: a.Statement of completion that Work is in accordance with specified requirements. b.Name and signature of General Contractor. c.Names and signatures of Video Inspection Contractor. 3.Polypropylene Pipe Warranty. 1.5QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Domestic Water Supply Copper Piping Assembly Installer Qualifications:IfContractor provides any of the optional domestic water supply copper piping assembly systems specified in Part 2, Installer shall be a certified installer of system provided. B.Installers of polypropylene pipe shall be factory certified and trained by pipe manufacturer. Installers shall have certificates of training available for review. C.Regulatory Requirements: 1.Lead-Free Compliance: Domestic water piping and fittings, pumps, water piping specialties and specialty plumbing fixtures shall comply with the requirements of NSF 61 Annex G. 1.6DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Transportandhandleproducts in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B.Store and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. C.Polypropylene piping shall remain in its UV resistant packaging until ready to be installed. If the piping is to be exposed to the sun for more than 30 days, take appropriate measures to protect the pipe from UV radiation. 1.7WARRANTY A.Provide manufacturer’s warranty for polypropylene pipe and fittings for 10 years to be free of defects in materials or manufacturing. B.Warranty shall cover labor and material costs of repairing or replacing defective materials and repairing any incidental damage caused by failure of the piping system due to defects in materials or manufacturing. C.Contractor shall submit to the manufacturer, the pressure/leak test documentation indicating that the system was tested and passed the manufacturer’s pressure/leak test in order to receive the warranty from the manufacturer. Submit pressure test tomanufacturer as required. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A.Water Piping Above Grade: 15100-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.Type "L" hard drawn, seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88. 2.Jointing:Join with wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B16.22.Make joints using "lead free" solder and a non-corrosive, paste-type flux.Core solder is not permitted.Solder shall be solid string or wire type, ASTM B32 Alloy Sb-5, 95-5 Tin Antimony.Where soldered copper piping is connected to threaded brass piping, use cast brass adaptor. 3.At Contractor’s option, in lieu of a soldered copper piping system as specified above, any of the following copperpipe assembly systemsmay be used. :Copper tubing systems from a.CTS Copper Grooved Piping SystembyVictaulic Company of America 2inchthrough 8inchshall be installed using mechanical pipe couplings of a bolted type, with pressure-responsive gaskets and grooved end copper or bronze fittings.The CTS System shall include the following components: 1)Copper Tube:Type "L" hard drawn, seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88. 2)Mechanical Couplings:Style 606 rigid couplings 2inch –8inchfor copper consisting of a ductile iron cast housing, a synthetic rubber gasket of a pressure-responsive design, with plated nuts and bolts to secure unit together. 3)Coupling Housings:Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12, with a copper color alkyd enamel paint coating. 4)Gaskets:Molded of Grade “E” EPDM synthetic rubber, conforming to ASTM D2000, designation 2CA615A25B24F17Z, and recommended for potable water service within the specified temperature range of –30 to +230 degrees F. Gaskets shall conform to the copper tube size (CTS) outside diameter and coupling housing inside diameter. 5)Flange Adapters:Style 641 adapters 2inch -6inch, ductile iron ASTM A536, Grade 65-45- 12, engaging directly into roll grooved copper tube and fittings and bolting directly to ANSI Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel flanged components; installer shall provide standard flange bolts. 6)Fittings:Full flow copper fittings with grooves designed to accept Victaulic grooved end couplings.Fittings shall be copper per ASTM B75 alloy C12200; or bronze sand castings per ASTM B584 copper alloy CDA 844 (81-3-7-9) per ANSI B16.18.Use Style 47 dielectric waterways when connecting dissimilar metals in liquid systems. 7)Valves:Series 608 Butterfly valves, 2-1/2inch–6inch, 300 psi, with grooved ends, cast bronze body to CDA-836 (85-5-5-5), rubber encapsulated ductile iron disc, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12.Bubble tight, dead-end or bi-directional service as required. b.Press-connect copper pipe fitting system by one of the following: 1)ProPress byViega. 2)Xpress by Elkhart Products Corporation. 3)Pressystem by NIBCO. 4.Mechanically formed tee fitting system by T-DrillIndustriesin accordance with ASTM F2014. 5.Crosslinked PE (PEX) Tubing: a.PEX Tube: Tube shall be tested and certified for potable water systems, and shall comply with ANSI/NSF Standard 14, ANSI/NSF Standard 61, and ASTM F876 and/or ASTM F877. Tube shall be labeled with the above certifications. b.Provide PEX tubing system by one of the following: 1)NIBCO, Inc 2)REHAU 3)Uponor(Formerly/Wirsbo) 4)Watts Water Technologies 5)Zurn Engineered Water Solutons c.Tube shall be white in color. d.Fittings: Lead free brass or copper fittings, copper crimp connectors, stainless steel clamp connectors and cold expansion sleeves shall be tested and certified for potable water systems and shall comply with one of the following Standards: ASTM F1807, ASTM F1960, ASTM F2098. e.PEX tube, brass or copper fittings and connectors shall be by the same manufacturer and assembled with the manufacturer’s approved tools. The same connection method shall be used throughout the installation. 6.Polypropylene (PP-RCT) Piping: a.Polypropylene (PP-RRCT) piping containing faser (a fiber layer to contain thermal expansion). 15100-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 b.Pipe shall be tested and certified for potable water systems, and shall comply with ANSI/NSF Standard 14, ANSI/NSF Standard 61, ASTM F2023, ASTM F2389 and ASTM D635. Pipe shall be labeled with the above certifications. c.PP pipe, fittings and adapters shall be by one manufacturer. Use only manufacturer approved heat fusion tools. d.Fittings: Connections and transition to other pipe material or types shall be made by manufacturer approved products and tools. e.General duty metallic valves(i.e., gate, globe, check, and ball, valves) are scheduled on the drawing. B.Water Piping Below Grade (Under Slab): 1.1-1/2 Inches and Smaller: a.Crosslinked PE (PEX) tubing, ASTM F876 without joints beneath the slab. b.Type "K" soft copper without joints beneath slab. 2.2 Inches and Larger:Type Khard drawn with brazed fittings. C.Chrome-Plated Seamless Brass Tube:ASTM B135. D.Insulation: 1.Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation as manufactured by one of the following: . a.CertainTeed b.Imcoa(Nomaco K-Flex). c.Knauf. d.Owens-Corning. e.Johns Manville. f.Armacell. 2.Provide one of the following types of insulation throughout the project: a.Rigid Glass Fiber:Type ASJ/SSL, maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.23 Btu-in/hr.f.sq ft, 3 lb/cu.ft density.Vapor barrier jacket shall be white kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film conforming to ASTMC921, with a maximum moisture vapor transmission rate of 0.02 perm-inch in accordance with ASTM E96.Insulate fittings with PVC covers with glass fiber inserts. b.Polymer Foam Insulation:Arcticthermby Imcoa or equal.Maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.25 Btu-in/hr.f.sq ft, 1.5 lbs/cu. ft. density, maximum flame spread and smoke development of 25 and 50, respectivelyper ASTM E84.Insulate fittings with pre-formed foam covers. c.Elastomeric Flexible Closed Cell Insulation:AP Armaflex W (white)by Armacellor equal.Maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.28Btu-in/hr.f.sq ft, maximum flame spread and smoke development of 25 and 50, respectively.Insulate fittings per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.Insulation Color:White. 4.Insulation Thickness: Provide minimum insulation thickness for water piping in compliance with ASHRAE 90.1 and the following: a.Hot Water: 1)Branch runouts for nonrecirulating systems up to 1-1/2"in diameter and less than 12 feet in length: 1/2inchinsulation. 2)Pipes 2inchin diameter and less: 1inchinsulation. 3)Pipes 2-1/2inchto 4inch: 1-1/2inchinsulation. b.Cold Water: 1/2inchinsulation. 2.2SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING A.Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 1.Cast Iron:Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, coated inside and outside, ASTM A74or ASTM A888.Provide weight of pipe as required by code for location and duty. a.Cast Iron Pipe connection to PVC Pipe: Compression Joint Sealer for dissimilar pipe materials. 2.PVC Pipe (Above grade only): May be used for sanitary drainage pipes (drain, waste, and vent) where permitted by Authority Having Jurisdiction. a.Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTMD2665, drain, waste, and vent. Cellular (foam) core PVC not permitted. 15100-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 b.PVC Socket Fittings, ASTMD2665, made to ASTMD3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. 3.Copper Drainage Tubing (Above grade only): ASTM B306. 4.ABS Pipe:Not Permitted. B.Joints: 1.Cast Iron Pipe:Push-oncompression gasketed type jointfor hub and spigot,ASTM C564.No-hub mechanical joints with center stops, ASTM C1277 or ASTM C1540. 2.PVC Pipe:Solvent-welded joints. 3.Copper Drainage Tubing:Join with wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B16.22.Make joints using "lead free" solder and a non-corrosive paste type flux.Core solder shall not be used.Solder shall be solid string or wire type. C.Traps: 1.Provide deep seal P-traps for floor drains, including drains furnished as integral parts of floor-type mop basins, and similar fixtures. 2.3WATER PIPING SPECIALITIES A.Subject to compliance with Project requirements, provide piping specialtiesof manufacturers, types, and model numbers as indicated on the Plumbing Schedules on the Drawings. Water piping specialtiesshall include such items as hose bibbs, hydrants, valves, vacuum breakers, mixing valves, pressure reducing (regulating) valves, expansion tanksand accessories. 2.4SPECIALTY PLUMBING FIXTURE. A.Subject to compliance with Project requirements, provide plumbing fixture specialties of manufacturers, types, and model numbers as indicated on the SPECIALTY PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE on the Drawings. Plumbing fixture specialties shall include such items as backflow preventers, water hammer arresters, trap primers, and ball valves 2.5DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALITIES A.Subject to compliance with Project requirements, providepiping specialtiesof manufacturers, types, and model numbers as indicated on the Plumbing Schedules on the Drawings.Drainage piping specialtiesshall include floor and roof drains, deck drains, cleanoutsand accessories. 2.6PIPE FREEZE PROTECTION A.Pipe freeze protection system shall include the following: 1.Parallel circuit heating cable. 2.Transformers. 3.Outdoor ambient thermostat. 4.Junction boxes. 5.Branch circuit wiring and conduit as specified in Section 16100. 6.Other items as necessary to complete system. B.Components: 1.Heating Cable:Parallel circuit, jacketed cable, self-limiting, 120 volt.Provide XL-Trace as manufactured by . Raychem/Tycoor CO Series by Delta-Therm a.Provide minimum 5 watts perlineal foot (or more) as required for specified piping and insulation per manufacturer's published instructions. b.Provide termination fittings for direct connection to junction boxes. 2.Junction Boxes:NEMA 5 watertight. 3.Outdoor Ambient Thermostat:Provide thermostat with adjustable contacts.Set contacts to close at 40 degrees F on decreasing temperature. 2.7SUBSTITUTIONS 15100-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Reference Section 01600. 2.8THERMOMETERS, GENERAL A.Accuracy:Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span. B.Scale range:Temperature ranges for services listed as follows: 1.Domestic Hot Water:30 to 240 deg with 2-degree scale divisions (0 to 115 deg C with 1-degree scale divisions). 2.Domestic Cold Water:0 to 100 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions (minus 18 to 38 deg C with 1-degree scale divisions). 3.Hot Water:30 to 300 deg with 2-degree scale divisions (0 to 150 deg C with 1-degree scale divisions). 4.Condenser Water:0 to 160 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions (minus 18 to 70 deg C with 1-degree scale divisions). 5.Chilled Water:0 to 100 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions (minus 18 to 38 deg C with 1-degree scale divisions). 2.9GLASS TUBE INDUSTRIALTHERMOMETERS A.Case:Die cast, aluminum finished, in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9 inches long. B.Adjustable Joint:Finished to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device. C.Tube: Non-red color reading, non-toxic organic spirit-filled glass tube, magnifying lens. D.Scale:Satin-faced, non-reflective aluminum, with permanently etched markings. E.Stem:Copper-plated steel, aluminum or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation. 2.10THERMOMETER WELLS A.Thermometer Wells:Brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure;with 2-inch extension for insulated piping and threaded cap nut with chain permanently fastened to well and cap. B.Thermometer Wells:Install in piping tee where thermometers are indicated, in vertical position.Fill well with oil or graphite and secure cap. 2.11MANUFACTURERS A.Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.Glass Tube Industrial Thermometers: a.H. O. Trerice Co., http://www.trerice.com/temperature.asp b.Marsh Bellofram Group, http://www.marshbellofram.com/marsh/products/industrial-thermometer/ c.http://www.miljoco.com/thermometers/industrial-thermometers/ d.Weiss Instruments, Inc. http://www.weissinstruments.com/industrial-glass-thermometers.html e.Weksler Instruments Corp. http://www.weksler.com/ f.Winters Instruments http://www.winters.com/ PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1PIPING INSTALLATION A.Install piping and accessories at locations and of sizes shown on the drawings. 15100-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Install proprietary piping systems, accessories, and products in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions. C.Connect piping and fittings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions using specialty tools as required and recommended by the manufacturer. D.Install piping neatly and parallel with, or perpendicular to, lines of the structure.Install pipe hangers as specified in Section 15050 to maintain accurately aligned piping systems, adequately supported both laterally and vertically. E.Backfill and compact trenches for piping below the slab per Section 02320. F.Provide Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeve, minimum of one size larger than the protected pipe, for underground piping routed beneath structural footings.Extend sleeve 24 inches in both directions beyond the footing. G.Where practical, connect two or more vents together and extend as one vent through roof.Make vent connections to stacks by appropriate use of 45 degree wyes, long sweep quarter bends, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends, except that sanitary tees may be used on the vertical stacks. H.Extend vent piping 12 inches above roof line or more if required by Authority Having Jurisdiction.Coordinate installation with roofing. I.Conceal piping in chases, interior walls, furred spaces, and above ceiling. J.Identify nonpotable water systems by color markings or metal tags in accordance with ASME A13.1. K.Make piping connections to fixtures and equipment with chrome-plated seamless brass tube with cleanout plug and escutcheon. L.For items to be installed on split face CMU, grind surface of CMU to a smooth finish for tight installation. Seal with silicone sealant in accordance with Section 07900. M.PEX Domestic Water Tubing: 1.Install piping similar to copper piping as shown on drawings. Do not use manifold system. 2.Protect tubing from UV radiation during pre-installation storage and after installation. 3.Provide adequate tubing length for contraction and expansion of tubing. 4.Tubing may be bundled. Do not bundle cold water lines with hot water or hot water return lines. 5.Protect tubing routed through metal studs with grommets or sleeves at each stud. 6.Do not install PEX tubing in masonry walls. 7.Install type “L” copper pipe at the inlet and outlet of the water heater, minimum 18 inches long. 8.Utilize water hammer arrestors as specified for the copper tube system. 9.Tubing sizes shall be as shown on the Equivalent Pipe Size Schedule on the drawings. 10.Coordinate PEX to plumbing fixture fittings with the furnished fixture accessories. a.Use copper stub-outs and stub-out brackets secured to wall for fixtures furnished with compression stops. b.Do not use PEX for flush valves. 11.Provide recommended methods for controlling thermal expansion in hot water piping for straight runs every 50 feet. N.Polypropylene (PP-RCT) 1.Install piping similar to copper piping as shown on drawings. a.Install polypropylene (PP-RCT) pipingcontaining faser (a fiber layer to contain thermal expansion) SDR 7.4 for hot water and hot water return piping. Do not install copper tube in polypropylene hot water and hot water return systems. b.Install polypropylene (PP-RCT) piping SDR 11 for cold water piping. 2.Store piping and fittings in factory-issued protective bag until immediately prior to installation to protect the pipe from dust, scratches and UV radiation damage. 3.Utilize water hammer arrestors as specified for the copper pipe system. 15100-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 4.Pipe sizes shall be as shown on the Equivalent Pipe Size Schedule on the drawings. 5.Coordinatepiping to plumbing fixture fittings with the furnished fixture accessories. a.Use copper stub-outs and stub-out brackets secured to wall for fixtures furnished with compression stops. b.Use manufacturer’s threaded fittings for connections to flush valves. 6.Fusion Welding of Joints a.Install fittings and joints using socket-fusion, electrofusion, or butt-fusion as applicable for the fitting type. b.Fusion-weld tooling, welding machines, and electrofusion devices shall be as specified by the pipe and fittings manufacturer. c.Prior to joining, the pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with F 2389 and the manufacturer’s specifications. d.Joint preparation, setting and alignment, fusion process, cooling times and working pressure shall be in accordance with the pipe and fitting manufacturer’s specifications 7.Provide recommended methods for controlling thermal expansion in hot water piping for straight runs every 120 feet. 3.2PIPING INSULATION -INSTALLATION A.Domestic Hot and Cold Water Lines:Insulate lines above slab. 3.3WATER PIPING SPECIALITIES INSTALLATION A.Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment where shown and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 1.Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2.Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air- gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application. 3.Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. B.Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. C.Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted. D.Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet. 1.Install thermometers and water regulators if specified. 2.Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. E.Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valves andpressure-reducing valves. F.Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH201. G.Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap,or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. H.Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. 3.4LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A.Equipment Nameplates(for new equipment):Manufacturer's standard 3/32 inch thick black plastic laminate nameplateswith 5/32 inch holes for fasteners. Provide nameplates and signs no smaller than 1-1/2 inches square. 1.Provide engraved white lettering indicating piping system abbreviation in characters 1/4 inch high and sequenced valve numbers in characters 1/2 inch high. 15100-9 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Signs: In addition to identifying unit, provide signs which distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operation. C.Install equipment nameplate or signon or near each of the followingnew items: 1.Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers. 2.Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 3.Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies. 4.Water pressure-reducing valves. 5.Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. 6.Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves. 3.5DRAIN PIPING SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A.Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing. B.For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. C.For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. D.Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1.Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2.Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 3.Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. E.Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated. F.Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection. 1.Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2.Size: Same as floor drain inlet. G.Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system. H.Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. I.Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. 3.6PIPE FREEZE PROTECTION A.Install heating cable at locations shown on drawings for pipe freeze protection. B.Cut heating cable to length required for pipe lengths and watt per foot requirements.Secure to pipe and install in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3.7CLEANINGAND DISINFECTION A.Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1.Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2.Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by Authorities Having Jurisdiction. If methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in AWWAC651 or follow procedures described as follows: a.Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b.Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 15100-10 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1)Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppmof chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2)Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppmof chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c.After the standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until thechlorine is purged from the system. B.Submit water samples in sterile bottles to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. C.Reports:Prepare disinfection reports signed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction and submit to Architectwith Closeout Submittals. 3.8FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Pipe Tests: 1.Test plumbing drainage systems under 10 foot static head for a period of not less than 24 hours. 2.Test water systems under 150 psig hydrostatic pressure. 3.Test underground piping prior to backfilling and before installing equipment and before insulation is applied, using specified methods and conditions. Subject piping to test for not less than 24 hours. Make necessary replacements or repairs and repeat tests until entire system, including equipment, is accepted as satisfactory. 4.Pressure test PEX piping systems in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. Do not exceed 150 psig. 5.Pressure test Polypropylene piping in accordance with manufacturer’s Installation Manual.Submitpressure test to polypropylene manufacturer. 6.Install equipment, operate systems, clean out scale, dirt, oil, waste, and foreign matter, and correct additional leaks. 7.Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check backflow-prevention assembly according to Authorities Having Jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. 8.Pipetests specified in this Section shall be to five feet outside building lines or to point of connection to exterior lines. Drains to oil/grease interceptor (separator) shall be tested to the point of the oil/grease interceptoroutlet. B.Underground Piping Inspections 1.Underground piping systems shall be inspected by the Engineer of Record and the Owner’sConstruction Manager.Contractor shall notify the Engineer and Construction Manager at least ten business days prior to the following milestones being started on the site: a.Backfilling of underground piping and associated structural support systems. b.Placement of the floor slab. 2.Performance of the above backfilling and slab placement without proper coordination and inspection shall result in removal of in-place work at the Contractor’s expense to allow appropriate inspections. C.Underground Piping Video Inspection(At the discretion of the Walmart Construction Manager) 1.General:Perform video inspection of underground sewer piping from the point of connection to the manhole outside the building through the mains and through the single takeoff to each fixture. 2.When there are problems with existing sewer piping, performvideoinspection of existing sewer piping and coordinate repair of deficiencies with Owner’sConstruction Manager.An equitable adjustment will be made in the contract price for additional work directed and performed. 3.Video Inspection Contractor Qualifications: Specified in Part 1. 4.Video Inspection Certification: Provide video inspection certification as specified in Part 1. 5.Video Taping Requirements: a.Video camera designed for express purpose of sewer line inspection. b.Camera and apparatus capable of extending to all points of piping required within 2 inch to 8 inch diameter pipe. 6.Procedure: 15100-11 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 a.Inspect sewer pipes with video camera no earlier than 30 days after floor slab has been poured. Sections of sewer determined to be deficient shall be uncovered and repaired or replaced to satisfaction of Owner.Retest repaired section. b.Adequately flush and clean sewer piping prior to video inspection c.Provide additional video inspection at contractor's expense if there are clogging problems within the first year warranty and if requested by owner. 7.Video Inspection Report: a.Submit in accordance with requirements in Part 1. b.Submit bound report in MS Word format. c.Provide summary report of pipes inspected and defects noted d.Log shall show the exact measure location of faults such as, but not limited to: 1)Open joints. 2)Broken, cracked or collapsed pipe. 3)Accumulation of debris or obstructions. 4)Evidence of infiltration. 5)Water depth variation and sags. 6)Protrusions. e.The reference location shall include the distance away from the reference point of entry such as manhole or cleanout and the position of the fault as to the bottom, top or side of the pipe. f.Provide plan of piping network covered with notations. 3.9ADJUSTING A.Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves. B.Set field-adjustable flow of balancing valves. C.Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves. 3.10PROTECTION A.Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B.Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 15100-12 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning120420 SECTION 15410 (22 4000) -PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Plumbing fixtures and plumbing fixture trim. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 01770 –Contract Closeout: Operation and maintenance data requirements. 2.Section 07900 -Joint Sealers: Sealant for fixtures at wall and floors. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.NSF International(NSF): 1.NSF 61 Annex G -Weighted Average Lead Content Evaluation Procedure to a 0.24 Percent Lead Requirement. 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Regulatory Requirements: 1.Products Requiring Electrical Connection:Listed and classified by Underwriter's Laboratories, Incorporated, and acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2.Disabled Access: Conform to applicable local, State or Federal disabled access requirements for the installation, mounting heights, and operation of plumbing fixture. 3.Lead-Free Compliance: Fixtures and fixture trim shall comply with the requirements of NSF 61 Annex G for lavatories, sinks and water coolers. 1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging.Inspect for damage. B.Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. C.Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. D.Inspect materials delivered and reject those not qualifying with requirements, those damaged in transit, or those that appear otherwise unsatisfactory. E.Schedule delivery of items to installation areas thatare in proper condition to receive them. Place items neatly and systematically to avoid damage, store in clean, dry, enclosed, and secure storage area. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Subject to compliance with Project requirements, provide plumbing fixtures of manufacturers indicated on Drawings and by one of the following listed for that category. 1.Stop Valves: 15410-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 a.Brass Craft Subsidiary; Masco Co. b.Engineered Brass Company c.McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. d.Watts Brass and Tubular e.Zurn Industries 2.P-traps, Strainers, Drains & Miscellaneous Fittings: a.Brass Craft Subsidiary; Masco Co. b.Dearborn Brass c.Engineered Brass Company d.McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. e.Watts Brass and Tubular f.Zurn Industries 3.Insulation Kits: a.Brocar. b.McGuire. c.Plumberex. d.Trap-Wrap. e.Truebro, Inc. 2.2FIXTURES-SUPPLIERS A.Fixture types and model numbers areas scheduledon the drawings. B.ProvidefixturesfromHaines, Jones & Cadbury as Owner’s pre-selected supplier. Contact Haines, Jones & Cadbury, (800) 459-7099, WMT@hjcinc.com. 1.Substitutions: Not permitted. C.Provide lavatory deck assembly and trim fromHaines, Jones & Cadbury as Owner’s pre-selected supplier. Contact Haines, Jones & Cadbury, (800) 459-7099, WMT@hjcinc.com. 2.4FIXTURE TRIM-DESCRIPTION A.Provide each fixture complete with required trim. B.Exposed piping and trim shall be polished chrome-plated brass. C.Provide each fixture with chrome-plated brass, quarter-turn angle stop valves. D.P-Traps and Sink Continuous Wastes: Polished chrome-plated, tubular brass, 17 gauge, with brass nuts on slip inlets, and of configurations indicated. P-traps shall have cleanout plugs. E.Escutcheons: Interior; Polished chrome-plated with set screw. Exterior; 304 stainless steel, wall flange. F.Stainless Steel (SS) Braided Water Supply: Flexible braided stainless steel outer sheathing with reinforced PVC inner tubing. G.Provide flow-limiting device which limits flow to not more than 2.2 gpm for each sink except service and 3-com- partment sinks. Provide devices integral with fixture trim, wherever possible, and products of same manufacturer as fixture trim. H.Lavatory faucets for public use or within public restrooms shall be of the electronic self-closing type and shall have a maximum flow rate of 0.5 GPM in accordance with ASME/ANSI A112.18.1. Provide devices integral with fixture trim, wherever possible, and products of same manufacturer as fixture trim. I.Flush Valves: Subject to compliance and compatible with plumbing fixtures as scheduled on the drawings. Provide flush valves that do not exceed code requirements for maximum gallons per flush. 15410-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 J.Provide trim as required to permit scheduled lavatory to be installed for handicap use. K.Provide bolt caps with retainer clips on water closets. L.When specified on plans, general contractor to provide faucets and sprayers for grocery hand sinks, three-compart- ment sinks, prep sinks and wash down stations. Contact the appropriate following manufacturer for parts numbers and local suppliers. 1.Universal Stainless, Cathy Kautzman (Universal), cathy.kautzman@spgusa.com,(303) 375-1511,ext. 3128. 2.Win-Holt, Louise Kennemer (Win-Holt), ikennemer@winholt.com,(800) 632-7222,ext.1141. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Toilet and Urinal Inspection:At time of fixture removal in preparation for new floor and wall finishes, examine the following: 1.Floor or wall mount integrity. a.Verify floor or wall mount is sufficient for secure reinstallation. Note any needs for anchor bolt re- placement, blocking repair, or requirement for concrete embedment reinforcement. b.Verify wall mount fixtures are secure in the vertical axis. 2.Verify proper flush valve and sensor operation. Note needs for replacement if not otherwise noted on drawings. 3.Inspect existing toilet and urinal fixtures for cracksor chips in the surface porcelain finish. Replace cracked and otherwise structurally damaged fixtures with new fixtures.Repair porcelain chips as specified herein. B.Prior to reinstallation, examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed.Verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements and installation conditions.Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and readyfor installation of fixtures. 2.Verify that plumbing piping for fixture is in the correct location and of the correct type. 3.2WATER CLOSET FIXTURE REPAIRS A.Arrange for commercialcleaning of existing to remain water closet fixtures prior to storage as specified in Section 01740. B.Repair water closet fixtures and mounting embedments after fixture removal and prior to storage. 1.Toilet and Urinal Fixture Mounts: Patch or replace concrete around failed anchor embedments as required for secure reinstallation. 2.Chips inPorcelain Finish: Note any shallow nicks and chips in water closet fixture finishesnot already identified on drawings. a.Toilets: Repair chips in and around bowl, on rim, and other horizontal porcelain surfaces. b.Urinals: Repair chips in and around bowl and on susceptible vertical surfaces. 1)Prepare chipped area by sanding lightly with fine grit emery cloth. 2)Clean and remove dust and residue from sanding. 3)Applyan epoxy repair putty compound recommended by the epoxy manufacturer as suitable for thetype of fixture. Blend well. 4)Sand and smooth after recommended cure time. Apply a touch-up product to match porcelain color as recommended by the epoxy manufacturer. c.Do not use quick-set glues. 3.3PREPARATION A.Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated on Drawings for particular fix- tures. 15410-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.4INSTALLATION A.Install fixtures and trim in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.Make final connections. B.Support each fixture in rigid manner which permits no perceptible movement of fixture by manually applied forces. Seal space between fixtures and floor or walls with silicone sealant. C.Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap. Install each fixture with trap which is easily removable for servicing and cleaning. D.Install components level and plumb.Install toilet seats on water closets. E.Install and secure fixtures in place with carriers and bolts. F.Solidly attach water closets to floor or wall as required. G.Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900, color to match fixture. H.Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. I.Install insulation kits on ADA compliant sink and lavatory waste, continuous wastes, hot and cold water supplies where indicated on the drawings and as required by the ADA 3.5FIELD QUALITYCONTROL A.Inspect plumbing fixture and trim installation, attachment to building, operation, and connections.Ensure that fix- tures are installed and operate in conformance with disabled access requirements. 1.Prior to final acceptance, inspect faucets, flush valves, stop valves, and similar devices, to determine that they operate properly and discharge proper quantities of water.Correct any deficiencies as directed by Owner's representative. 3.6ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Operate and adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise,or overflow. 1.Replace malfunctioning units. 2.Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. B.Clean fixtures, trim, and accessories of foreign materials, including labelsaffixed tonew fixtures, before final ac- ceptance. END OF SECTION 15410-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning032621 SECTION 15600 -REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Owner’s Refrigeration equipment supplier will furnish refrigeration equipment as indicated on Drawings and defined Appendix A –Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor. 1.Obtain services of anOwnerapproved Refrigeration Contractor to perform allwork in this Section, unless noted otherwise. B.Section Includes: 1.Work and responsibilities associated with owner furnishedrefrigeration equipmentfor installation by the Contractor.Description of work and responsibilities includes, but is not limited to, installation, start-up, and commissioning of refrigeration systems and display cases, evaporator coils, condensers or condenser/compressor units, and interconnecting piping, condensate drains, and field installed refrigeration controls. 2.Work and responsibilities for refrigeration equipment related itemsprovidedby the Contractor, including minor items necessary to the installation which may not specifically be mentioned in the Contract Documents. Such items include, but are not limited to, screws, shims, anchors, escutcheons, brackets, pipe sleeves, sealants, flux, glue, and changes due to unforeseen obstructions. C.Related Requirements: 1.. 2.Section 07721 –Manufactured Curbs: Curbsfor roof-mounted refrigeration equipment. 3.Section 07900 –Joint Sealers: Products for use in sealing pipe penetrations. 4.Section 13810 –Building Automation System. 5.Section 15050 –Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: Hangers and supports for refrigeration system piping. 6. 7. 8.Section 16050 –Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. 9.Section 16100 –Wiring Methods. 10.Appendix A –Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor: Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products. 11.Appendix B –Testing,Inspection, and Observationby Owner. 12.Responsibility Matrix –Contractor responsibility as shown on the Drawings for coordinating removal and reinstallation of refrigerated case kick plate during floor work. 1.2DEFINITION OF TERMS A.Work shall mean complete installation of equipment and devices in accordance with applicable Specifications and as described in the Drawings, Application Sheets, Manufacturer's Legend Sheets and Instructions. B.Refrigeration Contractor shall mean the AwardedContractor’s, Ownerapproved, Subcontractor that is responsible for performing the refrigeration work as specified on the construction documents. Refrigeration Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with applicable codes, ordinances, and work permits. C.Refrigeration Equipment: Equipment shown or noted on the Drawings to include the following: 1.Hot cases. 2.Cold cases. 3.Self-Contained refrigerated systems. 4.Freezer/Cooler Panels and Doors. 15600-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 5.Evaporators. 6.Mini-Racks. 7.Rack-in Box (RIB). 8.Separate Condensers. 9.Refrigerated Case Protection (specified in Section 10260). 10.Floor Mounted Railings (Section 05500). 11.Other related equipment not specifically listed. 1.3LAWS AND ORDINACES A.Comply with laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations bearing on the Work. If Contractor observes that Drawings or Specifications, or both, are at variance therewith, Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner in writing. If Contractor, without written notice to the Owner, performs Work which is not in conformance with such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, the Contractor shall bear all costs arising from correction thereof. B.Compliance with laws, rules, and regulations shall not be used as means of justifying installation or application of parts, assemblies, or methods inferior to those specified. C.Comply with OSHA Hazard Communication Standard 29 CFR 1910.1200 and 29 CFR 1926.59. A copy of Hazard Communication Program and all appropriate M.S.D.S. sheets shall be on the job at all times. D.Obtain required permits and licenses for installation of refrigeration systems, piping, and equipment as stated in awarded contract prior to start of project. 1.4REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM A536–Ductile Iron Castings. 2.ASTM B75–Seamless Copper Tube. 3.ASTM B280–Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. 4.ASTM B584–Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 5.ASTM B 813 –Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube. 6.ASTM C 1710 –Installation of Flexible Closed Cell Preformed Insulation in Tube and Sheet Form. 7.ASTM D2665–Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 8.ASTM D2564–Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 9.ASTM E84–Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C.American National Standards (ANSI): 1.ANSI B 16.22 –Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. D.American National Standards Institute/American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers(ANSI/ASHRAE): 1.ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15 –Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems. E.American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME): 1.ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 -Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). 2.ANSI/ASME B31.9 –Building Services Piping. F.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1.ASME A13.1 -Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 2.ASME B 1.1 -Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form). 3.ASME B31.5-Refrigeration Piping Standard. 15600-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.5DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A.Comply with the requirements of Section 01770.The Drawings and Specifications are complementary; what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by both. Should the Drawings and Specifications be contradictory or should there be any apparent errors, discrepancies, or omissions, or should there be any doubt as to the meaning of either, the Contractor shall refer the matter to the RFI Process or Bid question. B.Neither the Contractor nor the Owner shall be responsible or rely on any verbal instructions. C.Addenda, corrections, or letters issued during time of bidding shall take precedence over Drawings and Specifications. 1.6EXAMINATION OF THE PREMISES A.The Contractor's bid shall take into consideration all conditions that may affect the Work under their Contract. B.Take field measurements and verify field conditions; compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Drawings and Specifications before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies, or omissions discovered shall be reported to the RFI Process or Bid question. 1.7SUPERVISION AND CONTSRUCTION PROCEDUES A.Contractor shall provide complete construction schedule to the MCM prior to the pre-construction meeting. Contractor shall ensure schedule is acceptable to all project stakeholders prior to submittal to the MCM. B.Contractor shall agree to undertake all Work contained within the Contract and complete the Work according to the approved construction schedule. C.Set equipment received in any given week in its final location by Friday of that week. This includes compressors, cases, condensers, etc. Complete the following items prior to scheduled substantial completion date: 1.Refrigeration cases cleaned 2.Walk-in coolers and freezers thoroughly cleaned 3.Refrigeration tools and materials shall be stored in a safe location that does not disrupt store operations D.Furnish necessary supervision to coordinate activities of all trades to insure complete installation. The Contractor shall immediately report problems or anticipated problems that may impede progress of the Project to the Mechanical Construction Manager. E.Check new equipment against construction documents and report discrepancies to the Mechanical Construction Manager. F.Awarded contractor shall provide the MCM with a Punch list upon MCM arrival to the project. G.Awarded contractor shall provide a warranty plan to MCM at pre-construction meeting.(All applicable trades based on project scope of work). 1.8CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Comply with the requirements of Section 01770. B.Refrigeration Installation Handover Document / Sign Off Sheet:Submit completed Refrigeration Installation th Handover Document / Sign Off Sheet toWalmart Stores, Inc., 2001 SE 10Street, Bentonville AR 72712-0550, Attention: Mechanical Construction Manager. C.Record Documents: Providelaminated half-size refrigerationand Building Automation System as-built drawings. Installon interior side of compressor room door or on interior side of door panel. 15600-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.Operation and Maintenance Data:Collect operation and maintenance manualsfurnished by the case and rack OEMs and store them together at the refrigeration rack. 1.Product Data, including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties and accessories, and installation instructions. 1.9DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Transport, handle and store products in accordance with the requirements of Section 01600. B.Receive Owner furnished products in accordance with the requirements of Appendix A (Section 15600). C.Owner Furnished Equipmentwhich is damaged, defective or unsuitable for intended serviceshall be received by the Contractor and damage noted on the Bill of Lading and signed by the Contractor and Carrier agent. Immediately report Owner Furnished Equipmentdamage to Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager and include photos of damage and signed Bill of Lading. D.Contractor shall furnish a suitable means of securing and protecting all tools, materials, and equipment associated with refrigeration installation during construction period. E.Store refrigeration pipe and fittings in a clean and dry location. Receive fittings and store in closed containers or cartons, and store copper piping with rubber end plugs in place. Do not install copper tubing left uncapped for more than one day asrefrigeration piping. F.Deliver brazing materials, flux, solvents, glues, sealants, insulation materials, lubricants, oils, and refrigerants required to complete refrigeration installation and store on job site in manufacturer’s original packaging or crating with labeling intact and fully legible. G.Ship insulation materials and accessories such as adhesive and coatings to job site in marked, unopened containers as received from manufacturer. Store materials at job site in a proper manner, which does not damage, deface, or otherwise reduce their serviceability. Store highly flammable solvents, adhesives, and coatings in compliance with OSHA requirements. Store materials, which are susceptible to weather damage in a weatherproof environment and store materials with manufacturer’s identification attached. H.MSDSs for materials, compounds, and chemicals shall be maintained by the Contractor. I.Coordinate with Warehouse/Store and Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager for delivery schedules and times to adequately perform equipment installations and keep project baseline schedule. J.Coordinate with warehouse through a color coded label on equipment, which will have date, time of needed delivery to project site. K.Coordinate with Owner using an equipment location print that will be color coded schedule to match the warehouse color coded schedule of delivery dates, times. 1.10SEQUENCING, SCHEDULING, AND COORDINATION A.Sequence, schedule, and coordinate refrigeration installation and start-up activities with Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager to allow the overall project to be constructed in an orderly manner. B.Provide personnel asnecessary to match schedule needs. C.Send a representative to project meetings as required by the General Contractor. D.Purchase materials and arrangedeliveries in a timely manner to avoiddelay of the project. This may include taking early deliveries and off-site storage of items which might be in short supply. 15600-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 E.Provide on-site storage container as required. Coordinate with General Contractor for location and availability of on-site storage space. Walk-in cooler and freezer boxes are not to be used for storage. F.Notify, coordinate, and correspond with legal authorities having jurisdiction for required inspections of the refrigerationsystem and piping during the installation process. G.Coordinate with Building Automation SystemContractor for completion of check-out activities. H.Coordinate and confirm system start-up dates with Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager. I. J.Use Owner’s Contract Administration system for contracts, pay applications, potential change orders, change orders, contract documents, and requests for information, permitting and contract. K. L.Coordinate with the General Contractor and other sub-contractors the placement of refrigeration, electrical, mechanical, plumbing, and fire sprinkler systems to fit in the available clear space. M.Start-Up of the refrigeration systems shall consist of the following: 1.Inspect delivered equipment upon arrival for inconsistencies with refrigeration design documents and damage. Coordinate with refrigeration equipment supplier to correct deficiencies. 2.Verify that systems have been properly installed and are ready for start-upprior to soft start date. 3.Assure systems are operational prior to onsite visit by manufacturer representative. Charge systems in accordance with specifications and begin start-up process. Schedule start-upso that systems are operational before equipment manufacturer representative site visit for Commissioning phase. Formally document start-up completion on Handover Documents and submit to Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager, within sevendays after commissioning completion. 4.System performance is reviewed by equipment manufacturer representative with assistance from the Contractor. 5.Ownerwill not consider start-upcomplete until all Handover Documents are accepted complete by Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager. 6.Supply technicians, tools, testing instruments, and materials necessary to adjust refrigeration equipment as directed by refrigeration equipment representative. 1.11CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A.Obtain required permits and licenses for installation of refrigeration systems, piping, and equipment prior to start of project. B.Assign a competent Project Foreman with a minimum of five years’experience installing supermarket refrigeration systems. Forman shallsupervise daily activities associated with installation workincluding coordinating the activities of each trade as it relates to the refrigeration system installation in order to complete the work on the expected dates; serve as field contact representative and review installation documents for discrepancies. Foreman shall not be changed during the project without permission from the Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager, but maybe changed by the Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager with just cause (competency, failure to communicate,or failure to execute direction from the Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager). C.Installing refrigeration contractor or equipment start-up personnel shall be certified for work on Sporlan S3C case/coil controllers and have access to the Sporlan Tech Check mobile application. 1.Sporlan Certification: Contractor shallacquire Sporlan certification bysuccessfully completing Sporlan’s online S3C training courseand downloadingthe Certification. 2.Sporlan Digital Application:After acquiring Certification, Contractor shalldownload the Sporlan Tech Check applicationfrom the App Store andbegin using the app. 15600-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 D.Project Foreman shall attend an OEM system installation training class. E.Use Owner’s Contract Administration system for contracts, pay applications, potential change orders, change orders, contract documents, and requests for information. F.Installation of refrigeration systems involves multipletrades, skill sets, and activitiesincludingthe following: 1.Receiving, unloading, and setting grocery cases in their proper locations straight and level. This may include both refrigerated and non-refrigerated cases along with case wedges and cap displays supplied by case manufacturers. Align glass doors plumb and level to prevent saw-toothing of doors. 2.Securing, bolting, buckling, sealing, and trimming out cases free of blemishes. 3.Installingcase condensate drains independently routed, concealed under cases, properly sloped, supported and trapped, in direction of flow to their designated hub drains or floor sinks. 4.Setting air-cooled or evaporative condensers in their proper locations, level and anchoring them to building structure per structural detail. 5.Provide crane service to hoist refrigeration equipment directly from truck to mounting position. 6.Provide structural support for refrigeration equipment. 7.Provide opening through the roof as applicable. 8.Provide sheet metal refrigeration piping and conduit enclosure as shown on the drawings. 9.Provide opening through outside building wall and provide weather hood as applicable. 10.Setting condensing units in their proper locations level and anchoring them to building structure per structural detail. 11.Setting condensing units and rooftop refrigeration racks in their proper locations, level and anchoring them to building structure per structural detail. 12.Hangingevaporator coils level and tight to ceiling. Route condensate drains tight to walls properly trapped and slope in direction of flow to a hub drain or floor sink. 13.Installingcase and walk-in cooler and freezer valves. 14.Installing interconnecting refrigeration piping between cases, condensers,evaporator coils,and racks; clean and free from leaks with proper slopes, traps, and sizes. 15.Installingrefrigeration piping supports as specified. 16.Installingrefrigeration piping insulation as specified. 17.Sealingand restoringvapor barriers for penetrations into walk-in boxes and cases. (Including electrical, alarm, communication, and sprinklers). 18.Correctly labelingand taggingrefrigeration system equipment and piping as specified. 19.Removing and properly disposing of shipping materials, crating, skids, and other construction debris associated with refrigeration system installation. 20.Submittingrequired regulatory forms in a timely manner, carefully and completely filled out. a.Submit Refrigerant Data Collection forms at the end of commissioning week. b. 21.Providingall equipment required for the unloading and installation of this scope of work. 22.Systematically and thoroughly verifyingrefrigeration system control functions, sensor calibrations, and review construction activities for quality and completeness. Prepare refrigeration equipment for operation as part of Handover Document completion. 23.Thoroughly and systematically pressure testingrefrigeration systems. Evacuate and install oil and refrigerant charges. Maintain compliance with regulations governing handling of refrigerants. 24.Verify performance of refrigeration systems as part of Handover Documents. 25.Attach rooftop refrigeration equipment to structural support frame as shown on Drawings. 26. 1.12REQUEST FOR INFORMATION SUBMITTAL A.All Request for Information (RFIs) regarding Refrigeration shall follow the attached copy of the Request for Information Process Flow Chart. B.Refer to Specification Section 01255 for RFI Information Submittal Process. 1.13WARRANTY 15600-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Provide warranty and service on equipment and materials installed regardless of whether equipment or materials were furnished by Contractor. B.Provide supplemental warranty servicefor all new rack systems. This service willinclude failures during installation and for 90 days beyond store Re-Grand Opening date. The supplemental warranty shall include labor, parts, primary refrigerant and secondary coolant for repairs to installed refrigeration equipment and piping. 1.Response time to emergency calls shall be within two hours. C.For all new rack systems, perform inspection of installation 90 days after store Re-Grand Opening dateor when all punchlist items are corrected (whichever is longer).Coordinate with MCM and Owner’stechnical services to ensure owner’s representative is present during walk. Contractor must provide at minimum one weeks’ notice to owner prior to 90 day walk. Make necessary corrections and adjustments. Complete refrigeration punch list. Send th completed punch listto Walmart Stores, Inc., 2001 S.E. 10St., Bentonville, AR 72716-0550, Attention: Mechanical Services Department, for verification of completion. Notify Owner’sMechanical Services Construction Manager (MSCM) prior to inspection. D.For all new rack systems, at 90 day inspection, includenecessarylubrication, leak tests of all joints, flare nuts, and tightening of strappingas necessary. Perform leak test on small leak setting of refrigerant leak detector. Provide and change liquid line filter cores, oil system filter using Sporlan OF style filter, and replace suction filters. Place suction, liquid, and oil filters in a sealable plasticbag to prevent setting off any leak detection system. Perform oil acid test using either Virgina’s TKO acid test kit (mineral or Alkylbenzene oil) or Virgina’s ETK acid test kit (POE oil). For new rack house scenarios, oil test will be certified to meetOEM standards by Owner’s Refrigeration Engineer of Record. If oil test results require an additional oil change, it will be performed by Owner.Leave oil filters in motor room for inspection by Owner’sMechanical Services Construction Manager. Contractor to properly dispose of oil and components replaced. E.It is required that contractor perform oil and refrigerant test prior to beginning project to establish baseline for oil/refrigerant quality. If oil/refrigerant test results at 90 day inspection requires an additional oil/refrigerant change, it will be performed by contractor at no additional charge to the owner. Contractor shall collect refrigerant sample from all systems and submit for testing. For all installations, all test results will be sent to OEM for approval. Final test results shall be posted in rackhouse. F.Owner’s equipment manufacturer (OEM) supplier will furnish replacement parts for failures of OEM parts during installation period and for one year beyond store RE-Grand Opening date. Contractor shall obtain replacement parts from equipment manufacturer. Owner will not pay additional costs associated with repair or replacement of materials and parts during the warranty period. G.In the event the Contractor fails to respond to emergency calls within time lines outlined in the SLA(Service-Level Agreement) or fails to perform required maintenance or repairs during warrantyperiod, the Owner will have the right to have the repair or maintenance performedby another contractor. In this case, theContractor agrees to pay the Owner the invoiced amount of the services performed plus 15 percent. H.If the service contractor discontinues or drops their service level because theContractor has failed to make payment to subcontractor on completed warranty work, will remove that Contractor from New Stores Bid List until such time whenall disputes or claims are settled. I.At the end of warranty period, certify in a letter to the Owner that equipment and materials installed or connected are functioning properly. Include certification that systems are free of leaks and are maintaining satisfactory temperatures at normal control adjustments. J.Reference Appendix Afor any other Warranty references needed. K.Upon substantial completions,submit to the owner the name ornames of qualified/approved local refrigeration service companies that will be authorized to handle warranty service. If warranty service performed by contractor is not of acceptable quality,the awarded contractor shall be liable for additional service as required to provide a functioning refrigeration system. 15600-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.Owner will furnish refrigeration equipment as scheduled and shown on Drawingsand as specified in Appendix A (Section 15600)for installation by the Contractorwhich includes, but not limited to, the following: 1.Condensers. 2.Condensing Units. 3.Evaporators. 4.Compressor Rack Systems. 5.Refrigerated cases. 6. 7.Ice flakers. 8.Produce misting system. 2.2OWNERFURNISHED AND INSTALLEDPRODUCTS A.Owner’s walk-in manufacturerwillfurnish and installrefrigeration equipment as scheduled and shown on Drawings which includes, but not limited to,the following: 1.Walk-in Freezers and Coolers. 2.3MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTIES AND INSTRUCTIONS A.Nothing shall be done by the Contractor which will void any manufacturer's warranty. 2.4MATERIALS (CONTRACTORFURNISHED AND INSTALLED) A.Refrigerant Systems: Furnish and Installpiping for refrigeration systems as specified in Schedule I below and as indicated on Drawings. 1.Refrigerant Copper Tubing and Fittings: ASTM B 280, type ACR, hard drawn tubing. Tubing shall be factory cleaned, ready for installation, and have ends capped to protect cleanliness of pipe interior prior to shipping. Provide wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B16.22. a.Provide copper tubing from one of the following manufacturers: 1)Cerro Flow Products. . 2)Mueller Industries/Mueller Streamline Co. b.Provide copper fittings from one of the following manufacturers: .. 1)Mueller Industries/Mueller Streamline Co.Nibco 2)NDL Industries.. c.ABS Piping and Fittings:BS 5391 and BS 5392, manufactured for class E pressure bearing service. d.Refrigerant tubing connectors may be used as a means of joining copper tubing serving condensing units when approved by the Owner’sConstruction Manager. Provide refrigerant tubing connector systems from one of the following manufacturers: 1)ZoomLock B.Condensate Systems: Provide piping for condensatesystems as specified in Schedule I below and as indicated on Drawings. 1.Copper Tubing and Fittings: Type M, hard drawn tubing.PVC Piping and Fittings: ASTMD2665, schedule 40 drain, waste, and vent. C.Piping Insulation: 2-ºF, maximum 1.Elastomeric Flexible Closed Cell Insulation: Maximum k factor at 75ºF of 0.28 Btu-in/hr-ft flame spread and smoke development of 25 and 50, respectively per ASTM E84. 2.Provide one of the following, thicknessesas specified in Schedule I below: a.AP Armaflex by Armacell. b.Aerocel by Aeroflex USA, Inc. c.Insul-Tube by K-Flex USA. 3.Cladded Insulation: 15600-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 a.Provide cladded insulation for insulated exterior refrigerant piping. b.Provide insulation from the approved list of manufacturers with factory or field installedPVC jacketing or cladding. PVC jacketing or cladding shall match the insulation color requirements. c.PVC jacketing and fitting covers shall be by one of the following: 1)Proto PVC Fitting Cover System by Knauf Insulation 2)Zeston PVC Fitting Cover System by Johns Manville, 4.Insulated tape, half lapped, triple reversed layered may be used to insulate valves, valve stations and factory installed piping components within cases. 5.Insulation color: Black. a. Schedule I Piping ServicePiping SizePiping MaterialInsulation Thickness 1-3/8 inches Type L Hard Drawn Copper, Sealed R404A/R407A/R448A/R22 -Suction1 inch and smallerACR Tubing 1-5/8 inches Type L Hard Drawn Copper, Sealed R404A/R407A/R448A/R22 -Suction1-1/2 inch and largerACR Tubing Type L Hard Drawn Copper, Sealed R404A/R407A/R448A/R22 -LiquidAll1/2 inch ACR Tubing 1-3/8 inches Type L Hard Drawn Copper, Sealed R744 –Carbon Dioxide1-1/2 inch and smallerACR Tubing 1-5/8 inches Type K Hard Drawn Copper, R744 –Carbon Dioxide1-1/2 inch and largerSealed ACR Tubing 1-3/8 inches Type L Hard Drawn Copper or Propylene Glycol / Water1 inch and smallerPressure Rated ABS 1-5/8 inches Type L Hard Drawn Copper or Propylene Glycol / Water1-1/2 inch and largerPressure Rated ABS Evaporator Condensate -Inside Refrigerated Walk-in Boxes Operating at AllType L Hard Drawn Copper1 inch 32°F or Below Evaporator Condensate -Outside Refrigerated Walk-in Boxes and Schedule 40 PVC, Solid Core, All N/A Inside Boxes Operating Above DWV 32°F D.Refrigerant Valves: 1.Isolation valves shall be full port ball type valves, with a minimum working pressure of 700 PSIG, a working temperature range of -40ºF to 300ºF, and specifically designed for use with the refrigerant that is contained within the system. The valve body shall be forged brass and hermetically sealed. Bolted body valves are not permitted. 2.Provide valves as manufactured by one of the following: a.Henry Technologies. b.Mueller Industries. c.NDL Industries, Inc. E.Pipe Freeze Protection: 1.Heating cable shall be self regulating, 120 volt, 5 watts per linear foot. 2.Provide one of the following: a.Raychem XL-Trace by Tyco Thermal Controls, LLC. b.CO Series by Delta-Therm Corporation. F.Refrigerants and Oils: 15600-9 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 1.Refrigerant: As specified on Refrigeration Equipment Schedules and certified to meet AHRI 700 standard for chemical purity. Deliver refrigerant in original containers. 2.Refrigerant Oil: Approved for use by compressor manufacturer, with refrigerant and compressors for the application.Do not put oil in systems from containers that have been left uncapped for an extended period of time. a. 3. G.Sheet Metal Piping Enclosure: Provide galvanized sheet metal refrigeration piping and conduit enclosure as shown on Drawings. H. I.Installation Accessories: Provide accessories required for piping installation as required and as specified in Part 3 hereinafter. J.Solder and Flux: 1.Solder: Min. 6% silver content lead-free solder,Stay-Brite #8 by Harris Products Group or similar.(6% solder only for condensate lines) 2.Flux: Water soluble flux conforming to ASTM B 813;Aqua-BriteFlux or similar. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.General Installation Requirements: 1.Equipment: a.Install refrigeration equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. b.Attach rooftop refrigeration equipment to structural support frameor roof curbas shownon Drawings. c.Pipe routing, case, condenser, and compressor rack locations shall not deviate from Drawings without approval from Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager. 2.All Piping: a.Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and arrangements of piping take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. b.Install piping in a neat and workmanlike manner with pipe sizes as indicated on the drawings. c.Inspect materials to verifythey are free of defects, grease, and foreign particles; comply with the temperature and pressure rating of the system; and are compatiblewith the refrigerant in the system. d.Suspend refrigeration piping as shown on Drawings, with supports spaced in accordance with the requirements of Section 15050. e.Ream cut ends to full interior diameter and remove burrs created during cutting process. f.Remove oxides and surface soil from pipe ends and fitting cups with abrasive cloth, abrasive pads, or properly sized fitting brush. g.Install piping with sufficient flexibility to allow for expansion and contraction due to temperature fluctuations inherent in operation of these types of refrigeration systems. Install piping to prevent vibration and undue strain on pipe and fittings. h.Maintainrefrigerant piping clean and dry. Keep piping sealed when not working directly at a specific location or joint. Do not leave open refrigerant piping ends unattended during installation process. Fitted joints exposed to the exterior of the building shallbe brazed the same day they are fitted. Visibly inspect pipe and fitting prior to assembly. Swab as necessary with cleaning solvent soaked cloth to remove dirt, filings, or visible moisture. i.Prevent piping contact at pipe crossings by use of offset and/or insulation. Refrigerant piping shall electrical conduit or other dissimilar grounded metals. not contact 15600-10 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 j.Provide branch supply and return line ball valves for isolation purposes as indicated on refrigeration piping plans. Install valves in a fully accessible location. Insulate isolation valves in accordance with refrigeration line insulation requirements. k.Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted unless expressly indicated. l.Conceal all pipe installations in pipe chases, utility spaces, and above ceilings, unless indicated to be exposed to view. m.Install horizontal piping as high as possible allowing for specified slope and coordination with other components. Install vertical piping tight to columns or walls. Provide space to permit insulation applications where required, with one inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. n.Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. o.Secure vertical refrigerant piping installed outside building walls to Unistrut fastening system with #022 Cush-a-Clamps. Fasten clamps directly to copper pipe, notto outside of insulation. Butt insulation against clamp and insulate uncovered. p.In general, clamps are not required on horizontal piping. However, horizontal piping that is vertically supported without support directly under the piping shall be clamped. q.Make copper piping soft solder joints with specified solder and flux. Clean joints before soldering. r.Make brazed joints with use of brazing alloy containing minimum of 15% silver. Clean joints before brazing and have dry nitrogen at 1/2 psi pressure flowing through tubing during brazing. s.Protect affected valves and control devices during brazing process by disassembling and removing heat sensitive parts or use of heat shields. t.Install replacement parts (i.e. expansion valves, heat exchangers, sight glasses) using specified solder, excluding parts in hot gas lines. Use heat dams in all instances. u.Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager shall visually inspect refrigerant piping and insulation prior to being covered. v.Piping deemed by the Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager to be installed incorrectly shall be corrected at Contractor’s expense. w.All condenser piping shall be clamped with high temp cush-clamps (HT-CUSH-A-NATOR or similar). x.Install refrigerant tubing connector system accessories and products inaccordance with manufacturer’s published instructions per ASTM B 280. y.Connect piping and fittings in accordance with refrigerant tubing connector systems manufacturer’s instructions using specialty tools as required and recommended by the manufacturer per ASTM B 280. 3.Insulation: a.Install refrigeration piping insulationin accordance with ASTM C 1710, manufacturer’s recommendationsand per schedule Iincluding glued and taped joints. b.Ensure that temperature and other environmental conditions are favorable for installation of insulation materials. c.Coordinate with other trades so that work is performed with minimum interference and conflict. Carefully noteheat tracing and pressure testing procedures prior to installation of insulation materials. Do not apply insulation covering pipe or fitting joints until after pressure testing affecting those joints has been completed and approved by Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager and Authority Having Jurisdiction. d.Do not apply insulation until surfacesare clean, dry, and free of dirt, grease, moisture or other impurities such as corrosive cleaners and dust. Seal refrigerant pipe openings while installing insulation to prevent foreign material from entering tubing. e.Insulation work shall be performed bytrained installers regularly engaged in insulation trade. f.Cleanly and squarely cut insulation joints. Do not tear insulation. g.Install piping insulation continuous through sleeves and penetrations (walls, partitions, roofs, ceilings, and floors). h.Seal seams, butts, and ends to retard moisture vapor from entering system. Glue joints with approved products. Do not stretch insulation as it is being installed and glued. i.Vapor stop exposed ends and every 12 feet by applying approved contact adhesive to outside surface of piping and inside surface of insulation and secure to piping. 15600-11 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 j.Insulate fittings, flanges, and valves with same insulation thickness as adjacent piping. k.Insulate valves to a point just below seal cap or packing gland. Seal insulation to valve body with contact adhesive. l.Slip insulation over pipe before making joints. Split type insulation is acceptable on fittings only. Provide factory pre-manufactured insulation fittings. Where pre-manufactured fittings are unavailable, miter cut fittings shall be used with approval of Owner’s Mechanical Construction Manager.Install insulation in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations, including glued and taped joints. If receiver is mounted outside, provide UV protection for pipe insulation on the liquid line from the receiver to the refrigeration rack by application of a covering or coating specifically for the purpose of UV protection and as recommended by the manufacturer. m.Cover exterior refrigerant pipe insulation (including heat reclaim lines) and interior prep room lines with .020 inch thickness UV inhibited PV jacketing and fitting covers. Seal jacketing against vapor and weather. n.Install insulation in such a manner to ensure a properly functioning system. Reinstall an installation that is deemed unacceptable by the Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager. 4.Penetrations: a.Seal penetrations through exterior building walls and walk-in coolers and freezers with urethane foam and silicone caulk as specified in Section 07900and as detailed on Refrigeration Drawings. b.Fire Barrier Penetrations: where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. Provide fire stopping in compliance with the requirements of Section 07840. 5.Electrical: a.Make finalelectrical connections, including slave wiring, to refrigerated cases, evaporators, field installed refrigeration control valves, defrost heaters, cooler and freezer box door lights and anti- sweat heaters, and compressor houses. Make connections per wiring diagrams and instructions from equipment supplier. Comply with the requirements of Section 16100 and applicable electrical codes. 6.Control Tubing: a.Install tubing such that there is sufficient slack. Avoid stretching and sharp bends. Properly support tubing away from contact with sharp or abrasive objects. b.Always connect control tubing to refrigeration system or components through a service valve. c.Remove breakaway Schrader valve depressor. d.Do not over torque flare nuts. e. f. 7.DXSystem Installation Requirements: a.Install electronic suction pressure regulator valves, thermostatic expansion valves, liquid solenoids, thermostats, and heat exchangers. Provide sufficient pipe at evaporator outlet to install thermostatic expansion valvesensing bulb, ensuring 100% contact with pipe. b.P-Traps shall be one piece, longradius type at bottom of risers. Size P traps to match horizontal pipe or coil outlet pipe. Do not reduce trap to riser size. Take vertical risers as high as possible (just below structure). On risers above 16 feet, provide double oil traps spaced as shown on Drawings. c.Pitch horizontal suction lines minimum of one inch per 20 feet of run in direction of refrigerant flow. Ensure no oil traps are formed in piping layout. d.Liquid supply line tees shall be bullheaded inside cases. Suction lines shall not be bullheaded. e.Install 1/4 inch packed anglekingvalve on top of inverted trap on inlet side of field installed condensers. Install valve at highest point in the discharge line. Provide packed angle valves with brass or steel caps. f.Suction lines and return lines that are teed into a common return line shall be teed into the top. Liquid lines shall come off of the bottom. g.Provide Schrader valve access on each suction line leaving evaporators. h.Verify Schrader valves have cores securely installed and caps are installed. B.Condensate Piping System Installation Requirements: 1.Provide condensate lines from evaporators to outside of walk-in freezers and coolers, and adapt to individual PVC trap. 2.Clean markings off of PVC with solvent. 3.Install self-regulating heating cable and insulation on condensate drains inside walk-inboxes that are to operate at or below 32ºF. 15600-12 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 a.Provide one of the following: 1)Raychem XL-Trace by Tyco Thermal Controls, LLC. 2)CO Series by Delta-Therm Corporation. 4.Install unions on condensate drains in walk-ins close to drain pan. 5.Allow clearance for evaporator drain pans to hinge open. Install common condensate header outside the walk-inand terminate condensate lines into header. 6.Paint non-insulated copper drain lines to match walk-in box. 7.Maintain slope of one inch per ten feet of horizontal run for condensate lines. C.Hangers and Supports: 1.Install hangers, supports and anchor devices as specified in Section 15050. 2.Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and accommodate normal expansion and contraction due to changes in temperature. 3.Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading or stresses from movement are not transmitted to connected equipment. 4.Install hangers for insulated pipe sized to encompass insulation including support shields. 5.Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for the smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes. 6.Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and achieve the indicated slope of piping. 7.Remove sharp edges and burrs from refrigeration system hangers and supports. 8.Remove excessive rod materials from hangers that protrude 2 inches or more from the hangers after adjusting and pitch have been established. 9.Install trapeze hangers not farther than two feet on each side of 90 degree turns. 3.2IDENTIFICATION A.Evaporator Identification: 1.Provide engraved plastic identification tags2 inch by 3 inch in size, attached with screws,pop rivets,or adhesiveto evaporator. 2.Identify circuits with corresponding number and circuitfrom BASplans. 3.Identify cases with an approximate location of field installed control valves. 4.Identify with tags all EDC circuits and panel locations. B.Case and Walk-In Identification: 1.Provide engraved plastic identification tags 2 inch by 3 inch in size, attached with screws, pop rivets, or adhesive. 2.Identify circuits with corresponding number and circuit from BASplans. 3.Identify cases with an approximate location of field installed control valves. 4.Identify with tags all EDC circuits and panel locations. 5.Order and install Walmart Asset tags as specified in Section 15050.Input data using the Asset Data Collection Application as specified in Section 15050. C.Refrigeration Equipment Identification: 1.Provide engraved plastic identification tags 2 inch by 3 inch insize, attached with screws or pop rivets. 2.Identify refrigeration equipment, including compressor houses, racks, condensers, sensor or thermostat locations, and hot water tanks. 3.Valve Nameplates: Provide factory custom-stamped metal identification tags for field installed refrigeration system control valves and flow sensors as scheduled on the drawings. 4.Tags shall be brass material and shall be securely attached to valve or sensor body. 5.Provide tags by Emedco.com, (866) 222-4743or equivalent. D.Nameplates and labels shall be installed prior to refrigeration system start-up. 3.3CASE SETTING A.Set cases level and in line with transit. Shim at each vertical support or at maximum fourfoot intervals with galvanized plates, as floor conditions require(both front and rear rail). When shimming glass door cases,lean 15600-13 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 cases back 1/4 to 1/2-inch to ensure case stability when loaded.Where manufacturer’s installation instructions differ fromOwner’sspecifications, consult with Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager. B.Install cases per manufacturer’s installation instructions. In addition, applybutyl caulking compound all around case joints. Reseal joints if seal is broken. C.Install a bead of butyl sealant and cover with clear tape on the top and backexterior joints forglass door cases. D.Install a finish bead of silicone on interior case joints (bottom, back and interior top of case). Sealant shallmatch case interior color. E.Do not cut bottom case rails(No Exceptions). F.Hang case shelving and place pans in refrigerated cases, including door shelving in dairy cooler. G.Contractor shall flush floor drain intended for case condensate drainage with 5 gallons of hot water to ensure drains are in working order prior to setting cases. 3.4WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER EVAPORATOR COILS A.Examine areas to receive equipment, review proposed locations of equipment and piping, and verify that they are free of interferences. Comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting unit performance. B.Locations of equipment on Drawings are approximate. Field verify exact locations before roughing in piping and electrical work. C.Accurately layout, mark, and drill necessary holes in walk-in box panels. Cut holes only with drill bits and hole saws. Cut holes only as large as required to accommodate pipes, hanger rods, and conduits, refer to drawing detail for piping penetrations. D.Hang or mount evaporator coils plumb and level in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and Refrigeration Drawings. E.Maintain manufacturer’s recommended clearances so as to not restrict air flow. F.Support piping separately so that piping is not supported off of evaporator coil units. G.Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer. H.Install interconnecting refrigeration piping between evaporator coils and refrigeration piping. I.Install evaporator outlet suction line with adequate length, located before suction line oil trap for installation of the expansion valve sensing bulb. Bulb must have 100% direct contact with refrigeration suction line and not installed on any braze joint. The expansion valve sensing bulb straps must be installed per manufactures recommendations to insure proper operation of the expansion valve. J.Install walk-in cooler/freezer refrigerant sampling intake devices and necessary interconnecting tubing back to refrigerant detection units. K.Install condensate lines for walk-in coolers/freezers. L.Install heat trace and insulation for condensate drain lines in walk-in coolers/freezers operating below 32 F. M.Fit condensate lines in walk-in coolers/freezers with a union to facilitate cleaning of condensate line and removal of evaporator coil drain pan. 15600-14 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.5TESTING, EVACUATING, CHARGING, AND FILLINGDXREFRIGERANT SYSTEM A.Notify Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager72 hoursin advance of pressure/vacuum and evacuation tests. B.Testing 1.When refrigeration connections have been completed, test refrigerant piping system for leaks with dry nitrogen at a minimum of 150 PSIG, but not to exceed 200 PSIG, with all valves in the system open except compressor suction and discharge valves relief valves, and transducers which must be kept closed during pressure testing and evacuation procedures. 2.Physically test all joints with a soap solution. 3.System shall hold maximum pressure for a minimum of 1 hour on overnight changeouts and 24 hours for rack changeouts and projects where new circuits are being added. 4.If leaks are found, isolate leaks, discharge gas,repair leaks, and then repeat test. 5.Do notrelease pressure until making final connections. 6.Refrigeration piping will not be accepted or signed off unless it is gas tight and free of leaks. C.Evacuating 1.Evacuate system with a 2 stage vacuum pump specifically manufactured for vacuum dutyandhaving capacity ofat least 6 CFM and the capabilityofpulling vacuum of 50 microns or lesswithin a 24 hour period. Do not evacuate system by use of the refrigeration compressor. Connect pump to both low and high side evacuation valves with copper tube. Compressor service valves shall remain open. Attach high vacuum gage, capable of registering pressure in microns, to system for pressure readings. Do not operate hermetic or semi-hermetic motor compressorsduring evacuation because of reduced electric strength of atmosphere within motor chamber. To check system pressure, provide hand valve between pressure gage and vacuum pump which can be closed to isolate system and check pressure. 2.Isolate transducers from vacuum testing. 3.Evacuate each system to an absolute pressure not exceeding 1,500 microns. 4.Break vacuum to 2 PSIGwith dry nitrogen. 5.Repeat evacuation processtwo more times. 6.Install drier of required size in liquid line. 7.Leave vacuum running for not less than two hours without interruption, valve off, and remove vacuum pump. 8.Evacuate system to 500 microns and hold for 24hours. 9.Verify vacuum procedure and test with Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager. 10.Break final vacuum to 2 psig with specified refrigerant. D.Charging and Filling 1.Provide primary refrigerantas indicated on refrigeration Drawingsand as required for proper operation of systems.Check the refrigeration Drawings and the equipment manufacturer’s labeling prior to charging of refrigeration system. 2.Charge refrigerant directly from original containers. 3.Charge system according to OEM procedures. 4.Record amount of refrigerant used on Owner provided Refrigerant Data Collection form.Email to and Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager. mcequip@walmart.com 5.Contractor shall not use Ownerowned refrigerant gasses to charge system. 6.Write refrigerant charge per rack in black indelible marker on each system compressor breaker panel. 7.Fill compressors with oil to manufacturer’s recommended levels and fill oil reservoirs to 1/2 full.Top off the reservoirswith oil after the system has run for a minimum of 24 hours. 8.Refrigerant charge shown on RefrigerationDrawings is a calculated estimate only. Fully charge refrigeration system at start-up. 9.Ending Complete refrigerant charge shall be the same as exact receiver level at the start of the project. Contractors shall take pictures to prove receiver level percentage at start of project. E. F. 15600-15 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.6PRE-START-UP A.Document the following Pre-Start-Up information, at a minimum,on Handover Documents 1.Check all electrical connections at rack. Turn main breaker OFF and verify that no power is present at all three legs with a meter. Verify tightness of all electrical connections. 2.Check main power voltage across each supply leg at the compressor rack. Voltage shallbe within 10 percent of required. 3.Check control voltage. 4.Energize system for 24 hours in advance of starting any compressor, make sure compressor crankcase heaters are operational. 5.Verify cleanliness of evaporator coils 6.Verify proper expansion valve installation. 7.Verifythat evaporator and condenser fans are clear of debris. 8.Verify evaporator fan operation. 9.Verify that case, walk-in cooler/freezer doors close properly and are closed. 10.Verify operation of case lights and switches. 11.Verify that door seals are not damaged. 12.Verify high and low pressure control settings. 13.Verify that field wiring connections have been completed. 14.Verify condenser pressure fan cycling control operation. 15.Verify correct condenser fan rotation. 16.Verify temperature set-points. 17.Verify alarm set-points. 18.Verify defrost schedule. 19.Verify that compressor discharge service valve is fully open. 3.7NEW SYSTEM START-UP A.Refer to equipment manufacturers start-up documentation for additional requirements. B.Schedule start-upso that refrigeration systems areoperationaland running prior to manufacturer representative visit to perform system commissioning with the Contractor. C.Include qualified servicetechnicians, necessary tools, and other supplies required by manufacturer’s field service representative to perform commissioning activities identified in Contract Documents. D.Conduct system start-up as follows: 1.Adjust valves, expansion valves, liquid hold-back valves, balance valves, compressor high and low pressure switches, receiver pressurization,and subcooler outletpressure regulator. 2.Complete refrigerant and oil charge. 3.Adjust oil float levels and replace liquid, suction, and oil line filter/dryers. 4.Verifypressure and temperature gauges are accurate. E.Start-up consists of but maynot be limitedto the following items: 1.Adjust/verify operation of all control valves; EPR/EEPR, TXV/EEV, LPR/ELPR, Electronic/Mechanical condenser flooding valves, receiver pressurization valves, etc. 2.Verify that compressor amperage is balanced and is within normal operating range per OEM specification. 3.Verify that compressor net oil pressure is within OEM specified range. 4.Adjust/verify operation of compressor high and low pressure switches. 5.Complete refrigerant and oil charge. 6.Adjust oil levels in oil separator/reservoir and individual compressor oil level controls to correct levels, adjust oil supply pressure regulating valve to OEM specified differential setting. 7.Confirm correct condenser operation; fans control, VFD, split, etc. 8.Confirm correct subcooler operation; EEV/SH, EEPR suction pressure, liquid outlet pressure regulator, etc. 9.Pressure and temperature gages shall be accurate. 10.All work being completed on Remodel and Cap-x project case and equipment replacement must be completed during owner established work hours of 9:00p.m to 7:00am Sunday-Thursday unless otherwise 15600-16 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 arranged with Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager. All workmust be completed, work area cleaned and all equipment in full operation to be turned over to owner at 7:00 a.m. on the same work day. 11.Perform an oil/refrigerant test on all systems that have been opened to atmosphere and report to Owner’s Mechanical Construction Manager the results of oil/refrigerant test. If acid is present take immediate measures to protect owner’s equipment and remove contaminated refrigerant and oil and filters and driers, at no extra expense to owner. 12.All filters and driers shall bechanged according to owner’s specifications, including but not limited to suction filters, liquid driers, oil filter, coalescing separator filter, etc. F.After compressor is started, continue charging until system has sufficient refrigerant for proper operation. Do not charge receiver level past 40%. Do not leave compressor operating unattended and unmatched until system is properly charged with refrigerant and oil. Charge receivers to 30percent with unit in heat reclaim in 100 percent condenser and condenser fan controls set properly. Maintain these levels throughout maintenance service period. If at end of maintenance period, receiver level has dropped, completely re-check refrigeration rack and case system for leaks. Repair leaks and bring system back tooriginalcharge level. G.Do not add oil while system is short of refrigerant unless oil level is inadequate for system operation. H.Set expansion valve superheat on systems per refrigeration drawings. Balance multi-plex systems to within 2ºF of target and with not more than 2ºF variation in discharge air temperature between cases. Verify superheat settings after fixtures have been loaded with product. I. J.Prior to opening any rack systems to add or replace cases, evaporators, etc, install new suction filterin the suction line canister.Then 24 to 48 hours after the work is completed and all final adjustments have been made, provide and change liquid line filter cores, oil system filter using Sporlan OF style filter, and suction filters. Filters are to be rated for wax removal. Contractor to properly dispose of oil and components replaced. K.Test and adjust controls to ensure a refrigeration system operating to Owner’s designspecifications. L.Verify refrigeration alarm system is functioning correctly 24 hours prior to food delivery. M.Complete system balance by the end of the fifth day of start-up. N.Complete Refrigeration Installation Handover Document / Sign Off Sheet and submit as specified in Part 1. O.Final payment will not be made until Refrigeration Installation Handover Document / Sign Off Sheetand Refrigerant Data Collectiondocumentationis received and job notebook is completed and placed in the mechanical refrigeration house. 3.8REFRIGERATED CASE START UP A.Refer to equipment manufacturers start-up documentation for additional requirements. B.Evacuate refrigeration compressor rack and associated piping priorto adding refrigerant charge. C.Evacuate condensing units and associated piping prior to adding refrigerant charge. D.Verify line voltage and check motor rotation prior to operation. E.Operate equipment controls and safeties to verify proper function. Adjust valves and controls to place units in full operation. F.Verify that motor amperages and air flow rates for condensing units agree with manufacturer’s data. G.Complete Handover Documents. 15600-17 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 H. 3.9CONDENSINGUNIT START-UP A.Refer to equipment manufacturers start-up documentation for additional requirements. B.Evacuate refrigeration compressor rack and associated piping prior to adding refrigerant charge. C.Evacuate condensing units and associated piping prior to adding refrigerant charge. D.Verify line voltage and check motor rotation prior to operation. E.Operate equipment controls and safeties to verify proper function. Adjust valves and controls to place condensing units in full operation. F.Verify that motor amperages and air flow rates for condensing units agree with manufacturer’s data. G.Complete Handover Documents. H. I. 3.10CONTRACT COMPLETION, STORE POSSESSION AND RE-GRAND OPENING DAY A.Coordinate and execute the Handover/CloseoutDocuments as soon as final system adjustments are completed. B.Finish work and furnishOwner’sMechanical Construction Manager with a complete and operating refrigeration system at Contract Completion. C.Owner may take possession of completed or partially completed portions of work although time allotted for completion of work may not have expired. Taking possession of work shall not be deemed acceptance of any work that has not been completed in accordance withContract Documents. D.Temperature and valves shall be adjusted and control strategies modified as necessary as cases are loaded with product and conditions within store environment change. E.Have a mechanic on job site from 7:00 AM to 6:00 PM on the day before Re-Grand Opening and the day of Re- Grand Opening. Mechanic shall check in with both the Store Manager and the Field Project Manager when arriving and prior to leaving. 3.11FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Maintain a clean and orderly work area. On a dailybasis remove from jobsite scrap, waste, and debris resulting from refrigeration field work. B.Installation materials shall be new and without defect. If requested, Contractor shall submit evidence as to quality of systems built, including but not limited to, material test reports, packing slips, material data sheets, employee qualification and training documentation records, brazed joints, insulation mock ups, leak testing and electrical function testing records. C.Prior to concealing joints with insulation or piping in walls, floors, or ceilings,clean and test piping in accordance with these specifications. Piping shall beleak-free. D.Contractor shall assurequality of brazing done by their organization and shall employ skilled craftsmen following qualified brazing procedures. If directed by theOwner’sMechanical Construction Manager, cut out five randomly selected joints to verify use of dry nitrogen during brazing operations. Inspect joints for oxidation in the presence 15600-18 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 of the Mechanical Construction Manager. For each joint which shows evidence of oxidation, cut out an additional joint. If four fittings are found oxidized, rework all joints including those removed for inspection. E.On completion of refrigerated work, remove tools, equipment, excess materials, scrap, waste, and other debris resulting from work, and clean walk-in coolers/freezers, cases, roof areas adjacent to condensers, and refrigeration compressor house. 3.12CLEAN-UP A.Promptly remove all rubbish or debris resulting from the Work. B.During course of the Work, the area in which the Contractor is working shall be kept in an orderly, reasonably clean condition. Keep gang boxes off sales floor. Tools, supplies, etc., shall remain only as long as they are in use. Abide by site cleanliness policies of the Owners general construction compliances and all other applicable laws and regulations for the AHJ. C.Thoroughly clean Work furnished and installed under your Contract, ready for Owner's use. 3.13OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION (T&I) A.The owner shall access to the Work at all timesfor purpose of inspection. B.If Specifications, Instructions, Inspection Coordinators, or laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or any public authority require a portion of the Work to be tested, approved or inspected, Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness for inspection. C.In order to verify use of dry nitrogen during brazing operations as specified, the Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager may require Contractor to cut out five randomly selected joints. Joints will be inspected for oxidation. For each joint which shows evidence of oxidation and non-compliance, another joint will be cut out. If four fittings are found oxidized, it will be assumed that all joints are defective, therefore all joints will be reworked. Rework joints removed for inspection. This inspection and re-work is at the expense of the contractor. D. 3.14MAINTENANCE A.Provide a 90 day maintenance service period from the date of site observation log punch list completion or grand opening, whichever is laterto includemaintenance and assurance of proper operation of the entire refrigeration system.The service period shall include maintenance for primary refrigerant and routine maintenance and emergency services. Upon start-up, submit the names of local service companies authorized by the OEM for maintenance serviceto MCM. B.Response time to emergency service calls shall be within two hours. In the event the Contractor fails to respond to emergency calls or fails to perform required maintenance or repairs during the maintenance period, the Owner will have the right to have the repair or maintenance performedby another contractor. In this case, the Contractor agrees to pay the Owner the invoiced amount of the services performed plus 15 percent. C.If the service subcontractor discontinues or drops their service level because theContractor has failed to make payment to the subcontractor on completed maintenancework, Ownermayremove theContractor from bidder eligibility for future new store workuntil such time thatdisputes or claims are settled. D.Perform inspection of installation at end of maintenance service period. 1.Make necessary corrections and adjustments. Notify Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager(MCM) prior to inspection. 2.Provide lubrication, leak tests of all joints, flare nuts, and tightening of strapping. Perform leak test on all fixtures and rack service points, fittings and valves. 15600-19 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.Change replaceablesuction, liquid, and oil filters. Place suction, liquid, and oil filters in a sealable plastic bag to prevent setting off any leak detection system. Leave oil filters and dryers in motor room for inspection by Owner’sMechanical Construction Manager. 4.Assure all deviations have been resolved. E.At the end of maintenance services period, certify in a letter to the Owner that equipment and materials installed or connected are functioning properly. Include certification that systems are free of leaks and are maintaining satisfactory temperatures at normal control adjustments. 3.15CHANGES IN THE WORK A.Do not make changes to the SOW, perform additional work, or pay for additional work unless authorized in writing by the Owner. 3.16DEDUCTIONS FOR WORK NOT CORRECTED A.If the Owner deems it expedient to correct work not conforming to the Contract or defective work, an equitable deduction from the Contract price will be made. 3.17CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT A.If the Owner rejects a portion of the Work due to failure to conform to the Contract, the Owner will promptly notify the Contractor of such failure. B.Upon receipt of such notice, replace or remedy (whichever the Owner requires) the rejected work, so as to conform to the awarded Contract. C.Contractor shall bear all expenses incident to correction of non-conforming work including cost of transportation, removal of non-conforming work, correction of the work, and repairs to work of other contractors necessitated by remedial work. D.Protect the Work from damage until final acceptance by the Owner. Damaged or defective work shall be replaced at Contractor's expense. E.Contractor shall be responsible for damage caused by Contractors own forces or by Contractor’s subcontractors' forces. F.Replace damaged work at no expense to the Owner per awarded contract documents. END OF SECTION 15600-20 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION HANDOVERDOCUMENT / SIGN OFF SHEET All sections of this document must be completed before the installation will be accepted. Store No. ___________ Location: Store Type: City, StateSC, WNM Grand OpeningDate: Project Type: NewSCStore/Sam’sClub, Relocation, Remodel, Capital Expenditure (CapEx) Installing Contractor: Contractor’s name and branch location, if applicable Equipment Supplier: Hill PHOENIX, Kysor Warren, Zero Zone, Hussmann Refrigerant: R 407A, R410A, etc. System Type: Direct Expansion (DX) Heat Reclaim: Domestic Water, N/A Bldg AutomationSystem(BAS): Novar, Danfoss, CPC Refrigerant Data Submitted: Date Submitted or N/A Comments: APPROVAL The work carried out during this project is complete and the standard achieved is acceptable. Name of Owner’sMechanicalSignatureDate Construction Manager Notice to OWNER’SMCM: By signing this form, you are confirming the following: Thework detailed above is complete and all systems are operating as intended. All handover documentation has been completed and you are satisfied with its contents. All issues are either resolved or you are satisfied with the plan for resolution. 15600-21 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION HANDOVER DOCUMENT / SIGN OFF SHEET Machine Rooms All sections of this document must be completed before the installation will be accepted. Store No. ___________ Location: Store Type: City, StateSC, WNM Name of technician carrying out checks and completing this formDate Type of machine room Rack, hybrid house, weatherpac Machine room supplier Hill PHOENIX, Kysor Warren, Zero Zone Are weatherpacs bolted to steel?.................................................................................................................yes / no Are all penetrations properly sealed?..........................................................................................................yes / no Do all power sockets and lights operate correctly?.....................................................................................yes / no Do all exhaust fans operate correctly?........................................................................................................yes / no Are all weatherpac doors hung properly and operating correctly?.............................................................yes / no Is there any damage to the room which needs repair?................................................................................yes / no Areall shields and hoods installed correctly?.............................................................................................yes / no Are Operation and Maintenance (O and M)manuals left on site?..............................................................yes / no Are drawings mounted on the walls of machine rooms?............................................................................yes /no Have liquid line filter dryers, oil system dryers, and suction line filter driers been changed after 24 hours of run time?............................................................................................yes / no Is leak detection installed?..........................................................................................................................yes / no Has leak detection been tested and certified functional?............................................................................yes / no Are electrical drawings mounted inside electrical panels?.........................................................................yes / no Are all electrical distribution panels labeled correctly?..............................................................................yes / no Are all trunking lids and junction box covers in place?..............................................................................yes / no Have all relevant labels been fixed to major items of equipment?.............................................................yes / no Is the machine room clean and free from rubbish?.....................................................................................yes / no Capital Expenditure (CAPEX) and Remodel Projects Have all existing, redundant materials (conduit, pipework, etc.) been stripped out or made safe?...........................................................................................................yes / no Comments: 15600-22 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION HANDOVER DOCUMENT / SIGN OFF SHEET Refrigeration Vacuum Test All sections of this document must be completed before the installation will be accepted. Store No. ___________ Location: Store Type: City, StateSC, WNM Owner’sConstruction Manager Installing Contractor Contractor’s Address Street City, State, ZIP Contractor’s Phone Contractor’s Email Address Name of Person Attesting to Vacuum Phone Gauge Used for Testing ManufacturerTypeModel #Range in Microns ABCDEF First Second Final Date of Final Pressure at Check-In SignatureDate Comments: 15600-23 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION HANDOVER DOCUMENT / SIGN OFF SHEET Rack A All sections of this document must be completed before the installation will be accepted. Store No. ___________ Location: Store Type: City, StateSC, WNM Name of technician carrying out checks and completing this formDate Rack Type Parallel Recip, Rack in a Box (RIB), Modular Rack Manufacturer Rack Model No.Rack Serial No. Refrigerant TypeRecord System Refrigerant Charge Does the refrigerant type match what is called for on the legend? yes / no Verify the main power voltage.L1 > GDL1 > L2 L2> GDL1 > L3 L2 > GDL1 > L3 Verify the control voltage. Confirm operation of power failure (PF)module and record settings.DelayVoltage Are all electrical connections tight? yes / no Compressor Manufacturer Record model number of each compressor. Verify that model numbers match legend. Compressor 1Compressor 2 Compressor 3Compressor 4 Compressor 5Compressor 6 Record running amps for each compressor. COMP1COMP2 LoadedL1 _______L2 _______L3 _______LoadedL1 _______L2 _______L3 _______ UnloadedL1 _______L2 _______L3 _______UnloadedL1 _______L2 _______L3 _______ COMP3COMP4 LoadedL1 _______L2 _______L3 _______LoadedL1 _______L2 _______L3 _______ UnloadedL1 _______L2 _______L3 _______UnloadedL1 _______L2 _______L3 _______ COMP5COMP6 LoadedL1 _______L2 _______L3 _______LoadedL1 _______L2 _______L3 _______ UnloadedL1 _______L2 _______L3 _______UnloadedL1 _______L2 _______L3 _______ 15600-24 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Allow the oil pressure switch to trip on each compressor to ensure proper operation. After oil pressure trips, wait two minutes and check crankcase heater operation. Record amp draw of each crank case heater. C1 _______C2 _______C3 _______C4 _______C5 _______C6 _______ Adjust and record compressor’s start delay timer setting. C1 _______C2 _______C3 _______C4 _______C5 _______C6 _______ Adjust and record compressor’s HP cut out switch setting. C1 _______C2 _______C3 _______C4 _______C5 _______C6 _______ Is BAS suction transducer calibrated? yes / no Record the BAS rack suction pressure settings.Cut InCut Out Check and record the rack suction pressure.BASGauge Check and record the suction temperature.BASMeter What is the rack superheat? Have all Evaporator Pressure Regulators (EPRs)been set correctly?yes / no Note: Individual EPR settings to be recorded on case start-up documents. Check and record the ambient temperature. BASMeter Is BASdischarge transducer calibrated? yes / no Check and record the discharge pressure.BASGauge Check and record the discharge temperature.BASMeter Check and record the drop leg temperature.BASMeter Does this rack have hot water / heat reclaim?yes / no Record heat reclaim control settings.Reclaim t’statElectric heater t’stat Note: Reclaim thermostat should be set to 140ºF. Electric back up thermostats should be set to 130ºF. Check and record correct heater element voltage. Record the rack high pressure BASlockout setting. Does this rack have ambient subcooling (surge)?yes / no Check and record the BASsurge setpoints.Cut InCut Out Check for correct operation. Is system operating OK?yes / no Does this rack have subcooling?yes / no Record liquid subcooling temp BASset point. Record actual liquid temperature. Record EPR / EEPR setting (as applicable). 15600-25 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Record outlet pressure regulator (OPR)setting (if applicable). Record bypass valve setting (if applicable). Confirm correct operation. Is system operating OK?yes / no Condenser Manufacturer Condenser Model No. Is condenser clean and free from debris? yes / no Are condenser fan motors rotating correctly? yes / no Does store location require condenser fins to be coated? yes / no Does this condenser have a Variable Freq.Drive (VFD) controlling the fan motors?yes / no Confirm correct settings and operation of VFD. yes / no If no VFD, confirm correct condenser control by BAS.yes / no Confirm correct settings and operation of condenser split. yes / no Confirm correct operation of condenser drain down system. yes / no Is inverted trap installed on inlet side of condenser pipe work? yes / no Is test valve installed on inlet side of condenser pipe work? yes / no Record setting of liquid hold backvalve. Is receiver level alarm device operating? yes / no Record level of refrigerant in tank.% Are caps for all valves installed and tightened at end of startup? yes / no Record setting of rack high pressure cut out switch. Is sufficient oil in the oil reservoir? yes / no Is the oil level in each compressor correct? yes / no Is the oil clear in color and free of oxidation after minimum 24 runtime? yes / no Comments: 15600-26 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION HANDOVER DOCUMENT / SIGN OFF SHEET Rack A All sections of this document must be completed before the installation will be accepted. Store No. ___________ Location: Store Type: City, StateSC, WNM Name of technician carrying out checks and completing this formDate All system identification labels installed? yes / no All expansion valve strainers cleaned? Check three strainers per rack. yes / no List circuit numbersof strainerschecked. Are condensate drains operating correctly? yes / no Are all glass doors adjusted properly? yes / no Are cases shimmed every 4 feet? yes / no Are case to case joints sealed? yes / no At bottom penetrations in cases, is foam shaved flat and sealed?yes / no System No.Make Case No.Model Length (feet) Float Circuit? yes / no EPR SettingpsiLighting Amps BASSetting Cut InºFFan Amps BASSetting Cut OutºFDefrost Amps Superheat SettingºFTrim Heater Amps Confirm thatthe breakers to the following circuits are labeled correctly. Lightingyes / no Fansyes / no Defrostyes / no Trim Heatersyes / no 15600-27 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 System No.Make Case No.Model Length (feet) Float Circuit? yes / no EPR SettingpsiLighting Amps BASSetting Cut InºFFan Amps BASSetting Cut OutºFDefrost Amps Superheat SettingºFTrim Heater Amps Confirm that the breakers to the following circuits are labeled correctly. Lightingyes / no Fansyes / no Defrostyes / no Trim Heatersyes / no System No.Make Case No.Model Length (feet) Float Circuit?yes / no EPR SettingpsiLighting Amps BASSetting Cut InºFFan Amps BASSetting Cut OutºFDefrost Amps Superheat SettingºFTrim Heater Amps Confirm that the breakers to the following circuits are labeled correctly. Lightingyes / no Fansyes / no Defrostyes / no Trim Heatersyes / no 15600-28 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Refrigerant Data Collection Date: Store #9894CityMetairieStateLA Project Type New Rack Manufacture Other:Other: Recovered refrigerant shipped to: New Refrigerant Refrigerant RemovedNew System(s) Type SystemLBSSystemLBSSystem Model #Serial Type# Rack ARack A Rack BRack B Rack CRack C Rack DRack D Rack ERack E Rack FRack F RCU 1RCU 1 RCU 2RCU 2 RCU 3RCU 3 RCU 4RCU 4 RCU 5RCU 5 RCU 6RCU 6 RCU 7RCU 7 RCU 8RCU 8 RCU= Remote Condensing Unit Work That Increased Full ChargeNotes: SystemLBSCircuits Added Rack A Rack B Rack C Rack D Rack E Rack F All Completed Forms must be submitted to E-mail below: MCEQUIP@walmart.com 15600-29 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Refrigerant Data CollectionDate: Store #8862CityMurrayStateUT Project Type New RCU Manufacture Other:Other: Recovered refrigerant shipped to: New Refrigerant Type Refrigerant RemovedNew System(s) SystemLBSSystemLBSSystem TypeModel #Serial # RCU 1RCU 1 RCU 2RCU 2 RCU 3RCU 3 RCU 4RCU 4 RCU 5RCU 5 RCU 6RCU 6 RCU 7RCU 7 RCU 8RCU 8 RCU= Remote Condensing Unit Work that increased full chargeNotes: SystemLBSCircuits Added Rack A Rack B Rack C Rack D Rack E Rack F All Completed Forms must be submitted to E-mail below: MCEQUIP@walmart.com 15600-30 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 15600-31 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 REFRIGERATION START-UP TESTS PERFORM TESTS 10 –14 WITH MANUAL REFRIGERATION VALVES OPEN TO HRU. SET AMBIENT_SP>OA TEMP TO ACTIVATE THE HRU CONTROL SEQUIENCE AND CONFIRM SPLIT CONFIRMATION IS “IN SPLIT’ OR JUMPER THE INPUT. TEST 10 -PRESSURE DEPENDENT CONTROL SCENARIO CONDITION CRITERIA: TEST TO CONFIRM VALVE MODULATES CORRECTLY IN PRESSURE CONTROL MODE. SET REFRIGERATION LIQUID OUTLET TEMPSETPOINT TO 45 ºF TO ENSURE UNIT STAYS IN PRESSURE CONTROL. SCROLL TO VARIABLES MENU AND CONFIRM UNIT IS IN “PRESSURE CONTROL” AND VALVE POSITION MODULATES APPROPRIATEL FOR CONTROL SETPOINT OF 149#. ALLOW AMPLE TIME FOR THE VALVE TO CYCLE ABOVE AND BELOW SETPOINT TO VERIFY CONTROL OPERATION. EXPECTED RESPONSE: IF P2 < PRESS_SP THEN VALVE MODULATES TOWARDS 100% POSITION (OPEN TO HEAT EXCHANGER), IF P2>PRESS_SP THEN THE VALVE MODULATES TOWARDS 0% POSITION (OPEN TO BYPASS). EXAMPLE SETTINGS: P2 MODULATES BETWEEN 145 AND 155 | PRESS_SP= 150 | REFRIGERATION LIQUID OUTLET TEMP = 45 ºF Execution 34: Was the expected response achieved? 'Yes' indicates that there were no issues with Test 10 -Pressure Dependent Control Scenario. TEST 11 -TEMPERATURE DEPENDENT CONTROL SCENARIO CONDITION CRITERIA: TEST TO CONFIRM VALVE MODULATES CORRECTLY IN TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODE. SET REFRIGERATION LIQUID OUTLET TEMP_SP >T1 BY 10ºF TO ENSURE TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODE AND AVOID SWITCHING BACK DURING TESTING. SCROLL TO VARIABLES MENU AND CONFIRM UNIT IS IN “TEMPERATURE CONTROL” AND VALVE POSITION MODULATES TO ACHIEVE SETPOINT. NOTE: PRESSURE AT P2 WILL BE GREATER THAN PRESSURE SETPOINT OF149#. EXPECTED RESPONSE: VALVE MODULATES TOWARDS 100% POSITION (OPEN TO HEAT EXCHANGER). EXAMPLE SETTINGS: T1= 66 ºF | TEMP_SP = 76 ºF Execution 35: Was the expected response achieved? 'Yes' indicates that there were no issues withTest 11 -Temperature Dependent Control Scenario. 15600-32 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 TEST 12 -TEMPERATURE HIGH LIMIT CONDITION CRITERIA: TEST TO CONFIRM HIGH GLYCOL TEMPERATURE LIMIT FAILURE WORKS PROPERLY. SET HIGH_GLYCOL < T2 BY 20 ºF. EXPECTED RESPONSE: BV1 SHOULD OPEN TO BYPASS. PUMP SHOULD CONTINUE TO RUN. EXAMPLE SETTINGS: T2 = 60 ºF | HIGH_GLYCOL = 40 ºF Execution 36: Was the expected response achieved? 'Yes' indicates that there were no issues withTest 12 -Temperature High Limit. Verify BV1 opens to bypass in Carel Screen. (Include Photo). TEST 13 -REFRIGERANT HIGH PRESSURE LIMIT RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS TO RETURN ALL SETPOINTS BACK TO DEFAULT. ALLOW RACK PRESSURES, HRU PRESSURES AND TEMPERATURES, AND RACK REFRIGERANT LEVELS TO RETURN TO NORMAL. CONDITION CRITERIA: TEST TO CONFIRM HIGH REFRIGERANT PRESSURE LIMIT FAILURE WORKS PROPERLY. SET HIGH_PRESS_FAIL = 50 PSI. AFTER TEST REST HIGH_PRESS_FAIL TO 250 PSI. EXPECTED RESPONSE: BV1 SHOULD OPEN TO BYPASS. PUMP SHOULD CONTINUE TO RUN. EXAMPLE SETTINGS: HIGH_PRESS_FAIL = 50 PSI | P1 = 150 PSI Execution 37: Was the expected response achieved? 'Yes' indicates that there were no issues withTest 13 -Refrigerant High Pressure Limit. Verify BV1 opens to bypass in Carel Screen. (Include Photo). 15600-33 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 TEST 14-REFRIGERANT LOW PRESSURE LIMIT RETURN ALL SETPOINTS BACK TO DEFAULT. ALLOW RACK PRESSURES, HEAT RECLAIM UNIT PRESSURES AND TEMPERATURES, AND RACK REFRIGERANT LEVELS TO RETURN TO NORMAL. CONDITION CRITERIA: TEST TO CONFIRM LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE LIMIT FAILURE WORKS PROPERLY. SET LOW_PRESS_FAIL = 25 PSI GREATER THAN P1. EXPECTED RESPONSE: BV1 SHOULD OPEN TO BYPASS AND CV1 SHOULD MODULATE TO FULL BYPASS. PUMP SHOULD CONTINUE TORUN. EXAMPLE SETTINGS: LOW_PRESS_FAIL = 175 PSI | P1 = 150 PSI Execution 38: Was the expected response achieved? 'Yes' indicates that there were no issues withTest 14 -Refrigerant Low Pressure Limit. Verify BV1 opens to bypass and CV1 Modulates to bypass in CarelScreen. (Include Photo). END OF HEAT RECLAIM REFRIGERATION START-UP TESTS 15600-34 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 HEAT RECLAIM UNIT (HRU) INFORMATION Confirm and Verify: Execute the requirements as instructed. Photos: Upload Photos as issues, with the description appended. Enter: Enter requested information in the "NOTES" field. Execution 39 (include all executions in following text block): Provide a photo of the HRU nameplate; attach to an issue with the description of this line appended. 'Yes' when complete. Enter the actual Fluid Pump amperage draw: Enter the Fluid Pump overload setting: Enter the Fluid Pump suction pressure during stable operation (Include Photo): Enter the Fluid Pump discharge pressure during stable operation (Include Photo): Confirm the design or listed glycol concentration: Enter the glycol charge (gal): Enter the amount of glycol left on site (number of 5 Gal buckets): SENSOR INFORMATION Verify: Sensor and transducer calibration. Enter:Any differences greater than 3ºf or 3 psig by adding an individual issue in cxalloyfor each instance. Execution 40 (include all executions in following text block): P1) Reclaim Heat Exchange Refrigerant Inlet Pressure -Enter the instrument reading at Zero Pressure Point: P1) Reclaim Heat Exchange Refrigerant Inlet Pressure -Enter the unit controller reading at Zero Pressure Point: P1) Reclaim Heat Exchange Refrigerant Inlet Pressure -Enter the instrument reading at Operating Pressure: P1) Reclaim Heat Exchange Refrigerant Inlet Pressure -Enter the unit controller reading at Operating Pressure: Execution 41 (include all executions in following text block): P2) Reclaim Heat Exchange Refrigerant Outlet Pressure -Enter the instrument reading at Zero Pressure Point: P2) Reclaim Heat Exchange Refrigerant Outlet Pressure -Enter the unit controller reading at Zero Pressure Point: P2) Reclaim Heat Exchange Refrigerant Outlet Pressure -Enter the instrument reading at Operating Pressure: P2) Reclaim Heat Exchange Refrigerant Outlet Pressure -Enter the unit controller reading at Operating Pressure: Execution 42 (include all executions in following text block): T1) Reclaim Heat Exchange Refrigerant Outlet Temperature -Enter the instrument reading: T1) Reclaim Heat Exchange Refrigerant Outlet Temperature -Enter the unit controller reading: 15600-35 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Execution 43 (include all executions in following text block): T2) Reclaim Heat Exchange Fluid Outlet Temperature -Enter the instrument reading: T2) Reclaim Heat Exchange Fluid Outlet Temperature -Enter the unit controller reading: Execution 44 (include all executions in following text block): T3) Reclaim Heat Exchange Fluid Inlet Temperature -Enter the instrument reading: T3) Reclaim Heat Exchange Fluid Inlet Temperature -Enter the unit controller reading: Execution 45: Outdoor Air Temperature -Enter the instrument reading: Execution 46: Outdoor Air Temperature -Enter the unit controller reading: Execution 47: Did all sensors and transducers have differences less than 3ºF or X PSI (.5% of scale? Need to determine from AB)? 'Yes' indicates that there were no issues noted with the sensors and/or transducer calibration. AIR BALANCE TESTING AHU1: The AHU VFD will need to be adjusted to balance the airflow to the original design CFM of the system. The pressure drop across the AHU-DX Coil desired is shown on the HR3 sheet. Execution 48: VFD (AHU-01) -Enter the initial speed (Hz): VFD (AHU-01) -Enter the final speed (Hz): Execution 49: HEAT RECLAIM COIL (AHU- Execution 50: AHU-DX COIL (AHU-01) -after adjusting the VFD. AUTO-FLOW VALVE AHU-01 Execution 51: AUTO-FLOW VALVE AHU-01- AIR BALANCE TESTING AHU2: The AHU VFD will need to be adjusted to balance the airflow to the original design CFM of the system. The pressure drop across the AHU-DX Coil desired is shown on the HR3 sheet. Execution 52: VFD (AHU-02) -Enter the initial speed (Hz): VFD (AHU-02) -Enter the final speed (Hz): VFD (AHU-02) -Enter the final speed (Hz): Execution 53: HEAT RECLAIM COIL (AHU- Execution 54: AHU-DX COIL (AHU-02) - AUTO-FLOW VALVE AHU-02 Execution 55: AUTO-FLOW VALVE AHU-02- 15600-36 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 ABBREVIATIONS: AI –Analog Input AO–Analog Output CSP –Control Set Point CV –Control Valve DI –Digital Input DO–Digital Output DP –Differential Pressure DOAS –Dedicated Outdoor Air System FP–Fluid Pump HOA–Hand/Override/Auto HRU –Heat Reclaim Unit LED –Light Emitting Diode OA–Outdoor Air PID –Proportional-Integral-Derivative Press. –Pressure RHX –Reclaim Heat Exchanger SOO –Sequence of Operation Temp –Temperature END OF WALMART HEAT RECLAIM STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING FORM 15600-37 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning042420 SECTION 16050 -BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Electrical Identification 2.Hangers and Supports 3.Conduit Sleeves 4.Grounding and Bonding B.Related Sections 1.Section 09900 -Paints and Coatings: Field painting of hangers and supports. 2.Section 13810 –Building AutomationSystem (BAS) 3.Section 16100 –Wiring Methods 4.Section 16500 –Lighting 5.Section 16700 –Communication 6.Appendix B –Testing, Inspection, and Observation by Owner 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 1.NFPA 70E –Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Owner’s Independent Power Systems Study Consultant: The Power Systems Study Consultant (PSSC) is a consultanthired by and contracted by the Owner for the purpose of performing an arc flash risk assessment and ensuring compliance of equipment in accordance with NFPA 70E. Testing and inspection by the PSSC is specified in Appendix B (Section 16050). The PSSC shallbe the following: 1.Brown & Caldwell, Inc., Walnut Creek, CA. Contact Katie Dorety, Project Manager (858) 571-6737, KDorety@BrwnCald.com 1.4SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.PSSC will schedule with Contractor and perform sitevisits at no cost to the Contractor as specified in Appendix B (Section 16050). PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A.Nameplates: Provide laminated plastic nameplates with 3/4 inch minimum contrasting-color engraved letters. 2.2HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Manufacturers: 1.Unistrut Metal Framing,Unistrut Corporation, Wayne, MI, (800) 521-7730. 2.Erico/Caddy/Eriflex(divisions of Pentair Electrical and Fastening Solutions)(800) 753-9221. 3.Minerallac Fastening Systems, Hampshire, IL, (800) 927-3293. 16050-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Conduit and Equipment Supports: Hangers shall be Series P3000 or P3300 channels by Unistrut depending on load and span involved. Use Pipe Hangersby Minerallac , or Caddy ClipsbyEricoonly where impractical to install Unistrut Hangers. C.Attach hangers and supports to structure overhead by methods approved at job site. Do not use fasteners which penetrate the roof deck. 2.3CONDUIT SLEEVES A.Sleeves: 1.Below Grade:Galvanized, black steel or schedule 40 PVC pipe. 2.Above Grade: Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). 2.4GROUNDING AND BONDING A.Insulated Grounding Bushing: Steel with feed-thru lugs. B.Insulated Equipment Ground Wire: Copper. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Install specified materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on Drawings. B.Cutting and Patching: Where cutting is required throughwalls, floors, or ceilings, make openings no larger than required and repair affected surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. C.Nameplates: Bolt or pop-rivet nameplates to equipment. Clearly identify equipment or equipment served, such as "BALER", "COMPACTOR," etc. Install nameplates for each safety switch, contactor, time switch, pushbutton and other similar equipment. D.Electrical Equipment Supports: Support electrical equipment with hangers and supports specified above or in another approved manner where details are not indicated. E.Sleeves: 1.Below Grade: Install where conduits pass through concrete floors as shown on drawings. 2.Above Grade: Install where conduits pass through outside walls as shown on drawings.Caulk sleeves with sealant as specified in Section 07900. F.Fastening and Anchoring: Fasten conduit straps, disconnect switches, panelboards, and other equipment secured to walls and slabs with cadmium plated screws or bolts and lead cinch anchors or expansion bolts and install in holes drilled with proper size masonry drill. Properly size anchors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for load to be supported. G.Torque all conductor connection terminations to manufacturer's recommended values. Inspect panelboards for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses. 3.2GROUNDING A.General: Ground all metallic conduits, supports, cabinets, equipment, system neutrals, metal building structures, and other items required to be grounded in accordance with the NEC and other applicable codes and as indicated on drawings. B.Equipment Grounding: 1.Make conduits electrically continuous using proper fittings, connections, grounding bushings, etc. 16050-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 2.Install insulating grounding bushings on all conduit connections 1 1/4 inch and larger and where indicated on Drawings. 3.Install insulated equipment ground wires in all raceways. C.Concrete Encased Electrodes: Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install electrodes, jumpers, and approved fittings in accordance with Grounding Electrode Detail . D.Ground Rods: If ground rods are required, install two 5/8 inch minimum diameter Copperweld rods driven vertically not less than 12 feet apart and each with 8 feet of length in contact with the soil. 3.3TESTING A.Upon completion of installation, perform continuity tests on power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage. Verify proper phasing connections. B.Test receptacles with circuit tester to ensure proper polarity, grounding, and continuity of circuits. C.Load test GFCI receptacles. END OF SECTION 16050-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning103020 SECTION 16100 -WIRING METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Wire and Cable. 2.Conduit 3.Outlet boxes and Conduit Fittings. 4.Wiring Devices. 5.Wire Connectors. 6.Fire Alarm/Security Alarm System Rough-In B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 13810 -Building AutomationSystem (BAS) 2.Section 16050 -Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: Hangers and Supports 3.Section 16500 –Lighting 4.Section 16700 –Communication 5.Appendix A –Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor. a.General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect products. b.Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products. 1.2REFERENCES A.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1.NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code (NEC). B.American Society for Testing Material (ASTM) 1.ASTM D698 -Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft 2.ASTM D1557 -Laboratory CompactionCharacteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-bf/ft3) C.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1.NEMA VE 1 –Metal Cable Tray Systems D.Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1.UL 1569 -Metal Clad Cables 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Final Power Plan Review Meeting: 1.A Final Power Plan Review Meeting shall be held on-site to review the Final Power Plan and scheduling requirements. The mandatory attendees shall be the Construction Manager, General Contractor, Electrical Contractor, Security Services Representative, CCTV Representative, and Store Planning Field Manager. The meeting shall be scheduled by the General Contractor approximately 14 days after receipt of Final Power Plan Drawings. At least ten days advance notification shall be given to all attendees. 2.The purpose of the meeting will be to review the Final Power Plan requirements and to schedule completion dates for various critical components of the Final Power Plan. 3.The Construction Manager will review the PCOB and EWA process at this meeting, as itapplies to the Final Power Plan requirements. 1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 16100-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.Receive, store and handle products in accordance with the requirements of Appendix A –Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor. B.Arrange with Owner for delivery of Ownerfurnished materials at such stage of construction as will expedite the work. Products will be supplied to the job site complete and ready for installation. Allow minimum of four weeks for delivery. C.Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of Owner furnished materials to prevent damage. Keep materials dry and fully protected from weather. D.Upon receipt of shipment of Owner furnished materials,check contents of shipment against bill of material furnished by vendor. Report any shortages or damage to the vendor immediately so that replacements can be ordered and/or freight claims can be filed. Note damage on Bill of Lading in order to substantiate freight claims. E.All deliveries shall be staged and scheduled to correspond to construction schedule and to minimize on-site storage. F.Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of all materials to prevent damage. Keep materials dry and fully protected from weather PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.Owner will furnish and install fire and security alarm systemas specified in Appendix A Section 16100. 1.Contractor shall provide rough-in as specified herein. 2.2WIRE AND CABLE A.Electrical Components and Devices: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA70, Article100, by a nationally recognized testing agency and marked for use. B.Wire and cable shall bear UL label and shall conform to standards established for such materials by nationally recognized agencies. C.Provide code gauge, soft annealed copper wire, not less than 98 percent conductivity and of 600 volt class. D.Conductors: 1.Insulation type shall be one of the following: a.THHN b.THWN c.XHHW d.XHHW-2 2.Type: a.#10 and smaller –stranded or solid. b.#8 and larger -stranded E.Interlocked Armor Metal Clad (MC) Cable: Contractor's option as allowed by authorities having jurisdiction. MC cable shall have the following characteristics: 1.Aluminum MC-Lite or Standard MC. 2.Minimum size conductor, #12 AWG copper, including green insulated equipment ground, sized in accordance with the NEC. 3.Overall moisture resistant tape. 4.Galvanized steel or aluminum interlocked cladding. 5.Manufactured in accordance with UL 1569. F.Wire smaller than #12 AWG not permitted unless otherwise noted. #14 AWG, type MTW or TFF permitted for 16100-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 signal and pilot control circuits unless otherwise noted. G.Color code: SYSTEMNEUTRALISOLATED PHASEGROUND VOLTAGECOLORGROUND 208/120VwhiteA-black greengreen W/ yellow tracer B-red C-blue 240/120VwhiteA-black greengreen W/ yellow tracer B-red 480/277Vlt. grayor white withA-browngreengreen W/ yellow tracer colored stripe otherB-orange than yellowC-yellow H.Color code #6AWG and smaller phase and neutral conductors by continuous outer covering. Conductors #4 AWG and larger may be color coded by tape. Tapeshall have minimum of two complete wraps around conductor at 6 inches from terminations, splices, and junction points. I.Identify circuit numbers with synthetic cloth or plastic labels at splice and junction points. 2.3CONDUIT A.Conduit types shall be as follows and shall bear UL or ETL label: 1.Galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit (GRC): Hot-dip galvanized. 2.Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Hot-dip galvanized. 3.Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Hot-dip galvanized. 4.Schedule 40 heavy-wall PVC for all underground conduit runs. 5.Flexible Metal Conduit: Zinc-coated steel or Aluminum. 6.Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit with PVC jacket. 7.MC Cable: Steel or Aluminum Cladding. B.Conduit Sizes: Size conduit in accordance with NEC unless noted otherwise on Drawings, but not less than the following: 1.Alarm and Data Systems: 3/4 inch. 2.Flexible Metal Conduit: For connection of recessed light fixtures in suspended ceilings, 3/8 inch. For connection of other equipment subject to vibration: 1/2 inch. 3.Underground Conduit in Parking Lot: 1 inch. 4.Other Uses: 1/2 inch. C.Contact Information: 1.Prime Conduit MWE Inc. 816-842-9283 or 800-678-3075 2.Vikimatic 800-345-8454 3.Innerduct 800-332-8114 2.4OUTLET BOXES AND CONDUIT FITTINGS A.Outlet boxes and conduit fittings shall bear the label of a nationally recognized testing laboratory and be rated for environmental conditions where installed. B.Boxes: Comply with NEC in regard to maximum allowable number of conductors . 1.Interior Boxes: Hot-dip galvanized, 4 inches minimum octagon or square, unless otherwise noted. Provide single or multiple gang outlet boxes as required for flush installation in drywall 16100-3 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 construction. Provide masonry boxes for outlets installed flush in concrete unit masonry. Provide single surface-mounted outlet boxes for utility type boxes. 2.Exterior Boxes: Provide masonry boxes for outlets installed flush in concrete unit masonry. 3.Outlet Boxes: Suitable for supporting lighting fixtures if intended for that purpose. 4.Ceiling Fan Boxes: Rated and listed for mounting ceiling fans. C.Conduit Fittings: 1.EMT Fittings for Dry Locations: Diecast or steel set screw type. 2.EMT Fittings For Wet or Damp Locations: Steel Compression type. 3.GRC, IMC, or EMT Box Connectors For Wet or Damp Locations: Weather-tight hubs. 4.Threadless GRC or IMC Fittings: Not permitted. 5.GRC or IMC connectors for dry locations. 6.PVC Fittings: Solvent weld type for PVC conduit. 2.5WIRING DEVICES A.See subsection L for deviceand cover platefinishes. B.Branch Circuit Switches: Specification grade rated 20A 120/277V AC as follows: TypeHubbellPass & SeymourCooperLevitonKason Single Pole HBL1221PS20AC122211221-2 3-WayHBL1223PS20AC322231223-2 4-WayHBL1224PS20AC422241224-2 DimmersAcuity Sensor Switch: SPODMRD EZ WH DimmerLutron Sensor with 0-10V Dimming: MRF2S-8SDV010 Occupancy Lutron Companion Switch: PJ2-3BRL-GWH-L01 Sensor.Lutron Companion Ceiling Occupancy Sensor: LRF2-OCR2B-P Single Pole AD1277-1Sensor Switch: Not OSSMT-MD-G Occupancy WSX PDTAvailable Sensor (Dual Technology) Double Pole AD1277-2Sensor Switch: Not Not Available Occupancy WSX-PDT-2PAvailable Sensor (Dual Technology) Weatherproof, Not Not Not Not Available11901A00005 Low AvailableAvailableAvailable Temperature (Walk-In Coolers & Freezers) Weatherproof, Not Sensor SwitchNot Not Available Double Pole, AvailableWSX-2P-LTAvailable Low Temperature (Refrigerated Prep Areas) C.Receptacles -Straight Blade Nylon Grounding -Type Outlet Devices: Specification grade as follows: TypeHubbellPass & SeymourCooperLeviton Single Receptacle 20A 125V (5-20R)HBL5361536153615361 Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V (5-20R)HBL5362536253625362 16100-4 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V Isolated IG5362IG5362IG5362RN5362-IG Ground (5-20R) GFCI Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V (5-GF20LA2095VGF207899 20R) GFCI Weather Resistant Duplex GFTR202095TRWRWRVGF20W7899 Receptacle 20A 125V (5-20R) Duplex Receptacle Tamper Resistant Not AvailableNot AvailableNot AvailableTBR20 20A 125V (5-20R) Single Receptacle 15A 250V 2 pole 3 HBL5661I5671-I5661V5661-I Wire Grounded (6-15R) Single Receptacle 20A 250V 2 pole 3 HBL5461I5871I54615461 Wire Grounded (6-20R) Single Receptacle 30A 250V 2 pole 3 HBL933038015700N5372 Wire Grounded (6-30R) Single Receptacle 20A 125/250V 3 pole HBL841038205759Not Available 4 Wire Grounded (14-20R) Single Receptacle 30A 125/250V 3 pole HBL9430A38645744N278 4 Wire Grounded (14-30R) Single Receptacle 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 HBL8420Not AvailableNot AvailableNot Available pole 4 Wire Grounded (15-20R) Single Receptacle 30A 3 Phase 250V 3 HBL8430A57408430N8430 pole 4 Wire Grounded (15-30R) Single Receptacle 50A 3 Phase 250V 3 HBL8450A57508450N8450 pole 4 Wire Grounded (15-50R) D.Receptacles -Locking Nylon Grounding -Type Outlet Devices: Specification grade as follows: TypeHubbellPass & SeymourCooperLeviton Single Locking Receptacle 15A 125V HBL47104710CWL515R4710 (L5-15R) Single Locking Receptacle 15A 125V IG4710IG4710IGL515R4710-IG Isolated Ground (L5-15R) Duplex Locking Receptacle 15A 125V HBL4700I470047004700 (L5-15R) Duplex Locking Receptacle 15A 125V IG4700AIG4700IG47004700-IG Isolated Ground (L5-15R) Single Locking Receptacle 20A 125V HBL2310L520-RCWL520R2310 (L5-20R) Single Locking Receptacle 20A 125V IG2310IGL520-RIGL520R2310-IG Isolated Ground (L5-20R) Single Locking Receptacle 30A 125V HBL2610L530-RCWL530R2610 (L5-30R) Single Locking Receptacle 30A 125V IG2610IGL530-RIGL530R2610-IG Isolated Ground (L5-30R) Single Locking Receptacle 20A 250V 2 HBL2320L620-RCWL620R2320 Pole 3 Wire Grounded (L6-20R) Single Locking Receptacle 30A 250V 2 HBL2620L630-RCWL630R2620 Pole 3 Wire Grounded (L6-30R) Single Locking Receptacle 30A 250V 2 IG2620IGL630-RIGL630R2620-IG Pole 3 Wire Isolated Ground (L6-30R) Single Locking Receptacle 20A HBL2410L1420-RCWL1420R2410 125/250V 3 pole 4 Wire Grounded (L14- 20R) 16100-5 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Single Locking Receptacle 30A HBL2710L1430-RCWL1430R2710 125/250V 3 pole 4 Wire Grounded (L14- 30R) Single Locking Receptacle 50A 600V 2 HBL3771377137713771 pole 3 Wire Grounded (Non-Nema) Single Locking Receptacle 50A CS6369CS6369CS6369CS63-69 125/250V 3 pole 4 Wire Grounded (Non-Nema) E.Connectors -Cord mounted Locking Nylon Grounding -Type to match Plugs as follows: TypeHubbellPass & SeymourCooperLeviton Locking Connector 15A 125V (L5-15R)HBL4729CPSL515-C4731N4729-C Locking Connector 20A 125V (L5-20R)HBL2313L520-CCWL520C2313 Locking Connector 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 HBL2423L1520-CCWL1520C2423 Pole 4 Wire Grounded (L15-20R) F.Connectors -Cord mounted Corrosion Resistant Locking Nylon Grounding -Type to match Plugs as follows: TypeHubbellPass & SeymourCooperLeviton Corrosion Resistant Locking Connector HBL23CM13CRL520-CCRL520C23CM-13 20A 125V (L5-20R) Corrosion Resistant Locking Connector HBL24CM13CRL1420-CCRL1420CNot Available 20A 125/250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded (L14-20R) Corrosion Resistant Locking Connector HBL24CM23Not AvailableCRL1520CNot Available 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded (L15-20R) Corrosion Resistant Locking Connector HBL28CM13Not AvailableNot Not Available 30A 3 Phase 120/208V 4 Pole 5 Wire Available Grounded (L21-30R) G.Plugs -Cord mounted Nylon Grounding -Type to match Outlet Devices as follows: TypeHubbellPass & SeymourCooperLeviton Plug 20A 125V 2 Pole 3 Wire Grounded HBL5366CAPS5366SSAN5366AN5366-CA (5-20P) Plug 20A 250V 2 Pole 3 Wire Grounded HBL5466CAPS5466SSAN5466AN5466-CA (6-20P Plug 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire HBL8421CNot AvailableNot Not Available Grounded (15-20P)Available Plug 30A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire HBL8432C5741-AN8432AN8432-P Grounded (15-30P) Plug 50A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire HBL8452C5751-AN8452AN8452-P Grounded (15-50P) H.Plugs -Cord mounted Locking Nylon Grounding -Type to match Outlet Devices as follows: TypeHubbellPass & SeymourCooperLeviton Locking Plug 15A 125V 2 Pole 3 Wire HBL4720CPSL515-P4721N4720-C Grounded (L5-15P) Locking Plug 20A 250V 2 Pole 3 Wire HBL2321L620-PCWL620P2321 Grounded (L6-20P) Locking Plug 30A 250V 2 Pole 3 Wire HBL2621L630-PCWL630P2621 Grounded (L6-30P) 16100-6 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Locking Plug 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole HBL2421L1520-PCWL1520P2421 4 Wire Grounded (L15-20P) I.Plugs -Cord mounted Corrosion Resistant Locking Nylon Grounding -Type to match Outlet Devices as follows: TypeHubbellPass & SeymourCooperLeviton Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 20A HBL23CM11CRL520-PCRL520P23CM-11 125V 2 Pole 3 Wire Grounded (L5-20P) Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 20A HBL24CM11CRL1420-PCRL1420PNot Available 125/250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded (L14- 20P) Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 20A 3 HBL24CM21Not AvailableCRL1520PNot Available Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded (L15-20P) Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 30A 3 HBL28CM11Not AvailableNot Not Available Phase 120/208V 4 Pole 5 Wire Available Grounded (L21-30P) J.Pin & Sleeve -Insulated Water Tight -Type Outlet Devices: Specification grade as follows: TypeHubbellPass & SeymourCooperLeviton Water Tight Receptacle 30A 250V 2 HBL330R6WPS330R6WCD330R6W330R6W Pole 3 Wire Grounded (Non-Nema) Water Tight Receptacle 60A 250V 2 HBL360R6WPS360R6WCD360R6W360R6W Pole 3 Wire Grounded (Non-Nema) K.Boots: Weatherproof Boots for Locking Plug and Connector Bodies -Type to match Devices as follows: TypeHubbellPass & SeymourCooperLeviton Corrosion Resistant Boots for Locking HBL60CM31 CRL2030-RBP BM1 & 6031-Y & 6032-Y Plug and Connector 20/30A 125V (L5-&& CRL2030-BM2 20)HBL60CM32RBC Corrosion Resistant Boots for Locking HBL60CM35 CRL2030-RBP BL1 & BL26033-Y & 6034-Y Plug and Connector 20/30A 125/250V 3 && CRL2030- Pole 4 Wire Grounded (L14-20)HBL60CM36RBC Corrosion Resistant Boots for Locking HBL60CM35 CRL2030-RBP BL1 & BL26033-Y & 6034-Y Plug and Connector 20/30A 3 Phase && CRL2030- 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded (L15-20)HBL60CM36RBC Corrosion Resistant Boots for Locking HBL60CM35 CRL2030-RBP BL1 & BL26033-Y & 6034-Y Plug and Connector 30A 3 Phase && CRL2030- 120/208V 4 Pole 5 Wire Grounded (L21-HBL60CM36RBC 30) L.Cover Plates: 1.Nylon cover plates for flush mounted devices. 2.Galvanized steel plates where devices are installed on exposed fittings or boxes. 3.302 stainless steel cover plates for recessed outlet boxes in masonry walls. 4.Blank cover plate on all boxes without device. 16100-7 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 TypePass & Seymour Thomas & HubbellIntermatic Betts Single gang GFCI duplex receptacle, weatherproof, Red Dot WP26MWP1010MWIUCAST while-in-use, lockable vertical metallic cover plateCKMUVXD1 Single gang GFCI duplex receptacle, weatherproof, Red Dot WP26MHWP1010MWIUCAST while-in-use, lockable horizontal metallic cover plateCKMUXD1 Single gang deep box twistlockreceptacle, Red Dot WP7DWP1250MNot weatherproof, while-in-use, lockable vertical metallic CKLSVLUVXDAvailable cover plate Double gang two GFCI duplex receptacles, Red Dot Not WP1030MNot weatherproof, while-in-use, lockable vertical metallic 2CKUAvailableXDAvailable cover plate 5.Unless otherwise noted, wiring devices and cover plates shall be whitenylon. 6.Blank Cover Plates: On boxes without devices or fixtures, provide same type and color as those installed on devices in the same room or area. 7.Isolated ground receptacles: Orange nylon cover plates with circuit number printed in 3/16 inch black lettering on clear adhesive label (Brady label or equal) adhered to plate. 8.Cover plates for wiring devices mounted in FRP or NRP panels shall match the color of FRP or NRP panels. 2.6WIRE CONNECTORS A.Splices: , or equal connectors of proper size. 3M No. 567 in- 1.#8 AWG and Smaller: Ideal Wingnut,3M Scotchlok line self-stripping connectors will be permitted only at ballast lead connections in fluorescent light rows. 2.#6 AWG and Larger: Solderless lugs and connectors. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION -GENERAL A.Install specified materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B.Where switches are ganged, provide permanently installed steel barriers between switches. Where orprovide separate boxes and separate coverplates for each circuit. C.Access to Equipment: Coordinate access doors to allow for easy access of equipment for repair and maintenance. 16100-8 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 3.2HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Hangers and Supports are specified in Section 16050. 3.3WIRE A.Tie wrap groups of conductors in switchboards and panel boards. 3.4CONDUIT A.Installation: 1.Install conduit concealed, except in unfinished areas and where indicated on Drawings. 2.Support conduit by means of specified hangers. 3.Clean PVC conduit per manufacturer's recommendations before application of solvent cement. 4.Coordinate flashings where conduit penetrates roof membrane. 5.Paint metallic conduit under concrete slab or where installed in contact with earth. Apply two 6 mil coats of PVC or Asphalt paint continuously along entire length of conduit prior to installation below grade. Do not run conduit in concrete slab. 6.Install flexible metal conduit or liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connections to dry-type transformers, baler, air compressors, HVAC equipment, motors and other vibrating equipment. 7.Coordinate installation of conduit in masonry work. 8.Do not install conduit under slab unless indicated on Drawings. Conduit installed below slab shall be galvanized rigid metal (GRC), intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or Schedule 40 PVC. Provide exterior coated GRC bends and elbows for all underground conduit. 9.Route above grade conduit parallel or perpendicular to building lines. 10.Maintain minimum of 6 inches clearance at flues and heat sources. 11.Install GRC conduitwhenpenetrating from belowgrade outdoors or penetrating concrete slabs, Including elbow. 12.Install GRC elbow on all conduit runs below grade that have 45º bends or greater. 13.Install double locknut and bushings when terminating GRC or IMC conduit, except where conduit terminates in threaded hub. 14.Install insulated throat bushings on all PVC conduit runs. B.Location: 1.Galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit (GRC): Permitted for general exposed or concealed work above or below grade. 2.Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Permitted for general exposed or concealed work above or below grade. 3.Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Permitted for general exposed or concealed work above grade. 4.Polyvinyl Chloride rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC) unless noted otherwise on drawings: Permitted for below-grade use when permitted by local governing codes.. 5.Flexible Metal Conduit: Permitted in attic spaces andexposed in lengths of 6 feet or less for connections to equipment in dry areas. Not permitted for general exposed or concealed work. For connection of recessed light fixtures in suspended ceilings and connection of other equipment subject to vibration. 6.Liquid tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Permitted exposed in lengths of 6 feet or less for connections to food service equipment, refrigeration equipment and other vibrating equipment in damp locations where rigid connections are not suitable. 7.MC Cable: Permitted only where concealed inside partitions and above finished ceilings. Cable exposed on walls or in open bar joist areas will not be permitted. Cut cable with manufacturer's recommended armor stripping tool. Provide manufacturers approved connectors. 3.5WIRING DEVICES A.Replace outlets or devices improperly located or installed. Set outlets and devices plumb or horizontal and extend to, but not project above, finished surface. B.Unless otherwise noted, receptacles, switches, and other wiring devices shall not be mounted back-to-back. 16100-9 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 C.Install receptacles so that the ground prong is in the down position. 3.6WIRE CONNECTIONS A.Make final connection of motors, starters, disconnects, and other items furnished under other Sections. 3.7FIRE AND SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM ROUGH-IN A.Install fire alarm/security alarm conduit system,raceways,120 volt supply connections, and fire alarm grounding conductor. 3.8PROTECTION A.Protect installed products from damage until completion of construction operations. END OF SECTION 16100-10 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning042420 SECTION 16410 -ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Safety disconnect switchesand enclosed circuit breakers. B.Related Requirements: 1.16100 -Wiring Methods. 1.2REFERENCES A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 1.NEMA 250 –Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum). PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1SAFETY DISCONNECTSWITCHES A.Requirements: 1.Furnish and install all disconnect switches required for full code compliance except where switches are furnished with equipment specified in other DIVISIONS of the specifications in which case, install only. 2.Fusible Switch Assemblies: Shall be NEMA KS 1, Type HD (Heavy Duty) horsepower rated, load interrupter switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips shall accommodate Class R unless indicated otherwise. Fusible switches shall be UL rated 200,000 AIC with Class R,J or L fuses. 3.Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: Shall be NEMA KS 1, Type HD (Heavy Duty) load interrupter switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. 4.Switches controlling or disconnecting motor loads shall be horsepower rated and approved for motor control service except where NEC 430-109 exceptions apply. 5.Line and load terminals of disconnect switches rated 100 amperes or less shall be rated for 75 degrees C. 6.Provide electrical interlock to de-energize control wiring as required. 7.All disconnect switches shall be capable of being locked open. 8.Controller disconnect switches shall be within sight of the controller. If the disconnect switch of any controller is out of site of, or more than 50 feet from, its related motor, then a disconnecting switch shall be added within sight of the motor. The switch at the motor may be deleted only where allowed by the NEC andwhere approved by the Engineer. 9.Install fuses specified in SECTION 16402 –LOW VOLTAGE SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION in all fusible switches. 10.Provide adhesive label on inside door of each switch indicating UL fuse class and size for replacement. 11.Switches used for service entrance shall have a UL Service Entrance Label. B.Enclosures: 1.NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosures shall be used for interior dry locations unless otherwise indicated. 2.NEMA Type 3R raintight enclosures shall be used for exterior locations unless otherwise indicated. 2.2ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 A.References: 1.UL489 -Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. 2.UL50 -Cabinets and Boxes. 3.NEMA 250 -Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. B.Requirements: 1.Provide enclosed circuit breakers where indicated on the Drawings and as required by the specifications. 2.Circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal magnetic type unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 3.Circuit breakers enclosures shall have an integrated equipment rating suitable for the available fault current. 4.Circuit breaker enclosures identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for Service Entrance application. 5.Circuit breaker operating handles shall be operable from outside ofenclosures and shall be capable of being locked in the open position. 6.Reference SECTION 16442 –BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS for circuit breaker specifications. C.Enclosures: 1.NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosures shall be used for interior dry locations unless otherwise indicated. 2.NEMA Type 3R raintight enclosures shall be used for exterior locations unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Install motor and circuit disconnectsin accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Applicable Codes shall take precedence over drawing details. B.Provide properly sized grounding lug and terminations for all disconnectswitches. END OF SECTION 16410-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec -Store Planning042420 SECTION 16500 -LIGHTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Contractor furnished and installed Lighting fixtures. 2.Owner furnished lighting for installation by Contractor. B.Related Requirements: 1.Appendix A –Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor a.General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect prod- ucts. b.Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner fur- nished products. 1.2QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fixtures and their electrical components will bearthe label of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 1.3DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Storage and Protection: Provide facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Keep materials dry and protected from weather. Fixtures stored outside without a permanent overhead roof and shelter shall be replaced at Contractor expense.Examples of approved storage include drop trailers, storage inside warehouse, or other Owner Construction Manager approved storage area meeting these criteria. Fixtures showing signs of rust or weathering shall be replaced at Contractor’s expense. B.Contact selected distributor 4weeksprior to desired delivery date to arrange for delivery of lighting fixtures. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1CONTRACTOR FURNISHED AND INSTALLED LIGHTING FIXTURES A.Contractor shall provide light fixturesas indicated on drawings. B.Contractor Furnished Lighting Approved Vendors: 1.Hunzicker Brothers, (800) 324-1026 2.Haines, Jones & Cadbury, Inc., (800) 459-7099 (614) 421-3327(GE Fixtures ONLY) 3.Loeb Electric, 2.2OWNER FURNISHED LIGHTING FIXTURESFOR INSTALLATION BY CONTRATOR A.Appendix A –Products and Work by Owner or Separate ContractorSection 16500 and Lighting Fixture Schedule. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Install lighting fixtures, lamps, lighting panels, and connections in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on Drawings. 1.LED Fixtures will arrive with protective film. Film shall not be removed untilall painting anddeep cleaning is completed. Removal of film prior to the cleaning procedure may result in damage and replacement at Contractor’s expense. 16500-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 B.Coordinate exact mounting location of light fixtures with building structure and other trades prior to installation. Continuous rows shall be installed straight and true. C.Attach fixtures to ceiling grid. Install four to six feet of flexible conduit from recessed fixtures installed in lay-in ceiling grid systems to outlet boxes supported from building structural system. D.Maintain all light fixtures and lamps during construction, and coordinate replacement of any defective lamps with Owner’s lighting vendor prior to Certification of Substantial Completion. Notify Owner’s lighting vendor immedi- ately of any damaged fixtures or lamps delivered to the jobsite and make arrangements to have them replaced. E.Verify ceiling and wall details. Install fixtures complete with proper mounting arrangements for ceiling or wall construction encountered. F.Lighting fixtures and lamps shall be clean and free of building paint over-spray one week prior to possession. G.Provide all additional hardware required to complete installation such as nuts, bolts, threaded rods and Unistrut channels. 3.2MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION A.Provide material and labor to deepcleannewlighting fixtures with anti-static cleaning fluid. Replace lamps with building paint overspray one week prior to possession at Contractor’s expense. B.Maintain lighting fixtures, ballasts, LED drivers,andlamps during construction, possession, and until store Grand Opening. Coordinate replacement of defective, lost, or damaged equipment with vendor. C.Owner Responsibility (Including Vendor): 1.Costs for replacement for normal failure covered by warranty of any fixture, lamp, or ballast prior to Grand Opening. Evaluation of abnormally high failure percentage and replacement covered under warranty will be provided by vendor on site. 2.Costs for replacement of parts damaged during shipment. Charges will be made to shipping carrier or respon- sible party. D.Contractor Responsibility: 1.Coordinate vendor on-site evaluation of abnormal component failures of ballast and lamps at least two weeks prior to Grand Opening. Provide labor for routine and normal maintenance of equipment including trouble- shooting and determination of lighting failure. 2.Material and labor costs for replacement of loss, breakage, or other damage due to fault of Contractor includ- ing lamps. 3.Contact vendor to order replacement parts in time to have all fixtures fully operational prior to Grand Open- ing. E.Replacement Procedure -General: 1.Immediately notify vendor and request replacement of damaged fixtures, ballasts or lamps delivered to the jobsite. 2.If shipping damage is concealed, notify carrier and vendor within 15 days of acceptance of the freight. Pro- vide vendor a copy of the written notification sent to the carrier. F.Additional Ballast Replacement Procedure: 1.Order replacement ballast(s)or LED driver(s)from vendor. Request Return Authorization number from ven- dor to return defective ballast no later than Grand Opening. 2.Return all defective ballast(s) or LED driver(s)to vendor. Vendor will arrange pickup and return, including shipping costs, of defectiveballast(s) or LED driver(s). Cost for ballast(s) or LED driver(s) notreturned within the specified time frame or returned but not defective will be automatically charged to Contractor. END OF SECTION 16500-2 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 UniSpec II-Store Planning013120 SECTION 16700 -COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Owner Furnished and Installed Voice/Data System. B.Related Requirements: 1.16100 -Wiring Methods: Outlet boxes and conduit fittings. 2.Appendix A –Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor. a.General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect prod- ucts. b.Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner fur- nished products. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.The followingproducts will be Owner furnished and installed as specified in Appendix A (Section 16700). 1.Voice/Data cable equipment. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Install Voice/Data conduit system, Voice/Data grounding conductor, and signal systems as indicated on Drawings. B.Voice/Data Conduit System: Install conduit system as indicated on Drawings, including: 1.Voice/Data service conduit. 2.Other conduits as indicated on Drawings. Install #14 AWG soft iron pull wire or heavy nylon cord in each conduit for pulling the Voice/Data cable to each termination point. 3.Install outlet boxes conforming to requirements of Section 16100. Include cover plates. END OF SECTION 16700-1 #04568-221 Blair, NE05/19/21 Walmart Building Performance Verification Program Sample notes…. Refer to attached Observation Log Open FPT Deviations List. AHU Gas Heat was not tested beyond Stage 1 because outside air temp was too warm. Unable to test RTU cooling and AHU cooling/dehumid because outside air temp was too cold. Walmart Mechanical Services CM George Bailey confirmed unit heater and light dimming operation during remote retest with BPT on February 29, 2012. Walmart Building Performance Verification Program 65 45 DEHUMIDIFICATION MODE HEATING MODE Î AMBIENT CALL HEATING MODE Î ZONE CALL Walmart Building Performance Verification Program When test is complete, release all overrides When test is complete, release all overrides When test is complete, release all overrides When test is complete, release all overrides When test is complete, release all overrides When test is complete, release all overrides